Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout939 Caroline St Technical MRI - BuildingTECHNICAL.. Permit 07 L Z3 Address c Project description 0 u m o i c le,k ca renie .Rv s k vae1■e,o, S ce -4-(c? a_ccert ay. PI Rai un i i" a- rte, v, I Av, veamPyff Ro rr Date the permit was finaled 05 -1(0-0S Number of technical pages 7 Co M A H L U M architects PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME I DIVISIONS 0 14, 15 16 BID DOCUMENTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER 939 CAROLINE PORT ANGELES WA 98362 JVV MICHAE ,STATE OF A ES Q INGTc 7 ISSUE DATE OCTOBER 8 2007 PROJECT NUMBER 2007517 00 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 00001 PAGE 1 of 2 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 IDENTIFICATION A. Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI B Architect's Project Number 2007517 00 1.2 PROJECT ADDRESS A. Olympic Medical Center 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 1.3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. Tenant improvement work for converting and fmishmg an existing shell space of approximately 900 SF for a MRI room, control room and associated equipment room located within the First Floor of the new addition at Olympic Medical Center B Refer to Section 01010 Summary of Work. 1.4 OWNER A. Olympic Medical Center 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 PART 2 THE DOCUMENTS 2.1 DATE A. The Bid Documents are dated October 8, 2007 2.2 TITLE A. `Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI' PART 3 THE DESIGN TEAM 3.1 CERTIFICATION A. I hereby certify that this project specification was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly registered architect under the laws of the State of Washington. V II L_l_Y S TAT •F W SHINGTON INTRODUCTION MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 00001 PAGE 2 of 2 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.2 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Jim Paapke, Admm. Director of Facilities Mgmt jpaapkena.olvmnicmedical. org 3.3 ARCHITECT A. Mahlum Architects, Inc. Mike Yates, Principal Gary Signs, Project Manager Qsiens( mahlum.com 3.4 ARCHITECT'S CONSULTANTS A. Structural Engineer Martens Chan/AHBL Steve Sandhorst ssandhorstaahbl.com B Mechanical Engineer Coffman Engineers Ralph Leitner rosenbaumna coffinan.com C. Electrical Engineer Sparlmg Lee Swanson l swanson@snarline. com D Finish Hardware Adams Consulting and Estimating Gordon Adams gadams @w- link.net 3.5 OWNER'S CONSULTANT EQUIPMENT VENDOR A. RF Magnetic Shielding ETS- Lindgren Michael Bresnahan, Project Manager Tech. Support Michael.bresnanhan@ETS-lindgren.com B. MRI Equipment GE Healthcare Rocky Palombo, Project Manager Installation rocky palombo @ge.com END OF SECTION 00001 INTRODUCTION 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 (360) 417 7148 (360) 417 -8627 (fax) 71 Columbia Street Seattle, Washington 98104 (206) 441 -4151 (206) 441 -0478 (fax) 400 Mercer Street, Suite 410 Seattle, Washington 98109 (206) 298 -9818 (206) 298 -9876 (fax) 1601 5 Avenue, Suite 900 Seattle, Washington 98101 (206) 623 -0717 (206) 624 -3775 (fax) 720 Olive Way Suite 1400 Seattle, Washington 98101 (206) 667-0555 (206) 667 -0554 (fax) 2337 North 57 Street Seattle, Washington 98103 (206) 528 -0244 (206) 528 -0138 (fax) 7352 Giles Drive P 0 Box 146 Mmocqua, Wisconsin 54548 (630) 912 1092 (630) 912 1192 (fax) GE Healthcare Technologies Milwaukee, Wisconsin (360) 658 -4807 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8. 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 00010 PAGE 1 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI RDESCRIPTION OF CONTENTS The Contract Documents contain the following. VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL. CONTENTS AND PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS Section Division 0 Division 1 Divisions 2 14 Division 15 Division 16 VOLUME 2 PROJECT DRAWINGS Bidding Requirements and Contracting Requirements General Requirements Building and Site Technical Specification Mechanical Technical Specifications Electrical Technical Specifications TABLE OF CONTENTS See Project Information Sheet AO 1 1 for Drawing Sheet Index Division A Architectural Drawings Division S Structural Drawings Division M Mechanical Drawings Division E Electrical Drawings RF Shielding MRI Vendor Equipment Shop Drawings (for Reference Only) VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL Unit Number Description No. of Pages DIVISION 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Section 00001 Introduction 2 00010 Table of Contents 4 00100 Invitation to Bid 3 00200 Instructions to Bidders 3 AIA A70I Instructions to Bidders 6 00301 I Bid Form Part I 2 00301 II Bid Form Part II 5 00450 Bid Bond 00510 Form of Agreement 3 AIA A101 'Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor 6 00515 Contract Transmittal 1 00520 Notice to Proceed 2 00700 General Conditions 13 AIA A201 'General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 39 00830 Prevailing Wages 1 Prevailing Wage Rates for Clallam County 9 Benefit Code Key 5 00900 Addenda 1 DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work 4 01011 Contract Time and Sequence 4 01014 Project Finishes and Openings 2 01026 Payment Procedures 2 Affidavit for Payment of Retained Percentage (MA 1060) 1 Certificate of Substantial Completion (MA1065) 1 01027 Schedule of Values. 2 01030 Base Bid and Alternates 2 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 00010 PAGE 2 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI TABLE OF CONTENTS 01036 Change Order Procedures. 2 Architects Supplemental Instruction (MA1036) 1 Construction Change Directive (MA1037) 1 Change Order Proposal (MA 1038) 1 Change Order (MA 1039) 1 01040 Coordination 4 01045 Cutting and Patching 4 01064 Seismic Anchoring 4 01065 Code and Permit Requirements 2 01091 Reference Standards 11 01095 Explanations. Definitions, Abbreviations and Symbols 5 01 121 Hazardous Materials Procedures 2 01 140 Hospital Project Procedures 4 01200 Project Meetings. Progress Meeting Agenda (MA 1068) 1 01300 Submittals 7 Submittal Cover Sheet/Transmittal (MA 1046) 1 Electronic Release Agreement (MA 1094) 2 01'310 Progress Schedule 3 01400 Quality Control 6 01450 Structural Testing, Inspection and Quality Assurance 10 01500 Construction Facilities 9 Fire Marshall Sheet A 1 1 01510 Infection Control 3 01600 Material and Equipment 4 01610 Delivery Storage, and Handling 1 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 3 Substitution Request (MA1063) 1 01700 Execution Requirements 6 01710 Final Cleaning 2 01720 Record Documents 4 01745 Warranty Procedures 3 Contractors Warranty 3 Subcontractor Warranty 1 01770 Contract Closeout 4 DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION Section 02070 Selective Demolition 5 02821 Chain Link Fence Gate 7 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03300 Cast in -Place Concrete 17 03542 Cementitious Underlayment 4 DIVISION 4 MASONRY (NOT INCLUDED) DIVISION 5 METALS Section 05500 Metal Fabrications 9 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 3 06402 Casework 8 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 00010 PAGE 3 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section Section Section TABLE OF CONTENTS 07200 Building Insulation 5 07810 Fireproofing 7 07840 Firestoppmg and Smokestopping 5 07900 Joint Sealants 7 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 7 08210 Wood Doors 5 08710 Finish Hardware 10 08800 Glazing 8 DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09120 Ceiling Suspension Systems 6 09250 Gypsum Board 11 09650 Resilient Flooring 7 09900 Painting 11 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10150 Cubicles 1 10270 Access Flooring 4 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT Section 11700 Equipment 4 Engineering Notes and Primer by ETS- Lindgren 19 DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS (NOT INCLUDED) DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT INCLUDED) DIVISION 14 CONVEYORS (NOT INCLUDED) DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL Section Table of Contents 1 15010 Mechanical Work General 11 15050 Basic Materials Methods 28 15070 Mechanical Seismic Vibration Control 16 15080 Mechanical lnsulation 9 15100 Domestic Water and Drainage Piping 9 15180 Heating Piping 10 15184 Refrigerant Piping 5 15210 Medical Gas Systems 10 15300 Fire Protection Systems. 7 15710 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment 5 15800 Air Distribution 20 15830 HVAC Fans 4 15900 Instrumentation and Controls 9 Controls Input/Output Summary 1 15950 Testing Adjusting Balancing 5 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section Electrical Certification Table of Content 1 16010 General Electrical Provisions 13 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 00010 PAGE 4 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 16050 Existing Systems 5 16072 Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints 4 16075 Electrical Identification 6 16115 Low Voltage Systems Cable Supports. 4 16120 Conductors and Cables 4 16130 Raceways and'Boxes 10 16140 Wiring Devices. 5 16145 Lighting Control Devices 7 16452 Grounding 2 16470 Panelboards 3 16475 Fuses. 2 16476 Disconnect Switches and Enclosed Circuit Breakers 3 16500 Lighting 11 16501 Light Fixture Schedule 6 16685 MRI Systems 2 16721 Fire Alarm System 11 16724 Smoke Damper Control 2 16740 Telephone. Computer Raceway System 2 16750 Nurse Call System 7 16999 Project Closeout 2 Appendix 1 Panel Schedules 6 END OF SECTION 00010 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI LEGAL NOTICE INVITATION TO BID OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CLALLAM COUNTY PUBLIC HOSPITAL DISTRICT NO 2 PORT ANGELES, \%ASHINGTON Office of the Administrator Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2 Olympic Memonal Hospital 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 SECTION 00100 PAGE 1 of 3 INVITATION TO BID Date and Time for Receint of Bids Part I Price Proposal will be received on or before 6 day of November, 2007 at 2.00 p.m. Part II Subcontractor listing must be received on or before 3.00 p.m. on the 6` day of November, 2007 at which time both Part I and Part II will be opened and read publicly In accordance with RCW 70 44 140 you are invited to bid on a contract for the construction of the Olympic Medical Center, Tenant Improvement MRI, located at Olympic Medical Center Port Angeles, Washington. Sealed bids will be receive as described below at: Part I Sealed bids will be received by Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2, Olympic Medical Center on or before 6` day of November, 2007 at 2:00 p.m. (Pacific Daylight Time) and Part II subcontractor listing forms will be received on or before 3.00 p.m. (Pacific Daylight Time) on the 6 day of November, 2007 Both sealed bid forms, Part I and Part II will be received in the Office of the Administrator The sealed bids will be taken to a public meeting room indicated, opened and read aloud. The tenant improvement work consists converting of an existing vacant shell space within the new hospital addition of approximately of 900 SF into a new complete MRI Room and associated support rooms. The tenant improvement work includes: 1 Converting, preparing and finishing the existing vacant shell space into a new MRI Room that include associated MRI Control Room and MRI Equipment Room. 2. Demolition includes but not limited to the removal of an existing temporary 2 -inch thick un- reinforced concrete slab of approximately 370 SF 3 Prepare the space for new finishes; floors, walls, ceilings, and window treatment to existing exterior windows. 4 Coordinate MRI RF shielding installation to by installed by others and coordmate rough -in and fmal electrical terminations for the MRI equipment installation to be installed by equipment vendor 5 Prepare and install associated mechanical and electrical systems for the MRI equipment to mclude rough -in and final termination connections for the MRI equipment and extensions of existing utilities including fire sprinkler and fire alarm systems. Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud by the Administrator or his/her authorized representative in the Board Room of Olympic Memorial Hospital at 2:05 p.m. on November 6 2007 The public is invited to attend the bid opening. In the case of mailing, address bids to Mr Jim Paapke, Director of Facilities, Olympic Medical Center 939 Caroline Street, Port Angeles, Washington, 98362. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI Publications: Peninsula Daily News, First Publication, October 3 2007 Daily Journal of Commerce, First Publication, October 4 2007 SECTION 00100 PAGE 2 of 3 INVITATION TO BID Bid Forms Part I and Part II shall be sealed m a separate opaque envelope. Bid Form Part I shall be accompanied by a certified check, cashier's check, postal money order or surety bond (issued by an authorized surety) made payable to Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2. Bid security shall be in an amount not less than five percent (5 of the total bid. No bid shall be accepted unless accompanied by bid security and any bid bond must be in a form and issued by a surety acceptable to the Board of Commissioners, Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2. Bids will not be accepted from bidders who have not attended the mandatory site inspection and pre bid project walk through, which will take place .t the site, 10:00 a.m. Tuesday. October 23. 2007. The Board of Conunissioners, Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2 reserves the right to reject any or all bids. The Board of Commissioners will consider bids and the matter of awarding the contract at the next scheduled public meeting of the Board of Commissioners to be held in the Board Room of Olympic Medical Center No bidder may withdraw his/her bid after the date and hour set forth above for the bid opening. If a successful bidder fails to enter into a contract in accordance with his/her bid and furnish required performance and payment bonds within ten (10) days from the date he /she is notified that he /she is the successful bidder such bidder's bid security shall be forfeited. Bid documents for this project can be viewed or ordered by going to Olympic Reprographics at www.olvrenro.com. Click on Planwell, click on Public Planroom and go Then, go to project name and click on the project number (2007517 00). Need not have an account to order If you do not have access to the interne, please call 206.343 1587 or 206.622.6000 and ask for Digital Vault. You can also order by e- mail (dieital.vault@olvrenro.com) or fax (206.343 1596). Olympic Reprographics Attn: Digital Vault 2730 Occidental Ave. So. Seattle, Washington 98134 (206) 343-1587 Bidders should call the printer (listed above) a minimum of 48 hours in advance to order sets prior to pick up or shipping. A maximum of two sets of documents may be obtained without deposit by AGC general contractors. A maximum of two sets may be obtained with a pre -paid $100 00 deposit per set (make checks payable to Olympic Medical Center) by non -AGC general contractors. A maximum of one set of documents may be obtained by AGC and non AGC mechanical and electrical subcontractors with a pre -paid $100 00 deposit. (Note: Printer will ship Bid Documents only upon receipt of payment of deposit.) All other subcontractors may view documents at a plan center or purchase a set directly from the printer (listed above). The bid documents are available for review at the following plan centers: McGraw -Hill Construction Data News, Seattle Builders Exchange of Washington, Everett Valley Plan Center Kent Reed Construction, Kirkland Bremerton Chamber of Commerce, Bremerton AGC Spokane, Spokane Oregon Contractor Plan Ctr Clackamas DJC Plan Center Portland McGraw -Hill Construction Data News, Tacoma Dated this 3` Day of October 2007 at Port Angeles, Washington MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI COMMISSION CLALLAM COUNTY PUBLIC HOSPITAL DISTRICT NO 2 Jim Paapke, Admin Director of Facilities Mgmt END OF SECTION 00100 SECTION 00100 PAGE 3 of 3 INVITATION TO BID Mahlum Architects, Project No 2007517 00 71 Columbia Street Seattle, Washington 98104 (206)441 -4151 Gary Signs, Project Manager 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 3, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 INCORPORATION A. AIA Document A701 Instructions to Bidders, 1997 Edition, is hereby made a part of the Contract as modified by the Supplementary Instructions and is bound herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Instructions described in this section include: 1 Supplementary Instructions (2 pages) 2. AIA Document A701 1997 Instructions to Bidders (6 pages) SECTION 00200 PAGE 1 of 3 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS ARTICLE 9: SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS THE FOLLOWING MODIFICATIONS APPLY TO THE PRECEDING ARTICLES. SECTION 00200 PAGE 2 of 3 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Article 3.3 This article is expanded and modified by Division 1 of the Specifications. Article 4.2.2 A Surety Company Bid Bond, AIA Document A310 or a State of Washington approved form, a certified check, cashier's check or postal money order payable to the order of the Commission of Clallam County Public Hospital District No 2, Olympic Memorial Hospital, shall accompany each bid m an amount not less than five percent (5 of the aggregate of Basic Bid and all Additive Alternates. No bid shall be considered unless accompanied by such bid proposal security Article 4 4 1 No bidder may withdraw his bid after the hour set for the opening thereof, unless the award of the Contract is delayed for a period exceeding thirty (30) days. Article 5 1 Bid opening will be public. Article 6.3 This article is expanded and modified by the Supplementary Conditions and the General Requirements. Article 7 1 Delete Articles 7 1 7 1 1 7 1.2 and 7 1.3 and substitute the following: "The successful Contractor shall at the time of delivery of the executed Contract, furni: h a duly executed bond upon a form, furnished or approved by the Owner signed by two or more approved sureties or an approved surety company in the full amount of the contract price conditioned upon the faithful performance of the contract by the Contractor within the time prescribed therein. Such bond shall provide that the surety or sureties will agree to protect and indemnify the Owner against any direct or indirect loss that shall be suffered or claimed. a. The failure of the Contractor or any of the Contractor's employees, subcontractors or agents to faithfully perform the said contract, or b The failure of the Contractor to pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, agents, materialmen, and all persons who shall supply such Contractor subcontractor or agents with provisions or supplies for carrying on such work. At any time and as often as may be deemed necessary the Owner may require any or all sureties or any surety company to appear and qualify themselves upon the bond. Whenever such surety or sureties are deemed by the Owner to have become insufficient, the Owner may demand in writing that the Contractor furnish additional surety in an amount not exceeding that onginally required as may be deemed necessary considenng the work remammg to be done. No further payments will be made on the contract until such additional surety as required is furnished. Each form of bond must be approved in writing by the Owner The surety or sureties must be authonzed to do business in the State of Washington and be satisfactory to the Owner ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS ARE AS FOLLOWS: 1 Mandatory Site Insnection: In addition to exammation of the bid documents, each general contractor must examine the site and attend the pre -bid and site inspection walk through meeting specified below and so indicate on the bid form; and conduct such other examinations and investigations as are necessary to become fully informed of all existing or expected conditions and other matters that might in any way affect the cost or performance of the work. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 INCORPORATION A. AIA Document A701 Instructions to Bidders, 1997 Edition, is hereby made a part of the Contract as modified by the Supplementary Instructions and is bound herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Instructions described in this section include: 1 Supplementary Instructions (2 pages) 2. AIA Document A701 1997 Instructions to Bidders (6 pages) SECTION 00200 PAGE 1 of 3 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI ARTICLE 9: SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS THE FOLLOWING MODIFICATIONS APPLY TO THE PRECEDING ARTICLES. Article 3.3 This article is expanded and modified by Division 1 of the Specifications. Article 4.2.2 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 00200 PAGE 2 of 3 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A Surety Company Bid Bond, AIA Document A310 or a State of Washington approved form, a certified check, cashier's check or postal money order payable to the order of the Commission of Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2, Olympic Memorial Hospital, shall accompany each bid in an amount not less than five percent (5 of the aggregate of Basic Bid and all Additive Alternates. No bid shall be considered unless accompanied by such bid proposal security Article 4 4 1 No bidder may withdraw his bid after the hour set for the opening thereof, unless the award of the Contract is delayed for a period exceeding thirty (30) days. Article 5 1 Bid opening will be public. Article 6.3 This article is expanded and modified by the Supplementary Conditions and the General Requirements. Article 7 1 Delete Articles 7 1 7 1 1 7 1.2 and 7 1.3 and substitute the following: 'The successful Contractor shall at the time of delivery of the executed Contract, furnish a duly executed bond upon a form, furnished or approved by the Owner signed by two or more approved sureties or an approved surety company m the full amount of the contract price conditioned upon the faithful performance of the contract by the Contractor within the time prescribed therein. Such bond shall provide that the surety or sureties will agree to protect and indemnify the Owner against any direct or indirect loss that shall be suffered or claimed. a. The failure of the Contractor or any of the Contractor's employees, subcontractors or agents to faithfully perform the said contract, or b. The failure of the Contractor to pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, agents, materialmen, and all persons who shall supply such Contractor subcontractor or agents with provisions or supplies for carrying on such work. At any time and as often as may be deemed necessary the Owner may require any or all sureties or any surety company to appear and qualify themselves upon the bond. Whenever such surety or sureties are deemed by the Owner to have become insufficient, the Owner may demand in writing that the Contractor furnish additional surety in an amount not exceeding that onginally required as may be deemed necessary considering the work remaining to be done. No further payments will be made on the contract until such additional surety as required is furnished. Each form of bond must be approved in writing by the Owner The surety or sureties must be authorized to do busmess in the State of Washington and be satisfactory to the Owner ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS ARE AS FOLLOWS. 1 Mandatory Site Insnection. In addition to examination of the bid documents, each general contractor must examine the site and attend the mandatory pre -bid site inspection conference and walk through specified below and so indicate on the bid form; and conduct such other examinations and investigations as are necessary to become fully informed of all existing or expected conditions and other matters that might in any way affect the cost or performance of the work. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI END OF SECTION 00200 SECTION 00200 PAGE 3 of 3 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS The pre -bid conference and site inspection walk through will be held at 10 a.m. on Tuesday October 23 2007 2. The successful bidder shall be ready to proceed with the work within five (5) calendar days after the award of the contract. 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 Instructions to Bidders for the following PROJECT (Name and location or address) 01 c lvleilical Center k THE OWNER: (Name and address THE ARCHITECT (Name and address AIA Document A701 1997 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 DEFINITIONS 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6 POST -BID INFORMATION 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ADDITIONS AND DELETION The author of this document has added information needed for its completion The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form An Additions and Deletions .Report that notes added inormation as well as revisions to tie standard .fo text is a'tailahle tram the author and should be Tedi eWed This document has important legal consequences. Consultation ..wri 'th an attorney is encouraged with gespect to its completion <or ,Inodi'fication f ELECTRONIC COPYING of any portion of this AIA Document to another electronic file is prohibited and constitutes a violation of copyright laws as set forth in the footer of this document AIA Document A701.. 1997 Copyright e 1970 1974 1978 1987 and 1997 by The America Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING Thi AIA' Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft was produced by AIA software at 15 36 16 on 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which expires on 1/15/2008 and is not for resale User Notes (1399037 ^65) ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 1 1 Bidding Documents include the Biddmg Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Require*i.ents consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid form, and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201 or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. 1.3 Addenda are wntten or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Biddmg Documents. 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described m he Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or froiti which Work may be deleted for stms stated in Alternate Bids. 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deduced &ontthe" ainount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described m the Biddmg Documents, js accepted. 1 7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. of the Work. 2.1.2 The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents. AIA Document A701s 1997 Copyright O 19 1974 1978 1987 WARNING Thi ALA' Document protected by U S Copyright Law this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe possible under the law Thi draft was produced by AIA softwa 1/15/2008 and not for ale User Notes 1.9 A Sub bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment labor for a portion ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: 2.1 1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, and for other portions of the Project „if any being bid concurrently or presently under construction. 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which tfie Work is to he 3 performed and has con the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Cdntralct Documents. 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 COPIES 3.1 1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any stated therein :The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's deposit will be refunded. and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved. and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent at 15 36 16 on 10/03/2007 under Orde No 1000279383_2 which expi on (1399037265) 31.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub bidders unless specifically offered in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders. 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents m preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 3.1 4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding Documents. 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall makea written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days pnor to the date for receipt of Bids. 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will ot be'binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall`..include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in theivork of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval wi ll be set forth,ir an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided, for in the !Contract Documents. 3.4 ADDENDA 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a uompiete•set of Bidding Documents. 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. AIA Document A701.. 1997 Copyright 1970 1974 1978 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved WARNING This AIA' Document protected by U S Copy Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law This draft wa produced by AIA oftwa at 15 36 16 10/03/2007 unde Orde No 1000279383_2 which xpi 1/15/2008 nd is not fo resale User Notes (1399037265) ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 4 1 PREPARATION OF BIDS 4.1 1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents. 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a non erasable medium. 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy the amount written in words shall govern. 41 4 Interlmeations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change." 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may without forfeiture of the bid security s the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder The I; r shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner 4.1 7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal ford" of the Bidder. The Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work.`Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid b'y a orporatioii shill further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted Iby art agetiVsha11 have "a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder 4.2 BID SECURITY 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required if so stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders. The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated i ti.thtr Bid and will, if required, furnisl• 'nds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment.of'all obligations ansmg thereunder Should t.e Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish suchbonds,if-require4, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a ¢enalty The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply w`1th Section 6:2.,,,, 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required, it shall be written on AIA Document A310, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provjded in the Bidding Documents, and the attomey -in -fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award,ii being considered until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, dr (b )flie specifihd lime has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn or (c) all Bids have been rejected. 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS i 1 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security if any and any other documents required to be s with t Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the part}4.re4iving the tlids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shad be inn— separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED' on the face thereof. 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of.Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will dot he considered. 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulatedlime.period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. AIA Document A701 1997 Copyright 0 1970 1974 1978 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved WARNING. This AIA Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft wa produced by AIA software at 15 36 16 on 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which expires on 1/15/2008 and is not fo resale User Notes (1399037265) 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in wnting over the signature of the Bidder Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received, and date and time stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. 4 4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 4 4.4 Bid secunty if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS At the discretion of the Owner if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids received on time will be publicly opened and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids may made available to Bidders. 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to rel ection. 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted m accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available: The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregulanties in a Bid received and to accept the -Bid which, m the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's own best interests. 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the nght to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to detennine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 6.1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon,request, a properly executed AIA Document A305 Contractor's Qualification Statement, unless such a Statementhas been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. i 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder easpnable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contra c�. Lliless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor 6.3 SUBMITTALS 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: 1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the manufacturers, products, and the suppliers of principal items or:systems of matenals and equipment proposed for the Work; and .3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish matenals orequipment fabncated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work. 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in.the.Bidding. Documents. AIA Document A701.. 1997 Copyright e 1970 1974 1978 1987 and 1997 by The Ame Ica Institute of Architects All fights reserved. WARNING This AIA Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thl. AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft was produced by AIA software at 15 36 16 10/03/2007 unde Orde No 1000279383_2 which expi on 1/15/2008 and Is not fo sale User Notes (1399037265) 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity the Bidder may at the Bidder's option, (1) withdraw the Bid or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 71 BOND REQUIREMENTS 71 t If stipulated m the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations ansing thereunder Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. 71.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the cost shall be included ii'i the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the ckst of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. 71.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources, changes in cost will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days followitltgthe date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of inteynt,1l a Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that Suchl ands will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney -in -fact who executes the required bonds on behalf oftlie sitrety `to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be Written on AIA, Document A101 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the 3asks of Payment )s Stipulated Sum. AIA Document A701. 1997 Copyright a 1970 1974 1978 1987 WARNING: Thi AIA Document protected by U.S Copyright Law this Ale Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe possible under the law This dr ft was produced by AIA softwa 1/15/2008 and is not for resale User Notes and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved. and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent at 15 36 16 on 10/03/2007 unde Order No 1000279383_2 which expires on (1399037265) MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 THE PROJECT 1.2 THE DOCUMENTS The plans and project manual are entitled `Bid Documents for Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI. PART 2 THE BID Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 Architect Mahlum Architects 71 Columbia, Suite 400 Seattle, Washington 98104 To Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2 Olympic Medical Center 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 Ladies and Gentlemen. SECTION 00301 -1 PAGE 1 of 2 BID FORM PART I UWe have received the Bid Documents for the project as identified above. UWe have also received the following addenda and have included their provisions in my /our bid. Addenda No. Date I/We have attended at least one mandatory site inspection. (check one) Yes No I/We have examined both the documents and the site and fully understand the extent and nature of the work. Questions regarding the project have been asked of the Architect during the bidding period. Yes No I/We submit the following bid. In submitting this bid, I/We agree: 1 To hold my /our bid open for sixty (60) days. 2. To accept the provisions of the Advertisement to Bid and the Instructions to Bidders regarding depositing of Bid Security Initials of Bidder's Representative MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MR1 2007 Mahlum Architects 3 To enter into and execute a contract, if awarded on the basis of this bid and to furnish guarantee bonds in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions of this contract. 4 To accomplish the work in accordance with the contract documents. 5 To complete the work by the time specified in Section 01011 Contract Time and Sequence. 6 The bids are in accordance with Section 01030 Base Bid and Alternates. 7 I/We have attached to this bid the required Bid Security Base Bid I/We will construct this project for the lump -sum price of: DOLLARS The base bid price and alternates do not include Washineton State sales tax. I/We will construct and complete this project within: (Date) (Signature) (Title) SECTION 00301 -1 PAGE 2 of 2 BID FORM PART I (Legal name of person, corporation, or firm submitting bid) (State Contractor's License Number) (Seal. If bid is by a corporation, signature must be as required in section 00100 Instructions to Bidders.) END OF SECTION 00301 I Initials of Bidder's Representative Calendar Days. Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 INCORPORATION SECTION 00301 -11 PAGE 1 of 5 BID FORM PART II A. The Bidder's Qualification Form, four (4) pages, is incorporated hereafter as part of the contract documents and shall be included as Bid Form Part II. Initials of Bidder's Representative MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI Date: BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM The following information must be submitted within one hour of the submittal of Bid Form Part I, naming intended mechanical and electrical subcontractor and other subcontractors indicated, including qualifications of the general contractor mechanical, electrical, and other subcontractors listed. (Attach continuation sheets if required.) Name of General Contractor from Bid Form Part I. Address: Phone and Fax Numbers: Sienatures (must be the same as those of Bid Form Part I) (Date) (Signature) (Title) SECTION 00301 -1I PAGE 2 of 5 BID FORM PART II (Legal name of person, corporation, or firm submitting bid) (State Contractor's License Number) (Seal. If bid is by a corporation, signature must be as required in section 00100 Instructions to Bidders.) 1 General Contractor A. Type of organization. Individual Partnership Corporation Name owners of 5% or greater Ownership interest: B. Years in business under present firm name: Names and years in business of predecessor firms: C. Firm s Bonding Company Period of time the bonding company has bonded for the Firm (or predecessor firms), the name of any preceding bonding company and the years such bonding was provided, and the name, address and telephone number for the principal contact for each bonding company for the Firm for the ten years preceding the date of the Form. (Attach continuation sheet if required.) Initials of Bidder's Representative MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI D Firm s Principal Bank: Branch. Years: E. Has your firm ever failed to complete any work awarded? If yes attach a brief descnption and explanation. F Has any officer or partner or owner of your firm ever failed to complete a contract handled in his /her own name? If so, state name of individual, contract not completed, and description of the circumstances. (Attach continuation sheet if required.) G List projects your organization has completed in the five years precedmg the, date of the documents: Contract Date Name and Address of Amount Class of Work Completed Owner or Contractine Agent (Attach continuation sheet if required) SECTION 00301-11 PAGE 3 of 5 BID FORM PART II H. List all medical, hospital, or similar work completed in the five years preceding the date of the form. Contract Date Name and Address of Amount Class of Work Completed Owner or Contractine Agent (Attach continuation sheet if required) I. List any projects in the last five years your organization has not completed within the time specified in the contract, and an explanation of why the projects were not completed within the time specified in the contract: (Attach continuation sheet if required) J List any projects the Firm has conunitted to construct as of the date of the form: Contract Name and Address of Amount Class of Work Completed Owner or Contractine Agent (Attach continuation sheet if required) Initials of Bidder's Representative MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI K. List any projects which resulted in substantial dispute with the Owner or contracting agent; and/or a mediation, arbitration, or litigation with the Owner contracting agent or any subcontractors: Contract Date Name and Address of Amount Class of Work Completed Owner or Contracting Agent (Attach continuation sheet if required) L. Identify your full -time superintendent scheduled for this project: (provide resume) 2. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning, Plumbing, and Electrical Subcontractors: A. List here the names of the subcontractors with whom the Bidder if awarded the contract, intends to subcontract for performance of the work of heating, ventilation and air conditioning, plumbing (as described m chapter 18.106 RCW) and electrical (as described in chapter 19.28 RCW), or to name itself for the work. Work to be Performed Subcontractors Name Electrical Plumbing HVAC SECTION 00301-11 PAGE 4 of 5 BID FORM PART II 3 In order for this bid to be considered responsive, the general contractor electrical, and mechanical contractors, must have successfully completed at least one (1) healthcare contract in the last five (5) years which involved new construction, interior demolition and construction alterations while the facility remained in operation, and had a construction cost of at least $2,500,000 A. GENERAL CONTRACTOR Contract Name and Address of Amount Tyne of Work Owner or Contractine Agent Initials of Bidder's Representative MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR Contract Name and Address of Amount Tvne of Work Owner and Contractin2 Aeent C. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR Contract Name and Address of Amount Tvne of Work Owner and Contractin2 A2ent 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 00301 II SECTION 00301 -II PAGE 5 of 5 BID FORM PART II Initials of Bidder's Representative Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS Signed, Sealed, and Dated this day of 20 SECTION 00450 PAGE 1 of 1 BID BOND That we as Principal, and as Surety a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of and legally doing business in the State of Washington are held and firmly bound and obligated unto Clallam County Hospital Distnct No. 2, hereinafter called the Owner m the full and just sum of Dollars lawful money of the United States of Amenca for the payment of which sum of money well and truly to be made, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, their and each of their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Owner shall make any award to the Principal for CONTRACT according to the terms of the proposal or bid made by the Principal therefore, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a Contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of said proposal or bid and award and shall give bond for the faithful performance thereof, with Surety or Sureties approved by the Owner• or if the Principal shall, in case of failure so to do, pay to the Owner the damages which the Owner may suffer by reason of such failure not exceeding the penalty of this bond, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF the Principal and Surety have caused these presents to be duly signed and sealed. (Principal) (Surety) Attorney -in -Fact (by) 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 00450 Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 INCORPORATION 1.2 DESCRIPTION SECTION 00510 PAGE 1 of 3 FORM OF AGREEMENT A. AIA Document A101 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the Basis of Payment is a Stipulated Sum 1997 Edition, is hereby made a part of the Contract as modified by the Supplementary Conditions and is bound herein. A. Documents included in this section mclude: 1 Supplementary Provisions (2 pages) 2. AIA Document A101 1997 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (6 pages) MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 SUPPLEMENTARY PROVISIONS The following supplementary provisions modify change, delete from or add to the AIA Document A101 `Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the Basis of Payment is a Stipulated Sum' 1997 Edition. Where any Article of the Form of Agreement is modified or deleted by these provisions ARTICLE 3. DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Add the following Article: 3 4 The timely completion of the work is essential to Owner The parties agree that Owner will be damaged if Contractor does not achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time as set forth in this Agreement, and that such damages will be difficult to ascertain. Subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work no later than One Hundred Twenty (120) calendar days from the date of Commencement. The parties further agree that the amount of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per calendar day is a reasonable approximation of the damages that Owner would sustain if Substantial Completion is delayed, and that such liquidated damages do not constitute a penalty The Owner may deduct all damages due it under this paragraph from any unpaid amounts then or thereafter due to the Contractor under the Contract. Any damages not so deducted, shall be payable by Contractor to Owner on demand. Contractor agrees that any such deduction of liquidated damages from the amount due, or to become due, to Contractor under the Contract, shall not in any degree release Contractor from further obligation and liability with regard to the fulfillment of the entire contract. ARTICLE 5: PROGRESS PAYMENTS SUPPLEMENTARY PROVISIONS SECTION 00510 PAGE 2 of 3 FORM OF AGREEMENT Delete Paragraph 5 1.3 in entirety and add the following: 5 1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect on or prior to the last calendar day of a month, the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor on or before the last day of the following month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner on or before forty-five (45) calendar days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. Progress payment applications shall be submitted on required payment application forms indicated herein and acceptable to Owner at its reasonable discretion. 5 1.6.1 Enter a value of 5 percent (5 for the percentage of retainage. 5 1.6.2 Enter a value of 5 percent (5 for the percentage of retainage. Delete Paragraph 5 1 7 1 in entirety and add the following: 5 1 7 1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to ninety-five percent (95 of the Contract Sum, less one hundred fifty percent (150 of such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete work, retainage application to such work and unsettled claims. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI Delete Paragraph 7.2 in entirety and add the following: END OF SECTION 00510 SECTION 00510 PAGE 3 of 3 FORM OF AGREEMENT 7.2 All monies retained shall be deposited m an escrow account (in a bank or trust company chosen by Contractor and approved by Owner) and the interest earned in the account shall accrue to the benefit of the contractor until completion of contract or per contractor choice from options allowed by RCW 60.28 011(4). 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM AGREEMENT made as of the day of (In words, indicate day month and year) BETWEEN the Owner' (Name, address and other information) and the Contractor (Name, address and other information) The Project is: (Name and location) The Architect is: (Name, address and other information) The Owner and Contractor agree as follows. AIA Document A10r 1997 in the year of .ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS The author of this document 'has added information ineeded for its completion The author may also have f'evised the text of the original AIA standard form An .Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information. as well as revisions to the standard 3forla_text,.ii aiailable .from the author and should be 'teVfewed This document has importari legal consequences ConsultatioJ1 Wfth an attorr�l,„e.y°"'i's encouraged with t<espect to. s 4ompletion or ification AlA �Doc�unient.,2()1 -1997 GeneralryConditi8ns�,of the Contract foi 'Goostrucf1 on, is adopted in th.il'-dgpument by reference Do not use with other general cond'itions'vnless this document -4 modified This document has been .approved anal endoised by 'The Associated, General Contractors not `America r ELECTRONIC COPYING of any portion of this AIA Document to another electronic file is prohibited and constitutes a violation of copyright laws as set forth in the footer of this document AIA Document A101.. 1997 Copyright 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1967 1974 1977 1987 1991 and 1997 by The Ame can Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING. This AIA Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA Document, or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Thi draft was produced by AIA softwa at 15 40 25 on 10/03/2007 unde Order No 1000279383_2 which expir on 1/15/2008 and is not for resale User Notes (1940918954) ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued pnor to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed m this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement; these form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than Modifications, appears in Article 8 ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owiiier (Insert the date of commencement if it differs from the date of this Agreement or if applicable, state that 4he date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.) If, prior to the commencement of the Work, the Owner requires time to file mortgages, mec'hanic's, liens and. other, security interests, the Owner's time requirement shall be as follows: Portion of Work ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. 3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than days m the date of commencement, or as follows: 1 i (Insert number of calendar days. Alternatively a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of 3 commencement. Unless stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, insert any requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the Work) a .kYr fgas1WOCI a.; subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (Insert provisions, if any for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete on time or for bonus payment; for early completion of the Work.) Substantial Completion Date 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor's,ISerformance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be 01), subject to additions and deductions as provided ip•the Contract" Documents. j 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If decisions on other alternates are to be made by the Owner subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach a schedule of such other alternates sliowing'7he amount for each and the date when that amount expires) AIA Document A101. 1997 Copyright O 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1967 1974 1977 1987 1991 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING. This AIA Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft was produced by AIA software at 15 40 25 on 10/03/2007 uncle Order No 1000279383_2 which expires on 1/15/2008 and not for resale User Notes (1940918954) 4.3 Unit prices, if any are as follows: ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1 1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: Description Units Price 0.00) 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the _6 day of a month, the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the day of the same month. If an Apphcation for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment shall lie made by the'Owner not later than 4, days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to bytlie Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion ofthe.Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. 5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: 1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less retainage:bf Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts nqt inxlispute shall be included as provided in Section 7.3 8 of AIA Document A201 1997 .2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and egitipnient delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed con4tru4tion for iflapfroved in advance by the Owner suitably stored off the site at a location agreed up$n in writing), less retainage of .3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner and .4 Subtract amounts, if any for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate"for Payment as provided in Section 9.5 of AIA Document A201 1997 5.1 7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Section 5 1 6 shall be further modified under the following circumstances: 1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to the full amount of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work, retainage applicable to such work and unsettled claims; and AIA Document A101° 1997 Copyright 0 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1967 1974 1977 1987 1991 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING: Thi ALA! Document protected by U.S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft was produced by AIA oftware at 15 40 25 on 10/03/2007 under Orde No 1000279383_2 which xpr es on 1/15/2008 and is not for ale User Notes (1940918954) (Section 9 8 5 of AIA Document A201 1997 requires release of applicable retainage upon Substantial Completion of Work with consent of surety if any .2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor any additional amounts payable in accordance with Section 9 10.3 of AIA Document A201 1997 5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any shall be as follows. (If it is intended, prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from the percentages inserted in Sections 5 1 6.1 and 5 1 6.2 above, and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contraci Documents, insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.) 5.1.9 Except with the Owner's prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payment's to suppliers for matenals or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. 5.2 FINAL PAYMENT 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be rjnade by the Owner to the Contractor when. 1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct Work as provided in Section 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201 1997 and to sate fy, gtlter if any which extend beyond final payment; and .2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. 5.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follows. 47* ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 6.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201 1997 6.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201 1997 ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS t 71 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201 19 Or another ontra'ct Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other pro'isic *ns of the CAntract Documents. i i 1 try 7.3 The Owner's representative is: (Name, address and other information) r y 7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the°Project is° located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any) (Usury laws and requirements under the Federal Truth in Lending Act, similar state and local consumer credit laws and other regulations at the Owner's and Contractor's principal places of business, the location of the Project and elsewhere may affect the validity of this provision. Legal advice should be obtained with respect to deletions or modifications, and also regarding requirements such as written disclosures or waivers.) AIA Document A101. 1997 Copyright 0 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1967 1974 1977 1987 1991 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING. This AIA Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi ALA Document or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law Thi draft wa produced by AIA softwa at 15 40 25 on 10/03/2007 unde Orde No 1000279383_2 which xpire on 1/15/2008 and is not for esale User Notes (1940918954) 7 4 The Contractor's representative is: (Name, address and other information) 7.5 Neither the Owner's nor the Contractor's representative shall be changed without ten days written notice to the other party 7.6 Other provisions. ARTICLE 8 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 8.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enlimei,,ated as follows: 8.1 1 The Agreement is this executed 1997 edition of the Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor AIA Document A101 1997 8.1.2 The General Conditions are the 1997 edition of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA. Document A201 1997 8.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the ?roject Manual dated and are as follows Document 8.1 4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Section 8 1.3 and areas follows: (Either list the S ecifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Title of S„ pegsfi.. F,lions:e ti itta g "741;19 1. 5 tw 8.1.5 The Drawings are as follows, and are dated unless a different date is shown below. (Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) -104,10.6faiS4 lu"bta 3 evgwarlon 8.1.6 The Addenda, if any are as follows: Number Title Date S Pages Pa es Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 8 8.1 7 Other documents, if any forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. 4IA Document A201 1997provides that bidding requirements such as advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractor's bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. They should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.) AIA Document A101. 1997 Copyright 0 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1967 1974 1977 1987 1991 and 1997 by The Ame scan Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING. This AIA' Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law Thi draft was produced by AIA software at 15 40 25 on 10/03/2007 uncle Order No 1000279383_2 which xpires on 1/15/2008 and Is not fo sale User Notes (1940918954) y This Agreement is entered mto as of the day and year first wntten above and is executed in at least three original copies, of which one is to be delivered to the Contractor one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract, and the remainder to the Owner OWNER (Signature) (Printed name and title) CONTRACTOR (Signature) (Printed name and title) AIA Document A101.. 1997 Copyright O 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1967 1974 1977 1987 1991 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA! Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law This dr ft was produced by AIA softwa at 15 40 25 on 10/03/2007 unde Order No 1000279383_2 which xpires on 1/15/2008 and not fo resale User Notes (1940918954) MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 CONTRACT TRANSMITTAL Date: To From. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS 1.1 REFERENCE Division 0 Section `Bid Form' your proposal dated 1.2 OWNER'S ACTIONS The Owner authorizes us to advise you that he: Accepts/Rejects your base bid. Accepts your following alternates: Rejects your following alternates: 1.3 CONTRACT TRANSMITTAL MAHLUM ARCHITECTS END OF SECTION 00.515 SECTION 00515 PAGE 1 of 1 CONTRACT TRANSMITTAL The Owner forwards herewith for your signature his agreement with you per Division 0 Section `Form of Agreement. When the original and copies of the agreement are signed and dated, return the original and two copies to the Architect together with. Your payment bonds per Division 0 Section `Form of Agreement. Provide an original and two copies to the Architect, fully executed and signed. Your evidence of insurance coverage per Division 0 Section `General Conditions. Provide the completed original and two copies to the Architect. (0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 NOTICE TO PROCEED Date: To From: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS 1.1 REFERENCES A. Division 0 Section `Bid Form your proposal dated. B Division 0 Section `Form of Agreement' the contract dated: 1.2 OWNER'S DIRECTION The Owner has authorized us to direct you to commence and complete the work as follows. A. DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK is: and shall be the effective date of: 1 The specified insurance coverage 2. The contract, unless dated earlier 3 The performance and payment bond 4 The start of contract time of one hundred twenty (120) calendar days. Mahlum Architects (date) SECTION 00520 PAGE 1 of 2 NOTICE TO PROCEED B DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION shall be the date of completion of all work except for deferred items, if any and shall be the effective start date of: 1 Liquidated damages at $500 per day (if project or project phase is not ready for owner's occupancy) 2. 15 -day period to complete deferred items 3 Guarantees and warranties 4 Owner's occupancy 5 Owner's assumption of full responsibility for maintenance, heat, utilities, and insurance 1.3 RECEIPT Please signify your receipt and acceptance of this Notice to Proceed in Part 2 below MAHLUM ARCHITECTS MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 CONTRACTOR'S ACCEPTANCE To MAHLUM ARCHITECTS This is to acknowledge receipt and acceptance of above Notice to Proceed. 1 The executed contract is attached, has been submitted. 2. Evidence of insurance coverage is attached, has been submitted. (Contractor) SECTION 00520 PAGE 2 of 2 NOTICE TO PROCEED (date) END OF SECTION 00520 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 INCORPORATION SECTION 00700 PAGE 1 of 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. AIA Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract For Construction, 1997 Edition, is hereby made a part of the Contract as modified by the Supplementary and Special Conditions and is bound herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Conditions of the Contract described m this section mclude: 1 Supplementary Conditions of the Contract (8 pages) 2. Special Conditions of the Contract (3 pages) 3 AIA Document A201 1997 General Conditions of the Contractor for Construction (39 pages) MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT The following supplements modify change, delete from or add to the `General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201 15th Edition, 1997 Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered portion of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or use shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1 BASIC "DEFINITIONS Add the following numbers, titles and paragraphs: 1 7 Miscellaneous Definitions 1 7 1 The `Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor' AIA Document A101 1997 Edition shall be used as the form of agreement for this Project. All articles in the form shall be subject to the bidding requirements and contract documents. 1 7.2 The term `Project Manual' as used in these Supplementary conditions is the volume which includes the Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, and certain of the Contract Documents such as the Conditions of the Contract, and the Technical Specifications. 1 7.3 The technical specifications are included in this Project Manual as Divisions 1 through 16. ARTICLE 2. OWNER SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 1 7 4 The term `product' as used in these Supplementary Conditions includes materials, systems, equipment and accessories. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER SECTION 00700 PAGE 2 of 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS Delete Paragraph 2.2.5 m its entirety and add the following: 2.2.5 The Contractor will be furnished fifteen (15) copies of Drawings and Project Manuals free of charge. These copies may consist of Drawings and Project Manuals returned through the bidding process. It is the Contractor's responsibility to assure the completeness of these copies. ARTICLE 3. CONTRACTOR 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTURCTION PROCEDURES Add the following paragraph. 3.3 4 If any of the Work is required to be inspected or approved by any public authority the Contractor shall cause such inspection or approval to be performed. No inspection performed or failed to be performed by the Owner shall be a waiver of any of the Contractor's obligations hereunder or be construed as an approval or acceptance of the Work or any part thereof. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIAL Add the following at the end of paragraph 3 4.2 3 4.2 If the Contractor makes requests for substitutions, the Contractor thereby (i) represents that the Contractor has investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is reasonably equivalent to that specified, (ii) represents that the Contractor will provide the same MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified, (iii) certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except the Architect's design costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and (iv) will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, after evaluation by the Architect and the Architect's issuance of any design changes connected with the substitution as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. Add the following paragraphs: 3 4 4 Not later than twenty (20) days from the Contract Date, the Contractor shall provide a list showing the name of Subcontractors and Principal Suppliers and Fabricators. No substitutions of subcontractors and principal suppliers and fabricators will be allowed without prior approval by the Architect. 3 4.5 The Architect will promptly reply in writmg to the Contractor stating whether the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such substitution. Failure to object to above shall not constitute a waiver of any of the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3.6 TAXES Delete Paragraph 3 6.1 m its entirety and add the following: 3.6 1 The Owner shall pay to the Contractor any sales tax required by law in the State of Washington and the Contractor shall promptly remit the sales tax to the State of Washington. The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. 3.7 PERMITS, FEE AND NOTICES Delete Paragraph 3 7 1 in its entirety and add the following: 3 7 1 The Owner shall be responsible for bearing the cost of the building permit and any renewal charges for same and initial Washington State Department of Health project review costs. The Architect shall be the `single point' of contact between the Building Department and the project. The Contractor will be notified by the Architect that the building permit is available. The Contractor shall apply for secure and pay for all other permits and governmental fees, licenses, and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. Contractor shall be responsible for follow -up submittals to Washington State Department of Labor and Industries for electrical documents and Department of Health including fire alarm and sprinkler submittals. 3 7 4 In the first sentence, add the words or any of its Subcontractors of any tier' between the words Contractor and performs. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Add the following paragraph: 3 10 4 During the course of the Work, and not less than monthly the Contractor shall submit to the Architect and Owner a current updated progress schedule (CPM) reflecting any and all changes to the original schedule. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE Add the following at the end of Paragraph 3 11 1 SECTION 00700 PAGE 3 of 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 00700 PAGE 4 of 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS 3 11 1 signed by the Contractor certifying that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and information they show complete and correct "as- built' conditions, stating sizes, kinds of materials, vital piping, conduit locations and similar matters. 3.18 IDENTIFICATION Delete Paragraphs 3 18.1and 3 18.2 in their entirety and add the following: 3 18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law it is expressly agreed and understood that Contractor shall indemnify defend and hold harmless Owner its officers, directors, agents, shareholders, partners, members, owners, successors and employees (individually each an 'Indemnified Party" and collectively the 'Indemnified Parties from and against any and all claims, liability damages, losses, causes of action, costs or expenses (including without limitation attorney's fees, consultants' fees and court costs) arismg out of or resulting from, or alleged to arise out of or to result from the performance of the Work (hereinafter singularly and collectively referred to as `Indemnity Claims If the Indemnity Claims are caused or alleged to be caused by any joint or concurrent negligent act (either active or passive) or omission by an Indemnified Party Contractor shall indemnify hold harmless and defend such Indemnified Party from such Indemnity Claims only to the extent such Indemnity Claims arise out of or result from the negligence or willful misconduct of Contractor or its consultants, subcontractors and/or suppliers of every tier or anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts the Contractor may be responsible or liable. In no event shall Contractor be obligated to indemnify an Indemnified Party for Indemnity Claims which arise out of or result from the sole negligence or willful misconduct of such Indemnified Party or its agents, servants or independent contractors who are directly responsible to such Indemnified Party excluding Contractor herein. 3 18.2 For the sole purpose of effectmg the indemnification obligations under this Agreement and not for the benefit of any third parties unrelated to the Indemnified Parties, Contractor specifically and expressly waives any nnmunity that may be granted it under the Washington State Industrial Insurance Act, Title 51 RCW (CONTRACTOR S INITIALS Further the indemnification obligations under this Agreement shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable to or for any third party under the Worker Compensation Acts, Disability Benefit Acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4. ADMINISTP -kTION OF THE CONTRACT 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES Delete paragraph 4.3.3 m its entirety and add the following: 4.3.3 Unless otherwise agreed to in writing, the Contractor shall diligently carry on the Work and maintain its progress during any arbitration or court proceedings in accordance with the Architect's directions, and the Owner shall continue to make payments to the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. Delete paragraphs 1 and 2 from paragraph 4.3 10 in their entirety and add the followmg: 1 Damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2 Damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except profit arising directly from performed Work. 4.6 ARBITRATION Delete the first sentence and replace with the following: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI ARTICLE 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES ARTICLE 9: PAYMENT AND COMPLETION. See General Requirements Section 01026 for expansion of this article. ARTICLE 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Add to end of subparagraph 11 1 1 SECTION 00700 PAGE 5 of 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS 4 6.1 Except as may be otherwise provided in this agreement, all claims, counterclaims, disputes and other matters m question between the Owner and the Contractor arising out of or relating to this agreement, or the breach thereof, will be decided by arbitration, if the parties hereto mutually agree, otherwise, in a court of competent junsdiction within the county in which the Owner is located. In the event the parties agree to arbitrate any matters, said arbitration shall be m compliance with the terms of Paragraph 4 6 of the AIA Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 7.3 6 In the first sentence, delete the words `a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit' and add `an allowance for overhead and profit m accordance with the schedule set forth in Paragraph 7.3 10 below" 7.3 6 1 Delete this sentence and replace with the following: `Costs of labor including benefits shall not exceed those rates indicated for prevailing wages and benefits to be paid in the `Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Work Contact' for Clallam County Add the following Paragraph. 7.3 10 In Paragraphs 7.3.3 and 7.3 6 the allowance for overhead and profit combined, included in the total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule: 1 For the Contractor for any Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, including supervision, fifteen (15) percent of the cost. 2. For the Contractor for Work performed by his Subcontractor including supervision, ten (10) percent of the amount due the Subcontractor 3 For each Subcontractor or Sub subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by that Contractor's own forces including supervision, fifteen (15) percent of the cost. 4 For each Subcontractor for Work performed by his Sub subcontractors including supervision, ten (10) percent of the amount due the Sub subcontractor 5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Paragraph 7.3 6 6. In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a compete itemization of costs includmg labor matenals, and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall also be itemized. In no case will change involving over $100 00 be approved without such itemization. 11 1 1 In the first line of subparagraphs 11 1 1 following the word `maintain' insert the words `in a company or companies licensed to do business in the State of Washington. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 00700 PAGE 6 of 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS `Owner's and Contractor's protective coverage shall include the following as additional named insured. Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2 (owner Olympic Medical Center Port Angeles, Washington), the Board of Commissioners thereof, and the officers and employees thereof in their official capacities. Add the following subparagraphs: 11 1 1.9 Liability insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including: 1 Premises Operations (including X -C -U) 2. Independent contractor's protective. 3 Products and completed operations. 4 Contractual including specified provision for the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3 18 5 Owner non -owned and hired motor vehicles. 6. Broad form coverage for property damage. 7 Workmen s Compensation Statutory 8. Employer's liability Same limits as compensation liability on Stop Gap. 9 Comprehensive general liability a. Bodily injury $1,250,000 each person/$1,500,000 each occurrence b. Personal injury $1,250,000 each person $1,250,000 aggregate $1,500,000 general aggregate. c. Property damage $1 100 000 each person $1 100,000 each occurrence /$1 100,000 aggregate. 10 Automobile liability a. Bodily injury $1,250,000 each person/$ 1,500,000 each occurrence. 11 Independent contractors same limits as above. 12. Products and completed operations same limits as above until full acceptance of new construction by Owner Additionally named insured. Clallam County Public Hospital District No. 2, State of Washington; the Board of Commissioners and Administrative Officers in their capacities, known as Olympic Medical Center Port Angeles, Washington. Certificate of insurance to be supplied to Owner 13 Contractual liability same limits as above. 14 Broad Form Builders Risk policy covering materials, supplies, machinery equipment, fixtures, temporary structures to be used m or incidental to the construction, fabrication, installation, erection or completion, including accrued labor charges. All Risk form with normal Exclusions. All Sub or Independent Contractors should provide Certificates of Insurance to Contractor commensurate with the liability limits set forth in 7 8 9 and 10 15 Amount: In the sum of the total completed value. Add the following paragraph: 11 1.3 `Furnish one copy of Certificates herein required for each copy of the Agreement; specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by Paragraphs 11 1 1 and 11 1.2. The form of the Certificate shall be AIA Document G705 Furnish to the Owner copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. Add the following paragraphs: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 11 1.3 1 All required coverages shall remain in force for the benefit of the Owner for claims arising out of the Work under this Contract for at least six (6) years after Final Completion. 11 1.3.2 Contractor agrees that the insurance specified in this Article 11 1 et seq. shall be primary over any msurance or self insurance program maintained by the Owner 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE. ALL RISK (SEE ALSO 11.1.9 (14) ABOVE) Delete Paragraph 11 4 1 in its entirety and add the following: 11 4 1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the entire work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. Such insurance shall be in a company or companies against which the Owner the Contractor the Subcontractors and Sub subcontractors in the Work and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and shall include all risk' insurance for physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief. 11 4 1 1 If this insurance is written with stipulated amounts deductible under the terms of the policy the Contractor shall pay the difference attributable to deductions m any payments made by the msurance camer on claims paid by this insurance. Delete Paragraph 11 4 6 m its entirety and add the following: 11 4 6 The Contractor shall file the onginal and one certified copy of all policies with the Owner and Arclutect before exposure to loss may occur If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to maintain such insurance and to so notify the Owner then the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto 11 4 7 Add the followmg sentence: `In waiving nghts of recovery under terms of this paragraph, the term `Owner' shall be deemed to mclude his employees, and the Architect and his employees as the Owner's representative, as provided in the Contract Documents. Add the following Paragraph: 11 4 11 If the Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion, such occupancy shall not commence prior to a time mutually agreed to by the Owner and Contractor and concurred with by the insurance company or companies. This insurance shall not be canceled or lapsed on account of such partial occupancy ARTICLE 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW Delete Paragraph 13 1 1 in its entirety and add the following: 13 1 1 The Contractor shall at all times comply with federal and state laws, local laws and ordinance, and any regulations which in any manner affect the performance of the contract. Add the following numbers, titles and paragraphs: 13.8 PREVAILING WAGE ACT SECTION 00700 PAGE 7 of 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS 13.8.1 State of Washington Prevailing Wage Act, Chapter 39 12 RCW applies to the entire project. The contractor, any subcontractor or other person doing work or any part of it shall not pay any workmen, laborers, or mechanics less than the hourly minimum rate of wage defined by RCW 39 12.010 as established by the Department of Labor and Industries which is the prevailing rate of wage. Prevailing Wage Rates are included in the Contract Documents as an attachment to the end of this section. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 00700 PAGE 8 of 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS 13.8.2 The Contractor shall obtain the minimum hourly wage rate for each trade or occupation from the Department of Labor and Industnes. 13 8.3 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall submit a `Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailmg Wage' pnor to receiving the first payment, and following final acceptance, shall submit Affidavits of Wages Paid' that have been certified by the industrial statistician of the Department of Labor and Industnes. 13.9 THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN POLICIES OF EMPLOYMENT AS FOLLOWS. 13.9 1 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color sex, age, marital status, creed, or national origm and the presence of any sensory mental or physical handicap, and to authorize selections or decisions to be made upon such classifications if they are based on a bona fide occupational qualification. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color sex or national origm. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation, and selection for framing, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices settmg forth the policies of nondiscrimination. 13.9.2 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisement for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color sex, or national origin. 13.10 HOSPITAL SMOKING POLICY 13 10 1 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall obey all rules regarding approved locations to smoke cigarettes, cigars and other similar tobacco products. Smoking on the Hospital campus is not allowed except in designated areas. Chewing tobacco is not allowed in or around the Olympic Medical Center buildings. 13.11 INVALIDITY 13 11 1 Should any provision of this Agreement, at any time, be in conflict with any law ruling, rule, or regulation, or be unenforceable for any reason, then such provision shall continue in effect only to the extent that it remains valid. In the .event any provision of this Agreement becomes less than operative, the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall nevertheless remain in full force and effect. 13.12 ATTORNEY'S FEES 13 12.1 The prevailing party in any suit, action, arbitration or the like commenced m connection with this Agreement shall be entitled to recover its attorneys' fees and costs (not limited to statutory costs), as the court or arbitrator may adjudge reasonable at trial and on any appeal of such suit, action or arbitration proceedmg. ARTICLE 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINAITION BY THE CONTRACTOR Delete Paragraph 14 1.3 in its entirety and add the following: 14 1.3 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may after seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for the Cost of the Work executed (subject to the limitation set forth in section 14.5), unless the Owner commences to MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 00700 PAGE 9 of 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS cure the reason within such seven -day period. The Contractor's recovery shall also include its reasonable demobilization costs. 14.5 LIMITATION ON TERMINATION CLAIMS Add the following Paragraph. 14.5 1 In connection with any termination of this Contract, whether by Owner for convenience or cause or by Contractor for cause, it is agreed and understood that (1) no overhead or profit shall be due or payable with respect to unperformed Work; (2) in no event shall Owner be liable for lost profits or overhead; and (3) in no event shall Contractor be entitled to a ternnation payment that would in the aggregate with all prior payments by Owner to Contractor exceed the Contract Sum as adjusted by agreed Change Orders. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.3 PERMITS SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT SECTION 00700 PAGE 10 of 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to work of this section. Coordinate related requirements, specified m other Division 1 sections including but not limited to the following: B Division 1 Section `Summary of Work, Alternates C Division 1 Section `Construction Facilities' D Division 1 Section `Quality Controls' 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. A list of minimum special conditions existing as a part of this project include but are not necessarily limited to the following categones: 1.3 Permits 1 4 Fire Safety 1.5 Owner Occupancy 1 6 Protection of Existing Utilities 1' 7 Continuity of Utility Services 1.8 Work During Other Than Normal Working Hours 1.9 Waste Material 1 10 Control of Solvents 1 11 Final Acceptance 1 12 Infection Control A. The permits required for execution of this contract, as referenced in General Conditions, Article 3 7 and amendments thereto, may include but are not necessarily limited to the following: B City of Port Angeles Building Permit C. City of Port Angeles Electrical Permit D City of Port Angeles Mechanical Permit E. City of Port Angeles Plumbing Permit F City of Port Angeles Fire Department permits for flammable liquid storage and use, and welding and cutting. G Washington State Department of Health/Department of Labor Industry Permits. a. Contractor to apply for secure and pay for reviews and obtam approvals of submittals normally required after Award of Contract. Include follow -up submittals to Washington State Department of Labor and Industries for electrical work and Department of Health fire alarm and automatic spnnkler system submittals. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI H. Equipment Standards: All equipment furnished and/or installed under this contract shall meet the safety requirements of all applicable codes. 1 4 FIRE SAFETY A. The Contractor shall conduct operations in a manner that is fire -safe for the work area and adjacent areas. Proper fire extinguishers shall be provided, identified, and maintained. Refer to Division 1 Section `Construction Facilities. The premise shall be maintained clear of rubbish, debris, or other material constituting a potential fire hazard. A proper fire separation shall be maintained between work area and any adjacent areas. All exit pathways shall be maintained. The City of Port Angeles Fire Code is incorporated herein by reference, and the Contractor shall adhere to all applicable provisions as determined by the Port Angeles Fire Department. B Where sigmficant or continued noncompliance with fire safety is noted, the Owner reserves the nght to stop the work at no extra cost or extension of time pending remedial action. Furthermore, the Contractor shall be responsible for and reimburse the Owner as appropriate, any fines or penalties levied by the Port Angeles Fire Department. C. Prior to a shutdown or temporary termination of all or part of the existing fire sprinlder system, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and Architect in writing 10 days prior and verbal notification 48 hours in advance. The Contractor shall also provide for manned fire watch of the entire affected area for the duration of the shutdown, even as it includes areas outside the scope of work area. The specific schedule and provisions of the shutdown and fire watch shall be submitted to and approved by the Owner and shall adhere to State and city requirements. 1.5 OWNER OCCUPANCY SECTION 00700 PAGE 11 of 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire construction period. The Owner reserves the nght to occupy all or portions of the newly completed areas of the building provided that such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the work. Refer to Division 1 Section `Summary of Work. 1.6 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES A. Concealed utility of record are shown on the drawings. These are not necessarily exact with respect to location or completeness; therefore, the Contractor shall take the following steps. 1 Notify the Owner in writing, on each occasion, of the intent to work near existing underground utility services or structures. Submit procedure for approval to assure safe and continuous operation of the services. 2. Proceed with sufficient caution to preclude damaging any utilities known or unknown. In the event unidentified utilities are encountered, notify Owner immediately for direction. 3 In the event utilities are damaged dunng construction by general contractor or his subcontractor temporary services and/or repairs must be made immediately to maintain continuity of services at the Contractor's expense. 1.7 CONTINUITY OF UTILITY SERVICES A. Continuity of utility services to and within the building shall be reasonably maintained at all times. Utility systems shutdowns required to facilitate construction work shall be accomplished in accordance with the following requirements: B. The Contractor shall submit a schedule of utility shutdowns within thirty days after the Notice to Proceed. C The Contractor shall confirm all requests for utility shutdowns in writing to the Owner not less than ten (10) days pnor to the proposed date. Verbal notification shall be given 48 hours prior to Owner's representative and Architect. Requests shall include as a minimum the following information: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.8 WORK DURING OTHER THAN NORMAL WORKING HOURS 1.9 WASTE MATERIAL 1.10 CONTROL OF SOLVENTS 1.11 FINAL ACCEPTANCE 1.12 INFECTION CONTROL SECTION 00700 PAGE 12 of 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1 Utility services affected. 2. Reason shutdown is required. 3 Work to be accomplished dunng the shutdown. 4 Proposed shutdown date and time. 5 Duration of the shutdown. 6 List person on site responsible for shutdown dunng its duration, i.e. mechanical subcontractors and/or electrical subcontractors on site man-in- charge. D The actual time and date of all shutdowns will be subject to approval by the Owner In general, they will be scheduled for nights, weekends, holidays or other low intensity use periods. E. The duration of all shutdowns shall be held to a reasonable minimum as determined by the Owner m cooperation with the general contractor and trade being affected. F Materials and equipment required for the work to be accomplished dunng shutdown shall be complete and available on the job for review by the Owner prior to the shutdown. If the Contractor is not adequately prepared, the shutdown will be canceled and rescheduled by the Contractor G The Owner's personnel shall be involved in all shutdown and restarting of utilities. They will inspect the installation prior to restarting and will not restart if any unsafe condition exists. In the event the Contractor s work is not complete during the time scheduled for the shutdown, the Owner may elect to restart the utilities' service. In that event, additional shutdown requirements shall be rescheduled m accordance with the preceding requirements. Restarting shall not be construed as acceptance of the work as complete. H. The Contractor shall include in the bid all costs associated with utilities shutdowns. The Owner will make no extra payment for overtime work, schedule changes or failure to complete utility connections withm authorized shutdown periods. A. When work during other than normal working hours is to be accomplished, the Owner must be advised so that the Owner's Secunty may be properly notified. Any construction activity between the hours of 6 p.m. to 6 a.m. is subject to approval of the Owner A. All refuse and waste material, including excess earth from excavation, shall be disposed of by the Contractor off the Owner's property Waste material shall not be stockpiled on the Owner's property Immediately clean up any spilled material from buildings, roads, etc. A. The use of solvents shall be subject to the approval of the Owner A written procedure for the control of emissions shall be submitted prior to any use. Areas where solvents are to be used must be isolated and vented to the outside (away from air intakes, pedestnan traffic or patient room windows) A. Final acceptance of the project shall be by action of the Board of Commissioners after substantial completion of the project. A. Comply with all requirements for infection control during construction indicated by these documents and as required by Owner's Infection Control and Safety Measures Policies. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI END OF SECTION 00700 SECTION 00700 PAGE 13 of 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for the following PROJECT (Name and location or address) 000k: l4tedica1 center THE OWNER: (Name and address THE ARCHITECT (Name and address TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS AIA Document A201' 1997 2 OWNER 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT .ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS The author of this document 'ha added information ;needed for its completion 'the author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form .An<Addition0 and Deletions Report that notes added linformationi asiwell as reNisions tb the standard I form.,.text.is mailable rom the author and should be fevi e d This document has impottan` legal consequences Consultation..<wi`th an attorney "is encpuraged with respect tp i'Ys Completion or modification'' This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associatetl,peneral Contractors of America ELECTRONIC COPYING of any portion of this AIA Document to another electronic file is prohibited and constitutes a violation of copyright laws as set forth in the footer of this document AIA Document A201°' 1997 Copyright O 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Ame can Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING This AIA' Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Thi draft wa produ ed by AIA software at 15 41 53 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which expir on 1/15/2008 and is of for esale User Notes (1878016282) INDEX (Numbers and Topics in Bold are Section Headings) Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9 6 6 9.9.3 12.3 Acceptance of Work 966 9.8.2, 9.9.3 9 101 9 10.3 12.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 4.2.3 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2, 3.3.2, 3 12.8, 3 18 4.2.3 4.3.8 441 8.31 9.5 1 10.2.5 13 4.2, 13 7 14 1 Addenda 111 311 Additional Costs, Claims for 4.3 4 4.3.5 4.3.6, 6.1 1 10.3 Additional Inspections and Testing 9.8.3 12.2.1 13.5 Additional Time, Claims for 4.3 4 4.3 7 8.3.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 3 1.3 4 9 4 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 111 Aesthetic Effect 4.2.13 4.5 1 Allowances 3.8 All -risk Insurance 11411 Applications for Payment 4.2.5 7.3.8, 9.2, 93 9 4 9.5 1 9.6.3 9 7 1 9.8.5 9 10 11 1.3 14.2.4 14 4.3 Approvals 2.4 3 1.3, 3.5 3 10.2, 3 12, 4.2.7 9.3.2, 13 4.2, 13.5 Arbitration 4.3.3 4 4 4.5 1 4.5.2, 4.6, 8.3 1 9 7 1 11 4.9 11 4 10 Architect 4.1 Architect, Definition of 411 Architect, Extent of Authority 2.4 3.12.7 4.2,4.3.6,44 5.2, 6.3 71.2,7.36,74 9.2, 9.3 1 94 9.5 9.8.3 9 101 9 10.3 12.1 12.2.1 13.5 1 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2 4 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2.11 3.3.3 312.4 312.8,312.10 41.2,4.2.1 4.2.2, 4.2.3 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.10 4.2.12, 4.2.13 4 4 5.2.1 7 4 9 4.2, 9 6.4 9 6.6 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 2.4 11 4 1 1 12.2.1 13.5.2, 13.5.3 14.2.4 Architect's Administration of the Contract 3 1.3 4.2, 4.3 4 4 4 9 4 9.5 Architect's Approvals 2 4 3 1.3 3.5 1 3 10.2, 4.2.7 Architect's Authonty to Reject Work 3.5 1 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Architect's Copyright 16 Architect's Decisions 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.11 4.2.12, 4.2.113 4:3 4' 1 4'45'" 446,4.5 6.3 7.36,7.3.8 81.3,8.3.1 .9.2,94 9.51 9.84 9.91 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Architect's Inspections 4.2.2, 4.2.9 4.34 9 4.2, 9.8:3 99.2,9101 13.5 Architect's Instructions 3.2.3 3.3 1 4.2.6, 4.2.7 4.2i8°`7; 4 1 12.1 13.5.2 Architect's Interpretations 4.2.11 4.2.12, 4.3 6 Architect's Project Represen ative 4.2.10 Architect's Relationship with Contractor 1 1.2, 1 6, 3 1.3 3.2.1 3.2.2; 3.2.3"33 "'3 4.2,3°.'51 3 7.3 3 10 3 11 3 12, 3 16,D 1.8,...1.1,2,A 4.3 4 4 4 1 4 4 7 5.2, 6.2.2, 7 8.3 1 9.2, 9.3 9 4 9.5 97 9.8, 9.9 10.2.6, 10.3 11.3 1147 12, 13 4.2, 13.5 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors 1 1.2, 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.6 9 6.3 9 6.4 °11 4 7„ Architect's Representations 9 4.2, 9.5 1 9 10.1 Architect's Site Visits 4.2.2,4.2.5 4.2.9 4.34 94.2,9.51 1 13.5 Asbestos 10.3 1 Attorneys' Fees 3 18 1 9 10.2, 10.3.3 Award of Separate Contractsf 611 61.2 t 6 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contiacts.for Portions of the Work 5.2 Basic Definitions 1.1 Bidding Requirements 1 1 1 1 1 7 5.2.1 11.5 1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance 11 4.2 Bonds, Lien 9 10.2 Bonds, Performance, and Pa+rrient 7.3 6.4 96.7 910.3 114.911:'5 Building Permit 371 Capitalization 1.3 Certificate of Substantial Completion AIA Document A201. 1997 Copyright C 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved WARNING. Thi AIA Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft was produced by AIA software at 15 41 53 10/03/2007 unde Order No 1000279383_2 which expires on 1/15/2008 and is not for resale User Notes (1878016282) 9 8.3 984 9 8.5 Certificates for Payment 4.2.5 4.2.9 9.3.3 94 9.5 961 9 6 6, 9 7 1 9 10 1 9 10.3 137 14 1 1.3 14.2.4 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 13.5 4 Certificates of Insurance 9 10.2, 11 1.3 Change Orders 1 1 1 2.41 34.2,3.8.2.3 3 11 1 312.8,4.2.8 4.34 4.3.9 5.2.3 71 7.2, 7.3 8.3 1 9.3 1 1 9 10.3 1141.2,1144 1149 121.2 Change Orders, Definition of 7.2.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 3 11 4.2.8,7 8.3 1 9.3 1 1 114.9 Claim, Definition of 4.3.1 Claims and Disputes 3.2.3 4.3 44 4.5 46,611 6.3 7.3.8, 9.3.3 9 10 4 10.3.3 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 4.6.5 Claims for Additional Cost 3.2.3 4.3 4 4.3.5, 4.3 6, 6 1 1 7.3.8, 10.3.2 Claims for Additional Time 3.2.3 4.34 4.37 611 8.3.2,10.3.2 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions 4.3.4 Claims for Damages 3.2.3 318 4.310 6.11 8.3.3 9.51 967 10.3.3 11 1 1 114.5 1147 141.3 14.2.4 Claims Subject to Arbitration 441 4.51 461 Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 13.7 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.2.1 3.2.1 341 3 7 1 3 10 1 312.6,4.3.5 5.2.1 5.2.3 6.2.2,8 1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3 1 111 1141 11 4.6, 11.51 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8 1.2 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration 391 4.2.4 Completion, Conditions Relating to 1 6 1 341 311 315 4.2.2,4.2.9 8.2,94.2,9.8 9.9 1 9 10 12.2, 13 7 14 1.2 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 4.2.9 811 81.3 8.2.3 94.2,9.8,9.91 910.3 9104.2,12.2,137 Compliance with Laws 161 3.2.2,36 37 31210 313 411 448,4.64 466 964 10.2.2,111 114 131 134 13.51 13.5.2 13 6 14 1 1 14.2 1.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 4.3 4 8.3 1 10.3 Conditions of the Contract 111 117 611 614 Consent, Wntten 16 34.2,312.8,314.2,41.2,4.34 464 9.3.2, 9.8.5 9.91 910.2,910.3 1141 13:2, 134.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 114 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.3 1 Construction Change Directives 1 1 1 312.8 4.2.8 4.3.9 7 I 7: 9.3 1 1 Construction Schedules, Contra 1 4 1.2, 3 10 3 12.1 3 12.2,4.3'7.2, 6 1.3 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Continuing Contract Performance 43.3 Contract, Definition of 11.2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 5 4 1 1 114.9 14 Contract Administration 3 1.3 4 9 4 9.5 Contract Award and Execution .Conditions.ltelating to 371 310 5.2,6.1 111.3 1146, 11.51 Contract Documents, The 1.1, 1.2 Contract Documents, Copies Fur shed,and Use of 16 2.2.5 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of 1 1 1 Contract Sum 1 3.8, 4.3 4 4.3.5 4 4.5 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3 74 9.1, 9 4.2, 9.514 96.7 97 10.3.2,1141 14.2.4 14.3.0 Contract Sum, Definition of 91 Contract Time 4.34 4.3 7 44.5 5.2.3 7.2.1.3 7.3 74 8 1 1 8.2, 8.3 1 9.5 1 97 10.3.2, 12.1 1 14.3.2, Contract Time, Definition of 811 CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor Definition of 31 6 1.2 Contractor's Construction`Schedules 1 4 1.2, 3.10 3 12.1 312.2,4.37:2;"61.3 Contractor's Employees AIA Document A201 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1950 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Ame Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING Thi AIA` Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thr AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law Thi draft wa produced by AIA softwa at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 unde Order No 1000279383_2 which xpi on 1/15/2008 nd is not for ale User Notes (1878016282) 3.3.2, 3 4.3 3.8 1 3.9 3 18.2, 4.2.3 4.2.6 10.2, 10.3 11 1 1 11 4 7 14 1 14.2.1 1 Contractor's Liability Insurance 11.1 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner's Forces 3 12.5 3 14.2, 4.2.4 6 11 4 7 12.1.2, 12.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2.2,3.3.2,3 18 1 3 18.2,5 96.2,96.7 9 10.2, 1141.2,1147 1148 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 1 1.2, 1 6, 3 1.3 3.2.1 3.2.2, 3.2.3 3.3 1 3 4.2, 3.5 1 3 7.3 3 10 3 11 3 12, 3 16 3 18, 4 1.2, 4 1.3 4.2, 4.3 4 4 4 1 4 4 7 5.2, 6.2.2, 7 8.3 1 9.2, 9.3 9 4 9.5 97 9.8 9.9 10.2.6, 10.3 11.3 1147 12, 13 4.2, 13.5 Contractor's Representations 1.5.2, 3.5 1 3 12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1 9.3.3 9.8.2 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3 18, 4.2.3 4.3.8, 5.3 1 6 1.3 6.2, 6.3 9.5 1 10 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents 1.5.2, 3.2, 3 7.3 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work 97 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 4.3 10 14 1 Contractor's Submittals 310 311 3' 12,4.2.7 5.2.1 5.2.3 7.3.6,9.2,9.3 9.8.2,98.3 9.91 910.2,910.3 11 1.3 11.5.2 Contractor's Superintendent 3.9 10.2.6 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3 3 4 3 12.10 4.2.2, 4.2.7 4.3.3 6.1.3 6.2.4 71.3 7.34 7.3.6 8.2, 10 12,14 Contractual Liability Insurance 11 1 1.8, 11.2, 11.3 Coordination and Correlation 1.2, 1.5.2, 3.3 1 3 10 3 12.6, 6.1.3 6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.6 2.2.5 3 11 Copyrights 16,317 Correction of Work 2.3 2.4 374 4.2.1 9 4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3 9.91 12.1.2, 12.2, 13 7 1.3 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2 Cost, Definition of 7.3 6 Costs 2.4 3.2.3 3 7 4 3.8.2, 3 15.2, 4.3 5 4.2, 6 1 1 6.2.3 7.3.3.3 7.3.6, 7.3 7 7.3.8, 9 10.2, 10.3.2, 10.5 11.3 11 4 12.1 12.2.1 12.2.4 13.5 14 Cutting and Patching 6.2.5 3.14 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3 14.2, 6.2.4 9.2.1.5 10.2 1.2, 10.2.5 10 6, 11 1 11 4 12.2.4 Damage to the Work 3 14.2, 9.9 1 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5 106 114 12.24 Damages, Claims for 3.2.3 3 18 4.3 10 6 1 1 8.3.3 9.5 1 9.6 7 10.3.3 11 1 1 11 4.5 11 4 7 14 1.3 14.2.4 Damages for Delay 6 1 1 8.3.3 9.5 1 6, 9 7 10.3.2 Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8 1.2 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 81.3 Day Definition of 814 Decisions of the Architect 4.2.6,4.2.7 4.2.11 4.2.12,4.2.13 4.34 441;44.5 446,4.5 6.3 "l6,7.38,8.1.3 8.31 9.2,94'1 9.5 1 9.8 4 9.9 I 13.5.2, 14.2.2;14:2:4' Decisions to Withhold Certificatiou 941 9.5,97 1411.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of 2.3 2.4 3.5 1 4.2.6, 6.2.5 9.5 1 9.5.2, 9.6:6;9.8.2, 9.9.3 9 10 4 12.2.1 13 7 1.3 Defective Work, Definition of 3.5 1 1 Definitions 1 1 2.1 1 3 1 3.5 1 3 12.1 3 12.2,'312.3 4 11 L 4.3 1 5 1 6 1.2, 7.2.1 7.3 1 7.3 6, 8 1 919:8.1 Delays and Extensions of Time 3.2.3 4.3 1 4.3 4 4.3 7 4 4.5 5.2.3 7.2.1 7.3 1 7 4 1 8.3 9.5 1 9 7 1 10.3.2, 10.6.1 .14.3.2 Disputes f 4 1 4 4.3 4 4 4.5 4.6, 6.3 7.3.8 1 Documents and Samples of the Site 3.11 Drawings, Definition of 1 1.5 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Owriersiiip of 1 1 1 1.3 2.2.5 3 11 5.3 Effective Date of Insurance 8.2.2, 11 1.2 Emergencies 4.3.5 10.6, 14 1 1.2 Employees, Contractor's 3.3.2, 3 4.3 3.8.1 3.9 3 18.2; 4.2.3 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3 11 1 1 1147 14 1 14.2.11= Equipment, Labor Materials and 11.3 116,34 3.51 3.8.2,3.8.3 312,313 3 15 1 4.2.6, 4.2.7 5.2.1 6.2.1 7.3.6 9.3.2, 9.3.3 9.5 1.3 9 10.2, 10.2.1 10.2.4 14.2.1.2 Execution and Progress of t1ie-W,ork. AIA Document A201.. 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING: Thi AIA Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi A A Document, or any portion of it, may. result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft was produced by AIA software at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383 2 which expires on 1/15/2008 and not for re ale User Notes (1878016282) 1 1.3 1.2.1 1.2.2, 2.2.3 2.2.5 3 1 3.3 3 4 3.5 3 7 3 10 3 12,3 14 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.3.3 6.2.2,7 1.3 7.34 8.2, 9.5 9.9 1 10.2, 10.3 12.2, 14.2, 14.3 Extensions of Time 3.2.3 4.3 1 4.3 4 4.3 7 4 4.5 5.2.3 7.2 1 7.3 7 4 1 9.5 1 9 7 1 10.3.2, 10 6 1 14.3.2 Failure of Payment 4.36 9.5 1.3 97 910.2,1411.3 14.2.1.2,136 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.1 4.2.9 4.3.2, 9.8.2, 9 10 11 1.2, 11 1.3 11 4 1 11 4.5 12.3 1 13 7 14.2 4 14 4.3 Financial Arrangements, Owner's 2.2.1 13.2.2, 14 1 1.5 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 11 4 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty) Hazardous Materials 10.2.4 10.3 10.5 Identification of Contract Documents 1.5 1 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 5.2.1 Indemnification 3 17 3.18,9 10.2, 10.3.3 10.5 1141.2, 1147 Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.1 312.4 312.10 4.2.7 4.3.3 61.3 6 1 4 6.2.5 9.3.2, 9.6 1 9 6 4 9.9.2, 9 10.3 10.3.3 11.2, 11 4 13.5 1 13.5.2, 14 1 1 4 14 1 4 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 4.3.8, 10.2, 10.6 Inspections 3 1.3 3.3.3 3 7 1 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9 9 4.2, 9.8.2, 9 8.3 9.9.2, 9 10 1 12.2.1 13.5 Instructions to Bidders 111 Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.3 3.3 1 3.8 1 4.2.8, 5.2.1 7 12, 8.2.2, 13.5.2 Insurance 3 18 1 6 1 1 7.3 6, 8.2.1 9.3.2, 9.8 4 9.9 1 9 10.2, 9 10.5 11 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery 11 4.2 Insurance, Contractor's Liability 11 1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2, 11 1.2 Insurance, Loss of Use 11 4.3 Insurance, Owner's Liability 11.2 Insurance, Project Management Protective Liability 11.3 Insurance, Property 10.2.5 11.4 Insurance, Stored Materials 9.3.2, 11 4 1 4 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 9.9 1 11 4 1.5 Insurance Companies, Settlement with 11410 Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2.1 4.2.7 4.2.12, 4.2 13 7 4 Interest 13.6 Interpretation 1.2.3 1.4 4 1 1 4.3 1 5 1 6.1.2, 8 1 4 Interpretations, Written 4.2.11 4.2.12, 4.3 6 Joinder and Consolidation of Claims 4.6.4 Judgment on Final Award 4.6.6 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1 1.3 1 1.6, 3.4 3.5 1 3 8.2, 3.8.3 3 12, 3.13'1 15 1,... 42.6 4.2.7 5.2.1 6.2.1 7.3 6, 9.3.2,9:3.3 9.5.1.3 9 10.2, 10.2.1 10.2.4 14.2.1.2 Labor Disputes 8.3 1 Laws and Regulations 1 6,3.2.2,36 37 3 12 10 3 13 41 1 44:8;44, 96.4 9.91 10.2.2, 11 1 114 13 1 134 13.5 1 13.5.2, 13 6, 14 Liens 2.1.2, 4 4.8 8.2.2, 9.3.3 9 10 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 4.6.4 Limitations, Statutes of 4 6.3 12.2.6, 13 7 Limitations of Liability 2.3 3.2.1 3.5 1 3 7.3 3 12.8 3 12.10, 3 17 3118,_ 4.2.6, 4.2.7 4.2.12,6.2.2,94.2,9 967 9 10 4 10.3.3 10.2.5 1 1 1.2, 11.2.1 114 7 112:5 -134.2 Limitations of Time 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4 3.2.1 3 7.3 3 10 3 11 3.12.5- 345-1, 4.2.7 4.3, 4 4 4.5 4 6 5.2, 5.3 5 4 6.2.4 7.3, 7 4 8.2,9.2,9.31 9.3.3 941 9.596 „9 99 910 111.3 1141.5 1146,114'10 12.2, 13.5 137 14 Loss of Use Insurance 11.4.3 Matenal Suppliers 1 6 3 12.1 4.2.4 4.2.6 5.2 1 9.3 9 4.2;9.6, 910.5' Materials, Hazardous 10.2.4 10.3 10.5 AIA Document A201° 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights served. WARNING: Thi AIA' Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Thi dr ft was produced by AIA oftware at 15 41 53 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which expires on 1/15/2008 and is not for le User Notes (1878016282) Materials, Labor Equipment and 1 1.3 1 1 6, 161 34 3.5 1 3.8.2,3.8.23 3 12,3 13 3 15 1 4.2.6, 4.2.7 5.2.1 6.2.1 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3 9.5 1.3 9 10.2, 10.2 1 10.2.4 14.2 1.2 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3 1 3 12.10 4.2.2, 4.2.7 9 4.2 Mechanic's Lien 448 Mediation 44 1 44.5 4 4 6, 4 4 8. 4.5, 4 6 1 46.2,8.3 1 10.5 Minor Changes in the Work 1 1 1 3 12.8 4.2.8 4.3 6, 7 1 7 4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of 111 Modifications to the Contract 111 11.2,37.3 311 41.2,4.2.1 5.2.3 7 8.31 97 10.3.2,1141 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 9 6 6, 9.9.3 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.3 2.4 3.5 1 4.2.6, 6.2.5 9.5 1 9.8.2, 9.9.3 9 104 12.2.1 13 7 1.3 Notice 2.2.1 2.3 2.4 3.2.3 3.3 1 3 7.2, 3 7 4 3 12.9 4.3 44.8 46.5 5.2.1 8.2.2,97 910 10.2.2,111.3 11 4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4 13.3 13.5 1 13.5.2, 14 1 14.2 Notice, Written 2.3 2.4 3.3 1 3.9 3 12.9 3 12.10 4.3 44.8,4 6.5 5.2.1 8.2.2, 9 7 9 10 10.2.2, 10.3 11 1.3 11 4 6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4 13.3, 14 Notice of Testing and Inspections 13.5 1 13.5.2 Notice to Proceed 8.2.2 Notices, Permits, Fees and 2.2.2, 3.7 3 13 7.3 6.4 10.2.2 Observations, Contractor's 1.5.2, 3.2, 3 7.3 4.3 4 Occupancy 2.2.2, 9.6.6 9.8 11 4 1.5 Orders, Written 1 1 1 2.3 3.9 4.3 6, 7 8.2.2, 11 4.9 12.1 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3 1 OWNER 2 Owner Definition of 2.1 Owner, Information and Services Required of the 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2 1 3 12.4 3 12.10 4.2.7 4.3.3 6.1.3 6 1 4 6.2.5 9.3.2, 9.6 1 9.6.4 9.9.2, 9 10.3 10.3.3 11.2, 11 4 13.5 1 13.5.2, 14 1 1 4 14 1 4 Owner's Authority 16 2.11 2.3 2.4 34.2,3.81 312.10 314.2,41.2, 4 1.3 4.2.4 4.2.9 4.3 6 4 4 7 5.2.1 5.2.4 5 4 1 6 1 6.3 7.2.1 7.3 1 8.2.2, 8.3 1 9.3 1 9.3.2, 9.5 1 9 9 1 9 10.2, 10.3.2, 11 1.3 11.3 1 11 4.3 11 4 10 12.2.2, 12.3 1 13.2.2, 14.3 14 4 Owner's Financial Capability 2.2 1 13.2.2, 14 1 1.5 Owner's Liability Insurance 11.2 Owner's Loss of Use Insurance 11 4.3 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 11.2,5.2,5.3 54 964 9 10.2, 14.2.2 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 2.4, 12.2.4. 14.2.2.2 Owner's Right to Clean Up 6.3 Owner's Right to Perform Construction an Award Separate Contracts 1 6.1 Owner's Right to Stop the Work 2.3 Owner's Right to Suspend the y. cork,„ 14.3 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service 1 1 1 1.6, 2.2.5 3.2.1 3 11 1 3 17 1„.412.12, 5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use 9 6 6 9.9 11 4 1.5 Patching, Cutting and 3.14, 6.2.5 Patents 3 17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5 7.3.8 9.2, 9.3 9 4 9.5 1 6.3 9 7 L-9.8.5 9 10 1 9 10.3 9 10.5 11 1.3; 14.2.4 4.3 Payment, Certificates for 4.2.5 4.2.9 9.3.3 9.4 9.5 96.1 9.66,971 9,101 9 10.3 13 7 14 1 1.3 14.2.4 i Payment, Failure of 4.3.6 9.5 1.3 97 9 10.2,1411.3 14.2.1.2,1 Payment, Final 4.2.1 4.2.9 4.3.2, 9.8.2, 9 1b -11 11 4.5 12.3 1 13 7 14.2.4 14 4.3 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7.364 967 910.3 114.9 11.5 Payments, Progress 4.3.3 9.3 9.6 9.8.5 910.3 136,14.2.3 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 Payments to Subcontractors; 5 4.2, 9.5 1.3 9 6.2, 9 6.3 96 4 9.6.7 11 4.8 14.2.1.2 PCB 10.3 1 AIA Document A201.. 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All fights reserved. WARNING. This AIe Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA! Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law This draft was produced by AIA software at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which expires 1/15/2008 and is not for resale User Notes (1878016282) Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.364 967 910.3 114.9 11.5 Permits, Fees and Notices 2.2.2, 3.7 3 13 7.364 10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlonnated Biphenyl 10.3 1 Product Data, Definition of 3 12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3 11 3.12, 4.2.7 Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 4.3.3 8.2, 9.8,9.9 1 14 1 4 Progress Payments 4.3.3 9.3 9.6, 9.8.5 9 10.3 13.6, 14.2.3 Project, Definition of the 114 Project Management Protective Liability Insurance 11.3 Project Manual, Definition of the 117 Project Manuals 2.2.5 Project Representatives 4.2.10 Property Insurance 10.2.5 11.4 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulations and Laws 16 3.2.2,3.6,37 312.10,313 411 44.8 46, 964 9.9 1 10.2.2, 11 1 11 4 13 1 134 13.5 1 13.5.2, 13 6, 14 Rejection of Work 3.5 1 4.2.6 12.2.1 Releases and Waivers of Liens 9 10.2 Representations 1.5.2, 3.5 1 3 12.6 6.2.2, 8.2.1 9.3.3 9 4.2, 9.5 1 9.8.2, 9 10 1 Representatives 2.1 1 3 1 1 3.9 4 1 1 4.2.1 4.2.10 5 1 1 5 1.2, 13.2.1 Resolution of Claims and Disputes 4.4, 4.5, 4.6 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3 18, 4.2.3 4.3.8, 5.3 1 6 1.3 6.2, 6.3 9.5 1 10 Retainage 9.3 1 96.2,9.8.5 9.9 1 9 10.2,9 10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 1.5.2, 3.2, 3 7.3 3 12.7 6 1.3 Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect 3 10 1 3 10.2, 3 11 3 12, 4.2, 5.2, 6 1.3 9.2, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3 12 Rights and Remedies 1 1.2, 2.3 2.4 3.5 1 3 15.2, 4.2.6 4.3 4 4.5 4 6 5.3 5 4 6.1 6.3 7.3 1 8.3 9.5 1 9 7 10.2.5 10.3 12.2.2, 12.2.4 13.4 14 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitration 4 6.2 Safety of Persons and Property 10.2, 10.6 Safety Precautions and Programs 3.3 1 4.2.2, 4.2.7 5.3 1 10.1, 10.2, 10.6 Samples, Definition of 3 12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3 11 3.12, 4.2.7 Samples at the Site, Docuients, and 3.11 Schedule of Values 9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules, 1 4 1.2, 3 10 3 Construction 12.1 4.37.2, 6 1.3 Separate Contracts and Contractors 1 14 3 12.5 3 14.2,4.2.4 4.2.7 46 "6, -8.3 1 11 4 7 12.1.2, 12.2.5 Shop Drawings, Definition of 3 12 1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3 11 3.12, 4.2.7 X, Site, Use of 4. 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Site Inspections r 1.2.2, 3.2.1 3.3.3 37 1 4.2;4.34 94.2,9101 13.5 Site Visits, Architect's 4.2.2,4.2.9 4.34 94.2,9.5.1 9.9.2, 10 1 13.5 Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6 12.2.1 13.5 Specifications, Definition of the 116 Specifications, The 1 1 1 1.1.6, 1 1 7 1.2.2, 1 6, 3 1.1 1 12.10 3 17 Statute of Limitations 4 6.3 12.2.6, 13 7 Stopping the Work 2.3 4.3 6, 9 7 10.3 14 1 Stored Materials 6.2.1 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 11 4 1 4 Subcontractor Definition of 511 SUBCONTRACTORS AIA Document A201° 1997 Copyright e 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Ame Institute of Architects All rights reserved WARNING Thi AIA' Document protected by U.S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos rble under the law Thi draft wa produ ed by AIA software at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which 'Tires on 1/15/2008 nd is not fo ale Us Notes (1878016282) 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3 12.1 4.2.3 5.2.3 5.3 5 4 9.3 1.2, 967 Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9 10 10.2.1, 11.4 7, 11.4.8, 14.1, 14.2.1, 14.3.2 Submittals 1 6 3 10 3 11 3 12, 4.2.7 5.2.1 5.2.3 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3 9.8,99 1 9 10.2,9 10.3 11 1.3 Subrogation, Waivers of 6 1 1 11 4.5 11.4 7 Substantial Completion 4.2.9 8 1 1 8 1.3 8.2.3 9 4.2, 9.8, 9.9 1 9 10.3 9 10 4.2, 12.2, 13 7 Substantial Completion, Definition of 9.8 1 Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2.3 5.2.4 Substitution of Architect 4 1.3 Substitutions of Materials 3 4.2, 3.5 1 7.3 7 Sub subcontractor Definition of 5 1.2 Subsurface Conditions 4.3 4 Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 33, 3 4 3 12.10 4.2.2, 4.2.7 4.3.3 6.1.3 6.2 4 7 1.3 7.3.6, 8.2, 8.3 1 9 4.2, 10 12, 14 Surety 447 54 1.2, 9.8.5 9 10.2,9 10.3 14.2.2 Surety Consent of 9 10.2, 9 10.3 Surveys 2.2.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.4 Suspension of the Work 5 4.2, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 4.3 6, 5 4 1 1 11 4.9 14 Taxes 3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.6.4 Termination by the Contractor 4.3 10 14.1 Termination by the Owner for Cause 4.3 10, 5 4 1 1 14.2 Termination of the Architect 4 1.3 Termination of the Contractor 14.2.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF TIIE CONTRACT 14 Tests and Inspections 3 1.3 3.3.3 4.2.2, 4.2 6 4.2.9 9 4.2, 9.8.3 9 9.2, 9 10 1 10.3.2, 11 4 1 1 12.2.1 13.5 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 3.2.3 4.3 1 4.3 4 4.3 7 4 4.5 5:2.3 1.2 1 73 1 74 1 8.3 9.5 1 97 1 10.3.2, 10.6 1 14.3.2 Time Limits 2.1.2,2.2,2.4 3.2.1 37.3 3 10 3 11 3 12.5 3 15 1 4.2, 4.3 4 4 4.5 4 6, 5.2, 5.3 5 4 6.2 4 7.3 7 4 8.2, 9.2, 9.3 1 9.3.3 9 4 1 9.5 "9 6, 9 7 9.8, 9.9 9 10 11 1.3 11 4 1.5 11 4.6 11 4 10 12.2, 13.5 13 7 14 Time Limits on Claims 4.3.2, 4.3.4, 4.3.8, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6 Title to Work 9.3.2, 9.3.3 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTIONOF WORK 12 Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions 4.3 4 8.3 1 10.3 Unit Prices 4.3.9 7.3.3.2 Use of Documents 1 1 1 1 6,2.2.5 3 12.6, 5.3 Use of Site 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of 9.2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims by the Architect 13 4.2 Waiver of Claims by the Cotitractor 4.3 10 9 10.5 11 4 7 13 4.2 Waiver of Claims by the Owner'. 4.3 10 9.9.3 9 10.3 9 104 11 4.3 11 4.5 1147 12.2.2.1 13 4.2, 14.2.4 Waiver of Consequential Damages 4.3.10, 14.2.4 Waiver of Liens 910.2,9104 Waivers of Subrogation 6.1 1 11 4.5 11.4 7 Warranty 3.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.5.3, 9.3.3, 9.8:4, 9 :9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13.7.1.3 Weather Delays 4.3 7.2 Work, Definition of 1 1.3 Written Consent AIA Document A201. 1997 Copyright e 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All fights reserved. WARNING. Thi AIA' Document protected by U 5 Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthor zed reproduction or distribution of thi AIA' Document or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law Thi draft wa produ ed by AIA softwar at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 unde Order No 1000279383_2 which expi on 1/15/2008 and is not fo esale User Notes (1878016282) 16 34.2,3128,314.2,41.2,4.34 464 9.3.2, 9 8.5 9.9 1 9 10.2, 9 10.3 11 4 1 13.2, 13 4.2 Wntten Interpretations 4.2 11 4.2 12, 4.3 6 Written Notice 2.3 2.4 3.3 1 3.9 3 12.9 3 12.10 4.3 4 4.8 4 6.5 5.2 1 8.2.2, 9 7 9 10 10.2.2, 10.3 11 1.3 11 4 6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4 13.3 14 Wntten Orders 111 2.3 3.9 4.36 7 8.2.2,114.9 12.1 12.2 13.5.2, 14.3 1 AIA Document A201. 1997 Copyright C 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The America Institute of Architects All fights reserved. WARNING. Thi AIA' Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft wa produced by AIA softwa at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 unde Orde No 1000279383_2 which expires on 1/15/2008 and not for esale User Notes (1878016282) ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1 1 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not mclude other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample `forms, the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements). 1 1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Contractor (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub subcontractor (3) between the Owner and Architect or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor The Architect shall, however be entitled to performance and' enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Arclutei:t's duties. 11.3 THE WORK The term 'Work' means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed, or partially completed, and includes all other labor matenals, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1 1 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents.may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. 1 1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,iocation and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. 1 1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the wntten requirementsfor matenals, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services 1 1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS I 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor The Contract Documents are complementary and what is -required by- one shall be as bmding as if required by all, performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produeethe indicated results. 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or m establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated m the Contract Documents, words which have well -known technical or construction industry meanings are used m the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized:meanings. AIA Document A201° 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Ame Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING• Thi AIA' Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos rble under the law This draft was produced by AIA oftware at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 unde Order No 1000279383_2 which xpires 1/15/2008 and not for resale User Notes (1878016282) 1.3 CAPITALIZATION 1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the Amencan Institute of Architects. 1 4 INTERPRETATION 1 4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as all' and any' and articles such as 'the and an, but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears m another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request. 1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE 1.6.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor Sub subcontractor or matenal or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings; Specifications' and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law statutory and other reserved nghts, in addition to the copyrights. All copies of Instruments of Service, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor Sub subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner Architect and the Architect's consultants. The Contractor Subcontractors, Sub subcontractors and.matenal or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and, other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authonzation shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants' copyrights or other reserved rights. ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 GENERAL 2.1 1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughoutahet Contract Documents as if singular m number The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1 the Architect does not have such authonty The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the `Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the written request of the Contractor prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owners obligations under the Contract. Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or AIA Document A201° 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The America Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING Thi AIA Document protected by U 5 Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law This draft wa produced by AIA softwa at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2001 under Orde No 10002793832 which xpi es on 1/15/2008 nd not fo resale User Notes (1818016282) continuation of the Work. After such evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall not matenally vary such financial arrangements without pnor notice to the Contractor 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees, including those required under Section 3 7 1 which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. 2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness. Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a wntten request for such information or services. 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Worl1. 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements. of, the Contfact Documents as required by Section 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a wntten order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated, however the nght of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give nse to..a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person pr entity except to the extent required by Section 6 1.3 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work m accordance with the Contract Documents and fails withm a seven -day penod after receipt of wntten notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven -day penod give The Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a three -day period. If the Contractor within such three -day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such defrcienc es. In.such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the•Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation fof'the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter duethe Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the differenceto the Owner ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 GENERAL 3.1 1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number The term 'Contractor' means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either 11 activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the =Contract, or by tests, inspections or app als required or performed by persons other than the Contractor 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the vanous Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the AIA Document A201". 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963, 1966, 1970 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The Ame scan Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING This AIA' Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law Thi draft wa produced by AIA software at 15 41 53 10/03/2007 unde Orde No 1000279383_2 which expire on 1/15/2008 and not for ale User Notes (1878016282) Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3 shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovenng errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. 3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor dunng this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect, but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made m the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract. Documents. The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations, but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. 3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided m Sections 4.3 6 and 4.3 7 If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall pay such costs and;dar iages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error inconsistency omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor" shall evaluate the iobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsi<te safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that suchmeans, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely wntten notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences �r procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contr'actor's em- mployees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work Tor or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to detemiineithat such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery water heat, utilities, transportation,- an&other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's; employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. AIA Document A201' 1997 Copyright e 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Amer Institute of Architects All aghts reserved. WARNING This AIA' Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthor zed reproduction or distribution of thi AIA' Document or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law Thi draft was produ ed by AIA software at 15 41 53 10/03/2007 under Orde No 1000279383_2 which xpi es on 1/15/2008 and not for ale User Notes (1878016282) 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment fumished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authonzed, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor improper,or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. 3.6 TAXES 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go mto effect. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.71 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other pernuts and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. However if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 3.7 4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances,.bililding codes,; and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include m the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner.may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor-fias reasonable objection. n om° 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: 1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment: delivered at tile site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included.m the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual.,. costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.8.2.2. 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work. 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent supenntendent and necessary assistants who shill be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor Important AIA Document A201" 1997 Copyright C 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Americ Institute of Architects All rights reserved WARNING. Thi AIA' Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law Thi dr ft was produced by AIA softwa at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 unde Orde No 1000279383_2 which xpi on 1/15/2008 and Is not for esale User Notes (1878016282) communications shall be confirmed in wnting. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on wntten request in each case. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 The Contractor promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owners and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3.11 1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction, and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor Sub subcontractor manufacturer supplier or distributor to illustrate some,portion of the Work. 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate matenais or equipment for some portion of the -Work. 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate matenais, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations bf Section 4.2g Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned 1 y the Architect without action. 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve,and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. 3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Docuthents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal hasbeen approved by the Architect. AIA Document A201. 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING. This AIA! Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthor zed reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft wa produ ed by AIA oftwa at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 under Order No 10002793832 which expires on 1/15/2008 and not fo ale User Notes (1878016282) 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in wnting of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or onussions m Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Daia, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture or engineermg unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all perfonnante and design critena that such services must satisfy The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to }be irovided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional ...Shop.pr_awings_ and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's wntten approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance.and design criteria that such services must satisfy Pursuant to this Section 3 12.10 the Architect will review, approve gr.take other appropnate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed m the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be for the adequacy of the performance or design cnteria required by the Contract Documents. 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or'to make its parts fit together properly t� 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed f construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering.such constructions or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner pr aseparate c(intractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor• such consent sh41 not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 3.15 CLEANING UP 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulationof waste materials or' rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor a d AIA Document A201. 1997 Copyright O 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Ame scan Institute of Architects All rights reserved WARNING This AIA' Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA' Document or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos ible under the law This draft wa produced by AIA oftwa at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 unde Orde No 1000279383_2 which expi on 1/15/2008 and is not for resale User Notes (1878016282) 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS 3.171 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent nghts and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copynght violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 To the fullest extent penrutted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor m accordance with Section 11.3 the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, ansmg out of or resultmg from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction -of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the 'Contractor a Subcontractor anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they,may,be ).fable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other nghts or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3 18. 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3 18 by an employee of the Contractor a Subcontractor anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3 18 1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT 4.1 1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully,practicing architecture identified as such m the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as ifsingular in number The term Architect' means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will'be. an Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with theOwner's concurrence, from time to time durmg the one -year period for correction of Work describe4in Section 12.2. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. 4.2.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's operations (1) to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and AIA Document A201 1997 Copyright 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Amer can Institute of Archrt =cts All rights reserved. WARNING. Thi AIA Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized r...�- ,..:.action or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft was produced by AIA software at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which xpires on 1/15/2008 and of fo re alt User Notes (1878016282) deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs m connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's nghts and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 3.3 1 4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work m accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in;the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and" "Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authonty to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3 whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made m good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authonty shall give nse to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Arclutect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3 3.5 and 3 12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or4unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences;or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7 4 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Complet and the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authoritty of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated m the Contract. Documents. AIA Document A201. 1997 Copyright 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 Ame an Institute of Architects All rights served. WARNING. Thi AIA Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the 10/03/ 7 007 nde Orde No 1000279383_2 which xpi on 1/15/2008 and is User Notes 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal law This draft was produ ed by AIA softwa at 15 41 53 on of for res le (1878016282) 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Section 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be m writing or m the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and initial decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in -good faith. 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money extension of time or other relief with respect to the term$ of the Contract. The term 'Claim also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must be initiated by wntten notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days afterr q cp.t. rence of the event, giving nse to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later Claims must be initiated by wntten notice to the Architect and the other party 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing_ or as provided m Section 9 7 1 and Article 14 the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at the Site =which are-(1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in-the Contract. Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost,, of, or tune required for performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable,$djt stinenf in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially" different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor m writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party it opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision. If the conditions encountered are materially different, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial determination, subject to further proceedings'pursuantto Section 4 4 4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, wntten notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prioriioticeis not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangenng life or property arising under Section 10 6. 4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a written order for a minor change m the Work issued by the Architect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner (5) termination of the Contract by the Owner (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim s1ialTbe filed in accordance with this Section 4.3 AIA Document A201 1997 Copyright e 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Ame an Institute of Architects All rights reserved WARNING. Thi AIA' Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law This draft wa produced by AIA softwa at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 under Order No 10002793832 which expi 1/15/2008 nd of for resale User Notes (1878016282) 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time 4.3.71 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary 4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. 4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given'to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter 4.3.9 If unit pnces are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit pnces to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other :for consequential damages arising out of or relatmg to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes: 1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financitig,_ business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party's termination.in accordance with Article 14 Nothing contained m this Section 4.3 10 shall be deemed to preclude an award,of liquidated direct damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those ansrng under Sections 10.3 through 10.5 shall be referred initially to the Architect for des' ion: An imtial decision by the Architect shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation, arbitration oi litigation of all Claims between the Contractor and Owner arising pnor to the date fmal payment is due, unless 30'ays °have after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by`theiArchitect The Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner 4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more yf the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with sdti�pporting, data`from the other party (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that, in the Architect's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim. 4.4.3 In evaluating Claims, the Architect may but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information front either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in•iendenng a decision. The Architect may request the Owner to authonze retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. 4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional: supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data, advise the Architect when the response or supporting data will be funiiihed'Oradviie "tlie Architect that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting .data, ifany,.the Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. AIA Document A201.. 1997 Copyright O 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Amer can Institute of Architects All rights reserved WARNING Thi AIA' Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA Document or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft wa produced by AIA software at 15 41 53 10/03/2007 unde Order No 10002793832 which spires 1/15/2008 nd is not for ale User Notes (1878016282) 4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. 4.4.6 When a wntten decision of the Architect states that (1) the decision is final but subject to mediation and arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days' period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been imtiated, such decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. 4 4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter the Architect or the Owner may but is not obligated to, notify the surety if any of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default, the Architect or the Owner may but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance m resolving the controversy 4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's hen, the party asserting such Claim may proceed In accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines pnor to resolution of th Claim by the Architect, by mediation or by arbitration. 4.5 MEDIATION 4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for m Sections 4.3 10 9 10 4 and 9 10.5 shall, after mitial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or,the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party 4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the Amencan,Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shall be filed m wnting with the otherpar y to the Contract and with the Amencan Arbitration Association. The request may be made concurrently with the filing.of a demand for arbitration but, m such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order 4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached m tediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4.6 ARBITRATION 4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Sections 4.3 10 9 10 4 and 9 10.5 shall, after decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to arbitration. Pnor to arbitration, the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by mediation m accordance with the provisions of Section 4.5 4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. 4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified m Sections 4 4 6and 4.6 1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has ansen, and in no; event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Section 13 7 AIA Document A201°' 1997 Copyright e 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Amer an Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING. Thi AIA' Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA' Document, or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law This dr ft wa produced by AIA oftwar at 15 41 53 10/03/2007 unde Orde No 1000279383_2 which xpir on 1/15/2008 and is not for resale User Notes (1876016282) 4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder No arbitration ansing out of or relating to the Contract shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants, except by wntten consent containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be jomed. No arbitration shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner parties other than the Owner Contractor a separate contractor as described m Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. No person or entity other than the Owner Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be mcluded as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration mvolving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therein. The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additionalperson or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 1 4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filmg a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. 4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall he final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court havmg jurisdiction thereof. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.1 1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform :a,portion _of,the, Work at the site. The term 'Subcontractor' is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor The term 'Subcontractor' does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor 5.1.2 A Sub subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term 'Sub- subcontractor' is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub subcontractor or an authorized representati`ve,of the Sub-j subcontractor 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special-design) proposed for each prmcipal portion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor m writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection any such, proposed person or entity Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. f 1 1 1 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owrier or Architect had made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyo tie to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the.proposed.but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However no increase m the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor person or entity previously selecte if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute. AIA Document A201. 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Ame can Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING. This AIA' Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and wi11 be prosecuted to the maximum extent nos able under the law This draft wa produced by AIA oftware at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 nder Orde No 1000279383_2 which xpi on 1/15/2008, nd is not for resale User Notes (1878016282) 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such nghts, and shall allow to the Subcontractor unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at vanance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub subcontractors. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: 1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepfs'bynotifying the Subcontractor and Contractor m writing; and .2 assignment is subject to the pnor rights of the surety if any obligated under bond relating to the Contract. 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1 1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project witlithe Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts m connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided.,in 4.3 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or:npeiiatiohs on the site, the term 'Contractor' in the Contract Documents m each case shall mean the Contractor who e xe&ttes, each separate Owner- Contractor Agreement. t 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces an0 of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor sha1Iiarticip4e with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a jomt•review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. 6.1 4 Unless otherwise provided m the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations' related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subjectsto the same obligations and to have the same nghts which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3 this Article 6 and Articles 10 11 and 12. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201s' 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING Thi AIA' Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos rble under the law Thi draft was produ ed by AIA software at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 under Orde No 1000279383_2 which expi on 1/15/2008 and of fo ale User Notes (1878016282) 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor shall, pnor to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. 6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction; of the Contractor The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor m Section 3 14 1 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surroundmg area free from waste materials`and rubbish; the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 71 GENERAL 71 1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,' subject. to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere m the Contract Documents. 71.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to'by.the Contractor an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. 71.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly unless otherwise provided in the Change Order Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 1 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner Contractor and Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: 1 change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment, if any in the Contract Sum, and .3 the extent of the adjustment, if any in the Contract Time. 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Section 7.3.3 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by.the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the;Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other °revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordmgly 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order AIA Document A201. 1997 Copyright O 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The America Institute of Architects All rights reserved WARNING Thi AIA Document protected by U.S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos ible under the law This draft wa produ ed by AIA softwa t 15 41 53 10/03/2007 unde Orde No 1000279383_2 which expires on 1/15/2008 nd not for resale User Notes (1878016282) 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods. 1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation, .2 unit pnces stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually fixed or percentage fee, or 4 as provided in Section 7.3 6 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor mdicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including adjustment m Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order I 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustient in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, m case of an increase m the Co nttact Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.13 the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting,together_with, appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3 6 shall be limited to the following: 1 costs of labor including social secunty old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' compensation insurance; .2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether-incorporated or consumed; .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented 'from the Contractor or others; .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes, related to the Work; and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. 7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change -which results in a net decrease m the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When/both additions, and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhea shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any with respect to that change. 7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner amqunts not in dispute for such changes m the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accomiianied by a Chtuw Order indicating the parties' agreement with part or all of such costs. For any portion of such cost that renain4 in dispute, the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs. That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Tinie, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order 7 4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7 4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by wntten order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor TheContractor shall carry out such written orders promptly AIA Document A201 1997 Copyright 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved WARNING. Thi AIA' Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treats Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA' Document or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalti and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos rble under the law Thi draft was produced by A.A software at 15 41 53 10/03/2007 nder Order No 1000279383_ which expires on 1/15/2008 and is not for resale User Notes 1878016282) ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1 1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authonzed adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8 8.1.4 The term day' as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in:writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of msurance required by Article I 1 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed bytthe I effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of commencement is established by the Cantr4ct Documentsior a notice to proceed given by the Owner the Contractor shall notify the Owner in wnting not ess'thhn five°days'or' other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, echa iic's,1iens and other security interests. 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work wan act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner-or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in delivenes, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authonzed by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 4.3 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under Other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 1 c t 9.1 CONTRACT SUM t L 9.1 1 The Contract Sum is stated m the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the totar amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents: 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared m such form and supported by such data t� substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to AIA Document A201. 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING This AIA' Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi ASA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law This draft was produced by AIA software at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 under Orde No 1000279383_2 which expires on 1/15/2008 and is not for resale User Notes 118760162821 payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. 9.3.1 1 As provided in Section 7.3 8, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by mtenm determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved m advance by the Owner payment may similarly be made for matenals and equipment suitably storedoff the site at a location agreed upon in wnting. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such matenals and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site fo:r such materials and equipment stored off the :site. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments froth Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and Clear pf liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor materials and equipment relating to the Work. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will, witlun seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor for such amount as the Ar'chitect.determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner :in writing of the Architect's reasons for vrithholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5 1 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owiier,a,_ based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representationsare subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of =nor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to coinple ion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified: However theissuafce of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on- site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, nethods, techiiiques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors hnd material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum: 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required 11y Section 9 4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9 4 IL If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Paymment or because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment= previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of: 1 defective Work not remedied, AIA Document A201.' 1997 Copyright 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Ame an Institute of Architects All rights reserved WARNING Thi A A Document is protected by U.S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Thi draft was produced by AIA softwa at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which expi on 1/15/2008 and s of for resale User Notes (1878016282) .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless secunty acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor matenals or equipment; 4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will`be made for amounts previously withheld. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payntent the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor upon receipt of payment from the Owner out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with eachSnbontiactor require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub subcontractors m a similar manner 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided m Sections'942, 9.63 and 964 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum'of tJie Coritract'Suiri;' payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be field by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished matenals, or both, under` contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor shall create an fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any persoa or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.71 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Contractor may upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owned and Arclutect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201° 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The Arne an Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING Thi AIA` Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Thi dr ft wa produced by AIA oftwa at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which expires 1/15/2008 and not for resale User Notes (1878016282) 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a. comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspectiorfby the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architec.`t will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion,; shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date offSubstanhal Coniplett_on, of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion ;hall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety if any the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements ofthe Contract Documents. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at anystage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Section 11 4 1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the' Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for>payments, retamage, if any security maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and'have agreed,in writing concerning the penod for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required bSrtlie Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepareand submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy ortlse shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determii1ed by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. 9.9.2 Immediately pnor to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and'belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on -site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with: terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the AIA Document A201.. 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1910 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Amer Institute of Architects All fights reserved WARNING Thi AIA Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of ihi AIA Document, or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos ible under the law Thi draft was produced by AIA softwa at 15 41 53 10/03/2007 nde Order No 1000279383_2 which xpi 1/15/2008 nd of for ale User Notes (1878016282) final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9 10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (I) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain m force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover` the required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety if any to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of hens, claims, secunty interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner the "Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains'unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be_ compelled To pay in A discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially !delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and withoutteiluinatiiig the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fiilly completed and „accepted. If,the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions govenung fmal_payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from. 1 hens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising ou, of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. 9.10.5 Acceptance of fmal payment by the Contractor a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee asainsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ,,.r 1 ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY i. 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS i 1 10.1 1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions acid programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonableprotection°to prevent damage, injury or loss to 1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub subcontractors; and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from.damage, .injury.or loss. AIA Document A201. 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Ame can Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING This AIA Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law This draft was produced by AIA softwar at 15 41 53 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which expi on 1/15/2008 and is not for resale User Notes (1878016282) 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain. as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2 1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor a Subcontractor a Sub subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2 1.2 and 10.2.1.3 except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are m addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3 18 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise, designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so°AsIo` endariger'its'T"°' safety 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work m the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. i 10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to venfy the presence orabsence oflhe material or substance reported by the Contractor and, m the event such matenal or substance is found to be present, to venfy that it has been rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall Turtush in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests" verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such matenal or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly replx.to in wnting stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owiier the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. Wheirthe material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon writteniagreement of tie Owner and Contractor The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall:be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut -down, delay and start -up wliich(adjustmenfs shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor Subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resultingfrom performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk•bf bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3 1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such c1aim,.damage, loss Or expense is attributable to bodily injury sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) and provided that such damage, loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity 10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Section 10.3 for matenals and substances brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201. 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1916 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The Ame scan Institute of Architects All rights reserved WARNING. Thi AIA' Document protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of t.hi AIA` Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos ible under the law This draft was produced by AIA software at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 unde Orde No 1000279383_2 which xpi 1/15/2008 nd is of for esale User Notes (1878016282) 10.5 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of a hazardous matenal or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. 10.6 EMERGENCIES 10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property the Contractor shall act, at. the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Section 4.3 and Article 7 ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE r. 11 1 1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authonzed to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may anse out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any ofithe may be liable: 1 claims under workers' compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee ee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; e .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; 7 claims for bodily mjury or property damage ansmg out of completed operations; and .8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor'sohligatigns under Section 3 18 11 1.2 The msurance required by Section 11 1 1 shall be written for not less than limits of liabilit specified in the Contract Documents or required by law whichever coverage is greater Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims -made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. 11 1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner priorto commencement of the Work. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11 1 shall c¢ntairr`a p ovisioil that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30klays' priori written notice has been given to the Owner If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain m priori final payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation oc such cove age shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9 10.2. Information concerning reuction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished b the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. y 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability i 11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Optionally the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Projectqanagement Protective Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's, Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction operations under the Contract. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Suni to pay the cost of purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner The minimum limits of liabilitTpufeliased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability,Insurance.under Sections 11 1 1.2 through 11 1 1.5 AIA Document A201° 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING. Thi AIA Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties nd will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft was produced by AIA softwa at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which spires on 1/15/2008, and not for sale User Notes (18780162821 11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance, the Owner Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance. The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Section 11 1 11 4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11 4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authonzed to do business m the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's risk 'all -risk' or equivalent policy fonn m the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, compnsing total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided m the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons entities who are beneficianes of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9'10 'pr until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11 4 to be covered, whichever is later This insurance shall include interests of the Owner the Contractor Subconttactors and Sub- subcontractors in the Project. 11.4.1 1 Property insurance shall be on an all -nsk' or equivalent policy form and shall include, without;limltation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including; without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, riyitidstprgi„fa18,.ewAr1‘.,�_ testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. 11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract with,a l of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor m wrung prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the t Contractor Subcontractors and Sub subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change'Order the bost_thereof shall be charged to the Owner If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner lo purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in wntmg, then the Owner shall'bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because,gf such deductibles. 11.4.1 4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the'V in transit. d` 11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until th d insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use byendorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancyoruse that' would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. 11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law which shall specifically cover such insured objects,dtfnng installation and until final acceptance by the Owner this insurance shall include interests ofthe Owner Contractor Subcontractors and Sub subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. 11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. AIA Document A201. 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1910 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Amer can Institute of Architects All rights reserved WARNING This AIA' Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIAi Document, or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft wa produced by AIA software at 15 41 53 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which expires 1/15/2008 and is not fo esale User Notes (1878016282) 11 4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order 11 4.5 If dunng the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insunng the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insunng the Project during the construction penod, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11 4 7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11 4 Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Contractor 11 4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any and any of their subcontractors, sub subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent coveted by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11 4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except°such°rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary The Owner or ContractQ as,app.ropriate, shall.„.„_. require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any and the subcontractors, sub subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, wntten where legally required for validity similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of mdemnification,:ctSntractual-or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly and whether or not the person or entity had an msurable interest m the property damaged. 11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary' and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their mterests may appear subject to requirements of any. applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11 4 10 The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub subcontractors in similar manner 11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of anipsured /l give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The cost of required bonds shall 14 charged agaiOst i• proceeds received as fiduciary The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Section 4.6. If after such loss no tither special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, r`epl4cement of ldarriaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in.accordance with Article 7 M 11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one.of- the°parties.in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved as provided in Sections 4.5 and 4 6. The Owner as fiduciary shall, m the case of arbitration, make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators. If distribution of msurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution. 11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated m bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. AIA Document A201° 1997 Copyright C 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING: Thi AIA' Document is protected by U 5 Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA' Document or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos able under the law This dr ft wa produced by AIA softwa at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 unde Order No 1000279383_2 which expi on 1/15/2008 and Is of fo resale User Notes (1878016282) 11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appeanng to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covenng payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1 1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed m the Contract Documents, it must, if required in wnting by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovenng and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order be at the Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.1 1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Vv ork rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional'testing anti' inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby sball,be_at the, Contractor's expense. 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5 if, witlun one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencemen(of warranties established under Section 9.9 1 or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by theCConti ct Documents; any of the Work is found to be not m accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one -year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the.. Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that penod after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4 i t 12.2.2.2 The one -year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions' of Work Est: performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion Arid the actiial performance of the Work. t 12.2.2.3 The one year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work' performed, by pie Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by.the Owner 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether`eompleted of partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction 9f removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a penod of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one year penod for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of'the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply withthe Contract AIA Document A201*' 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966, 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All fights reserved WARNING This AIA Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of t:hi AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft wa produ ed by AIA softwar at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which xpires on 1/15/2008 and is not for sale User Notes (1878016282) Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which;case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1 1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, a`ssigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents: Except as provided m Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. 13.2.2 The Owner may without consent of the Contractor assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing' construction financing for the Project. In such event, the lender shall assume the Owner's rights obligations_ under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered m person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent`by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a rightor duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval cif or dcquiesceneo in a breach thereunder except as may be specifically agreed m writing. 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS g 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner or with the appropriate public°authority andshall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may b pl for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until bids are received or negotiations concluded. 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions`of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5 1 the Architect will, Ripon written authorization from the Owner instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such piocEdiires.'Suc1i costs, except as provided in Section 13.5.3 shall be at the Owner's expense. AIA Document A201° 1997 Copyright 0 1911 1915 1910 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING Thi ALA' Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft was produced by AIA softwar at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 unde Order No 1000279383 2 which expires on 1/15/2008 and is not for resale User Notes (1878016282) 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5 1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. 13.6 INTEREST 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon m writing or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from hme to time at the place where the Project is located. 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD r 13.71 As between the Owner and Contractor• 1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the'releta'nt'date'of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to any. alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion, .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance,of the final_,,.. Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run_ and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not laterthan the.date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment; and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring afer relevant:date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shalt t� run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under` Section 3.5 the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Section 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to,perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner whichever occurs last. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT t° 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1 1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days( through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor Sub subcontractor or their agents or employees ot any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with`the Contractor; for any of the following reasons: 1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which requires all Work lo be stopped; .2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to °be stopped; .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the 'Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9 4 1 or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or 4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly upon the Contractor's request, reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a°Sul56otitractor Sub subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work• under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work AIA Document A201. 1997 Copyright 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963, 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Ame Institute of Architects All fights reserved WARNING Thi AIA Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthor zed reproduction or distribution of thi AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft was produced by AIA software at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which expir 1/15/2008 nd not for ale User Notes (1878016282) by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365 -day penod, whichever is less. 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14 1 1 or 14 1.2 exists, the Contractor may upon seven days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to matenals, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery including reasonable overhead, profit and damages. 14.1 4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the'Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may upon seven additional days' wntten notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14 1.3 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor• 1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials, .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for matenals or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; 1 .3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public having jurisdiction, or 4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after .giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety if any seven days' written notice, terminate employment ofthe Contractor and may subject to any prior rights of the surety i 1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction-equipment anti machinery thereon owned by the Contractor .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5 4 and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon request: of the Contractor the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.11 the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of fmishing the Work, including compengation'for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby and other damages incurred y the Owner an pot expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor If such costs and damages eceed the unpai balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner The amount to be paid to the Contractor Or Owner, a the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work m whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for mcreases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3 1 Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: 1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. AIA Document A201. 1997 Copyright O 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963, 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Arne scan Institute of Architects All rights reserved. WARNING. This AIA Document is protected by U S Copyright Law and International Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thi AIA! Document or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This draft was produced by AIA software at 15 41 53 10/03/2007 nde Orde No 1000279383_2 which expires on 1/15/2008 and i of for resale User Notes (1878016282) 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.4.1 The Owner may at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall. 1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice, .2 take actions necessary or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed pnor to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. AIA Document A201s' 1997 Copyright O 1911 1915 1918 1925 1937 1951 1958 1961 1963 1966 1970 1976 1987 and 1997 by The Ameri an Institute of Architects All rights reserved WARNING This AIA Document protected by U S Copyright Law and Inter ational Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of th AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil nd criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pos rble under the law Thi draft was produced by AIA software at 15 41 53 on 10/03/2007 under Order No 1000279383_2 which xpi. 1/15/2008 and of for ale User Notes (1878016282) MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 PREVAILING WAGES 1.1 GENERAL A. The following Prevailing Wage Schedule forms documents. 1 Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates version, dated August 31 2007 (9 pages) 2. Benefit Code Key (5 pages) END OF SECTION 00830 SECTION 00830 PAGE 1 of 1 PREVAILING WAGES a part of and is incorporated in the contract for Public Works Contracts. Clallam County U 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: October 8. 2007 State of Washington DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES Prevailing Wage Section Telephone (360) 902 -5335 PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504 -4540 Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates For Public Works Contracts The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits On public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code Key CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 08 -31 -07 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $36.24 1H 5D BOILERMAKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $47 47 1C 5N BRICK AND MARBLE MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $43 75 1M 5A CABINET MAKERS (IN SHOP) JOURNEY LEVEL $14.67 1 CARPENTERS ACOUSTICAL WORKER $43.91 1M 5D BRIDGE, DOCK AND WARF CARPENTERS $43.75 1M 5D CARPENTER $43.75 1M 5D CREOSOTED MATERIAL $43.85 1M 5D DRYWALL APPLICATOR $43 79 1M 5D FLOOR FINISHER $43 5 1M 5D FLOOR LAYER $43.75 1 M 5D FLOOR SANDER $43.75 I M 513 MILLWRIGHT AND MACHINE ERECTORS $44 75 1M 5D PILEDRIVERS, DRIVING, PULLING, PLACING COLLARS AND WELDING $43.95 1M 5D SAWFILER $43.75 1M 5D SHINGLER $43.75 1M 5D STATIONARY POWER SAW OPERATOR $43.75 IM 5D STATIONARY WOODWORKING TOOLS $43.75 1M 5D CEMENT MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $36.24 1H 5D DIVERS TENDERS DIVER $85 75 IM 5D 8A DIVER TENDER $44.22 IM 5D DREDGE WORKERS ASSISTANT ENGINEER $44.59 1T 5D 8L ASSISTANT MATE (DECKHAND) $44.08 1T 5D 8L BOATMEN $44.59 1T 5D 8L ENGINEER WELDER $44 64 1T 5D 8L LEVERMAN, HYDRAULIC $46.21 1T 5D 8L MAINTENANCE $44.08 1T 5D 8L MATES $44.59 1T 50 8L OILER $44.21 1T 5D 8L DRYWALL TAPERS JOURNEY LEVEL $43.59 1E 5P ELECTRICAL FIXTURE MAINTENANCE WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $9.37 1 Page 1 CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 08 -31 -07 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code ELECTRICIANS INSIDE CABLE SPLICER $55.05 1D 5A CABLE SPLICER (TUNNEL) $58.86 1D 5A CERTIFIED WELDER $53.16 1D 5A CERTIFIED WELDER (TUNNEL) $57 15 1D 5A CONSTRUCTION STOCK PERSON $27.32 1D 5A JOURNEY LEVEL $51.25 1D 5A JOURNEY LEVEL (TUNNEL) $55.05 1D 5A ELECTRICIANS MOTOR SHOP CRAFTSMAN $15.37 2A 6C JOURNEY LEVEL $14.69 2A 6C ELECTRICIANS POWERLINE CONSTRUCTION CABLE SPLICER $54.37 4A 5A CERTIFIED LINE WELDER $49.64 4A 5A GROUNDPERSON $35.93 4A 5A HEAD GROUNDPERSON $37.89 4A 5A HEAVY LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $49.64 4A 5A JACKHAMMER OPERATOR $37.89 4A 5A JOURNEY LEVEL LINEPERSON $49.64 4A 5A LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $42.27 4A 5A POLE SPRAYER $49.64 4A 5A POWDERPERSON $37.89 4A 5A ELECTRONIC TECHNICIANS ELECTRONIC TECHNICIANS JOURNEY LEVEL $12.07 1 ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS MECHANIC $57.88 4A 6Q MECHANIC IN CHARGE $63.45 4A 6Q FABRICATED PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $13.50 1 FENCE ERECTORS FENCE ERECTOR $13.80 1 FENCE LABORER $11.60 1 FLAGGERS JOURNEY LEVEL $31.01 1H 5D GLAZIERS JOURNEY LEVEL $43.76 11-1 5G HEAT FROST INSULATORS AND ASBESTOS WORKERS MECHANIC $46 13 1S 5J HEATING EQUIPMENT MECHANICS MECHANIC $16.00 1 HOD CARRIERS MASON TENDERS JOURNEY LEVEL $36.75 1H 5D INDUSTRIAL ENGINE AND MACHINE MECHANICS MECHANIC $15.65 1 INDUSTRIAL POWER VACUUM CLEANER JOURNEY LEVEL $9 10 1 INLAND BOATMEN CAPTAIN $59.22 1 COOK $34 1 DECKHAND $34.52 1 ENGINEER/DECKHAND $58.62 1 MATE, LAUNCH OPERATOR $50.20 1 Page 2 Classification CLALL.AM COUNTY Effective 08 31 07 INSPECTION/CLEANING /SEALING OF SEWER WATER SYSTEMS BY REMOTE CONTROL CLEANER OPERATOR, FOAMER OPERATOR $9 73 1 GROUT TRUCK OPERATOR $11 48 1 HEAD OPERATOR $12.78 1 TECHNICIAN $7.93 1 TV TRUCK OPERATOR $10.53 1 INSULATION APPLICATORS JOURNEY LEVEL $20.50 1 IRONWORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $47.92 10 5A LABORERS ASPHALT RAKER $36.75 1H 5D BALLAST REGULATOR MACHINE $36.24 1H 5D BATCH WEIGHMAN $31.01 11-1 5D BRUSH CUTTER $36.24 1H 5D BRUSH HOG FEEDER $36.24 1H 5D BURNERS $36.24 1H 5D CARPENTER TENDER $36.24 1H 5D CASSION WORKER $37.20 1H 5D CEMENT DUMPER/PAVING $36 75 1H 5D CEMENT FINISHER TENDER $36.24 1H 5D CHANGE -HOUSE MAN OR DRY SHACKMAN $36.24 1H 5D CHIPPING GUN (OVER 30 LBS) $36.75 1H 50 CHIPPING GUN (UNDER 30 LBS) $36.24 1H 5D CHOKER SETTER $36.24 1H 5D CHUCK TENDER $36.24 1H 50 CLEAN -UP LABORER $36.24 1H 5D CONCRETE DUMPER/CHUTE OPERATOR $36.75 1H 5D CONCRETE FORM STRIPPER $36.24 1H 50 CONCRETE SAW OPERATOR $36 75 1H 5D CRUSHER FEEDER $31.01 1H 5D CURING LABORER $36.24 1H 5D DEMOLITION, WRECKING MOVING (INCLUDING CHARRED MATERIALS) $36.24 1H 5D DITCH DIGGER $36.24 1H 5D DIVER $37.20 1H 5D DRILL OPERATOR (HYDRAULIC, DIAMOND) $36 75 1H 5D DRILL OPERATOR, AIRTRAC $37.20 1H 5D DUMPMAN $36.24 1H 5D EPDXY TECHNICIAN $36.24 1H 5D EROSION CONTROL WORKER $36.24 1H 5D FALLER/BUCKER, CHAIN SAW $36.75 1H 5D FINAL DETAIL CLEANUP (i.e. dusting, vacuuming, window cleaning; NOT $28.45 1H 5D construction debris cleanup) FINE GRADERS $36.24 1H 50 FIRE WATCH $31.01 1H 5D FORM SETTER $36.24 1H 5D GABION BASKET BUILDER $36.24 1H 5D GENERAL LABORER $36.24 1H 50 GRADE CHECKER TRANSIT PERSON $36 75 1H 5D GRINDERS $36.24 1H 5D GROUT MACHINE TENDER $36.24 1H 5D Page 3 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note WAGE Code Code Code CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 08 -31 -07 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code GUARDRAIL ERECTOR $36.24 1H 5D HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL A $37.20 1H 5D HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL .B $36 75 1H 5D HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL C $36.24 1H 5D HIGH SCALER $37.20 1H 5D HOD CARRIER/MORTARMAN $36.75 1H 5D JACKHAMMER $36.75 1H 5D LASER BEAM OPERATOR $36.75 1H 5D MANHOLE BUILDER MUDMAN $36.75 1H 5D MATERIAL YARDMAN $36.24 11-1 5D MINER $37.20 1H 5D NOZZLEMAN, CONCRETE PUMP GREEN CUTTER WHEN USING HIGH $36.75 1H 50 PRESSURE AIR WATER ON CONCRETE ROCK, SANDBLAST GUNITE, SHOTCRETE, WATER BLASTER PAVEMENT BREAKER $36.75 1H 5D PILOT CAR $31.01 1H 5D PIPE POT TENDER $36.75 1H 5D PIPE RELINER (NOT INSERT TYPE) $36.75 1H 5D PIPELAYER CAULKER $36 75 1H 50 PIPELAYER CAULKER (LEAD) $37.20 1H 5D PIPEWRAPPER $36.75 1H 50 POT TENDER $36.24 1H 5D POWDERMAN $37.20 1H 5D POWDERMAN HELPER $36.24 1H 5D POWERJACKS $36.75 1H 5D RAILROAD SPIKE PULLER (POWER) $36.75 1H 5D RE- TIMBERMAN $37.20 1H 5D RIPRAP MAN $36.24 1H 5D RODDER $36.75 1H 5D SCAFFOLD ERECTOR $36.24 1H 5D SCALE PERSON $36.24 1H 5D SIGNALMAN $36.24 1H 50 SLOPER (OVER 20 $36.75 1H 5D SLOPER SPRAYMAN $36.24 1H 5D SPREADER (CLARY POWER OR SIMILAR TYPES) $36.75 11-1 5D SPREADER (CONCRETE) $36.75 1H 5D STAKE HOPPER $36.24 1H 5D STOCKPILER $36.24 1H 50 TAMPER SIMILAR ELECTRIC, AIR GAS $36 75 1H 5D TAMPER (MULTIPLE SELF PROPELLED) $36 75 1H 5D TOOLROOM MAN (AT JOB SITE) $36.24 1H 5D TOPPER TAILER $36.24 1H 5D TRACK LABORER $36.24 1H 5D TRACK LINER (POWER) $36 75 1H 5D TRUCK SPOTTER $36.24 1H 5D TUGGER OPERATOR $36 75 1H 5D VIBRATING SCREED (AIR, GAS, OR ELECTRIC) $36.24 1H 5D VIBRATOR $36 75 1H 50 VINYL SEAMER $36.24 1H 5D WELDER $36.24 1H 5D WELL -POINT LABORER $36 75 1 H 5D Page 4 CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 08 -31 -07 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code LABORERS UNDERGROUND SEWER WATER GENERAL LABORER $36.24 1H 5D PIPE LAYER $36.75 1H 5D LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION IRRIGATION OR LAWN SPRINKLER INSTALLERS $12.89 1 LANDSCAPE EQUIPMENT OPERATORS OR TRUCK DRIVERS $12.89 1 LANDSCAPING OR PLANTING LABORERS $12.89 1 LATHERS JOURNEY LEVEL $43.79 1M 5D METAL FABRICATION (IN SHOP) FITTER/WELDER $15 16 1 LABORER $9.50 1 MACHINE OPERATOR $26.90 1 PAINTER $11 41 1 PAINTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $33.16 2B 5A PLASTERERS JOURNEY LEVEL $25.83 1 PLAYGROUND PARK EQUIPMENT INSTALLERS JOURNEY LEVEL $7.93 1 PLUMBERS PIPEFITTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $56.34 1G 5A POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS ASSISTANT ENGINEERS $42.14 1T 5D 8L BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (3 YD UNDER) $44.92 1T 5D 8L BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (OVER 3 YD UNDER 6 YD) $45 41 IT 5D 8L BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (6 YD AND OVER WITH ATTACHMENTS) $45.96 1T 5D 8L BACKHOES, (75 HP UNDER) $44.50 1T 5D 8L BACKHOES, (OVER 75 HP) $44.92 IT 5D 8L BARRIER MACHINE (ZIPPER) $44.92 1T 513 8L BATCH PLANT OPERATOR, CONCRETE $44.92 1T 5D 8L BELT LOADERS (ELEVATING TYPE) $44.50 1T 5D 8L BOBCAT (SKID STEER) $42.14 1T 5D 8L BROOMS $42.14 1T 50 8L BUMP CUTTER $44.92 IT 5D 8L CABLEWAYS $45 41 IT 5D 8L CHIPPER $44.92 1T 5D 8L COMPRESSORS $42.14 1T 5D 8L CONCRETE FINISH MACHINE LASER SCREED $42.14 1T 5D 8L CONCRETE PUMPS $44.50 1T 5D 8L CONCRETE PUMP -TRUCK MOUNT WITH BOOM ATTACHMENT $44.92 1T 5D 8L CONVEYORS $44.50 1T 5D 8L CRANES, THRU 19 TONS WITH ATTACHMENTS $44.50 1T 5D 8L CRANES, 20 44 TONS WITH ATTACHMENTS $44.92 1T 5D 8L CRANES 45 TONS 99 TONS, UNDER 150 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB $45 41 1T 50 8L WITH ATACHMENTS) CRANES, 100 TONS 199 TONS OR 150 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB $45.96 IT 5D 8L WITH ATTACHMENTS) CRANES 200 TONS TO 300 TONS, OR 250 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB $46.53 1T 50 8L WITH ATTACHMENTS) CRANES, A- FRAME, 10 TON AND UNDER $42.14 1T 5D 8L CRANES, A- FRAME, OVER 10 TON $44.50 1T 5D 8L Page 5 CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 08 -31 -07 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code CRANES OVER 300 TONS OR 300' OF BOOM INCLUDING JIB WITH $47.09 1T 5D 8L ATTACHMENTS CRANES, OVERHEAD BRIDGE TYPE (20 44 TONS) $44.92 IT 513 8L CRANES, OVERHEAD BRIDGE TYPE (45 99 TONS) $45.41 1T 5D 8L CRANES, OVERHEAD BRIDGE TYPE (100 TONS OVER) $45.96 IT 50 8L CRANES, TOWER CRANE UP TO 175 IN HEIGHT BASE TO BOOM $45.96 1T 5D 8L CRANES, TOWER CRANE OVER 175 IN HEIGHT BASE TO BOOM $46.53 1T 5D 8L CRUSHERS $44.92 IT 5D 8L DECK ENGINEER/DECK WINCHES (POWER) $44.92 1T 513 8L DERRICK, BUILDING $45.41 1T 5D 8L DOZERS, D -9 UNDER $44.50 1T 5D 8L DRILL OILERS AUGER TYPE, TRUCK OR CRANE MOUNT $44.50 IT 513 8L DRILLING MACHINE $44.92 1T 5D 8L ELEVATOR AND MANLIFT PERMANENT AND SHAFT TYPE $42.14 1T 5D 8L EQUIPMENT SERVICE ENGINEER (OILER) $44.50 1T 5D 8L FINISHING MACHINE/BIDWELL GAMACO AND SIMILAR EQUIP $44.92 1T 5D 8L FORK LIFTS, (3000 LBS AND OVER) $44.50 1T 513 8L FORK LIFTS, (UNDER 3000 LBS) $42.14 1T 5D 8L GRADE ENGINEER $44.50 IT 5D 8L GRADECHECKER AND STAKEMAN $42.14 1T 5D 8L GUARDRAIL PUNCH $44.92 1T 50 8L HOISTS, OUTSIDE (ELEVATORS AND MANLIFTS), AIR TUGGERS $44.50 1T 5D 8L HORIZONTAUDIRECTIONAL DRILL LOCATOR $44.50 1T 50 8L HORIZONTAUDIRECTIONAL DRILL OPERATOR $44.92 IT 5D 8L HYDRALIFTS/BOOM TRUCKS (10 TON UNDER) $42.14 1T 5D 8L HYDRALIFTS/BOOM TRUCKS (OVER 10 TON) $44.50 1T 50 8L LOADERS, OVERHEAD (6 YD UP TO 8 YD) $45.41 IT 50 8L LOADERS, OVERHEAD (8 YD OVER) $45.96 1T 5D 8L LOADERS, OVERHEAD (UNDER 6 YD), PLANT FEED $44,92 IT 5D 8L LOCOMOTIVES, ALL $44.92 IT 5D 8L MECHANICS, ALL $45.41 IT 5D 8L MIXERS, ASPHALT PLANT $44.92 1T 5D 8L MOTOR PATROL GRADER (FINISHING) $44.92 1T 5D 8L MOTOR PATROL GRADER (NON- FINISHING) $44.50 1T 50 8L MUCKING MACHINE, MOLE, TUNNEL DRILL AND /OR SHIELD $45.41 1T 5D 8L OIL DISTRIBUTORS, BLOWER DISTRIBUTION AND MULCH SEEDING $42.14 1T 50 8L OPERATOR PAVEMENT BREAKER $42.14 IT 5D 8L PILEDRIVER (OTHER THAN CRANE MOUNT) $44.92 1T 5D 8L PLANT OILER (ASPHALT CRUSHER) $44.50 1T 5D 8L POSTHOLE DIGGER, MECHANICAL $42.14 1T 5D 8L POWER PLANT $42.14 1T 5D 8L PUMPS, WATER $42.14 1T 5D 8L QUAD 9, D-10, AND HD-41 $45 41 IT 50 8L REMOTE CONTROL OPERATOR ON RUBBER TIRED EARTH MOVING $45.41 1T 5D 8L EQUIP RIGGER AND BELLMAN $42.14 1T 5D 8L ROLLAGON $45.41 1T 5D 8L ROLLER, OTHER THAN PLANT ROAD MIX $42.14 1T 5D 8L ROLLERS, PLANTMIX OR MULTILIFT MATERIALS $44.50 1T 5D 8L ROTO -MILL, ROTO- GRINDER $44.92 IT 5D 8L SAWS, CONCRETE $44.50 1T 5D 8L Page 6 CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 08 31 07 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code SCRAPERS SELF PROPELLED HARD TAIL END DUMP ARTICULATING $44.92 1T 5D 8L OFF -ROAD EQUIPMENT UNDER 45 YD) SCRAPERS SELF PROPELLED HARD TAIL END DUMP ARTICULATING $45 41 1T 5D 8L OFF -ROAD EQUIPMENT (45 YD AND OVER) SCRAPERS, CONCRETE AND CARRY ALL $44.50 1T 5D 8L SCREED MAN $44.92 1T 5D 8L SHOTCRETE GUNITE $42.14 1T 50 8L SLIPFORM PAVERS $45 41 IT 513 8L SPREADER, TOPSIDE OPERATOR BLAW KNOX $44.92 1T 5D 8L SUBGRADE TRIMMER $44.92 1T 5D 8L TOWER BUCKET ELEVATORS $44.50 1T 5D 8L TRACTORS, (75 HP UNDER) $44.50 1T 5D 8L TRACTORS, (OVER 75 HP) $44.92 IT 5D 8L TRANSFER MATERIAL SERVICE MACHINE $44.92 1T 5D 8L TRANSPORTERS ALL TRACK OR TRUCK TYPE $45.41 1T 50 8L TRENCHING MACHINES $44.50 1T 5D 8L TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER UNDER 100 TON) $44.50 1T 5D 8L TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER (100 TON OVER) $44.92 1T 5D 8L TRUCK MOUNT PORTABLE CONVEYER $44.92 1T 5D 8L WHEEL TRACTORS, FARMALL TYPE $42.14 1T 5D 8L YO YO PAY DOZER $44.92 1T 5D 8L POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS- UNDERGROUND SEWER WATER (SEE POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS) POWER LINE CLEARANCE TREE TRIMMERS JOURNEY LEVEL IN CHARGE $35 62 4A 5A SPRAY PERSON $33.82 4A 5A TREE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $34.27 4A 5A TREE TRIMMER $31.88 4A 5A TREE TRIMMER GROUNDPERSON $24.03 4A 5A REFRIGERATION AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS MECHANIC $27.68 1 RESIDENTIAL BRICK MARBLE MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $43.75 1M 5A RESIDENTIAL CARPENTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $17.85 1 RESIDENTIAL CEMENT MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $25 63 1 RESIDENTIAL DRYWALL TAPERS JOURNEY LEVEL $18.00 1 'RESIDENTIAL ELECTRICIANS JOURNEY LEVEL $27 78 1 RESIDENTIAL GLAZIERS JOURNEY LEVEL $21.36 1 RESIDENTIAL INSULATION APPLICATORS JOURNEY LEVEL $9.86 1 RESIDENTIAL LABORERS JOURNEY LEVEL $18.08 1 RESIDENTIAL PAINTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $15.97 1 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBERS PIPEFITTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $14.60 1 Page 7 CLALLAM COUNTY Effective 08 -31 -07 (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code RESIDENTIAL REFRIGERATION AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS JOURNEY LEVEL $54.01 1G 5A RESIDENTIAL SHEET METAL WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $33.04 1 E 6L RESIDENTIAL SOFT FLOOR LAYERS JOURNEY LEVEL $10.88 1 RESIDENTIAL SPRINKLER FITTERS (FIRE PROTECTION) JOURNEY LEVEL $19.67 1 ROOFERS JOURNEY LEVEL $20.51 1 USING IRRITABLE BITUMINOUS MATERIALS $39 78 1R 5A SHEET METAL WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $51.97 1 E 6L SHIPBUILDING SHIP REPAIR BOILERMAKER $31 46 1H 6W HEAT 8 FROST INSULATOR $46.13 1S 5J LABORER $12.16 1 MACHINIST $17 16 1 SHIPFITTER $14.66 1 WELDER/BURNER $14.66 1 SIGN MAKERS INSTALLERS (ELECTRICAL) JOURNEY LEVEL $19.29 1 SIGN MAKERS INSTALLERS (NON- ELECTRICAL) JOURNEY LEVEL $12.15 1 SOFT FLOOR LAYERS JOURNEY LEVEL $36.08 1B 5A SOLAR CONTROLS FOR WINDOWS JOURNEY LEVEL $10.31 1B 50 SPRINKLER FITTERS (FIRE PROTECTION) JOURNEY LEVEL $19.67 1 STAGE RIGGING MECHANICS (NON STRUCTURAL) JOURNEY LEVEL $13.23 1 SURVEYORS CHAIN PERSON $9.35 1 INSTRUMENT PERSON $11 40 1 PARTY CHIEF $13.40 1 TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIANS TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIANS JOURNEY LEVEL $31 15 1D 5A TELEPHONE LINE CONSTRUCTION OUTSIDE CABLE SPLICER $30 66 2B 5A HOLE DIGGER/GROUND PERSON $17 19 2B 5A INSTALLER (REPAIRER) $29 41 2B 5A JOURNEY LEVEL TELEPHONE LINEPERSON $28.53 2B 5A SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER 1 $30.66 2B 5A SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER II $30.05 2B 5A TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (HEAVY) $30.66 2B 5A TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (LIGHT) $28.53 2B 5A TELEVISION GROUND PERSON $16.31 2B 5A TELEVISION LINEPERSON /INSTALLER $21.68 2B 5A TELEVISION SYSTEM TECHNICIAN $35 78 2B 5A TELEVISION TECHNICIAN $23.19 2B 5A TREE TRIMMER $28.53 2B 5A Page 8 CLALI_AM COUNTY Effective 08 -31 -07 k************************** (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code TERRAZZO WORKERS TILE SETTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $41.96 1B 5A TILE, MARBLE TERRAZZO FINISHERS FINISHER $35.79 1B 5A TRAFFIC CONTROL STRIPERS JOURNEY LEVEL $36 40 1K 5A TRUCK DRIVERS ASPHALT MIX TO 16 YARDS) $41 19 IT 5D 8L ASPHALT MIX (OVER 16 YARDS) $41.90 IT 5D 8L DUMP TRUCK $20.23 1 DUMP TRUCK TRAILER $20.23 1 OTHER TRUCKS $41.90 1T 5D 8L TRANSIT MIXER $23.73 1 WELL DRILLERS IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLERS IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLER $11.60 1 OILER $9 45 1 WELL DRILLER $11.60 1 Page 9 BENEFIT CODE KEY EFFECTIVE 08 -31 -07 OVERTIME CODES OVERTIME CALCULATIONS ARE BASED ON THE HOURLY RATE ACTUALLY PAID TO THE WORKER. ON PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS, THE HOURLY RATE MUST BE NOT LESS THAN THE PREVAILING RATE OF WAGE MINUS THE HOURLY RATE OF THE COST OF FRINGE BENEIFITS ACTUALLY PROVIDED FOR THE WORKER. 1 ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. A. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL ALSO BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. B. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. C. THE FIRST TWO (2) HOURS AFTER EIGHT (8) REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL OTHER OVERTIME HOURS WORKED SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. D THE FIRST TWO (2) HOURS BEFORE OR AFTER A FIVE EIGHT (8) HOUR WORKWEEK DAY OR A FOUR TEN (10) HOUR WORKWEEK DAY AND THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS WORKED THE NEXT DAY AFTER EITHER WORKWEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL ADDITIONAL HOURS WORKED AND ALL WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. E. THE FIRST TWO (2) HOURS AFTER EIGHT (8) REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL OTHER HOURS WORKED MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. F THE FIRST TWO (2) HOURS AFTER EIGHT (8) REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL OTHER OVERTIME HOURS WORKED EXCEPT LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR. DAY SHALL BE PAID AT THREE TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. G. THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS WORKED ON A FIFTH CALENDAR WEEKDAY IN A FOUR TEN HOUR SCHEDULE, SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF TEN (10) HOURS PER DAY MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. H. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF WORK IS LOST DUE TO INCLEMENT WEATHER CONDITIONS OR EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED MONDA.Y THROUGH SATURDAY OVER TWELVE (12) HOURS AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. J THE FIRST TWO (2) HOURS AFTER EIGHT (8) REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED OVER TEN (10) HOURS MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. K. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. L. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF TEN (10) HOURS PER DAY MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. M. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF WORK IS LOST DUE TO INCLEMENT WEATHER CONDITIONS) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. N ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. O THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS, HOLIDAYS AND AFTER TWELVE (12) HOURS, MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND AFTER TEN (10) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. P ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS ;EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF CIRCUMSTANCES WARRANT) AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. BENEFIT CODE KEY EFFECTIVE 08 -31 -07 -2- I Q THE FIRST TWO (2) HOURS AFTER EIGHT (8) REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND UP TO TEN (10) HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF TEN (10) HOURS PER DAY MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT CHRISTMAS DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON CHRISTMAS DAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. R. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. S. THE FIRST TWO (2) HOURS AFTER EIGHT (8) REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL OTHER OVERTIME HOURS WORKED, EXCEPT LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT THREE TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. T ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, EXCEPT MAKE -UP DAYS, SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED AFTER 6:OOPM SATURDAY TO 6:OOAM MONDAY AND ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. U ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT THREE TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. V ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. W ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS (EXCEPT MAKE -UP DAYS DUE TO CONDITIONS BEYOND THE CONTROL OF THE EMPLOYER)) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. X. THE FIRST FOUR (4) HOURS AFTER EIGHT (8) REGULAR HOURS MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY AND THE FIRST TWELVE 1 HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOU! WORKED OVER TWELVE (12) HOURS MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL B° PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. WHEN HOLIDAY FALLS ON SATURDAY OR SUNDAY THE DAN BEFORE SATURDAY FRIDAY AND THE DAY AFTER SUNDAY MONDAY SHALL BE CONSIDERED THE HOLIDAY AND ALL WORK PERFORMED SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. 2. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. A. THE FIRST SIX (6) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF SIX (6) HOURS ON SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. B. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. C. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. D ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT STRAIGHT TIME IN ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. E. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS OR HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS OR ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. F THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT THE STRAIGHT HOURLY RATE OF WAGE IN ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. G. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON PAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE INCLUDING HOLIDAY PAY H. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. BENEFIT CODE KEY EFFECTIVE 08 -31 -07 -3- 2. 1. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL 13E PAID AT ONE AND ONE HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. J ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON PAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE, INCLUDING THE HOLIDAY PAY ALL HOURS WORKED ON UNPAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. K. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE IN ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY M. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. O ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. P THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT 8) HOURS ON SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. 4A. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. HOLIDAY CODES 5. A. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7). B. HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). C. HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY PRESIDENTS DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). D HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE FRIDAY AND SATURDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). E. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY PRESIDENTS' DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY PRESIDENTIAL ELECTION DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). F HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY MARTIN LUTHER KING JR. DAY PRESIDENTS DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY VETERANS' DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (11). G. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE LAST WORK DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7). H. HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS 16). I. HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (6). J HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY THANKSGIVING DAY FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY CHRISTMAS EVE DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7). N HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY PRESIDENTS' DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY VETERANS' DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9). P HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY FRIDAY AND SATURDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9). Q PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (6). R. PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY ONE -HALF DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7 1/2). W PAID HOLIDAYS. NINE (9) PAID HOLIDAYS. BENEFIT CODE KEY EFFECTIVE 08 -31 -07 -4- 5 S PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY PRESIDENTS DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7). T PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY CHRISTMAS DAY AND THE DAY BEFORE OR AFTER CHRISTMAS (10). V PAID HOLIDAYS. SIX (6) PAID HOLIDAYS. X. HOLIDAYS AFTER 520 HOURS NEW YEAR'S DAY THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY AFTER 2080 HOURS NEW YEAR'S DAY WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY CHRISTMAS DAY AND A FLOATING HOLIDAY (8). Y HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY PRESIDENTIAL ELECTION DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE FRIDAY FOLLOWING THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). Z. HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY VETERANS DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). 6. A. PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY PRESIDENTS DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). B. PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S EVE DAY NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY CHRISTMAS EVE'S DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9). C. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY PRESIDENTS DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY THE LAST WORK DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9). D PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY PRESIDENTS DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY CHRISTMAS DAY THE DAY BEFORE OR THE DAY AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY (9). F PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY MARTIN LUTHER KING JR. DAY PRESIDENTS DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY VETERANS' DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (I I). I. PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7). L. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY THE LAST WORKING DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8) Q PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY VETERANS DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). UNPAID HOLIDAY PRESIDENTS' DAY T PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY PRESIDENTS DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY THE LAST WORKING DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9). U HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY DAY BEFORE NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY CHRISTMAS DAY (9). PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY CHRISTMAS EVE DAY CHRISTMAS DAY AND ONE DAY OF THE EMPLOYEE'S CHOICE (9). W PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY DAY BEFORE NEW YEAR'S DAY PRESIDENTS DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY CHRISTMAS DAY DAY BEFORE OR AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY (I0). X. PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY DAY BEFORE OR AFTER NEW YEAR'S DAY PRESIDENTS DAY MEMORIAL DAY INDEPENDENCE DAY LABOR DAY THANKSGIVING DAY DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY CHRISTMAS DAY DAY BEFORE OR AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY EMPLOYEE'S BIRTHDAY (11). BENEFIT CODE KEY EFFECTIVE 08 -31 -07 -5- NOTE CODES 8 A. THE STANDBY RATE OF PAY FOR DIVERS SHALL BE ONE -HALF TIMES THE DIVERS RATE OF PAY IN ADDITION TO THE HOURLY WAGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PREMIUMS APPLY TO DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET OR MORE. OVER 50' TO 100' $1.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 50 FEET OVER 100' TO 175' $2.25 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET OVER 175' TO 250' $5.50 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 175 FEET OVER 250' DIVERS MAY NAME THEIR OWN PRICE, PROVIDED IT IS NO LESS THAN THE SCALE LISTED FOR 250 FEET C. THE STANDBY RATE OF PAY FOR DIVERS SHALL BE ONE -HALF TIMES THE DIVERS RATE OF PAY IN ADDITION TO THE HOURLY WAGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PREMIUMS APPLY TO DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET OR MORE. OVER 50' TO 100' $1.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 50 FEET OVER 100' TO 150' $1.50 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET OVER 150' TO 200' $2.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 150 FEET OVER 200' DIVERS MAY NAME THEIR OWN PRICE D WORKERS WORKING WITH SUPPLIED AIR ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE AN ADDITIONAL $1.00 PER HOUR. L. WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS LEVEL A. $0.75, LEVEL B: $0.50, AND LEVEL C. $0.25. M. WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS. LEVELS A B $1.00, LEVELS C D $0.50. N WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS LEVEL A. $1.00, LEVEL B $0.75, LEVEL C $0.50, AND LEVEL D $0.25 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 00900 PAGE 1 of 1 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER ADDENDA TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART I GENERAL 1.1 ADDENDA TO BE ISSUED A. Addenda may be issued by the Architect prior to the bid opening. B All addenda will be considered a part of the contract documents. C Please add addenda to the contract documents and make notations on this page as indicated below Addendum PART 2 ADDENDA FORMAT Addenda will be issued in the following format: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI No of Pages Date Received From the Office of: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS 71 Columbia Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98104 Date: NOTICE TO ALL CONTRACTORS. SUBCONTRACTORS. AND SUPPLIERS This addendum is considered a part of the contract documents. Section Description END OF SECTION 00900 SECTION 00901 PAGE 1 of 1 ADDENDUM 1 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01010 PAGE 1 of 4 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Project Identification and Location. Refer to Division 0 Section `Introduction. B Form of Contract: The work shall be performed under a single General Contract, including mechanical and electrical work, as specified in Project Manual Divisions 0 through 16 and as shown on drawings in Divisions A, S, M, and E. C. Governing Regulations: The work shall be performed in accordance with applicable codes, ordinances and regulations. D Special Precautions: The Contractor will be performing the work in an occupied area of the hospital. It is a part of this contract that the Contractor provide necessary barriers and protection to maintain infection control and life safety and to keep noise, dust and any other disturbance, inconvenience or otherwise to a minimum. The Contractor will rent or purchase tools to reduce or minimize noise and disturbance, as required. All trades will comply with this requirement as a part of this Contract. The Contractor shall immediately reschedule work that impairs Hospital operations to time agreeable with the Owner Work in adjacent occupied spaces shall be coordinated with the Owner at least one week in advance of the work. 1 4 WORK SUMMARY A. The tenant improvement work consists converting of an existing vacant shell space within the new hospital addition of approximately of 900 SF into a new complete MRI Room and associated support rooms. The tenant improvement work includes: 1 Converting, preparing and finishing the existing vacant shell space into a new MRI Room that includes associated MRI Control Room and MRI Equipment Room. 2. Remove and re- install existing exterior window system for construction access. 3 Demolition includes but not limited to the removal of an existing temporary 2 -inch thick un- reinforced concrete slab of approximately 370 SF and existing mechanical and electncal systems required to be removed or replaced as a result of the new work. 4 New structural slab -on -grade concrete floor of approximately 370 SF 5 New exterior concrete slab -on -grade for mechanical chillers and mechanical air cooled condensing unit. 6 Chain link fence screen and lockable gate around extenor mechanical equipment. 7 Prepare the space for new fuushes; floors, walls, ceilings, and window treatment to existing exterior windows. 8. Coordinate MRI RF shielding installation to by installed by others and coordinate rough in and final electrical terminations for the MRI equipment installation to be installed by equipment vendor MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01010 PAGE 2 of 4 SUMMARY OF WORK 9 Prepare and install associated mechanical and electrical systems for the MRI equipment to include rough -in and final termination connections for the MM equipment and extensions of existing utilities including fire sprinkler and fire alarm systems. 10 Coordinate work to maintain all existing mechanical and electrical utilities and systems required to be functional during the tenant improvement work. B Work Sequence: Refer to Section 01011 `Contract Time and Sequence' for sequence of the work. C Items Furnished and Installed by Owner (FIO) 1 Concurrently with work of this Project, the Owner will separately purchase certain movable equipment and miscellaneous items which will be installed during construction. Such items may not be indicated in the Documents, or they may be indicated as 'NIC' items, meaning 'Not in Contract." Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and his Suppliers regarding the installation of these items. 2. FIO items include, but are not limited to a. Telephone system equipment b Medical equipment c. Furnishings d. Other items indicated as FIO 3 Contractor work required for FIO and MC items include: a. Backing and supports for wall- mounted and ceiling mounted items. b Scheduling coordination and rough -in for mechanical and electrical items. D Items Furnished by Owner Installed by Contractor (FOIC) 1 Items furnished by Owner and installed by Contractor are noted 'FOIC. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for required coordination of all trades, to include required scheduling of equipment with Owner for delivery and protection of equipment as required. 3 Refer to drawings and specifications for preparatory work, to be accomplished by Contractor 4 Contractor to provide backing and supports for wall and ceiling mounted items. 5 Contractor shall be responsible to verify service requirements for proper installation of items, per approved shop drawings and manufacturer installation information. 6. FOIC items will be delivered to the job site loading dock for consignment to the Contractor 7 The Contractor shall assume custody and responsibility for the items upon uncrating and determining that the contents are complete and in satisfactory condition for. installation. 8. The installation of the items includes the following: a. Uncrating and delivery to installation locations in the Project. b Settmg in place, building -in, leveling and attaching to other work as required. c. Making any required electrical or mechanical connections. d. Leaving items completely installed and in operable condition satisfactory to the Architect. 9 FOIC items include, but are not limited to a. Certain equipment per Division 11 Equipment. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI A. General b Other items marked FOIC. SECTION 01010 PAGE 3 of 4 SUMMARY OF WORK E. Salvage 1 Items Marked 'Owner Salvage' Contractor to move to storage where directed by Owner 2. Items Marked 'For Re -Use' Contractor to incorporate in the Work and modify and refinish as may be required, or provide new at Contractor's option. 3 Other All items unless otherwise noted such as clocks, casework, coat hook racks, doors, etc. which are necessary to remove due to interference with new work, remain the property of the Owner and are to be salvaged. a. All other work becomes Contractor's property and may be re -used on the work provided Architect judges it equal to new materials specified. b Remove all other items from site at Contractor's expense. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1 Comply with requirements of Division 1 Section `Construction Facilities. 2. Use of premises will be permitted provided Owner's normal, safe use of building, roads and walks is not negatively affected in Owner's judgment. 3 Any damage to building or site shall be restored to condition on day of bid opening at Contractor's expense, including grass, imgation systems, paving, curbs, etc. 4 Provide construction site bamer to prevent unauthorized entry into construction areas and as directed by authorities having junsdiction. B. Construction Access to Work and Project Area 1 Existing building stairways and halls, roadways and walks adjoining the building may be used, subject to approval of planned use prior to starting work. 2. Work area, parking, and vehicular control shall be per Division 1 Section 01500 `Construction Facilities. 3 Coordinate construction adjacent to existing Hospital facilities with Owner well in advance. Provide work plan for review and acceptance by owner Include proposed access routes, temporary partitions and hours of work. Provide after hours and weekend work as necessary to minimize disruption and maintain access and infection control in areas requiring access during construction. C Other Work at Site: The Owner does anticipate other building construction occurring concurrently with this project. The Contractor shall coordinate with the other Contractors and their work as required. 1.6 ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING WORK A. Existing finishes and materials shall be altered as shown or as required for a complete installation. In the event of damage, the work includes restoring existing finishes and materials to their condition immediately prior to the award of contract. 1.7 OCCUPANCY BY OWNER A. During the Contractor's performance of the Work, the Owner will continue to occupy the buildings and spaces in the immediate vicinity during its normal hours. Protect safety of building occupants at all tunes, including mamtaining usability of exit stairways and corridors. B Interruption of building access and operation will not be permitted. Limit construction operation and methods to those that will not unduly affect the working environment of the Owner's occupied spaces, including noise, dust, odors, hazards and other undesirable effects and MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI conditions. Special caution is emphasized because patients and staff will be occupying this facility dunng of the construction. C Contractor to maintain truck access way to loading dock and 8 -0' wide smooth paved surface for gurney travel between the helipad and building access point during the course of construction. 1.8 VERIFICATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION 01010 PAGE 4 of 4 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Project Drawings: Contract Document Drawings do not necessarily represent complete or exact existing conditions of the Project. B Examination of Existing Building and Site 1 Bidders and Contractor's shall examine the existing site and buildings as required prior to bidding to determine any conditions affecting the Work. Refer and read in detail all aspects of the existing as -built drawings. 2. Contact Owner for arrangements. C. Examination of Onginal Drawings 1 The Original Drawings and other record drawings are available in the facilities office at Olympic Medical Center 2. Contact Owner for arrangements. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01010 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 01011 PAGE 1 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and I apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 13 DESCRIPTION A. Requirements Specified in This Section 1 Contract time and liquidated damages 2. Contract administration sequence 3 Work sequence requirements B Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere 1 Division 1 Section `Notice to Proceed' 2. Division 1 Section `General Conditions' 3 Division 1 Section `Payment Procedures' 4 Division 1 Section `Submittals' 5 Division 1 Section `Construction Facilities' 6. Division 1 Section `Product Options and Substitutions' 7 Division 1 Section `Project Closeout' PART 2 CONTRACT TIME AND LIOUIDATED DAMAGES 2.1 CONTRACT TIME ALLOTTED C. Provide overtime as required without additional cost to Owner 2.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND COMPLETION CONTRACT TIME AND SEQUENCE A. The work of all phases shall be substantially completed within one hundred twenty (120) calendar days of the date of the Notice to Proceed. B. Contract Time may be changed only by Division 1 Section `Change Order Procedures. A. Time is of the essence of each and every portion of this Contract: the Contractor shall prosecute the Work regularly diligently and uninterrupted at such rate of progress as will insure completion thereof within the time specified. Proceed per Division 0 Section `Notice to Proceed. B The Owner intends to occupy portions of the Work the day after the Date(s) of Substantial Completion m accordance with the Certificate of Substantial Completion, MA, Document G704 C. Affidavit for payment and subsequent release of retainage shall be based on the total retainage for all Work as defined in Division 1 Section `Summary of Work. Submit Payment Application as outlined below 1 AIA Document G702, covering total work to Date. 2. MA Document G703 to itemize each Part of Work as invoiced to the schedule of values for that Part of Work. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 01011 PAGE 2 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.3 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. Submit at this time the following: 1 Division 1 Section `Progress Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section `Bid Form' 3.4 FIRST PROGRESS PAYMENT 3.5 SUBSEQUENT PROGRESS PAYMENTS CONTRACT TIME AND SEQUENCE 3 State of Washington Department of Revenue Certification, as proscribed in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor A. The Work of this Contract shall be commenced at once after the issuance of a written 'Notice to Proceed' and shall be substantially completed within the specified Contract Time limits. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for any loss suffered through failure to meet the Construction Schedule. Should an extension of time be granted to the Contractor by Change Order signed by the Owner the Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner and the Architect from any loss to any other Contractor or subcontractor caused by such extension. B Refer to Article 3. Damages for Delay or Abandonment, of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor for descnption of 'Liquidated Damages. PART 3 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION SEOUENCE 3.1 DEFINITION A. Contract Administration shall proceed per the following sequence. Deviations, if any shall be only as approved by Architect. B Responsibility for activities shall be per Division 0 Sections `Notice to Proceed' and `General Conditions. C Refer to Divisions 1 through 16 Technical Specification for further requirements. 3.2 COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK A. Shall occur upon issuance of Division 0 Section `Notice to Proceed. 33 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Submittal of Applications for Payment No. 1 (Division 1 Section `Payment Procedures shall be preceded by the submittal and approval of the following: 1 Schedule of values per Division 1 Section `Schedule of Values. 2. Updated construction progress schedule per Division 1 Section `Progress Schedule. 3 Statement of intent to pay prevailing wages for each trade included in the request in a form agreeable to the Owner The statements shall be approved by the State of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries prior to submission. A. Submittal of Application for Payment (Division 1 Section `Payment Procedures shall be accompanied by the submittal of documentation as outlined below 1 Updated construction progress schedule (Division 1 Section `Progress Schedule') 2. Affidavit of materials stored at site, if applicable 3 Affirmative action reports (Division 0, Section `General Conditions 4 Statement of intent to pay prevailing wages for each trade included in the request in a form agreeable to the Owner The statements shall be approved by the State of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries prior to submission. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 01011 PAGE 3 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PAYMENT OCCUPANCY 3.7 FINAL PAYMENT COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE PART 4 WORK SEOUENCE REOUIREMENTS 4.1 GENERAL B The following conditions shall be met within the Contract Time. CONTRACT TIME AND SEQUENCE A. Submission of Application for Payment and Certificate of Substantial Completion (Division 1 Section `Payment Procedures to be submitted following substantial completion procedure. A. Submission of Application for Payment and Affidavit for Payment of Retained Percentage (Division 1 Section `Payment Procedures and other documentation as required by the Owner and/or described in Division 1 Section `Contract Closeout' final payment of retained percentage shall be for all work, Partial payment of retained percentage shall not be allowed. A. The Contractor shall schedule and supervise the work to accomplish completion within the Contract Time. C The Contractor shall schedule any work that impairs Hospital operations to after hours or weekends. D Work in occupied spaces of the Building shall be coordinated with the Owner's representative at least one week in advance of the work. 1 Contractor to allow sufficient time and coordinate his work schedule with the Owner's separate hazardous matenals abatement contractor 2. Contractor shall provide temporary direction signage and coordinate locations with OMC facilities. E. All utility and service shutdowns required for connections to existing systems shall be performed after normal business hours at no additional cost. Electrical power interruptions are limited to one hour maximum. F All work performed in or affecting occupied areas of the Hospital is to occur between the hours of 7.30 AM and 4.00 PM during weekdays and on weekends. All areas of the project other than construction areas under the exclusive control of the Contractor are considered occupied. Provide temporary partitions and doors at areas of the work per Division 2, Section `Selective Demolition. G All work above, below and adjacent to the other occupied areas which involves sawcutting, roto hammering, using power actuated fasteners, or other methods which may produce vibration or sudden noise, shall be performed only with prior scheduling with Owner generally between the hours of 10.00 AM and 2:00 PM Monday through Sunday H. The Contractor shall follow all procedures for infection control and clean all dust, debris, tools and working materials from the work area and install protection at any openmgs made in ceilings, walls, and floors by 5 AM each morning following after -hours work as described in Paragraph 4 1 F and G All acoustic ceiling panels must be replaced or open areas of ceiling temporary protected with plastic sheeting. Sitework which interferes with roadways on the Hospital campus is to occur on weekends between 6 PM Friday and 6 AM Monday Steel plates or other adequate support are to be placed over open trenches in roadways and marked with appropriate signage when Contractor is not working. Drives which provide ambulance access to the Emergency entrance, helipad, and loading dock are to be kept open at all times. All fire lanes for Fire Department vehicle access are to be kept open at all times. All work in fire lanes requires prior approval with the City of Port Angeles Fire Marshall. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 01011 PAGE 4 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI END OF SECTION 01011 CONTRACT TIME AND SEQUENCE 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 SUMMARY SECTION 01014 PAGE 1 of 2 PROJECT FINISHES AND OPENINGS A. Provide new materials and fuushes throughout unless noted or shown otherwise. Where work is not shown, comply with the requirements of this section. 1.4 PRIORITY OF THE DOCUMENTS A. In event of conflict between documents, provide the most expensive work specified, scheduled or shown. Review conflict with Architect and obtain approval for work to be provided prior to beginning work. B In event of work shown or scheduled, but not specified, provide the work per specifications to be furnished upon request by the Architect. PART 2 ROOM MATERIAL AND FINISH REOUIREMENTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide matenals and finishes as specified in the applicable Section, and as scheduled and shown in the drawings. B. In addition to work scheduled, provide finish to match existing adjacent work where new work abuts to existing surfaces. C. Examine substrates prior to application of finishes. Application of finish constitutes acceptance of substrate by installer D Provide the following if existing finishes are not indicated to remain, and no other Pushes are scheduled or indicated. 1 Provide Division 9 Section `Painting paint throughout on: a. Division 6 Section `Finish Carpentry" b. Division 8 Section `Steel Doors and Frames' c. Division 8 Section `Flush Wood Doors' d. Division 9 Section `Gypsum Board Assemblies' e. All exposed structural, mechanical and electrical work, except prefmished items 2. Closets: Provide same finishes as adjoining room unless otherwise indicated. E. Additional general notes apply to room finish schedule. Provide the following if not shown elsewhere: 1 Painting: Provide 09900 paint throughout on all visible surfaces including: NOTE. Do no paint prefnushed items unless otherwise indicated. a. 09250 Gypsum Wallboard, including soffits and other variations in wall planes, etc. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI b All exposed flashing, structural, mechanical, and electrical work outside mechanical and electrical rooms or concealed wall and ceiling spaces, except prefmished items, exposed HVAC coils, and equipment nameplates. c. All new work which is shown to be installed on or into existing building walls or structure and which will be exposed to view shall be painted to match the existing and/or new scheduled finish of the existing walls or structure. 2. Where painting is scheduled for existing walls and other surfaces, refinish and/or restore those existing walls and surfaces to a condition suitable for painting. 3 Stain: Provide stain on the following unless prefmished. a. 06402, Architectural Woodwork 4 Closets, Alcoves and like Spaces: Provide same fmishes as adjoining room unless otherwise indicated. 5 Typical Room Finish: For pricing, provide the following finishes for all rooms and spaces if no other finishes are indicated. Confirm final finishes with Architect before application of finishes. a. Floor and Base: Provide 09650 resilient floor with coved base. b Walls, Soffits and Wainscots: Provide 09250 Gypsum Wallboard, with 09900 Painting. c. Ceilings: Provide 09260 Gypsum Wallboard, with 09900 Paintmg. 2.2 CODES A. Conform with Division 1 Section `Code and Permit Requirements. B Comply with State Fire Marshal's requirements for flame spread and smoke density C. Interior Finishes shall comply with the 2003 International Building Code and Division 1 Section `Code and Permit Requirements' as follows: PART 3 DOOR OPENING REOUIREMENTS 3.1 GENERAL END OF SECTION 01014 SECTION 01014 PAGE 2 of 2 PROJECT FINISHES AND OPENINGS Enclosed Vertical Other Rooms Exitways Exitways or Area Class B B B Flame Spread 26 -75 26 -75 26 -75 Smoke Developed 0 -450 0-450 0-450 A. Provide doors and hardware as specified in the applicable Section, and as scheduled and shown in the drawings. B. For new door frames at existing partitions, provide per details. Adjust frame depth as required to suit partition thickness. Modify repair partition as required per Division 1 Section `Cutting and Patching. C Where existing doors are scheduled to be refinished, clean, sand, and repair door surfaces as necessary to accept new finish. 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8. 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. Make particular reference to the following sections: B Division 0 Section `Table of Contents' C Division 0 Section `Form of Agreement' D Division 1 Section `Summary of Work' E. Division 1 Section `Contract Time and Sequence' F Division 1 Section `Base Bid and Alternates' G. Division 1 Section `Contract Closeout' H. Division 1 Section `Final Cleaning 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Progress payment shall be made per Division 0 Section `General Conditions, and as specified hereinafter 1.3 INCORPORATED DOCUMENTS A. The following documents are incorporated as a part of the contract documents as if bound herein. 1 Continuation Sheet, AIA Document G703 2. Certificate of Substantial Completion, MA Document G704 3 Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment, MA Document G707 4 Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, MA Document G706A 5 Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, MA Document G706 6 Application and Certificate for Payment, MA Document G702 (VMC version) B The following documents are bound herein and incorporated as a part of the contract documents. 1 Affidavit for Payment of Retained Percentage, Mahlum Architects Form 1060 C. Payment procedures shall comply with requirements of the above incorporated forms and shall be per Division 0 Section `General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES SECTION 01026 PAGE 1 of 2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Submit per Division 1 Sections `Contract Time and Sequence' and `Schedule of Values. Form of submission to include all divisions and sections mcluded in Division 0 Section `Table of Contents. B Schedule of Values shall be used only as a basis for application for payment. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01026 PAGE 2 of 2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 3.2 APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Each application shall consist of AIA Documents G702 and G703 B Submit per Division 1 Section `Contract Time and Sequence. C Contractor shall review draft of application with Architect pnor to submittal. D Retainage on MA Document G702 shall be per Owner /Contractor agreement. E. Statement of mtent to pay prevailing wages, for each trade included m the request, in a form agreeable to the Owner The statements shall be approved by the State of Washington Department of Labor and Industnes pnor to submission. 3.3 REQUEST FOR PAYMENT OF RETAINED PERCENTAGE A. The following forms are required. 1 Mahlum Architects Form 1060 certifying that all payrolls, bills, claims, liens, or any other indebtedness for which the Owner or his property might in any way be responsible have been paid or are otherwise satisfied 2. MA Document G707 3 MA Document G706A 4 AIA Document G706 5 Affidavit of wages paid in form acceptable to Owner Affidavit shall receive certification from the State of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries, pnor to submission to Owner 6. Letter of release of liabilities from State of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries. 7 State of Washington Department of Revenue Certification as proscribed m the agreement between the Owner and the Contractor B If required by the Owner provide other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations such as receipts, releases, and waivers of liens arising out of the contract to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner C. If any subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify him against any such lien. D If any such lien remains unsatisfied after any such payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all moneys that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all cost and reasonable attorney fees. 3.4 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Mahlum Architects Form 1065 attached, `Certificate of Substantial Completion, will issued per Division 1 Section `Contract Time and Sequence. END OF SECTION 01026 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 a r c h i t e c t s M A H L U M A F F I D A V I T F O R P A Y M E N T O F R E T A I N E D P E R C E N T A G E To. Mahlum Architects This affidavit is executed as a part of the foregoing application for final payment: STATE OF WASHINGTON AFFIDAVIT FOR PAYMENT ss OF RETAINED PERCENTAGE County of FINAL PAYMENT The undersigned, being first duly sworn on oath, disposes and says: 1. That he /she is the of having its principal place of business at 2. That said Contractor, is constructing for 3 That as of this date, all persons, firms, and corporations furnishing labor and /or materials in connection with the above described construction, at the request of and for and on behalf of the Contractor described above, have been paid in full, and no person, firm, or corporation who has furnished labor and /or materials to the Contractor herein for the above described construction or the real property described herein, or the retained percentage of the contractor, for labor and materials, except as follows: a. Retained percentages due subcontractors, payable upon payment of retained percentage to Contractor by Owner and b Subcontractor progress payments billed in payment estimate 4. That there are no municipal, state, or federal charges, levies, or taxes, unpaid or delinquent, which constitute an encumbrance, claim, or lien against said construction, or said real property or the Contractor's bond, or the retained percentage of the contract. 5. That this affidavit is made by the Undersigned with a full understanding of the facts as set forth herein, and for the purpose of inducing the Owner to make payment to the retained percentage of final payment to the Contractor on the assurance that there are no liens, claims, or encumbrances, under the contract, which may in any way reflect against: (by) (date) SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me this day of 20 NOTARY PUBLIC in and for the State of Washington, residing at Mahlum Architects 2007 Form 1060 206 441 4151 71 Columbia SUITE 40 Se tile, WA 98104 206 r 441 0478 1231 NW Hoyt SUITE 102 Portland, OR 97209 503 224 4032 503 224.0918 a r c h i t e c t s M A H L U M C E R T I F I C A T E O F S U B S T A N T I A L C O M P L E T I O N This certificate is executed as a part of application for the substantial completion payment for the designated portion of Work identified below and per General Requirements. Designated Portion for Substantial Completion. Date of Substantial Completion. Contractor's Statement of Substantial Completion This is to certify that as of the above substantial completion date, the work under this contract or designated portions thereof, including punch list and submittals of certificate of occupancy and other documents required by Section 01700, Contract Closeout, are completed and ready for Owner's occupancy except for the attached "Punch List Items to be Completed or Corrected" with their estimated completion date(s) indicated hereon. The items will be completed on or before the date indicated. Construction Contractor (by) (date) Architect's Statement of Substantial Completion Contractor's submittals and deferred list of items to be completed or corrected and the estimated completion dates have been verified and amended by the Owner's representative and the Architect and are attached hereto Mahlum Architects (by) (date) Owner's Statement of Substantial Completion The Owner accepts the work or designated portion thereof as substantially complete and will assume full possession thereof at 8:00 am on January 23, 1995 and will also assume full responsibility for maintenance, heat, utilities, and insurance on the day following the date of substantial completion. Owner's Name (by) (date) Attachments: Mahlum Architects 2007 Form 1065 71 Columbt SUITE 40■ Seattle WA 98104 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 503 224 4032 r 1231 NW Hoyt SUITE 102 Po Hand, OR 97209 503 224 0918 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 01027 PAGE 1 of 2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Section, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide schedule of value submittals as indicated herein, including requirements of Division 15 and 16. PART 2 REOUIREMENTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Prepare per Section 01300 Submittals, Section 00700 General Conditions, and as follows. B Purpose is to establish value of every item of the work for use in each request for progress payment. C Review outline of proposed schedule(s) with Architect pnor to final submission. 2.2 FORMAT A. Title 'Section 01027 Schedule of Values. Type on AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheet. B Break out costs per specification divisions and sections as listed in Section 00010 Table of Contents, including Divisions 15 and 16. Break down all items into subcomponents, materials, and installation. In addition include all items with total cost of which exceeds $50,000 C. Each cost item shall include its proportionate share of project overhead, profit, and supervision, etc. 2.3 REQUIRED INFORMATION A. Each element of the project, identified with specification section number and title 1 Include values for mockups and onsite engineer and other items requested by Owner B. Each cost item shall identify total values for materials and labor C. Total of costs which equals the contract sum D Contractor's signature and date 2.4 DISTRIBUTION A. Submit four copies to the Architect with certification statement included in this section. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Date: To MAHLUM ARCHITECTS From. 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 01027 SECTION 01027 PAGE 2 of 2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES (Contractor) By (signature) This is to certify that this Schedule of Values has been prepared in accordance with the contract documents and that values listed are correct and show the proper cost, including overhead and profit, to provide each item of the work. These values shall be the basis for future Application for Payment. Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART I GENERAL SECTION 01030 PAGE 1 of 2 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Comply with Division 0 Sections Advertisement for Bids and `Instructions to Bidders. B Each bidder shall state in his bid, in the spaces provided on the Bid Form (Division .0 Section `Bid Form the following: 1 Base Bid. Bid for performing the work of the base hid as described below 2. Alternate Bids. Bid for performing additional items of work, omitting items of work, substituting materials or construction for those specified in the base bid, all as described below State the amount to he added to or deducted from the base bid. C. No sales tax shall be included for any of the bid prices. D The above terms are used as defined in Division 0 Section `Instructions to Bidders. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Base bid is the sum proposed to perform all general, mechanical and electrical work as specified and shown in Divisions 0 through 16 (specifications) and Divisions A, S, M, and E (project drawings) and equipment vendor shop drawin to be used for reference only as the construction documents. B The following items are excluded from the above base hid. 1 Work specifically shown or noted as not in contract (NIC) 2. RF Shielding and MRI equipment installation (FIO) 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form (Division 0 Section `Bid Form') for certain construction activities defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from base bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to he completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the contract documents. 1.5 ALTERNATES A. Coordination Coordinate related work and modify or adjust adjacent work as necessary to ensure that work affected by each accepted alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project. B Notification Immediately following the award of the contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved notification of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for consideration at a later date Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Schedule 1 A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this section. Specification sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate 2. Include as part of each alternate miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the alternate MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Alternate bids may or may not be accepted by Owner SECTION 01030 PAGE 2 of 2 BASE BID AND ALTERNATES B Bid prices for alternates shall include adjustments in the work of all materials and trades as may be necessary because of additions, deletions, or substitutions. C. Rough -Ins and all other provisions required for the future installation of items of work omitted in base bid or in deductive alternates shall remain in the contract unless otherwise stated. Refer to drawings or specifications for explanations of cut- off points of work remaining. D Work which may be added in alternates shall become part of and be governed by the provisions of the specification sections for like materials and construction. E. In alternate descriptions, reference to architectural drawings shall be interpreted as all- inclusive reference to any other project drawings showing the work. END OF SECTION 01030 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS SECTION 01036 PAGE 1 of 2 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in each section of Divisions 2 through 16 Make particular reference to the following sections. 1 Section 00003 Table of Contents 2. Section 01010 Summary of Work 3 Section 01011 Contract Time and Sequence 4 Section 01030 Base Bid and Alternates 5 Section 01065 Code and Permit Requirements 6 Section 01091 Reference Standards 7 Section 01095 Explanations, Definitions, Abbreviations, Symbols 8 Section 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 9 Section 01700 Contract Closeout 10 Section 01710 Final Cleaning 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. The contract may be changed per Section 00700, General Conditions, and as follows. 1.3 INCORPORATED DOCUMENTS A. The following documents are a part of the contract documents: 1 Change Order Proposal, Form MA1038 2. Change Order Form MA1039 3 Architect's Supplemental Instructions, MA1036 4 Construction Change Directive, MA1037 5 Request for Information, MA1028 B. Change order proposals, change orders, architect's supplemental instructions, and construction change directives shall comply with requirements of the above incorporated forms and shall be per Section 00700 General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSALS A. Change Order Proposal (MA1038) is bound herein and incorporated as a part of the contract documents. Derivatives of this form are not acceptable. B Contractor shall complete proposal portion of form and return original to Architect for action. 3.2 CHANGE ORDERS A. Change Order (MA1039) is bound herein and incorporated as a part of the contract documents. Derivatives of this form are not acceptable. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Accepted change order proposals shall be the basis for contract change orders. C Contract change orders may incorporate more than one change order proposal. 3.3 ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS A. Architect's Supplemental Instructions (MA1036) is bound herein and incorporated as a part of the contract documents. Denvatives of this form are not acceptable 3.4 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES A. Construction Change Directive (MA1037) is bound herein and incorporated as a part of the contract documents. Derivatives of this form are not acceptable. 3.5 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION A. Request for Information (MA1028) is bound herein and incorporated as a part of the contract documents. Derivatives of this form are not acceptable. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 01036 SECTION 01036 PAGE 2 of 2 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 a r c h i t e c t s PROJECT NAME DATE CONTRACT DATE OWNER OWNER S REP TO COPIES TO ATTACHMENTS Issued by By. Accepted by By. M A H L U M td A R C H I T E C T S S U P P L E M E N T A L I N S T R U C T I O N S N O Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI Olympic Medical Center Mahlum Architects PROJECT NO 2007517.00 FILE NAME Proceed immediately with the following at no change m the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. If you believe this Supplemental Instruction requires a change in either the Contract Time or Contract Sum, contact the Architect within five days of receipt and do not proceed with the following. Otherwise, this change(s) shall be binding to the Contract. Date: Date: Mahlum Architects 2007 Form 1036 71 Columbia SUITE 40. Seattle WA 98104 206 503 441 4151 206 441 0478 224 4032 f 1231 NW Hoyt SUITE 102 Portland, OR 97209 503 224.0918 f a r c h i t e c t s PROJECT NAME DATE CONTRACT DATE OWNER Olympic Medical Center OWNER S REP TO COPIES TO Mahlum Architects Recommendation Make the following change(s) in this contract: ATTACHMENTS ADJUST THE CONTRACT SUM AS FOLLOWS ADJUST THE CONTRACT TIME AS FOLLOWS By Owner Directive M A H L U M Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI C O N S T R U C T I O N C H A N G E D I R E C T I V E NO PROJECT NO 2007517.00 FILE NAME Date: Upon receipt of this signed document, you are hereby directed to proceed immediately with the change(s) described above. By Date: Contractor Agreement /Disagreement We have carefully examined the above adjustment and (o agree) (o disagree) with the adjustments to the Contract Sum and Contract Time. By Date: Following agreement by the Contractor on above adjustments to the Contract Sum and Contract Time, a Change Order will be issued. Mahlum Architects 2007 Form 1037 71 Columbia SUITE 40. Seattle WA 98104 206 206 503 503 441 4151 441 0478 1231 NW Hoyt SUITE 102 Portland, OR 97209 224 4032 224 0918 a r c h i t e c t s M A H L U M C H A N G E O R D E R P R O P O S A L N O PROJECT NAME Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI DATE CONTRACT DATE OWNER OWNER S REP TO COPIES TO Mahlum Architects Request: Please furnish your proposal to us for performing the following change(s): ATTACHMENTS Olympic Medical Center BY DATE Contractor Proposal: We propose to perform the change(s) described above for the following change(s) in the Contract Sum and the Contract Time (a detailed cost estimate is attached): Contract Sum. 0 addition 0 deduction of Contract Time: 0 Extension 0 reduction of Contractor BY DATE BY DATE Owner Acceptance: We hereby accept the above proposal. PROJECT NO 2007517.00 FILE NAME BY DATE (excluding state sales tax) calendar days This proposal includes any and all necessary adjustments to the construction schedule and all direct and indirect costs. All further claims for additional compensation, time, or damages arising out of the changed work addressed in this proposal are waived upon the Owner's acceptance of this proposal Mahlum Architects Recommendation: We have carefully examined the above proposal, find it to be in order and the cost reasonable, and recommend its acceptance. This form, when signed above, constitutes the conditions upon which the Architect will issue a Change Order for the above changes. Mahlum Architects 2007 Form 1038 71 Columbt SUITE 40 Seattle, WA 98104 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 f 1231 NW Hoyt SUITE 102 Portland, OR 97209 503 224 4032 503 224 0918 a r c h i t e c t s PROJECT NAME Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI DATE CONTRACT DATE OWNER Olympic Medical Center OWNER S REP The Owner and the Contractor agree to the following change(s): ATTACHMENTS Contract Time: Before this Change Order the date of substantial completion was: The Contract Time change because of this Change Order is: With this Change Order the new date of substantial completion will be: Contract Sum The original contract sum was: The net change in the Contract Sum by previously authorized Change Orders is: The amount of this Change Order is: The new Contract Sum will be: The above summary does not reflect changes in the Contract Sum or Contract been authorized by Construction Change Directive. This Change Order becomes valid once signed by the Owner, Contractor, and effective on the date of Owner's Authorization. ISSUED BY BY CONFIRMED BY Contractor BY AUTHORIZED BY Owner BY Mahlum Architects 2007 M A 1 L U M C H A N G E O R D E R N O Mahlum Architects PROJECT NO 2007517.00 FILE NAME DATE DATE DATE days Time which havE Architect, and is Form 1039 71 Columba SUITE 40. Seattle WA 98104 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 503 224 4032 503 224 0918 r 1231 NW Hoyt SUITE 102 Portland, OR 97209 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 01040 PAGE 1 of 4 COORDINATION 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination of Work of the Contract. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to the following: 1 Section 00700 General Conditions 2 Section 01010 Summary of Work 3 Section 01045 Cutting and Patching 4 Section 01200 Project Meetings 5 Section 01310 Progress Schedule 6 Section 01600 Material and Equipment 7 Section 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 8. Section 01700 Contract Closeout 9 Division 15 Mechanical 10 Division 16 Electrical 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items to be installed later B. Coordinate work between all Sections of Contract Documents to avoid conflicts and omissions. Take special care to coordinate work which is normally indicated in some but not all Architectural, Mechanical, Electrical and other major Divisions of the Contract Documents. 1.4 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION OF WORK A. Coordination of work among the general and various subcontractors will be a critical element in the success of this project. The Contractor is responsible for providing continuous on -site supervision and for coordmatmg the installation of their work and that of Subcontractors of all tiers anytime work under the contract is in progress pursuant to the General Conditions of the contract to ensure compliance with the contract documents and to expedite the progress of the project. No additional costs or time extensions will be authorized for failure on the part of the Contractor to coordinate and supervise the work. B It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the work of subcontractors, material suppliers, et. al, complies with Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 General Requirements, and the work of other Sections. No additional payments or time extensions will be authorized for failure on the part of subcontractors, material suppliers, et. al, to be familiar with and in compliance with the aforementioned specification divisions and sections. C. Project Coordination and Scheduling Control. Responsibility for coordination and close adherence to tune schedules rests solely with the contractor who shall maintain coordination and scheduling control at all times: 1 Each Subcontractor and matenal supplier responsible to the Contractor shall cooperate diligently with the Contractor in the execution of their work so as to cause no delay in the completion of the Project. This responsibility includes the completion of all work in a MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01040 PAGE 2 of 4 COORDINATION timely manner and includes all items of equipment connected and fully operating at the time of Substantial Completion of each phase. Each Subcontractor shall diligently comply with the following requirements: a. Cooperate in planning and layout of the work well in advance of operations to properly interface with work with all trades. b. Inform other trades of requirements at proper time to prevent delay or revisions. c. Be informed of the requirements of other trades and check own work for conflicts with the work of other trades. d. Insure delivery of materials and performance of work on coordinated schedule with other trades. e. Contractor is to ensure that the subcontractors, matenal suppliers and equipment suppliers are responsible for compatibility and completeness of the mstallation and operation performance /material of the equipment in their respective specification sections. Prior to commencement of any work, subcontractors shall notify the Contractor where power piping, ductwork or other substrate work required for a complete installation has not been provided for finish materials or equipment locations or is not adequate for a complete installation. f. Attend Pre Installation conferences. D Notification and Correction of Defective Work: 1 Before starting a section of work, each Contractor and Subcontractor shall carefully examine all preparatory work that has been executed to receive each contractor's work. Check carefully by whatever means required, to ensure that the work and adjacent, related work will finish to proper contours, planes, and levels. 2. The subcontractor shall promptly notify the Contractor of any defects or imperfections in preparatory work which will in any way affect satisfactory completion of the work. Under no condition shall a section of work proceed prior to preparatory work having been completed, cured, dried, or otherwise made satisfactory to receive such related work. 3 Correction of defective work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor providing the defective work. Correction of work due to underlying defects shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor providing work. E. Dimensions: The structural drawings are to be used in conjunction with the Architectural Drawings. Primary structural elements are dimensioned on the structural plans and details. Coordination of the structure with the dimensions as shown on the drawings and architectural items to be embedded into, or attached to the structure, is the responsibility of the Contractor Any dimensional discrepancies between the Architectural and Structural drawings shall be reported to the Architect before proceeding with the work. F Intent of Drawings: 1 The work of each Contractor and Subcontractor shall conform to the intent of the contract drawings. Drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not intend to show in details all features of work. Each Contractor shall carefully review the work to be performed by other trades, compare related drawings and shall thoroughly understand the building conditions affecting their work, and report conflicts as soon as they become apparent. 2. All changes required in the work caused by failure to do so shall be at no expense to the Owner G Coordination Drawings 1 Coordination drawings: It is General Contractor's responsibility to obtain actual installation information and provide the required drawings for review and acceptance by all sub contractor's, equipment suppliers, design team members, Owner etc. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01040 PAGE 3 of 4 COORDINATION a. Include with casework shop drawings submittal. 1) Provide minimum 1 scale coordination drawings of complicated or custom casework or where equipment is indicated to be installed in or supported by 06410 casework or indicated. 2) Indicate all dimensions, locations of equipment tracks, special hinges, and other fastenings, sequence of assembly or fabrication and the like (shop vs. field installation) Provide confirmation (signatures) by General Contractor casework manufacturer and equipment vendor(s) representatives that installation is coordinated and acceptable for installation in the shop or field. 3) Include all finished mechanical and electrical (include rough -in items if critical) items including medical gas outlets, light switches, light fixtures, control panels, MES stations, sinks, built -in accessories, etc. 4) Include Axano 3 -D drawings for complicated areas. 2. At Contractor's option, provide minimum 'A scale coordination drawings for congested areas above ceilings. a. Indicate all new and existing mechanical and electrical rough -in and finish items, structural supports for ceiling supported lights and the like. b In lieu of above ceiling coordination drawings, Contractor certifies that coordination work has been done prior to installation of above ceiling work. Failure to coordinate above ceiling work resulting in removal and reinstallation or delay in the work shall be responsibility of the contractor No additional payment or time extension shall be allowed by the Owner for inadequately coordinated above ceiling work. 3 Provide coordination drawings, or appropriate shop drawings, for all required mock -ups. H. Interference and Right -Of Way 1 Make proper provisions to avoid interference between building systems, products, and trades. 2. Where conflicts occur architectural and structural has right -of -way over mechanical and electrical work; concealed mechanical work has right -of -way over concealed electrical work; sheet metal duct work has right -of -way over fire protection sprinkler lines; and exposed electrical fixtures has right -of -way over mechanical fixtures. 3 Submit conflicts which cannot be resolved by right -of -way to Architect for instructions. 4 Submit specific coordination drawings showing work by all affected trades /01300 as indicated. I. Equipment connections: See General Requirements in Mechanical and Electrical Divisions. J Cooperate and coordmate with any other separate Contractor under Contract with the Owner K. Verify new holes m concrete slabs will not cut structural joists, beams or weaken structure. Verify new holes in other existing concrete construction will not cut existing steel reinforcing bars. 1.5 MEETINGS A. In addition to progress meetings specified in Section 01200 hold coordination meetings and pre installation conferences with personnel and Subcontractors to assure coordination of Work. 1.6 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in Section 01300 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service equipment. C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operating elements, and effect on work of other sections. 1.7 COORDINATION OF SPACE A. Coordinate use of Project space and sequence of installation of mechanical, and electrical work which is indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routings shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable, with due allowance for available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. B In finished areas, except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts, wiring and the like in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. C Coordination of Outlets: Verify Locations of Outlets with Owner and Architect. 1 Architect/Owner review of rough -ins. Contractor to provide minimum two week notice to Architect and Owner for review of completed rough -in items prior to cover Area of review no less than 50% of each Phase floor area. Review will check for location and completeness of all electrical and mechanical rough -in items. 1.8 CONSTRUCTION MOBILIZATION A. Cooperate with the Owner in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and shed, for access, traffic, and parking facilities. B During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Owner's on -site Project Coordinator C. Comply with Architect's and Owner's procedures for intra- project communications; submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. D Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Architect. 1.9 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT C. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified in Section 01700 END OF SECTION 01040 SECTION 01040 PAGE 4 of 4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work by the various trades involved in preparation for Substantial Completion. B. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site by the various trades involved for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART I GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION SECTION 01045 PAGE 1 of 4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Definition: Cutting and patching is hereby defined to include but is not necessarily limited to the cutting and patching of nominally completed or previously existing work in order to accommodate the coordination of work or the installation of other work or to uncover other work for access or inspection or to obtain samples for testing or for similar purposes and is defined to exclude integral cutting and patching during the manufacturing, fabricating, erecting, and installing process for individual units of work. Drilling the work to install fasteners and similar operations are included under their specific sections. B Infection Control. Perform all cutting and patching work in compliance with Owner's infection control policies and 01510 Infection Control. C General Work: The Contractor represents that he has carefully reviewed all demolition, removal, modification, cutting, and patching requirements of all subtrades and that he has included in his bid the cost for all such requirements for work specified and as further stated below D Mechanical and Electrical Work, Divisions 15 and 16 The Contractor represents that he has advised his bidders for the mechanical and electrical work to include in their work all costs of cutting, patching, and coring; disconnecting electrical services; disconnecting and capping utility lines at present locations; connections to new locations and modification in piping runs; and electrical devices, as may be required for the installation and completion of other work in the area. The Contractor represents that he has reviewed the site and will remove and replace any and all mechanical and electrical items as required for new work whether shown on the drawings or not to produce a complete product as required by code and implied by the balance of the contract documents. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Submittals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General. Comply with Division 1 Section `Quality Control. B. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural work in a manner resulting in a reduction of load carrying capacity or load/deflection ratio. Notify Architect if work resulting in structural integrity loss is apparent. C. Operational and Safety Lunitations: Do not cut and patch operational elements and safety- related components in a manner resulting in a reduction of capacities to perform in a manner intended or resulting in decreased operational life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety D Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch work which is exposed to the exterior or exposed in occupied spaces of the building in a manner resulting in a reduction of visual qualities or resulting in substantial evidence of the cut and patch work, both as judged solely by the Architect. Remove and replace work judged by the Architect to be visually unsatisfactory 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Delivery Storage, and Handling. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best and most complete cutting and patching per industry standards. B Comply with Division 2, Section `Selective Demolition. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Progress Schedule. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Warranty Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect, provide materials for cutting and patching which will result in equal or better work than the work being cut and patched in terms of performance characteristics and including visual effect where applicable. Comply with the requirements and use materials identical, including color with the original where feasible and where recognized that satisfactory results can be produced thereby PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement, during cutting and patching. B Inspect after uncovering cutting and patching. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide adequate temporary support for work to be cut to prevent failure. Do not endanger other work. B Protection: Provide adequate protection of other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage and provide protection of the work from adverse weather exposure. Take precautions not to cut existing pipe, conduit, or duct serving the building but scheduled to be relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General SECTION 01045 PAGE 2 of 4 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1 Execute cutting, fitting, and patching, including excavation and fill, to complete work and to• a. Fit the several parts together to integrate with other work. b. Uncover we :o install ill -timed work. c. Remove an; cplace defective and nonconforming work. d. Remove samples of installed work for testing. e. Provide openings in elements of work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01045 PAGE 3 of 4 CUTTING AND PATCHING 2. All work to be performed in a 'workmanlike' manner Employ skilled tradesmen to perform cutting and patching. Except as otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect, proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, in each instance, and perform the work promptly 3 Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work and to provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. 4 If possible, employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for sight- exposed surfaces. 5 Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of contract documents. 6. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. 7 At penetrations of fire -rated material, provide proper thickness of the construction element to maintain the required fire rating. For penetrations and recessed items larger than or more numerous than allowed by Uniform Building Code Section 709 7 provide appropriate blocking, and continuation of the construction element to maintain the required fire rating. 8 Refmish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest mtersection; for an assembly refinish entire unit. B. Cutting 1 Cut work by methods least likely to damage work to be retained and work adjoining. Review proposed procedure with original installer where possible and comply with his recommendations. 2. In general, where mechanical cutting is required, cut work with sawing and grinding tools, not with hammering and chopping tools. Core drill openings through concrete work. C. Patching 1 Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances of the work. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and, where necessary extend finish restoration onto retained work adjoining m a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching. 3 Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over the entire unbroken surface containing the patch. D Cutting and Patching for Work by Subcontractors: Cutting and patching for mechanical and electrical work will be included in the cost for mechanical and electrical work, respectively and will be performed in accordance with this section and Division 15 Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical. See Divisions 15 and 16 for additional instructions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Quality Control. B Provide experienced supervision of all elements of the work of this section. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with Division 1 Sections `Construction Facilities' and `Final Cleaning. B Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access. Remove completely paint, mortar oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before pamtmg or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI END OF SECTION 01045 SECTION 01045 PAGE 4 of 4 CUTTING AND PATCHING 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01064 PAGE 1 of 4 SEISMIC ANCHORING PART I GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A complete list of standards is located m Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. The purpose of this section is to provide instruction relating to the design and construction of anchorage requirements for mechanical and electrical equipment and components. It is required that these items be anchored to the facility in a manner whereby the overall reliability of the facility is not compromised. B Unless otherwise determined by the Architect, it is not intended that any item of purchased equipment be modified to meet the requirements of this section. C Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Division 1 Section `Delegated Design Requirements' 2. Division 2, Section `Selective Demolition' 3 Division 9 Finishes 3 Division 15 Mechanical 4 Division 16, Electrical 1 4 INSPECTION A. Installation of all wedge- anchors shall be performed under the continuous inspection of a certified inspector B. Field tests of the anchorage shall be performed by a licensed testing laboratory under the supervision of a certified inspector 1.5 GENERAL CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS A. All supports and connections shall be designed by a registered structural engineer licensed m the State of Washington in accordance with the IBC Building Code, Chapter 16. The Contractor shall retain this engineer to perform the design work. B. SMACNA guidelines shall be used for the design of seismic restraints of mechanical systems (and cabinets), with the additional requirements dictated by Part 1.3 above and the specific requirements and exceptions specified in this section. C. Acquisition of design data and installation of gravity and seismic anchorages (restraints) shall be the responsibility of the Contractor unless otherwise noted in this section. Design data and shop drawings shall be provided in accordance with Part 1 6 below 1.6 DISTRIBUTION OF GRAVITY AND SEISMIC LOADS TO STRUCTURE A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to see that the combined equipment and system and piping loads do not exceed the capacity of any individual supporting structural member or group of structural members. B Supplemental structural distribution members shall be required when equipment gravity and seismic loads exceed design loads shown on the structural drawings and specifications. Requirements will be established by the Architect. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01064 PAGE 2 of 4 SEISMIC ANCHORING C All systems and equipment shall be connected to the building's structural system in a ngid manner except units with special vibration isolation mounting requirements. D The Contractor shall make available to the Architect that information required to venfy the anchorage (restraint) of the following critical equipment if part of contract scope: 1 Fans 2. Air handling units 3 Variable frequency drives 4 Engine generators, switchgear mufflers, and radiators 5 Motor control centers 6 Service switchgear 7 Transformers E. Information to be provided shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1 Center of gravity 2. Weight 3 Footprint 4 Space envelope 5 Tie -down provisions 1.7 CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS BY LOCATION AND STRUCTURAL MEMBER A. Slabs on Grade 1 Conduits, pipe, and ducts may be fastened to the grade slab with supports spaced in accordance with the requirements of Division 15 Mechanical, and Division 16 Electrical. 2. For heavy building equipment (500 pounds or more), submit information on the following for review. a. Weight b. Dimensions c. Center of gravity d. Vibration criteria e. Base connection details 3 The type of fastener to be used on the grade slab connections shall be either cast -in -place anchor bolts or wedge anchors as specified in Part 1.8 below B Suspended Slabs 1 Same as requirements for Part 1 7A above with modifications specified in Part 1 7E below 2. For heavy building equipment (500 pounds or more), submit information on the following for review a. Weight b Dimensions c. Center of gravity d. Vibration criteria e. Base connection details 3 The type of fastener to be used on the suspended floor and roof slabs shall be wedge anchors as specified in Part 1.8 below MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01064 PAGE 3 of 4 SEISMIC ANCHORING C. Suspended Ceilings. Support and brace in accordance with IBC requirements. D Lighting Fixtures: In suspended ceilings, provide auxiliary supports to the structure in accordance with IBC requirements. E. Equipment and Systems Suspended from Underside of Suspended Slabs or Roof 1 Provide gravity hangers or frames for conduit and pipes running perpendicular to the floor joists or beams. Space the hangers as follows: Pine Size Maximum Snacine 2 1/2-inch 4 -inch 5 -inch 6 -inch 8 -inch 11 feet 14 feet 16 feet 16 feet 14 feet 10 -inch and over Layout subject to approval of Architect 2. Provide gravity hangers at 10 feet maximum for ducts running perpendicular to joists and beams. 3 Pipes, conduits, and ducts that are oriented parallel to joists or beams shall have vertical supports spaced at a maximum of 10 feet. Supports shall be attached to spreader beams connected to two or more joists as required by the Architect. 4 Lateral or transverse seismic sway bracing shall be provided at 25 feet maximum. It may be anchored at each girder that is oriented perpendicular to the pipe, conduit, or duct. Location of the intermediate bracing between main girder lines shall be staggered for the individual runs and trades to avoid the concentration of loads on any individual joist or beam. 5 Longitudinal seismic bracing may be located at girders, with a maximum spacing of 50 feet on center and at ends, turns, and bends with the same restriction as noted in Part 1 7E.4 above. F Vertical Runs Between Floors: Provide tube or metal stud supports in accordance with requirements of this section. Connect to concrete floor or steel framing as noted in Part 1 8 below 1.8 GENERAL CONNECTIONS TO STRUCTURE A. The following wedge- anchors (approved by ICBO) may be used as attachments to the concrete slabs. Phillips Red -head, Parabolt, Dynabolt, Star and Ramset. For seismic design of the anchorage, a safety factor of 3 shall be used with the ultimate -rated capacity of the anchorage. For gravity load design at working stress, a safety factor of 5 shall be applied to the ultimate rated capacity of the anchorage. These safety factors apply for continuous inspection, as specified in Part 1 10 below Installation of wedge anchors shall be field tested as specified in Part 1 10 below B At suspended slabs, wedge- anchors shall be located at the thickened areas of slabs with metal deck. C. Welded and bolted connections are not permitted to the main structural members (e.g. beams, girders, columns, braces, etc.) except as noted in the following or by special approval. 1 Clip angles or plate angles may be welded to structural columns, girders, and beams (flanges and webs) with 3/16 -inch by 3 -inch maximum fillet welds. 2. Verify all bolted connections used to webs of steel shapes with Architect. D Clamps with positive grip or threaded fasteners may be used to attach to steel beam or girder webs. No 'C' clamps are permitted. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.9 CERTIFICATION OF CONNECTION DESIGN A. All design data and shop drawings shall be submitted for approval by the Architect before the equipment anchorage is fabncated or mstalled. Allow 4 weeks from time of submittal of design data and shop drawings for review The following information must be included m the design data and shop drawings. 1 Exact dimension and intended locations of each unit 2. Verification and location of weight (e.g. plan and height location of the center of gravity) 3 Scale drawings showing base details with original intended connection system 1.10 FIELD TEST SECTION 01064 PAGE 4 of 4 SEISMIC ANCHORING A. A calibrated torque wrench shall be used to field test the installation of selected wedge anchorage. The wrench shall be calibrated by a licensed testing laboratory through tensile tests on the wedge anchors. In the field verification test, the wedge anchors shall be torque- tested to 1/2 the ultimate pull -out capacity B Fifty percent of the wedge anchors shall be field- tested if their design tensile load is more than 250 pounds. If the design tensile load is 250 pounds or less, 10 percent of the anchorages shall be field- tested. C. One percent of the wedge anchors shall be field- tested for withdrawal at 1 -1/2 times the design loadings. PART? PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01064 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 APPLICABLE CODES AND ORDINANCES A. International Building Code, 2003 edition B International Mechanical Code, 2003 edition (WAC 51 52) C. International Fire Code, 2003 edition (WAC 51-41) D Life Safety Code, NFPA 101 latest edition (2000) E. Uniform Plumbing Code, 2003 edition (WAC 51 56) with Appendix A, Appendix B, Appendix 1 (WAC 51 57) F Washington State Ventilation and Indoor Air Quality (WAC 51 13) G Washington State Department of Health, Hospital Licensing Regulations, published March 1999 with Amendments H. State Fire Marshal Requirements I. State Electrical (National Electrical Code, latest edition) J State Environmental Protection Act K. WAC 212 14 State Fire Alarm Code L. City of Port Angeles Building and Zoning Code PART 2 BUILDING CODE REOUIREMENTS 2.1 REFERENCED CODE A. International Building Code, 2003 edition 2.2 PROJECT CLASSIFICATION A. Seismic design per IBC Chapter 16 B Fire Zone: N/A C. Occupancy Groups. I 2 D Construction Type: Type 1 A E. Fire Protection. Building is protected throughout by fire sprinklers. SECTION 01065 PAGE 1 of 2 CODE AND PERMIT REQUIREMENTS MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 ENERGY CODE REOUIREMENTS 3.1 GOVERNING CODE 3.2 PROJECT CLASSIFICATION AND ANALYSIS PART 4 PERMITS AND FEES 4.1 GENERAL A. Comply with Division 0, Section `Form of Agreement. END OF SECTION 01065 SECTION 01065 PAGE 2 of 2 CODE AND PERMIT REQUIREMENTS A. Washington State Energy Code, WAC 51 11 latest edition. The following sections apply to this building. 1 Section 101.3.2 Application to Existing Building A. Value of alteration does not exceed 60 percent of the replacement value of the existing building. B. Owner will pay for initial Washington State Department of Health review fees and obtain and pay for the Port Angeles building permit. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all additional permits, approvals, licenses, fees, bonds, and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. Any drawings, received from governing agencies, which are obtained by the Contractor and have corrective notes attached or on such drawings shall be reviewed by the Contractor prior to construction. Notify Architect of any corrective notes prior to doing the Work. NOTE. Contractor shall submit required documents and obtain Fire Sprinkler and Fire Alarm approvals from Washington State Department of Health and other jurisdictions as required. C. Contractor shall coordinate and obtain all Certification for Owner's occupancy and use of this project or portions of this Work. 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 USE OF STANDARDS 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS SECTION 01091 PAGE 1 of 11 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Not all organizations listed below are referenced in the Contract Documents. This list is provided to help the Contractor locate referenced standards, and every effort has been made to provide accurate information. The Contractor is responsible for adherence to all standards referenced in the Contract Documents whether or not they are included in this section. A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. Individual sections indicate which codes and standards the Contractor must keep available at the project site for reference. B. Publication Dates: Where the date of issue of a reference standard is not specified, comply with the standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents. C. Updated Standards: At the request of the Architect, Contractor or authority having jurisdiction, submit a change order proposal where an applicable code or standard has been revised and reissued after the date of the Contract Documents and before performance of work affected. The Architect will decide whether to issue a change order to proceed with the updated standard. D Conflicting Requirements 1 Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, the most stringent requirements will be enforced unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. Refer requirements that are different but apparently equal, and uncertainties as to which quality level is more stringent to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 2 In every instance, the quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum to be provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly within specified tolerances, with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum values, as noted, or appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. E. Copies of Standards 1 Each entity engaged in construction on the project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 2. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. F Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations as referenced in Contract Documents are defined to mean the associated names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed to be, but are not ensured to be, accurate and up to date as of date of Contract Documents. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 4 LIST OF STANDARDS AA AAMA AASHTO AATCC ACI AGC AHA AI AIA AISC AISI ALI SECTION 01091 PAGE 2 of 11 REFERENCE STANDARDS Aluminum Association 900 19th Street NW Suite 300 Washington, D C. 20006 (202) 862 5100 DAF-45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes American Architectural Manufacturers' Association 2700 RiN Road, Suite 118 Des Plames, Illinois 60018 (312) 69': 310 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, Suite 225 Washington, D C. 20001 (202) 624-5800 American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists P 0 Box 12215 Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27709 (919) 549-8141 American Concrete Institute P 0 Box 19150 Detroit, Michigan 48219 (313) 532 2600 214 Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete 301 84(88) Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 506R Recommended Practice for Shotcreting 506.2 Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete Associated General Contractors of America 1200 Westlake North, Seattle, Washington 98109 (206) 284-0061 American Hardboard Association 520 N Hicks Road, Palatine, Illinois 60067 (312) 934 -8800 Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building, College Park, Maryland 20740 (301) 277 -4258 American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue Northwest, Washington, D C. 20006 (202) 626-7300 American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue, 8th Floor Chicago, Illinois 60611 (312) 670 -2400 American Iron and Steel Institute 1133 Fifteenth Street NW Washington, D C. 20036 (202) 452 7100 Specification for Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members Associated Laboratories 641 S. Vermont Street, Palatine, Illinois 60067 (312) 358-7400 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI Elevator Code SECTION 01091 PAGE 3 of 11 REFERENCE STANDARDS ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee P 0 Box 210 Germantown, Maryland 20874 (301) 972 1700 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 30 W University Dnve, Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004 (312) 394-0150 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, New York 10018 (212) 354 -3300 A10 Series Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition APA American Plywood Association P 0 Box 11700 Tacoma, Washington 98411 (206) 565-6600 APWA American Public Works Association, Washington Chapter Standard Specifications for Municipal Public Works Construction ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle NE, Atlanta, Georgia 30329 (404) 636-8400 Handbook, Fundamentals (1981 Errata) ASM Architectural Specification Manual ASME Amencan Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street, New York, New York 10017 (212) 705-7722 ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 3617 Thousand Oaks Boulevard, Suite 210 Westlake, California 91362 (805) 495-7120 ASTM Amencan Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103 (215) 299 -5400 Standards in Building Codes A36 Standard Specification for Structural Steel A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc- Coated Welded and Seamless A82 Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement Al20 Pipe, Steel, 'Black and Hot Dipped Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses Al23 Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products A153 Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware A167 Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Stnp A185 Steel Welded Wie Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement A193/A193M Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Mateials for High Temperature Service A276 Stainless Steel and Heat Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength A312/A312M Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01091 PAGE 4 of 11 REFERENCE STANDARDS A361 Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process for Roofing and Siding A366 Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality A446/A446M Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality A500 Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes A501 Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing A525 General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process A526/A526M Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality A527/A527M Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Lock- Forming Quality A554 Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts A569/A569M Steel, Carbon (0 15 Maximum, Percent), Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality A570/A570M Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot Rolled, Structural Quality A611 Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold- Rolled, Structural Quality A615 Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement A775/775M Epoxy- Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars A780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged Hot -Dip Galvamzed Coatings A786/A786M Rolled Steel Floor Plates B32 Solder Metal B209 Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate B211 Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Bar Rod, and Wire B221 Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes B316 Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Rivet and Cold Heading Wire and Rods B429 Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube C33 Concrete Aggregates C36 Gypsum Wallboard C42 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete C94 Ready -Mix Concrete C143 Method of Test of Slump of Portland Cement Concrete C150 Portland Cement C260 Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete C332 Lightweight Aggregates for Insulating Concrete C495 Compressive Strength of Lightweight Insulating Concrete C513 Securing, Preparing, and Testing Specimens from Hardened Lightweight Insulating Concrete for Compressive Strength MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01091 PAGE 5 of 11 REFERENCE STANDARDS C518 Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus C578 Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation C612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation C665 Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housmg D146 Methods of Sampling and Testing Bitumen Saturated Felts and Fabrics Used in Roofmg and Waterproofmg D412 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension D573 Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration in an Air Oven D624 Test Method for Rubber Property- Tear Resistance D746 Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact D882 Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting D1149 Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration- Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber D1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) D1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction D1938 Test Method for Tear Propagation Resistance of Elastic Film and Thin Sheeting by a Single Tear Method D2626 Specification for Asphalt Saturated and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofmg D4637 Vulcanized Rubber Sheet Used in Single -Ply Roof Membrane E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Material E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials E136 Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials m a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C E605 Standard Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members E736 Standard Test Method for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 13924 Braddock Road, Suite 100 Centreville, Virginia 22020 (703) 222 1100 Fax (703) 222 2499 Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program (referred to m contract documents as AWI quality standards AWPA American Wood Preservers' Association P 0 Box 849 Stevensville, Maryland 21666 (301) 643-4163 AWPB American Wood Preservers' Bureau P 0 Box 5283 Springfield, Virginia 22150 (703) 339-6660 MAHLUM a rd CHITECTS OLYMPIC EDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01091 PAGE 6 of 11 REFERENCE STANDARDS AWPI American Wood Preservers' Institute 1651 Old Meadow Road, McLean, Virginia 22101 AWS American Welding Society P O Box 351040 550 LeJeune Road Northwest, Miami, Florida 33135 (305) 443 -9353 D1 1 Structural Welding Code -Steel D1.2 Structural Welding Code- D1.3 Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel Dl 4 Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 W Quincy Avenue, Denver Colorado 80235 (303) 794 -7711 BANC Brick Association of North Carolina P 0 Box 13290 Greensboro, North Carolina 27415 (919) 273-5566 BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association 60 East 42nd Street, Room 511 New York, New York 10165 (212) 682-8142 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road, Schaumburg, Illinois 60195 (312) 490 -1700 MSP 1 Manual of Standard Practice Placing Reinforcing Bars Bar Support Specifications CSI The Construction Specifications Institute 601 Madison Street, Alexandria, Virginia 22314 (703) 684 -0300 CTI Ceramic Tile Institute of America 700 North Virgil Avenue, Los Angeles, California 90029 (213) 660-1911 FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association White Lakes Professional Building, 3310 West Harrison, Topeka, Kansas 66611 (913) 266-7013 Glazing Manual Sealant Manual FM Factory Mutual Engineering and Research 1151 Boston Providence Turnpike, Norwood, Massachusetts 02062 (617) 762 -4300 FMS 1 28 Insulated Steel Deck FMS 1-49 Perimeter Flashing FMS P7825 Approval Guide GA Gypsum Association 1603 Orrmgton Avenue, Evanston, Illinois 60201 (312) 491 1744 GTA Glass Tempering Association 66 -9 -20 Specification for Ceramic Enameled Spandrel Glass Fully Tempered or Heat Strengthened MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI IBC International Building Code IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 345 East 47th Street, New York, New York 10017 (212) 705 -7900 IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council Route 11 Industrial Park, Cortland, New York 13045 (607) 753-6711 MLA Metal Lath Association 221 North LaSalle Street, Chicago, Illinois 60601 ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association 600 South Federal Street, Suite 400 Chicago, Illinois 60605 (312) 922-6222 Specification for Metal Lathing and Furring NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 600 S Federal Street, Suite 400 Chicago, Illinois 60601 (312) 922-6222 MBG 531 Metal Bar Grating Manual Metal Finishes Manual NBS National Bureau of Standards Washington, D C. 20234 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association P 0 Box 781 Herndon, Virginia 22070 (301) 435 -4900 Tek Bulletin No. 45 SECTION 01091 PAGE 7 of 11 REFERENCE STANDARDS NCRPM National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Suite 1016 Bethesda, Maryland 20814 (301) 657 2652 NEC National Electric Code (from NFPA) NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 7315 Wisconsin Avenue, Bethesda, Maryland 20814 (301) 657 3110 NJG -6 Temporary Job Utilities and Services NEII National Elevator Industry Inc. 630 Third Avenue, New York, New York 10016 (212) 986 -1545 Minimum Passenger Elevator Requirements for the Handicapped NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 2101 L Street NW Suite 300, Washington, D C. 20037 (202) 457-8700 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park, Quincy Massachusetts 02269 (617) 770-3000 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows 241 Building Construction and Demolition Options 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI Architectural Sheet Metal Manual NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association P 0 Box 34518, Memphis, Tennessee 38184 (901) 377 1818 NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association 3166 Des Plaines Avenue, Suite 132, Des Plaines, Illinois 60018 (312) 635 -7744 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (formerly NWMA) 1400 E. Touhy Avenue #G54 Des Plaines, Illinois 60018 (312) 299-5200 I.S 1 Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 175 W Jackson Boulevard, Chicago Illinois 60604 (312) 786-0300 MNL 116 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products MNL 117 MNL 127 SECTION 01091 PAGE 8 of 11 REFERENCE STANDARDS Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products Recommended Practice for Erection of Precast Concrete PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America 614 Industry Drive, Tukwila, Washington 98188 (206) 364-5165 Architectural Specification Manual SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association 1101 Sixteenth Street NW Washington, D C 20036 (202) 223-1360 SDI Steel Door Institute do A. P Wherry and Associates, Inc. 712 Lakewood Center N 14600 Detroit Avenue, Cleveland, Ohio 44107 (216) 226-7700 105 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council Route 11 Industrial Park, Cortland, New York 13045 (607) 753-6711 SJI Steel Joist Institute 1205 48th Street North, Suite A, Myrtle Beach, South Carolina 29577 (803) 449-0487 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditionin^ Contractors National Association P 0 Box 70 Memfield, Virgin 2116 (703) 790-9890 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15213 (412) 268 -3327 PA l Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting Paint 12 Cold Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film) Paint 20 Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, 'Inorganic, and Type II, 'Organic SP 1 Solvent Cleaning MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01091 PAGE 9 of 11 REFERENCE STANDARDS SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning SP 5 White Metal Blast Cleaning SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning SP 8 Pickling SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning Sweet's Sweet's Catalog File Sweet's Division McGraw -Hill Information Systems Company Attn. Direct Marketing Dept. 20th Floor 1221 Avenue of the Amencas, New York, New York 10124 (800) 521 2737 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. P 0 Box 326, Princeton, New Jersey 08542 (609) 921 7050 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfmgsten Road, Northbrook, Illinois 60062 (312) 272-8800 Building Materials Directory The Recognized Component Directory Fire Resistance Directory WABO Washington Association of Building Officials WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau P 0 Box 23145 Portland, Oregon 97223 (503) 639-0651 WMMP Wood Molding and Millwork Producers WM4 General Requirements For Wood Molding WWPA Western Wood Products Association 522 SW 5th Avenue, Yeon Building, Portland, Oregon 97204 -2122 (503) 224-3930 1.5 FEDERAL GOVERNMENT AGENCIES CE CFR Corps of Engineers (U.S Department of the Army) Chief of Engineers Referral Washington, D C 20314 (202) 272-0660 CRD C621 Specification for Nonshrink Grout Code of Federal Regulations N Capitol Street (between G and H Streets NW) Washington, D C 20402 (202) 783-3238 (available from the Government Printing Office) (material is usually first published in the Federal Register) 16 CFR Part 1201 29 CFR 1926 Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite 40 CFR 763 Interim Method of the Detemrination of Asbestos in Bulk Insulation Samples MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CS Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office, Washington, D C 20402 (202) 377 2000 DOD Department of Defense P 21035A Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair (Metric) (Navy) DOT Department of Transportation 400 Seventh Street SW Washington, D C. 20590 (202) 366 -4000 EPA Environmental Protection Agency 401 M Street SW Washington, D C. 20460 (202) 382 2090 FS Federal Specification (from GSA) Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D Streets SW Washington, D C 20406 (202) 472 2205 or (202) 472 2140 PS FF -13-56 I C FF -S -325 FF W -84A FF -W -92B HH -I- 1972/1 HH- I -558B TT- C-494B TT- P -645A GSA General Services Administration F Street and 18th Street NW Washington, D C. 20405 (202) 472 1082 MIL Military Standardization Documents (U.S. Department of Defense) Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19120 MIL- M- 17194D Metal, Expanded, Steel MIL -M 17999C Metal, Expanded, Aluminum OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S Department of Labor) Government Printing Office Washington, D C. 20402 (202) 523-6091 29 CFR Part 1910 Product Standard of NBS (U.S Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office Washington, D C. 20402 (202) 783 -3238 SECTION 01091 PAGE 10 of 11 REFERENCE STANDARDS Bolds (Screw), Lag Shield, Expansion, Nail Expasnion; and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry) Washers, Lock (Spring) Washer Flat (Plain) Insulation Board, thermal, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate, Faced with Aluminum Foil on Both Sides of the Foam Insulation, Blocks, Boards, Blankets, Felts, Seeving (Pipe and Tube Covering), Thermal (Mineral Fiber Industrial Type) Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant Primer Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI END OF SECTION 01091 SECTION 01091 PAGE 11 of 11 REFERENCE STANDARDS 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified this section. B Definitions and use of the contract documents shall be per Division 0 Section `General Conditions' and as follows. In case of conflict, the General Conditions shall take precedence. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. This sections includes the following: 1 Explanation of contract documents 2. Definitions 3 Abbreviations 4 Symbols 5 Keynotes 1 4 BIDDER AND CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY A. Bidders and Contractors are responsible for providing subbidders and subcontractors with all contract documents necessary to achieve accurate completion of the work. PART 2 EXPLANATIONS 2.1 PURPOSE A. The contract documents collect into a single organization system all bid, contract, and technical documents related to project construction in section format. 2.2 SPECIFICATION CONTENT SECTION 01095 PAGE 1 of 5 EXPLANATIONS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS A. Language: This specification uses certain conventions in the use of language and the intended meaning of certam terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: 1 Wording of the contract documents is abbreviated or streamlined and frequently includes incomplete sentences. 2. 'Shall, 'the Contractor shall, shall be, and similar words and phrases are hereby defined to have mandatory compulsory meaning. 3 These specifications are wntten m imperative and streamlined form. This imperative language is directed to the Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise. B Assignment of Specialists 1 The specification requires that certain specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts m the operations to be performed. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. Nevertheless, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling contract requirements remains with the Contractor MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01095 PAGE 2 of 5 EXPLANATIONS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 2. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union junsdictional settlements and similar conventions. 3 Use of titles such as carpentry' is not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as carpenter It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradesperson of the corresponding generic name. 4 The term 'installer' shall be used to refer to all specialists. 2.3 DESCRIPTION OF DOCUMENTS A. Volume 1A, Project Manual 1 Division O Bidding requirements, contract forms, and conditions of the contract 2. Division 1 General requirements 3 Divisions 2 through 14 Architectural technical specifications B Volume 1B, Project Manual 1 Division 15 Mechanical technical specifications 2. Division 16 Electrical technical specifications C Volume 2, Project Drawings 1 Division A. Architectural Drawings 2. Division S Structural Drawings 3 Division M. Mechamcal Drawings 4 Division E. Electrical Drawings 5 RF Magnetic Shielding Installation Drawings by ETS- Lindgren (For Reference Only). 6 MM Equipment Installation Drawings by GE Healthcare (For Reference Only). C Size and Color 1 Project Manual Volume 1 is prepared in 8-1/2-by-11-inch format and bound. Divisions 0 through 16 are copied on white paper 2. Project Drawings Volume 2 is in large drawing sheet format and bound. Drawings are reproduced as blackline on white paper D Page Number Section page number are consecutive only for each section as noted in page heading Division 0 Section `Table of Contents' lists each section and its number of pages. E. Section Format 1 The technical specifications are organized per the Amencan Institute of Architects MASTERSPEC. 2. The use of the section format of MASTERSPEC has been extended to provide a similar format for all bid and contract documents, including drawings. 3 Basic groups of documents and information are organized into divisions, sections, parts, or paragraphs. 4 References to and within the contract documents shall state item section number and name (and part or paragraph number if required). This paragraph is referred to as Paragraph 2.3E.4 (or Part 2.3E to refer to all four paragraphs), Division 1 Section `Explanations, Definitions, Abbreviations and Symbols. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI F Reference System 1 References may be general (broadscope) or specific (narrowscope). Broadscope shall be meant to include derivative sections (example: Division 1 Section `Submittals' also includes Division 1 Section `Progress Schedule 2. Numbering of sections is for identification only and may not be consecutive. Contractor shall check his copies of the contract documents with Division 0 Section `Table of Contents' to verify that they are complete. Notify Architect of incomplete copies. 3 Section number references used on drawings serve to identify a material or detail with its applicable specification section. Other materials not so identified shall be provided by the respective trades in the customary manner 4 In the event of an apparent conflict between the reference number and the item which is bemg referred to, notify the Architect. With the Architect's review and approval, follow the requirements of the specification section which most logically applies to the item. 5 Section number and name shall be used to identify the subject of any correspondence with its related specification section. PART 3 DEFINITIONS 3.1 GENERAL SECTION 01095 PACE 3 of 5 EXPLANATIONS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS A. A substantial amount of the contract document language constitutes specific definitions for terms found in other contract documents. Certain terms used more generally throughout the contract documents are defined as follows. 3.2 TERMINOLOGY Addenda—Additions made to the contract documents during the bidding period. Used to revise, delete, or add to any of the bidding requirements or contract documents. Approve —Where used in conjunction with the Architect's response or submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports, and claims by the Contractor the meaning will be held to the limitations of the Architect's responsibilities and duties as specified in Division 0 Section `General Conditions. In no case will approval' by the Architect be interpreted as an assurance to the Contractor that the requirements of the contract documents have been fulfilled. As -built Drawings -Set of reproducible drawings prepared by the Contractor to indicate construction changes per Division 1 Section `Contract Closeout. Bidding Requirements -Used to attract bidders and explain the procedures they are to follow in preparing and submitting their bids. Confirm/Verify Confirm or verify dimension or condition and notify Architect of findings prior to proceeding with the work. Construction Documents -All of the written and graphic documents prepared or assembled by the Architect for communicating the design and administering the construction contract. They include the following categories: bidding requirements, contract forms, conditions of the contract, specifications, drawings, addenda, and contract modifications. This term is interchangeable with contract documents. Contract Documents- The legally enforceable requirements which become part of the contract when the agreement is signed. See construction documents" above. Contract Modifications —After the agreement has been signed, any additions, deletions, or modifications of the work to be done are accomplished by change order or supplemental instructions. Directed, Requested, etc.--Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed," "requested," authorized, selected, approved, 'permitted, 'required, and MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01095 PAGE 4 of 5 EXPLANATIONS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS accepted' mean directed by the Architect, 'requested by the Architect, etc However no such implied meanmg will be interpreted to extend the Architect's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. Drawings—Graphic representation of the work to be done. Also referred to as project, design, or construction drawings. Furnish Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "furnish' is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation. General Requirements Synonymous with "Division 1 sections." Guarantee —A separate contract by a third party analogous to a surety bond, covering responsibility in case the principal fails to perform. Contractor provides a guarantee for matenals and a warranty for field workmanship. "Guarantee" and 'warranty' are used interchangeably in these specifications as they relate to Division 0, Section `General Conditions. Indicated —A cross reference to details, notes, or schedules on the drawings, other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications, and similar means of recording requirements in the contract documents. Install -To describe operations at project site, including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, cunng, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. Installer —The person or entity engaged by the Contractor or his subcontractor or sub subcontractor for the performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including installations, erections, application, and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that installers be recognized experts in the work they are engaged to perform. Project Site -The space available to the Contractor for the performance of the work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the project. The extent of the project site is shown on the drawings and may or may not be identical with the descnption of the land upon which the project is to be built. Provide Except to the extent further defined, means 'to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. Record Drawings —Set of prints kept on site and updated by the Contractor to indicate construction changes per Division 1 Section `Project Record Documents. Shop Drawings Drawings, schedules, and other information prepared by the Contractor to describe fabrication and installation of elements of the work. Specifications —Define the qualitative requirements for products, materials, and workmanship upon which the contract is based. Consist of Divisions 1 through 16. Testing Laboratory—An independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the work, either at the project site or elsewhere, and to report and (if required) interpret the results of those inspections or tests. Warranty—An assurance by the principal that it will assume stipulated responsibilities for completed units. Manufacturer warrants its matenal. "Guarantee' and "warranty' are used interchangeably in these specifications as they relate to Division 0 Section `General Conditions. PART 4 ABBREVIATIONS 4.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS A. Following is a partial list of abbreviations commonly used in specifications and on drawings. AD architectural detail AS architectural schedule MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI EXG (E) existing FCIO furnished by contractor installed by owner FIC furnished and installed by contractor FIO furnished and installed by owner FOIC furnished by owner installed by contractor MISC miscellaneous NIC not in contract O C. o.c. on center OPP opposite R radius SIM similar TYP typical UBC Umform Building Code 4.2 SCHEDULES A. Refer to Volume 2, Project Drawings, for schedules and their applicable abbreviations. PART 5 SYMBOLS 5.1 GENERAL A. Refer to project drawings or details for symbols and special designations. 5.2 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS A. Where not otherwise noted, symbols are defined by Architectural Graphic Standards, published by John Wiley Sons, Inc. eighth edition. 5.3 MECHANICAL /ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS A. Graphic symbols used on mechanical and electrical drawings are generally aligned with symbols recommended by ASHRAE. Where appropriate, they are supplemented by more specific symbols recommended by technical associations including ASME, ASPE, IEEE, and similar organizations. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Architect for clarification before proceeding. END OF SECTION 01095 SECTION 01095 PAGE 5 of 5 EXPLANATIONS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART I GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located m Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF PROCEDURES 1.5 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY 1.6 ARCHITECT RESPONSIBILITY PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used SECTION 01121 PAGE 1 of 2 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROCEDURES A. As required by regulations of the Department of Labor and Industries, effective June 30 1989 the Owner has performed a good faith inspection to determine whether the materials to be worked on contain asbestos and will make this inspection report available to all bidders. B Contractors are reminded that the successful bidder may not begin work without receiving a copy of this mspection report. Violation of current regulations may result m mandatory fine and stop work order This new regulation applied to all construction projects. The Owner requests that the Contractor keep hazardous materials inspection report on site during construction. C. Copies of the hazardous materials inspection and survey are available at Olympic Medical Center, Facilities plant Operations Office. 1.4 OWNER RESPONSIBILITY A. The abatement of hazardous materials is the sole responsibility of the Owner B Any questions that anse related to hazardous matenals and their abatement work shall be referred to the Owner for resolution. C. The Owner will provide for removal and disposal of any hazardous materials by separate contract with a hazardous materials abatement Contractor A. Contractor will coordinate his work with the Owner's separate hazardous materials abatement contractor B The Contractor shall suspend work and inform the Owner when materials suspected of being hazardous are encountered at the project site. A. The Architect will not be responsible for the content of the hazardous matenals abatement documents nor for the work done thereunder B The Architect will not be required to provide any service or render any opinions related to hazardous materials. C. The Architect may issue a construction change directive to add the cost of identification and abatement of hazardous materials to the contract amount. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL SECTION 01121 PAGE 2 of 2 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall suspend work and inform the Owner when materials suspected of being hazardous are encountered at the project site. The Contractor shall protect suspect matenals from further disturbance until the Owner's hazardous materials contractor can perform appropriate tests and abatement. B Neither the Contractor nor the Owner will be penalized for delays in the project schedule due to work required for hazardous materials abatement. C Upon notice of completion of the hazardous materials abatement work, the Contractor shall resume work. END OF SECTION 01121 U' 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 01140 PAGE 1 of 4 HOSPITAL PROJECT PROCEDURES A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for special project procedures including but not limited to 1 Permitted Hours of Work. 2. Disruption of Existing Building Services /Systems. 3 Pre scheduling and coordination of work in continually occupied areas. B. Construction schedules are required by Section 01300 `Submittals. C. Refer to the following sections and phasing and demolition drawings for additional requirements for work in or near occupied areas of Evergreen Hospital Medical Center 1 Division 1 Summary of Work 2. Division 1 Coordination and Mock -Ups 3 Division 1 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 4 Division 1 Infection Control 1.2 PERMITTED HOURS OF WORK A. Owner requires that they be permitted to carry on their regular hospital operations in the existing buildings through the duration of this Project to allow continuous medical facility use and function, including uninterrupted Owner Staff and Patient access to existing Hospital entrances and services. Contractor to maintain access at Contractor's expense; exceptions only by prior Owner permission and by submittal of written alternate access plan. All work shall be scheduled at such times and in such a manner to minimize interference and inconvenience to the Owner and their operations. B In general, the Contractor will be allowed to perform the work during normal working hours each weekday (i.e. 7 am to 3.30 pm, Monday through Friday) and as acceptable to the Owner Work required to be performed during periods of shutdown of the various building systems shall be performed during such off -hour periods as established with the Owner with no additional cost to the Owner for overtime (premium time) labor Include any such overtime (premium time) labor in the Base and Alternate Bids. 1 In addition, work to be performed in occupied spaces will only be allowed during off hour time periods, or at times acceptable to the Owner with no additional cost to the Owner maintain minimum 5 -foot clear access through all corridors and stairs used for access and required exiting by Hospital personnel, patients, and visitors at all times, including off -hour periods when work above ceiling is being performed, except for short term restrictions as approved in writing by the local building official. 2. In no case shall `rotohammering or other excessively noisy operations be permitted prior to 8 am or after 7 pm unless pre arranged with the Owner C. The contractor is permitted to perform work at the facility on weekends, with no additional cost to the Owner for overtime (premium time) labor include such overtime (premium time) labor in the Base and Alternate Bids. 1 Provide at least 5 days notice to the Owner pnor to performing work. 2. Work shall not require shutdown of any building service /systems unless pre scheduled with the Owner under 1 4 B of this Section. D The Contractor shall notify and schedule his project construction work with the Owner subject to Owner's approval of such schedule, in order that the Owner may make required arrangements. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 The Owner and the Architect shall not be held responsible for Contractor delays due to inadequate notice of shutdowns as required under this Section. SECTION 01140 PAGE 2 of 4 HOSPITAL PROJECT PROCEDURES Any extensions of the hours specified herein for any particular day shall be pre arranged with the Owner at least 48 hours prior Any revisions to the scheduled time penod of building service /system shutdown for occupied areas shall be pre arranged with and approved by the Owner E. In order to minimize shutdown and disruption time, pre assembly of components to the greatest extent practical is required for all work affecting shutdown of building services /systems. 13 WORK IN OCCUPIED AREAS A. Contractor to determine full extend of work required in occupied areas, including installation of mechanical and electrical systems outside the areas indicated. Perform all work in occupied areas at no extra cost to the Owner 1.4 DISRUPTION OF EXISTING BUILDING SERVICES /SYSTEMS A. Some of the work of this Contract is required to be performed within areas of the existing hospital building facilities occupied by staff and patients. The Owner will occupy the existing buildings and areas for the duration of the Project. All work, including required service /system shutdowns and disruptions, shall be scheduled at such times and in such a manner to minimize interference and inconvenience to the Owner and their operations. 1 Contractor shall notify the Owner m wntmg as- specified herein, and shall obtain written approval of the Owner before starting any Work within the existing buildings. 2. Contractor shall use Owner's form for approval of shutdowns on which the Contractor shall indicate the minimum following information for each shutdown/disruption: a. Date b. System affected c. Time and duration d. Areas affected e. Explanation of Owner coordination required B All work relating to the disruption of existing services /systems shall be coordinated with the Owner with at least two weeks prior notice for each proposed service /system disruption. Reconfirm timing of disruption with the Owner at least 48 hours and immediately prior to each scheduled service /system disruption. All proposed disruptions shall be performed only upon specific approval of the Owner for designated periods of disruption. Shutdown of the following services /systems and disruptive activities shall conform with the requirements specified herein and the specific requirements as noted for each specific service /system as follows and as pre arranged with the Owner 1 Chilled Water System: Shall be performed between 11 pm and 5 am. 2. Heatmg Water System: Two hour maximum shutdown time permitted during normal work hours; also permitted between 1100 pm and 5 am; connections shall be performed when outside temperatures range above 40 degrees Fahrenheit. 3 Domestic Water Service (Hot and Cold) One hour maximum shutdown time permitted. 4 Supply and Exhaust Air Systems: One hour maximum shutdown time permitted. 5 Medical Gas System. Not permitted. 6. Control (Compressed) Air One hour maximum shutdown time permitted. 7 Electrical Service: Two hour maximum shutdown time permitted, shall be performed between 11 pm and 5 am. Shutdown of both standard power and emergency power at the same time is not permitted. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01140 PAGE 3 of 4 HOSPITAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 8 Telephone Service: Coordinate with Owner 9 Nurse Call System: One hour maximum shutdown time permitted. Coordinate with Owner for acceptable time. 10 Fire Alarm System. Not permitted. a. False Alarms: For each false alarm of the fire alarm system, the Contractor will be assessed a fine of $500 plus the cost of the response invoiced by the City 11 Work in Other Areas of the Hospital (outside the Project limits): Work occurs in sensitive patient- occupied areas. Noise, dust, and odors are potential problems. Schedule work 48 hours in advance with Owner Selected activities may be required to be performed off hours if work is too disruptive. 12. Required Exiting: Egress must be maintained at all times, with a minimum width of eight feet. (Less than 8 0' only with approval by Building Department.) 13 Existing Elevators: Coordinate use with Owner 14 Pneumatic tube system. Coordinate short time disruptions with Owner C Contractor shall have stored on site, ready for installation, all materials and equipment required to complete all work required to make such service /system operational upon completion of shutdown period. D Whenever work of this Contract involves shutdown of any of the service /system specified herein, and such work requires more than one eight hour shift to complete, such work shall be coordinated with the Owner and may be required to be performed and completed in one continuous shift (24 hours per day), such that such service /system is shutdown only once and for the minimum amount of time possible. This does not supercede the more stringent maximum shutdown time period requirement specified above for certain services /systems. E. Unscheduled power outages to Owner occupied areas and systems essential to the facility operation or life safety shall not be permitted at any time. In the event that the Contractor's work causes or contributes to a power outage or other system fault, the Contractor is responsible for immediately correcting the problem. Existing wiring serving areas of systems to remain in operation and which is interrupted by work performed under this Contract shall be rerouted to maintain circuit continuity F Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to establish procedures related to standby shutdown, and stop of work in order to minimize disruption of the Hospital. 1 The Owner will designate an authorized representative for communicating with the Contractor relating to disruption. 2. The Contractor is restricted from disrupting more than two patient rooms or treatment areas at any one time. Coordinate with, and obtain approval of Owner prior to disrupting patient spaces. 1.5 HOT WORKS A. Prior to beginning any work involving open flames or producing heat and/or sparks, submit written application with description and proposed work schedule and obtain `Hot Work Permit' from Olympic Medical Center Construction Coordinator Submit application a minimum two (2) weeks in advance of any `hot work. Do not proceed with the hot work until `Hot Work Permit' is received from the OMC Construction Coordinator 1.6 USE OF CELL PHONES IN PATIENT CARE AREAS PROHIBITED A. Due to sensitive monitoring systems m use in patient care areas use of cell phones is prohibited in patient care areas. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) SECTION 01140 PAGE 4 of 4 HOSPITAL PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR ACCESS A. Coordinate with the Owner for the movement of materials, demolition items, and other construction items within the existing Hospital to minimize disrupting operations. END OF SECTION 01140 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 01200 PAGE 1 of 3 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Section, apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Attending or Conducting 1 General preconstruction conference 2. Subcontractor /Subtrade preconstruction conferences 3 Weekly progress meetings 4 Progress payment meetings 5 Miscellaneous requirements B Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1 Division 1 Payment Procedures 2. Division 1 Construction Facilities PART 2 PROJECT MEETINGS 2.1 GENERAL PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Attendance: Owner Owner's Construction Representative, Architect and his consultants, Contractor and his superintendent, major subcontractors, including the individuals responsible for scheduling, mechanical, and electrical work. B Agenda. The purpose is to discuss matters affecting progress or administration of the work. The Architect has the agenda on file which is available upon request. C. Responsibility Conference will be called by Architect at mutually agreeable time and place prior to issuing the Notice to Proceed. D Architect will develop and provide minutes of General Preconstruction Conference for distribution to all attendees. NOTE. Contractor will write meeting minutes of all subsequent meetings required by this Section, and distribute the minutes to project team listed on Sheet A0 1 1 and appropriate members of the Contractor's Construction team, including major mechanical and electrical subcontractors, within 2 working days of the meeting date. 2.2 SUBCONTRACTOR/SUBTRADE PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCES A. Attendance: 1 Owner Owner's Construction Representative and contractor subcontractor and associated subtrades and suppliers as required. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2. Architect, architect's consultants and related contractor's subcontractors shall attend when required. B Agenda similar to general preconstruction conference. C Responsibilities: Separate preconstruction meetings are required prior to commencement of work of each specification section and as indicated. 1 General Contractor shall chair the meeting and review all documents associated with the subcontractors work. The review documents shall be reviewed by the general contractor for inclusion of all addenda and other current modifications. 2. Subcontractors representative to certify he has reviewed site conditions and documents relevant to the work prior to the preconstruction meeting and submit any questions generated for discussion at the meeting. 2.3 WEEKLY PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Attendance SECTION 01200 PAGE 2 of 3 PROJECT MEETINGS 1 Owner Owner's Construction Representative, Contractor and Contractors major Subcontractors, including mechanical and electrical. 2. Architect, Architect's consultants and Contractor's appropriate second tier subcontractors and .subtrades. B Agenda. Sample agenda is attached to this section and shall be used by the Contractor All items requiring action will be assigned to the appropriate individual and carried forward to each subsequent meeting retaining the original meeting and item number Allow adequate time at each meeting for the following discussion items: 1 Schedule: Review of the project CPM and look ahead schedule shall be an important agenda item at each meeting. Provide schedule updates as required by Section 01310 Progress Schedule. 2. RFI, COP CO and Submittal Logs shall be updated by the Contractor prior to each meeting and distributed to each attendee and reviewed in detail so all parties are aware of status and priority of each item. 3 Look Ahead Schedule: Provide for review purposes a three (3) week look ahead simplified bar chart coordinated and interfaced with the project CPM schedule. C. Responsibility 1 Day of week and time shall be as agreed at general preconstruction conference. 2. The General Contractor shall chair the meetings and ensure that all topics included in the agenda are addressed. 3 Owner's Construction Representative, Architect and Contractor shall determine in advance if consultant or subcontractor attendance is required. 4 Meeting minutes of weekly progress meetings shall be by the Contractor and FAXed or E- Mailed to all involved individuals within 2 working days after the meeting. 2.4 PROGRESS PAYMENT MEETINGS A. Attendance: 1 Owner Owner's Construction Representative and contractor 2. Architect, architect's consultants and contractor's subcontactors will attend when required. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01200 PAGE 3 of 3 PROJECT MEETINGS B Agenda. Will be by Owner's Construction Representative. Purpose is to review monthly contractors application for payment and pricing associated with changes in the work. 1 Contractor to prepare for meeting by organizing and submitting all required backup information to Owner's Construction Representative a minimum of 48 hours prior to meeting. C Responsibility 1 Day of week and time shall be agreed at general preconstruction conference. 2. Owner and contractor shall determine minimum five (5) working days in advance if consultant or subconsultant attendance is required. 3 Meeting minutes shall be by Contractor 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS A. Provide Owner's Construction Representative with copies of combined daily jobsite log and minutes of subcontractor meetings within 2 working days of subcontractors /subtrade meetmg. END OF SECTION 01200 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 a r c h i t e c t s DATE MEETING NO DATE TIME PLACE ATTENDEES COPIES MEETING NO./ ITEM NO M A H L U M PROGRESS MEETING AGENDA PROJECT NAME Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI Government Agency Concerns Contractor Questions Review Architect's Supplementary Instruction Review Change Order and Change Order Proposal Review Submittal Status Construction Progress and Schedule Review Site Utilization, Access, and Temporary Facilities Payment Application Review Additional Contractor Concerns Additional Owner Concerns Additional Architect /Engineer Concerns Safety PROJECT NO 2007517.00 FILE NAME FOLLOW UP ACTION DISCUSSION ITEMS REQUIRED BY Mahlum Architects 2007 Form 1068 1 Columbia SUITE 40. Seattle WA 98104 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 1231 NW Hoyt SUITE 102 Portland, OR 97209 503 224 4032 503 224 0918 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART I GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A complete list of standards is located in Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. General. Preparing and processing submittals as required by Division 0 Section `General Conditions' the specifications, and as follows. B Required Submittals include but are not limited to 1 Schedule of values 2. Construction progress schedule 3 Schedule of submittals 4 List of proposed subcontractors 5 Material and product data 6 Shop drawings and samples 7 Record documents 8 Maintenance and operation manuals 9 Warranty manual 10 Miscellaneous submittals SECTION 01300 PAGE 1 of 7 SUBMITTALS C Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere 1 Division 1 Section `Product Options and Substitutions' for substitutions. 2. Division 1 Section `Contract Closeout for project closeout requirements 3 Particular submittal requirements, individual sections of Divisions 2 through 16 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. When applicable, each section of Divisions 2 through 16 will include submittal requirements specific to that section (i.e. shop drawings, samples, product data, etc.). The general submittal requirements listed in this section will apply to all sections whether specific requirements are listed or not. B Each copy of each submittal should have the following information on the cover on the first page of the submittal, or on a permanent label attached to the submittal, as applicable: 1 Project name 2. Submittal number correlated with the submittal schedule provided per 3 10.2 of the General Conditions 3 Date of submittal 4 Name of the Contractor 5 Name of the Architect 6 Name and phone number of subcontractor supplier and installer MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI I. Copies in excess of the number requested will not be returned. 1.5 FORMAT 1.6 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS SECTION 01300 PAGE 2 of 7 SUBMITTALS 7 Name of manufacturer 8 Number and title of applicable specification section 9 Drawing number and detail references, when applicable 10 Other necessary identifying information, such as stating the different parts of the submittal (i.e. product data, samples, etc.) and how many of each item are provided C Contractor shall stamp and sign each copy of each submittal to certify compliance with requirements of the contract documents and shall notify the Architect, in writing at time of submittal, of all deviations from requirements of contract documents. D Address to Architect. Copy and distribute as specified for each type of submittal (below). E. Submittals to receive Architect's action marking should have blank space provided on cover first page, or label for action marking. F Package submittals required for each particular specification section together Incomplete submittals will generally be returned to the Contractor without review G Architect to receive submittals no less than 20 working days in advance of required approval time to allow proper review by Architect or his consultants. Submittals requiring action in less than 20 working days are not timely submittals. H. Submittals will be accepted from the Contractor only Submittals received from other entities will be returned without action. A. Unless otherwise specified or impractical, use paper no larger than 8 -1/2 by 11 inches, except drawings to be size required, but folded to 8 -1/2 by 11 inches where possible. A. The Contractor's first payment request will not be processed prior to receipt of: 1 Schedule of Values 2. Construction Progress Schedule 3 Schedule of Submittals 4 List of Proposed Subcontractors 5 Notice of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wage from all subcontractors B Transmit each submittal at or before the time indicated on the approved schedule of submittals. C. Prepare and transmit each submittal requiring approval sufficiently in advance of scheduled performance of the work to which it relates to allow for adequate review and processing tune, including tune for resubmittal if necessary D Prepare and transmit each informational submittal prior to start of the work involved, unless the submittal is of a type which cannot be prepared until after completion of the work. Submit promptly E. If processing time for a particular submittal will be critical to progress of the work, so advise the Architect on the submittal. F The Architect will notify the Contractor when a submittal is being delayed for coordination. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01300 PAGE 3 of 7 SUBMITTALS G No extension of time will be authonzed because of the Contractor's failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the work. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of the work. Coordinate each separate submittal with other submittals and related activities that require sequential performance. B Coordinate submittal of different units of interrelated work so that no submittal will be delayed by the Architect's need to review a related submittal. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on any such submittal until the related submittals are received. C Coordinate schedule so that casework shop drawings are not submitted for review during the same two week period as any other submittal. 1.8 REVIEW AND RETURN OF SUBMITTALS A. Architect shall review and mark with appropriate action per Division 0 Section `General Conditions. Not Used 1 `Reviewed' Architect has reviewed the submittal but has not specifically accepted or approved the submittal. Contractor is responsible for coordination and compliance with requirements listed in project manual. Item subject to final approval by junsdictional authorities. 2. `Rejected' Submittal has been reviewed and found to be out of compliance. 3 `Furnish as Noted' Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Accept' shall also mean `subject to plans and specifications, dimensions and quantities not guaranteed. 4 `Note Markings' Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies both with notations and corrections on the submittal and with requirements of the Contract Documents. 5 `Revise and Resubmit' Do not proceed with work covered by the submittal. Revise the submittal or prepare a new submittal in accordance with notations made. Resubmit the submittal without delay 6 `Submit Specified Item' Submittal does not comply with product specified in project manual. If permitted in the specification, submit with substitution request, or submit specified item only B. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor by most economical mode. C. Contractor shall perform resubmittals in the same manner as original submittals. Indicate all changes other than those requested by the Architect. 1.9 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECTS ELECTRONIC DRAWING FILES A. General. At contractor's written request and upon receipt of the signed agreement included at end of this section, Architect will provide copies of requested CAD files to contractor for use in connection with the project subject to the conditions stated in the Agreement. PART 2 PRODUCTS MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Prepare Division 1 Section `Schedule of Values. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Prepare per Division 1 Section `Progress Schedule. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS A. Title 'Schedule of Submittals. SECTION 01300 PAGE 4 of 7 SUBMITTALS B Prepare and submit for approval a schedule showing all submittals and their initial submittal dates required for coordination of the work. C. Organize the schedule by the applicable specification section number D Submit the schedule within 30 days after commencement of the work. E. Revise and resubmit the schedule for approval when required to keep current. 3.4 LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS A. Format 1 Title "List of Proposed Subcontractors. 2. List items in order they occur in specification sections. 3 Each list item shall state specification section number(s) and name(s) of subcontract work and subcontractor's name. B Required Information 1 Division 0 Section `General Conditions' requires identification of subcontractors. This is hereby interpreted to mean those subcontractors who shall install or fun h and install work in the project. 2. If, with Architect's approval, identification of certain subcontractors is delayed, so indicate in list. Furnish prior to first progress payment application. C. Distribution. Submit three copies to Architect. 3.5 MATERIAL AND PRODUCT DATA A. General 1 Purpose of these submittals is to establish the materials and products to be used in the work. 2. Submit to the Architect, shop drawings, samples, and maintenance and operation manuals for related submittal work. B Format 1 Provide with cover sheet' information per Part 1 4B 2. Bind to allow removal or insertion of pages. Provide suitable protective cover 3 Present items in order they occur in specification sections. C Required Information MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI D Distribution 3.6 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. General Format SECTION 01300 PAGE 5 of 7 SUBMITTALS 1 Contractor's statement of approval and identification of any deviations from contract documents per Division 0 Section `General Conditions. Place on face or cover sheet' of submittals. 2. Description of materials, products, or systems required by all sections of the specification. Provide sufficient technical information to establish conformance with specification via. a. Manufacturer's literature or other necessary descriptive materials, including installation instructions b Contractor's letter that minor miscellaneous items (nails, bolts, etc.) shall conform to specified standards c Information requirements for mechanical and electrical items (refer to Divisions 15 and 16). 3 Where possible, submittal should include rough -in and dimension information to preclude need for further submittal per below 4 Indicate clearly for each item the need for selection by Architect of color style, mounting, etc. Selections will be returned with approval. 5 Include recommendations for application and use. 6 Show special coordination requirements for the product. 1 Submit copies to Architect for all structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical submittals: one each for cons ant, Owner and Architect and two for return to Contractor All architectural submittals require three copies. 2. Architect will forward approved copy of submittal to Contractor 1 Purpose of these submittals is to determine installation and erection requirements for components of the work. 2. Submit with product data, samples, test data, and installation or application procedures and other submittals as delineated for each section of the specifications. 3 Show all conditions and connections to other work on shop drawings. 4 Submittals under this part are not intended to duplicate those specified under Part 3.5 above. 1 Provide with cover sheet' information per Part 1 4B 2. Submit two bond copies. Provide one additional copy of all civil, structural, mechanical, and electrical shop drawings. Architect will return two copies to Contractor 3 Sample size (2 inches minimum) to be as necessary to display requested color texture, pattern, or construction. Provide four samples total, one sample will be retained by the Architect and one sample is to be kept at the jobsite at all times. C. Required Information 1 Submittal information required per specifications for subject work. 2. Reference to work 'by others' shall be assumed to mean "by Contractor' unless otherwise noted. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Format SECTION 01300 PAGE 6 of 7 SUBMITTALS 3 Samples to include accurate samples of all substrates and coverings, by same or other trades, as required to produce example of final result. 3.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare per Division 1 Section `Project Record Documents. 3.8 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUALS A. General 1 Purpose is to provide Owner with record information necessary for his future operation and maintenance of the project. 2. Refer to Part 3.5 above for related work. 3 Provide six separate manual sets: two each for architectural, mechanical, and electrical work. 1 Bind each manual in a three- ringed, heavy -duty vinyl- covered hardboard binder 2. On cover imprint title 'General (or 'Mechanical' or "Electrical Equipment Operation and Maintenance Manual' names of project, Owner Architect (include name of appropriate consultant engineer on mechanical and electrical manuals); and year of substantial completion; include Contractor's name and date. On bound edge, imprint name of project and Owner year of substantial completion. 3 On bound edge, imprint name of project and owner and year of substantial completion. 4 Pages to be neat, clean sheets 8-1 /2-by-11-inch maximum size or accordion foldouts to same size. 5 Items to be identified with tabbed dividers showing section name and number of appropriate specification sections. 6 Arrange dividers and items in order they occur in specifications. C Required Information 1 Table of contents 2. Consecutive page number in lower right corner of each page 3 All information needed to operate and maintain systems and equipment provided in the project presented and arranged in a logical manner for efficient use by the Owner's operating personnel 4 Includes, but not limited to, the following: a. Equipment manufacturer make, model number size, etc. Include distributor phone number etc. as required to obtain replacement parts. b. Equipment nameplate data of major items. c. Description of system configuration and operation, including component identification and interrelations. A master control schematic drawmgs(s) will normally be required for this purpose. d. Dimensional and performance data for specific unit provided. Extraneous catalog data must be eliminated. e. Manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and materials. f. Manufacturer's recommended operating instructions as appropriate. g. Manufacturer's recommended lubrication and servicing data. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI J h. Complete parts list, including reordering information, recommended spares, and anticipated useful life (if appropriate) i. Emergency instructions. D Distribution Inspection procedures. SECTION 01300 PAGE 7 of 7 SUBM ITTALS 5 Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for further requirements for mechanical and electncal manuals. 1 Prior to binding, submit one preliminary copy to Architect for approval. Preliminary copy shall be complete, except include temporary cover showing intended layout for final cover and bound edge. 2. Upon approval of preliminary copy prepare and submit to Architect two final copies of each manual to be forwarded to Owner 3.9 WARRANTY MANUAL A. Prepare per Division 1 Section `Warranty Procedures. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Instruction 1 Completely describe manufacturer's recommended maintenance methods, procedures, and materials. 2. Submit one copy to Owner in advance of Owner's use or maintenance of product or material to preclude incorrect action by Owner 3 Submit one copy in Maintenance and Operation Manual. B Materials for Maintenance 1 Provide quantities specified in Divisions 2 through 16 2. Deliver to Owner as directed. 3 Colors, patterns, and textures shall match work installed and shall be taken from same run of stock. END OF SECTION 01300 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 a r c h i t e c t s S U B M I T T A L C O V E R S H E E T T R A N S M I T T A L PROJECT NAME DATE SPECIFICATION SECTION TO Mahlum Architects FROM SUBCONTRACTOR SUPPLIER INSTALLER MANUFACTURER Description of Submittals COPIES DWG NO Contractors Comments: BY DATE Description of Deviation from Requirements: Architects Comments: o Reviewed o Rejected o Furnish as Noted M A 11 L U M REV /RET Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI SUBMITTAL TYPE ta Submittal Review o Revise and Resubmit o Submit Specified Item o Note Markings By Date: Date Approvals Requested Date Submittal Received by Contractor PROJECT NO 200751700 SUBMITTAL NO PHONE PHONE PHONE PHONE I have examined this submittal and certify compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Response Required o Confirm o Resubmit Architect's review is for general conformance with the design content and Contract Documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the proejct plans and specifications, nor departures therefrom. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly and for performing the work in a safe manner Date Submittal Returned to Contractor Mahlum Architects 2007 Form 1046 71 Columbia SUITE 400 Se the WA 98104 206 206 1231 NW Hoyt SUITE 102 Portland, OR 97209 503 503 441 4151 441 0478 224 4032 224 0918 a r c h i t e c t s RECIPIENT M A I L U M E L E C T R O N I C R E L E A S E A G R E E M E N T PROJECT NAME Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI PROJECT NO 2007517.00 FILE NAME DATE Mahlum Architects will provide to the Recipient an electronic version of drawing file(s) for the referenced project subject to the following terms upon receipt of a copy of this agreement that has been signed by an authorized representative of the Recipient. The Recipient will use the electronic drawing files furnished by Mahlum Architects only for the project identified above. 1 The Recipient recognizes that the electronic drawing files are instruments of the services of Mahlum Architects and that Mahlum Architects (and, if applicable, the project owner) is not relinquishing any reserves, common law statutory or other rights, including the copyright. 2. The Recipient agrees that use of the electronic drawing files is for the convenience of the Recipient only at the Recipient s sole risk, and without any liability or legal exposure to Mahlum Architects. The Recipient waives any claim that it may otherwise have against Mahlum Architects or its officers, directors, employees or consultants arising out of use of the electronic drawing files. 3 There are limitations upon the possible usefulness and accuracy of the information contained in the electronic files, including but not limited to the following: a. The drawings are not drawn precisely to scale in every case. Use of the electronic files does not change any field verification requirements. b Dimensions reflect certain conventions in some instances. c. The electronic files may not reflect current or proposed conditions. The information contained in the electronic drawing files is subject to continual modification and may not be identical to the information in the contained documents for the project. d. The electronic files may not reflect existing conditions. e. In the case of inconsistency between the electronic drawing files being delivered in accordance with this agreement and the contract documents for the projects, the contract documents govern. Mahlum Architects 2007 Form 1094 71 Columbia SUITE 40. Seattle WA 98104 206 206 441 0478 1231 NW Hoyt SUITE 102 Portland, OR 97209 503 224 4032 503 441 4151 224 0918 a r c h i t e c t s ARCHITECT Name: Title: RECIPIENT Name: Title: M A H L U M td E L E C T R O N I C R E L E A S E A G R E E M E N T 4. The Recipient acknowledges that this agreement does not modify or amend any of its contracts or agreements respecting the Project. 5 The Recipient agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Mahlum Architects (along with its officers, directors, shareholders and employees) and its consultants against and from any claim which may be made by any person or business entity arising out of or in any way relating to the Recipient s receipt, transfer or use of the electronic drawing files. 6. Mahlum Architects is providing the requested electronic drawing files as an uncompensated accommodation to the Recipient. This agreement does not constitute an agreement to sell a product or an agreement on the part of Mahlum Architects to perform services for the Recipient. 7 The following electronic drawing files will be transmitted by the Architect to the Recipient: File Names: Agreed and approved by- Mahlum Architects 2007 Form 1094 71 Columba SUITE 40. Seattle WA 98104 206 441 4151 206 441 0478 503 224 4032 S03 224.0918 1231 NW Hoyt SUITE 102 Portland, OR 97200 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Revised General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Section, apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 13 DESCRIPTION A. Work includes: 1 Construction progress schedule 2. Schedule updates and revisions B Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Section 01010, Summary of Work 2. Section 01011 Contract Time and Sequence 3 Section 01026, Payment Procedures 4 Section 01121 Hazardous Materials Procedures 5 Section 01200 Project Meetings 6 Section 01300 Submittals 7 Section 01700 Contract Closeout 8 Divisions 2 through 16, Technical Specifications PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION SECTION 01310 PAGE 1 of 3 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. General. Prepare per Section 01300, Submittals, and Section 00700 General Conditions. B Format 1 Title 'Construction Progress Schedule. 2. Date to be that of original submission with revision date noted for each subsequent update. 3 Use predetermined paper size of 24 by 36. C. Required Information 1 Submit, within fifteen (15) work days, based on a 7 -day week, after Notice to Proceed, an arrow diagram' critical path method (CPM) network schedule diagram of the project for the entire construction period. In addition to the "arrow diagram," submit a time- scaled "summary' network schedule identifying major areas of construction progress and the cntical path. 2. Submit initial schedule to the Owner and Architect and review as appropriate for meeting the scheduling requirements of the contract. The construction schedule shall. a. Be an "activity- type" CPM schedule clearly identifying the activity and time required for the activity m work days. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01310 PAGE 2 of 3 PROGRESS SCHEDULE b The arrow diagram schedule shall consist of a minimum of 250 construction activities. This will be in addition to procurement and submittal activities. c. The CPM arrow diagram shall clearly show the early start and completion time in elapsed working days from Notice to Proceed for every activity on the schedule. The critical path shall be clearly identified. A scheduling calendar converting elapsed work days to calendar dates may be added to the schedule or submitted separately d. Show a logical sequence of the work to be accomplished. e. Show the order and interdependence of the Contractor's planned activities. Indicate CPM dummy constraints. f. Have as many activities as practical broken down such that no individual CPM activity element is for a duration greater than twenty-one (21) calendar days, unless approved by Architect. Identify phases or major areas of construction of the CPM schedule by logically grouping activities and indicating phase or area in large print. Include transition time between phases and sub phases for Owner move -out, and hazardous material removal, to obtam City of Port Angeles Certificate(s) of Occupancy allow for installation of Owner funushed and installed equipment and furnishings; and Owner move -in to the finished portions. h. Include sufficient time for performance of hazardous matenals removal by Owner's Hazardous Materials abatement Contractors i. Include delegated design items, including dates of design, permitting submittals, fabrication and installation as required by Section 01331 `Delegated Design Requirements. j Include activities or milestones as requested by Owner k. Indicate any required actions of Owner or Architect affecting progress or completion date. 1. Clearly display the precedence of submittal schedule activities, i.e. the nodal point on the construction schedule by which a particular submittal/review /fabrication and delivery must be accomplished. m. Display the phases of the project clearly and the effects (if any) of the other scheduled projects that will occur simultaneously D Schedule Revision and Update Requirements: Updated information, including as -built logic, activity durations and completion dates, forecast resequencing or rescheduling, shall be entered on the schedule as these events become known. The schedule which has then been continually updated will be submitted to the Architect on a monthly basis. E. Distribution: Following initial submittal to and response by Architect, print and distribute progress schedule to Architect, Owner principal subcontractors, suppliers or fabricators, and others with a need to know the schedule. Post copies in project meeting rooms and field office. Distribute and post subsequent updated issues to same entities when revisions are made except, delete entities from distribution when they have completed assigned work and are no longer involved in performance of scheduled work. g. F Procedure Durmg Construction: The Contractor and Owner with the assistance of the Architect, shall analyze actual construction progress at each construction progress meeting. If, during the course of the work, changes are of such nature as to cause resequencing or rescheduling of events from that originally shown, the Contractor will submit updated and revised CPM reflecting the actual progress of the work. Should the Contractor fail to meet the scheduled dates shown, the Owner through the Architect, may direct the Contractor to accelerate his efforts in order to complete the project within the time indicated on the latest approved schedule. Such acceleration costs shall be borne by the Contractor MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI END OF SECTION 01310 SECTION 01310 PAGE 3 of 3 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 1 Provide a copy of simplified 3 -week look ahead bar graph type schedule to each attendee at each construction progress meeting showing major activities planned for the coming three weeks. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. General 1 Quality control work by Contractor as indicated 2. Inspections and testing by Owner's testing laboratory B Requirements: Comply with the following: 1 Division 0 Section `General Conditions' 2. Division 1 Section `Code and Permit Requirements' 3 Division 1 Section `Product Options and Substitutions' 4 Division 1 Section `Structural Testing, Inspection and Quality Insurance C Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1 Division 1 Section `Submittals' 2. Division 1 Section `Progress Schedules' D Contract Conditions SECTION 01400 PAGE 1 of 6 QUALITY CONTROL 1 Independent testing agencies, whether employed by the Owner or the Contractor are not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge the requirements of the Contract Documents or to approve or accept any portion of the work. 2. Employment of testing agencies, by the Contractor or the Owner shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. E. Owner's Responsibility for Inspections and Tests 1 The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform the required services which are indicated in this section as the Owner's responsibility (if any). F Contractor's Responsibility for Inspections and Tests 1 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspections and tests required in Division 2 through 16 and not indicated to be the Owner's responsibility 2 The Contractor shall be responsible for and pay the expense of additional inspections and tests by the Owner's testing laboratory caused by defective work or ill -timed notice. 3 The Contractor shall remove and replace defective work at no cost to the Owner G Code Inspections 1 Inspections and tests specified herein are in addition to those performed by code officials as required by the applicable codes. Any costs associated with code inspections shall be included in the contract sum. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.4 SUBMITTALS SECTION 01400 PAGE 2 of 6 QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall forward four copies of inspections and tests to the Architect for his use and for distribution to the Owner and consultants. B The Owner's testing laboratory shall forward one copy each of inspections and tests directly to the Owner the Architect, the Architect's consultants as directed, and the Contractor Additional copies shall be forwarded to the building official or other authorities as requested. C Include the following information in all types of reports: 1 Date of report 2. Project name and number 3 Descnption of the quality control activity 4 Name, address, and phone number of entity performing activity 5 Date quality control activity was performed 6. Specification section(s) involved 7 Basis for evaluation (test method, etc.) 8. Results or conclusions, includmg evaluations and interpretations 9 Title, name, and signature of person performing activity D Include the following information in all test reports: 1 Locations from which samples were taken, if any 2. Ambient conditions at time of activity 3 Recommendations on retesting, if any 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General Workmanship Standards: Except as specifically defined in individual sections, conform to the recogmzed workmanship quality standards (including ANSI standards where applicable) equal in all respects to best recognized practice of trade. Every installer performing a category of work is required to be: 1 Prequalified to the extent of being familiar with the applicable and recognized quality standards for his/her category of work. 2. Capable of workmanship complying with those standards. B Industry Standards and Recommendations 1 Applicable standards of construction industry shall be considered a part of the Contract Documents whether or not referenced. 2. Where industry associations are referenced, their published standards related to work specified shall be considered a part of the Contract Documents. 3 Industry or manufacturer's recommendations shall be considered mandatory 4 Referenced standards shall take precedence over nonreferenced standards. 5 Unless otherwise indicated, standards shall be those in effect as of date of Contract Documents. C. Qualifications for Owner's Testing Laboratory The testing laboratory will be selected by the Owner and approved by local jurisdiction. The laboratory will meet ASTM E329 -67T standards. D Qualifications for Contractor's Testing Laboratory 1 As indicated m individual sections. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI F Qualifications of Manufacturers 1 As indicated in individual sections. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Prepare a schedule of quality control activities required. Include activities of the Owner's testing agencies. 2. Provide the following information for each activity a. Specification section number b. Description of the activity c. Identification of test or inspection methods d. Enumeration of results required e. Number of tests required f. Number and type of samples to be taken, if any g. Starting time of activity h. Date work will be ready for the Owner's testing agency access i. Elapsed time required for activity j Entity responsible k. Special requirements for activity SECTION 01400 PAGE 3 of 6 QUALITY CONTROL 2. A firm independent from the Contractor's organization. 3 Experienced in the testing specified and having the capability of conducting satisfactorily the testing specified without delaying the progress of the work as shown by information supplied as required by ASTM E699 E. General Testing Laboratory Coordination: Where the Owner has employed a testing agency to test or inspect a portion of the work and the Contractor also is required to employ a testing agency for the same or a related element, do not employ the same testmg agency unless otherwise agreed upon in writing by the Owner 2. The term experienced, unless otherwise indicated, means having 5 years of successful production of products similar to those to be used on this project. 3 Where qualifications are required to be submitted but no specific qualifications are specified, use only experienced manufacturers. 4 Manufacturer's field personnel shall be employed directly by the manufacturer and normally performing the activities specified. G. Testmg Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) standards or to accepted values of natural physical constants. 1.6 COORDINATION WITH OTHER ENTITIES A. Cooperate with other entities performing quality control activities. B Provide samples of materials and design criteria as indicated and when requested. C. Provide other assistance, equipment, tools, and storage facilities as specified. D If desired, make arrangements with those entities and pay for additional similar or related testing or inspection required for the Contractor's use or convenience. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01400 PAGE 4 of 6 QUALITY CONTROL B Coordinate quality control activities to avoid delay and to avoid the necessity of removing and replacmg construction to accommodate testing and inspections. C Notify the Owner's testing agencies 14 working days prior to commencement or completion of work which is to be tested or inspected, whichever is applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide work of the specified quality Where quality level is not mdicated, provide work of quality customary in similar types of work. 1 Where codes, laws, or regulations require work of higher quality or performance, provide work complying with those codes, laws, and regulations. 2. Where two or more quality provisions of the Contract Documents conflict, comply with the most stringent requirement. Where requirements are different but apparently equal, and where it is uncertain which requirement is most stringent, obtain clarification from the Architect before proceeding. 3 Actual quality may exceed the specified quality Verify that such differences are acceptable to the Owner (other cntena may make excessive quality undesirable) B Control products, suppliers, manufacturers, site conditions, installers, and workmanship m such a manner as to produce work of the specified quality C. Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. 1 Keep a record of instructions and recommendations which supplement or conflict with the manufacturer's written mstructions. 2. When manufacturers' instructions and recommendations conflict with the Contract Documents, obtain clarification from the Architect before proceeding. D Use installers who are capable of producing work of the specified quality E. Perform all quality control activities specified unless indicated to be performed by other entities. F Perform tests as specified. When results of tests are unsatisfactory make whatever changes or repairs are necessary and retest. G Perform inspections as specified. When inspections reveal unsatisfactory work, make whatever changes or repairs are necessary and reinspect. 3.2 CONTRACTOR'S PREINSTALLATION QUALITY CONTROL A. Coordination of Work: Well in advance of the installation of every major unit of work which requires coordination with other work, the Contractor shall ensure that the unit of work can be installed and function as intended and required in conjunction with other work which has preceded or will follow In event of conflicts, the Contractor shall determine corrective action required, inform the Architect, and proceed with Architect's concurrence. B Inspection of Conditions: The Contractor shall require the installer of each major unit of work to (1) inspect the substrate to receive the work, (2) inspect the conditions under which the work will be performed, and (3) report (in writing to the Contractor) unsatisfactory conditions. The installer shall not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to him. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.3 CONTRACTOR'S INSTALLATION QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 01400 PAGE 5 of 6 QUALITY CONTROL C Notice for Owner's Testing Lab The Contractor shall notify the Owner's testing laboratory the structural engineer and the Architect not less than 24 hours before work requiring inspection or testing is started. A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, the Contractor shall comply with the manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation. To whatever extent these are more explicit or more stringent than applicable requirements, indicate in the Contract Documents. B Inspection: The Contractor shall inspect each item of material or equipment immediately prior to installation and reject damaged and defective items. C. Attachments and Connections: Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work properly as it is installed, true to line and level, and within recognized industry tolerances if not otherwise indicated. Allow for expansions and building movements. Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work, organized for best possible visual effect. Refer questionable visual effect choices to Architect for final decision. D Verify Dimensions: Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work as an integral step of starting each installation. E. Conditions for the Work: Install work during conditions of temperature, humidity exposure, forecasted weather and status of project completion which will ensure the best possible result for each unit of work in coordination with the entire work. Isolate each unit of work from noncompatible work as required to prevent deterioration. F Closing -in the Work: Coordinate enclosure of work with required inspections and tests so as to avoid the necessity of uncovering work for that purpose. G Mounting Heights: Except as otherwise indicated, mount individual units of work at the industry- recognized standard mounting heights for the applications indicated. Refer questionable mounting height choices to the Architect for final decision. H. Finished Height for Site Items 1 Adjust finished elevations and locations of site items, including fire hydrants, catch basins and other drains, and light standards, as required for perfect operation on grades per architectural site plans. 2. Adjust grades and site items as required or directed to maintain drains at low points and maintain functional slopes toward all drains. 3.4 RESPONSIBILITIES OF OWNER'S TESTING LABORATORY A. Provide inspection of work listed below B Make tests required by applicable building codes and these specifications. C. Submit written reports of inspections and tests to Superintendent of Buildings, the Architect and his structural engineer and the Contractor 3.5 SCHEDULE OF TESTS AND INSPECTIOSN BY OWNER'S TESTING LABORARTY A. As indicated below and in individual specification sections. 1 02200 Earthwork a. Excavation b Proof rolling MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.6 REPAIR AND PROTECTION BY CONTRACTOR SECTION 01400 PAGE 6 of 6 QUALITY CONTROL c. Compaction d. Density tests e. Backfill materials 2. 07552 Roofing a. Matenal b Placement 3 09250 Gypsum Board Systems: Finish per Northwest Wall and Ceiling Board Standards. 4 Testing: The Owner will provide code required tests as stated above. However all other testing will be done as an Owner's option and, therefore, the Contractor shall not rely on the Owner's quality control program to verify that construction meets the specified standards. a. In general, Owner's geotech and other inspections are for Owner's interests in monitoring the work. The contractor is to provide all engineering and testing required to insure safety and compliance with construction documents requirements. A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample- taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Division 1 Section `Cutting and Patching. B Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities and protect repaired construction. C Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services. 3.7 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Adjust, clean, lubricate, restore marred finishes, and protect newly installed work to ensure that it will remain without damage or deterioration during the remainder of the construction period. END OF SECTION 01400 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 01450 PAGE 1 of 10 STRUCTURAL TESTING, INSPECTION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, mcluding General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Inspection and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods as specified hereafter for the work. B All special testing and inspections for the Seismic Force Resisting System as described herein. C Costs. The costs of the initial services for testing and inspection personnel will be paid by the Owner If initial tests indicate non compliance with contract document requirements, any subsequent testing shall be performed by the same personnel and paid for by the contractor Schedule portions of the work requiring testing and mspections services so as to be continuous and brief as possible. D Code Compliance Inspection and Tests: Inspections and tests not specified herein and required by codes and ordinances, or by plan approval authorities, and made by a legally constituted authonty shall be the responsibility of the contractor unless otherwise specified. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The Building Code as defined in the Structural Drawings. B American Welding Society AWS D1 1 Structural Welding Code Steel. C. American Concrete Institute: ACI -301 Specifications for Structural Concrete D American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). The following are specifically referenced for structural steel testing: 1 ASTM A435 Standard Specification for Straight -Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates 2. ASTM A898 Standard Specification for Straight Beam ultrasonic Examination of Rolled Steel Structural Shapes 3 ASTM E114 Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Pulse -Echo Straight Beam Examination by the Contact Method 4 ASTM El 64 Standard Practice for Contact Examination of Weldments 5 ASTM E329 Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and Bituminous Materials as used in Construction 6 ASTM E543 Standard Practice for Agencies Performing Non destructive Testing 7 ASTM E587 Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Angle -Beam Examination by the Contact Method 8 ASTM E709 Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination 9 ASTM E 1212 Standard Practice for Establishment and Maintenance of Quality Control Systems for Non destructive Testing Agencies 10 ASTM E1444 Standard Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). The following are specifically referenced for concrete testing: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 ASTM C31 Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in Field 2. ASTM C33 Specification of Concrete Aggregates 3 ASTM C39 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens 4 ASTM C42 Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete 5 ASTM C94 Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete 6. ASTM C143 Test method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 7 ASTM C172 Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete 8 ASTM C173 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by Volumetric Method 9 ASTM C192 Standard Practice for making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory 10 ASTM C23I Test method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method 11 ASTM C597 Test Method for Pulse Velocity Through Concrete 12. ASTM C803 Test Method for Penetration Resistance of Hardened Concrete 13 ASTM C805 Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete F American National Standards Institute (ANSI) /American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT) 1 ANSI/ASNT CP 189 -1995 2. ANSI/ASNT SNT TC 1 1.4 DEFINITIONS 13 SUBMITTALS SECTION 01450 PAGE 2 of 10 STRUCTURAL TESTING, INSPECTION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency refers to the organization or group of organizations responsible for representmg the Owner and performing all inspection, testing, and laboratory services as described herein. B Hold Point is a stage of interim construction completion, beyond which the work should not proceed until the designated inspector has completed the inspection tasks specified for this stage. A. Testing agency shall submit the following: 1 The qualifications of the testing agency management and personnel designated to the project. 2. The testing agency `Written Practice for Quality Assurance. 3 Qualification records for Inspector and NDT technicians designated for the project. 4 The testing agency NDT procedures, equipment calibration records, and personnel training records. 5 The testing agency Quality Control Plan for the monitoring and control of the testing operations. 6 Welding Inspection Procedures. 7 Bolting Inspection Procedures. 8 Shear Connector Stud Inspection Procedures. B Test and Inspection Reports: The independent testing and inspection agency or agencies will prepare logs, test reports, and certificates applicable to specific tests and inspections and deliver copies distributed as follows. 1 1 copy to the Owner MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01450 PAGE 3 of 10 STRUCTURAL TESTING, INSPECTION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE 2. 1 copy to the Architect 3 1 copy to the Structural Engineer 4 1 copy to the General Contractor 5 Copy or copies, as required, to the building department (or as required by the authonty having jurisdiction) C Other tests, certificates, and similar documents shall be obtained by the Contractor and delivered to the Owner and/or Architect m such time as not to delay progress of the work or final payment therefore. D Laboratory Reports. Furnish reports of materials and construction as required, including: 1 Descnption of method of test. 2. Identification of sample and portion of the work tested. a. Descnption of location in the work of the sample. b Time and date when sample was obtained. c. Weather and climatic conditions at time when sample was obtained. 3 Evaluation of results of tests mcludmg recommendations for action. E. Inspection Reports: Furnish 'Inspection at Site' reports for each site visit documenting activities, observations, and inspections, including notation of weather and climatic conditions, tune and date, conditions and status of the work, actions taken, and recommendations or evaluation of the work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: All inspection and testing required to establish compliance with the contract document requirements, except as may be otherwise specified, shall be made by a prequalified, independent professional testing agency provided, and paid for by the Owner B Certification: Product producers and associations, which have instituted approved systems of quality control and which have been approved by document approval agencies, are not required to have further testing. Concrete mixing plants, plants producing fabricated concrete and wood or plywood products certified by the agency lumber plywood grade marked by approved associates, and materials or equipment bearing underwriters' laboratory labels require no further testing and inspection. C. Written Practice for Quality Assurance: The testing agency shall maintain a wntten practice for the selection and administration of inspection personnel, describing the training, experience, and examination requirements for qualification and certification of inspection personnel. The written practice shall describe the testing agency procedures for determining the acceptability of the structure in accordance with the applicable codes, standards, and specifications. The written practice shall describe the testing agency inspection procedures, including general inspection, material controls, visual welding inspection, and bolting inspection. D Special Inspector Qualifications: All special inspectors shall be trained and competent in accordance with the quality assurance plan. E. Welding Inspector Qualifications: 1 All welding inspectors shall meet the qualification as set forth in AWS D1 1 2. For welds m SWD Categories A and B, welding inspectors shall be AWS Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI) or Senior Certified Welding Inspectors (SCWI) as defined in AWS QCI Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01450 PAGE 4 of 10 STRUCTURAL TESTING, INSPECTION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE 3 For welds in SWD Categories C, welding inspectors shall be AWS Certified Associate Welding Inspectors (CAWI) or higher or otherwise qualified under the provisions of AWS DI 1 in accordance with the Quality Assurance Plan. F Nondestructive Testing (NDT) Personnel Qualifications: 1 NDT personnel shall be qualified under either ANSI /ASNT CP 189 -1995 or ANSI /ASNT SNT TC 1A. 2. Ultrasonic Testing (UT) shall be performed only by certified ASNT Level III technicians or by certified ASNT Level II technicians acting under the direct supervision of an ASNT Level III technician. 3 UT Technicians who perform flaw detection or sizmg shall be trained in applicable UT procedures and shall demonstrate their competence through testing as prescribed in FEMA 353 Appendix E for all connections that are part of the SFRS. G Bolting Inspector Qualifications: Each bolting inspector shall be trained and qualified to inspect bolting operations and high strength bolted connection for compliance with the RCSC Specification and the Quality Assurance Plan. Competency shall be demonstrated through the administration of a written examination and through the hands -on demonstration by the Inspector of the methods to be used for bolt installation and inspection. 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A. General. Coordinate quality control activities to avoid delay and to eliminate any need to uncover work for testing or inspection. B Access: Furnish free access to the various parts of the work and assist testing and mspection personnel in the performance of their duties at no additional cost to the Owner C. Data. Furnish records, drawings, certificates, and similar data as may be required by the testing and inspection personnel to assure compliance with the contract documents. D Notice: Furnish notice to Owner and/or Architect and testing and inspection agency not less 24 hours prior to any time required for such services. E. Defective Work: Remove and replace any work found defective or not complying with contract document requirements at no additional cost to the Owner Where testing personnel take cores or cut -outs to verify compliance, repair prior to acceptance. F Concrete: If test cylinders for concrete fail to meet design requirements, provide additional tests as may be directed by the Owner and/or Architect. Make core tests in accordance with ASTM C42 and load tests in accordance with ACI 318. Correct all deficiencies found in forms, reinforcing steel, and embedded objects. G Structural Steel. Should any weld or structural connection fail to meet design requirements, provide additional testing for structural connections as directed by the Owner and/or Architect or Structural Engineer Replace or repair all defective connections as directed. 1.8 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES A. General. Testing agency shall test or obtain certificates of tests of materials and methods of construction, as described herein or elsewhere in the technical specification. The testing agency shall provide the management, personnel, equipment, and services necessary to perform the testing functions as outlined in this section. B Inspection Services: The testing agency will have full authority to see that the work is performed in strict accordance with requirements of the contract documents and the directions of the Owner and/or Architect. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01450 PAGE 5 of 10 STRUCTURAL TESTING, INSPECTION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE C Welding Procedure Review The testing agency shall provide a review and approval or rejection of all welding procedures to be used and shall venfy compliance with all reference standard requirements. 1.9 TESTS AND INSPECTION REPORTS A. Laboratory Reports: Furnish reports of materials and construction as required, includes description of method of test; identification of samples and portion of the work tested, description of location in the work of the sample, time and date when sample was obtained, weather and climatic conditions at time when sample was obtained, and an evaluation of results of tests including recommendations for action. B Inspection Reports: Furnish `Inspection at Site' reports for each site visit documenting activities, observations, and inspections. Include notation of weather and climatic conditions, time and date, conditions and status of the work, actions taken, and recommendations or evaluation of the work. Include the following in all structural steel test and inspection reports (include all that apply): a. Welder's certification b. Weld qualification tests c. Visual inspections d. Review of materials testing procedures, including electrodes used, item inspected e. Magnetic particle tests (MP) f. Radiographic tests (RT) g. Ultrasonic tests (UT) h. Liquid Penetrant test (LP) i. High- strength bolted connection tests 2. Include the following in all concrete test and inspection reports. a. Exact mix used and maximum size aggregate b. Location in building for whicli samples were taken c Cylinder identification d. Date cylinder received in laboratory e. Slump data f. Concrete supplier's name g. Brand and type of cement used 1.10 REPORTING TEST FAILURES A. Immediately upon inspector's determination of a test failure, the inspector shall telephone results to the Contractor Owner and Architect. On the same day the inspector shall distribute written test results. 1.11 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Concrete Formwork: Inspect forms for location, configuration, camber shoring, sealing of form joints, correct forming material, concrete accessories, and form tie locations. Contractor shall provide the inspector with a copy of the approved formwork/shonng shop drawings. B Reinforcing Steel 1 All steel bars must be positively identified as to heat number and mill analysis. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01450 PAGE 6 of 10 STRUCTURAL TESTING, INSPECTION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE a. All steel bars that cannot be identified by heat number and mill analysis shall have one tensile and one bend test made for each 2 metric tons or fraction thereof, of each size and kind of reinforcing steel. b. Testing procedure shall conform to ASTM A615 C Concrete Sampling and Testing 1 Perform the following services as required to assure compliance with requirements of Section 03300 of this specification. The contractor shall notify the engmeer and inspection- testing agency of the brand and type of cement and sources of aggregates in time for approval, sampling, and testing (if required). 2. Batch Plant Inspection. Batch plant inspection by the inspector shall be as specified in the Building Code. Batch plant(s) shall continuously monitor and control fines content of arriving aggregate at plant prior to batching. 3 Continuous Field Inspection: The inspector shall be present at all times during the placing of structural, reinforced concrete. Prior to placing concrete, he shall inspect and approve, if satisfactory accuracy of all formwork and quantity and placement of all reinforcing steel. 4 Water Test in accordance with ASTM C94 and CRC -C 400 as appropriate. 5 Aggregates for normal weight concrete shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C33 6. Samples of concrete for air slump, unit weight, and strength tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172. Concrete test specimen shall be produced from concrete directly exitmg the chute of the truck delivering the concrete. a. Air Content: Test for air content shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 173 or ASTM C231 A minimum of one test per day shall be conducted. b. Slump Tests: Slump tests shall be taken every 150 cubic yards delivered for each set of compression strength test cylinders, but not less than one test per hour during continuous pours. Slump shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C143 c. Strength Tests: Strength tests per ASTM C39 shall be performed on test specimen prepared in accordance with either ASTM C192 for Laboratory Cured Specimen or ASTM C31 for Field Cured Specimen. Strength tests shall conform with the following: 1) Test specimen (cylinders) shall be taken so as to represent as nearly as possible the batch of concrete from which they are taken. 2) Tests shall be performed for each 150 cubic yards of each separate mix design of concrete or fraction thereof being placed each day 3) The quantity of test specimen shall be produced in order to achieve the following: At least one test at 7 days, at least one test at 28 days, and at least two tests at the specified test age as indicated on the structural drawings. 4) An additional test specimen shall be produced should it be necessary to perform further testing. This specimen is to be discarded should the additional testing not be necessary 5) The strength level of an individual class of concrete for the cured specimen shall be satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met: (1) Average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equal or exceed the specified compressive strength, (2) No individual class of concrete strength test (average of two cylinders) falls below the specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 6) Report exact mix tested, minimum size aggregate, location of pour in the work, cylinder identification, date of receipt of cylinder in laboratory cement brand and type, and admixtures used. 7 Investigation of Low- Strength Test Results: When any strength test of laboratory-cured or field -cured test cylinder falls below the specified strength requirement by more than 500 psi, MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI E. Structural Steel General or if tests of field -cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and curing, steps shall be taken to assure that load carrying capacity of the structure is not jeopardized. a. Nondestructive testing in accordance with ASTM C597 ASTM C803 or ASTM C805 may be permitted by the Owner and/or Architect to determine the relative strengths at vanous locations in the structure as an aid in evaluating concrete strength m place or for selecting areas to be cored. Such tests, unless properly calibrated and correlated with other test data, shall not be used as a basis for acceptance or rejection. b. When strength of concrete in place is considered potentially deficient, cores shall be obtamed and tested in accordance with ASTM C42. At least three representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. The location of cores shall be determined by the Owner's representative to least impair the strength of the structure. c. If the concrete in the structure will be dry under service conditions, the cores shall be air -dried (temperature 60 to 80 degrees F), relative humidity less than 60 percent for seven days before testing and shall be tested dry If the concrete in the structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, the cores shall be tested after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C42. d. Concrete in the area represented by the core testing will be considered adequate if the average strength of the cores is equal to at least 85 percent of the specified strength requirement and if no single core is less than 75 percent of the specified strength requirement. e. Repair core holes in the concrete found acceptable with an approved dry-pack or non- shrinking mortar f. If the core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain, or if structural analysis does not confirm the safety of the structure, load tests may be directed by the Owner and/or Architect m accordance with the requirements of ACI 318 Concrete work evaluated by structural analysis or by results of a load test and found deficient shall be corrected in a manner satisfactory to the Owner and/or Architect. h. All mvestigations, testing, load tests, and correction of deficiencies shall be performed, and approved by the Owner and/or Architect, at the expense of the Contractor g. SECTION 01450 PAGE 7 of 10 STRUCTURAL TESTING, INSPECTION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE D Masonry 1 General. The testing agency shall check reinforcing steel placement prior to groutmg; quality of block placement and appearance; mortar work; and shall monitor all grouting operations in accordance with the Building Code. 2. The inspection- testing agency shall make field tests of mortar and grout in accordance with the Building Code. Grout shall be tested for each 20 cubic yards of grout placed each day For mortar one test shall be conducted for every 750 square feet of construction. 3 Provide prism tests in accordance with the Building Code. 1 Mill Certificates: Mill certificates or affidavits and manufacturer's certification shall be supplied to the mspector for verification of steel materials. Testing laboratory shall be notified at least three weeks in advance of fabrication and supplied with the reports so that shop inspection may be performed. 2. General Inspection. a. Testing agency shall be at the fabricator's plant to verify that materials used match the mill tests or affidavits of test reports; that fabncation, welding procedures, surface preparation, and shop painting meet specifications; and that the work in progress conforms with project requirements. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01450 PAGE 8 of 10 STRUCTURAL TESTING, INSPECTION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE b Testing agency shall visually check fabricated steel delivered to the job to confirm that the work is in compliance with approved shop drawings and shall make any physical tests, measurements, etc. believed to be necessary c. Testing agency shall witness and report all corrections performed by the steel fabncator occurring on the fabricators own initiative. d. Testing agency shall be present during steel erection at all times. 3 Welding Requirements: Special inspection shall be provided by the testing agency for all welding in accordance with the Building Code. a. Nondestructive testing shall be performed as required by the Building Code and AWS D 1 1 as specified herein for all shop and field welds. b All welds shall be visually inspected. Welds considered suspect shall be further checked by other means deemed necessary by the welding inspector c. Ultrasonically test 100 percent of all complete penetration welds and 100% of all partial penetration column splice welds. d. Ultrasonically test all joints where the base metal is thicker than 1 1/2 inches, when subjected to through- thickness weld shrinkage strains. The joint shall be ultrasonically inspected for discontinuities directly behind such welds after joint completion. e. When ultrasonic indications arising from the weld root cannot be interpreted as either a weld defect or the backing strip itself, the backing strip shall be removed at the expense of the Contractor and if no root defect is visible, the weld shall be re- tested. If no defect is indicated on this re -test, and no significant amount of weld metal has been removed, no further repair of welding is necessary If a defect is indicated, it shall be repaired at no expense to the Owner f. Perform Magnetic Particle (MP) tests of fillet welds 5/16 inch and larger g. The inspector shall perform magnetic particle testing in accordance with ASTM E709 for any questionable welds. h. See Specification Section 05120 for additional test/quality control requirements. i. Exceptions: 1) When approved by the Owner and/or Architect and Structural Engineer the rate of testing for ultrasonic testing of complete penetration welds may be reduced in accordance with the following: a) The nondestructive testing rate for an individual welder or welding operator may be reduced to 25 percent, provided the reject rate is demonstrated to be 5 percent or less of the welds tested for the welder or welding operator A sampling of at least 40 completed welds for a job shall be made for such reduction evaluation. Reject rate is defined as the number of welds containing rejectable defects divided by the number of welds completed. b) For complete penetration groove welds on matenals less than 5/16 inch thick, nondestructive testing is not required provided contmuous inspection is provided. c) When approved by the building official, nondestructive ultrasonic testing may be performed in the shop of an AISC approved fabncator utilizing qualified test techniques in the employment of the fabricator 2) Other ultrasomc or magnetic particle testing may be reduced by approval of the Owner and/or Architect and Structural Engineer upon presentation of satisfactory documentation submitted by the contractor 3) There shall be no exceptions to the testing requirements for the SFRS 4 Bolting Requirements: All inspection shall conform to the requirements of the current edition of the `Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI F Metal Decking 1 General. Continuous inspection shall be provided for field attachment of all metal roof and floor decking; check and verify attachment and location of all closures and accessories. 2. Welding Inspection: In addition to the specified operator qualifications, prior to each welder starting work on the job and periodically as the testing agency determines, each welder shall perform a weld test to demonstrate to the inspector his ability to produce a satisfactory weld. The weld test shall be as follows: a. Weld at least two samples of deck material to a base steel section simulating the framing with one weld each sample. Twist the deck sample with respect to the base until failure occurs. If the decking tears or if the welds shearing in torsion show the proper fusion area, the welds are satisfactory b Questionable welding of the permanent decking shall be checked by the inspector by suitable means, including ultrasonic methods, if applicable. G Shear Stud Connectors: General. Special inspection shall be provided for the shop and field installation of all shear stud connectors in accordance with AWS D1 1 In addition, where the rejection rate for any welder exceeds 5 percent, each stud welded by that welder shall be struck twice by a hammer with a force sufficient to indicate whether or not a quality weld has been obtained. This hammer test is in addition to the two 30- degree bend tests required by AWS D1 1 1 Visual inspection shall be done after ferrule removal. 2. The inspector shall also check for plumbness, dimensions, and other requirement, including required stud layout patterns, and when welding is through metal deck, that fusion is complete between studs and underlying beams. 3 Certification of the stud base qualification by manufacturer per AWS D1 1 shall be supplied to the inspector H. Drill In/Power -Driven Anchors: General. The testing agency shall verify procedures used for installation of all concrete anchors and monitor their installation for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable SECTION 01450 PAGE 9 of 10 STRUCTURAL TESTING, INSPECTION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE a. For connections using high— strength bolts installed using Load Indicating Washers, the Owner's testing agency need not be present during the entire installation and tightening operation, provided the Owner's testing agency provides the following: 1) Inspection of the surface and bolt type for conformance to plans and specifications prior to the start of bolting. 2) Verification of the minimum specified bolt tensions visually and by using the feeler gauge as `no go inspection on a few bolts in each connection (10 percent or two bolts, whichever is greater) b For connection using high— strength tension control bolts, the Owners Testing Agency need not be present during the entire installation and tightening operation, provided the Testing Agency provides the following: 1) Inspection of the surface and bolt type for conformance to plans and specifications prior to the start of bolting. 2) Visual inspection of 100 percent of the high- strength bolts for properly installed tension. 5 Miscellaneous Metal. Where miscellaneous angles, channels, studs, and similar shapes are detailed for support of major components of the work, the welds, bolts, and material are subject to the same testing requirement as other structural supporting members. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 01450 SECTION 01450 PAGE 10 of 10 STRUCTURAL TESTING, INSPECTION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8. 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Work Includes SECTION 01500 PAGE 1 of 9 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 1 Requirements for temporary construction services and facilities of all kind including: a. Safety or personnel b. Protection of property and utilities c. Exterior weather resistant construction barriers required to protect and buffer windows, doors and other openings and surfaces adjacent to construction areas. d. Cleanup and waste removal e. Infection control and associated dustproof enclosures and dust control measures f. Temporary construction service facilities (including utilities) g. Temporary directional signage h. Noise control i. Air quality control (including dust) j Vehicular control and fire department access k. Fire protection 2. Contractor designed temporary stairs, lifts and over roof walkways as required for the work on roofs indicated. Protect existing roof from all damage, including damage by nails and fasteners, tools, machines, etc. If damaged repair at contactors expense as recommended by roofing manufacturer to maintain warranty Obtain owner review and approval of all proposed contractor roof protection measures. 3 Removal of temporary facilities prior to acceptance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to (where applicable laws and regulations are in conflict, follow the most stringent)- 1 Building code requirements 2. Health and safety regulations 3 Utility company regulations 4 Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules 5 Environmental protection regulations B Standards 1 General. Comply with the following: a. NFPA Code 241 "Building Construction and Demolition Operations' MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.6 RESPONSIBILITY SECTION 01500 PAGE 2 of 9 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES b ANSI A10 Senes standards for Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition' c. NECA Electrical Design Library 'Temporary Electrical Facilities 2. Recommendations: Refer to 'Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services, prepared jointly by AGC and ASC, for industry recommendations. 3 Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric. service. Install service in compliance with National Electric Code (NFPA 70). C. Inspections: Arrange for authonties having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule for Owner's approval indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility provision. Describe in detail any occupied areas of the building which may be effected. At the earliest feasible time, change over from use of temporary service to use of the permanent service. B Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with Owner's operations. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. A. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor for the general Contract shall be responsible to provide and maintain during the construction period the Temporary Construction Facilities named herein. They shall be located as directed and terminated and removed from the premises prior to the Final Payment. PART 2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION 2.1 FIELD OFFICE A. Provide substantial weathertight office space on the site. Locate where directed by Owner Include one room of approximately 150 square feet of area with the following features and accessories: 1 Shelving, plan rack, stools, chairs, and plan table located so the orientation of laid -out plans is the same as actual project, if possible. 2. Adequate heat, light, power telephone, and fax machine. B. Remove field office from premises upon completion of the contract, or sooner if directed. 2.2 INTERIM INFECTION CONTROL AND LIFE SAFETY MEASURES A. Comply with Olympic Medical Center policy for Infection Control during construction and Interim Life Safety Measures (ILSM) included at the end of this Section. Submit completed ILSM Pre construction worksheet for review and acceptance; included with Section 01510 Infection Control. 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE RATED PARTITIONS A. Provide floor to bottom of structure fire taped and with all fire and smoke seals as for permanent fire rated partitions. B Remove when authorized by local code jurisdiction. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.4 INFECTION CONTROL/DUSTPROOF ENCLOSURES 2.7 TEMPORARY TOILETS SECTION 01500 PAGE 3 of 9 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES A. Comply with Olympic Medical Center Policy and Infection Control Construction Permit, dated May 6, 2004 for Infection Control during construction included with Section 01510 Infection Control. B Provide dustproof enclosures sufficient to protect occupied spaces from construction work for the duration of the work. Comply with all requirements for infection control during construction. Infectious control measures shall be maintained 24 -hours per day 7 days per week until Olympic Medical Center Department of Epidemiology certifies that construction is complete to a stage where temporary infectious control measures are no longer required. C Take all necessary precautions to prevent the migration of infectious agents, dust, odors, fumes and debris into the existing mechanical system. Any damage to the existing mechanical systems caused by dust or debris shall be repaired by the Contractor immediately at the Contractor's expense. D Contractor to provide negative air flow and to take additional measures as necessary to ensure demolition and construction area is always pressure negative in relation to all areas outside the demolition and construction area. Contractor to develop negative air containment plan for review and acceptance by Olympic Medical Center Epidemology Department before beginning demolition work. E. Construct secunty and dust -tight barriers where required including within the existing building. Survey the existing air duct system and seal appropriate grilles so infectious agents, dust, odors, fumes and debris will not be deposited within or through the system. Dust tight barriers shall be constructed to comply with 1 -hour fire resistive partitions (unless indicated otherwise) with 31/2 metal studs and smooth finish painted 5/8' GWB on public side and fire taped 5/8' GWB on construction side. Construct dust -tight barriers to comply with infectious control requirements. Maintain negative airflow within the construction area. Extend dust barriers above the finish ceilings to underside of structure sealed around mechanical and electrical items and sealed to underside of structure. 1 Construct security and dust tight bamers at various locations within the project area as required by phasing of the work indicated. 2. Carefully mud smooth, fire tape and paint patient/staff side of dust -tight fire resistive partitions prior to painting (do not sand). F In addition to airborne infection control during construction, take appropriate measures to prevent growth of molds and other detrimental agents in all materials used on the project as identified by OMC Epdemiology Department. 2.5 PAINTING OF TEMPORARY STRUCTURES A. Coat temporary structures and barriers with two (2) coats prepared paint, color as selected. 2.6 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SAFETY BARRIERS A. Provide 6 0' high temporary chain link fencing with locked gates around all structures under construction and around all hazardous conditions caused by construction or excavation. Provide signage in all principle directions reading: Danger Construction Area Keep Out. Take care to keep construction safe and free of hazards at all times. Secure the site at the end of each day Remove all ladders and access to building. A. The Contractor shall provide adequate toilet facilities for all those connected with the work. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.8 PUBLIC UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall take care of all public utilities encountered in connection with his work; he shall pay all expenses therewith. He shall properly support all water sewer gas, electric, telephone, and other services and shall immediately notify persons or corporations owning the same granting them the opportunity to take such precautions as they see fit. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by his operations. 2.9 TEMPORARY EXIT AND CONSTRUCTION STAIRS, COVERED WALK WAYS, LIFTS AND OVER ROOF WALKWAYS A. The contractor shall design and provide all temporary exit and construction stairs, covered protective walkways, lifts, and over roof walkways as required for the work and maintenance of required exits and protected pathways through construction areas. 1 Obtain Owner approval for location of stairs, lifts and contractor proposed roof protection measures. 2. Locate stairs, lifts and drop off areas to minimize disruption to Medical Center vehicle and pedestrian traffic. B Do not damage roof or adjacent surfaces. If damaged, repair roof at contractor expense as required to maintain warranty Repair other areas damaged to condition encountered prior to beginning construction. 2.10 USE OF EXISTING SERVICE ELEVATOR AND LOADING DOCK A. Contractor will be permitted to use the existing service elevator located at north end of Hallway 322 and loading dock/receiving area at basement level for transport of demolition debns, building materials and personnel. 1 Coordmate hours of use with OMC facilities. 2. All debris is to be moved within hospital in strict accord with OMC Infection Control Policy Contractor to include infection control measures associated with transport of debris and building materials in infection control plan for review and approval by OMC 3 Provide wall and floor protection to prevent damage to interior of elevator and hoistway entrances. 4 Loading dock/receiving area to be used for loading and unloading only Coordinate hours of use with OMC facilities. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SAFETY AND PERSONNEL SECTION 01500 PAGE 4 of 9 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES A. Take all necessary precautions for the safety of employee, Owner's staff and users, and other persons on the site of the work. B Comply with all applicable codes and ordinances to prevent accident or injury on or adjacent to the premises where work is being done. 3.2 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND UTILITIES A. Fire Watch 1 Conduct operations in a fire -safe manner subject to approval of the Owner or his authorized representative Employ a fire watchman service performed by trained and experienced personnel acceptable to the state and local fire marshal. Equip personnel with portable radio communication on same frequency as hospital security and PBX. 2. Provide and maintain a sufficient number of fire extinguishers of the proper type in locations readily available in case of.a fire. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01500 PAGE 5 of 9 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 3 Clear the premises daily of excessive rubbish and debris. 4 Comply with the applicable provisions of the governing fire code which, by reference, shall be incorporated into these specifications. 5 Immediately correct any deficiencies identified by the Architect or Owner 6. Where significant or continued non compliance is noted, the Owner reserves the right to stop the work, at no extra cost or extension of time, pending remedial action. B Protection of Existing Utilities 1 If indications of underground utilities of record shown on the drawings are not necessarily exact or complete, the Contractor shall take the following steps: a. Notify owner m writing, on each occasion, of intent to work near existing underground utility services or structures. b Employ the services of a locator to survey the area with X -ray magnetic or other detection means and prominently mark the locations of utilities and services. c. Submit procedure for approval to ensure safe and continuous operation of services. d. Proceed with sufficient caution to preclude damaging any utilities known or unknown. e. In the event unidentified utilities are encountered, notify the Owner immediately f. In the event utilities are damaged during construction, temporary services and/or repairs must be made immediately to maintain continuity of service at the Contractor's expense. 2. Include in bid all expenses connected with detection and protection of existing utilities encountered. Properly protect and support all water sewer gas, electric, telephone, and other services. C. Continuity of Utility Services 1 Continuity of utility services to and within existing buildings shall be maintained at all tunes. 2. Submit a schedule of utility shutdowns within fifteen (15) days after the Notice to Proceed. 3 Confirm all requests for utility shutdowns in wntmg to the Owner not less than two (2) weeks prior to the proposed date. Requests shall include as a minimum the following information: a. Utility services affected. b. Reason shutdown is required. c. Work to be accomplished during the shutdown. d. Proposed shutdown date and time. e. Duration of the shutdown. 4 The actual time and date of all shutdowns will be subject to approval of the Owner 5 In general, they will be scheduled for nights, weekends, or other low intensity use periods. 6. The duration of all shutdowns shall be held to a reasonable minimum as determined by the Owner 7 Materials and equipment required for the work to be accomplished during shutdown shall be complete and available on the job for review by the Owner three (3) days prior to the shutdown. 8 If the Contractor is not adequately prepared, the shutdown will be canceled and re- scheduled. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01500 PAGE 6 of 9 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 9 Only Owner's personnel will shut down and restart utilities. 10 Owner will inspect the installation prior to restarting and will not restart if an unsafe condition exists. 11 In the event the Contractor's work is not completed during the time scheduled for the shutdown, the Owner may elect to restart the utilities service. In that event, additional shutdown requirements shall be re- scheduled m accordance with the preceding requirements. 12. Restarting shall not be construed as acceptance of the work as complete. 13 Include in the bid all costs associated with utilities shutdowns. 14 The Owner will make no extra payment for overtime work, schedule changes or failure to complete utilities connections within authorized shutdown periods. D .Fire Alarm Bypass: 1 Obtain a copy of the Fire Alarm Bypass Guidelines from the Owner's Engineering Department at the beginning of the project, and review the specified procedures with the appropriate sub contractors. 2. When work requires that the fire alarm system be interruped, notify the Owner's Engineering Department and coordinate with the Owner's Security Department as described in the Fire Alarm Bypass Guidelines. E. Security• 1 The contractor shall provide security at site as required for his equipment, tools and materials. 2. Contractor shall schedule the work or provide temporary partitions and doors so as to mamtain the existing Obstetric Department secure from entry and from damage by weather F Work During Other Than Normal Working Hours: When work during other than normal workmg hours is to be accomplished, the Owner must be notified so that the Owner's Secunty Department may be properly coordinated. G Cleaning and Protection of Existing Surfaces: 1 Keep public areas adjacent to construction area and along access route to construction area free of dust and debris. Provide daily cleaning at end of work shift to prevent accumulation of dust and permanent soiling of finishes. 2. Provide floor protection along route of access to construction area when removing debris or delivering materials. 3 Provide protection mats for interior of elevator cabs that are m route of access to construction. H. Exits: Construction or demolition shall not interfere or obstruct the exits or exiting system. Should it become necessary to do so, alternative methods shall first be approved by the local fire official and the Start Fire Marshal. Flammable Gases: Flammable gases and oxygen tanks shall not be used or stored in the building. Tanks shall be kept on the exterior and approved piping or UL- listed hoses used to convey the gases inside. Such tanks shall be positioned at least 20 feet from any building opening. J Flammable Liquids: Flammable liquids at the job site shall not be stored in building and shall otherwise be stored, dispensed, and used in accordance with the requirements of the local fire official and 1997 Uniform Building Code. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI K. Special Hazards: The local fire official and State Fire Marshal shall be contracted for procedure involving any special hazards or conditions. 3.3 WASTE REMOVAL SECTION 01500 PAGE 7 of 9 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES A. All refuse and waste material, includmg excess or unusable earth from excavation, shall be disposed of by the Contractor off the Owner's property B Waste matenal shall not be stockpiled on the Owner's property C Immediately clean up any spilled material from buildings, roads, etc 3.4 CLEANING OF CONCEALED OR INACCESSIBLE SPACES A. Remove and clean all construction debris and dust from spaces to be concealed prior to cover Include stud, soffit, furred and above ceiling spaces. B Vacuum clean the concealed or inaccessible spaces. Include vacuuming of all HVAC surfaces, piping, electrical conduits and devices, etc. C. Do not proceed with dry wall or ceiling installation until acceptance of cleanings by Owner's Construction Representative. 3.5 POLLUTION CONTROL A. OMC staff will monitor air quality and report results to the contractor on a regular basis. Should air quality standards fall below those present prior to Notice to Proceed (NTP), the contractor shall make such additional efforts as required to bring the environment back to pre -NTP levels. Such required measures shall be implemented at no additional cost to the Owner B Conduct cleanup and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti- pollution laws. C. DO NOT burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the project site. D DO NOT dispose of volatile fluid wastes (such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner) in storm or sanitary sewer systems or into streams or waterways. 3.6 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SERVICE FACILITIES A. General 1 Provide those temporary construction service facilities, prior to acceptance by Owner as required, including all public utility connections, heating systems, and electrical services. 2. All installations shall comply with applicable Federal, State and local codes. 3 All temporary construction service facilities shall be removed by the Contractor prior to acceptance by the Owner B Temporary Sedimentation Controls: Reference Civil C Temporary Heat 1 Provide temporary heat as required to protect materials and equipment from dampness and cold. 2. The method of heating is subject to approval of the Architect. 3 The project's permanent heating plant may not be used for temporary heating. D Electrical Power MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01500 PAGE 8 of 9 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 1 Furnish a temporary electrical distribution and wiring installation as required to serve all construction power temporary heating, lighting, and other loads requiring electrical service. Installation to conform with applicable codes and ordinances and shall be maintained in a safe and workmanlike manner 2. All costs of transformers, cable, installation, and removal at the completion of the work shall be paid by the Contractor 3 All temporary equipment shall be installed and maintained in accordance with all applicable safety regulations and subject to approval by the Owner E. Temporary Illumination 1 Furnish a temporary illumination system which will provide not less than 10 footcandles or adequate illumination of buildmg areas as required to mamtain a high level of workmanship for all trades. In addition, provide adequate security and safety lighting for all stairways, comdors, passageways and other areas as required for pathway lighting throughout the building. Pathway illumination level shall be a minimum of 2 footcandles. 2. Provide and maintain security lighting as appropnate to provide general illumination of the work area during night tune hours. F Telephone 1 Provide non -coin box telephone connected to nearest city exchange. 2. Install when work is started, maintain until full completion; pay all charges. 3 Allow all those connected with the Work to use, provided they pay for toll calls. 4 Provide toll -free communications between contractor offices includmg field offices) and OMC campus. Provide handset to owner same as contractor's communication system for use from date of Notice to Proceed through Project Closeout. G Fax. Provide in office; pay all charges. H. First Aid System: Comply with governing regulations. I. Water 1 Water for construction purposes will be furnished by the Contractor 2. All costs of temporary piping, including pressure reducing stations, removal of piping and restoration of Owner's utilities at the completion of work, shall be paid by the Contractor 3 Piping of temporary water service shall not exceed the capacity of the Owner's system and shall be limited to 1 1/2 inch pipe size. 4 Provide drinking water from a proven safe source for all those connected with the work. 5 Pipe or transport water m such manner as to keep it clean and fresh. 6. Serve m single service containers or sanitary drinking fountains. 3.7 NOISE CONTROL A. Intent: The purpose of this specification is to keep the level of construction noise inside adjacent existing buildings and/or rooms from exceedmg a dBA 55 curve (with windows closed) during all occupied hours. The Contractor may meet this criteria by erecting barriers between equipment and occupied areas. B Outdoor Vehicle and Internal Combustion Engine Noise: Noise level of each piece of equipment shall not be greater than 86 DBA at a distance of 50 feet as measured under noisiest operating conditions. Rubber -tired equipment will be used whenever possible instead of equipment with metal tracks. Construction traffic shall be routed through the nearest campus MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.9 C. D E. F exit, subject to approval of the Owner Mufflers area quality of silencing. Indoor Noise: Use of noise producing vehicles subject to Owner's approval. Air Compressors. Equipment with silencing packages. Electric dnven preferred. Jack Hammers: Use prohibited. Use core drilling or saw cutting equipment whenever possible. General. Any equipment that can be electrically dnven instead of gas or diesel is preferred. If noise levels on any gear cannot reasonably be brought down to criteria, either that gear will not be allowed on the job or use times will have to be scheduled subject to approval of the Owner Conformance to this specification shall be included m the Contract price and no compensation will be allowed for special equipment, overtime, etc. that may be required. 3.8 VEHICULAR CONTROL A. Traffic Regulation 1 Prepare a construction traffic plan subject to the Owner's approval. 2. Existing walkways and roadways leading past new work areas shall remain clear and safe at all times. This shall include access and paths for pedestrian flow 3 Provide carriers, flashing lights, walkways, guard rails, and night lighting as required. 4 The Owner's Security Department will make periodic inspections of adequacy of pedestrian facilities and violations must be corrected immediately 5 Maintain fire lanes and roadways to existing buildmgs continuously as required by the Owner's Security Department and Fire Department. 6 Provide qualified flagmen as required by the Owner or the City of Renton to maintain efficient traffic movement. B Refer to additional requirements in Division 1 Sections `Summary of Work' and `Contract Time and Sequence. C On campus parking for the Contractor's vehicles is subject to the limitations imposed by the Owner SMOKING A. Olympic Medical Center is a non smoking environment. Smoking will not be allowed in the construction area or anywhere within the hospital. Smoking is only allowed in designated smoking areas outside the hospital buildings. 3.10 WEAPONS POLICY SECTION 01500 PAGE 9 of 9 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES for stationary engines shall provide hospital and equipment within existing buildings is A. Olympic Medical Center is a weapons -free facility Firearms are not allowed anywhere on the hospital campus, except those in the possession of recognized city county state, or federal law enforcement agents. END OF SECTION 01500 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8. 2007 The following information issued by the Office of the State Fire Marshal, State of Washington. Health Care Facilities Fire Protection Plan Review Information Sheet No A 1 Fire Protection During Construction Apri110,1980 Revised 6/86 Records of the national Fire Protection Association indicate fatal fires have occurred when construction, remodeling, or demolition has been done m occupied buildings. The 1976 Life Safety Code FNPA Standard 101 Section 1 5 4 states, 'Existing buildings may be occupied during repairs or alterations only if all existing exits and all existing fire protection are continuously maintained or in lieu thereof, other measures are taken which provide equivalent safety The following shall be observed during the demolition, construction, repair, or alteration period as applicable: 1 Area Separation. Provide a temporary one -hour fire resistive separation between the construction area and all other areas of the building. If this in not feasible, fire watchman service shall be performed by trained and experienced personnel acceptable to the State Fire Marshal and local fire official. (Preferably equipped with portable radio communication.) 2. Exits: Construction or demolition shall not interfere or obstruct the exits or exiting system. Should it become necessary to do so, alternative methods shall first be approved by the local fire official and the State Fire Marshal. 3 Flammable Gases: Flammable gases and oxygen tanks shall not be used or stored in the building. Tanks shall be kept on the exterior and approved piping or UL- listed hoses used to convey the gases inside. Such tanks shall be positioned at least 20 feet from any building opening. 4. Flammable Liquids: Flammable liquids at the job site shall not be stored in building and shall otherwise be stored, dispensed, and used in accordance with the requirements of the local fire official and 1985 Uniform Code. 5 Housekeeping: Good housekeeping shall be maintained at all times. 6. Fire Extinguisher: Proper and adequate portable fire extinguishers shall be readily available. 7 Special Hazards: The local fire official and State Fire Marshal shall be contacted for procedure involving any special hazards or conditions. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 01510 PAGE 1 of 3 INFECTION CONTROL A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Section, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Specific minimum administrative and procedural actions are specified in this section, as extensions of provisions in the drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections with special attention given to section 01500 These requirements have been included for specific purposes as indicated. B A written plan outlining the contractor's methods of meeting the Infection Control and Safety Measures (ISLM) must be submitted to owner for approval. The plan shall include, but not be limited to, construction barrier locations, exit path routing, temporary signage design and locations, proposed materials, negative air routing, proposed cleaning equipment, and a completed Infection Control Worksheet. (Reference Section 01500 Construction Facilities 1 Comply with all requirements for infection control during construction. Infection control measures shall be maintained 24 hours per day 7 days per week until Olympic Medical Center Department of Epidemiology certifies that construction is complete to a stage where temporary infection control measures are no longer required. C Where significant or continued noncompliance occurs, the Owner reserves the right to stop the work, at no extra cost or extension of time, until the Contractor demonstrates compliance with required Infection Control measures. D Olympic Medical Center Infection Control Construction Permit is included at the end of this section. 1.3 INFECTION CONTROL A. Barriers 1 The contractor shall provide appropnate barriers to isolate the construction area(s) from any patient care or other occupied areas. Barriers must enclose entire work area to completely isolate it from all surrounding areas. The barriers shall be constructed: a. To be tightly sealed from wall to wall and floor to structure above. This includes areas above suspended ceilings, unless ceilings are not to be disturbed, m which case, seal will occur at ceiling level. b Out of the following materials: See Section 01500 for typical infection control/dustproof enclosure construction requirements. 2. Use appropriate mini- enclosure (tents with zipper openings) for all ceiling work outside of contained workspace, where approved by OMC Department of Epidemiology 3 With self closing doors fitted with gasketing or other material to restrict closing noise and airflow a. All barriers and openings must be maintained on a daily basis to ensure proper airflow appearance, and workplace security Barrier failure requires immediate intervention. 4 Elevator openings, if not for a dedicated construction elevator must be sealed air tight to the work area. 5 All work area entrances must have tacky mats present at all times. Mats must be clean, intact and maintained on a constant basis. MAIT `M ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 6 Adjacent floor areas directly outside the work area must be vacuumed or wet mopped at appropriate intervals to eliminate tracking and dust migration. Contractor to provide vacuum cleaners and all cleaning equipment. 7 Prior to removal of any barriers, all debns must be removed, the work area wet mopped, vacuumed, and all surfaces wiped down. 8 All vacuums used in or around the work area must be equipped with HEPA filtration. B Air Distribution SECTION 01510 PAGE 2 of 3 INFECTION CONTROL 1 The contractor shall provide all necessary equipment, includmg negative air machines and temporary ductwork to maintain a negative air pressure relationship, for all areas under construction or contained within the construction barriers, to surrounding areas. Unless exempted by the Owner m writing, negative pressurization of the workspace is required at all times. a. Appropriate equipment, gauge manometers at minimum, shall be provided to constantly monitor the negative pressure relationship. A minimum negative pressure relationship of 01 water column must be maintained between areas under construction and surrounding areas. The contractor is responsible to verify manometer reading at the beginning and end of each day and maintain a log of readings and corrective action taken. b. Work area ventilation must be 100% exhausted to the exterior of the building unless provided wntten permission by owner to tie into building ventilation exhaust. c. All negative air machines must have HEPA filtration in place. Pre filters must be maintained to prevent airflow restriction and dust accumulation. d. Discharge hoses, vented to an approved location, must be in place and intact at all times. 2. Supply and exhaust air grills serving the building HVAC systems must be covered and sealed to prevent airflow at all times. 3 Penetrations or openings to barrier enclosing the negative pressure area must be tightly sealed at the end of each day C. Materials And Material Handling 1 Prior to start of construction, and in compliance with Section 01300 Submittals, contractor must submit Material Safety Data Sheets on all paints, glues, mastics, epoxies, adhesives, cleaning products, etc. for review by Owner a. Contractor is expected to maintain work area at or below comfort range' for Office Workers as recognized by Washington State regulatory agency guidelines for volatile organic compounds (VOC) during installation and curing time of material. 2. All dirty materials including new materials, debris, and tools must be covered or wrapped when transported through the hospital. 3 Debris removal must occur in an exterior chute or through approved routes and only at specified times. After each period of debris removal, the traffic and material corridor shall be cleaned and wet mopped from entrance to work area to disposal area as necessary Conveyances used for debris removal must be clean and covered. 4 At the end of each workday work area must have all debris removed and floors cleaned. 5 Any matenal capable of absorbing moisture must be fully dried within 48 hours of becoming wet. If material, either new or existing, inside or out of the work area, becomes wet as a result of the contractors actions and is unable to be dried to an 'as- new' condition within 48 hours, the contractor shall remove the material within the same 48 hour penod. Materials removed from the work area for this reason must be replaced with new matenal at contractor expense. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 01510 SECTION 01510 PAGE 3 of 3 INFECTION CONTROL C) 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. General. Administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use m the project. B Requirements 1 Compliance with industry standards and recommendations 2. Product selections and substitutions 3 Warranties C. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere 1 Division 1 Section `Reference Standards' 2. Division 1 Section `Submittals' 3 Division 1 Section `Progress Schedule' 4 Division 1 Section `Quality Control' 5 Division 1 Section `Construction Facilities' 6 Division 1 Section `Delivery Storage, and Handling 7 Division 1 Section `Product Options and Substitutions' 8. Division 1 Section `Warranty Procedures' SECTION 01600 PAGE 1 of 4 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT D Defmitions: Definitions used in this section are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the contract documents. 1 Products: Items purchased for incorporation in the work, whether purchased for the project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term 'product' includes the terms "matenal, equipment, "system," and terms of similar intent. 2. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the contract documents. 3 Materials: Products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the work. 4 Equipment: A product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Submittals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Division 1 Sections `Quality Control' and `Reference Standards. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Delivery Storage, and Handling. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best and most complete installation per industry standards. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Construction Progress Schedule. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Comply with Division 1 Section 'Warranty Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL LIMITATIONS A. Where possible, provide entire required quantity of each genenc product from single source. Where not possible to do so, match separate procurements as closely as possible. B To extent selection process is under Contractor's control, provide compatible product. C. Where available and complying with requirements, provide standard products which have been used previously and successfully m similar applications and which are recommended by the manufacturers for the applications indicated. 2.2 PRODUCT SELECTIONS A. General. It is the Contractor's responsibility to select products which comply with the contract documents and which are compatible with one another 1 Venfy that electrical characteristics of products are compatible with electrical systems. Notify Architect of all discrepancies. 2. Where visual matching to an established physical sample is required, the Architect's decision will be fmal. 3 Provide products complete with all accessones, trim, fmish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. B Single Product Named: Provide only the product(s) specified, unless determined with prior approval to be unavailable, noncompatible with the work, or noncomplying with requirements or governing regulations. C. Two or More Products Named. Selection from named products is Contractor's option, provided selection complies with requirements specified. D Equivalent Products: Where specification allows for or equivalent' product, product selection shall be submitted for review and Architect's approval during the biddmg period per Division 0 Section 'Instructions to Bidders. E. Acceptable Manufacturers Named: Where a particular manufacturer's product is named, similar products by other named manufacturers may be used provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents and meet design intent. F Quality Standard Product Named SECTION 01600 PAGE 2 of 4 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01600 PAGE 3 of 4 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1 Where a quality standard product or material is named, the manufacturer's product data and specifications, as most recently published, are incorporated in the contract documents. 2. Components of the quality standard product may be referenced in the contract documents using manufacturer's model or part numbers. The work shall conform, or be equivalent, to the quality standard product and components as indicated. 3 Identification of a quality standard product is intended to establish quality standard and design intent. G Substitutions: Products other than those named in this manual shall be only those approved durmg bidding period per Division 0 Section `Instructions to Bidders. H. Visual Selection. Where specified product requirements include the phrase .as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures. or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color pattern, and texture from the product line selected. PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Require installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate and conditions for installation and to report (in writing) unsatisfactory conditions to satisfaction of installer before proceeding. B Inspect each product immediately before installation and do not install damaged or defective product. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to starting installation of each major component of the work, hold a preinstallation conference, attended by each entity involved or affected by planned installation. Include technical representatives of product manufacturers and others recognized as expert or otherwise capable of influencing success of the installation. Review significant aspects of requirements for the work. Record discussion and distribute as plan of action. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Anchor securely in place; accurately locate and align with other work. Clean and protect to ensure that products will be free from damage and deterioration at time of acceptance. B Nameplates 1 Where needed for operation and maintenance, provide permanent engraved plastic laminate nameplates on equipment, located in mconspicuous places, and containing suitable information and operational data. 2. Otherwise, do not allow manufacturer's trademarks or similar labels or nameplates to be placed on products in locations where exposed to view after installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Quality Control. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with Division 1 Sections `Construction Facilities' and `Final Cleaning. B. Clean each element of work at time of mstallation. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C Provide sufficient maintenance and protection during construction to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 01600 SECTION 01600 PAGE 4 of 4 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION SECTION 01610 PAGE 1 of 1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver store, and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, detenoration, and loss, including theft. B Due to minimum space for on -site storage of matenals, the Contractor will need to coordinate and schedule delivery of matenals with the Owner for the duration of the project, to minimize storage of materials at the site and to prevent overcrowding of the construction spaces. C Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. D Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, stonng, unpacking, protectmg, and installing. Labels to include: 1 Name of product 2. Name of manufacturer 3 Date of manufacture, where applicable 4 Shelf life, where applicable 5 Quality or grade, where applicable 6 Lot number where applicable 7 Fire performance characteristics, where applicable E. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. F Store heavy materials away from the project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. G Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 01610 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PARTI GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified m this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. General. Administrative and procedural requirements for handling product options and requests for substitutions made after award of the contract. B Requirements 1 Compliance with industry standards and recommendations 2. Product selections and substitutions 3 Warranties C. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere 1 Division 1 Section `Reference Standards' 2. Division 1 Section `Submittals' 3 Division 1 Section `Progress Schedule' 4 Division 1 Section `Quality Control' 5 Division 1 Section `Construction Facilities' 6 Division 1 Section `Material and Equipment' 7 Division 1 Section `Delivery Storage, and Handling 8 Division 1 Section `Warranty Procedures' SECTION 01630 PAGE 1 of 3 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS D Definitions: Definitions used in this section are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the contract documents. 1 Products: Any product, material, or equipment. 2. Substitution: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by contract documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the contract. The following are not considered substitutions and are not subject to requirements specified in this section for substitutions: a. Substitutions requested by bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award of contract. 1.4 SUBMITTALS b. Revisions to contract documents requested by the Owner or Architect. c. Specified options of products and construction methods included m contract documents. d. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. A. Pre -Bid and Post Bid Substitution Request Submittal Periods: Pre -bid request for substitution will be considered if received no later than ten (10) days before the bid opening. Requests received within ten (10) days of the bid opening date will be rejected without consideration. Post -Bid request for substitution will be considered if received within fifteen (15) days after MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Progress Schedule. SECTION 01630 PAGE 2 of 3 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS commencement of the work. Requests received more than fifteen (15) days after commencement of the work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect. 1 Submit three copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the form and in accordance with procedures required for change order proposals. 2 Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related specifications section and drawmg numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions and the following information, as appropriate: a. Product data, including drawings and description of products, fabrication, and installation procedures. b Samples where applicable or requested. c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability performance, and visual effect. d. List of recent successful installations within the State where the project is located, including name and model number of specific product and name and telephone number of a contact person m the facilities department in the facility where the product is installed. e. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. f. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's construction schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall contract time. g. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the contract sum. h. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal to or better in every significant respect to that required by the contract documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately B Architect's Action: Within five (5) working days of receipt of the request for substitution, the Architect will request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation of the request. Withm fifteen (15) working days of receipt of the request, or 10 working days of receipt of the additional information or documentation, whichever is later the Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance will be in the form of a change order 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Division 1 Sections `Quality Control' and `Reference Standards. 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Delivery Storage, and Handling. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best and most complete installation per industry standards. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.9 WARRANTY A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Warranty Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Architect when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. Otherwise, requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1 The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the contract time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the work promptly or coordinate activities properly 2. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority and the requested substitution can be approved. 3 A substantial advantage is offered the Owner m terms of cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations of merit after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate contractors, and similar considerations. 4 The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility 5 The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. Not Used SECTION 01630 PAGE 3 of 3 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 6 The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the contract documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provide the required warranty B The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of shop drawings, product data, or samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the contract documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution nor does it constitute approval. PART 3 EXECUTION END OF SECTION 01630 (0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 a r c h i t e c t s PROJECT NAME DATE SPEC SECTION PARAGRAPH TO FROM PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION MANUFACTURER MODEL NO M A H L U M to SUBSTITUTION REQUEST Olympic Medical Center PROJECT N o 2007517.00 Tenant Improvement MRI Mahlum Architects (Bidder /Contractor) FILE NAME Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance, and test data adequate for evaluation of the request (applicable portions of the data are clearly identified). Attached data also includes description of changes to contract documents which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments are correct: J The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. J I /We will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. J The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed solution. I/ We state that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. SIGNATURE FIRM ADDRESS PHONE FOR USE BY ARCHITECT 0 Accepted P Accepted as Noted Not Accepted 0 Received Too Late BY DATE Mahlum Architects 2007 Form 1063 71 Columbi SUITE 40. Seattle WA 98104 206 206 441 4151 441 0478 503 224 4032 503 224.0918 1231 NW Hoyt SUITE 102 Portland, OR 97209 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used SECTION 01700 PAGE 1 of 6 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution and layout of the Work including, but not hinted to the following: 1 Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3 General installation of products. 4 Coordination of Owner installed products. 5 Progress cleaning. 6 Startmg and adjusting. 7 Protection of installed construction. 8 Correction 'of the Work. B Related Sections include but are not limited to the following: 1 Division 1 Section `Cutting and Patching for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 2. Division 1 Section `Hospital Project Procedures. 3 Division 1 Section `Submittals. 4 Division 1 Section `Quality Control' for quality control work required of Contractor 5 Division 1 Section `Record Documents' for recording changes and conditions uncovered during course of construction. A. Qualification Data. For land survey or to demonstrate their capabilities and expenence. Include lists of completed projects during last five (5) years similar to the OMC Dietary/Cardiac/MRI Additions Alterations, with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. B Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional surveyor /engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land surveying services of the kind indicated. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION SECTION 01700 PAGE 2 of 6 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and venfy the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1 Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existmg are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and venfy the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1 Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of all under and above ground utilities including connection of medical gases, sanitary sewer storm sewer water service piping, etc. and underground electrical services. Refer to utility location requirements in the Civil Drawings and Specifications. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer(s) or Applicator(s) present, for compliance with requirements for mstallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Provide wntten record of observations. 1 Wntten Report: Submit a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work, mcluding the following: a. Descnption of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3 Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4 Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Architect and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authonties having jurisdiction. B Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others except as permitted and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1 Provide temporary utility services where service interruptions are required to exceed the down times permitted. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT SECTION 01700 PAGE 3 of 6 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 2. Notify Architect and Owner of proposed utility interruptions well m advance and no later then the minimum advance times indicated. 3 Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. C Field Measurements. Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. D Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. E. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of condition encountered. A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout mformation shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly B General. Engage a licensed land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1 Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3 Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply 4 Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5 Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6 Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities havmg jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements. Locate and lay out site improvements, mcluding pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1 Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly Base replacements on the origmal survey control points. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01700 PAGE 4 of 6 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS B Benchmarks: Establish and maintain permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1 Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3 Remove temporary reference pomts when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its ongmal condition. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General. Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately m correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1 Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3 Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4 Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 7 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling. B Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products m applications indicated. C Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely m place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1 Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. G Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. Refer to the Section 01121 Hazardous Materials for abatement requirements. 3.6 OWNER INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. 1 Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING SECTION 01700 PAGE 5 of 6 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS A. General. Clean Project site and work areas daily including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint -use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly Dispose of materials lawfully 1 Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold matenals more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the" temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3 Containenze hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropnately and dispose of legally according to regulations. B Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1 Remove liquid spills promptly 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabncator of product installed, using only cleaning matenals specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debns from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove pamt, mortar oils, putty and similar materials. 1 Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing matenals. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. H. Waste Disposal. Burying or burning waste materials on -site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or detenoration at Substantial Completion. J Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION END OF SECTION 01700 SECTION 01700 PAGE 6 of 6 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to venfy proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory- authorized service representative is required to inspect field assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section 'Quality Requirements." A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity 3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cuttmg and Patching." 1 Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching matenals, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair D Repair components that do not operate properly Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified m this section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Quality Control. 1.5 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Progress Schedule. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.2 FINAL CLEANUP SECTION 01710 PAGE 1 of 2 FINAL CLEANING 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located m Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies procedural requirements for final cleaning. B General cleaning during construction is required by Division 0 Section `General Conditions' and included in Division 1 Section `Construction Facilities. C Cleaning required for specific trades of work is specified in sections pertaming to that trade of work. 3.1 GENERAL A. Employ expenenced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. B Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected m a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. C. Use only cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer on surface to be cleaned. D Materials producing flammable or harmful vapors are deemed not appropriate. A. Upon completion of all other work under the contract, and prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall be responsible for final cleanup of all work under this contract. B Leave entire project perfectly clean and ready for occupancy All building and fixture surfaces shall be turned over to the Owner in a new condition, free of all damage, dust, dirt, spots, stains, encrustations, and other blemishes. C Perform the following minimum cleaning operations after all trades have completed their work under this contract: 1 Vacuum entire interior of project. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01710 PAGE 2 of 2 FINAL CLEANING 2. Clean all air ducts and ventilation equipment. 3 Hand dust and clean shelves and cabinets. 4 Remove labels that are not permanent. 5 Clean exposed exterior and interior hard surfaced finishes to a dust -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. 6. Clean finish floors and floor coverings; wax when so specified. 7 Leave concrete floors broom clean and damp moped to collect dust. 8. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 9 Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. 10 Remove all protective coverings from all accessories furnished or installed. 11 Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. 12. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even textured surface. D Contractor shall continue final cleanup as may be required by the punch list or other corrective work until such work is complete. 33 PEST CONTROL A. Engage an expenenced exterminator to make a final inspection and rid the project of rodents, insects, and other pests. 3.4 REMOVAL OF PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the work during construction. 3.5 COMPLIANCE A. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner B. Where extra materials of value remaming after completion of associated work have become the Owner's property arrange for disposition of these materials as directed. END OF SECTION 01710 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS SECTION 01720 PAGE 1 of 4 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 13 DESCRIPTION A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for record documents. Record documents are defined as one set of construction documents kept on site for the purpose of recording changes to the project and uncovered conditions during the course of construction, as well as documenting approved products and colors. B Work includes: 1 Record drawings 2. Record documents associated with delegated design components and systems referenced m Section 01331 Delegated Design Requirements. 3 Record specifications 4 Record product data 5 Record sample submittals 6. Record Shop Drawings C Related work specified elsewhere includes. 1 Section 01300 Submittals 2. Section 01331 Delegated Design Requirements 3 Section 01700 Contract Closeout 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Record product data. Include in Operation and Maintenance Manual, Section 01700 B Record Drawings and Specifications: Transfer information from Contractor documents maintained at the site to a clean set of documents if directed by Architect. Use contrasting colors to indicate as -built information. Include a legend to identify meaning of colors. 1 Submit Record Drawings and Specifications and original field copy to Architect. For structural, mechanical, and electrical work, submit directly to Architect's consultants with transmittal letter copy to Architect. 2. Architect will return submittal for corrections as necessary Contractor shall provide corrected record drawings to satisfy requirements as -built drawings. 3 Contractor shall return corrected record drawings to Architect with as -built drawing submittal. 4 Architect will return original field copy to Contractor 5 Architect will forward accepted Record Documents to Owner C. Record documents associated with delegated design components MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01400 Quality Control. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Section 01310 Progress Schedule. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Comply with Section 00700 General Conditions. SECTION 01720 PAGE 2 of 4 RECORD DOCUMENTS 1 See Section 01331 Delegated Design Requirements D Record Shop Drawings: Submit one copy Architect will review and forward to Owner 1 Contractor's Copy Make a copy of shop drawings prior to this submittal E. Record Samples: Submit as directed. F Miscellaneous Records: Submit a clean copy of Daily Report, Construction Schedule, Testing and Inspection Reports, Certifications, MSDS Data, and other information required by Owner Submit directly to Owner's Representative. B. Maintain documents in good condition, available at all times for inspection by Architect and consultants. Use documents identified and dated m Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor C Protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire- resistive location. If record documents are damaged, lost or destroyed, Contractor shall perform all field measurements and other work and investigation necessary to provide a complete replacement set of record documents at no additional cost to Owner D Post information included m Addenda, Change Orders, accepted RFI's, responses, and from other sources such as indicated by Section 01036, Modification Procedures. Affix hard copies to full size set of drawings along with contractors as -built and other conditions. E. Make notations clearly and legibly Use color or other marking system for contrast. Keep notations and posted information current from time of Conditional Notice to Proceed through Project Closeout. F Architect shall check record documents periodically to confirm that they are being kept up to date with current changes to the project. If Contractor fails to keep record documents current, Architect may withhold approval of requests for payment until record documents are brought up to date. G Submit all record documents to Architect for review as soon as possible after substantial completion and prior to fmal payment. 3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS A. General MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Format 1 Keep records current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded. 2. Required mformation includes: a. Significant changes made during bidding and construction, including all Addenda, Change Order (modifications), incorporated RFI Responses and other supplemental sources. Identify source of change, such as Change Proposal number Give particular attention to concealed work which would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. b. Significant detail not shown m onginal contract documents but recognized to be of importance to Owner c. Location of underground utilities and appurtenances as actually installed or encountered, referenced to permanent surface improvements. Show and locate changes in direction by dimension and elevation as utilities are actually installed. d. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in building structure as actually installed or encountered, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structures. 1 Maintam one complete set of contract drawings titled 'Project Record Drawings." 2. Use a white -print set (blueline or blackline) of Contract Drawings in clean, undamaged condition, with markup of actual installations which vary from the work as originally shown. 3 Mark whichever drawing in the set is most capable of showing `field' conditions fully and accurately Usually this will be the drawing which shows the area involved at the largest scale. Where shop drawings are used for markup, record a cross reference at the corresponding location on Contract Drawings. 4 Mark with red erasable pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of work. 5 Note related Change Proposal numbers where applicable. 6. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets and print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on cover of each set. C. Distribution 1 Submit one copy to Architect. 2. Architect will return submittal for corrections as necessary 3 Architect will forward accepted submittal to Owner 3.3 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 01720 PAGE 3 of 4 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General. Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents such as Change Proposals, Field Directives, and modifications issued in printed form during construction. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual work performed in comparison with the text of the specifications and modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options, and similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observations. Note related record drawing information, such as drawing numbers, and product data. B Format: Use one Project Manual titled 'Project Record Specifications. Where specification information differs from one site to another differentiate them clearly MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. Distribution 1 Submit one set of complete documents to Architect. 2. Architect will return submittal for corrections as necessary 3 Architect will forward accepted submittal to Owner 3.4 RECORD PRODUCT DATA SECTION 01720 PAGE 4 of 4 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General. Maintam one copy of each product data submittal. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related Change Proposals and markups of record drawings and specifications. B. Format: Use one set of product data submittals titled "Project Record Product Data. Where different product data applies to different sites, differentiate them clearly C Distribution: Upon completion of markup, submit complete set of record product data to the Architect for the Owner's records. 3.5 RECORD SAMPLE SUBMITTAL A. Shortly before the date or dates of substantial completion, the Contractor will meet at the site with the Architect and the Owner's personnel to determine which of the submitted samples that have been maintained durmg progress of the work are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with delivery to the Owner's sample storage area. 3.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Refer to other specification sections for requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the work. Shortly before the date or dates of substantial completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Architect for the Owner's records. 3.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS ASSOCIATED WITH DELEGATED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Include all items required by Section 01331 3.8 FINAL PAYMENT A. Final payment will not be made until acceptable Record Documents have been received by the Owner END OF SECTION 01720 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Requirements 1 Comply with Division 0 Section `General Conditions. 2. Specific requirements for warranties for the work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted are included in the individual sections of Divisions 2 through 16. B Definitions C. Types: Categones of warranties required for the work include: 1 Special project warranty issued by Contractor and, where required, countersigned by installer or other recognized entity involved in performance of the work. 2. Specified product warranty issued by a manufacturer or fabricator for compliance with requirements m contract documents. 3 Coincidental product warranty available on a product incorporated into the work, by virtue of manufacturer's publication of warranty without regard for application requirements (nonspecified warranty). 4 Refer to sections of Division 2 through 16 for requirements of specified warranties. D Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the products nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. General SECTION 01745 PAGE 1 of 3 WARRANTY PROCEDURES 1 'Guarantee' and 'warranty' are used interchangeably and are understood to mean the same thing. See Division 0 Section `General Conditions' for definition. 2. 'Standard product warranties' are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner 3 'Special warranties" are written warranties required by or incorporated in the contract documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner 1 Prepare per Division 1 Section `Submittals' and as follows. 2. The Contractor's written warranty shall be submitted to the Architect on the 'Contractor's Warranty" form attached to this section or in a similar format. 3 For subcontractor warranties as specified, a warranty by each such subcontractor countersigned by the General Contractor shall be submitted to the Architect on the "Subcontractor's Warranty" form attached to this section or in a similar format. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Format SECTION 01745 PAGE 2 of 3 WARRANTY PROCEDURES 1 Bind each manual in a three -ring, heavy -duty vinyl, hardboard cover border 2. On cover imprint title 'Warranty Manual' name of project, Owner Architect; and date of substantial completion. 3 On bound edge, imprint name of project and owner and date of substantial completion. 4 Pages to be neat, clean sheets, 8 -1/2 by 11 -mch maximum size or accordion foldouts to same size. 5 Items to be identified with tabbed dividers showing name and number of appropriate specification sections. 6 Arrange dividers and items in order they occur m specifications. C Information Required 1 Table of contents identifying separate warranties by specification section number and name. 2. Contractor's warranty of the work per contract documents. 3 Warranties, certificates, and bonds for all portions of the work per specifications, Divisions 1 through 16 4 Certificate of occupancy obtained from appropriate building officials. D Distribution 1 Submit one preliminary copy to Architect for approval. 2. Upon approval of preliminary copy prepare and submit two final copies to Architect- -one for Architect and one for Owner 1.5 WARRANTY OBLIGATIONS A. Restore or remove and replace warranted work to its originally specified condition at such time during warranty as it does not comply with or fulfill terms of warranty Restore or remove and replace other work which has been damaged by failure of warranted work or which must be removed and replaced to gain access to warranted work. B Except as otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, warranties do not cover damage to building contents (other than work of contract) which results from failure of warranted work. C. Cost of restoration or removal -and- replacement is Contractor's obligation without regard to whether Owner has already benefitted from use of failing work. D The Contractor shall warranty for a period of 3 years from the date of substantial completion all work performed under the provisions of the Agreement Between the Owner and Contractor 1.6 REINSTATEMENT OF WARRANTY A. Reinstatement of warranty shall be per Article 4.5 of the General Conditions of the Contract. 1.7 OWNER'S RECOURSE A. Warranties and warranty periods do not diminish implied warranties and do not deprive Owner of actions, rights, and remedies otherwise available for Contractor's failure to fulfill requirements of the contract documents. Owner reserves right to reject coincidental product warranties considered to be conflicting with or detracting from requirements of the contract documents. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01745 SECTION 01745 PAGE 3 of 3 WARRANTY PROCEDURES 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8. 2007 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY Date: General Contract Date: Owner. Olympic Medical Center Address: 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 Project: Tenant Improvement MRI (Contractor), the undersigned, warranties for a penod of year(s) from the date of Certificate of Substantial Completions, all work performed under the provisions of the Agreement Between the Owner and Contractor (Contractor) will remedy any defects appearing dunng the warranty penod which are due to failure, faulty materials, poor workmanship, or other nonconformity with or omission from the contract documents. The followmg subcontractors performed the work or furnished materials subject to warranty Trade Subcontractor and Address Phone Contact Person Contractor's Warranty Page 2 Trade Subcontractor and Address Phone Contact Person This warranty does not mclude holding the Contractor responsible for defects caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or wear and tear under normal usage (per Section 00700 General Conditions). Contractor. Address: Phone: Contact Person. Signature: (authorized representative) Contractor's Warranty Page 3 Trade Subcontractor and Address Phone Contact Person SUBCONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY Date: General Contract Date: Owner: Olympic Medical Center Address: 939 Caroline Street Port Angeles, Washington 98362 Project: Tenant Improvement MRI The General Contractor, and the Subcontractor warranty for a period of year (s), as specified in Section of the contract documents, all work performed under the provisions of the Agreement Between the Owner and the Contractor The undersigned will remedy any defects appearing during the warranty period which are due to failure, faulty materials, poor workmanship, or other nonconformity with or omission from the contract documents. This warranty does not include holding the Contractor responsible for defects caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or wear and tear under normal usage (per Section 00700, General Conditions). Trade: Subcontractor: Address: Phone: Contact Person: Signature: Contractor: Address: Signature: (authorized representative) (authorized representative) MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Division 1 Section `Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout. B Work includes: 1 Substantial completion and punch list procedures 2. Record documents 3 Operating and maintenance instructions 4 Maintenance and operation manuals 5 Warranty manual 6 Warranty list items 7 Final cleanup 8 As -built drawings 9 Final acceptance 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Submittals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Quality Control' 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Construction Progress Schedule. 1.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Record Documents' 1.8 WARRANTY A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Warranty Procedures. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used SECTION 01770 PAGE 1 of 4 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND PUNCH LIST PROCEDURE A. Initiation by Contractor 1 The Contractor shall initiate process of determination for substantial completion. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 01770 PAGE 2 of 4 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 2. He shall do so by giving written notice to the Architect that the project is substantially complete (or portion thereof as previously agreed to with the Owner and Architect) and that the building official has granted permission or certification for occupancy B Deficiency List 1 Prior to giving notice of substantial completion, and if it is agreed to be helpful, the Owner will walk through the project with the Contractor to point out work needing completion. The list of such work, to be called the "Deficiency List, will be compiled and written by the Contractor during the walkthrough. 2. Once the Deficiency List has been corrected, the Contractor may commence with notice to the Architect indicating the area is ready for substantial completion. 3 The Deficiency List is not the Punch List. C. Determination of Substantial Completion 1 Upon written notification by the Contractor the Architect will review the project (or parts) and determine whether or not substantial completion can be recommended to the Owner If the determination cannot be made, the Contractor will be so notified. 2. If the determination can be made, the Architect will prepare a certificate of substantial completion for the respective part for the Contractor's signature and the Owner's acceptance. The Owner will occupy the building or part of the building the day after the date of substantial completion. 3 Prior to or at the same time of substantial completion, the Contractor will apply and receive a certificate of occupancy from the inspectors having jurisdiction. This must be a part of granting the substantial completion certificate. D Issuance of Punch List 1 Attached to the certificate of substantial completion, the Architect will provide the punch list indicating items of work which must be completed pnor to fmal acceptance. NOTE. Final payment and release of retainage will not be granted until all punch list items are complete. Each punch list item, when completed by the contractor must be initialled by the project superintendent prior to resubmission to the architect. 2. Upon receipt of punch list, with all items initialled as complete, architectural back -check will be performed. 3.2 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare and provide per Division 1 Section `Record Documents. 3.3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. General 1 Provide per Divisions 2 14 15 and 16 and as follows. 2. Time to be per Division 1 Section `Contract Time and Sequence' and arranged for Owner's convenience. B. Required Information 1 Operation instruction period(s) shall be conducted by Contractor for operating personnel. 2. Instructions shall be provided in all phases of operation and maintenance for all systems, mcludmg but not limited to, the following: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MR1 SECTION 01770 PAGE 3 of 4 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT a. Startup b Shutdown c. Emergency opeations d. Noise and vibration adjustments e. Safety procedures f. Economy and efficiency adjustments g. Effective energy utilization 3 Contractor representatives shall be foremen or superintendents for the trade involved or manufacturer's representatives. 4 Place of the instruction period shall be as mutually agreed to 3.4 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUALS A Prepare and provide per Division 1 Sections `Contract Time and Sequence' and `Submittals. 3.5 WARRANTY MANUAL A. Prepare and provide per Division 1 Sections `Contract Time and Sequence and `Warranty Procedures. 3.6 WARRANTY LIST ITEMS A. Prepare and provide per Division 1 Section `Warranty Procedures. 3.7 FINAL CLEANUP A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Final Cleaning. 3.8 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Requirements Prior to Final Acceptance 1 Contractor's submission of, and Architect's acceptance of, all record drawings and as -built drawings. 2. Submission and approval of warranties. 3 Issuance of final certificate of occupancy and submission of copies of all permits with signature of inspector indicating final approval, or equivalent, if not already obtained at time of substantial completion. 4 Final cleanup by the Contractor 5 Execution of all change orders. 6. Completion of all punch list items. B Final Acceptance Process: When all items described above have been completed, the following are required. 1 Architect's recommendation of fmal acceptance to the Owner 2. Contractor's submission of fmal request for 100- percent payment and payment of retainage. Supporting documents shall include: a. Affidavit for Payment of Retained Percentage per Division 1 Section `Payment Procedures. b. Consent of Surety per Division 1 Section `Payment Procedures. c. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens per Division 1 Section `Payment Procedures. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI d. Contractors Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims per Division 1 Section `Payment Procedures. e. State of Washington Department of Revenue Certification, as proscribed in the agreement between the Owner and the Contractor f. Affidavit of wages paid in a form acceptable to the Owner Affidavit shall receive certification from the state of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries, prior to submission to Owner In addition to the Affidavit of wages paid, copy of letter of release written by the state of Washington, Department of Labor and Industnes to the Contractor g. END OF SECTION 01770 SECTION 01770 PAGE 4 of 4 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT C. Final Payment and Release of Retainage: Final payment and release of retamage shall be in accordance with the conditions of the contract upon fmal acceptance by the Owner and receipt of properly prepared invoice vouchers from the Contractor In any case, release of retamage will not occur until 30 days after fmal acceptance by the Owner 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PARTI GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS SECTION 02070 PAGE 1 of 5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. This Section requires the selective removal and subsequent off -site disposal of the following: 1 Portions of existing building(s) indicated on drawings or as required to accommodate new construction. 2. Removal of interior partitions, ceilings, floor covering materials as indicated on drawings. 3 Removal of existing 2 -inch thick temporary concrete floor and other site concrete work as indicated on drawings or as required to accommodate new construction. 4 Removal of all items as indicated on the drawings. 5 Salvage the following items, and store where directed by Owner Note: Contractor to arrange for secure storage and be responsible for all items or matenals indicated to be removed and re -used during the course of the work. a. Exit signs b Sinks (include service sinks) c. Faucets d. Doors e. Ice machines f. Phones g. Nurse call signaling equipment h. Sharps and glove box dispenser supports i. TVNCR support brackets j Fire extinguisher cabinets, fire extmguishers, and signs k. Pneumatic tube stations, diverters and controls B. Removal work specified elsewhere: Cutting structural and nonstructural concrete floors and masonry walls for piping, ducts, and conduits is included with the work of the respective mechanical and electrical specification sections m Divisions 15 and 16 C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1 Division 1 Section `Cutting and Patching' 2. Division 1 Section `Hospital Project Procedures' 3 Division 1 Section `Construction Facilities' 4 Division 1 Section `Infection Control' 5 Remodeling construction work and patching are included within the respective sections of specifications, including removal of materials for reuse and incorporation into remodeling or new construction. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 02070 PAGE 2 of 5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 6 Relocation of pipes, conduits, ducts, and other mechanical and electrical work is specified in other Divisions. 7 Patching and leveling existing floors with cementitious underlayment in Section 03542. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B Schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Owner' and Architect for review prior to start of work. Include coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection. 1 Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on -site operations. 2. Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of portions of existing building and with Owner's partial occupancy of completed new addition. C. Photographs of existing conditions of structure surfaces, equipment, and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related to removal operations. File with Owner prior to start of work. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Occupancy Owner will occupy portions of the building inunediately adjacent to and within areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition work in a manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner's normal operations. Provide muumum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of demolition activities that will affect Owner's normal operations. B Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. 1 Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However minor variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work. C. The abatement of hazardous materials discovered during the course of the work is the responsibility of the Owner The Contractor shall move away from the immediate identified area and inform the Owner verbally (with written follow -up) when known or unknown materials suspected of being hazardous are encountered. D Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor (other than those items indicated to be retained by Owner) may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. 1 Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. E. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required by the Owner's Infection Control Program and Interim Life Safety policies to protect Owner's personnel, patients and general public from injury due to selective demolition work prior to beginning and demolition work. 1 Provide protective measures including temporary 1 -hour minimum fire /smoke rated partitions as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and general public to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 02070 PAGE 3 of 5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 3 Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities or work to remain. 4 Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations. 5 Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary 6. Construct temporary 1 -hour minimum fire /smoke rated insulated dustproof barriers to separate areas where noisy dirty or dusty operations are performed. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. Provide dustproof barriers at all openings on the perimeter of the area of work. 7 Contractor to provide negative airflow to ensure demolition area is always pressure negative m relation to all areas outside the demolition area. Contractor to develop a negative air containment plan for review and accepted by the Olympic Medical Center before beginning demolition work. 8 Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage, dust infiltration or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building. 9 Provide temporary `tent structures' and negative air pressure as determined by the Olympic Medical Center to prevent migration of infectious molds and fungus outside the project work area(s). 10 Remove protections at completion of work only with authonzation obtained from Olympic Medical Center F Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work. G Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure minimum mterference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1 Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. H. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame cutting operations. Utility Services: Mamtam existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during demolition operations. 1 Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities. 2. Maintain fire protection services during selective demolition operations. J Environmental Controls: Use water sprinlding, temporary enclosures, and other methods to prevent dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. K. Do not use water when it may cause damage to existing building or contents to remain or create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART2 PRODUCT Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION SECTION 02070 PAGE 4 of 5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General. Provide interior and extenor shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. 1 Cease operations and notify Owner immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for contmuing operations. 2. Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures from soilage or damage when demolition work is performed in areas where such items have not been removed. 3 Erect and maintain dust -proof partitions and closures as required to prevent spread of dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building. a. Construct dust -proof partitions of minimum 1 -hour fire /smoke rated of minimum fl- inch studs, 5/8 -inch Type X drywall (joints taped) on both sides. Extend from floor to underside of structure above. Seal around all penetrations. Fill partition cavity with sound deadening insulation. b. Provide weatherproof, dust -proof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work. 4 Locate, identify stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain. a. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover 3.2 DEMOLITION Note: Temporary partitions of plastic sheet construction are not to be used on the project except where specifically approved by Olympic Medical Center and fire resistant construction is not required. A. General: Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. 1 Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power driven impact tools. NOTE. See Mechanical and Electncal for approximate locations and sizes of items requiring new or modified openings. Include saw cutting and removal of existing concrete sized as required for mechanical and electrical penetrations. Comply with structural demolition notes for work affectmg existing structural elements. 2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3 Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authonties having jurisdiction. 4 For intenor slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw where possible. 3.3 SALVAGED MATERIALS SECTION 02070 PAGE 5 of 5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Owner m written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay A. Salvaged Items: Where indicated on Drawings or in specifications as 'Salvage Deliver to Owner carefully remove indicated items, clean, store, and turn over to Owner and obtain receipt. 1 Historic artifacts, mcluding cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other articles of historic significance, remain property of Owner Notify Owner if such items are encountered and obtain acceptance regardmg method of removal and salvage for Owner 2. Carefully remove, clean, and deliver to Owner items as indicated. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove from building site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Transport and legally dispose off site. 1 If hazardous materials are encountered durmg demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. 2. Buming of removed materials is not permitted on project site. 3.5 CLEANUP AND REPAIR A. General. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site. Remove protections (obtain approval from Olympic Medical Center) and leave interior areas dust free and broom clean. 1 Carefully plan demolition activities with the Owner's representatives to minimize disruption to the adjacent patient care areas. Schedule work in these areas only at times and in areas authorized by the Owner Perform demolition work in segments that allow completion of the work and clean up in the same operation. Leave work area(s) in same condition encountered before demolition operations began. 2. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. END OF SECTION 02070 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 1 of 7 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 PVC- coated, steel chain -link fabnc. 2. Polymer- coated steel framework. 3 Grounding and bonding. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 3 Section Cast -in -Place Concrete for concrete post footings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CLFMI. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1 Polymer finishes. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES A. Product Data: Material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: 1 Fence and gateposts, rails, and fittings. 2. Chain -link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments. 3 Gates and hardware. B Shop Drawings: Show locations of fence, each gate, posts, rails, and tension wires and details of extended posts, extension arms, gate swing, or other operation, hardware, and accessories. Indicate materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of components. Include plans, elevations, sections, gate swing and other required installation and operational clearances, and details of post anchorage and attachment and bracing. C Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts or 6 -inch lengths of actual units showing the full range of colors available for components with factory- applied color finishes. D Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated, showing the full range of color texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. 1 PVC coated steel wire (for fabric) in 6 -inch lengths. 2. Polymer coating in 6 -inch lengths on shapes for posts, rails, wires, and on full -sized units for accessories. E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of chain -lmk fences and gates certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. F Qualification Data. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance' Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. G Maintenance Data. For the following to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 2 of 7 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An expenenced installer who has completed chain -link fences and gates similar in matenal, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted m construction with a record of successful in- service performance. B Testmg Agency Qualifications. Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910 7 or a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authonties having jurisdiction. 1 Testing Agency's Field Supervisor Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies, to supervise on -site testing specified in Part 3 C. Source Limitations for Chain -Link Fences and Gates: Obtain each color grade, finish, type, and vanety of component for chain -link fences and gates from one source with resources to provide chain -link fences and gates of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1 Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. B. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain -link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.2 CHAIN -LINK FENCE FABRIC CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES A. Steel Chain -Link Fence Fabric: Height indicated on Drawings. Provide fabric fabricated in one- piece widths for fencing in height of 12 feet and less. Comply with CLFMI's 'Product Manual" and with requirements indicated below• 1 Mesh and Wire Size: 2 -inch mesh, 0 148 -inch diameter 2. PVC Coated Fabric: ASTM F 668, Class [1] [2a] [2b] over metallic- coated steel wire. a. Color Black complying with ASTM F 934 3 Coat selvage ends of fabric that is metallic coated during the weaving process with manufacturer's standard clear protective coating. B Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages. 2.3 INDUSTRIAL FENCE FRAMING A. A. Round Steel Pipe: Standard weight, Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe complying with ASTM F 1083 Comply with ASTM F 1043 Material Design Group IA, external and internal coating Type A, and the following strength and stiffness requirements: 1 Fence Height: As indicated on Drawings. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 3 of 7 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.4 TENSION WIRE 2.5 INDUSTRIAL SWING GATES A. General. Comply with ASTM F 900 for the following swmg -gate types. 1 Single gate. 2. Double gate. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 2. Line, End, Corner and Pull Posts and Top Rail. Per requirements for Light Industrial Fence. B Post Brace Rails: Provide brace rail with truss rod assembly for each gate, end, and pull post. Provide two brace rails extending m opposing directions, each with truss rod assembly for each corner post and for pull posts. Provide rail ends and clamps for attaclung rails to posts. C. Top Rails: Fabricate top rail from lengths 20 feet or longer with swedged -end or fabricated for expansion -type coupling, forming a continuous rail along top of chain -link fabric. D Intermediate Rails: Match top rail for coating and strength and stiffness requirements. E. Bottom Rails: Match top rail for coating and strength and stiffness requirements. F Protective Coating for Steel. Posts, rails, and frames protected with an external coating of not less than 0 6 oz. of zinc /sq ft. a chromate conversion coating, and a clear verifiable polymer film; and an internal protective coating of not less than 0 6 oz. of zinc /sq. ft. or 81 percent, not less than 0.3 -mil- thick, zinc pigmented coating. A. General. Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations: 1 Location: Extended along top and bottom of fence fabric. B Metallic- Coated Steel Wire: 0 177 -inch- diameter marcelled tension wire complying with ASTM A 824 and the following: 1 Coating: Type I, aluminum coated (aluminized). a. Matching chain -link fabric coating weight. C. Aluminum Wire: 0 192-inch- diameter tension wire, mill finished, complying with ASTM B 211 alloy 6061 T94 with 50,000 -psi minimum tensile strength. B Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F 1083 and ASTM F 1043 for materials and protective coatings. C. Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round aluminum tubing with outside dimension and weight according to ASTM F 900 for the following gate fabric height: 1 Gate Fabric Height: 6 feet or less. D Frame Corner Construction: As follows: 1 Welded or assembled with corner fittings and 5/16 -inch- diameter adjustable truss rods for panels 5 feet wide or wider E. Gate Posts: Fabricate members from round galvanized steel pipe with outside dimension and weight according to ASTM F 900 for the following gate fabric heights and leaf widths: 1 Gate Fabric Height by Leaf Width: 6 feet or less by over 4 feet but not over 10 feet. F Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, center gate stops and, for each gate leaf more than 4 feet wide, keepers. 1 Locking hardware suitable for padlocks MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 4 of 7 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.6 FITTINGS CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES A. General. Provide fittings for a complete fence installation, including special fittings for corners. Comply with ASTM F 626. B Post and Line Caps: Hot -dip galvanized pressed. Provide weathertight closure cap for each post. 1 Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail. C. Rail and Brace Ends: Hot -dip galvanized pressed steel or hot -dip galvanized cast iron. Provide rail ends or other means for attaching rails securely to each gate, comer pull, and end post. D Rail Fittings: Provide the following: 1 Top Rail Sleeves. Hot -dip galvanized pressed steel or round steel tubing 2. Rail Clamps: Hot -dip galvanized pressed steel Provide line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting intermediate and bottom rails m the fence line to line posts. E. Tension and Brace Bands: Hot -dip galvanized pressed steel F Tension Bars: Hot -dip galvanized steel length not less than 2- inches shorter than full height of chain -link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each comer and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven mto post. G Truss Rod Assemblies: Hot -dip galvamzed steelrod and turnbuckle or other means of adjustment. H. Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: Provide the following types according to ASTM F 626 1 Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain -link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, complying with the following: a. Hot -Dip Galvanized Steel. 0 148 -inch diameter wire; galvanized coating thickness matching coating thickness of chain -link fence fabric. I. Pipe Sleeves: For posts set into concrete, provide preset hot -dip galvanized steel pipe sleeves complying with ASTM A 53 not less than 6 -inch long with inside dimensions not less than ''/2- inch more than outside dimension of post, and flat steel plate forming bottom closure. 2.7 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory- packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107 Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer for exterior applications. B Erosion Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory- packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended in writing by manufacturer for exterior applications. 2.8 FENCE GROUNDING A. Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and larger 1 Material Above Finished Grade: Copper 2. Material On or Below Finished Grade: Copper 3 Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 -inch wide, woven of No. 30 AWG bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules. B Connectors and Ground Rods: Listed in UL 467 1 Connectors for Below -Grade Use: Exothermic welded type. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 5 of 7 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2. Ground Rods. Copper -clad steel. a. Size: (16 by 2400 mm) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.4 CHAIN -LINK FENCE INSTALLATION A. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, comer and gate posts per ASTM F 567 B Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10' o.c. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance. 1 Do not begm installation before final grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted by Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and termmal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General. Install chain -link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements specified. 1 Install fencing on established boundary lines inside property line. B Post Excavation: Drill or hand excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings mdicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. C. Post Setting: Hand excavate holes for post foundations in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Set terminal posts in concrete footing. Protect portion of posts aboveground from concrete splatter Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Using mechanical devices to set line posts per ASTM F 567 is permitted. Verify that posts are set plumb aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position dunng placement and fmishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured. 1 Dimensions and Profile: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Exposed Concrete Footings: Extend concrete 2- inches above grade, smooth, and shape to shed water 3 Posts Set into Concrete in Voids: Form or core drill holes not less than 36- inches deep and 3 times larger than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, and finished sloped to drain water away from post. C. Post Bracing Assemblies: Install according to ASTM F 567 maintammg plumb position and alignment of fencing. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts. Locate honzontal braces at midheight of fabric on fences with top rail and at two- thirds fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. D Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567 maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0 152 inch diameter hog MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 6 of 7 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES nngs of same matenal and finish as fabnc wire, spaced a maximum of 2 feet o.c. Install tension wire in locations indicated before stretching fabnc. 1 Top Tension Wire: Install tension wire through post cap loops. 2. Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6- inches of bottom of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same gage and type of wire. E. Top Rail. Install according to ASTM F 567 maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer F Intermediate Rails: Install in one piece at as indicated on Drawings, spanning between posts, using fittings, special offset fittings, and accessones. G Bottom Rails: Install, spanning between posts, using fittings and accessories. H. Chain -Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 2- inches between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released. I. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 16- inches o.c. J Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire at one end to chain -link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain -link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing. 1 Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12- inches o.c. and to braces 2 feet o.c. K. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side. 3.5 GATE INSTALLATION A. General: Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper- resistant or concealed means. Install ground -set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary 3.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of 1500 feet except as follows: 1 Fences within 100 feet of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways: Ground at maximum intervals of 750 feet. a. Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening. 1) Bond metal gates to gate posts. 2) Bond across openings, with and without gates, except openings indicated as intentional fence discontinuities. Use No. 2 AWG wire and bury it at least 18- inches below finished grade. B. Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of crossing and at a maximum distance of 150 feet on each side of crossing. C. Fences Enclosing Electrical Power Distribution Equipment: Ground as required by IEEE C2, unless otherwise indicated. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 02821 PAGE 7 of 7 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES D Grounding Method. At each grounding location, drive a ground rod vertically until the top is 6- inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor Connect conductor to each fence component at the grounding location, including the following: 1 Each Barbed Wire Strand. Make grounding connections to barbed wire with wire -to -wire connectors designed for this purpose. 2. Each Barbed Tape Coil: Make grounding connections to barbed tape with connectors designed for this purpose. E. Bondmg Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame. F Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals m direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1 Use electroplated or hot -tin- coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic senes. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3 Make aluminum -to -steel connections with stainless -steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4 Make aluminum -to- galvanized -steel connections with tin- plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5 Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. G Bondmg to Lightning Protection System: If fence ternunates at lightning- protected building or structure, ground the fence and bond the fence grounding conductor to lightning protection down conductor or lightning protection grounding conductor complying with NFPA 780 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Gate: Adjust gate to operate smoothly easily and quietly free from binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. END OF SECTION 02821 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 1 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. For each type of product indicated. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and fuushes, for the following: 1 Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3 Slabs -on- grade. 4 Suspended slabs. 5 Concrete toppings. 6 Building frame members. 7 Building walls. 8 Curing and Sealing Materials 9 Vapor Retarders 10 Waterstops B Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 1 Section `Temporary Dehumidification, Heating, and Cooling' 2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork' for drainage fill under slabs -on- grade. 3 Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and walks. 4 Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially finished formed concrete. 5 Division 3 Section `Waterproof Concrete' 6 Division 3 Sections `Concrete Stain' for concrete polishing and stain 7 Division 7 `Water Repellants' for water repellant sealants and anti graffiti treatments 8 Division 9 for Floor Finishes A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1 Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechamcal connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 2 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE D Samples: For vapor retarder E. Welding certificates. F Material Test Reports: For the followmg, from a qualified testing agency indicating compliance with requirements: 1 Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity 2. Cementitious materials. 3 Admixtures. 4 Water- Cement Ratio 5 Steel reinforcement and accessories. 6. Epoxy joint fillers. 7 Repair matenals. 8 Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified tolerances. 9 Vapor Barrier Installation 10 Surface Moisture prior to flooring installation 11 Surface pH pnor to floonng installation. G Field quality- control test and inspection reports. H. Minutes of preinstallation conference. I. Mock -up: Provide a 5' -0' x 5' -0' minimum mock -up to demonstrate light broom finish. 1 Mock -up shall be detailed in the pre installation conference and agreed upon by the concrete installer and the flooring installer 2. Mock -up shall be approved by the architect and the flooring installer 3 Mock -up shall be maintained until the flooring installer has approved the concrete slab for installation of flooring product. J Diagrams (similar to the interior floor finish plan(s)) showing all floor and slab finishes confirming compatibility of fmish with fmish flooring and adhesives indicated and indicating extend of all floor recesses required by the thicknesses of the finishes indicated. K. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly and support of formwork. 1 Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of strapping formwork, shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring. L. Qualification Data. For Installer 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications. A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI- certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced m manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1 Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's 'Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 3 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency (acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction) qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548 and certified by the Washington Association of Building Officials (WABO). 1 Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1 according to ACI CP -01 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician Grade I. Testmg Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician Grade II. D Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1 4 'Structural Welding Code- Reinforcing Steel. F ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1 ACI 301 'Specification for Structural Concrete, Sections 1 through 5 2. ACI 117 'Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. G Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. 1 Testing shall include moisture testing of concrete during slab pour 2. Testing shall include pH testing after slab has cured. 1.6 PRE INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Contractor shall coordinate pre installation conference with the following: 1 Owner 2. Architect 3 Concrete Installer 4 Resilient Flooring installer 5 Tile setter 6. Carpet installer B Discussion items shall include: 1 Moisture and humidity control 2. Concrete moisture content, slump, admixtures, plasticizers, and other components that may affect performance of flooring adhesives. 3 Moisture and vapor emissions testing 4 Floor flatness and levelness 5 Curing procedures 6. Floor finish 7 Schedule C Responsibility Coordination 1 General Contractor is responsible for making concrete installer aware of requirements of flooring installer 2. Concrete installer is responsible for creating a floor slab that meets the flooring manufacturer's recommendation for proper flooring substrate conditions. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 4 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM- FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth- Formed Finished Concrete: Form facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1 Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complymg with DOC PS 1 and as follows: a. High- density overlay Class 1 or better B Rough Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass fiber- reinforced plastic, paper or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. E. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch minimum. F Form- Release Agent: Commercially formulated form- release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1 Formulate form release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form facing materials. G Form Ties: Factory- fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass- fiber- reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars. ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed. B Low -Alloy -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. C Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain -steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Zinc Repair Material. ASTM A 780 zinc -based solder paint containing zinc dust, or sprayed zinc. C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's 'Manual of Standard Practice, of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MR1 1 For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless -steel bar supports. 2. For epoxy- coated reinforcement, use epoxy- coated or other dielectric polymer- coated wire bar supports. 3 For zinc- coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric polymer- coated wire bar supports. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS SECTION 03300 PAGE 5 of 17 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Cementitious Material. Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1 Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I or II. a. Fly Ash. ASTM C 618, Class C or F 10 -20% allowable. B Normal- Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 severe weathering minimum Class 3S coarse aggregate or better graded. Provide aggregates from a smgle source. 1 Maximum Coarse- Aggregate Size: 1 1/2 inches. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. 3 Alkaline Reactivity Per ASTM C289 -03 Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Silica Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method) C Water ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 B Chemical Admixtures. Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1 Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D 3 High -Range, Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarder ASTM E 1745 Class B minimum. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure sensitive tape. 1 Products: a. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra. b. Raven Industries Inc. Vapor Block 10 c. Stego Industries, LLC, Stego Wrap, 15 mils. d. WR Meadows, Penninator 10 mil B Granular Fill. Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel, ASTM D 448 Size 57 with 100 percent passing a 1 1/2 -inch (37.5 -mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Use of membrane forming curing materials is limited to areas specifically not scheduled to receive finish flooring materials requiring water soluble adhesives. Wet curing is required for these areas. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 6 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Absorptive Cover AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. when dry C Moisture Retaining Cover ASTM C 171 polyethylene film or white burlap polyethylene sheet. D Water Potable. E. Clear Waterborne, Membrane Forming Curing and Sealing Compound. ASTM C 1315 Type 1 Class A. One of the following: 1 Polyseal WB, ChemMasters. 2. UV Safe Seal, Lambert Corporation. 3 Lumiseal WB Plus; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 4 Vocomp -30• W R. Meadows, Inc. 5 Metcure 30• Metalcrete Industries. 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation Joint- Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751 asphalt saturated cellulosic fiber B Semirigid Joint Filler. Two- component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240 C Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059 Type II, non redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. D Epoxy Bondmg Adhesive: ASTM C 881 two- component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1 Types I and II, non -load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. E. Fasteners: When galvanized metal fasteners such as anchor bolts or other fasteners are in contact with preservative treated wood, steel shall be galvanized G185 F Rebar Supports: Use supports with coated feet or otherwise blunt edges to prevent damaging the vapor barrier 1 Repair or replace all damage to vapor barrier prior to pouring concrete. 2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Repair Underlayment: Cement based, polymer- modified, self leveling product that can be applied in tluclmesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1 Cement Binder ASTM C 150 portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219 2. Pruner Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3 Aggregate: Well- graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer 4 Compressive Strength. Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C I09 /C 109M. 5 Repair tears or damage with seal at least 2' wide or per manufacturer's recommendation, whichever is greater B. Repair Overlayment: Cement based, polymer- modified, self leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 7 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1 Cement Binder ASTM C 150 portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219 2. Primer Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3 Aggregate: Well- graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer 4 Compressive Strength. Not less than 4500 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory tnal mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 1 Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1 Fly Ash. 20 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 20 percent. C. Limit water soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0 15 percent by weight of cement. D Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 Use water reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity or other adverse placement conditions. 2. Use water reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water cementitious materials ratio below 0.50 3 Use corrosion inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup. F Proportion normal- weight concrete mixture as follows: 1 Minimum Compressive Strength. As indicated by drawings. 2. Maximum Water Cementitious Materials Ratio 0 40 unless indicated otherwise. a. Measure Water- Cement ratio at time of concrete pour b. Adding water during concrete pour is strictly prohibited. 3 Slump Limit: 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch. 4 Air Content: 5 -1/2 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1 1/2 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. G. Alkalinity Concrete installer is responsible for providing a slab that meets the criteria below including remediation if necessary 1 Slab shall have a measured pH ranging between 9 and 10 or as required by flooring manufacturer whichever is more stringent. 2. Tests shall be performed by independent testing agency 3 Concrete installer shall be responsible for remediation required to achieve proper pH if testing demonstrates alkalinity outside of flooring manufacturer's parameters. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 8 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION 2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's 'Manual of Standard Practice. 2.12 CONCRETE MIXING A. Project Site Mixing: Not permitted. 3.1 FORMWORK CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 C Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1 Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B 1/4 inch for rough formed fmished surfaces. D Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1 Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust stained steel form facing material. F Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. G Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debns just before placmg concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form- release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 9 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's 'Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. Install rebar supports to avoid damage to vapor barrier 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General. Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form- removal operations and curing and protection operations are mamtamed. 1 Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28 -day design compressive strength. B Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form- release agent. C When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES 3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshonng. 1 Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete. B Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 `Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs' and manufacturer's written instructions. 1 Place vapor barrier directly below slab. Visually inspect vapor barrier for punctures prior to slab pour Repair any punctures per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3 Visually inspect vapor barrier prior to installation of concrete. Replace or repair all damaged areas of vapor barrier B Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1 Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 10 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1 4 where indicated. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE D Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.7 JOINTS A. General. Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1 Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction jomts, unless otherwise indicated. Do not contmue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1 1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3 Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate jomts beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 4 Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction jomts, sectioning concrete into areas as mdicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1 Grooved Joints: For exposed floor slabs in public areas, form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface fuushes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Under fmish floor material or as approved by Architect, form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond- rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 -inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D Isolation Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: After removing formwork, install joint filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1 Extend joint filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with fmished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full -width joint- filler strips not less than 1/2 mch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Jomt Sealants," are indicated. 3 Install joint- filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B Do not add water to concrete during delivery at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 11 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, limitations of ACI 301 1 Do not add water to concrete after mixture. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE water may be added at Project site, subject to adding high -range water reducing admixtures to D Deposit concrete continuously m one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed contmuously provide construction joints as mdicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1 Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 3 Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1 Consolidate concrete durmg placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs dunng concrete placement. 3 Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4 Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5 Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F Cold- Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1 When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3 Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. G. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1 Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water soft spots, or dry areas. 3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Formed Finish. As -cast concrete texture imparted by form facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed- surface irregulanties. 1 Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 12 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE B Smooth Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed surface irregularities. 1 Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and fmish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightemng, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B Float Finish. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Verify and provide floor and slab fmishes recommended by the manufacturer of the finish flooring indicated. Confirm compatibility with the types of adhesives indicated. D Trowel and Fine -Broom (Light Broom) Finish: All areas scheduled to receive finish flooring requiring water- soluable adhesive. (Confirm with finish floonng manufacturer 1 Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin -set method. 2. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine hair broom. 3 Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces. 4 Finish to tolerances established in the pre construction meetmg and approved by the Architect, Owner and Flooring Installation contractor E. Trowel Finish: Areas not scheduled to receive fmish flooring requiring water soluable adhesive. (Confirm with finish flooring manufacturer 1 After applying float fmish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power -dnven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 2. Apply a trowel fmish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film finish coating system. F Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface: 1 Flatness and Levelness below refer to nominal values prior to finish installations. a. Minimum F(F) 45 '''A' in 10 -ft; and F(L) 35 overall with F(F) 35 '''A' in 10 -ft; and F(L) 25 local b. At areas scheduled to tile: Minimum Ff 50• 'A in 10 -ft and 1/16' in 1 -ft; and Fl 40 overall with Ff 40• in 10 -ft and 1/16' in 1 -ft; and F130 local c. At gymnasium floors: Minimum Ff 50 1/8' in 10 -ft; and F140 overall with Ff 40• 1/8' in 10 -ft; and F130local d. Where slabs will be used as casting beds for site, cast concrete or tilt -up concrete panel, overall flatness F(F) =50 and overall levelness F(L) =40 with ''A maximum discrepancy over 30' -0' MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 13 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10- foot -long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch. G Sealers: Membrane forming Sealers are prohibited in areas to receive finish floonng matenals requiring water -based adhesives. Coordinate with floonng manufacturer H. Broom Finish. Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1 Immediately after float fmishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by broommg with fiber- bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill m holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to intenor curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. D Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast -in mserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel -finish concrete surfaces. 3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection and ACI 301 for hot weather protection during curing. B Evaporation Retarder Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb /sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during fmishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue cunng for the remainder of the curing period. D Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308 1 by one or a combination of the following methods: 1 Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following matenals: a. Water b. Continuous water -fog spray c. Absorptive cover water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 -inch (300 -mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 14 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2. Moisture Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture retaining cover for curmg concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears dunng cunng period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture- retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3 Curing Compound. Apply uniformly in contmuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after mitial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 4 Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain contmuity of coating and repair damage during curmg period. 3.13 JOINT FILLING 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least as required by joint filler manufacturer's written instructions. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B Patching Mortar Mix dry-pack patching mortar consisting of one part portland cement to two and one -half parts fine aggregate passmg a No. 16 (1 18 -mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1 Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) m depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 15 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry patching mortar will match surrounding color Patch a test area at mconspicuous locations to venfy mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3 Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1 Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0 01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3 Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4 Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5 Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair toppmg depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7 Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. 8. Prohibited remediation. a. Acid etching to reach specified surface pH. b Any surface preparation such as shot blasting or grinding without express written approval from Architect and Engineer E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar F Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1 Reports shall be distributed to Owner Architect, Engineer General Contractor MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 16 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MR1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE B Inspections: 1 Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3 Headed bolts and studs. 4 Verification of use of required design mixture. 5 Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6 Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7 Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. 8. Vapor Barrier Installation 9 Surface Moisture 10 Surface pH. C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1 Testing Frequency Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3 Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M, one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 4 Air Content: ASTM C 231 pressure method, for normal- weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 5 Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M, one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567 fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 7 Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 3IM. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylmder specimens for each composite sample. 8 Compressive- Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M, test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field -cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 9 Vapor Barrier Visually inspect for proper conformance with ASTM E 1643 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs' MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 03300 PAGE 17 of 17 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI END OF SECTION 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 10 Moisture and Vapor emission: prior to flooring installation Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride —ASTM F 1869 a. Remove all sealers /curing compounds before testing b Perform 3 tests per 1000 sf plus 1 additional per each additional 1000 sf c Maintain final temperature and humidity conditions for 48 hours pnor to test and during test protocol. 11 Alkalinity Testing per ASTM F 710 `Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. a. Provide tests m same location and at same time as moisture /vapor tests. 12. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory- cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in -place concrete. 13 Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3 4 MPa). 14 Test results shall be reported m writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspectmg agency location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breakmg strength, and type of break for both 7 and 28 -day tests. 15 Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 16 Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 17 Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 18 Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply with the Contract Documents. D Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M) within 24 hours of finishing. Measure again 48 hours prior to installing finish floor materials. Flatness and levelness values specified in this section refer to levelness prior to installation of flooring materials. 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY SECTION 03542 PAGE 1 of 4 CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes cement based, polymer- modified, self leveling and slope building underlayment for interior finishing of existmg slabs, and building slopes to drain. B Related Sections: The followmg Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 9 Section `Resilient Flooring for substrate finish requirements. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide concrete floors within fmish floor tolerances as specified herein. Work under this Section includes the following: 1 Underlayment fill to achieve finish floor elevations and to feather out existing depressions. Repairing of minor holes, cracks, and transition areas is specified under respective finish flooring sections. 2. Grinding of ridges or other uneven surfaces smooth to prevent telegraphing, bulges or protrusions after resilient materials or carpeting is laid. 3 Sand concrete floors with drum sander to remove scale, curing compounds, and other foreign materials which would mterfere with bonding of adhesive. Remove lumps or paint, drywall joint compounds, and plaster 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General. Comply with Section 01300 `Submittals. B Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials required, including installation instructions. 1 State in submittal the area within building where materials will be used, existmg conditions which requires such repair material, and written approval from finish flooring installer stating that such materials is compatible with flooring adhesives to be used. C. Installation Instructions: Submit detailed procedures for method which shall be employed to bring floor slab areas up to required elevation, including surface preparation and types of mixing and application equipment. D Shop Drawings: Plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of cement -based underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions. E. Survey of Substrate Conditions: Survey concrete slabs and verify surface tolerances. Show what portions of slabs meet or exceed specified tolerances and what portions do not. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer (applicator) who is acceptable to manufacturer who has completed cement -based underlayment applications similar in material and extent to that required for this Project, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other components, and application. B Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.7 COORDINATION PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS SECTION 03542 PAGE 2 of 4 CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's wntten recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity ventilation, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance. B. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer C. General. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best and most complete installation per industry standards. A. Coordinate cement -based underlayment with requirements of finish flooring products, including adhesives, specified in Division 9 Sections. 1 Before installing surface sealers recommended by underlayment manufacturer if any verify compatibility with finish flooring installation adhesives. A. General: Use materials for repair work that are of a type which are appropriate for the conditions and totally compatible with subsequent fmish flooring material. In all cases, the type of material must be approved for use beneath finish flooring matenal (e.g. carpet, resilient floor tile, sheet vinyl, etc.), and have physical properties which are suitable for intended floor usage. 1 Use material of a type which will not shrink, crack or spill. 2. Include primer and other materials and accessories recommended by underlayment manufacturer for a complete installation as shown. 3 Provide type of aggregates as recommended by underlayment manufacturer for thickness of underlayment required. B Self leveling Underlayment Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1 K 15 Self Leveling Underlayment Concrete; Ardex, Inc. 2. Self Leveling Underlayment; W R. Bonsai Company 3 300 Premium Underlayment; Burke Group, LLC (The). 4 Thoro Underlayment, Self Leveling; Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. C Slope Building Underlayment Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1 Raeco R 25 Raeco, Inc. or approved equal. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.2 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS SECTION 03542 PAGE 3 of 4 CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT A. Self Leveling Underlayment: Cement based, polymer modified, self leveling product that can be applied in uniform thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1 Cement Binder ASTM C 150 portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219 2. Compressive Strength. Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109 /C 109M. 3 Underlayment Additive: Resilient- emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated. B Slope Building Underlayment: Fine textured latex concrete mortar product that can be worked to provide even slopes to drain. 1 Cement Binder Synthetic latex consisting of polymer plastic particles 2. Compressive Strength. Not less than 2,000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109 C. Aggregate: Well- graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch, or coarse sand as underlayment manufacturer 1 Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment underlayment thickness required. D Water Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F E. Primer Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended conditions, and application indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION recommended by manufacturer for in writing for substrate, A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of underlayment including substrate moisture content. Begin underlayment application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General. Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry neutral -pH substrate for underlayment application. 1 Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. 3 Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack bond with substrate, including areas that emit a `hollow" sound when tapped. B Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form- release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Application. Apply underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Consult underlayment manufacturer's directions for drying times and any other special requirements. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 03542 PAGE 4 of 4 CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT 1 Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment -to- substrate and intercoat adhesion. 2. At substrate expansion, isolation and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment. C. Apply pruner over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. E. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. 1 Apply a final layer without aggregate if required to product smooth surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. F Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. G Do not install finish flooring over underlayment until after time period recommended by underlayment manufacturer I. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes, sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond according to manufacturer's written instructions. J Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General. Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment -to- substrate and intercoat adhesion. B Apply pruner over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C Apply self leveling underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. 1 Apply a fmal layer without aggregate if required to produce smooth surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. D Apply slope building underlayment to produce uniform, smooth slopes to drains and thresholds. E. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. F Do not install finish flooring over underlayment until after time period recommended by underlayment manufacturer G Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period. 3.5 SCHEDULE OF CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT A. Provide cementitious underlayment in all areas of work where new flooring is scheduled over existing and new slabs. Allow for average ''A thickness. END OF SECTION 03542 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Th SECTION 05500 PAGE 1 of 9 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following: 1 Shelf angles 2. Steel weld plates and angels for casting into concrete not specified in other sections 3 Steel framing and supports for casework 4 Unistrut ceiling framing for RF shielding B Related Sections include the following: 1 Section 01450 Structural Testing, Inspection, and Quality Assurance 2. Section 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete 3 Section 06100 Rough Carpentry- Advanced Framing 4 Section 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork (Includes Casework) 5 Section 08710 Finish Hardware 6. Section 08800 Glazing 7 Section 09900 Painting 8 Division 15 for coordination of piping rack systems 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1 Paint and primer products 2. Grout 3 Slotted channel framing B Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications indicated. 1 Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Indicate joints and interface with adjoining materials. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 3 For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 4 Indicate Architectural Steel' items. 5 Indicate components to be pruned and type of primer C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 05500 PAGE 2 of 9 METAL FABRICATIONS D Qualification Data. For firms and persons specified in 'Quality Assurance' Article to demonstrate their capabilities and expenence. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Samples: Provide actual 12' long or 12' x 12' samples with finishes of the following exposed to view items. 1 Aluminum 2. Architectural steel shapes 3 Grilles 4 Custom break shapes for interior and exterior true, closures panels, etc. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those mdicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed to practice m junsdiction where project is located and experienced m providing engmeering services of the kind indicated that have resulted m the successful installation of metal fabrications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel accordmg to the following: 1 AWS D1 1 "Structural Welding Code Steel." 2. AWS D1.2, 'Structural Welding Code Aluminum. 3 AWS D1.3 'Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel. 4 AWS Dl 6, 'Structural Welding Code Stainless Steel. 5 Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1 Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work (Architectural Steel), provide materials with smooth hairline joints and, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, warps, roughness or other flaws. B Architectural steel to comply with requirements of this Section for metal fabrications exposed to view 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. SECTION 05500 PAGE 3 of 9 METAL FABRICATIONS B Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D C Steel Tubing: Cold- formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500 D Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold- formed metal channels with flange edges returned toward web and with 9/16- inch wide slotted holes in webs at 2 inches o.c. 1 Manufacturer Tyco UniStrut Metal Framing and accessories 2. Width of Channels: 1 5/8 inches. 3 Depth of Channels: 1 5/8 inches. 4 Metal and Thickness: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality Grade 33 with G90 coating; 0 079 -inch nominal thickness. 5 Fasteners, clips, rod and accessories required for applications indicated, finished same as channels. F Malleable -Iron Castings: ASTM A 47 Grade 32510 G Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below fabricated from corrosion resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4 as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency 1 Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. H. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. I. Stainless -Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304 J Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304 K. Stainless -Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554 Grade MT 304 L. Stainless -Steel Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.3 ALUMINUM SECTION 05500 PAGE 4 of 9 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Aluminum, General. Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for ach aluminum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below B Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221 Alloy 6063- T5/T52. C Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429 Alloy 6063 -T6. D Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210 or ASTM B 483 Alloy 6063 -T832. E. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061 T6. F Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 547 (ASTM B 247M), Alloy 6061 T6. G Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0 -T6 2.4 METAL BAR GRATINGS A. General. Produce metal bar gratings of description indicated per NAAMM marking system that comply with the following: 1 Metal Bar Grating Standard `Specifications for Metal Bar Grating and Metal Bar Grating Treads' published in ANSL'NAAMM MBG 531 `Metal Bar Grating Manual' latest edition. B Fabricate welded steel gratings to comply with requirements indicated below• 1 Mark/Size: W 19-4 (welded with bearing bars 1 3/16 inch o.c. and cross bars 4 inches o.c.)/bearing bar sizes as indicated. 2. Provide support for grating as indicated in drawings. 3 Grating to be fully removable, including beams on posts where indicated in the drawings. 4 Finish. Galvanize after fabrication. 5 Open Area: 70 percent minimum. 6. Provide `hatches' where indicated in drawings. a. Size: 36' x 36' b Welded hinges, install prior to galvanizing. c. Fabricate for hardware installation. 2.5 PAINT 2. Metal Bar Grating Standard `Specifications for Heavy Duty Metal Grating' published in ANSUNAAMM MBG 532 `Metal Bar Grating Manual' latest edition. A. Universal Shop Primer Fast curing, lead and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPI #79 1 Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb /gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc -rich primer B Architectural Primer (Zinc -Rich Primer): Coordinated and selected to be compatible with finish topcoats specified in Section 09900 1 Carboline 621 Carboline Company 2. Aquapon Zinc -Rich Primer 97 -670• PPG Industries, Inc. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3 Tneme Zinc 90 97 Tnemec Company Inc SECTION 05500 PAGE 5 of 9 METAL FABRICATIONS C Galvanizing Repair Paint: High- zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC Paint 20 D Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC -Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers, or cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187 2.6 FASTENERS A. General. Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless -steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 Class Fe /Zn 5 where built mto exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency 1 Material for Interior Use: Carbon -steel components zmc- plated to comply with ASTM B 633 Class Fe /Zn 5 2. Material for Exterior Use: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless -steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594 2.7 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory- packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107 Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.8 CONCRETE FILL A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in- Place Concrete" for normal weight, air entrained, ready -mix concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. 2.9 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicmg and assembly Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Comply with requirements for Architectural Steel where indicated. B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately Remove burrs. C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent -metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1 Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3 Remove welding flux immediately 4 At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after fmishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 05500 PAGE 6 of 9 METAL FABRICATIONS E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabncations rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. F Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1 Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F matenal surfaces. I. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. J Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or if not indicated, Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 2.10 SHELF ANGLES A. Fabricate structural steel shelf angels from steel angels and shapes of size as required by design of structural metal stud framing system, Section 05400 B Finish. Galvanize 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General. Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural -steel framework as necessary to complete the Work. Comply with requirements for Architectural Steel where indicated. B Fabricate units from structural -steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1 Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors 1 1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 8 inches long at 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3 Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions as follows. 1 Beams: Continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings. D Coiling Door or Grille Supports: Tube 3 by 3 by 1/4" thick with 3" by 6' by 1/4" mounting plate, floor to structure above with deflection connection detail at top. 1 Other sizes are indicated in Drawings; provide similar head and foot detailing MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2. Fully welded shop fabrication, field bolt to structure and door 3 Coordinate door connection with door shop drawings. SECTION 05500 PAGE 7 of 9 METAL FABRICATIONS E. Casework Support (Concealed Angle Support) Fabricate supports as indicated in Drawings. Concealed work may be rough. Exposed and semi- exposed work shall be ground, medium polished and corners and edges radiused. F Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise mdicated, fabricate units from structural -steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 inches from each end, 6 inches from corners, and 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. C Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim in the following locations: 1 Exterior 2. Interior where indicated. 2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's 'Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products' for recommendations for applying and designating fmishes. B Finish metal fabrications after assembly 2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below. 1 ASTM A 123 for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of mstalled metal fabrications: 1 SSPC -SP 6/NACE No. 3 'Commercial Blast Cleaning. C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC -PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1 for shop painting. 1 Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply Architectural Primer to Architectural Steel, railings, and other fabrications exposed to view or exposed to moisture. 2.15 MANUFACTURERED COMPONENTS A. P1001 Unistrut as indicated, 12 -gage ASTM A5760 GR33 or A446 GRA. Provide factory primed finish for 09900 painting by others. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.16 CUSTOM BREAK SHAPES FOR INTERIOR TRIM, CLOSURE PANELS, ETC. A. Provide appearance grade custom stainless steel or aluminum break shapes as detailed for intenor trim, closures and other items indicated as components of building interior finishes. B Appearance grade exposed to view items to have smooth flat hairline joints and surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, warps, roughness or other flaws. C Thickness: Unless otherwise indicated provide thicknesses as required for straight/true flawless continuous runs compatible with adjacent finishes. D Finishes: 1 Aluminum. In general to match adjacent aluminum fmishes unless indicated otherwise. 2. Stainless Steel: Dull satin fmish, custom brushed fmish No DA150, unless indicated otherwise. 2.17 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. SECTION 05500 PAGE 8 of 9 METAL FABRICATIONS B Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. C. Dull Satin Finish. Custom brushed fmish No. DA150 unless indicated otherwise. D When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in -place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. B Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. D Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding Comply with the following requirements: 1 Use matenals and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3 Remove welding flux immediately MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 05500 PAGE 9 of 9 METAL FABRICATIONS 4 At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL BAR GRATINGS A. General. Install gratings to comply with recommendations of NAAMM grating standard referenced under Part 2 that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchonng details. B. Secure removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated, or if not indicated as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown. 3.3 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General. Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from buildmg structure. C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1 Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated at girders supported on concrete or masonry install as specified above for setting and grouting bearing and leveling plates. D Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified above for setting and grouting bearing and leveling plates. 1 Do not grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders until girders are installed and leveled. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same matenal as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC -PA 1 for touching up shop painted surfaces. 1 Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil dry film thickness. B Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780 END OF SECTION 05500 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Installation of miscellaneous items not installed under other sections. 2. Providing blocking for backing (use only where metal backing can't be used). B Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 6 Section 'Interior Architectural Woodwork' for casework. 2. Division 6 Section `Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another section. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally not exposed, unless otherwise specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Wood treatment data as follows including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installation, and finishing of treated material. 1 For fire- retardant- treated wood products include certification by treating plant that treated material complies with specified standard and other requirements. 2. Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire- retardant- treated wood products with requirements indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING SECTION 06100 PAGE 1 of 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Single- Source Responsibility for Fire Retardant Treated Wood. Obtain each type of fire- retardant-treated wood products from one source for both treatment and fire- retardant formulation. A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar matenals. 1 For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONSTRUCTION PANELS, GENERAL A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 'U.S Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood' for plywood construction panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with APA PRP 108 SECTION 06100 PAGE 2 of 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY B Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory- marked with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR BACKING A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire retardant- treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C -D PLUGGED EXPOSURE 1 in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1 Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF -N -105 C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER 272. D Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6 1 E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1 F Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307 Grade A, with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill Sealer Gaskets: Glass fiber resilient insulation fabricated in strip form for use as a sill sealer 1 inch nominal thickness compressible to 1/32 inch, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated; in rolls of 50 feet or 100 feet m length. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. C Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 06100 PAGE 3 of 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for fmish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive fmish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood, predrill as required. F Use hot -dip galvanized or stamless steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather in ground contact, or in area or high relative humidity 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E30 APA Design/Construction Guide Residential Commercial, for types of construction panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below 1 Plywood Backing Panels: Nail to wood supports, screw to metal supports. 3.3 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screening or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to form work before concrete placement. C. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key beveled lumber not less than 1 1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of fmish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. END OF SECTION 06100 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8,2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS SECTION 06402 PAGE 1 of 8 CASEWORK A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Laminated clad custom cabinets 2. Laminated countertops 3 Solid surface countertops 4 Cabinet hardware and cabinet accessories 5 Cutouts, borings, access panels, grommets and other preparations required for installation of and access to mechanical and electrical on or in casework. 6 Miscellaneous items indicated or incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 7 Installation of Owner furnished keyboard and mouse supports and other equipment indicated. B Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1 Division 5 metal countertop support brackets. 2. Division 6, for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work that is not exposed to view 3 Division 9 for metal backing 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit the following m accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B Product data for each type of product and process specified in this section and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, fmishing, and installation. C Shop drawings showing location of each item, including dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Show materials, laminate colors, sinks, fittings, hardware, and other accessories. Show sink centerlines. Show locations of steel counter support locations, access panel locations, and Owner furnished under counter key board and mouse supports. 1 Include with casework shop drawings submittal. a. Provide minimum 1 'A scale coordination drawings of casework where equipment is indicated to be installed within or supported by 06402 casework or indicated. b. Indicate all dimensions, locations of equipment tracks, special hinges, and other fastenings, sequence of assembly or fabrication and the like (shop vs. field installation). Provide confirmation (signatures) by General Contractor casework manufacturer and equipment vendor(s) representatives that installation is coordinated and acceptable for installation in the shop or field. c. Include all fmished mechanical and electrical (include rough -in items if critical) items including medical gas outlets, power outlets, light switches, light fixtures, control panels, MES stations, sinks, built -in accessories, etc. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 06402 PAGE 2 of 8 CASEWORK D Coordination Drawings: Countertops, indicate fabrication requirements and all items including sinks and equipment. 1 Details: Half size E. Samples (2 each unless otherwise indicated) for verification purposes of the following: 1 Laminate clad panel products, 8 -1/2 inches, by 11 inches for each type, color pattern, and surface and edge finish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core. Indicated exposed, semi exposed, and concealed surface fmishes. 2. Corner pieces as follows: a. Cabinet joints between stiles and rail as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. These should match hospital standard. b. Miter jomts for standing trim. 3 Countertop (1 sample of each type of countertop) 12' wide, 18 deep, showing front edge finish, mclude back splash. 4 Exposed and concealed cabinet hardware, one unit of each type and fmish. 5 PVC Edge: 12' sample of each color 6 24' length of fabric wrapped tackboard. F Certificates signed by woodwork manufacturer certifying that products comply with specified requirements. G Qualification data for firms and persons spec .ified in 'Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Finn experienced in successfully producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay m the Work. Subject to specified requirements, provide architectural woodwork by one of the following: 1 King Brothers (Yakima, WA) 2. Pacific Cabinets, Inc. (Ferdinand, ID) 3 Westmark (Tacoma, WA) 4 ISEC (Bothell, WA) 5 Simonet Woodwork, Ltd. (Edmonton, Alberta) 6. Others as approved by Addenda only B Single- Source Manufacturing and Installation Responsibility Engage a qualified Manufacturer to assume undivided responsibility for woodwork specified in this section, including fabrication, fmishing, and installation. C AWI Quality Standard. Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards' published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) and these specifications. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 06402 PAGE 3 of 8 CASEWORK B Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored m other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified m 'Project Conditions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Manufacturer's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus 1 0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder of construction penod. B Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1 Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on fmal shop drawings. 2. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with manufacture of woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Casework Manufacturer Refer to `Quality Assurance' Article m this Section. B HPDL Manufacturer Subject to compliance with requirements, and colors specified, provide high pressure decorative laminates of one or more of the following: 1 Formica Corp. 2. Pionite 3 Nevamar 4 WilsonArt 2.2 MATERIALS A. General. Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI woodworking standard and grade and these specifications for each type of woodwork indicated. B Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Comply with formaldehyde emission requirements of each voluntary standard referenced below 1 Particleboard: NPA 8 2. Medium Density Fiberboard. formaldehyde free 3 Hardwood Plywood: HPMA FE. C Hardboard. ANSI/AHA A135 4 D Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF)• ANSI/AHA A208.2, Class MD- Exterior formaldehyde free, moisture resistant. 1 SierraPine Medex MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI E. Particleboard: ANSI A208 1 Grade M 2, moisture resistant SECTION 06402 PAGE 4 of 8 CASEWORK F Softwood Plywood. PS 1 APA shop grade except APA Manne MDO where `Marine is indicated. G HPDL, High Pressure Decorative Laminate. NEMA LD 3 and the following patterns and colors: 1 PL 1 Nevamar Grand Ilse Maple W -8371T H. PVC Edge: Woodtape' 3 mm 1 Doellken Woodtape to match PL 1 4650 Solid Surface: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3 for Type 5 or Type 6, without a pre- coated finish. 1 Thickness: As indicated on drawings 2. Accessones: Moldings, sealer primer adhesive and other accessories recommended by Manufacturer Where exposed, provide products that match panels. 3 Schedule of Colors: 2.4 FABRICATION a. SOL 1 Manufacturer Corian, Color Canvas C 2.3 HPDL CLAD CABINETS A. Quality Standard: AWI Section 400 and its Division 400B 'Laminate Clad Cabinets" and as indicated. B Grade: Custom and as required by these specifications. C. Type of Cabinet Construction: Provide modified AWI 400 -G -10 reveal overlay system with end panels and scribes wherever cabinets abut adjoining surfaces. D HDPL Laminate Clad Casework 1 Exposed Surfaces: HPDL. a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS (0 050 -inch nominal thickness). b Postformed Surfaces: HGP (0 042 -inch nominal thickness). c. Vertical Surfaces: VGS (0 028 -inch nominal thickness). d. Edges: HGS (0 050 -inch nominal thickness). 2. Interior of doors: HPDL match exposed surface. 3 Wood grain patterns shall run vertically on vertical surfaces 4 Other Semi- exposed Surfaces: Thermoset Decorative Overlay thermally fused melamine impregnated paper complying with LMA SAT 1 color selected by Architect. E. Closure and Filler Panels: Provide closure panels, soffits, sloped tops, and filler panels as shown on drawings. Finish surface to match adjacent cabinets. Provide all support as required. Extend closure panels to underside of ceiling grid. Coordinate location of grid member centered on face of closure with Section 09512. Wood grain patterns shall run vertically on vertical surfaces. A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 06402 PAGE 5 of 8 CASEWORK 1 Comers of cabinets and edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly fmishmg, and hardware application, before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. D Factory-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Field cutting of sink and grommet cutouts allowed. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water resistant coating. E. Rear edges of upper cabinets shall be concealed. No rear of any cabinet shall be exposed. Rears of upper cabmets shall be inserted into rabbits to allow for scribe for a tight fit against wall. F Edges of Laminated Components: Pressure bonded to core with waterproof, hot melt adhesive at exposed and semi- exposed edges. 1 HPDL laminated cabinets: PVC edges 2. Wood veneer laminated cabinets: 1/8 inch thick wood, species, cut and finish matching adjacent face. G Fabrication of cabinets shall conform to AWI Section 400 grade indicated. Cabmets shall be solidly made, glued and screwed together 1 Sink cabinets shall be moisture resistant materials throughout 2. Counter tops with sinks shall be Sierra Pine water resistant `Medex' core, waterproof glue. H. Drawer box front shall be machined with hook joint into drawer side. Rears shall be inserted into dado machined into the drawer side. Drawer bottoms shall be inserted into dado s front rear and sides. I. Provide Radius Corners on Cabinets and Counter Tops, to Match Existing in Hospital and as indicated. J Shelves: 3 /4 inch thick core less than 32 inches, 1 inch thick core greater than 32 inches any dimension. K. All cabinetry enclosing flipper door hardware to be completely removable for access and removal of flipper door hardware. L. Fabncate solid plastic and cultured stone per manufacturer's written instructions. Engage experienced personnel or shop, approved by Manufacturer for type of work required. 2.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General. Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware." Locks, if required, shall be furnished at locations shown on architectural drawings. All hardware shall be casework manufacturers standard but shall meet the following requirements. 1 Non Ferrous Hardware at MRI Room only Provide the following items fabricated from bronze or brass base metal with fmish matching Owner's standard, to match US28 Satin Aluminum unless indicated otherwise: a. Hinges, locks, pulls, catches, drawer slides and bolts. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 06402 PAGE 6 of 8 CASEWORK 2. Hinges at cabinets shall be concealed steel, self closing, 170 degree swing, institutional grade, European style, except as indicated in paragraph 2.6 A 3 following. 3 Drawer and door pulls shall be through bolted from back side; US28 Satin Aluminum wire type clear anodized, 4" center to center 1 3/16' projection, 5/16" diameter no escutcheons. 4 Cabinet mounted adjustable shelf support clips shall be provided as follows: a. Each shelf shall have 5 mm nickel plated steel, plug -in, retainer type security pin support clips let into shelf bottoms to prevent sliding. b Drill shelf clip holes at 1 1/4 inch on center full height of cabinet, two columns per cabinet side. c. Provide four support clips at each shelf indicated, six at shelves over 42 inches in length. 6. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements of ANSIBHMA A156.9 7 Catching devices shall be heavy -duty magnetic with a maximum 5 lb minimum 3 lb. pull. B Drawer Slides: full extension type, K.V 8405 at 6 -inch and less, KV 8505 at drawers greater than 6 inches deep. Typical drawers with load rating of 75 pounds. C File Cabinet and Paper Storage Drawers: Load rating of 150 pounds full extension, with width and depth to accommodate pentaflex file hangers and allow 1 clearance between top of hanging files and top edge of file drawer All file drawers to extend to allow 1 clearance between files and face of cabinet. D For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.9 E. Provide hinge stops, where cabinet door open 90 degrees, will hit wall, casework or equipment. F Pull -out counter top glides: KV 8505 full extension, 150 lb. minimum capacity G Cord Grommet: Provide up to one hundred fifty (150) grommets for electrical cord drops through countertops and/or cabinets at locations directed by Owner before fmal completion. 1 Size: 2.125 inch clear ID for 2.375 inch diameter hole. Other sizes indicated in Drawings. 2. Color selected from full range. 2.6 LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Comply with AWI Section 400 Division 400C. B. Standard Top: High pressure decorative laminate complying with the following: 1 AWI Grade: Premium a. Match color pattern, and finish indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard designations for these characteristics. b Grade: HGS/HFS (0 050 -inch nominal thickness) c. Balance Sheet: 0 020 -inch thick minimum, matching top color where exposed 2. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 3 Use water resistant Medex core and waterproof glue and adhesives at all countertops containing sinks (extend to full extents of counters containing sinks). MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 06402 PAGE 7 of 8 CASEWORK C. Splashes: HPDL, 4 inches high at back and sides of all countertops, unless noted otherwise. D Counter Top Support: Coordinate and install metal supports indicated in Drawings, specified in Section 05500 2.7 SOLID SURFACING PLASTIC RESIN COUNTERTOPS A. Fabncate solid surfacing plastic resin countertops from Solid Surfacing where indicated in Drawings. Provide matenal thickness indicated. Provide detailing indicated. B Fabricate tops and wainscots in one piece with shop applied backsplashes and edges, where indicated. Comply with solid surfacing- material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, andifmishing. 2.8 ADJUSTABLE SHELVING C General. Provide adjustable shelves and standards as indicated on project drawings. D Shelf Construction. Comply with AWI Section 400 Division 400C, and these specifications: 1 Shelves 3 -0' or less in length to be 3/4 inch thick with plastic laminate fmish on all surfaces. 2. Shelves between 3 -0' and 4 -0' in length to be 1 inch thick with plastic laminate finish on all surfaces. 3 Locate shelf supports at 3 -0' 0 C maximum spacing, and as indicated. 2.9 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS E. Screws: Select materials, type, size and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF -S -1 for applicable requirements. F For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer G Nails: Select materials, type, size and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF -N -105 for applicable requirements. H. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devised for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. B Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built. Venfy that blocking and backings have been installed at appropnate locations for anchorage. C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop- fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. D Measure all areas for scribe fit. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard. Install custom casework to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this section for type of woodwork involved. B Install custom casework plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8' -0' for plumb and level (including tops) and with no variations m flushness of adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoming work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D Anchor cabinetwork to anchors or blockmg built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefmished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching fmal finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. F Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. G. Complete the fmishing work specified m this section to whatever extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually where not possible to repair replace woodwork. Adjust jomery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory- applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide fmal protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 SCHEDULE 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 06402 SECTION 06402 PAGE 8 of 8 CASEWORK A. General: Provide custom and prefabricated casework at locations as indicated on project drawings. Include all hardware and accessones required for a complete installation. Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART I GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with Section 01300 Submittals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General. Comply with Section 01400 Quality Control. 4 Materials shall comply with provisions of UBC Section 1713(C) SECTION 07200 PAGE 1 of 5 BUILDING INSULATION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Provide matenals, labor equipment, inspection, coordination, and supervision necessary for the best and most complete installation per industry standards of insulation as indicated in this specification and on the project drawings. B. Section includes: 1 Perimeter Insulation 2. Batt insulation 3 Acoustical insulation 4 Replace existing building insulation damaged or removed during construction D Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Division 7 fire- resistive joint systems. 2. Division 9 Intenor partition framing and furring. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Thermal Resistivity Where the thermal resistivity of insulation products are designated by `r values, they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k values). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous matenal exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. B. Product Data. Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of insulation material required. Include data for each type of vapor retarder required. C. Certification: Submit letter of certification from manufacturer that the installer is an approved/certified mstaller of specified product. B Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials which have been tested using methods indicated below by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Surface burning characteristics, ASTM E84 2. Fire resistance ratings, ASTM El 19 3 Combustion characteristics, ASTM E136 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01615 Delivery Storage, and Handling. B Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during mstallation. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow C. Do not expose plastic insulation to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. Protect agamst exposure to flame, sparks, or excessive heat. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project site ahead of installation time. Complete installation and concealment of plastic insulation materials in each area of work without delay 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best and most complete installation per industry standards. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Section 01310, Progress Schedule. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Comply with Section 01740, Warranties and Bonds. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide insulation in preformed units from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths sized to fit applications indicated. B. R- values for various insulation types are listed under each insulation type. Refer to insulation schedule at end of this section for minimum R -value for the floor wall and roof system indicated. 2.2 PERIMETER INSULATION A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1 Amaco Foam Products Company 2. Styrofoam Brand Insulation, Dow Chemical USA 3 Minnesota Diversified Products, Inc. 4 UC Industries 5 Others as approved by addenda SECTION 07200 PAGE 2 of 5 BUILDING INSULATION B. Quality Standard Product 1 Styrofoam SM Polystyrene Board Insulation Panels, Dow Chemical USA, 25 psi, 2 -inch thickness C Description: Provide insulation manufactured by extrusion process and as follows: 1 Comply with ASTM C578 requirements for classification. 2. Type VII, 2.2 pounds per cubic foot minimum density 3 Aged r values (per inch). a. 5 4 at 40 degrees F b. 5 0 at 75 degrees F MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.3 GLASS FIBER BATT INSULATION A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1 Johns Manville Corporation (JM) 2. Owens Corning Fiberglas Corporation 3 Others as approved by addenda B Quality Standard Product: JM Comfort Therm Poly- encapsulated SECTION 07200 PAGE 3 of 5 BUILDING INSULATION C. Type: ASTM C665 Type II, Class A, Cat. 1 and ASTM E136 combustion test requirements for blanket/batt. 1 Formaldehyde free 2. Size for friction fit in metal construction, with members spaced as indicated. 3 Poly- encapsulation: Vaper retarder rating of 0.05 perms 4 R 19 at 6 inch framing 2.4 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1 Johns Manville Corporation 2. Owens Corning Fiberglas Corporation 3 Others as named in addenda B. Acoustical Insulation for enclosed voids such as fully sheathed interior partitions: 1 Quality Standard:.JM Sound Control Batts 2. Formaldehyde free 3 3 1 /2- inches minimum, fill stud space 4 Comply with ASTM C665 Type I and ASTM E136. C. Acoustical Insulation for unenclosed conditions such as unclosed partitions or above ceiling finish: 1 Quality Standard: JM Sound Control Batts 2. Formaldehyde free 3 Poly- encapsulated, perforated (not a vapor retarder) 4 3 1 /2- inches minimum for wall framing. 6 inches for 6 -inch framing and above ceilings 5 Comply with ASTM C665 Type II, Class A, Cat 2 and ASTM E136. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Determine that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer Startmg of the work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. B Verify that mechanical and electrical work within walls where insulation is to be applied has been completed before beginning the installation. C Verify that masonry materials have dried sufficiently and attained optimum moisture content. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI D Venfy that insulation materials to be installed are free of damage. 3.2 PREPARATION SECTION 07200 PAGE 4 of 5 BUILDING INSULATION A. Prepare substrates and connecting work to enable the best and most complete installation per industry standards of the work of this section. B Remove projections and clean substrates of any substances which might damage materials to be installed. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1 Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures. Consult manufacturer's representative for specific recommendations if printed instructions are not provided or do not apply to project conditions. 2. Install msulation to provide a complete building envelope and as indicated, using a single layer wherever possible to provide R -value or thickness indicated. 3 Install units with adhesive or mechanical anchorage as mdicated, or if not indicated, as recommended by insulation manufacturer to provide permanent placement and support of insulation. 4 Friction -fit unflanged blanket/batt insulation between framing members in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures. 5 Completely fill intended spaces. Leave no gaps or voids. 6 Cut insulation neatly as required to fit tightly around obstructions. 7 Place units havmg vapor retarder facing with vapor retarder to interior (warm) side of construction, unless otherwise mdicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces. 8. Form tight seal between insulation and surrounding construction. Tape seal joints and ruptures in vapor retarder Ensure airtight and continuous installation. 9 Set reflective foil -faced insulation to provide not less than 3/4 -inch continuous air space in front of foil wherever possible. 10 Fit insulation around and behind piping, valves, conduits, electrical and data components, and other items so as to locate at interior (warm) face of insulation. B. Below -Grade Perimeter Installation 1 Use insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive and procedures to apply insulation boards to foundation. 2. Place insulation boards to maximize contact bedding. Butt board edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and protrusions. Stagger joints. Cut out as required at the tie -back penetrations. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Control. B Provide experienced supervision of all elements of the work of this section. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and Section 01710, Cleaning. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 07200 PAGE 5 of 5 BUILDING INSULATION B Finish concealing work promptly upon completion of insulation work wherever possible, to protect insulation materials from exposure to weather or physical abuse. Where this is not possible, erect temporary coverings or enclosures to prevent damage. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Refer to drawings for general extent and locations of thermal insulation. Provide insulation types at locations indicated below Other locations or exceptions are indicated in Drawings or as required to provide a complete insulated building envelope. B Exterior framed walls: Thermal batt insulation and Sheet vapor retarder R 19 C. Metal framed interior partitions: Sound attenuation batts 3'/2 minimum. D Under slab on grade and perimeter insulation where indicated in drawings: Perimeter insulation 2' R 10 END OF SECTION 07200 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS SECTION 07810 PAGE 1 of 7 FIREPROOFING A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide materials, labor equipment, inspection, coordination, and supervision necessary for complete fireproofing as indicated m this specification and the project drawings B This Section includes the following: 1 Patch existing fireproofing damaged during construction. 2. Fireproofmg of structural steel including decking where required. 3 Installation of accessories. C Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1 Division 7 `Firestopping and Smokestopping' for through- penetration firestopping systems and perimeter containment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements in Section 01300 Submittals. B Product data for each sprayed -on fireproofing product indicated. 1 Certification by manufacturers that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 2. Where and what kinds of surface preparations are required before applying fireproofing. 3 Extent of sprayed -on fireproofing for each different construction and fire- resistance rating including the following: a. Applicable fire- resistive design designations of inspecting and testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire- resistance ratings of structural components and assemblies. 4 Treatment of fireproofmg after its application. C Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following: 1 Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying sprayed fire resistive material. 2. Extent of sprayed fire resistive material for each construction and fire- resistance rating, including the following: a. Applicable fire- resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire- resistance ratings of structural components and assemblies. c. Designation of restrained and unrestrained conditions based on defmitions in ASTM E 119 Appendix X3 as determined by a qualified professional engmeer 3 Treatment of sprayed fire- resistive materials after application. D Product certificates from fireproofing manufacturers that each sprayed -on fireproofmg product indicated for Project complies with specified requirements including those for fire- test response characteristics and compatibility with adhesives, primers, and other surface coatings on substrates indicated to receive fireproofmg. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in 'Quality Assurance' article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. F Information for Code Authority when required by code authority submit required information for review and approval. Submit two copies of approved information to Architect. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 07810 PAGE 2 of 7 FIREPROOFING A. Fire- Test Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed -on fireproofmg products identical to those used in assemblies tested for the following fire- test response characteristics, per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify packages (bags) containing fireproofmg with appropriate classification markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency 1 Fire Resistance Ratmgs: Provide fireproofing for applications indicated with fire resistive designs listed in UL "Fire Resistance Directory or in the comparable publication of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire- resistive assemblies where sprayed -on fireproofing serves as direct- applied protection, tested per ASTM E 119 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: As indicated for each sprayed -on fireproofing product required, tested per ASTM E 84 B Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the sprayed -on fireproofing manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its sprayed -on fireproofing products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer 1 Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility for designation of restrained and unrestramed conditions. C Single- Source Responsibility Obtain sprayed -on fireproofing materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. D Provide documentation that fireproofing materials do not contribute to any bacterial or mold growth and that the materials contain a mold inhibitor fungal resistance, no observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21 E. Provide fireproofmg products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763 Subpart F Appendix A, Section 1 Polarized Light Microscopy F Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency hired by Contractor or manufacturer to test sprayed -on fireproofing products must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699 that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated. G Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements m Division 1 Section `Project Management and Coordination. Review methods and procedures related to sprayed fire- resistive materials including, but not limited to the followmg: 1 Review and fmalize construction schedule and verify sequencing and coordination requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer date of manufacture; shelf life, if applicable; and fire- resistance ratings applicable to Project. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS SECTION 07810 PAGE 3 of 7 FIREPROOFING B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and discard any materials whose shelf life has expired. C Store sprayed -on fireproofing materials inside, under cover above ground, so they are kept dry until ready for use. Remove from Project site and discard any materials that have deteriorated. A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install sprayed -on fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperatures are 40 deg F (4 4 deg C) and fallmg, unless temporary protection and heat is provided to maintam temperatures at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after applying sprayed -on fireproofing. B Ventilation: Ventilate sprayed -on fireproofmg by natural means or where this is inadequate, forced -air circulation during and after application until fireproofing dues thoroughly 1.7 SEQUENCING A. Sequence and coordinate application of sprayed -on fireproofmg with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements: 1 Provide temporary enclosures to prevent deterioration of sprayed -on fireproofing for intenor applications due to exposure to unfavorable environmental conditions. 2. Avoid unnecessary exposure of sprayed -on fireproofing to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. 3 Do not apply fireproofing to metal roof decking substrates until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing. 4 Do not begin applying fireproofmg until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are m place. 5 Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until fireproofing is installed. 6. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, tested, and corrections have been made to any defective fireproofing. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Comply with Section 01745 Warranties. B. Warranty Submit a written warranty executed by Contractor and cosigned by Installer, agreeing to repair or replace sprayed -on fireproofing that has failed within the specified warranty period. Failures include but are not limited to the following: 1 Cracking, flaking, eroding in excess of specified requirements, peeling, and delaminating of sprayed -on fireproofing from substrates due to defective materials and workmanship within the specified warranty penod. 2. Not covered under the warranty are failures attributable to damage by occupants and Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investigated and approved during fire- response testmg, and to other causes not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use. C Warranty Penod: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS PRODUCTS A. Fireproofing Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1 Cafco 300 Isolatek International Corp. 2 Mandolite CP 2, Mandoval Vermiculite Products, Inc MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3 Monokote Type MK -6 Construction Products Div W.R. Grace Co. 4 Pyrolite 1 Carboline Fireproofing Products Div Carboline Co. 5 Blaze Shield II, Isolatek Intemational Corp. 2.2 CEMENTITIOUS SPRAYED -ON FIREPROOFING SECTION 07810 PAGE 4 of 7 FIREPROOFING A. General. For applications of sprayed -on fireproofing provide manufacturer's standard products complying with requirements indicated m this article for material composition and physical properties representative of installed products. B Material Composition: Cementitious fireproofmg consisting of factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application. C Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated or higher values required to attain designated fire- resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property listed below• 1 Bond Strength. 200 lbf per sq. ft. as determined per ASTM E 736 under the following conditions: a. Field test sprayed -on fireproofing that is applied to flanges of wide -flange structural steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fireproofing. b If surfaces of structural steel receiving sprayed -on fireproofing are primed or otherwise painted, perform series of bond tests specified in UL 'Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials. c. Minimum sprayed -on fireproofmg thickness tested m laboratory shall be 0 75 inch. 2. Compressive Strength. 5.50 lbf per sq. inch as determined in the laboratory per ASTM E 761 Minimum sprayed -on fireproofmg thickness tested shall be 0 75 inch and the minimum dry density shall be as specified, but not less than 15 pcf. 3 Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion as determined per ASTM E 937 4 Deflection: No cracking, spalling, delamination or the like as determined per ASTM E 759 5 Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, delamination or the like as determined per ASTM E 760 6. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0 005 gram per sq. ft. in 24 hours as determined per ASTM E 859 For laboratory tests, the minimum sprayed -on fireproofmg thickness is 0 75 inch, the maximum dry density is 15 pcf, test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours. 7 Dry Density 15 pcf for average and individual densities regardless of density indicated in referenced fire- resistive design, or greater if required to attain fire- resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 605 or Appendix A Alternate Method for Density Determination" of AWCI Technical Manual 12 A. 8. Surface Burning Charactenstics: Maximum flame spread value of 0 and smoke developed value of 0 D Thickness: Provide thickness required in U.L. design listings for schedule of fireproofmg in Part 3 2.3 AUXILIARY FIREPROOFING MATERIALS A. General. Provide auxiliary fireproofing materials that are compatible with sprayed -on fireproofmg products and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and mspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in the fire- resistive designs indicated. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 07810 PAGE 5 of 7 FIREPROOFING B Substrate Primers: For use on each different substrate and with each different sprayed -on fireproofing product, provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements: 1 Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL 'Fire Resistance Directory' for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736 C. Sealer Coat: Manufacturer s tinted sealer to assure surface density and air erosion performance. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates with Installer present to determine if they are in satisfactory condition to receive sprayed -on fireproofing. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following: 1 Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related matenals and construction are specified. 2. Substrates are free of oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, loose mill scale, dirt, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrate under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 3 Objects penetrating fireproofmg, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 4 Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will interfere with applying the fireproofing. B Existing Primers on Beams: Review paint primer product information to confirm they are acceptable substrates for fireproofing product. If necessary conduct field tests. C Conduct tests according to sprayed -on fireproofing manufacturer's recommendations to verify that substrates are free of oil, rolling compounds, and other substances capable of interfering with bond where there is any doubt as to their presence. D Do not proceed with installation of fireproofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofmg, including oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, and loose mill scale. B. Cover other work subject to damage from fall -out or overspray of fireproofmg materials during application. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations, protect the environment, and ensure maintaining adequate ambient conditions for temperature and ventilation. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to convey and spray on fireproofmg materials; as applicable to the particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire- resistance ratings indicated. B Apply sprayed -on fireproofing that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 under "Test Reports' in 'Submittals' article, with respect to rate of application, use of sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray or other materials and procedures affecting test results. C Coat substrates with adhesive prior to applying fireproofmg where required to achieve fire resistance rating or as recommended by fireproofing manufacturer for material and application indicated. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI D Extend fireproofmg in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended by fireproofing manufacturer install body of fireproof covering in a single course. E. Apply fireproofing materials by sprayed -on method to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended by manufacturer F Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate it from the sprayed -on fireproofing over which it is applied. 1 Blaze- Shield II. Sealer coat is required. 3.4 INSTALLING FIREPROOFING A. Apply fireproofing in thicknesses and densities indicated but not less than those required to achieve fire- resistance ratings designated for each condition and comply with requirements for thickness specified in Part 2 'Fireproofmg" article. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 07810 PAGE 6 of 7 FIREPROOFING A. Testing Agency Owner's Testing Agency will perform tests specified in this Article. 1 Other tests required in this Section shall be performed by Contractor B Extent and Testing Methodology Testing of completed fireproofing will take place in successive stages in areas of extent described below- do not proceed with fireproofmg of next area until test results for previously completed fireproofmg show compliance with requirements. 1 Extent of Each Test Area. Each bay 5,000 sq. ft. of floor area, or total floor area, whichever produces greatest number of test areas. 2. Within each area, testing agency will randomly select one structural member of each type (primary beam, secondary beam, joist, truss, steel deck, and column) and test fireproofing as follows: a. For cohesion and adhesion per ASTM E 736. b For thickness per ASTM E 605 c. Lower flanges and webs of beams, column webs, column flanges, and floor deck for density per ASTM E 605 or Appendix A Alternate Method for Density Determination' of AWCI Technical Manual 12 A. d. When testing discovers fireproofmg not in compliance with requirements, testing agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D Remove and replace fireproofing where test results mdicate that it does not comply with specified requirements for cohesion and adhesion or for density or both. E. Apply additional fireproofing per manufacturer's directions where test results indicate that the thickness does not comply with specified requirements. F Additional Testing: Where fireproofmg is removed and replaced or repaired, additional testing will be performed to determine compliance with specified requirements. 3.6 CLEANING, REPAIR, AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material over -spray and fall -out from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Cure exposed cementitious fireproofing materials according to fireproofing manufacturer's recommendations to prevent premature drying. C Protect fireproofing, according to advice of fireproofing manufacturer and Installer from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. D Coordinate installation of fireproofing with other construction to minimize the need to cut or remove fireproofmg. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and patch any areas where fireproofmg was removed or damaged. E. Repair or replace work that has not been successfully protected. 3.7 SCHEDULE OF FIREPROOFING A. Provide cementitious fireproofing on steel structure including columns, girders, beams, joists, trusses, decks, and braces. 1 Comply with 2003 IBC Type -IA fire resistive construction for fire resistivity of structural elements. END OF SECTION 07810 SECTION 07810 PAGE 7 of 7 FIREPROOFING 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8. 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 07840 PAGE 1 of 5 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PARTI GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY D Related Work specified elsewhere: 1 Division 7 Fireproofmg. 2. Division 7 Joint Sealants. 3 Division 9 Gypsum Board Systems. 4 Division 15 Mechanical work. 5 Division 16, Electrical work. FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. A. Section includes matenals, labor equipment, inspection, coordination, and supervision necessary for Code compliant firestopping and smokestopping. B Work Includes 1 Firestopping /Smokestoppmg of penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Firestopping/Smokestoppmg perimeters and joints of smoke barriers. 3 Firestopping/Smokestopping pentrations through floors, rated and not rated. 4 Perimeter fire containment systems. C. Products Furnished and Installed under other Sections: Sleeves which are an integral part of the firestopping assembly but which must be set by installer of other construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Fire Barrier Any wall, floor ceiling, or roof which is indicated as having a fire- resistance rating. B Smoke Barrier Any wall, floor ceiling, or roof which is indicated as being designed to prevent passage of smoke and gases; may be indicated as `smoke barrier `smoke partition, `smoke wall, etc. C. Fire /Smoke Barrier Any wall, floor ceiling or roof which is indicated as having a fire- resistive rating, plus is required to prevent passage of smoke and gases. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General. Comply with Division 1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. B Inspection Reports 1 Preinstallation. Identify existing penetrations which are not to be firestopped/ smokestopped, but which need to be repaired using the onginal material of the fire -rated assembly 2. Final. Provide final inspection report(s). C. Schedule of Firestopping: Complete list keyed for floor plan diagrams, for approval, of penetrations to be sealed, indicatmg location, fire rating of penetrated assembly identification of penetration seal to be used, fire rating of penetration seal, and evidence of acceptable testing. D Schedule of Smokestopping: Complete list keyed for floor plan diagrams, for approval of penetrations to be sealed, indicating location, construction of penetrated assembly and identification of penetration seal to be used. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 07840 PAGE 2 of 5 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI E. F 1.5 A. B 1.9 Product Data. Complete product and system installation instructions, and limitations on use. Maintenance Data. Include detailed instructions penetratmg items. QUALITY ASSURANCE FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING description, including tested assembly details, for repair and for modification due to changes in General. Comply with Division 1 Quality Control. Pre Installation Conference: Prior to start of work, conduct a meeting to verify that the installation instructions and procedures required are understood by installers. The following shall attend this meeting: Note: Contractor shall prepare and distribute pre installation conference meeting minutes to all persons associated with fire and smoke stopping. 1 Contractor 2. Installers of firestopping. 3 Installers of smokestopping. 4 Installers of perimeter fire containment systems. 5 Architect and Owner (optional attendance). 6. Representative of authority havmg jurisdiction. 7 Firestop /smokestop manufacturer's representative. C. Coordmation Conferences. Prior to the start of work which involves cutting openings in fire wall construction for penetrations, conduct a meeting with installers of such work to identify fire and smoke barriers and required configurations of penetrations and to discuss the proper procedures and time schedule for cutting, patching, and sealing penetrations in such assemblies, with emphasis on avoiding unnecessary cutting and patching. D Testing Requirements: Testing shall have been conducted or witnessed by an independent testing agency acceptable to the authorities havmg jurisdiction. 1 Test method per ASTM E 1966 and other requirements in the IBC, Chapter 7 2. The listing of the assembly to be used in the current edition of one of the following classification guides will be considered evidence of acceptable testing: a. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 'Building Materials Directory b. Underwriters Laboratories Inc "Fire Resistance Directory c. Factory Mutual System "Approval Guide. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Comply with Division 1 Delivery Storage, and Handling. Coordinate delivery of products to minimize storage time at site. PROJECT CONDITIONS Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best installation per industry standards. SCHEDULING Perform firestopping and smokestopping work after completion of work which penetrates fire and smoke barriers, but prior to covering up or eliminating access to the penetration. Coordinate with installers of such other work. WARRANTY A. Comply with Division 1 Warranty Procedures. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 07840 PAGE 3 of 5 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1 Bio Fireshield, Inc. 2 Hilti, Inc. 3 3M Fire Protection Products 4 United States Gypsum Corporation 5 Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) 6 Others as approved in addenda 2.2 FIRE AND SMOKE STOPPING MATERIALS FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING A. Firestopping Materials: 1 Provide penetration seal assemblies whose fire- resistance ratings have been determined by testmg in the configurations required and which have fire resistance ratings at least as high as that of the fire -rated assembly in which they are to be installed. 2 Use the materials required for the tested assemblies indicated on the drawings. Where no tested assembly is indicated for a particular penetration, use a fire- protection engineered assembly backed in writing by the firestopping manufacturer which complies with the requirements of the specification. 3 Provide products which. a. Allow normal expansion and contraction movement of the penetrating item without failure of the penetration seal. b. Emit no hazardous, combustible, or irritating by- products during installation or curing penod. c. Do not require special tools for installation. d. Do not require hazardous waste disposal. B Smokestopping: Use any gunnable or pourable joint sealant suitable for the application; use only fully curing types where accessible in the finished work. Provide products which: 1 Allow normal expansion and contraction movement of the penetrating item without failure of the penetration seal. 2. Emit no hazardous, combustible, or irritating by- products during installation or curing period. 3 Do not require special tools for installation. 4 Do not require hazardous waste disposal. 2.3 PERIMETER FIRE CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS A. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems: 1 Provide complete systems with rated 2 Hour UL classification fabricated specifically to seal between floor assembly edges and inside surface of exterior building wall surfaces. 2. Product standard United States Gypsum Co. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems Types FC, RFC, UL Systems CW -S -1001 CW -S -2001 CW -S -2002, with 2 -Hour integrity rating. 3 Use the materials required for the tested assemblies. 4 Provide products which: a. Allow normal expansion and contraction movement without failure of fire containment system. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 07840 PAGE 4 of 5 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI b. Emit no hazardous combustible or irritating by- products during installation or curing period. c. Do not require hazardous waste disposal. 5 Vertical component of perimeter fire containment system shall be 2 -Hour UL foil faced 2' /x Thermafiber CW Firespan -90 curtain wall installation. 2.4 FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER LABELS A. Mark each fire and smoke barrier above ceilings both sides with stenciled words identifying it as a fire or smoke barrier at maximum 20 foot intervals, or at intervals required by authorities having jurisdiction. (Mark each segment that is 4 feet or longer B Stenciled, red, permanent marking using the words 'Fire -Rated Assembly Do Not Disturb, See Maintenance Instructions' or equivalent as approved by the authority having jurisdiction. C. For marking fire and smoke barriers themselves, use stenciled letters at least 2 mches high. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Determine that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer Starting of the work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. B Inspect all fire and smoke barriers for penetrations of any type; mark or otherwise identify all penetrations indicating action required. `Repair' `add firestopping," or add smokestopping, etc. 1 Conduct inspection pnor to covering up or enclosing walls or ceilings. 2. Conduct mspection jointly with authonzed representative of authority having jurisdiction. 3 Conduct inspection jointly with the Contractor and Owner representatives. 4 Include copies of report detailing fmdings of inspection to the Owner and Architect. C. If the configuration of a particular penetration does not conform to the configuration necessary for the required firestopping assembly notify the mstaller of the penetration for modification of the configuration to suit the assembly do not use the firestopping assembly in other configurations except as specifically stated in the test report or as approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 3.2 PREPARATION FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING A. Prepare substrates and connecting work to enable the best installation per industry standards of the work of this section. B Prepare penetrations in accordance with the material manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install firestopping materials and perimeter fire containment systems, including forming, packing, and other accessory materials, in exact accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the conditions of the testing. B Remove combustible forming materials, unless they are a required component of the tested assembly C Mark each fire and smoke barrier above lay -in ceilings with words identifying it as a, fire or smoke barrier at intervals as indicated by this Section, or at intervals required by authorities having jurisdiction. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 07840 PAGE 5 of 5 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Division 1 Quality Control. B Provide experienced supervision of all elements of the work of this section. C. Obtain the services of firestopping and perimeter fire containment systems material manufacturer's representative to instruct installers and to inspect the completed installations for correctness. D Inspect completed installations for completeness and correct installation. 1 If installed work is to be covered m completed work, inspect and obtain approval prior to covering. 2. Obtain the approval of the authority having jurisdiction. 3 Include copies of report of inspection to the Owner and Architect. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with Division 1 Contract Closeout, and Final Cleaning. B Clean up excess material adjacent to penetrations sealed as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by the manufacturers of the materials and of products to be cleaned. C. Protect installed work during and after curing period. D Protect installed work from damage from construction operations using substantial barriers if necessary E. Repair damaged materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Provide firestopping and smokestopping at perimeters and penetrations m all walls, floors, and ceilings indicated as fire -rated bamers or smoke barriers. B. Provide perimeter fire containment system closure between all floor assembly edges and inside surfaces of the various curtain wall assemblies indicated. END OF SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 07900 PAGE 1 of 7 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01420 Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION JOINT SEALANTS A. Provide materials, labor equipment, inspection, coordination, and supervision necessary for the best and most complete installation per industry standards of joint sealers as indicated in this specification and the project drawings. B Extent of each form and type of joint sealer is indicated on drawings and schedules. C Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals. D Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Division 2 Section `Concrete' for waterstops. 2. Division 7 Section `Firestoppmg and Smokestopping. 3 Division 9 Section `Gypsum Board Systems' including acoustical sealant joints. 4 Division 15 Mechanical 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General. Comply with Division 1 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. B Product Data: From manufacturers for each joint sealer product required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. C. Samples: 1 Initial Selection. Manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available for each product exposed to view Obtain color chips from Architect for custom color mixes required for one -part nonsag urethane sealants. D Certification: Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General. Comply with Division 1 Section `Quality Control. B Installer Qualifications: Engage an installer who has successfully completed within the last 5 years at least three joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this project. C Manufacturer's Reviews and Tests: Provide sealant manufacturer's written review of Construction Documents and recommendations for sealant installation for exterior building joints. Comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best and most complete installation per industry standards. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 07900 PAGE 2 of 7 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL 2.2 EXTERIOR ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS JOINT SEALANTS B Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with mstallation of joint sealers under the following conditions: 1 When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturer or below 40 degrees F 2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. C C. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers where joint widths are less than allowed by a joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated. D D Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Warranties and Bonds. B. Silicone Building Sealant Warranty Provide warranty co- signed by officer of sealant manufacturer and sealant installer complymg with the following: 1 Sealant will perform as a watertight weatherseal. 2. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years. 3 Remedy Remove and replace defective sealant with new material of equal specification during warranty penod. Complete remedy within 30 days of wntten notice by Owner A. Compatibility Provide joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C920 requirements, including those referenced for type, grade, class, and uses. B Exterior Building Sealant: for panel joints, perimeter joints, joints between dissimilar materials, flashing joints, other exterior building joints, and other locations indicated. 1 Acceptable products and manufacturers: a. Dow Coming 795 Silicone Building Sealant. 2. Description: One -part nonsag silicone building sealant complymg with the following minimum rquirements: a. Joint Movement Capability at 14 days: ASTM D 1149 at least 50 b. Durometer Hardness: ASTM D 2240 Shore A, 25 to 30 points. c. Tensile Stress at 150% Elongation: ASTM D 412, 80 psi. d. Ultimate Tensile Strength: ASTM D 412, at least 170 psi. e. Peel Strength, milled aluminum, glass and concrete: MIL S -8802. 32 lb /in. f. Staining: ASTM C 510 none. 3 Colors: Selected by Architect from full range. 4 Warranty requirements in Part 1 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 07900 PACE 3 of 7 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI JOINT SEALANTS C. Exterior Walks: 1 Acceptable products and manufacturers: a. Vulkem 245/255 b Sonnebom, SL 2. c. Others as approved in addenda. 2. Description. Two part -plus- colorant self levelmg, high performance polyurethane horizontal and sloping joint sealant complymg with the following minimum requirements: a. Joint Movement Capability at 14 days: ASTM D 1149 at least +50% and 50% b Durometer Hardness: ASTM D 2240 Shore A, 23 -25 points. c. Utimate Elongation at break ASTM D 412, 500% minimum. d. Ultimate Tensile Strength: ASTM D 412, at least 170 psi. e. Peel Strength, ASTM C 794 not less than 151b /in. f. Staining: ASTM C 510 none. 3 Colors: Three colors selected by Architect. D Extenor Flashing: 1 Same products as extenor panel and perimeter joint sealant. 2.3 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS A. Interior Floors of Concrete and Tile: 1 Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Permagile Industries Inc. (800) 645 -7546. b. Others as approved by addenda. 2. Quality Standard: "Formula T 250' by Permagile Industries Inc. 3 Sealant Type: Two component, elastic -type epoxy 4 Technical Data: a. Tensile strength per ASTM D638 350 to 600 psi b. Tensile elongation per ASTM D638 100 percent c. Hardness (shear A durometer) per ASTM D2240. 80 10 d. Adhesion to concrete per ASTM C321 200 to 250 psi e. Water absorption per ASTM C413 0.2 percent f. Color manufacturer's gray 5 Installation. a. Blow clean and dry with compressed air to remove excess moisture and dirt. b. Allow concrete to cure a minimum of 7 days. c. Tape both sides of joint with masking tape. d. Provide bond breaking tape at bottom of joints. e. Cast sand on joints in tile floor to match grout joints until rejection occurs. B Intenor wet areas including Ceramic Tile, Casework Joints, Backsplash and Endsplash Perimeters, Plumbmg Fixture Perimeters 1 Acceptable Manufacturers: a. General Electric Silicone. b. Dow Coming, 786. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 07900 PAGE 4 of 7 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI c. Others as approved by addenda. 2. Quality Standard Products: 'GE Sanitary 1700 Silicone Sealant" 3 Sealant Type: Acetoxy curing, sanitary silicone. 4 Standards. FS TT- S- 001543A, type II, class A. 5 Tooled sealant surface concave. JOINT SEALANTS C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints. 1 General. Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstammg, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Protective Treatments, Inc. b Henry c. Tremco d. Pecora e. Miricle f. Others as approved by addenda 3 Quality Standard. 'PTI 808 Acoustical Sealant, Protective Treatments, Inc. 4 Sealant Type: Nonhardening butyl sealant. 5 Standards: ASTM C91 Q (butyl). 6 General. Joints shall be tooled to prevent voids. D Interior of Door Jambs and Heads, Window frames, Interior joints not listed elsewhere• 1 Quality Standard Product: a. "Chem -Calk 600 Bostik Construction Products Division. b. AC 20 Pecora Corporation. c. 'Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Division, Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc. d. 'Tremco Acrylic Latex 834 Tremco Inc. e. Others as approved by addenda. 2. Standards: Manufacturer's standard, one part, nonsag, mildew- resistant, acrylic emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C834 formulated to be paintable. 2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General. Provide sealant backings of material and type which are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible, nongassing plastic foam of closed -cell extruded polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to water and gas; and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Elastomeric Tubing Jomt Fillers 1 Acceptable Manufacturers a. Applied Extrusion Technologies, Inc. b. thers as approved by addenda. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 07900 PAGE 5 of 7 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2. Quality Standard Product: "SOF ROD' closed -cell backed rod by Applied Extrusion Technologies, Inc. 3 General. Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to 26 degrees F Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D Bond Backer Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated as determined form preconstruction joint sealer substrate tests and field tests. B Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in- service performance. C. Masking Tape: Provide nonstaining, nonabsorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints. D Accessory Materials for Firestopping Sealants: Provide forming, joint fillers, packing, and other accessory materials required for installation of firestopping sealant as applicable to installation conditions indicated. 2.6 JOINT FILLERS FOR CONCRETE PAVING A. General. Provide joint fillers of thickness and widths indicated. B Bituminous Fiber Joint Filler Preformed strips of asphalt saturated fiberboard complying with ASTM D1751 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers with installer present for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION JOINT SEALANTS A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements: 1 Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer old joint sealers; oil, grease; waterproofing; water repellents; water surface dirt; and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grindmg, blast cleaning, mechanical abradmg, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 07900 PAGE 6 of 7 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI JOINT SEALANTS 3 Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4 Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers. B Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates at all joints and where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer- substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond. Do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General. Comply with joint sealer manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply B Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standards: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C962 for use of joint sealants as applicable to matenals, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Solvent Release -Curing Sealant Installation Standards: Comply with requirements of ASTM C804 for use of solvent release curing sealants. D Latex Sealant Installation Standards: Comply with requirements of ASTM C790 for use of latex sealants. E. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 1 Penetrations of walls, floors, or ceilings separating areas requiring noise isolation shall be made by providing a sheet metal 18 -gage sleeve covering the entire inside perimeter of a 1 -inch to 1 1/2 -inch oversized hole cut (1/2 inch to 3/4 inch on each side). This sleeve shall be plastered to the wall, ceiling, or floor to ensure an airtight seal. The metal sleeve is not required for poured -in -place concrete, concrete block, or masonry 2. Where ductwork or pipmg penetrates double walls or acoustically isolated ceilings, separate sleeves shall be fabricated for each side of the wall or floor /ceiling assembly to prevent a direct connection across the air space by use of a single sleeve. 3 The penetration gap between the penetrating duct or pipe and the sleeve shall be sealed airtight with acoustical sealant. The gap may be partially filled with fiberglass, thermafiber or backer rods prior to caulking which will minimize amount of caulk required for a good, airtight seal. In fire -rated assemblies, seal with firestop sealant or firestop expanding foam. F Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1 Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 07900 PAGE 7 of 7 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with Division 1 Requirements. END OF SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint fillers, compression seals, or back of joints where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure. G Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability H. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: 1 Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinnmg or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants form surface adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer 2. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 6A in ASTM C962, unless otherwise indicated. 3 Provide flush joint configuration per Figure 6B in ASTM C962, at interior concrete floors. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PARTI GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS SECTION 08110 PAGE 1 of 7 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1 Steel door and relite frames 2. Sound deadening/grouting of steel door frames B. Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Division 8, Wood Doors 2. Division 8, Finish Hardware 3 Division 8, Glazing 4 Division 9 Painting. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General. Comply with Section 01300 Submittals. B. Product Data. Submit manufacturer's technical data substantiating that products comply with requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames, including the following: 1 Details of construction, joints, and connections. 2. Details of each frame type, including anchorage. 3 Elevations of door design types. 4 Conditions at openings, including coordination with glass and glazing requirements. 5 Location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements. 6. Schedule, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those in contract documents. 7 Methods of construction for oversized frames. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Comply with Section 01400 Quality Control. B. Standard: ANSI/SDI 100 modified by requirements in this Section. C. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1 Test Pressure: Positive pressure testing. 2. Temperature -Rise Rating: Provide doors that have a temperature -rise rating of 450 deg F maximum m 30 minutes of fire exposure at the following locations: a. Stair Enclosures b Exit Enclosures MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 08110 PAGE 2 of 7 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES c. Horizontal Exits 3 S- Label. Provide smoke -tight tested and labeled doors and frames. 4 Provide units bearing a UL label or other acceptable label by the Permit Authority indicating compliance with fire test duration requirements. D Fire -Rated Window Assemblies. Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 1 Test Pressure: Positive pressure testing. 2. Provide units bearing a UL label indicating compliance with fire test duration requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01610 Delivery Storage, and Handling. B Deliver products of this section in cartons or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory- finished doors. C Inspect products upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. D Store products at building site under cover Place on minimum 4- inch -high wood blocking. Avoid use of nonvented plastic or canvas shelters which could create a humidity chamber If cardboard wrapper becomes wet, remove carton immediately 1 Provide 1/4 -inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. 2. Store hollow metal on raised platforms in vertical positions with blocking between units. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best installation per industry standards. B Mamtain 70 degrees F where doors are stored or installed. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Section 01310 Progress Schedule. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Comply with Section 01745 Warranty Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1 The Ceco Corporation 2. Kewanee Corporation 3 Mesker Door Company 4 Pioneer Industries Division/CORE Industnes, Inc 5 Republic Builders Products /Subsidiary of Republic Steel 6 Steelcraft Manufacturing Company/Masco Industries MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 7 Stiles Custom Hollow Metal 8. Cumes Company 9 North Central Supply Inc. 10 Titan Metal Products, Inc. 11 Grand Metals, Portland, Oregon 2.2 MATERIALS SECTION 08110 PAGE 3 of 7 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Hot Rolled Steel Sheets and Stnp• Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled, oiled, and complying with ASTM A569 and ASTM A568 B Cold- Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel complying with ASTM A366 and ASTM A568, exposed, matte fmish, oiled. C. Galvamzed Steel Sheets: Zinc- coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality complying with ASTM A526, with 1.25 -ounce commercial zinc coating, mill phosphatized, complying with ASTM A525 D Supports and Anchors: Fabncated of not less than 18 -gage galvanized sheet steel. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Hot -dip galvanize items to be built into extenor walls, complying with ASTM A153 Class C or D as applicable. F Shop- and Field- Applied Paint 1 Shop Applied Primer Rust inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drymg or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. 2. Finish. Field painted or shop painted at contractor's option with finish paint system scheduled. 23 FABRICATION A. General 1 Fabricate steel units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory- assembled before shipment in order to ensure proper assembly at project site. Field splices shall be welded bolting not acceptable. Weld exposed joints continuously grind, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. Metallic filler to conceal manufacturing defects is not acceptable. 2. Fabricate steel units so all exposed and primed surfaces are smooth to touch and suitable for finish painting. 3 Fabricate exposed faces of doors from only cold rolled steel. 4 Fabricate frames from either cold rolled or hot rolled steel (at fabricator's option). 5 Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, and edge channels from either cold rolled or hot rolled steel (at fabricator's option). 6 Provide countersunk, flat Phillips -head screws and bolts for locations requiring exposed fasteners. B. Finish Hardware 1 Prepare hollow metal units to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling, and tappmg in accordance with final fmish hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.4 STEEL FRAMES A. General. SECTION 08110 PAGE 4 of 7 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 2. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames as applicable. 3 For surface applied closers, provide space, remforcing and provisions for fastening m top rail of doors or head of frames as applicable. 4 Locate finish hardware per Section 08710 Finish Hardware, and in details, show on final shop drawings. 5 Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface- applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface- applied finish hardware may be done at project site. 6 Provide access ways for wiring required by security devices, electrical strike, activated by card readers and other devices indicated. C lop Painting Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign matenals before application of paint. 2. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface smooth and ready to receive finish paint. 1 Provide steel frames for door transom, sidelight, and relate openings indicated, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. 1 Interior Frames: minimum 16 -gage primed steel 2. Exterior Frames: minimum 14 -gage galvanized steel. 3 Stainless -steel Frames: 0.0625 -mch- thick, stainless -steel sheets with No. 4 fmish 3 Door opening over 4 feet wide: increase metal thickness two standard gauges. 4 Fabricate frames of full- welded unit construction, with corners mitered, reinforced, continuously welded full depth and width of frame. Knock -down frames are not acceptable. B. Plaster Guards: Provide 26 -gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior openings. C. Smoke Gasketing: Prepare all door frames to receive smoke gasketing as scheduled. D Rubber Door Silencers 1 Drill stops to receive three silencers on single -door frames and four silencers on double door frames. 2. Install plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction. 3 Omit where continuous seals are specified in Section 08710 Finish Hardware. E. Finish Hardware Reinforcement: Reinforce frames for required fmish hardware as follows: 1 Hinges: Steel plate 3/16 inch thick by 1 1/2 inch wide by 6 inches longer than hinge, secured by not less than six spot welds. 2. Strike Plate Clips: Steel plate 3/16 inch thick by 1 1/2 inch wide by 4 inches long. 3 Surface Applied Closers: 12 -gage steel sheet secured with not less than six spot welds. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 08110 PAGE 5 of 7 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 4 Concealed Closers: Removable steel access plate, 12 -gage internal reinforcement of size and shape required and enclosing housing to keep closer pocket free of mortar or other materials. Reinforcement for other moving items to meet SDI 107 1978 F Mullions and Transom Bars 1 Provide closed or tubular mullions and transom bars where indicated. 2. Fasten mullions and transom bars at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 3 Reinforce joints between frame members with concealed clip angles or sleeves same metal and thickness as frame. 4 Provide false head member to receive lower ceiling where frames extend to finish ceilings of different heights. 5 Where installed in masonry leave vertical mullions in frames open at the top so they can be filled with grout. G Wall Anchors I General. Furnish wall anchors as required to secure frames to adjacent construction formed of not less than 18 -gage galvanized steel. 2. Metal Stud Partitions: Insert type with notched clip to engage metal stud, welded to back of frames. Provide at least four anchors for each jamb for frames up to 7 feet 6 inches in height, five anchors up to 8 -foot jamb height, one additional anchor for each 24 inches or fraction thereof over 8 -foot height. 4 In -place Concrete or Masonry Anchor frame jambs with minimum 3/8 -inch concealed bolts into expansion shields or inserts at 6 inches from top and bottom and 26 inches on center unless otherwise shown. Reinforce frames at anchor locations and fully grout. Apply removable stop to cover anchor bolts unless otherwise indicated. H. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion which extends to floor formed of not less than 16 -gage galvanized steel sheet as follows: 1 Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip type anchors with two holes per clip anchor to receive fasteners, welded to bottom of jambs and mullions. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable type with extension clips. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. I. Head Anchors: Provide two anchors at head of frames exceeding 42 inches wide for frames mounted in steel stud walls. J Structural Reinforcing Members 1 Provide structural reinforcing members as a part of frame assembly where indicated or required at mullions, transoms, or other locations which are to be built into frame. 2. Provide reinforcing of head and muntin members at openings greater than 48- inches. 3 Provide reinforcing of jamb members at units containing more than two pairs of doors. K. Head Reinforcing: For frames over 4 feet wide, provide two continuous steel angles not less than 2 inches by 2 inches by 12 gage and width of opemng, welded to back of frame at head, unless otherwise shown. L. Spreader Bars: Provide two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames; tack welded to jambs and mullions. M. Sound Deadening: 1 Interior Door Frames: Grout solid with gypsum plaster 2. Exterior door frames or frames in masonry walls; grout solid with mortar MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Provide stops and moldings around solid, glazed, and louvered panels in hollow metal units and in frames to receive doors where indicated. B Form fixed stops and moldings integral with frame, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. Provide fixed stops on inside of hollow metal units exposed to exterior and on corridor side of interior units, unless otherwise indicated. C Provide removable stops and molds at other locations formed of not less than 20 -gage steel sheets extenor, galvanized, and interior cold rolled. Secure with machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 12 inches on center Form corners with butted hairline joints. D Coordinate width of rabbet between fixed and removable stops with type of glass or panel and type of installation indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION SECTION 08110 PAGE 6 of 7 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Determine that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer Starting of the work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates and connecting work to enable the best mstallation per industry standards of the work of this section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General B. Setting Masonry Anchorage Devices 1 Provide masonry anchorage devices where required for securing hollow metal frames to in -place concrete or masonry construction. 2. Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location in accordance with instructions. Leave drilled holes rough, not reamed, and free from dust and debris. 3 Floor anchors may be set with powder actuated fastener instead of masonry anchorage devices and machine screws if so indicated on fmal shop drawings. C. Frames 1 Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's data and as specified herein. Comply with detailed installation requirements of fmal shop drawings. 2. Locate as indicated and in proper relation to other work. 3 If conflict with other work occurs, report same to Architect before proceeding. 4 Set perfectly plumb; brace as necessary to maintain alignment. 5 Secure each angle knee to floor with two rigid anchors. 6. Sound deaden frames with vermiculite plaster Grout fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA 80 and IBC. 1 Comply with provisions of SDI 105 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls, ceilings or soffits. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 08110 PAGE 7 of 7 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and surfaces smooth and undamaged. 3 Provide at least three wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels gage base anchors. 4 At m -place concrete construction, set frames and secure to adjacent machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. 5 At in -place masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. 6. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA 80 spreaders, leaving and minimum 18- construction with construction with 7 In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws. D Bracing Dunng Grouting of Frames: Install temporary 3/4 -inch tight fitting plywood sheet in rabbet for door so that alignment is not disturbed dunng grouting. Remove plywood sheet after grouting is completed. E. Door Installation 1 Fit steel doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSUSDI 100 2. Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA 80 3 Install as late as practicable without jeopardizing construction schedule. F Adjustment 1 Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup coat of compatible air- drying primer 2. Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors. 3 Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel items undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 01400 Quality Control. B. Provide experienced supervision of all elements of the work of this section. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and Section 01710 Final Cleaning. B. Stainless steel. Apply stainless steel cleaner and polish. Remove defects in fmish by hand rubbing with appropriate compound to match specified finish. Re -apply cleaner and polish. 1 Replace items that cannot be refinished to match and blend with specified finish. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Provide metal doors and frames indicated in Door Opening Schedule and in Drawings. END OF SECTION 08110 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Section includes: 1 Solid -core flush wood doors with HPDL faces B Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Division 8, Steel Doors and Frames 2. Division 8 Door Hardware 3 Division 8 Vision panel glazing 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. For each type of wood door including details of core and edge construction, and trim for openings, and finish. 1 Written statement indicating compliance with requirements in this Section. State instances where product exceeds or vanes from this Specification. B Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating the following: 1 Location and size of each door using same reference numbers corresponding to door numbers found in documents. 2. Elevation of each kind of door 3 Details of construction 4 Location and extent of hardware blocking SECTION 08210 PAGE 1 of 5 WOOD DOORS C Samples: Submit samples for door construction. Include plastic laminate, and transparent stained wood veneer faces, edges, and core. Minimum size 12 inches by 12 inches. Include samples to demonstrate construction and finish of each fire resistive labeled door type. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General. Comply with Section 01400 Quality Control. B. Standards: AWI quality standards Section 1300 Section 1400 and Section 1500 and this section. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01610 Delivery Storage, and Handling. B Protect wood and plastic doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Comply with requirements of WDMA and AWI. Package doors at factory pnor to shipping, individually wrapped. C. Identify each door with individual opening numbers using temporary removable, or concealed markings. Correlate door identification with designation system used on shop drawings. D Fire -Rated Doors: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for precautions required to prevent moisture deterioration of fire- retardant salts. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best installation. Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 17 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Section 01310 Progress Schedule. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General. Comply with Section 01745 Warranty Procedures. B Door Manufacturer's Warranty 1 Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form signed by manufacturer installer and Contractor agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which warp (bow cup, or twist), which show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or which do not conform to tolerance limitations of specified quality standards. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the contract documents. 2. Include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging. 3 Warranty shall be in effect during the life of installation of solid core flush and fire -rated interior doors after date of substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Products that comply with requirements in this Section from one of the following: 1 Algoma Hardwoods 2. Eggers Industries 3 Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 4 Oshkosh Door Manufacturing 5 Lynden Door Inc. 6. Others as approved by addenda 2.2 MATERIALS A. Comply with reference standard and grade and the following: B. Particleboard Core: ANSI 208 1 grade LD -2 C Adhesive: Type I D HPDL. NEMA LD 3 grade and color as follows: 1 Grade: Thick Grade, 0 125 inches thick (formerly SP 125) 2. Color and Pattern: As scheduled on drawings. SOLID -CORE PLASTIC LAMINATE -FACED DOOR SECTION 08210 PAGE 2 of 5 WOOD DOORS A. Quality Standard Product: `DPC 1 as manufactured by Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 08210 PAGE 3 of 5 WOOD DOORS B Construction: Core: Solid wood block wood particle board, or mineral core with wood lock blocks as required by door manufacturer to comply with the specified warranty period. C Description. 1 Application: Interior door 2. Grade: Premium, AWI Grade I, unless otherwise noted. 3 Thickness: 1 3/4 inches, unless indicated otherwise 4 Construction 5 -ply or 7 -ply 5 Core: Solid wood block wood particleboard or mineral with wood lock blocks as required by door manufacturer to comply with the specified warranty period. 6. Face: Plastic laminate. a. PL 1 Nevamar, color Grand Isle Maple W8371T 7 Vertical Edge Construction: 2 -ply outer ply not less than 3/8 mch thick, stained to match plastic laminate face color E. Fire Doors and Smoke Doors: 1 Construction as required to comply with fire resistive rating indicated. 2. Smoke seal at meeting edges, reference hardware schedule. 2.3 VISION PANELS A. Design. Flush wood equal to Marshfield `W -6' 1 20- Minute rated with concealed metal clips 2. 45- to 90- Minute rated: similar appearance, wood laminated metal, design approved for listmg and label. B Finish and Color To match door panel finish. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Press Method. Hot press B Cut, trim, and seal openings in doors at the factory 1 Bevel vertical edges. C. Meeting edges of fire rated doors: Provide metal edge and intumescent seal, semi- concealed in door edge, complying with listing and labeling requirements. D Comply with the tolerance requirements of NWWDA for prefitting machine doors for all hardware requiring cutting of doors and with hardware templates and other essential information required to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware. E. Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in the factory F Provide access ways for low voltage wiring for security and control hardware devices. 2.5 SHOP FINISH A. General. Prefmish all wood doors at the door factory Comply with recommendations of AWI for factory- fmishing of doors, mcluding final sanding with No. 6/0 finish paper immediately before the first application of fmishmg matenals. B Seal top and bottom edges. Seal bores and cuts for hardware. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Determine that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer Starting of the work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. B Require installer to examine door frames after their installation, and doors pnor to their hanging, for the following purposes: 1 To verify that frames comply with mdicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. To verify that door jambs are free of defects. C Obtain mstaller's written report listing conditions detrimental to compliance with requirements of this section. 3.2 PREPARATION 3 See Section 08710 Finish Hardware, for finish hardware installation. SECTION 08210 PAGE 4 of 5 WOOD DOORS A. Prepare substrates and connecting work to enable the best installation per industry standards of the work of this section. 33 INSTALLATION A. General 1 Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hangmg. 2. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and referenced standards. B. Prefit Doors. Fit to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously worked at factory as required for fit and uniform clearance at each edge. C For Non -Fire -Rated Doors: Provide clearances of 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, 1/8 inch at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering, except glue threshold is shown or scheduled, 3/8 inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. D Fire -Rated Doors: Install in correspondmg fire -rated frames in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 80 Provide clearances complying with the limitations of the authority having jurisdiction. E. Adjustments 1 Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely as directed by the Architect. 2. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation, as directed by the Architect. 3 Replace warped or delaminating doors. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 01400 Quality Control. B Provide experienced supervision of all elements of the work of this section. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION SECTION 08210 PAGE 5 of 5 WOOD DOORS A. Comply with Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and Section 01710 Final Cleaning. B Institute protective measures as recommended and accepted by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or detenoration at time of substantial completion. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Provide wood doors throughout at interior door openings, except where otherwise indicated. B Coordinate the door schedules with the partition classifications to confirm rating requirements. Where conflict may occur provide B -60 rating. C Refer to project drawings and schedules, including but not limited to the floor plans and architectural details and schedules. END OF SECTION 08210 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work under this section includes the complete finish hardware requirements for the project. Quantities listed are for the Contractor's convenience only and are not guaranteed. Items not specifically mentioned, but necessary to complete the work shall be furnished, matching the items specified in quality and finish. B. Related Sections: 1 Division 8, Steel Doors and Frames 2. Division 8, Wood Plastic Laminated Doors 3 Electrical Division 16 SECTION 08710 PAGE 1 FINISH HARDWARE C. Electronic Hardware Coordination. Coordinate Work of this Section with the requirements of systems specified under Division 16, as required to provide materials, fabrication, and installation for complete and operating system meeting the operational requirements stated. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Standards: 1 ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities' 2. ANSIBHMA A156.18 2000 Matenals and Finishes 3 ICC /ANSI A117 1 1998 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 4 NFPA 80 1999 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows 5 NFPA 252 1995 Standard of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 6. Underwriters Laboratories Building Materials Directory 7 Underwriters Laboratories Test Standard UL 10C -98 Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies B. Codes: 1 Chapter 51 50 WAC Washington State Building Code 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General Requirements: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals. B Product Data. Submit Six (6) copies of manufacturer's data for each item of finish hardware C. Hardware Schedule: Submit Six (6) copies of a detailed Finish Hardware Schedule. 1 The submitted Finish Hardware Schedule shall indicate the complete designation of every item required for each door or opening. 2. Furnish cover sheet listing title of project as shown on the Contract Documents, name, address, phone and fax numbers of Owner Architect, Contractor and Supplier, name of Certified Hardware Consultant, and date of submittal. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 Sgl. Door #205A Vestibule 201 to Custodial 205 HW 3 3 -0 x 7 -O x 1 3/4' x 20 Minute x Type A SECTION 08710 PAGE 2 FINISH HARDWARE 3 List each opening individually under separate headings in the same order as the door schedule. Do not group like or similar doors under a single heading. Do not continue headings on separate pages. 4 Each heading shall indicate opening location, handing, degree of opening, door size, type, fire rating, and Door and Frame material. 5 Indicate product manufacturer and incorporate cross- reference to symbols used in Article 2.15 Hardware Schedule. 6. Include an index indicating door number heading, page number and locking function of each opening 7 A cross reference for abbreviations or symbols used shall be included. 8 Schedules in coded or horizontal format are unacceptable. 9 Submittals not conforming to these requirements will be returned without review for re- submittal. Following is an example of the required format: RH 180° SC WD x HMF 3 Each Butts MC TA2714 US26D (652) 4.5 x 4.5 x 1 /2MS 1 Lockset SC D94TD Rho 626 x 2 3/4' B.S. x 10 -025 Stk. 1 Interchangeable Core KA 6440 US26D 1 Door Closer SA EN351 -O x TB 1 Kick Plate TI B4EKP 10 x 34.5 US32D x B4E x CTSK 1 Wall Stop TR 1270CX -CP US26D (626) 1 Set Smoke Gasket PE S88D 17' per Set D Processing: Hardware schedules will not be reviewed by the Architect until they have been reviewed and approved by Contractor E. Modifications: The Finish Hardware Submittal shall be kept current throughout the project duration. Revisions incorporated shall be submitted in accordance with the above requirements. Submit only cover sheet and revised pages. Clearly identify changes from previous submittal content. F Samples: If requested by the Architect, submit one (1) sample of each exposed hardware category finished as required, and tagged with full description for coordination with the hardware schedule. Samples will be reviewed, by the Architect, for design and finish only compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor Units which are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal procedures may be used on the project. G Color Samples: Submit Six (6) set of color charts and physical samples of each product requiring color selection. H. Key Schedule: Upon completion of the Key meeting indicated under Paragraph 2.14 C. submit Four (4) copies of a key schedule indicating the complete project key system for approval. I. Wiring Diagrams: Submit Six (6) copies of electronic hardware system riser and terminal -to- terminal wiring diagrams for each Electronic Hardware application, cross referenced to the Finish Hardware Submittal and Door Schedule. Include voltage requirements along with product data and installation instructions. Indicate connection points to equipment provided under Division 16. J Operations and Maintenance Data. 1 Submittals: Submit Maintenance and Operations Manuals under provisions of Section 01700 Project Close Out MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 08710 PAGE 3 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER FINISH HARDWARE TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2. Content: Manuals shall contain fmal copy of the Finish Hardware Submittal, Product Data, Templates, Key Schedule, Installation and Maintenance Instructions, and Winng Diagrams. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Fimsh hardware shall be supplied by a recognized builders' hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the same area as the project for a period of not less than five (5) years. They shall be a factory direct, authorized distributor of the Locksets and Door Closers. The supplier's organization shall include an Architectural Hardware Consultant, certified by the Door and Hardware Institute, who is available during the course of the work to meet with the Owner Architect or Contractor for project hardware consultation. B Approved Suppliers: The below listed suppliers are approved for use on this project. Alternative suppliers must be pre- approved by procedure for `substitutions' described in Section 01600 Product Substitutions. Other proposed suppliers must submit a resume of similar completed projects for prior approval Benson Industries Builders Hardware Supply Co. Inc. Contract Hardware, Inc. Evergreen Construction Specialties Krause Scheelar Washington Architectural Hardware Tacoma, WA Seattle, WA Seattle, WA Auburn, WA Redmond, WA Tacoma, WA (253) 474 -5356 (206) 281 3700 (206) 298 -4770 (253) 395-9933 (425) 883 -1243 (253) 471 9150 C. Source: Obtain each kind of Hardware (Butts, Locksets, Door Closers, etc.) from only one manufacturer D Installer Finish hardware shall be installed only by experienced tradesmen in compliance with trade union jurisdictions, either at the door and frame fabrication plant or at the project site. E. Automatic Operators: 1 Automatic Operator Installer The Operators and Accessories shall be installed by factory authorized and trained personnel, certified by Amencan Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM). 2. Authorized Installers: The below listed installers are approved for use on this project. Alternative installers must be pre- approved by procedure for `substitutions' described in Section 01631 Approval for Substitutions and Product Options. Other proposed installers must submit a resume of similar successfully completed projects for prior approval: Automatic Entries, Inc. Lynnwood, WA (425) 745 -3860 3 Certificates: Prior to substantial completion, provide certification from the local representative of the Automatic Operators that Operator applications are installed in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Submit certification in writing to the Owner in care of the Architect. F Templates: Furnish hardware templates for each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the shop drawings of such other work to confirm that provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware. G. Regulatory Requirements: 1 Code Compliance: Finish hardware shall comply with applicable local and state current building codes. 2. Finish hardware shall meet the requirements of ADAAG -1992, and ICC /ANSI A117 1 1998, Accessible and Usable Buildmg and Facilities. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 08710 PAGE 4 FINISH HARDWARE 3 Product Compliance: Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by recognized testing agency for the types and sizes of doors required, and which complies with the requirements of the door and door frame labels. Provide Door Closers, Automatic self latching bolts, coordmators, gasketing, and astragals if required to conform to label requirements. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Packagmg: Each item or package is to be separately tagged with identification related to the fmal hardware schedule. Basic installation instructions shall be included in the packages. B Storage: Provide a locked room at the jobsite for the storage of the hardware. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Coverage: Finish hardware shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship and operation for a period of one (1) year from substantial completion, backed by a factory guarantee of the hardware manufacturer The following products shall be guaranteed for periods beyond One (1) Year 1 Door Closers: Ten (10) Years. 2. Exit Devices: Three (3) Years. 1.8 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish the following extra materials, which shall be delivered directly to the Owner prior to substantial completion, m accordance with Section 01770 Close -Out Procedures. 1 Provide One (1) Set of Special Tools required for installation and adjustment. 2. Extra Hardware: Quantity Two (2) Two (2) PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Manufacturers: Products may be furnished by the manufacturers listed under As Specified' below or equivalent products of type, grade, design, and function, from manufacturers listed under Acceptable Substitutions' Requests for products not listed must be made in accordance with Section 01600, Product Substitutions. Product Butts Continuous Hinges Locksets Cylinders Exit Devices Electric Exit Device and Lockset Modifications Door Closers Automatic Operators Wall Plate Actuators Digital Key Pad Locks Kick Mop Plates Wall and Floor Stops Description Locksets Door Closers Factory Number D94LD 4041 -EDA As Specified McKinney (MC) Markar (MA) Schlage (SA) Kabba (KA) Sargent (SA) Architectural Control Systems (ACSI) LCN (LCN) Horton (HO) MS Sedco (MS) Alarm Lock (AL) Tice (TI) Trimco (TR) Acceptable Substitutions Bommer Hager McKinney None None None None None None Larco, Camden None Rockwood, Trimco Rockwood MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI Product Electro Magnetic Door Release Overhead Stop and Holders Weatherstrip Thresholds Door Position Switches 2.2 HARDWARE MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide fasteners for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips head fasteners, countersunk oval, flat head, or undercut head as appropriate for material to be installed. Provide Door Closers, Exit Devices, and Surface Applied Overhead Stops applied to Wood Composite or Mineral Core Doors with Sex Bolts sized to the Thickness of the Door B. Compatibility Provide fasteners which are compatible with both unit fastened and substrate, and which will not cause corrosion or deterioration of hardware, base material, or fastener 2.3 HARDWARE FINISHES A. General: Unless specifically indicated otherwise, provide architectural hardware in the following fmishes. 1 Finish in general shall be: US26D Satin Chrome Plated, except: 2. Locksets, Exit Devices, Push Plates, Door Pulls, Overhead Stops, Continuous and Exterior Hinges: US32D Satin Stainless Steel 3 Door Closers: 689 /Sprayed Aluminum 4 Kick Plates: US32D Satin Stainless Steel. 5 Smoke Gasketing: As Selected. 6. Threshold, Weatherstrip Door Bottoms. As listed 2.4 BUTTS AND CONTINUOUS HINGES As Specified Rixson (RI) Glynn- Johnson (GJ) Pemko (PE) Sentrol (SE) B Sizes: 1 1 3/4 Exterior Vestibule Doors: 5 x 4 -1/2' 2. 1 3/4 Intenor Doors up to and including 36' 4 -1/2 x 4 -1/2' 3 1 3/4" Interior Doors over 36' 5 x 4 -1/2' SECTION 08710 PAGE 5 FINISH HARDWARE Acceptable Substitutions As Approved Rixson National Guard, Reese None A. Quantity (per Leaf): 1 Door openings up to 60' 2 each 2. Door opemngs 60 to 90' 3 each 3 Doors over 90' Furnish one (1) additional for each 30" increment or fraction thereof. C. Width: Width of Hinges shall be as require to clear projecting trim or other conditions to allow maximum degree of opening D Non Standard Sizes. For unusual size or weight doors, furnish type, recommended by the hinge manufacturer E. Pins: Hinges shall have non removable pins (NRP Set Screw in Barrel) F Tips: Hinges shall have Flat Button Tips. 2.5 LOCKSETS AND CYLINDERS A. Lock Design. Furnish Lever Handle Locksets and Latchsets in Rhodes Design. size and quantity MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Backset: 2 3/4 SECTION 08710 PAGE 6 FINISH HARDWARE C Ratings: Locksets and Latchsets shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratories for A label and lesser class doors. D Knurling: Provide Knurled Lever where Lock Symbol is suffixed with `K' in the Hardware Schedule. E. Strikes: Provide Curved Lip Strikes with adequate projection to protect door trim. Provide flat, flush lip strikes for pairs of doors with overlapping Astragals. F Strike Boxes. Provide manufacturers standard wrought or plastic strike boxes. G Cylinders and Cam Types. Provide appropriate cylinder type, length, and cam type to operate specified Locksets, Exit Devices, and Key Switches. H. Coordinate Electric Lock and Electric Strike locations, rough -in, and wiring requirements with Electrical sub contractor and Owners Security Contractor 2.6 EXIT DEVICES A. Wood Doors: Furnish Sex Nuts and Bolts for wood composite and mineral core Door applications. B Rated Openings: Provide UL listed Fire Exit Devices at rated openings. C Sizes: Provide Exit Devices sized in accordance with the manufacturer manufacturers recommendations. D Vision Frames: Provide Glass Bead Kits where interference with Vision Frames occurs. E. Lever Handles: Lever Handle Trim shall design listed under 2.5 A. Locksets F Coordinate Electrified Exit Device locations, rough -in, and wiring requirements with Electrical sub contractor and Owners Security Contractor 2.7 DOOR CLOSERS A. Drop Plates: Furnish drop plates where doors have insufficient height top rails, or where Regular Arm Door Closers are used m conjunction with Concealed Overhead Stops. B. Fluid: Furnish cold weather fluid, at exterior vestibule doors. Furnish special non flammable fluid at fire rated openings m conformance with UL Test Standard 10C C. Special Mounting: Provide special closer mounting as required where interference with weatherstrip or sound seal occurs. D Spacer Blocks: Furmsh Spacer Blocks and/or shoe supports where frame stop does not provide for adequate support for the parallel arm soffit shoe. E. Wood Doors: Furnish Shoulder Through Bolts for Wood Doors. 2.8 AUTOMATIC OPERATORS AND ACCESSORIES A. General. Locate Wall Plate Actuators as noted in the Architectural Drawings or as directed by Architect. B Wiring: System Wiring shall be concealed in the Wall and Door Frame. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit Wiring Diagrams in accordance with paragraph 1 4.I. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI D Coordination: Coordinate Wiring requirements with Electncal Contractor 2.9 KICK, MOP AND ARMOR PLATES D Height: Kick Plates. 10' Mop Plates: 6' Armor Plates: 34' SECTION 08710 PAGE 7 FINISH HARDWARE E. Installer Operators are to be installed by a Factory Authorized Contractor General Contractor to include installation cost in base bid. A. General. Kick Plates shall be applied to the Push Side of the Door Mop Plate applied to the Pull Side. B Fasteners: Provide stainless steel Phillips oval/undercut head, full tread type sheet meal screws for fastening not more than 5 inches on center C Material. Plates shall be 050 304 Stainless Steel, beveled four edges (B4E) with Satin (#4) finish. E. Width: Plates shall be furnished with width as required to provide 1/4 clearance at sides of doors, frame stops, and stop applied seals. 2.10 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Size: Furnish Overhead Stop and Holders sized as recommended by the manufacturer B Special Applications: Furnish Overhead Stop and Holders with special shims, brackets, or special template mounting where required. C. Coordination: Coordinate location, rough -in, and voltage requirements for Magnetic Holders with Electrical Contractor D Site Conditions: Where wall stops are not applicable, furnish floor stops 1215CKU Series, or Overhead Stops if required. 2.11 THRESHOLDS A. Fasteners: Furnish Thresholds with 1/4 20 x 2' Zinc Plated Flat Head Sleeve Anchors. 2.12 WEATHERSTRIP AND SMOKE GASKETINC A. General. Furnish weatherstrip and gaskets for complete perimeter of opening, including mullions, and astragals. 2.13 DOOR SILENCERS A. General. Furnish Rubber Door Silencers for all openings. 1 Quantity Furnish three (3) for each single door frame, and four (4) for each pair of door frames. 2. Type: 1229A 2.14 KEYING A. Key operated products specified under this Section shall be keyed to the existing Grand Master Key system for Olympic Medical Center B Provide temporary brass construction cylinders and keys for Locksets and Cylinders during the construction period. Plastic Construction cylinders are unacceptable. C The Finish Hardware Supplier shall meet with the Owner to prepare the permanent keying schedule. Submit key schedule for approval in accordance with 1 4 H. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI D Permanent change keys, and master keys, prepared according to the approved keying schedule, shall be transmitted directly to the Owner prior to substantial completion. The General Contractor shall replace the construction cylinders with the permanent cores under the supervision of the Owner's authorized representative. Demonstrate proper keying and lock operation. Temporary cylinders shall be returned to the Finish Hardware Supplier E. Transmittal. Permanent keys shall be sent direct from the lock manufacturer via registered mail, return receipt requested, to the Owner F Key Transcript: Provide a key transcript list of cylinders, including 25% additional change combinations. G Stamping: Stamp keys `Do not Duplicate' and with system number and sub number designations as directed. H. Key Quantities: Furnish the following Key Quantities: Six (6) Buildmg Grand Master Keys Six (6) Master Keys per Set Four (4) change keys per Lockset or Cylinder Six (6) Construction Keys 2.15 HARDWARE SCHEDULE Door #163 3 Each Butts 1 Key Pad Lock 1 Lock Cylinder 1 Wall Stop 1 Silencers PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.2 INSTALLATION McKinney Alarm Lock KABA Trimco Trimco HW 1 SECTION 08710 PAGE 8 FINISH HARDWARE TA2714 652 4 -1/2 x 4 -1/2' DL2700 -IC -S US26D Interchangeable Core US26D 1270CX 626 1229A A. Examination. Examine Doors, Frames, and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of the Finish Hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected B Blocking: Provide solid blocking for wall stops, wall plate actuators, and magnetic holders. C. Fasteners. Check conditions and use fastening devices as needed to securely anchor hardware as per manufacturer's published templates. Self- tapping sheet metal screws are not acceptable. Door Closers, Exit Devices, and Surface mounted Overhead Stops on wood doors shall be through- bolted. A. Mounting Heights: Mount units at heights as recommended in 'Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (2001)" by Doors and Hardware Institute, except as indicated below Products not specifically covered shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer templates and instructions. 1 Hinges: a. Top Hinge: 7 1/4' Top of frame rabbet to centerline of hinge. b Bottom Hinge: 12 1/4' Bottom of Frame to centerline of hinge MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI c. Intermediate Hinges. centered, equal spacing between top and bottom hinges. 2. Lock Strikes: 40' bottom of frame to centerline of Strike. 3 Deadlocks: 48' bottom of frame to centerline of Strike. 4 Push and Pull Plates: 42' bottom of frame to centerline of plate. 5 Automatic Operator Wall Plate Actuators: 36' from fuiish floor to centerline of switch. 6. Key Switches: 48' from finish floor to centerline of switch. B Installation: Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 Cutting and Fitting: Wherever cutting and fitting are required to install hardware surfaces which will be painted or finished at a later time, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place. After completion of the finishes, re- install each item. 2. Door and Frame Finishes: Do not install surface- mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. 3 Fire Rated Openings: Install to comply with NFPA 80 4 Door shall swing to the maximum degree that project conditions will allow The swings indicated on the floor plan are intended to depict direction and do not indicate full degree of opening. 5 Door Closers: Locate to provide maximum degree of opening that project conditions will allow Door Closer shall not be used to stop the door except for models equipped with integral stop on the arm. 6 Exit Devices: Trim Exit Devices to provide 1 1/2' clearance between Exit Device end cap and adjacent frame stops, and stop applied weatherstrip where applicable. 7 Overhead Stops: Furnish Overhead Stop and Holders with maximum degree of opening that project conditions will allow 8. Wall Stops: Locate Wall Stops intended for use with Lever Handle Locksets and Exit Devices at the centerline of the Spindle or Pull. 9 Floor Stops: Locate Floors Stops at maximum degree of opening that project conditions will allow Do not locate Floor Stops where they create a hazardous condition. Stops should be located no more than 1/3 Door width from the latch edge of the Door 10 Thresholds: Set Exterior Thresholds in a bed of butyl rubber sealant in conformance with Division 7 requirements. Remove excess sealant. Caulk all edges and joints to exclude moisture 12. Weatherstrip Mount and adjust rigid jamb Weatherstrip prior to mounting Parallel Ann Door Closers. Weatherstrip shall be installed to provide a continuous seal at head and jambs. Do not notch Weatherstrip for Door Closer shoe. Provide Parallel Arm 5th hole spacer of increased thickness to allow for revised location. 13 Mount Astragals on the pull side of active leaf our out swinging applications, inactive leaf for in- swinging. 14 Smoke Gasket SECTION 08710 PAGE 9 FINISH HARDWARE a. Completely clean frame and apply gasket in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Mount Gasket to stop face of Strike Jambs and Headers, Door rabbet of hinge jamb If the Gasket is required to be mounted on the door rabbet of the Strike Jambs due to Fire labeling requirements, provide Silencers. C. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to insure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.3 FINAL ADJUSTMENT END OF SECTION 08710 SECTION 08710 PAGE 10 FINISH HARDWARE A. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one (1) month prior to acceptance or occupancy make a final check and adjustment of hardware items dunng the week prior to acceptance or occupancy Clean and lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilatmg equipment. B Door Closer Adjustment: After mechanical systems have been balanced, adjust Door Closers to comply with following ICC /ANSI A117 1 1998 requirements. 1 Closing Speed: With the door open 70 degrees, the door closer shall be adjusted so that the door will take at least three (3) seconds to move to a point where the leading edge of the door is three inches from latching. 2. Opemng Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling a door open shall be as follows: (these forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices securing the door) a. Fire Doors: The minimum opening force allowable by the appropriate administrative authority b. Exterior Doors: 8.5 lbf. c. Interior Doors: 5 0 lbf. 3 Adjust backcheck to prevent damage to the closer hardware, door and frame, and wall. C. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes. 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 08800 PAGE 1 of 8 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER GLAZING TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide materials, labor equipment, inspection, coordination, and supervision necessary for the complete installation of glazing work as indicated in this specification and the project drawings. B. Section includes: 1 Monolithic glass 2. Tempered glass and laminated glass 3 Glazing accessories C. Related work specified elsewhere that requires glazing in this Section includes: 1 Division 8, Metal relite frames 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B Glass Thicknesses. Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating -glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. D Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaming and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. F Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated -glass standard. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General. Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wmd and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 08800 PAGE 2 of 8 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER GLAZING TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in- service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed Building Code requirements: 1 2003 IBC with Washington State Amendments and additional information in Structural Drawings. C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures actmg on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1 Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12 -inch- square Samples for glass and of 12 inch- long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. 1 Each color of tinted float glass. 2. Each type of laminated glass with interlayer C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawmgs for glazed openings in preparing a schedule fisting glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. D Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. E. Qualification Data. For glazing installers. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in- service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers). B Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single manufacturer for each glass type: clear float glass, coated float glass, laminated glass, and insulating glass. C Source Limitations for Glass Sputter Coated with Solar Control Low -E Coatings: Where solar control low -e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified fabricator program is specified, obtain sputter- coated solar control low -e- coated glass in fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certified by coated -glass manufacturer D Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories. Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. E. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in 'Submittals' Article from a qualified testing agency based on testmg glass products. 1 Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 08800 PAGE 3 of 8 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER GLAZING TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI F Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in 'Submittals' Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36 -month period. 1 Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548 2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 and where applicable, to other standard test methods. G Safety Glazing Products. Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired glass, ANSI Z97 1 1 Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency or manufacturer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. in area, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, and for lites 9 sq. ft. or less in area, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials. H. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defmed in this Section or in referenced standards. 1 GANA Publications: GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB -3001 "Sloped Glazing Guidelines. 3 IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM -3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units." 4 NAAMM's Publication: For silvered mirrored glass, comply with recommendations in NAAMM's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care, Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B For insulating -glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating -glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by laminated -glass manufacturer agreeing to replace laminated -glass units that deteriorate as defmed m "Defuutions" Article, f o.b the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below 1 Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 08800 PAGE 4 of 8 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER GLAZING TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers of Basic Glass: Provide products that comply with requirements from Northwestern Industries, PPG, LOF AFG Guardian, Pilkington, or Viracon. B Named Products. Provide product named. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Glass Thickness: 6 mm unless indicated otherwise B Clear Glass: Annealed float glass, ASTM C 1036 Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3 Class 1 Condition A. C Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3 Condition A or Condition C. D Safety Glass: Clear full tempered glass, listed and labeled. 1 Provide at interior doors and relites that are not fire rated. 2.3 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with other requirements specified and with the following: 1 Product: 3/8' CL H.S 060 rainedge 3/8' CL H.S. as provided by NWI. 2. Interlayer• Polyvinyl butyral or cured resin of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. a. For polyvinyl butyral mterlayers, laminate lites in autoclave with heat plus pressure. b. For cured -resin interlayers, laminate lites with laminated -glass manufacturer's standard cast -in -place and cured transparent -resin Interlayer 3 Laminating Process: Fabncate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets. 2.4 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1 Neoprene, ASTM C 864 2. EPDM, ASTM C 864 3 Silicone, ASTM C 1115 4 Thermoplastic polyolefm rubber ASTM C 1115 5 Any material indicated above. B Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed -cell, integral- skinned gaskets of material indicated below- complying with ASTM C 509 Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1 Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3 Silicone. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 08800 PAGE 5 of 8 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER GLAZING TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 4 Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber 5 Any material indicated above. 2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General. Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1 Compatibility Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' wntten instructions for selecting glazmg sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3 Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1 Dow Corning Corporation, 790 2. Dow Corning Corporation; 791 3 Dow Coming Corporation, 795 4 Dow Corning Corporation, 799 C. Glazing Sealants for Fire- Resistive Glazing Products. Identical to products used in test assemblies to obtain fire- protection ratmg. 2.6 GLAZING TAPES A. Exterior Back Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below 1 AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. B. Interior Uses Only Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed -cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1 Type 1 for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat -grind vertical edges of butt- glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and comers. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 08800 PAGE 6 of 8 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER GLAZING TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1 Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3 Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4 Effective sealing between joints of glass framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass inunediately before glazing. Remove coatings not finely bonded to substrates. 33 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer Set blocks m thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows. 1 Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw bow and similar characteristics. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 08800 PAGE 7 of 8 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER GLAZING TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI J Where wedge- shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. K. Square cut wedge- shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away seal comer joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer D Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer D Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 08800 PAGE 8 of 8 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER GLAZING TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in wnting by glass manufacturer END OF SECTION 08800 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PARTI GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, includmg Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Division 1 Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Provide materials, labor equipment, inspection, coordination, and supervision necessary for the best and most complete installation per industry standards of ceiling suspension systems as indicated in this specification and on the project drawings. B Section includes exposed grid systems. C Related Work Specified Elsewhere Includes 1 Division 1 Seismic anchorage, Section 01064 Seismic Anchorage Requirements 2. Division 9 Gypsum board assemblies 3 Division 9 Painting 4 Division 15 Mechanical Ceiling grilles and diffusers 5 Division 16, Electncal Ceiling mounted light fixtures and devices 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General. Comply with Section 01300 Submittals. SECTION 09120 PAGE 1 of 6 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS B. Manufacturer's Data. For information only submit two copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each suspension system and other products required. Include reports and other data as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. Indicate by transmittal form that copy of each instruction has been distributed to the installer C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing details and reflected ceiling plans of suspension systems specified in this section. Show location of ceiling units and other items of work which are to be coordinated with the ceiling, including mechanical and electrical work, and show framing and support details for work supported by the suspension system. Certify compliance with ASTM C635 and other specified requirements and indicate structural classification of each type of suspension system. D Samples: Submit two 12 -inch long samples of each exposed runner and molding. Architect's review will be for color and texture only Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General. Comply with Section 01400 Quality Control. B Standards 1 Comply with ASTM C635 ASTM C636 -76, including applicable dimensional tolerances, except as otherwise shown or further specified. 2. Obtain systems from a manufacturer who has recorded his responsibility for the design of suspension systems specified. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3 For seismic control at expansion points, if any provide supplemental fasteners as required by governing codes and authorities. Comply with ASTM E580 -78 as applicable. C. Single Responsibility Subcontract the suspension systems for acoustic ceilings to the installer of acoustic ceiling materials for undivided responsibility for specified performance of all components. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01610 Delivery Storage, and Handling. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best and most complete installation per industry standards. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Section 01310 Progress Schedule. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Comply with Section 01745 Warranty Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS SECTION 09120 PAGE 2 of 6 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Where acoustic ceiling systems are components of floor ceiling or roof ceiling or beam assemblies for which a fire- resistant rating is shown or scheduled, provide complete ceiling systems complying with the requirements of UL "Fire Resistance Index" (including referenced requirements) for the UL design numbers correspondmg with the construction assemblies shown. B General Requirements 1 Attachment Devices: Tested for a carrying capacity of not less than five times the design load involved. 2. Hangers: As recommended by manufacturer to comply with the specified structural classification (ASTM C635). 3 Wire Hangers: If recommended, to be not less than 12 gauge (0.016 -inch diameter), galvamzed, soft annealed, mild steel wire. 4 Primary and Secondary Supporting Members: As further specified for required suspension systems and as required for proper attachments to building structural framing. No attachment to metal roof or floor decking is permitted. 5 Assembly Devices and Accessories: As recommended by manufacturer and as required to comply with ceiling performance requirements. C. Protective Coatings and Finishes 1 General. Except where otherwise indicated or specified, provide protective coatings on suspension system components complying with requirements for normal use environments (ASTM C635). 2. High Humidity Areas: Wherever moisture resistant acoustic treatments are indicated, provide protective coatings and fmishes complying with high humidity test requirements (ASTM C635). a. Provide hot dip galvanized T's with painted aluminum cap where AP-4' is indicated. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.2 EXPOSED GRID CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1 Chicago Metallic Corporation 2. Armstrong 3 USG Interior Inc. 4 Others as approved by addenda SECTION 09120 PAGE 3 of 6 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS B Quality Standard Product: USG DX Series (Matches Hospital Standard), Armstrong and Woodworks C. Suspended Ceiling Systems: For specified acoustical panels (AP), Section 09510• 1 AP 1 2x2 Armstrong XL 15/16 exposed Tee System 2. AP 2 24' Armstrong Prelude XL System NON FERROUS. D Class: ASTM C635 intermediate duty E. Finish 1 Formed from commercial quality cold rolled steel, electro -zinc coated and pre painted. 2. Exposed cap finish, low sheen satin white. F Main Tees: 1 1/2 -inch height G Cross Tees 1 1 -1/2 -inch height members, supporting light fixtures or other ceiling fixtures. 2. 1 -inch height members or equal, elsewhere. H. Wall Moldings: Angle shape with exposed face width to match tees. Neatly miter at corners. I. Shadow Moldings: Donn Shadow Mold MS 144 J Fixture Trim: Where recessed fixtures occur of the types which would expose edges of acoustic units m the fmished work, provide plastic fixture trim. K. Edge Moldmgs: Provide plastic edge moldings where indicated or required. L. Expansion Joint Moldings and Trim: Provide recommended type per approved detail. M. Steel Channels: 1 1/2 -inch size, cold rolled steel, 16 gauge; for supplementary hanger support as required. N Suspension Ceiling System. AP 2 1 Ceiling Grid System for MRI Magnet Room a. Dimension: 24 inch by 24 inch b. Type: Extruded aluminum T- system, prefmished c. Profile: Dimensional Tee, 15/16 wide face d. Color White e. Quality Standard: Armstrong Prelude XL System f. Edge moldings and trim: extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations, including light fixtures, that fit type of edge detail and suspension system MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI g. Wire fir hangers and ties: Use non ferrous materials for hanger wires with a yield stress load of at least three times design load, but not less than 12 gauge. 2. Class: ASTM C635 light duty system PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Determme that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer Starting of the work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates and connecting work to enable the best and most complete installation per industry standards of the work of this section. B Installer shall consult other trades and contractors involved prior to start of ceiling work to determine areas of potential interferences. Do not start installation until interferences have been resolved to the satisfaction of the installer C Coordinate layout with other work which penetrates or is supported by ceiling suspension system. 3.3 INSTALLATION SECTION 09120 PAGE 4 of 6 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS indicated. Provide moldings with exposed flange of the same width as exposed runner A. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Install ceiling suspension systems which are components of fire -rated floor ceiling or roof ceiling assemblies, complete, in accordance with the requirements of applicable UL 'Fire Resistance Index' design numbers. B Ceiling Suspension Systems 1 Compliance a. Install suspension systems which are part of non fire -rated assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; the requirements of Article 2, 'Installation of Components, of ASTM C636 'Standard Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels, and as further specified. b Comply with Uniform Building Code Standard No. 47 18, Metal Suspension System for Acoustical Tile and for Lay -in Panel Ceilings. 2. Hangers a. Suspend hangers from structural supporting members. 1) Secure to steel roof framing members only Anchorage to metal roof deck not allowed. Provide 1 1/2 -inch channel supplementary supports between and properly secured to roof joists as required to maintain hanger spacing. 2) Secure to poured -in -place concrete floor slabs and concrete pan joist systems by wire -tying to hanger inserts. Power driven hangers are not acceptable. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 09120 PAGE 5 of 6 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS b. Space hangers to fall not more than 6 inches from ends and not more than 4 feet o.c. between ends of primary suspension members and as required to support other work resting in or on ceiling and in conformance with ASTM E580 -78. Provide additional hangers at fixtures as required to prevent deflection of suspension systems members in excess 1/360 deflection per ASTM C635 requirements. Do not attach hangers to ducts, pipes, or other similar work which occurs above ceilings. Provide additional suspended ceiling members at such locations. c. Locate to be plumb in relation to primary suspension members and to avoid contact with insulation covering ducts and pipe. d. Splay where obstructions or other conditions preclude plumb vertical installation and as required to maintain tee support. e. Offset horizontal forces of splayed hangers by countersplaying, bracing, or other suitable methods. f. Space hangers and primary and secondary supporting members as required to prevent loads from fixtures and other items in or on the ceiling from causing eccentric deflection and rotation exceeding specified linuts. g. Brace ceilings as required to resist seismic forces and m conformance with IBC Section 1622. 3 Primary Supporting Members: Tightly secure to hangers to prevent vertical displacement or rotation; do not bear on walls or partitions. 4 Moldings a. Installation: Install continuous metal moldmgs for support of runners and ceiling units where suspended ceilings meet walls, partitions, and other vertical elements. b. Securing: Secure moldings to building construction by fastening through holes drilled in web. Space holes not more than 3 inches from each end and not more than 16 inches o.c. between end holes. c. Hollow Stud Construction: Fasten with toggle bolts. d. Corners: Miter cut inside and outside comers. e. Radial Surfaces: Fabricate matching one -piece section to radius of band where radial surfaces are contiguous with straight surfaces. Fabricate radial moldings with not less than 12 inches straight extension. Butt join radial sections with concealed fasteners. f. Seal joint between wall and molding with interior elastomeric joint sealant per Section 07900, color match to molding. C. Exposed Grid Systems 1 Main Runners: Support directly from hangers. Space as required to support ceiling units and other work resting in, or on, ceilings and as required to comply with ceiling performance requirements. Provide unjointed main runners of manufacturer's maximum standard length wherever possible; join abutting sections with manufacturer's standard splice connections; do not pop rivet flanges of abutting runners. 2. Cross Runners: Support by interlocking ends of cross runners with main runners (or cross runners classified as main runners) to form 90- degree angle between intersecting runners. Space as required to support each panel unit used in the work. 3 Moldings: Install with exposed leg in same plane as bottom flange of exposed runners, unless otherwise shown or specified. Moldings at inside comers shall be nutered, outside comers shall be prefabricated. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 01400 Quality Control. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Provide experienced supervision of all elements of the work of this section. SECTION 09120 PAGE 6 of 6 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS Comply with the applicable tolerance requirements of ASTM C636. Level primary supporting members after installation, do not kmk or bend hangers as a means of leveling. 1 Main Runners: Level to a tolerance of not more than 1/8 inch m 12 feet. Determine evaluation of tolerances from measurements taken below hanger points; make measurements after completion of ceiling installation but prior to buildmg occupancy 2. Moldmgs: Level to a tolerance of not more than 1/8 inch in 12 feet. D Exposed members in finished ceilings shall comply with the following: 1 Abutting Sections: Join and align ends of abutting sections of main runners to form smooth tight joints with vertical and horizontal tolerances not to exceed 0 015 inches between exposed flanges, with gaps of not more than 0 02 mches between exposed surfaces of abutting surfaces and with no visually apparent angular displacement of the longitudinal axis of one runner with respect to the other 2. Cross Runners: Install to withm 1/32 inch of required center distances with tolerance non cumulative beyond 12 feet. 3 Intersections: Exposed surfaces of intersecting runners to have a vertical displacement of not more than 0 015 inches between runners. 33 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and Section 01710, Final Cleaning. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Provide ceiling suspension systems as indicated on project drawings. B. Provide seismic bracing at ceiling suspension systems per applicable codes, regulations, and as approved by governing jurisdictions. Seismic support systems shall include support elements providing offset anchorage as required at new and existing equipment and components. Support elements shall be designed by a licensed engineer END OF SECTION 09120 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of gypsum board construction. 1 Steel framing, furring and suspension to receive gypsum board 2. Gypsum board and fimsh systems B. Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Division 7 Firestopping and Smokestoppmg 2. Division 7 Joint Sealers 3 Division 9 Ceiling Suspension Systems 4 Division 9 Paint 5 Division 15 Mechanical Diffusers and Grilles 6. Division 16, Electrical Lighting Fixtures and Devices 1.3 DEFINITIONS SECTION 09250 PAGE 1 of 11 GYPSUM BOARD A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA 505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards. B. Product test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of gypsum board wall systems with fire resistance, structural performance and acoustical performance requirements. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance Characteristics: Provide gypsum board systems engineered to withstand the following lateral design loadings (air pressures), applied transiently and cyclically for maximum heights of partitions required, within the following deflection limits: 1 Lateral Loading: 5 psf for interior partitions. 2. Deflection Limit: 1/240 of partition height, unless noted otherwise. 3 Deflection Limit, Ceramic Tile Finish. 1/360 of partition height B. Testing for Deflection Characteristics: Manufacturer's certified testing agency reports for each assembly or verified by pretesting mock -up assembly 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of product specified. 1 Table indicating stud selection for various Project conditions with testing reports. B Samples of trims, joints and specialties, 12 inches long. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire- Resistance Ratings. Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determmed per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Provide fire- resistance -rated assemblies, identical to those indicated by reference to GA File Nos. in GA -600 'Fire Resistance Design Manual' or to design designations in U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory' or in listing of other testing and agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B Single- Source Responsibility Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer C. Sound Attenuation Performance: Provide gypsum board systems designed and pretested to achieve the following minimum ratings for sound transmission class (STC) per ASTM E 90 1 The STC Ratings as indicated on the drawings. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING SECTION 09250 PAGE 2 of 11 GYPSUM BOARD A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier B Store materials mside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. C Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and fmishing of gypsum board mamtain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete. C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during dry hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer Subject to compliance with requirements provide products of one of the following: 1 Steel Framing and Furring: a. Angeles b. Bostwick Steel Framing Co. c. Dale Industries, Inc. d. Gold Bond Building Products Div National Gypsum Co. e. Incor Inc f. Marino Industries Corp. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 09250 PAGE 3 of 11 GYPSUM BOARD g. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Gypsum Boards and Related Products: a. Centex American Gypsum Co b. Domtar Gypsum Co. c. Georgia Pacific Corp. d. Gold Bond Building Products Div National Gypsum Co e. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS: A. General. Provide components which comply with ASTM C 754 for materials and sizes, unless otherwise indicated. B Concrete Inserts: Inserts designed for attachment to concrete forms and for embedment in concrete, fabricated from corrosion resistant materials, with holes or loops for attachment of hanger wires and capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 3 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined from testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by the independent testing laboratory C Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641 Class 1 zinc coating soft temper D Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust- inhibitive paint. E. Channels: Cold- rolled steel, 0 0598 inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 inch wide flanges, protected with rust- inhibitive paint, and as follows: 1 Carrying Channels: 1 1/2 inch deep, 475 lbs per 1000 ft. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Curve channel for curved ceiling. F Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645 with flange edges bent.back 90 deg and doubles over to form 3/16 inch minimum lip (return), minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and minimum depth as follows: 1 Thickness: 0 0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth. 1 5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. G Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645 hat shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: 1 Thickness: 0 0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated. H. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, complying with ASTM C 645 for matenal, fmish and widths of face and fastening flange, fabricated to form 1/2 inch deep channel of the following configuration: 1 Single -Leg Configuration: Assymetric- shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single slotted leg (web). I. Hat Channels 2 3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645 with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16' minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for mmimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1 Thickness: Required for fire rating and so that partition assembly deflection is less than overall height divided by 240 (L/240) with uniform load of 5 pounds per square foot. a. Frame studs 16 inches on center maximum spacing allowed. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI b. At Ceramic Tile Finish: Deflection L/360 20 gage minimum, G60 galvanizing c. At CBU (cement backer unit): 20 gage minimum, G90 galvanizing d. Provide 16 gauge minimum framing in partitions behind toilets 2. Depth. 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3 Stud Spacing: 16' o.c. maximum, typical (12' o.c. where impact resistant gypsum board and other high use areas mdicated). B. Steel Rigid Fun Channels: ASTM C 645 hat shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: 1 Depth: 1 1/2 inch 2. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated. C. Furring Brackets: Serrated -arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion resistant steel sheet complying with ASTM C 645 minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0 0329 inch, designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. D Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, complying with ASTM C 645 for base metal, fmish and widths of face and fastening flange, fabricated to form 1/2 inch deep channel of the following configuration: 1 Single -Leg Configuration: Assymetric- shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single slotted leg (web). E. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring power members securely to substrates involved, complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall manufacturers for applications indicated. 2.4 GYPSUM BOARD A. General. Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available, minimize end to -end joints. 1 Thickness: 5/8 inch unless indicated otherwise. SECTION 09250 PAGE 4 of 11 GYPSUM BOARD B. Gypsum Wallboard. ASTM C 36, and as follows: 1 Type: Type X throughout. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3 Special thickness: 3/8 -inch and -inch for laminating finish surface at curves 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Comerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim and control joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below Material: Formed metal complying with the following requirement: a. Sheet steel coated with zinc by hot -dip or electrolytic processes, or with aluminum. 2. Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047 a. 'LC Bead" unless otherwise indicated. b. 'L" Bead where indicated. c. "U" Bead where indicated. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 09250 PAGE 5 of 11 GYPSUM BOARD 3 Curved Trims: Comerbead and edge tnms specially fabricated trims with notched legs that will form continuous curves at radii indicated in Drawings. 4 One -Piece Control Joints. Formed with vee- shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047 with slot opening covered with removable strip. B Round Penetrations: Plastic or metal grommets at penetrations smaller than 6' diameter C Aluminum Tnm. Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1 Manufacturer subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp b. Gordon, Inc. 2. Aluminum alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 /ASMT B 221M, alloy 6063 -T5 3 Finish: Corrosion resistant pruner compatible with joint compound and fmish materials specified. 2.6 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475 ASTM C 840, and recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials for the application indicated. B Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. 1 Use pressure sensitive or staple- attached open -weave glass fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and Joint treatment matenals for application indicated. C. Setting -Type Joint Compounds: Factory- prepackaged, job-mixed, chemical- hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. 1 Where setting -type Joint compounds are indicated for use as taping and topping compounds, use formulation for each which develops greatest bond strength and crack resistance and is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. 2. For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose. 3 For filling joints and treating fasteners of water resistant gypsum backing board behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose. D Drying -Type Joint Compounds: Factory- prepackaged vinyl -based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1 Ready -Mix Formulation: Factory- premixed product. 2. Job -Mixed Formulation. Powder product for mixing with water at Project site. 3 Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and flanges of corner beads and edge trim. 4 Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction which comply with reference standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board. B Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum boards. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C Frame Grout: ASTM C 475 setting -type joint compound of type recommended for grouting hollow metal door frames. D Fa Adhesive for Wood. ASTM C 557 E. Fastening Adhesive for Metal. Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum boards to steel framing. F Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002. G Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, nonbleeding, gunnable sealant recommended by wallboard manufacturer H. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Specified in Section 07210 I. Acoustical Filler for Metal Deck Flutes: Safmg insulation specified m Section 07210 4 0 pcf. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 PREPARATION 3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL SECTION 09250 PAGE 6 of 11 GYPSUM BOARD A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollow metal frames, cast -in- anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation of overhead structural system to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling anchors in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceiling. 1 Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated, to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination with other construction. A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook' published by United States Gypsum Co. C Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement, at locations indicated below to comply with details shown on Drawings: 1 Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure horizontally at ceiling perimeters or penetration of structural elements. 2. Where partitions and wall framing abuts overhead structure. a. Provide slip or cushioned type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. D Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members; independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members or as indicated. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 09250 PAGE 7 of 11 GYPSUM BOARD 3.4 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS fi A. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible, otherwise connect to cast -in concrete inserts or other anchorage devices or fasteners as indicated. 1 Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs. 2. Do not attach hangers to metal roof deck. 3 Do not attach hangers to underside of concrete slabs with powder actuated fasteners. B Do connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit. C. Keep hangers and braces 2 inches clear of ducts, pipes and conduits. D Seismic -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support and struts to prevent uplift. Comply with codes and governing agency E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacing indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard. 1 Wire Hangers: 0 1620 inch diameter (8 gage), 4 ft. on center 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners) 1 1/2 inch, 4 ft. on center 3 Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches on center 4 Curved carrying channel for curved ceilings. F Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross furring members or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 ft. as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. G Wire -tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other construction. B Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surface do not vary more than 1/8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where indicated otherwise (see partition type details) Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. D Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. 1 Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacing indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard. 2. For single layer construction. 16 inches on center E. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and gypsum boards can be installed in the direction opposite to that of the flange. F Frame door openings to comply with detailed mdicated, with GA 219 and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cnpple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1 Extend vertical jamb studs to underside of floor or roof structure above, attach with deflection detail. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 09250 PAGE 8 of 11 GYPSUM BOARD 2. Provide two 16 -gage studs at each door and relite jamb Extended floor to underside of structure. G Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or if none indicated, in same manner as required for door openings; and mstall framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. H. Special Framing Conditions: 1 Provide 16 gauge minimum framing, floor to structure, in toilet walls. 2. Coordinate double 16 gauge minimum studs to support 08340 coiling counter doors (at jambs) where door manufacturer recommends this option. 3 At Wall Shelving (shelving with standards attached to wall, not cabinet shelving) provide 18 gauge minimum, full height studs at each standard. I. Acoustical Filler at Metal Decking: Fill spaces between top track and metal decking where board is applied to at least one side of framing. Pack tightly leave no voids. 3.6 APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard. Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 B Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, prior to gypsum board unless readily installed after board has been installed. C. Locate exposed end -butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board. D Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end -butt joints, and which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches. E. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end -butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible. At stairwells and similar high walls, install board horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. F Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place. G Located either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications or where intermediate supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill -cut or field -cut ends against mill -cut or field -cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. H. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud flange first. I. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts. J Grout hollow metal door frames. Apply grout at each jamb before inserting board into frame. K. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories. L. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.). MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 Except where concealed application is required for sound, fire, air or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. area, and may be limited to not less than 75 percent of full coverage. 2. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3 Where partitions intersect underside of structure, cut gypsum board or fill all voids to fit profile and allow 1/2 inch wide joint for sealant and deflection. M. Isolate perimeter of non load bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4 to 1/2" space and trim edge with "U' bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. 1 Seal joints in fire -rated partitions with firestopping or smokestopping in compliance with Section 07840 N Where sound -rated drywall construction work is indicated, seal construction at perimeters, control and expansion joints, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim, and close off sound flanking paths around or through construction including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings. NOTE. All partition indicated with STC ratings are consider `sound- rated. O Space fasteners m gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.7 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION SECTION 09250 PAGE 9 of 11 GYPSUM BOARD A. Smgle -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows. 1 On ceilings apply gypsum board pnor to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible. 2. On partitions /walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to franung), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints. 3 On partitions/walls 8' 1 or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally (perpendicular to framing); use maximum length sheets possible to mininuze end joints. B Install gypsum board types at the following locations: 1 Fire rated and labeled products at rated assemblies 2. Water resistant gypsum board at vertical surfaces and exterior gypsum soffit board at honzontal surfaces, wet locations including the following: a. Backing for ceramic tile except where CBU is indicated b. Toilet rooms, drying rooms, and walls adjacent to showers, not scheduled for CBU c. Janitor closets and other utility rooms with sinks d. Kitchens 3 Cemetitious Backer Units (CBU) where indicated. C. Cementitious Backer Unit installation. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and the following: 1 Frame studs 16 inches on center minimum 2. Tape or adhere moisture barrier to framing, lap 4 inches, shingle fashion 3 Fasten CBU with amt corrosive coated screws MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 4 Pre -fill joints and corners with joint treatment, install mesh tape, embed and cover tape with joint treatment. 5 Skim coat, bond coat and tile finish are specified in Section 09300 D Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows: 1 Fasten with screws. 2. Anti corrosion coated screws at water resistant gypsum board and extenor gypsum soffit board. E. Direct Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum board is indicated to be directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum board until fastening adhesive has set. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES SECTION 09250 PAGE 10 of 11 GYPSUM BOARD A. General. Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install corner beads at extemal corners. C Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face flange to receive point compound except where 'U -bead' (semi finishing type) is indicated. 1 Install 'LC" bead where drywall construction is tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2. Install 'L bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board is installed. 3 Install U -type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant filled (including expansion joints) D Install U -bead where indicated and where exterior gypsum board edges are not covered by applied molding or indicated to receive edge trim with face flanges covered with joint compound. E. Install control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated at spacings and locations required by referenced gypsum board application and finish standard, and approved by the Architect for visual effect. 3.9 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD A. General. Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. 1 Setting type, water resistant joint compound at water resistant board and exterior soffit board. B. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any using setting -type joint compound. C Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated. D Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying joint compounds in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sanding between coats and after last coat. 1 Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau (NWCB) Level 4 finish, except as indicated otherwise. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI E. Partial Finishing: Omit third coat and sanding on concealed drywall work which is indicated for drywall finishing or which requires fmishing to achieve fire resistance rating, sound rating or to act as air or smoke barrier 1 NWCB Level 2 finish. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, m a manner suitable to Installer which ensures gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09250 SECTION 09250 PAGE 11 of 11 GYPSUM BOARD 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY SECTION 09650 PAGE 1 of 7 RESILIENT FLOORING A. Provide matenals, labor equipment, inspection, coordination, and supervision necessary for the best installation per industry standards of resilient flooring as indicated m this specification and on the project drawings. B. Work includes. 1 Sheet Vinyl (SV) 2. Resilient base (RB) 3 Static Dissipative Sheet Vinyl (SV) 4 Resilient thresholds, transitions and other accessories. C. Related Sections include the. following: 1 Division 1 Section `Temporary Dehumidification, Heating and Cooling 2. Division 3 Section Cast -In -Place Concrete' for concrete slabs 3 Division 3 `Cementihous Underlayment' 4 Division 6, Section `Rough Carpentry" 5 Division 9 `Gypsum Board Assemblies' 6. Division 10 `Raised Access Flooring 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For information only submit two copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. Indicate by transmittal that a copy of each installation instruction has been distributed to installer B Samples: Submit three sets of samples of each type, color and finish of resilient flooring and accessory required. Provide 12 -inch square samples of flooring and 6 -inch -long samples of accessories. Include full range of flooring color and pattern variation. Sample submittals will be reviewed for color texture, and pattem only Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit two copies of manufacturer's written instructions for recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient flooring and accessories. D Materials for Maintenance: 1 Furmsh four copies of instructions for the cleaning and maintenance of resilient floor covering to Owner 2. Furnish replacement tile to Owner at the rate of one carton per 5000 square feet. E. Certification of installer 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an expenenced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing resilient products specified for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. 1 Installer of resilient flooring shall be certified by Manufacturer MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 09650 PAGE 2 of 7 RESILIENT FLOORING B Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color and pattern of product specified from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Testing: Moisture testing shall be performed by general contractor's independent testing agency for compliance with manufacturer's recommended moisture level and alkalinity of concrete slab. D Fire- Test Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire- test response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Critical Radiant Flux. 0 45 W /sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648 2. Smoke Density Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 662. E. Coordmation: Flooring installer shall participate in pre installation conference with concrete slab installer Flooring installer shall provide concrete slab requirements for finish moisture, flatness, levelness, and pH. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best and most complete installation per mdustry standards. B Heating Requirements: Flooring installer shall confirm that continuous heat has been provided to areas scheduled to receive flooring. Space shall be maintained to 65 degrees F for at least 48 hours prior to installation, when project conditions are such that heating is required. Maintain 65 degrees F temperature continuously during and after installation as recommended by flooring manufacturer but for not less than 48 hours. Installer shall not proceed until these requirements are achieved. C. Concrete Slab Requirements: All requirements of Division 3 `Concrete apply The general contractor shall be responsible for coordination of requirements ensuring compliance with flooring manufacturer's requirements for the preparation, curing, treatment, and moisture content testing of the slab. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Comply with Division 1 Warranty Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Product: Subject with compliance with requirements of Basis of Design, provide products from one of the manufacturers below• 1 Armstrong 2. Azrock 3 Burke- Mercer 4 Forbo 5 Mannington 6. Marley Flexco 7 Mondo 8. Roppe 9 Johnsonite 10 B. Colors and Patterns: Selections will be made from full range of each product's standard and premium products. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 Match colors, textures, and patterns indicated by referenced manufacturer's standard designations for these characteristics. 2. Each color in each room from same run of stock or of identical color 3 Tiles: accurately cut; thickness and size uniform. 2.2 SHEET VINYL FLOORING (SV) A. Basis of Design. 1 SV 1- a. Manufacturer Mannington b. Product: Biospec c. Color 15134 Green Tea d. Overall Thickness: 0 08' e. Wear Layer Thickness: 0 08' f. Static Load Limit: 750 psi. g. Homogeneous: Yes h. For Heat Welded Seam Use: Camouflaged Heat Weld Rods i. Warranty Limited 5 -year Commercial Warranty 2. SV 2 a. Manufacturer Johnsonite b. Style: Toro El Homogeneous Flooring c. Description. High Performance Electrostatic Flooring d. Number TOR -R 115 Sourdough e. Roll Length: 82' -0' width 6' -6' f. Heat Weld Rod Color it 1292319 B Comply with ASTM F1303 2.3 RUBBER WALL BASE (RB) A. Basis of Design. 1 RB -1 Flexco a. Color 072 Chocolate SECTION 09650 PAGE 3 of 7 RESILIENT FLOORING C. Accessories: Approved by Manufacturer and required for complete installation including the following: 1 Patterned welding rod that matches each color selected. 2. Solid cove backing. 3 Clear anodized aluminum trim. B Comply with ASTM F1861 Type TP- Rubber Thermoplastic, Group 2 Layered. 1 Style B, coved shoe, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Height: 6- inches unless noted otherwise. C Pre formed corner in matching size, shape, and color shall be provided for right -angle external corners. 2.4 RESILIENT THRESHOLDS AND TRANSITIONS A. Basis of Design: Johnsomte, Wheeled traffic transition moldings. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI D Heat Welding Bead: Solid -strand product of floor covering manufacturer 1 Color See Manufacturers recommended weld rod. E. Sealers or Polishes: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION SECTION 09650 PAGE 4 of 7 RESILIENT FLOORING B Material. High quality PVC, 2.5 inch wide transitions between flooring material, including the following types 1 Carpet to VCT or SV CTA XX -H 2. Carpet to base flooring such as concrete: CTA XX J 3 VCT or SV to base flooring such as concrete: RRS -XX A or B or C, match thickness 4 Ceramic Tile to XX transitions to be Schluter System a. Product: Schiene -E b. Finish. Stainless Steel c. Size: Varies 5 Other conditions such as ceramic tile to carpet or resilient: appropnate product from same series. C. Colors and Styles: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by resilient product manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. 1 Basis of Design: 'Greenline' by Henry a. CRI Green Label b. Maximum VOC 10.0 /mg/m2/hr c. Required pH. 9 -10 2. Epoxy adhesive required in heavy rolling traffic areas where topical moisture is present and when recommended by floormg manufacturer B Concrete Slab Primer Non staining type as recommended by flooring conditions. 1 Provide primer- sealer where vapor emission exceeds flooring manufacturer's requirement for full warranty 2. Testing: General Contractor shall demonstrate performance of the moisture or vapor emission control sealer by testing with calcium chloride testing. Testing shall compare results of test of emission prior to sealer application and after sealer application. a. General Contractor shall provide conditions of occupancy (68 degrees F and 35% RH) for 48 hours prior to testing and throughout testing protocol. b. Testing shall be performed by independent testing agency C. Leveling and Patching Compounds: Chemically engineered cementitious underlayment, compatible with substrate and finish flooring. One of the following: 1 Raeco 2. Ardex A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which resilient flooring and accessories are to be installed. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 09650 PAGE 5 of 7 RESILIENT FLOORING 1 Verify moisture content and surface alkalinity of the concrete substrate meets flooring manufacturer's requirements for adequate adhesion. 2. Check substrate moisture content m advance of scheduled flooring installation to allow corrective action without adversely affecting construction schedule. B. Venfy joint sealants m concrete slabs and floors are installed flush with adjacent surface and joint will not telegraph through flooring. Notify Contractor unmediately of any remedial work. C. Provide underlayment over rough or uneven concrete floors as required for tolerances required by floor covenng systems. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to laymg flooring, broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered and inspect subfloor Starting flooring installation will indicate acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed work. Preparation in accordance with Part 3.3A below B Apply concrete slab primer- sealer if recommended by flooring manufacturer prior to application of adhesive. Apply m compliance with manufacturer's directions. C. If moisture levels in concrete slabs are too high, temporary climate control will be used to remove excess moisture to levels acceptable to flooring manufacturer 1 If dehumidification is required, reflect at least 60 days potential delay time of flooring installation on schedule to allow sufficient drying time if levels are found to be excessive. 2. General Contractor shall be responsible for delays resulting from improper moisture content. 3 Refer to Division 1 Section `Temporary Dehumidification, Heating and Cooling' for temporary climate control requirements. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Cementitious Underlayment: 1 Mix and apply in accordance with manufacturer's directions. a. Bring to perfectly true, level, and smooth surfaces. b. No humps or depressions. c. Acceptable tolerances are approximately 1/4 -inch over entire length and width of room with approximately 1/16 -inch in any 8 -foot span. 2. Install wherever required on concrete subfloors to receive floor covering systems. B Resilient Flooring, General. 1 Install flooring after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature, and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by flooring manufacturer 2. Place flooring with adhesive cement in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings, and edgings. Scribe as necessary around obstructions and to produce neat joints, laid tight, even, and straight. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and smiilar openings, and under movable cases and equipment. 3 Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are m place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on fmish flooring as marked on subfloor Use chalk or other non permanent marking device. 4 Install flooring on trench covers, covers for telephone and electrical outlets and other such items as occur within fmished floor areas. 5 Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed in these covers. Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 09650 PAGE 6 of 7 RESILIENT FLOORING 6 Tightly cement resilient flooring to substrate without open cracks, voids, raising, or puckering at joints; telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks; or other surface imperfections. C Install resilient flooring after casework base cabinets are installed except where indicated otherwise. Install resilient base scheduled for each room on casework bases. D Sheet Vinyl Flooring: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1 Weld seams. 2. Self -cove base, solid backing, aluminum trim top, weld inside corners, height indicated in Drawmgs, (5 inches if not indicated). E. Resilient Sheet Flooring (SV) 1 Lay sheet floormg to provide as few seams as possible with economical use of materials. Match edges for color shading and pattern at seams in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Adhere sheet flooring to substrates using method approved by flooring manufacturer for type of sheet flooring and substrate condition indicated. a. Use conventional full spread adhesive method unless otherwise indicated or recommended by manufacturer of resilient sheet. Use manufacturer's recommended adhesive at seams. b. Use perimeter bonding adhesive procedures only where specifically recommended by flooring manufacturer 3 Prepare seams in vinyl sheet flooring which requires heat welded seams with manufacturer's special routing tool and heat weld with manufacturer's vinyl thread in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4 Roll resilient sheet flooring as recommended by the manufacturer 5 Provide a 6 -inch integral coved base as indicated on the drawings and schedule with resilient sheet flooring, extending sheet flooring up the wall and supported by cove strip with minimum radius of 3/4 inch. a. Cap the integral coved base at height indicated with cap strip approved by manufacturer of sheet flooring. b. Provide metal inside and outside comers and end stops, as recommended by manufacturer of sheet flooring. 6. Prepare seams m resilient sheet flooring in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for most inconspicuous appearance, sealing continuously with fluid applied sealant or adhesive as standard with manufacturer F Resilient Base (RB): 1 Apply wall base to walls, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units. Tightly bond base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. 2. Apply wall base to freestanding columns and attached pilasters in areas where resilient base is required. 3 On masonry surface or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive fuller material. 4 Install premolded comers at outside corners. G Accessories: 1 Apply resilient accessories per manufacturer's written instructions. Fill voids m nosings, treads and similar accessories. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide experienced supervision of all elements of the work of this section. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION END OF SECTION 09650 SECTION 09650 PAGE 7 of 7 RESILIENT FLOORING 2. Apply butt type metal edge strips at all unprotected edges of flooring and sheet base and prior to resilient flooring. Secure units to substrate with countersunk stainless steel anchors, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. A. Cleaning: Remove any excess adhesives or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturers. Protect mstalled flooring from damage by covering. B Finishing: After completion of project and just pnor to final inspection of work, thoroughly clean floors and accessories. Apply initial maintenance products recommended by Manufacturer Comply with manufacturer instructions. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 09900 PAGE 1 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY PAINTING A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed extenor and interior items and surfaces. 1 Surface preparation, pruning, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or matenal is not to be painted or is to remain natural. .If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1 Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory- applied fmal finish. C Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1 Prefmished items include the following factory- fuushed components: D Related Sections mclude the following: 1 Division 5 Section 'Metal Fabrications' for shop pruning ferrous metal. 2. Division 8 Section 'Steel Doors and Frames' for factory priming steel doors and frames. 3 Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum board. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General. Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1 Flat refers to a lusterless or matte fmish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree meter 2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen fmish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree meter 3 Semigloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60- degree meter 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. 1 Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross reference specific coating, fmish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. B Samples for Verification: For each color and matenal to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. 1 Provide stepped Samples, defming each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review Resubmit until required sheen, color and texture are achieved. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 09900 PAGE 2 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER PAINTING TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2. Provide a list of matenals and applications for each coat of each Sample Label each Sample for location and application. 3 Submit Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only a. Concrete: 4 -mch- (100 -mm square Samples for each color and finish. b. Concrete Unit Masonry 4 -by -8 -inch (100 -by- 200 -mm) Samples of masonry with mortar joint m the center for each fmish and color c. Painted Wood: 8 -mch- (200 -mm square Samples for each color and material on hardboard. d. Stained or Natural Wood. 4 -by -8 -inch (100 -by- 200 -mm) Samples of natural- or stained -wood finish on representative surfaces. e. Ferrous Metal. 4 -inch- (100 -mm square Samples of flat metal and 6 -inch- (150 mm-) long Samples of solid metal for each color and finish. C Qualification Data: For Applicator 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in- service performance. B Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the fmish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full -coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coatmg and substrate required. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals. 1 Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). 2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site m manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information. 1 Product name or title of material. 2. Product descnption (generic classification or binder type). 3 Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4 Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5 Thinning instructions. 6 Application instructions. 7 Color name and number 8 VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 09900 PAGE 3 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS PAINTING 1 Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly Remove oily rags and waste daily A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C), and when pH levels of plaster substrate are below 9 B. Apply solvent thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1 Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production nm as the materials applied and in the quantities described below Package with protective covenng for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra matenals to Owner 1 Quantity Furnish Owner with an additional 3 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each matenal and color applied. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Product shown in Part 2 articles indicate `Basis of Design. Products are subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. B Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1 Benjamin Moore Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints). 3 Kelly -Moore Paint Co. (Kelly- Moore). 4 Sherwin Williams Co. (Sherwin Williams). 5 Miller Paint Co. (Miller). 6. Rodda Paint Co (Rodda). 7 Safe Coat Paint Systems (Safecoat). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility Provide block fillers, primers, and fmish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality Provide manufacturer's best quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint- matenal containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1 Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or matenals is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the t exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 09900 PAGE 4 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PAINTING C. Chemical Components of Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions: 1 Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g /L. 2. Non -Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3 Anticorrosive Coatings: VOC content of not more than 250 g/L. 4 Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC content of not more than 350 g/L. 5 Stains: VOC content of not more than 250 g/L. 6. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1 0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 7 Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2- ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di -n -butyl phthalate. i. Di -n -octyl phthalate. j 1,2- dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. 1. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r Mercury s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v Naphthalene. w Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1 1 1- trichloroethane. y Vinyl chloride. D Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 1 Tinting primer paint is prohibited. 2 3 EXTERIOR PRIMERS A. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Primer Factory- formulated alkali- resistant acrylic -latex primer for exterior application. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 09900 PAGE 5 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.4 INTERIOR PRIMERS PAINTING 1 Benjamin Moore; Moore's Acrylic Masonry Sealer No 066 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 0 7 mils (0 018 mm). a. For mineral -fiber reinforced cement panels, Benjamin Moore; Moore's Alkyd Masonry Sealer No. 077 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.7 mils (0 069 mm). A. Intenor Concrete and Masonry Primer Factory- formulated alkali- resistant acrylic -latex interior primer for interior application. 1 Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater Pnmer Sealer No. 253 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0 030 mm). B Interior Gypsum Board Primer Factory- formulated latex -based primer for interior application. 1 Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater Primer Sealer No. 253 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0 030 mm). C. Intenor Plaster Primer Factory- formulated latex -based primer for interior application. 1 Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater Primer Sealer No. 253 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0 030 mm). D Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamel and Semigloss Alkyd- Enamel Finishes: Factory- formulated alkyd- or acrylic latex -based interior wood primer 1 Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Underbody and Primer Sealer No. 245 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). E. Interior Ferrous -Metal Primer Factory- formulated quick drying rust- inhibitive alkyd -based metal primer 1 Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No M06 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0 051 mm). F Interior Zinc- Coated Metal Primer Factory- formulated galvanized metal primer 1 Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0 051 mm) 2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory- formulated flat acrylic emulsion latex paint for exterior application. 1 Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint No. 171 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0 030 mm). B. Exterior Low- Luster Acrylic Paint: Factory- formulated low -sheen (eggshell) acrylic -latex paint for exterior application. 1 Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Low Lustre Latex House Paint No. 185 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 0 mil (0 025 mm). C. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel. Factory- formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic -latex enamel for exterior application. 1 Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House Trim Paint No. 170 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 1 mils (0 028 mm). 2.6 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory- formulated flat acrylic emulsion latex paint for interior application. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 09900 PAGE 6 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PAINTING 1 Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No 275 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0 031 mm). B Intenor Low Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory- formulated eggshell acrylic -latex interior enamel. 1 Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No 274 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm) C Interior Senugloss Acrylic Enamel. Factory- formulated semigloss acrylic -latex enamel for interior application. 1 Benjanun Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel No. 276]. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0 031 mm). D Interior Semigloss Alkyd Enamel. Factory- formulated semigloss alkyd enamel for interior application. 1 Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel No. 271 Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1 4 mils (0 036 mm). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. 1 Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish mformation on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1 Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1 After completing painting operations m each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatmgs. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1 Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1 Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry cement plaster and mineral- fiber- reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 09900 PAGE 7 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PAINTING a. Use abrasive blast cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer b Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted m manufacturer's written instructions. c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry and vacuum before painting. 3 Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated, remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to SSPC -SP 6/NACE No. 3 b Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 4 Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum -based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary remove surface film and strain matenal before using. 3 Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Temporary climate control will be used to control condensation and maintain proper conditions for surface preparation, application and curing as per manufacturer's recommendations. 1 When dry abrasive blasting carbon steel surfaces, dew point temperature in space must be maintained at least 17 degrees lower than temperature of surface being prepared. 2. During paint and coating application, dew point temperature in space must be maintained at least 10 degrees lower than temperature of surface being painted. 3 Maintain air and surface temperatures within parameters set forth in manufacturer's printed application instructions. 4 Refer to Division 1 Section `Temporary Dehumidification, Heating and Cooling for temporary climate control requirements. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General. Apply paint accordmg to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1 Paint colors and finishes are indicated in the room finish schedule. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable pamt film 3 Provide fmish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4 The term exposed surfaces' includes areas visible when permanent or built -m fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, and similar components are in MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 09900 PAGE 8 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PAINTING place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 5 Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prune coat only 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7 Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9 Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1 The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3 If undercoats, stams, or other conditions show through fmal coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform fmish, color and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4 Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dned to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller spray or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet -back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3 Spray Equipment is not permitted. D Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. F Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Uninsulated plastic piping. 3 Pipe hangers and supports. 4 Tanks that do not have factory- applied fmal finishes. 5 Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner behind air inlets and outlets. 6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all- service jacket" or other paintable jacket material. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 09900 PAGE 9 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PAINTING 7 Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-pnmed finish for field painting. G Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 Switchgear 2. Panelboards. 3 Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed fmish for field painting. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas m first coat appears, to ensure a fmish coat with no burn- through or other defects due to msufficient sealing. J Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform fmish, color appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth surface film of even luster Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1 Provide satin finish for fmal coats. L. Stipple Enamel Finish. Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, slud marks, or other surface imperfections. M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied. 1 Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample pamt material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of Contractor 2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by Owner a. Dry film thickness. b Abrasion resistance. c. Mildew resistance. 3 Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying pamt from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 09900 PAGE 10 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PAINTING 1 After completing painting, clean glass and paint- spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Arclutect. B Provide 'Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1 After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete, stucco, and brick masonry substrates: 1 Flat Acrylic Finish. Two finish coats over a primer a. Primer Exterior concrete and masonry primer b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint. 2. Low- Luster Acrylic Finish: Two fmish coats over a primer a. Primer Exterior concrete and masonry primer b. Finish Coats: Exterior low luster acrylic paint. 3 Semigloss Acrylic Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer a. Primer Exterior concrete and masonry primer b. Finish Coats: Extenor semigloss acrylic enamel. 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): Provide the following paint systems over interior concrete and brick masonry substrates: 1 Flat Acrylic Finish. Two finish coats over a primer a. Primer Interior concrete and masonry primer b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. 2. Low Luster Acrylic Enamel Finish: Two fmish coats over a primer a. Primer Interior concrete and masonry primer b. Finish Coats: Interior low- luster acrylic enamel. 3 Semigloss Acrylic Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer a. Primer Interior concrete and masonry primer b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. 4 Semigloss Alkyd- Enamel Finish. Two finish coats over a primer a. Primer Interior concrete and masonry primer b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel. B Gypsum Board: Provide the following fmish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1 Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer a. Primer Interior gypsum board primer b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. 2. Low Luster Acrylic Enamel Finish: Two fmish coats over a primer MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 09900 PAGE 11 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI a. Primer Interior gypsum board primer b Finish Coats: Interior low- luster acrylic enamel. 3 Semigloss Acrylic Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a pnmer a. Primer Interior gypsum board pnmer b Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. C Ferrous Metal. Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal. 1 Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer a. Primer Interior ferrous -metal primer b Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. 2. Low Luster Acrylic Enamel Finish: Two fimsh coats over a primer a. Primer Interior ferrous -metal primer b Finish Coats: Interior low luster acrylic enamel. 3 Semigloss Acrylic Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer a. Primer Interior ferrous -metal primer b Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. 4 Semigloss Alkyd- Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer a. Primer Interior ferrous -metal primer b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel. D Zinc- Coated Metal. Provide the following finish systems over mtenor zinc- coated metal surfaces: 1 Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer a. Pnmer Interior zinc- coated metal primer b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. 2. Low- Luster Acrylic Enamel Finish. Two finish coats over a primer a. Pnmer Interior zinc- coated metal primer b. Finish Coats: Interior low- luster acrylic enamel. 3 Semigloss Acrylic Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer a. Primer In3terior zinc- coated metal primer b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. 4 Semigloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a pnmer a. Primer Interior zinc- coated metal primer b Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel. 3.9 SCHEDULE OF PAINT COLORS A. PT 1 Manufacturer Kelly- Moore, Color 188 Cypress, Finish: Eggshell END OF SECTION 09900 PAINTING 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8. 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 10150 PAGE 1 of 3 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER CUBICLES TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, mcluding Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Provide materials, labor equipment, inspection, coordination, and supervision necessary for the best and most complete installation of compartments and cubicles as indicated in this specification and on the project drawings. B Section includes: 1 Non ferrous MRI cubicle curtain track 2. Track support and backing systems C. Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Division 9 Acoustical Suspended Ceilings 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300 Submittals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Control. 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01610 Delivery Storage, and Handling. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best installation per industry standards. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Section 01310 Progress Schedule. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Comply with Section 01745 Warranty Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CUBICLE AND PRIVACY CURTAIN TRACKS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1 Kirsch 2. ARNCO 3 General Cubicle Company Inc. 4 InPro Corporation MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 10150 PAGE 2 of 3 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER CUBICLES TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 5 Others as approved by Addenda B Quality Standard Product: Products as listed below by InPro Corporation. NOTE. Privacy curtain track manufacturer must have capability of providing factory bent, custom curved tracks to dimensions indicated. E. Cubicle Curtain Tract at MRI non ferrous. 1 Mfg: InPro Corporation 2. Product: Cubicle Tracking System OPTITRAC 3 Description. Extruded aluminum cubicle track with white baked enamel fmish. 4 Dimensions: height 3/4' width 1 3/8' 5 Track Components a. Provide bends, splices, end stops, wand and other components required for complete mstallations. b. Provide capability to remove, reinstall each curtain and its carriers. 2.2 CUBICLE CURTAINS (CC) NOTE. To be provided and installed by Owner A. Fabric Manufacturer and Product: DesignTex 1 Flame retardancy Passes NFPA 701 2. Width: 59 inches 3 Washable to 160 degrees Fahrenheit. 4 Pattern. Frond Daume 7737 102 5 Color Cane 6. Content: 100% Trevira CS B. Mesh: Fire Marshal approved and washable 1 Color Off white, submit sample for approval. C. Fabrication: 1 Bottom of curtain 12 inches above floor 2. Fabric -mesh seam 18 inches bellow ceiling 3 Mesh top and side edges: 1.5 inch self biased tape 4 Fabric: Fully hemmed 5 Grommets: rustproof, 6 inches on center 6. Length: Full length of track plus 10 percent fullness 7 Fabricate to minimize seams MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 10150 PAGE 3 of 3 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER CUBICLES TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Determine that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer Starting of the work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. B Examine blocking, support backing, and substrates for acceptable conditions pnor to installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates and connecting work to enable the best installation per industry standards of the work of this section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install per project drawing details and manufacturer's installation standards. B Install a complete assembly true, tight joints, and secure fasteners tightly 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 01400 Quality Control. B. Provide expenenced supervision of all elements of the work of this section. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and Section 01710 Final Cleaning. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Refer to project drawings and schedules for location and extent of work. END OF SECTION 10150 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8. 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 10270 PAGE 1 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER ACCESS FLOORING TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work of this section includes, but is not limited to• 1 Non Magnetic, fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) access flooring 2. Raised access floor system (RAF) B Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Division 3 Cast -In -Place Concrete 2. Division 9 Resilient Flooring 3 Division 16, Electrical Power/Data Communications 4 Coordinate with MRI equipment vendor C. Provide matenals, labor equipment, inspection, coordination, and supervision necessary for the best installation per industry standards of raised access floor system as indicated in this specification and the project drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Submittal Procedures' B Product Data. Product data on physical characteristics C. Shop Drawings: Provide plans, large -scale details and accessory items. Show various panel types required for coordination of mechanical and electrical items. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All items to be provided under this section shall be furnished only by manufacturers having a minimum of the (10) years experience in the design and manufacture of similar non magnetic fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) grating systems. Additionally requested a record of at least five (5) previous, separate, similar successful installations in the last five (5) years shall be provided. B Manufacturer shall be certified to the ISO 9001 2000 standard and shall provide proof of certification from at least two other quality assurance programs for its facilities or products (UL, DNV ABS USCG AARR). C. Load/Deflection. Grating design loads shall be less than manufacturers published maximum recommended loads. Maximum recommended loads shall be determined by acoustic emission testing. Grating shall be designed for a maximum uniform load of 150 psf or concentrated load of 3001b. Deflection is not to exceed 3/8' 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Manufacturer matenals shall be delivered in original, unbroken pallets, packages, containers, or bundles bearing the label of the manufacturer Adhesives, resins and other catalysts and hardeners shall be crated or boxed separately and noted as such to facilitate their movement to a dry indoor storage facility MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 10270 PAGE 2 of 4 OLYMPIC.MEDICAL CENTER ACCESS FLOORING TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Storage of Products: All matenal shall be carefully handled to prevent them from abrasion, cracking, chipping, twisting, and other types of damage. Store adhesives, resins, and their catalysts and hardeners in dry indoor storage facilities between 70 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit (21 to 29 degrees Celsius) until they are required. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Venfy conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best installation per mdustry standards. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Construction Progress Documentation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard warranty shall be a (3) year limited warranty on FRP products against defects m materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM (FRP) A. Non Magnetic Fibergrate Micro -Mesh Molded FRP Grating covered with a solid high pressure laminate designed for floor tile applications. B Acceptable Manufacturers 1 Fibergrate Composite Structures Inc. (800) 527 -4043 2. Others as approved by addenda C General Description 1 Solid Panel. Manufacturer's standard 24' x 24' 2. Thickness: 1.56' with a torerance of plus or minus 1/32' 3 Resin system: Corvex polyester resin system as manufactured by Fibergrate. 4 All finished surfaces of FRP panels shall be smooth, resin -rich, free of voids and without dry spots, cracks, crazes or un- reinforced areas. All glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering 5 Floor Covering: High pressure laminate, manufacturer's standard color Panels are to be prepared to receive resilient flooring provided by other under Division 9 Resilient Flooring. 6 Panel Flame Spread. 25 or less per ASTM E 84 Tunnel Test. Panels shall also have tested burn time of less than 30 seconds and an extent of burn rate of less than or equal to 10 millimeters per ASTM D635 7 Mesh Configuration. 1 1/2' square mesh bottom, square to mesh with a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16' mesh centerline to centerline. Top surface shall be covered with a solid laminate. D Installation: Install access floor system and accessories under supervision of access flooring manufacturer's authorized representatives to ensure a rigid, firm installation free of vibration, rocking, rattle, squeaks. Install all system components in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.2 RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM (STANDARD) (RAF) A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1 Maxcess Technologies, Inc. Summerville, South Carolina MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 10270 PAGE 3 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER ACCESS FLOORING TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2. Others as approved by addenda. B Quality Standard Product: Maxcess Technologies WC 5000 Stnngerless Access Floor System, 24 x 24 inch solid and air flow panels, cut outs and grommets, complete with pedestals to provide 12' finished floor height capable of supporting maximum loads as allowed by the existing building structure. Pedestals conform to panel load- beanng charactenstics with positive locking devices to prevent accidental loss of finished floor height. Laterally stable in all directions. Components should allow for continuous electrical grounding as required. C Description 1 Solid Panel. Manufacturer's standard 24 x 24 gravity held panels that are interchangeable, easily removable with portable lifting devices. 2. Air Flow Panel. Perforated panels similar to solid panel with operable dampers and 25% free open area per 24 x 24 inch panel. Provide perforated panels throughout except directly under equipment. Coordinate location with equipment and HVAC requirements. 3 Floor Covering: High pressure laminate, color as selected by Architect from standard colors. Provide standard edge trim. 4 Plastic Laminate: Formica 503 -58 Stone Grafix matte finish 5 Finish of Steel. Zinc coated 6. Panel Flame Spread. Not to exceed 25 per ASTM E84 7 Pedestals: Standard pedestal assembly with provision for height adjustment. Square or circular base not less than 16 square inches. Provide vibration proof mechanism for making and holding fine adjustments for leveling over a range of not less than 2' Indicate means of locking leveling mechanism at a selected height which requires deliberate action to change height setting and prevents vibratory displacement. D Accessories 1 Cut Outs: Fabricate cut outs in floor panels to accommodate cable penetrations and service outlets required by equipment. All cut outs to have grommeted inserts for finished appearance. 2. Vertical Closures (Fascia) Provide manufacturer's standard where under floor cavity is not enclosed by abutting walls, columns, etc. 3 Steps: Provide steps indicated with floor covering to match access flooring. Apply non- slip aluminum nosings to treads. 4 Railings: Manufacturer's standard satin finish extruded aluminum post and rail system. Provide railings that comply with structural performance for railings. 5 Panel Lifting Device: One set of manufacturer's standard, plus all instructions for lifting to Owner 6. Provide grounding of access floor system as required. E. Installation: Install access floor system and accessories under supervision of access flooring manufacturer's authorized representatives to ensure a rigid, firm installation free of vibration, rocking, rattle, squeaks. Install all system components in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Determine that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer Starting of the work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 10270 PAGE 4 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER ACCESS FLOORING TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates and connecting work to enable the best installation per industry standards of the work of this section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install per manufacturer's recommendation. Adjust to operate perfectly 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Quality Requirements. B Provide expenenced supervision of all elements of the work of this section. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with Division 1 Section `Temporary Construction Facilities' and Section `Final Cleaning. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Provide specialties as shown on project drawings. END OF SECTION 10270 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Provide and install equipment as indicated on drawmgs or schedules. B Coordinate the work per Division 1 as required for equipment furnished and supplied by the Owner C. Coordinate the work per Division 1 for existing items to be relocated. D The work specified shall be of a type and quality equal in all respects to the best recognized practice of trade. E. Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: Provide and/or coordinate installation of OFCI, OFOI, and FIC equipment. F Coordinate the work per Division 1 for existing items to be relocated. For relocated existing equipment from existing inventory to be installed at locations indicated on project drawings, provide appropriate backing, structural supports, electrical rough -ms, and mechanical rough -ms as required for a complete and thorough installation. Coordinate with Owner on timetable and estimated period of designating existing equipment for relocation. Owner will relocate existing equipment (if any) from present location to new location for Contractor to install. G Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1 Division 15 Mechanical 2. Division 16, Electrical 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with Section 01300 Submittals. SECTION 11700 PAGE 1 of 4 EQUIPMENT B Product Data. Provide manufacturer's data and installation instructions on each item to be furnished by the Contractor C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Provide two sets of information on all equipment furnished by the Contractor and submit as required by Section 01300 Submittals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01400 Quality Control. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01610, Delivery Storage, and Handling. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best and most complete installation per industry standards. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Section 01310 Progress Schedule. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Comply with Section 01745 Warranty Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL SECTION 11700 PAGE 2 of 4 EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer's catalogs and installation requirements related to the equipment referred to herein are hereby made a part of this section as if repeated herein. The published standards of quality and methods of installation are mandatory B. Provide equipment where shown on drawings but not less than the quantities which may be specified herein. C Television Bracket (Wall- Mounted): Reference Section 10990 `Miscellaneous Specialties. (FOIC) D VCR Bracket: Reference Section 1099 +0 `Miscellaneous Specialties. (FOIC) E. Equipment indicated for contractor coordination will be designated with the schedule abbreviations as described in Part 2.2A. These abbreviations establish which entity will supply and install all equipment listed. F See divisions 15 and 16, Drawings and Specifications, for associated work requirements. 2.2 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT A. Abbreviations 1 FOIC Furnished by Owner Installed by Contractor 2. FIO Funmshed and Installed by Owner 3 FIC Furnished and Installed by Contractor B Refer to drawings for equipment locations, and description or coordination requirements. 1 All furniture items (chairs, tables desks, carts, couches, plants, stretchers, and other moveable equipment, etc.) are FIO unless otherwise noted. 2. All CRTs, PCs, printers, fax machines, copiers, battery clocks, refrigerators, etc. are FIO unless otherwise noted. 3 All monitoring equipment is FOIC unless otherwise noted. C. (FIO) Equipment List 1 Radio Frequency Shielding RF Shield by ETS-Lindgren a. Room: MRI Room b. Description: RF Shielding; floor perimeter walls, existing window system, and ceiling. c. Coordination: Structural for ceiling Umstrut framing support, structural concrete slab for utility floor trenching, perimeter wall framing for shielding fasteners, Mechanical, and Electrical. d. Installation Responsibility Reference Owner's radio frequency shielding vendor shop drawings attached to Volume 2, Project Drawings and the general engineering notes and primer for general construction methods for acoustic conditioning of the MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI MRI Room attached to the end of this section (17 pages). Contractor to establish critical path on the construction schedule to complete all work required for the RF shielding installation by shielding vendor Contractor is responsible for coordinating and establishing equipment layout and establishing the equipment iso- center for final equipment installation, location of floor trench for equipment conduits and utilities and layout of all equipment routing, and installation of required equipment rough -ins for final connections to include all required mechanical and electrical work. e. d. Contact: Michael Bresnahan, Project Manager Installation, ETS- Lindgren, (630) 912 1092 2. MRI Equipment a. Rooms: MRI Room, Control Room, and Equipment Room b. Description: 1.5T Signa Excite HD by GE Healthcare Technologies c. Coordination. Structural concrete slab utility trench, MRI equipment layout and equipment Iso- Center, Mechanical, and Electrical d. Installation Responsibility Reference Owner's radio frequency shielding vendor shop drawings attached to Volume 2, Project Drawings. Contractor to establish critical path on the construction schedule to complete all work required prior to the MRI equipment installation by the MRI equipment vendor Contractor is responsible for coordinating and establishing exact location of equipment is- center layout of all equipment utility routing installation and preparation of all equipment vendor required items pnor to the final equipment installation. e. Rocky Palombo, Project Manager Installation, GE Healthcare Technologies, (360) 658 -4807 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Determine that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer Starting of the work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates and connecting work to enable the best and most complete installation per industry standards of the work of this section. B Coordinate with Owner vendors, and other trades specific requirements for each piece of equipment installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Take care to follow and comply with all equipment manufacturer installation recommendations. B. If conflict arises between equipment schedule list requirements and manufacturer's requirements, notify the Architect immediately Do not proceed until resolution of the conflict has been accomplished. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 01400 Quality Control. B. Provide experienced supervision of all elements of the work of this section. SECTION 11700 PAGE 3 of 4 EQUIPMENT MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 3.6 SCHEDULE END OF SECTION 11700 SECTION 11700 PAGE 4 of 4 EQUIPMENT A. Comply with Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and Section 01710 Final Cleaning. A. Refer to project drawings and equipment vendor shop drawings for locations of equipment to be installed. 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 ETS 'LINDGREN An ESCO T� Company Section 1 GENERAL ENGINEERING NOTES EN 1 MEDICAL GAS SERVICE EN 2 SPRINKLER LINES EN 3 ELECTRICAL FILTERS EN 4 SCRUB SINKS EN 5 THERMOSTATS EN 6 GENERAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS EN 7 LUTRON LIGHTING SYSTEM EN 8 INTERIOR WALL FURRING STUDS EN 9 STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS for RF ENCLOSURE CEILINGS EN10 ACOUSTIC PRIMER Note- The engineering notes can be applied to all types of RF shielded enclosures used for MRI installations. MEDICAL GAS SERVICE WITHIN MRI RF SHIELDED ENCLOSURES General Within many MRI RF shields there will be a need to provide medical gas services As with any MEP service that would enter a shielded enclosure special RF components called filters are needed to adapt and condition the service for entry into the shielded space To accomplish this requirement for medical gas services' What needs to be shielded: Medical air oxygen, medical vacuum, nitrous oxide and other gas lines How are these services shielded: Lindgren will provide and install special, brass pipe wave guides One wave -guide is required for each medical gas line Each wave -guide is cut to a specific length that is dependant on its diameter SPECIAL CONDITIONS Grounding. The establishment of multiple ground points within a MRI RF shield may lead to the production of electrical eddy currents Eddy currents can corrupt the diagnostic image quality produced by the MRI system. The RF shield must remain electrically isolated from all building and power grounds This requirement is necessary so that a central reference ground (CRG) can be established on the shield at the penetration panel. All medical gas lines are conductive and mechanically attached to the building. As such each gas line will ground the shield if attached to it. Each medical gas wave -guide is provided with a dielectric coupling on its external end. The use of this dielectric fitting prevents each gas line from grounding the RF shield Method of installation: There is one primary method that can be employed for the installation of medical gas lines used on a RF shield. Position all medical gas lines at the location shown in the graphic to the right. Each line must penetrate the shield as close as possible to the CRG terminal that will be located near the MRI penetration panel The wave —guide is one size larger then the selected gas pipe. Pass the gas pipe through the wave guide. Solder or braze the provided threaded flare fitting to the entire circumference of the gas pipe Each line is connected directly to the interior side of the wave -guide All gas lines INTERNAL to the shield must be electrically isolated from any conductive surface within the shield. This is necessary so that the CRG is maintained and no ground loops are created From the medical gas panel run an insulated #10 or larger AWG ground strap ENGINEERING NOTE 1 directly back to the CRG terminal. The installation of a shut off valve box just for the MRI gas services is also highly recommended. Sterilization. Life safety codes require that each component of the medical gas system be properly sterilized. Lindgren will provide stock, off the shelf brass wave guides that are not sterilized. Using the method described for installation of the medical gas line there is no need to sterilize the interior of the wave -guide assembly Codes. By following the installation procedures stated in this engineering note there will not be any conflict with current life safety of NFPA codes Proper location of med. gas lines at penetration panel t rt� Stec. filters 8 utiliies *quip room P, General Within many MRI RF shields there will be a need to provide fire protection services. As with any MEP service that would enter a shielded enclosure special RF components called filters are needed to adapt and condition the service for entry into the shielded space To accomplish this requirement for fire sprinklers services: What needs to be shielded: All fire sprinkler lines that enter the shielded space How are these services shielded: Lindgren will provide and install special, brass pipe wave guides A wave -guide is required for the sprinkler line This wave -guide is cut to a specific length that is dependant on its diameter SPECIAL CONDITIONS ounding The establishment of multiple ground points within a MRI RF shield may lead to the production of electrical eddy currents and ground loops Eddy currents /ground loops can corrupt the diagnostic image quality produced by the MRI system. The RF shield must remain electrically isolated from all building and power grounds This requirement is necessary so that a central reference ground (CRG) can be established on the shield at the penetration panel (PP1). All sprinkler lines are conductive (with the exception of Blaze Master PVC pipe) and mechanically attached to the building. As such, sprinkler lines will ground the shield if attached to it. Provisions of the CRG require that all grounded M.E.P services enter the shield only within an area at or near PP1 Entry at any other location on the shield will violate the CRG requirement. Method of installation: There is one primary method that can be employed for the installation of sprinkler lines used on a RF shield Wet pipe sprinkler systems can be specified for use within the MRI shield Standard iron pipe maybe used for the sprinkler line outside of the shield Use copper brass or 304 stainless steel pipe within the shield Lindgren s installation team will locate the sprinkler pipe wave -guide as shown in the graphic to the right (Note only one primary •ne may enter the shield) Connect the sprinkler line to the )propriate wave -guide using the provided dielectric connector on the exterior side of the shield. The sprinkler ENGINEERING NOTE 2 WET PIPE SPRINKLER LINE SERVICE WITHIN MRI RF SHIELDED ENCLOSURES line is connected directly to the wave- guide on the interior side of the shield. All sprinkler heads within the shield must originate from this primary line All sprinkler lines INTERNAL to the shield must be electrically isolated from any conductive surface within the shield. This is necessary so that the CRG is maintained and no ground loops are created. The installation of a shut off valve just for the MR sprinkler service is also highly recommended. Blaze Master PVC pipe cannot be used with a wet pipe system. Codes Both life safety and NFPA codes may conflict with the special grounding requirement of the RF enclosure when used with an MRI system. The use of the Lindgren sprinkler pipe wave -guide will meet all code requirements if used as stated within this engineering note Failure to comps• with this direction may lead to the production of eddy .urrents and possible degradation of the diagnostic image quality produced by the MRI. Proper location of sprinkler line at penetration panel EMI /RFI ELECTRICAL FILTERS FOR MRI RF SHIELDED ENCLOSURES General Within most MRI RF shields there will be a need to provide electrical services As with any MEP service that would enter a shielded enclosure special RF components called filters are needed to adapt and condition the service for entry into the shielded space. To accomplish this requirement for electrical services' What needs shielding: All electrical circuit conductors that will enter the shielded space. How are these services shielded: Lindgren will provide and install specially tuned electrical filters for each conductor Typically each RF filter will condition two conductors One RF filter will typically satisfy the needs of each circuit. The supply side of the circuit is connected to the supply side (unshielded compartment) of the filter The load side of the circuit is connected to the load side (shielded compartment) of the filter The shielded compartment is open to the interior of the RF shield by way of a brass chase nipple that passes through the shielded surface All RF signals above a specified bandwidth are rejected by the filter and shunted to ground through the shield. SPECIAL CONDITIONS Grounding: The establishment of multiple ground points within a MRI RF shield may lead to the production of electrical eddy currents. Eddy currents can corrupt the diagnostic image quality produced by the MRI system. The RF shield must remain electrically isolated from all building and power grounds This requirement is necessary so that a central reference ground (CRG) can be established on the shield at the MRI penetration panel. A CRG terminal is installed near the penetration panel area and is common to both the inside and outside of the shield The ground conductor from both the supply side (outside the shield) and the load side (inside the shield) of each circuit must connect directly to the CRG terminal. Under no circumstances are any circuit ground conductors to terminate at any point other than the CRG terminal Do not energize any RF electrical filter without first grounding the shield at the CRG terminal. The surface of the shield, if not properly grounded will rise to one half the potential of the applied voltage and present a distinct shock hazard Method of installation. There is one primary method that is employed for the installation of RF electrical filters when used on MRI RF enclosures The Lindgren installation team will install all of the electrical RF filters at the time of the shield installation All of the filters must be placed directly above the MRI penetration panel as detailed in the graphic below This location is necessary to maintain the CRG The metal can of each filter is connected directly to the copper or steel surface of the RF shield Connect all conduit connections to the filters ENGINEERING NOTE 3 using standard metal threaded connectors and flange nuts All electrical services must enter the shielded space by way of the RF filters. Under no circumstances can any electrical conductor enter the shield without first passing through an RF filter On the inside of the shield it is the responsibility of the electrical contractor to install code approved junction boxes or gutters on each RF filter chase nipple. Per NEC RF electrical filters are an active electrical device and must remain accessible Digital electrical circuits may require special impedance match RF filters. The electrical contractor makes all circuit connections to the filters. Codes: Both life safety and NFPA codes may conflict with the special grounding requirement of the RF enclosure when used with an MRI system. Every effort should be made to use the dielectric connectors at the conduit connection to the filters to avoid the production of eddy currents and possible degradation of the diagnostic image quality produced by the MRI Should the local code authority not approve of the general grounding methods employed on the shield for MRI installations please contact your local Lindgren representative for further information. filters utiliies M equip. room Use standard metal electrical connectors at each RF filter Each circuit ground conductor to terminate at the CRG buss bar located below the electrical filters SINK WATER LINE SERVICE WITHIN MRI RF SHIELDED ENCLOSURES 11 General: Within some MRI RF shields there will be a need to provide a sink for wash up and other medical services As with any M.E.P service that would enter a shielded enclosure special RF components called filters are needed to adapt and condition the service for entry into the shielded space To accomplish this requirement for sink services. What needs shielding: All water drain and vent lines that enter the shielded space How are these services shielded' Lindgren will provide and install special, brass pipe wave guides One wave -guide is required for each line Each wave -guide is cut to a specific length that is dependant on it's diameter SPECIAL CONDITIONS Grounding: The establishment of multiple ground points within a MRI RF shield may lead to the production of electrical eddy currents Eddy currents can corrupt the diagnostic image quality produced by the MRI system. The RF shield must remain electrically isolated from all building and power grounds This requirement is necessary so that a central reference ground (CRG) can be established on the shield at the penetration panel. All copper water lines are conductive and mechanically attached to the building. As such water lines will ground the shield if attached to it. The water charge in each line will also provide a grounding means to the shield. The use of a dielectric fitting on the exterior side of the water line wave guide will not eliminated the grounding effect of the water charge. The water charge can also provide a means for the conduction of RF energy into the shield. Method of installation There is one primary method of installation for the sink water lines and two primary methods for installation of sink vent, and drain lines when used in a RF shield All water lines must enter the RF shield within the penetration panel area. Position both the hot and cold water lines at the location shown in the graphic to the right. All water lines external to the shield are to be connected to the wave guides using a two (2) foot section of PVC pipe Do not run PVC pipe material within the RF shield, copper piping must be used Connect copper lines internal to the shield directly to the brass wave guides. Connect directly to the sink. All water lines INTERNAL to the shield must be electrically isolated from any conductive surface within the shield. This is necessary so that the CRG is maintained and no ground loops are created The installation of shut off valves just for the MR water service is also highly recommended. Vent and drain lines method ONE. LRFE will provide a 2 1/2' x 10' brass wave -guide through the RF shield at a location designated by the contractor The contractor will insert a 2' PVC line through the wave -guide This line will be connected to the sink P trap and to the vent and drain lines located in the parent wall. Vent and drain lines method TWO The drain line will exit the space through the RF shielded floor directly below the sink. Provide a 3' PVC sleeve cut flush with the top of the floor slab LRFE will install a 2' brass wave -guide into the PVC sleeve. Use only PVC material for the sink drain line Connect the external side of the drain to the provided wave -guide. LRFE will provide a 1 1/2' brass wave -guide for the sink vent directly above the sink within the interior cavity wall. Connect a PVC vent line from the sink to this wave -g uide Note location of water lines at penetration panel. Note the use of dielectric couplings Elec. filters utiliies .equip. loom General. Within MRI RF shields there will be a need to provide a means to monitor and regulate both the air temperature and humidly As with any M.E.P service that would enter a shielded enclosure special RF components called filters are needed to adapt and condition the service for entry into the shielded space To accomplish this requirement for temperature and humidity services' What needs shielding: All power and control electrical lines and /or pneumatic lines that enter the shielded space How are these services shielded: Lindgren will provide and install special, brass pipe wave guides One wave -guide is required for each line Each wave -guide is cut to a specific length that is dependant on it's diameter Electrical EMI RF filters will be provided for each electrical conductor SPECIAL CONDITIONS Grounding The establishment of multiple ground points within a MRI RF shield may lead to the production of electrical eddy currents. Eddy currents can corrupt the diagnostic image quality produced by the MRI system. The RF shield must remain electrically isolated from all building and power grounds This requirement is necessary so that a central reference ground (CRG) can be established on the shield at the penetration panel. All copper pneumatic lines are conductive and mechanically attached to the building. As such, copper lines will ground the shield if attached to it. The ground conductor from both the supply side (outside the shield) and the load side (inside the shield) of each circuit must connect directly to the CRG terminal. Under no circumstances are any circuit ground conductors to terminate at any point other than the CRG terminal. Do not energize any RF electrical filter without first grounding the shield at the CRG terminal. The surface of the shield, if not properly grounded will rise to one half the potential of the applied voltage and present a distinct shock hazard. Method of installation. There are a number of methods that can be employed for the installation of either a thermostat or humidistat when used in a RF shield The item driving the decision on which method to use is primarily total cost. The following is a list of some of the various methods that can be used for the installation of these items: 1) DO NOT use a mercury switch type thermostat within the RF shield The electrical contacts within this type of unit ENGINEERING NOTE 5 THERMOSTAT /HUMIDISTAT SERVICE WITHIN MRI RF SHIELDED ENCLOSURES will arch generating RF noise. 2) PREFERRED METHOD Located a remote thermostat sensor inside of the return air duct external to the shield Place the thermostat control unit in the control room area. The same holds true if a humidistat is used. Net cost to the shield is $0 00 3) IF LOCATING A PNEUMATIC THERMOSTAT WITHIN THE SHIELD Route a plastic pneumatic line through the 1/2 brass wave -guide provided (typically located near the penetration panel). Do not run a copper pneumatic line Net cost to the shield is approximately $75 00 4) IF INSTALLING A DIGITAL THERMOSTAT WITHIN THE SHIELD Provide total number of electrical conductors required. Provide exact digital characteristics of the system so that impedance matched digital RF filters can be provided. Net cost to the shield is approximately $600 $1200+ depending on total number of electrical lines needed. 5) IF INSTALLING AN ANALOG THERMOSTAT WITHIN THE SHIELD Provide total number of electrical conductors required. Net cost to the shield is approximately $600 $1200+ depending on total number of electrical lines needed. Contact your local Lindgren representative for further information if needed. LIGHTING SYSTEMS FOR MRI RF SHIELDED ENCLOSURES General Within all MRI RF shields there will be a need to provide either DC o, AC lighting services. As with any M.E P service that would enter a shielded enclosure special RF components called filters are needed to adapt and condition the service for entry into the shielded space To accomplish this requirement for lighting services. What needs shielding. All electrical lighting circuit conductors that will enter the shielded space. How are these services shielded: Lindgren will provide and install specially tuned electrical filters for each conductor T.ypically each RF filter will condition two conductors. One RF filter will typically satisfy the needs of each circuit. The supply side of the circuit is connected to the supply side (unshielded compartment) of the filter The load side of the circuit is connected to the load side (shielded compartment) of the filter The shielded compartment is open to the interior of the RF shield by way of a brass chase nipple that passes through the shielded surface All RF signals above a specified bandwidth are rejected by the filter and shunted to ground through the shield. SPECIAL CONDITIONS. Grounding: The establishment of multiple ground points within a `4R1 RF shield may lead to the production of electrical eddy irrents. Eddy currents can corrupt the diagnostic image quality oduced by the MRI system. The RF shield must remain electrically isolated from all building and power grounds. This requirement is necessary so that a central reference ground (CRG) can be established on the shield at the MRI penetration panel. A CRG terminal is installed near the penetration panel (PP1) area and is common to both the inside and outside of the shield The ground conductor from both the supply side (outside the shield) and the load side (inside the shield) of each circuit must connect directly to the CRG terminal Under no circumstances are any circuit ground conductors to terminate at any point other than the CRG terminal. Do not energize any RF electrical filter without first grounding the shield at the CRG terminal The surface of the shield, if not properly grounded, will rise to one half the potential of the applied voltage and present a distinct shock hazard Method of installation. Refer to Lindgren engineering note 3 for the correct method of RF electrical filter installation and connection. For systems using Direct Current lighting The Direct Current Lighting Controller (M LC) that will power the DC lights is prolEi and installed by the electrical contractor A single -phase 120 configurable modular lighting controller (MLC) is available from Lindgren. The MLC can be configured for both variable and non var e DC systems and variable AC systems. A 3 -phase 208 dual circuit, 3000 watt DCLC is also available from Lindgren Other Commercial DCLC systems are available For both variable and non- variable DC voltage systems 1) Supply B /Ov B /Ov to each lighting circuit RF filter All circuit grounds to CRG terminal. 2) It is preferred that all circuit switching occur outside of the shield Place the DC circuit switch in the B supply side leg that •eds the RF filter If both inside and outside switching (3 way ,witch) is desired please note that these configurations will double the cost of the required RF electrical filters. ENGINEERING NOTE 6 3) Phase angle or other reactive dimmer devices CAN NOT be used INSIDE of the shield For non variable DC voltage systems only This would employ a full wave rectifier either single phase or 3 -phase power For variable (dimming) DC voltage systems If employing an autotransformer primary locate raise /lower switch outside of the shield only If using a Lutron® dimmer system use special application RF filters and line isolation transformers The special impedance matched RF filters are not part of the basic RF shield and must be ordered separately by the electrical contractor The line isolation transformers are provided and installed by the electrical contractor not by Lindgren. If using an AC rectifier only This system is NOT compatible with any phase angle or other reactive dimmer devices. This system can employ tap switching or autotransforrners or rheostats on the AC supply side only If both inside and outside switching (3 -way switch) is desired note that this will double the cost for required RF filters. For MRI systems using AC lighting systems: Supply hot neutral to each lighting circuit RF filter All circuit grounds to CRG terminal. This system is NOT compatible with any phase angle or other reactive dimmer devices. This system can employ tap switching or autotransformers or rheostats on the AC supply side only Phase angle or other reactive dimmer devices CAN NOT be used INSIDE of the shield. If both inside and outside switching (3 way switch) is desired note that this will double the cost for required RF filters. Contact you local Lindgren representative for further information if gireS1. DC converter modules I Variable AC voltage modules Lindgren s modular MRI, AC/DC lighting controller system (MLC) ENGINEERING NOTE 7 LUTRONO LIGHTING SYSTEMS FOR MRI RF SHIELDED ENCLOSURES General Within all MRI RF shields there will be a need to provide either DC or AC lighting services As with any M E.P service that would enter a shielded enclosure special RF components called filters are needed to adapt and condition the service for entry into the shielded space The commercially available Lutron® AC or DC variable lighting system requires special electrical devices that are not normally used with more typical lighting systems employed on an MRI RF shielded enclosure If you have purchased a Lutron® lighting system please be aware of the following: Lindgren RF Enclosures Inc. (LRFE) does not provide any special application electrical devices with in our standard MRI RF enclosure for inclusion of a Lutron® lighting system. Standard LRFE EMI power fitters that are provided with our MRI RF enclosures are fully compatible with any variable voltage or non variable voltage full wave rectified DC lighting system or a variable or non variable AC voltage lighting system. Any lighting system that would employ phase -angle firing control of thyristors to achieve variable lamp brilliance are not compatible with standard LRFE EMI power filters The Lutron® is one such phase -angle thyristor lighting system. It is the responsibility of the electrical contractor to contact LRFE and request the purchase of special application, impedance matched E1889 EMI power filters for use with the Lutron® system. Other issues concerning ground isolation and the generation of ground loops must also be address when a Lutron® or other phase -angle dimmer system is to be employed on an RF shield that will house a MRI diagnostic imaging scanner Please be aware of the following. For new installations where the electrical contractor has purchased the special application, impedance matched, E1889 EMI power filters for use with a Lutron® system. Proper method of installation for each lighting circuit: 1) From the lighting panel connect the service to the primary of a properly configured line isolation transformer (contact Lutron® for correct transformer rating). 2) Ground the transformer case to the lighting panel ground bus, NOT to the Lutron® power supply cabinet. DO NOT bring a power ground from the transformer to the Lutron® PIS The conduit from the transformer to the Lutron® P/S must have a dielectric connector installed at the isolation transformer to isolate the safety ground from the Lutron® P/S 3) Connect the secondary of the isolation transformer to the input of the Lutron® P/S 4) Connect the output of the Lutron® to the service (input) side of the E1889 EMI filter located on the RF shield. 5) Connect a ground from the Lutron® P/S case to the central reference ground (CRG) bus located on the RF shield. 6) Connect the load (output) side of the E1889 EMI filter to the associated circuit lamp loads 7) Connect the associated circuit lamp load ground directly back to the central reference ground (CRG) bus located on the RF shield. For existing installations where standard EMI RF filters are already in place Proper method of installation for each lighting circuit: 1) Replace standard EMI RF filters with LRFE special application, impedance matched, E1889 EMI power filters. 2) Follow installation directions for new installations. Contact you Lindgren representative for further information if required. INTERIOR WALL FURRING STUDS FOR MRI RF SHIELDED ENCLSOURES1 General: All Lindgren RF Enclosures (LRFE) used for MRI applications are typically self supporting and independent of the building structure The primary building structure is referred to as the "parent structure or parent walls Parent structures can be partition walls, exterior structural walls ceiling structures, and the structural slab. The RF shield essentially becomes a derivative of these parent structures. Do to the electrical nature of an RF shield it is important that all parent wall surfaces that comprise the parent room be covered with a layer of sheet rock. This layer of sheet rock is used solely to provide additional dielectric separation between the RF shield and the building. Once the RF shield is installed the contractor will now have to provide and install all interior finishes. The term interior" used within this note refers to the interior of the RF shield, not the parent structure Interior walls: Interior walls can be applied to LRFE shields in .a number of ways. Wood furring studs can be used as well as standard galvanized steel fusing studs. Steel studs may be used at the discretion of the magnet supplier WHEN USING A LRFE ALL COPPER SHIELD. For wood studs Apply vertically directly to the wood frames of the RF shield panels, wide face (3 -1/2") against the frames. ?tach using standard sheet rock screws no longer than 2 1/2' the shield employs a wide base rail (3 -1/2") set the studs on me base rail. The base rail will act as the bottom sill plate for the attachment of the sheet rock. If the shield employs a narrow base rail (1 314 set the studs on the floor Cut additional 2x4 material in between each stud at the floor line for attachment of the sheet rock or run a sill plate. This method will result in a 1 1/2" cavity wall to route electrical and other services in. Do not nail into the floor for any reason! Install sheet rock with standard sheet rock screws. ENGINEERING NOTE 8 For steel studs: Place the base channel on the floor in front of and along the base rail of the RF shield. Attach this channel with standard drill in screws. Use liquid nail along the bottom to attach to the floor surface (the liquid nail is optional). For the channel at the top of the RF shield, place this channel at the ceiling and attach to the top support rail of the wall panels. At each horizontal frame member of the RF ceiling panels, attach the channel vertically to each horizontal member Use screws no longer than 1" to attach either channel. Do not nail or drill into the floor for any reason! Install vertical wall studs and other framing members in normal fashion to top and bottom channels. Install sheet rock with standard sheet rock screws. Do not leave any screws in the sheet rock that are not directly attached to a stud! WHEN USING A LRFE GALVANIZED STEEL MODULAR SHIELD Typically steel furring studs are always used within a modular RF shield. 1r the base channel Place base channel on floor align 1/2' of the RF wall. Use 1/2' drill -in screws to attach the base channel directly to the RF floor For the ceiling channel place a 1/8' masonite shim between the top channel and the ceiling panel. The masonite is used to shim out the top channel where it passes over the panel clamps Attach only to the ceiling panels. Use 1/2" drill -in screws to attach this channel Should you strip out a screw replace it with the next oversize screw (still 1/2 Do not leave any striped holes in the shield material! Install vertical wall studs and other framing members in normal fashion to top and bottom channels. Install sheet rock with standard sheet rock screws. Do not leave any screws in the sheet rock that are not directly attached to a stud! Contact you local Lindgren representative for further information if required. V Std. Metal studs. Use 16g studs in seismic zones Std. Wood studs. Use UL fire rated where required. General. Typical RF enclosures are self supported structures with the exception of the RF enclosure ceiling assembly The wall assemblies of the enclosure bear the applied load of the ceiling at its perimeter The ceiling panels are not designed to span the width of the enclosure and remain rigid. These panels will require additional structural support external to the enclosure The RF enclosure ceiling assembly will also bear the applied loads of the interior finished ceiling and other devices installed by the customer These customer installed devices are but not limited to acoustical or sheet rock ceiling, lighting systems HVAC ductwork, medical gas piping, sprinkler line piping cryogenic exhaust system, computer monitors, surgical lamps, etc STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS FOR RF ENCLOSURE CEILINGS Certain customer installed devices can be supported directly by the enclosures ceiling assembly Others such as sprinkler pipes and surgical lamps must have their applied load transferred through the ceiling assembly and supported directly to the building structure above Seismic conditions will also have a direct effect on the methods used to support the RF ceiling. SPECIAL CONDITIONS Grounding The establishment of multiple ground points within a MRI RF shield may lead to the production of electrical eddy currents. Eddy currents can corrupt the diagnostic image quality produced by the MRI system The RF shield must remain electrically isolated from all building and power grounds. This requirement is necessary so that a central reference ground (CRG) can be established on the shield at the MRI penetration panel. All structural supports from the RF enclosure s ceiling assembly must be electrically separated from the building structure to avoid the establishment of multiple ground points within a MRI RF shield. Lindgren will provide all require dielectric connectors at the shield. Method of installation. The customer should anticipate that in all cases the enclosure s ceiling would be supported by the building structure overhead. In certain conditions; determined by the width of the shield fire codes, and or available space above the shield, Lindgren may employ wood beams bearing on the RF shield walls to support the RF ceiling. The addition of magnetic shielding (usually in the form of 1 3mm of silicon steel) will also determine the method of support for the ceiling. Responsibility of the customer Do to hidden conditions accessibility and safety concerns, Lindgren will not drill into the building structure to install load bearing points for the RF ceiling The customer is responsible for all structural connections to the parent building. These connections can take the form of but not limited to Default conditions. provided by existing conditions such as Bar joist or wood joist must run parallel to the long axis of the shield. Cannot exceed 4 on center Site conditions and shield size allow the use of Lindgren supplied fire treated strand wood, support beams. In most cases the default condition should not require any additional work by the customer Typical conditions above the enclosure requiring the installation ENGINEERING NOTE 9 of structural attachment points by the customer Concrete deck Metal deck Bar joist or wood joist that run perpendicular to the long axis of the shield. Wide flange steel beams TJI Roof Joist Building structures greater than 2 feet above the top of the RF enclosure Bearing points need to be lowered to an elevation that equals the enclosure height plus 2 feet. Support of customer installed items such as: sprinkler pipes, cryogenic exhaust system, computer or TV monitors, surgical lamps, hard lid finished ceilings, other cantilevered or articulating equipment. Seismic conditions A common customer installed support design is the addition of P1000S unistrut mounted to the building structure above The initial run of unistrut would be along the front to back (longitudinal) centerline of the shield and additional runs on 3 -foot centers left and right of the centerline above the ceiling area The attachment system must be in place prior to the start of the RF enclosure installation. The customer is responsible to determine if the existing building condition can support the RF ceiling load and any additional interior loads installed by the customer Typical applied RF Shield ceiling loads (lbs /sq/ft) I Copper shield 1 2.21 1 18/18 gauge glav 1 6 4 1 I 28 gauge Galvanized 1 4.75 I 12/28 gauge glav 1 7.3 1 The customer is responsible for the design and installation of any and all structural supports for items other than the RF enclosure assembly provided by Lindgren. Lindgren will assist the customer with methods and devices that pass through the RF ceiling assembly to maintain RF integrity Contact Lindgren s project manager for additional information on transferring structural loads through the RF ceiling assembly Refer to the current edition of Lindgren s preliminary engineering handbook for MRI RF shielded enclosures. See section 2 pages 30a 30e for section views of typical ceiling support methods. Contact your local Lindgren representative for further information if re. uired ENGINEERING NOTE 10 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR ACOUSTIC CONDITIONING OF THE MRI ROOM PRIMER GENERAL CONSTRUCT ON METHODS FOR ACOUSTIC COND T ON NG OF THE MR ROOM This pamphlet is made available to Lindgren RF Enclosures customers and their agents for reference only The customer should consult directly with their architect or acoustic consultant for additional information concerning acoustic conditioning of the MRI space. Please reference any technical information made available by the MRI manufacturer concerning actual and potential sound levels produced by the selected MRI Imaging System. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR ACOUSTIC CONDITIONING OF THE MRI ROOM With the advent of ever more powerful gradient coils within many of the newer MRI systems noise abatement is becoming an issue that needs to be addressed by the end user Many of the new MRI systems will produce average sound pressure levels (SPL) in the order of 100 110 dBA, with peak SPL s of 120 dB Although the patient undergoing the procedure is located at the epicenter of the resonator module (magnet, RF and gradient coils) their exposure is only for a short time Without proper noise mitigation of the MRI room the technical staff and other local area personnel will be subjected to long -term acoustic noise exposure The primary RF shield structure does not contribute much in the way of acoustic noise suppression. Even with the addition of acoustic suppression kits to the primary shield structure the contribution is minimal when integrated within a properly engineered and constructed building system. The major role of the RF system in the total acoustic package relates to the RF doors and RF windows The end user should always default to proven general construction methods and procedures as the primary means of acoustic noise suppression The following text and diagrams are being provided by Lindgren to assist the end user with information and suggested construction methods so that the completed MRI suite will result in a successful installation Acoustic barriers are typically designated by a STC" rating. The STC (Sound Transmission Class) rating or number is the average figure across a frequency band used to express the decibel loss when sound energy passes through a material or combination of materials STC numbers are not additive Adding a STC 30 barrier to an STC 50 barrier does not create a STC 80 assembly The assembly may have an actual STC number of 53 or 55 Acoustic transmission paths: Airborne. The magnet creates a high- energy sound pressure level (SPL) that excites the air within the MRI room. This action is similar to that of a powerful load speaker Airborne noise is transmitted through the surfaces of the room and via any openings such as small holes cracks or seams HVAC ducts wave -guides penetration panels into the surrounding spaces The acoustic noise can transit great distances Structure borne. The structure borne transmission path is the result of mechanical excitation of the floor /building structure causing the building to vibrate The vibration of the surfaces at surrounding spaces then radiates a; acoustic noise Structure borne acoustic energy can also transit great distances It should be noted that structure borne noise is a concern in only a small percentage (5 -10 of MRI installation sites Suggested Design Guidelines Magnet Room: Noise generated by the MR is inherent to the operation of the system. The sound quality (human perception) within the Magnet Room can be modified by the introduction of sound absorbing materials to make the room sound more subdued and less harsh. Applied sound adsorption materials have an effect on sound reverberation within the space The measured sound levels within the space via a sound level meter will not change However the measured sound levels can only be reduced when the sound level generated by the MR System is reduced. Sound quality (reverberation) improvements can be achieved by the following o Use ceiling tiles with fiberglass panels having a 2 -inch (51 mm) thickness set into the standard T -bar grid system. o Adding fiberglass panels to the sidewalis covering approximately 20% or more of the sidewall surface area. The panels should focus on covering the top half of 1 Inter-Spatial Areas the sidewalls Panels could take many different and decorative shapes to improve the sterile look of the rooms Typically panels might be on the order of 4ft x 6ft (1.2m x 1 8m) with a .thickness of 4 inches (102mm) or equivalent. Panel shapes could be varied to produce mosaic effects to meet the customer preference Any decorative materials used to cover the wall panels must be porous so that sound waves can pass through with ease In principle a person should be able to breath through the decorative cover material with ease Fire retardant cloth should be used The NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient) of the panels should be 0 95 or better when mounted against a hard surface such as drywall or concrete Acoustic noise control to mitigate noise from being transmitted to other spaces often amounts to paying attention to small details while working with ordinary construction materials The key objectives are to eliminate all cracks and gaps in the wall construction while making sure that the doors walls floor and ceiling have adequate transmission loss via mass or special double wall construction along with good fitting well designed doors Sound that exits the room through cracks gaps or other poorly constructed joints is know as "flanking noise Walls with substantial mass and /or double wall construction must surround the entire magnet, this is so that noise is contained in the room and not allowed to pass through into nearby spaces Wall junctions must be sealed with acoustical sealant so that sound waves to do not escape from the room. In principle the MRI room should be rendered airtight. Wall Construction Wall Construction should involve ordinary building materials in a carefully designed configuration The preferred acoustic wall having an ASTM STC50 or better rating would entails the use of standard wall construction of steel studs (typically 3-5/8 inch (92 mm)) with 2 layers of Type X drywall (typically 5/8 (16 mm)) on each side totaling 4 layers and fiberglass batt in the stud cavity Both the inner and outer layers of drywall should have their seams offset from each other by a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm). Beads of (USG) Acoustical Caulking (non- hardening) would be used around the entire perimeter of the drywall. Any form of wall penetration should be avoided Any necessary wall penetrations must be sealed using combination of Acoustical Caulking (non hardening) and fiberglass batt material. Please review detail 2 attached. The wall structure must join the ceiling and floor structures so that no cracks or gaps occur If a structural, metal pan ceiling is used then flute seals would be necessary to seal the gaps between the drywall and the pan Alternately drywall can be cut out to fit into the flutes Acoustical caulking (non hardening) will be used to seal the remaining cracks and gaps The new cavity wall constructed inside of the RF shield should employ acoustic treatments The cavity wall should be filled with fiberglass insulation. Two layers of 5/8" GWB should be applied as the interior finish surface Follow the above recommendations for the application of Acoustical Caulking (non hardening). Hiah Bav RF Room A high bay RF Room is a self contained RF Room which has open air space between the RF Room ceiling and the building floor above The air space is a plenum and will act as an acoustic transmission path Acoustic energy must be reduced to minimize the transmission of energy through this path In cases where the magnet is to be installed in a high bay area it may be most effective to enclose the RF Room within its own steel stud and drywall room. The ceiling assembly would be constructed to mimic the sidewall construction to contain the sound energy 2 High STC stud walls would be used to support a ceiling assembly constructed of structural C channel or structural studs with two layers of drywall on each side (total of 4 layers) with fiberglass batt in the cavity The RF shield would reside within this acoustically dampened space Penetrations should be avoided within the acoustically dampened space HVAC and ducts passing through the ceiling party wall or sidewalls would require acoustic noise attenuation in the form of commercially available inline duct silencers Gaps and cracks would be sealed between the ceiling, party wall or vertical sidewalls and the cryogen vent plumbing Miscellaneous Plumbing. RF Windows and RF Doors Other construction details are equally important to mitigate noise transmission to meet the intended goal. Pipes (gas or water) and electrical conduit or Magnet Room signal cables must be sealed where they penetrate the walls or ceiling. A heavy mastic material such as DuxsealTM is appropriate. RF windows should be purchased as window /frame units with an STC rating obtained from laboratory testing per ASTM standards STC 40 50 windows are needed The installation must include proper sealing to avoid sound leaks RF doors should be selected to provide and STC 30 or 40 to quell the noise Contact RF Shield Room supplier for selection of RF doors that meet the local acoustic codes and site acoustic requirements RF door seals must be selected to prevent small gaps (flanking points) around the door perimeter and at the door threshold. RF door seals may require periodic replacement due to normal wear and tear Penetration panel areas should be enclosed in an acoustically dampened closet or small room with acoustically rated access door(s). Other items and materials RF windows. Lindgren s standard RF shielded view window used between the operators control room and the MRI room has a ASTM STC39 rating Further improvement to the window area can be achieved by adding a third layer of laminated glass to the exterior finished wall assembly This addition will provide a STC 42+ rating The use of leaded radiation glass could also be used The added mass of the leaded glass will further improve the STC rating of the view window area. Please review detail 1 attached. RF doors. Most RF doors provide little in the way of acoustic performance To achieve an STC50 sound door rating would require an expensive and massive door Consideration needs to be given to how the technical staff would function with this type of door Not only would the door require sound abatement it still needs to function as a RF capable door Lindgren offers sound abatement kits for both our conventional MR4 RF door and our fully automatic Auto SeaITM RF door These kits are available in either an STC30 or STC32 configuration. The STC32 kits provide user friendly operation and high RF performance at a reasonable cost. Please review detail 3 attached RF shield decouolina: It is imperative for enhanced sound abatement; that the type of RF shield used be completely independent of the parent room walls Lindgren RF shields are self supporting and do not rely on the parent room walls for structural support. The air space between the Lindgren RF shield and the acoustically design parent walls acts as an excellent barrier to sound transmission The use of lead base metal materials. Lead shielding can be a very effective means of providing sound abatement. Although more expensive then gypsum wallboard (GWB) lead sheet affords a thinner wall section and is easily formed Lead sheet is heavy with a surface density of 59# /sq. ft/inch of thickness Because it has an inherent limpness or softness lead cannot be easily set in vibration It does not resonate or ring hence it 3 cannot radiate sound. Contact Ray -Bar Engineering @626 969 -1818 for additional information concerning the use of lead base metal materials for sound abatement. Concerning the addition of acoustic damoina kits to the RF shield Lindgren offers as an option sound absorption kits that can be applied directly to the RF shield walls and ceiling. The addition of one of the kits to the RF shield, when no other acoustic construction methods have been instituted to the overall construction of the MRI room, will have only a limited effect on total noise control of the MRI resonator One must keep in mind that the bulk of the noise reduction control remains with the primary building structures rot the RF shield For sites where all new construction will occur: The customer should follow the recommendations for construction of the parent room walls and ceiling areas as discussed in this primer or at the direction of their architect or acoustic consultant. The use of the recommended parent room structures will provide the least expensive and best overall result without the added expense of an optional RF shield acoustic kit. If a RF acoustic kit is used it will only result in an additional 5 17db increase in overall structural performance of the room. The new cavity wall constructed inside of the RF shield should employ acoustic treatments. The cavity wall should be filled with fiberglass insulation. Two layers of 5/8" GWB should be applied as the interior finish surface Follow the above recommendations for the application of Acoustical Caulking (non hardening). For sites where existing construction will remain. At locations where the RF shield will be placed within existing parent wall structures the addition of a shield kit may be appropriate The customer may still find that it will be Tess expensive to replace the existing parent walls with acoustically constructed wall assemblies If the existing walls were to remain unaltered then the addition of the RF kit along with the construction acoustically rated walls within the interior of the RF shield would prove beneficial. Again the overall contribution of the RF shield kit to a wall assembly consisting of existing parent room partitions and new interior acoustic partitions would be marginally beneficial. The new cavity wall constructed inside of the RF shield should employ acoustic treatments The cavity wall should be filled with fiberglass insulation. Two layers of 5/8 GWB should be applied as the interior finish surface Follow the above recommendations for the application of Acoustical Caulking (non hardening) 4 C.EILIN6 ks it 7T5 ALL pE E'iRAT1O7 •D RJ PARTmON fECTYEi Wink/6 RM A?iD tXAM. T414) TO DE WALED AIRT46HT AC/O TGA! Y*(1 VON V4" LAM1NATM dn.A55 T 1 STOPS ALL AR..7UO PR.7ti(ID` 5/4 AND Gr''v, RN:7 TRIM AT 4FEAD AJ 3 .Y'11+55_ ._s 2 WAD A+ i- A T I N MARKET (RA-- 'r 1 -I V4' 2 LAYERS !Jb EYP 9D vAi :ON N;?Di^i D::TAI S ON 5.4T A./c etiNOO?i SILL 3OTr? 51t S (F'AIMT.) 9' Saltzo ATTe4JA T IoN B:AN Pal_ HTJ Ceutis A A *1 ADPA x ADDUiDA INC #209-445 x017 MRI RENOVATIONS Suggested detail to achieve optimal STC acoustic rating at operators view window Typical Lindgren RF shielded view windows carry an STC 39 rating. The addition of the third layer of glass will increase the overall rating of the window area to STC45+ Follow accepted construction practices for the use of acoustic caulking (non hardening) and trim. 1: L 2 layers 5/8' GWB Air space between RF shield parent wall (2 typical) RF shield assembly Optional acoustic kit can be installed I 611014112MINMSZOnr. I 8' c/c typical 1 Repeat on 8' c/c Fill cavity with fiberglass insulating material 16 c/c 4 Parer' ,all condition M a Yr d Interior 5/8 GWB Use 2 layers 5/8' GWB for higher STC 4 Alternate. Fill this area with fiberglass insulating material with air gap at GWB q surface (provides higher STC rating) Optimal construction method to achieve STC50+ acoustic rating of the MRI suite wall assembly Detail 2 lo Typical steel wall studs •t: Interior steel wall stud J 1 Space can be filled with fiberglass insulation Off set stud c/c by a 1 min. Lindgren can pro\ ide a rarietri of acoustic modifications to the RF shield Either the addition of rock wool inserts (least acoustic contnbution) or mineral wool inserts (moderate acoustic contribution) to high- densit\ fiberglass inserts (maximum acoustic contnbution) The photos below are of one of more then 12 RF shields with the high density fiberglass acoustic modification recentl\ installed at the Ma\ o Clinic 61b high density fiberglass acoustic inserts Placed in all Ny al1 and ceiling surfaces When used with a STC 50+ rated parent wall assemblies without penetrations the RF shield wall and ceiling assemblies are capable of contributing an additional 7 10 STC rating points dependant on the type of interior wall preparations pro\ ided b\ the customer to the entire acoustic assembl\ that consist of the parent walls /ceiling_ RF shield acoustic modification and finished interior walls MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 15010• Mechanical Work General 15050• Basic Materials Methods 15070• Mechanical Seismic Vibration Control 15080• Mechanical Insulation 15100• Domestic Water Drainage Piping 15180- Heating Piping 15184 Refrigerant Piping 15210• Medical Gas Systems 15300- Fire Protection Systems 15730• Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment 15800• Air Distribution 15830• HVAC Fans 15900• Instrumentation Controls 15950• Testing, Adjusting Balancing SECTION TOC PAGE 1 of 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15010 PAGE 1 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section applies to all Division 15 Work. 1.3 INTENT A. Intent: 1 The intention of the Contract Documents is to include all labor and materials, tools, hoisting, scaffolding, supervision, equipment, and transportation necessary or reasonably inferable as being necessary for the execution of the work. 2. The Contractor is responsible for providing the finished mechanical work, tested and ready for operation. 3 By submitting a proposal, the Contractor represents that it has made a thorough examination of the site, of the work, and all existing conditions and limitations, and that it has examined the Contract Documents in complete detail, and has determined beyond doubt that the drawings, specifications, and existing conditions are sufficient, adequate, and satisfactory for the construction of the work under the Contract. 4 Where minor adjustments of the work are necessary for purposes of fabrication or installation of items, or resolution of conflicts between items within the intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall make such adjustments with no added compensation. Where such adjustments affect functional or aesthetic design of the work, they shall first be submitted to the Architect for review and approval. PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Site Conditions. The mechanical documents indicate certain site conditions to assist the Contractor These drawings are not intended to indicate all conditions. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine all site conditions prior to purchase and fabrication of new materials. 1.4 COORDINATION MECHANICAL WORK, GENERAL A. Contractor shall be thoroughly acquainted with the work involved and shall determine at the site those measurements necessary for proper installation of the work. B Contractor shall refer to architectural and electrical drawings for building construction and other details which affect the mechanical installation and shall confer with all other trades for finish adjacent to its work and arrange to have visible portions of this work (such as access doors, grilles, sprinkler heads, escutcheons, etc.) fit in and harmonize with the finish in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. C. Contractor shall identify all serviceable items (valves, dampers, coils, etc.) so that the ceiling subcontractor may know where to furnish and install access -type panels should a lift -up type ceiling not be installed. Locations of access panels shall be approved by Architect prior to installation. D Ceiling Heights: Architectural drawings shall be checked for ceiling heights, walls, and cabinets that are intended to conceal work of this Section. Where conflicts occur the Architect shall be notified prior to installation of the work. Location of exposed work such as lights, diffusers, speakers, sprinkler heads take precedence over concealed work. CO 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15010 PAGE 2 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.5 SPACE COORDINATION 1.6 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MECHANICAL WORK, GENERAL E. Building Commissioning: 1 Commissioning of the mechanical systems and equipment, including air balancing, will be implemented for this project. Commissioning is contracted between the Owner and an independent, certified agency not affiliated with the General Contractor his subcontractors, or the Engineering Consultant. 2. Provide labor material, equipment, etc as needed, to facilitate the commissioning process. Perform tests and verification procedures requested by the Commissioning Agency 3 Testing and balancing work shall be a separate subcontract to the General Contractor A. The contractor shall understand that the contract drawings (for the various trades) were prepared simultaneously and that while reasonable effort was made for coordination as the drawings were prepared, space conflicts, particularly with Division 15 work, are anticipated. For this reason, the contractor shall provide a final and complete coordination of the work of all trades in each and every area of the building and shall complete this effort not less those six weeks prior to fabrication of any work within 30 feet of any given area. The contractor shall determine the extensiveness of this coordination process with the understanding that the contractor shall incur all costs associated with replacing or relocating work to accommodate space conflicts that were not documented in a written request for information to the architect during the time allotted above for the coordination process. B The contractor shall provide the services of experienced detailers to review all contract drawings, specifications, submittals, and shop drawings, and to determine the exact elevations and locations of all items. Detailers are defined as individuals that; are technically trained to understand all requirements of their trade and the general requirements of the various other trades, have proven ability to coordinate three dimensionally and have the ability to communicate effectively and work in a team environment with the detailers of other trades. A. Provide: The word provide, as used in these Specifications, means furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. B Contractor The word 'Contractor as used in these Specifications, means the General Contractor and his subcontractors, including the mechanical subcontractor(s). No attempt is being made in these Specifications to direct how responsibilities will be assigned to subcontractors. C. A/E. The abbreviation A/E means Architect or 'Engineer' who is a party to an owner agreement. D Architect: The word Architect means the architect and his engineering consultants. E. Approved. The word accepted or approved, as used in conjunction with the (A/E's) action of the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the A/E's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. F Indicated. The term indicated' refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or other paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as shown, noted, scheduled, and specified are used to help the reader locate the reference. Location is not limited. G. Directed. Terms such as directed, requested, authorized, selected, approved, required, and permitted, mean directed by the A/E requested by the A/E, and similar phrases. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15010 PAGE 3 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI H. Specialist: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. Nevertheless, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor 1 This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. Abbreviations. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials. AFB MA Anti- Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association. AGA American Gas Association. AISI American Institute of Steel Construction. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association. ANSI American National Standards Institute. API American Petroleum Institute. APWA American Public Works Association. ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ASTM American Society of Testing Materials. AWWA American Water Works Association. AWS American Welding Society CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. CSA Canadian Standards Institute. FM Factory Mutual Research Corporation. IBC International Building Code IFC International Fire Code IFGC International Fuel and Gas Code IMC International Mechanical Code MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. NEC National Electric Code. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association. NFPA National Fire Protection Association. NSF National Sanitation Foundation. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration. PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute. PS Product Standard of NBS (U.S. Department of Commerce) SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. STI Steel Tank Institute. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UPC Uniform Plumbing Code 1.7 CODES, PERMITS, INSPECTIONS, AND FEES A. Obtain permits and inspections and pay fees required by National, State, and Local authorities. B All work and materials shall be in accordance with referenced standards, and requirements of all applicable local ordinances and state statutes, including, but not limited to, the following. Date of codes shall be as adopted by local authorities unless indicated otherwise. The most recent revision of standards shall be utilized. 1 International Building Code. 2. International Mechanical Code. 3 Uniform Plumbing Code. 4 International Fire Code. 5 International Fuel Gas Code 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MECHANICAL WORK, GENERAL MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15010 PAGE 4 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI MECHANICAL WORK, GENERAL 6. National Electrical Code. 7 Washington State Energy Code. 8. NFPA 99 Health Care Facilities. 9 Washington State Boiler and Unfired Pressure Vessel Code as published by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries, Division of Boiler Inspection. 10. NFPA Bulletin 13 Sprinkler Systems. 11 NFPA Bulletin 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. 12. NFPA Bulletin 90A. Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 13 Building Services Piping (ANSUASME B31 1) 14 AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Hospital and Health Care Facilities. 15 Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) 16. SP 58 Pipe Hangers and Supports— Materials, Design, and Manufacture. 17 SP -69 Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and Application. 18. SP -89 Pipe Hangers and Supports Fabrication and Installation Practices. 19 SP -90 Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports. 20 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 21 UL203 Standard for Pipe Hanger Equipment for Fire Protection Service. 22. Factory Mutual Research (FM) 23 Class 1959 1952, and 1953 'Pipe Hanger Components for Automatic Sprinkler Systems C. The foregoing codes shall be construed as establishing a minimum or base level of requirements. Where provisions of the various codes or standards conflict with each other the more stringent provisions shall govern. D Drawings and specifications shall not be construed to permit work not in conformance with these rules and regulations. E. Where drawings or specifications call for material or construction of a better quality or higher capacity than required by the above- mentioned codes and standards, the provisions of the drawings or specifications shall take precedence over the requirements of the codes and standards. F Comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the work. If the Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any respect, he shall promptly notify the A/E in writing and any necessary changes shall be accomplished by 'appropriate design modification. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without notice to the A/E, he shall assume full responsibility and shall bear all costs associated with bringing work into compliance. G. Material and equipment within the scope of the UL Testing Laboratory Service shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories for the purpose for which they are used and shall bear their listing mark. ETL or CSA will be allowed if acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction. H. Contractor shall call for all inspections by the local code authorities when they become due and shall not cover any work until approved by these authorities. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all materials shall be new Contractor shall properly store all materials and equipment for protection from physical damage or damage due to corrosion. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15010 PAGE 5 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI MECHANICAL WORK, GENERAL B Standardization of Manufacturer This Contractor shall make every effort to furnish all equipment of any equipment type (such as fans, motors, motor controls, pumps, valves, etc.) from one manufacturer Confirm before ordering, requirements of standardization with existing Owner's equipment. C. Manufacturer s Directions. Each material for which the manufacturer issues directions shall be used according to its manufacturer's directions, as approved and if not at variance with these specifications. Obtain A/E clarification when directions conflict with specifications. D Equipment Furnished by Others: For installation of equipment and casework furnished by others and installed by this Contractor rough -in dimensions shall be obtained from approved shop drawings, by measurements from the actual equipment, or as directed by A/E. Install all equipment to be easily accessible for operation, maintenance, or repair Equipment deemed inaccessible by the Architect shall be relocated as directed. E. Drawings and specifications shall be taken together Provide work specified and not indicated or work indicated and not specified as though mentioned in both. 1.9 LEVEL OF DETAIL PROVIDED IN CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. General. Drawings are diagrammatic, indicating the general arrangement of systems and work, and do not attempt to show exact details or location of equipment, fixtures, piping, and ductwork. Offsets and transitions required to install all work are often not shown. B Examine the architectural drawings for exact location of fixtures and equipment. Where they are not dimensioned or otherwise definitely located, obtain this information from the A/E. C. Examination of Site: Submittal of bid shall indicate the Contractor has carefully examined the site and has requested (and received) additional clarification of scope where needed. Bid shall include costs for all required coordination and reasonable allowances for additional materials and labor to meet space requirements and code requirements. D Clarifications: Any information described or shown that is not clear to the mechanical subcontractor shall be referred to the A/E for clarification before bids are submitted. E. Confirmation and Documentation of Adjustments. Upon start of construction, remove ceilings and walls as required (in remodel areas) to review existing conditions and coordinate with other trades to determine the total amount of transitions and offsets required. Prepare coordination drawings or mark up a copy of the contract drawings, indicating required transitions and offsets and, if the changes are significant, submit these drawings to the A/E for review and approval prior to fabrication. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Provide construction coordination drawings for all congested areas requiring close coordination with other trades and the general construction. The construction coordination drawings shall be completed six weeks prior to commencement of any related work. Drawings shall be executed on sheets sized the same as the Contract Documents and shall be reproducible Mylar if hand drafted or produced by CAD Drafting shall be the same quality as the Contract Documents. B The construction coordination drawings shall show all related trades, structure, and ceilings, walls, and partitions. Provide cross sections of all congested areas. C. The construction coordination drawings shall be continuously updated during the execution of the work. The drawings shall be submitted to the A/E at the completion of the project for record purposes. D Transitions and offsets beyond the scope of work E. Check drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Establish exact locations of piping and ducts in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, and m 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15010 PAGE 6 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI MECHANICAL WORK, GENERAL keep openings and passageways clear Lines that must pitch, or that must have a constant elevation, shall have the right -of way over lines not so restricted. Maintain maximum headroom. If space conditions appear inadequate, notify the A/E before proceeding with the work. Make reasonable modifications in the work without extra cost as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades and for proper execution of the work. F If the total additional weight of sheet metal or piping materials (including associated fittings, hangers, seismic restraints and insulation) required for ductwork transitions, ductwork offsets and piping offsets which are not indicated or inferred on the contract documents exceeds seven percent (7 of the total weight of the ductwork or piping system, the amount exceeding this percentage may be considered to be beyond the requirements of these documents. G. In order for additional compensation to be considered for transitions and offsets in excess of the amount stated in Paragraph B above, the Contractor shall submit to the A/E a detailed take -off of all materials indicated on the contract documents. The Contractor shall also submit a separate take -off along with coordination drawings or marked -up contract drawings with yellow highlighting indicating specifically the transitions and offsets considered to be extra work. Additional compensation will only be considered if take -offs and drawings are received by the A/E four weeks in advance of the fabrication of conflicting work in the area of concern so that the A/E may be able to determine ways to minimize or eliminate the extra work. 1.11 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. Provide submittals and shop drawings for all products and systems described in Division 15 and shown on the drawings to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the project. Furnish equipment submittals in the manner described below Include data for review and organize data as noted below Submittals procedures shall comply with applicable requirements of Section 01300. B The A/E s review of submittals and shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for quantities, dimensions and/or errors that may be contained therein, or deviations from the Contract Documents' requirements. It shall be clearly understood that the noting of some errors but overlooking others does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error Regardless of any information contained in the Submittals and Shop Drawings, the requirements of the Contract Documents shall govern and are not waived or superseded in any way by the review of the Submittals and Shop Drawings. C. Submittals: Mark submittal literature and show drawings clearly bind 81/2 x 11 literature in three -hole, hard backed, loose -leaf binders by individual sets, and include all equipment and material shown on drawings and specified. Indicate the following: 1 Index, followed by specification reference and/or drawing reference for which literature is submitted for review Item by item identification. 2. Manufacturer's name and address, and supplier's name, address, and phone number 3 Catalog designation or model number 4 Rough -in data and dimensions. 5 Performance curves and rated capacities. 6. Motor characteristics and wiring diagrams. 7 Operation characteristics. 8. Complete customized listing of characteristics, equipment, accessories, etc. specified. Indicate whether item is As Specified or 'Proposed Substitution Indicate any deviations on submittal. Mark out all non applicable items or 'highlight' applicable items. The terminology As Specified used without marked up listing is not acceptable. (Show exactly what will be provided to include options or deletions.) 9 Wiring diagrams for the specific system operation. 10. Working construction drawings (shop drawings). O 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15010 PAGE 7 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS, DATA 1.13 SAFETY AND PROTECTION 2007 Mahlum Architects MECHANICAL WORK, GENERAL D Partial Submittals are permitted only after prior approval and only if long lead items require special attention. Piecemeal submittals, and submittals not organized and tabbed by specification section, will be returned without review E. Shop Drawings. 1 The purpose of Shop Drawing Submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the A/E that the Contractor understands the design concept and demonstrates its understanding by indicating which equipment and material it intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods it intends to use. 2. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between Shop Drawings and Contract Documents are discovered either prior to or after Shop Drawing Submittals are processed by the A/E, the Contract Documents shall control and shall be followed. 3 Shop Drawings shall be reviewed by the equipment manufacturers before submitting to A/E to determine whether the products are being correctly used. 4 Shop drawings shall be provided for all sheet metal work, including detailed layout drawings of sheet metal connections at all fans, air handlers, HVAC units, supply and exhaust fans, fan plenums, etc. Shop drawings shall include detailed layouts of all fans, and air handling units. A. The Contractor shall, during the progress of the work, keep a current and careful record of all changes where the actual installation differs from that shown on the Contract Drawings, including changes resulting from addenda and change orders. As -built drawings shall be maintained in the project office for inspection by the A/E at any time. Accurately locate and show all isolating and operating valves complete with valve tag numbers. B Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall furnish one complete set of as -built drawings on reproducible transparencies to the Architect. A. Safety Measures To Be Taken: The A/E has not been retained or compensated to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures required for the Contractor to perform its work. The Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the jobsite, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The A/E 's observations of the Contractor's performance are not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on, or near the construction site. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all safety measures and shall consult with the state or federal safety inspector whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist or whether it is or is not in compliance with state or federal regulations. B Drive Guards: Provide OSHA approved drive and shaft guards for all exposed, rotating drive shafts and drive connections between motors and driven equipment including fans, pumps, compressors, etc. Guards shall include heavy -duty steel frames securely fastened for easy removal to the equipment frame. Guards, in general, shall be solid sheet metal with tachometer cutout at shafts where applicable. Guards may be provided by the equipment manufacturer or fabricated by this Contractor to the manufacturer's clearances, configurations, etc. C. Head Protection: Where duct angles; pipe hangers, equipment support angles, etc. are exposed in walkways, or in access ways for any maintenance. Cover all such potentially injurious protrusions more than 4 and less than 6 -8' above the floor with padding. Padding shall be securely and permanently fastened and finished comparable to adjacent finishes. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15010 PAGE 8 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.14 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MECHANICAL WORK, GENERAL A. Brand Names: The use of brand names is for the purpose of description and establishing quality and does not eliminate the requirements of meeting specifications. Other brands will be considered except where an item or class of material is specified exclusively by trade name and followed by word only B Requests for Substitutions. In order for other brands to be considered, requests for substitutions, complete with catalog data and proposed reduction in cost, shall be furnished not later than ten working days prior to bid date or request may not be considered. All substitutions approved shall be described in an addendum issued prior to bid date. Approval of alternative and/or substitute products will be considered only under terms and conditions specified in Section 01630. C. Procedures for Review of Proposed Substitutions. A meeting to review substitutions proposed by the contractor shall be scheduled, during which time samples of the specified product, and the product proposed for substitution will be evaluated and a decision made based upon the comparison. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor or sales representative for the product proposed for substitution to provide the samples. In addition to the sales rep the contractor must also be present at the meeting. Since it is the contractor that is proposing the substitution, the contractor must be present and compare the products, not the sales representative. D Changes Due to Substitutions. Design is based on equipment as listed in the equipment schedule and/or specified with a specific model or series number Provide redesign to any part of the work as needed to accommodate the use of equipment and material other than specified or shown on the drawings. Obtain approval of redesign from the A/E. Redesign cost and additional construction cost resulting from the redesign shall be at the Contractor's expense. A. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals for training of Owner s personnel in operation and maintenance of systems and related equipment. Organize manual and include data and narrative as required in Section 01700 and noted below B Provide a separate chapter for each section of the Division 15 specifications with subchapters for each class of equipment or system. Provide a table of contents for each chapter list major item items in each chapter and indicate the page number of each. C. Operating Sequence and Procedures: 1 Contents. In each chapter describe the procedures necessary for personnel to operate the system and equipment covered in that chapter 2. Operating Procedures: Write procedures for start -up, operation, emergency operation, and shutdown. a. Start -up: Give complete step -by -step instructions for energizing equipment, making initial settings and adjustments whenever applicable. b Shutdown Procedure. Include instructions for stopping and securing the equipment after operation. If a particular sequence is required, give step -by -step instructions in that order c. Emergency Operation. Give detailed instructions for emergency procedures required to prevent damage to equipment and property freeze -up, human discomfort, etc. D Maintenance Instructions: 1 Provide a schedule of preventive maintenance for each product. Recommend frequency of performance for each preventive maintenance task; i.e. cleaning, inspection, etc. Provide instructions and schedules for all routine cleaning, lubrication and inspection with recommended lubricants for all equipment and systems. Recommend times of the year that inspection and maintenance should be performed. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15010 PAGE 9 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI MECHANICAL WORK, GENERAL 2. Provide instructions for minor repair or adjustments, limited to repairs and adjustments which may be performed without special tools or test equipment, and which require no extensive special training or skills. 3 Special Maintenance: Provide all information of a maintenance nature covering warranty items, etc. which have not been discussed elsewhere. E. Manufacturer's Literature: Include manufacturers descriptive literature covering all appurtenances used in each system, together with illustrations, exploded views, and listing of all replacement parts. Include name, address, and phone number of supplier F Shop Drawings. Provide a copy of all corrected, approved shop drawings covering equipment for the project either with the manufacturers' catalog cuts or properly identified in a separate subsection. G Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Report: Include a copy of the approved report. H. Other Requirements. 1 Valve Directory Indicate valve number size, location, function, and normal position for each numbered valve. Obtain approval of directory before installation of valve tags. Install tags prior to substantial completion of project. 2. Name Plate Directory Provide list of fans, pumps, air handling units, heating coils, concealed automatic dampers, and all other major equipment nameplates, giving manufacturer's nameplate data, nameplate designation, location of equipment, area served, switch location, normal position of switch, and equipment label designations specified. Submit directory for review and obtain approval prior to substantial completion of project. 3 Label all pages to assure correct placement in manual. 4 Mark out all non applicable items, or 'Highlight' all applicable items. Number of Copies. Submit one preliminary copy for approval. Deliver three final bound copies to the A/E for final approval and delivery to the Owner 1.16 OPERATING PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION A. General. Provide instruction of all pertinent mechanical systems to facility operating personnel prior to facility acceptance, upon mutually satisfactory arrangement with A/E. B Instruction: Instruction shall not begin until the component, assembly or system has been tested and is in acceptable operating condition, otherwise, instruction shall be deemed incomplete. Instruction shall encompass normal operation, emergency operation, fire and other hazards, safety provisions, pollution prevention provisions, and maintenance procedures for all work provided. C. Instructors. Instructors shall include the Contractor's staff supplemented by authorized representatives of the component, assembly or system manufacturer D Aids. Instruction process shall utilize specified 0 M manuals that, if deemed unsatisfactory in any content, shall be supplemented in a manner to achieve specified instruction. E. Time: Provide all necessary instruction to the complete understanding of the operating personnel. Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows. Plumbing 8 hours Heating, ventilating and air conditioning 16 hours Fire protection 6 hours Medical gas systems 16 hours Controls 24 hours F See Section 15900, 'HVAC Instrumentation and Controls for additional instruction requirements. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15010 PAGE 10 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI G. The entire instruction training session shall be videotaped on a DVD Provide two copies of the DVD to the Owner 1.17 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE TO AND IN EXISTING BUILDING A. Temporary Services. This Contractor shall provide those temporary services to the existing building as required to maintain the building in continuous operation and without reducing efficiency The extent of temporary services shall be carefully conferenced and coordinated with the Owner the A/E, and General Contractor In order to provide temporary services or cutover permanent services, it may be necessary to perform work on an overtime basis. All overtime work shall be scheduled at the time required by building s function as determined by the Owner and the General Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner B Continuity of Service in Existing Building: Do all new work so that there is no shutdown of more than one -hour duration of any existing mechanical system. 1 Interruptions of any existing service or system shall be fully coordinated with Owner and agreed upon in writing. 2. Contractor shall provide advance notice as specified in Division 1 before performing the work that would cause or require the shutdown. C. Interference with Owner's Employees. Do all work in the existing building with respect for the necessity of Owner's employees to perform their regular work. When directed, perform work at hours other than regular working hours. 1.18 TEMPORARY SERVICES MECHANICAL WORK, GENERAL A. Temporary Heat: Temporary heat is specified in Division 1 Cooperate with the General Contractor and prepare the terminal heating equipment for operation when the remodeled areas are ready for finishing. B Air Systems. Do not use air systems during construction. Cover duct and grille openings with taped -on plastic sheet or equivalent to keep all construction dust possible out of the ductwork. 1.19 REVISIONS, ALTERATIONS, AND CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. Concealed piping, tubing, and duct systems of record are shown on the drawings. These are not necessarily exact with respect to location or completeness, therefore, the Contractor shall take the following steps: 1 Inspect existing conditions of work, including existing piping, ductwork, and equipment, and compare the Drawings and Specifications for extent and scope of new work. 2. Where connections are required to existing piping or duct systems, to connect new piping or ducts, keep the shutdown period to a minimum and restore services promptly to existing building. Comply with the requirements of 'Continuity of Service To and In Existing Building specified elsewhere in this Section. 3 Each shutdown shall be agreed to with the Owner All work shall be performed in a manner that will minimize shutdown periods. 4 Should any unknown piping or duct be encountered during the source of work, notify the A/E of such discovery Engineer will then investigate and issue instructions for the disposition of the unknown pipe or duct. 5 Protect existing services, piping systems, and duct systems from any damage or interruption of service. 6. Execute cutting as required to uncover work. Patch with finishes to match adjacent surfaces. Cutting and patching is specified in Section 15050, 'Basic Materials and Methods B Contractor shall protect existing building and furnishings from damage and be liable for all damage thus caused. Contractor shall be responsible for work and materials until finally tested and accepted. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15010 PAGE 11 of 11 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI MECHANICAL WORK, GENERAL C. Work will be checked as it progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or materials in no way prevents later rejection when such defects are discovered, nor shall it obligate the Owner for final acceptance. 1.20 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. General. Comply with all Division 1 requirements. B Cleaning: Promptly remove all waste material and rubbish. At completion of the work, clean all dirt and construction debris such as paint, plaster glue, cement, mastic, tar paper tape, and dirt from the mechanical installation including equipment, piping, ductwork, and plumbing fixtures. In finished areas to be occupied, keep equipment covered during course of construction. Where this is not practical, clean and/or refinish item to new condition. C. Requirements for Final Inspection. All of the following items shall be completed prior to final inspections. No exceptions will be made and no approval for final payment will be made until all items are completed. 1 Cleaning equipment and premises. 2. Operating instructions and maintenance manuals. 3 Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 4 Record drawings as- built 5 Guarantee. D Guarantee: 1 Comply with Section 01700. Unless indicated otherwise in Section 01700, all work performed under this Contract shall be guaranteed against faulty and improper materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified herein for specific equipment, such longer term shall apply and this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner shall promptly correct any deficiencies which occur during the guarantee period, all to the satisfaction of the Owner and A/E. This Contractor shall require similar guarantees from its subcontractors. 2. All equipment and installation shall be guaranteed by the Contractor to be in compliance with OSHA regulations. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 15010 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 1 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Section 15010 applies to this and all other Division 15 sections. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section includes basic mechanical materials, and methods directly related to, and required for work specified in all other Division 15 Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Pipe, pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing. B Finished Spaces. Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, spaces above ceilings, crawl spaces, and tunnels. C. Exposed Interior Installations. Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. D Exposed Exterior Installations. Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures, and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. E. Concealed Interior Installations. Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. F Concealed Exterior Installations. Concealed from view And protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated attics and shelters. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit each item specified in this Section the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment Vibration Tolerance: 1 The allowable vibration tolerance is specified for some items in Section 15070 'Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control Equipment specifications require factory balancing of equipment to this tolerance. 2. After air balance work is completed and permanent drive sheaves are in place, perform field mechanical balancing and adjustments required to meet the specified vibration tolerance. B Products Criteria. 1 Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 3 years. See other specification sections for any exceptions. 2. Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organization which maintains a complete inventory of repair parts and is located reasonably close to the site. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 2 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 3 Multiple Units. When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer 4 Assembled Units. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product. 5 Nameplates. Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment. 6. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used. C. Welding: Before any welding is performed, contractor shall submit a certificate certifying that welders comply with the following requirements. 1 Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME 'Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX, 'Welding and Brazing Qualifications 2. Comply with provisions of ASME B31.9 'Building Services Piping Code 3 Certify that each welder has passed American Welding Society (AWS) qualification tests for the welding processes involved, and that certification is current. D Manufacturer's Recommendations. Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the A/E prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material. E. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning requirements. F Sequencing and Scheduling: 1 Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components. 2. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations. 3 Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices. 4 Coordinate connection of electrical services. 5 Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where mechanical items requiring access are concealed behind finished surfaces. When access panels and doors are provided under Division 8, they are not required where specified in Division 15 6. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor if stored inside. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 3 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. BASIC MATERIALS METHODS D Protect mechanical equipment from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor E. Protocol for the shipping, protection, storage, handling, and installation of the air handling units for the purposes of infection control. The following are, as a minimum, the required protocols for this project: 1 At the factory provide an alcohol wipe down of all interior surfaces for each individual section of the air handling units being provided on this project. In addition, cover all openings with a minimum 5 -mil shrink wrap shipping envelope around each individual section immediately after the alcohol wipe -down. The shrink wrap applications shall prevent air and water penetration during shipping. Include a minimum of four 5 -pound bags of desiccant moisture absorbent material in each section to be shipped. 2. Clean all air terminals at the factory Provide each individual air terminal with moisture resistant visqueen (polyethylene) wrap at the factory Provide for multiple units palletized together to have an additional visqueen (polyethylene) wrap for shipping. 3 Provide for the ductwork to be cleaned and wiped down with a 70% alcohol solution just prior to being installed on site. Provide for alcohol spray of the air terminals after installation on site. 4 Install and operate portable dehumidifiers, complete with auxiliary electric heat, in each air handler from the time the units are first installed until the air handlers are fully operational. This is an item not directly associated with the cleanliness of the systems, but is required to control any potential moisture build -up that aids in the growth of harmful organisms in the units and adjoining ductwork. Coordinate any electrical requirements with the electrical contractor 5 At no time during construction shall any mechanical equipment or systems be exposed to moisture or dust. Provide for access to equipment and systems delivered and/or stored on site for inspection by Owners personnel. Provide for the ductwork and equipment to be sealed airtight at the completion of each work period during construction. F Air handling units shall be kept dry and free of moisture where stored and after installation. Install heaters and dehumidifiers as required to ensure compliance. Coordinate any electrical requirements with the electrical contractor PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS A. General. 1 Equipment and Pipe Identification: Provide for all equipment and pipe. Conform to ANSI/ASME A13 1 latest edition, for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 2. Use symbols, nomenclature and equipment numbers specified, shown on the drawings, and shown in the maintenance manuals. 3 In addition, provide bar code identification nameplate for all equipment which will allow the equipment identification code to be scanned into the system for maintenance and inventory tracking. Equipment: Label all equipment, letters not less than 3/16 -inch. Identify unit components such as coils, filters, fans, etc. Labels shall bear the equipment name and I. D on each equipment label. Use the identifiers given in the contract drawings. 5 Control Items: Label all temperature and humidity sensors (except room sensors) and controllers. Identify and label each item as they appear on the control diagrams. O 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 4 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 6. Provide laminated black plastic equipment labels with lettering cut through to white background. B Pressure Sensitive Pipe Markers. 1 Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive, color- coded, pressure- sensitive vinyl pipe markers. a. Manufacturer Seton Name Plate Corporation, Marking Services Incorporated, Brady Craftmark or Kolbi Industries. 2. Coordinate selection of piping labels with selection of insulation jackets. 3 Piping markers shall have lettering large enough to be read from the floor (unless the pipe is too small to accommodate that size of lettering, in which case the size of the lettering will be the largest feasible for the pipe size). 4 Asbestos -free labeling shall read asbestos free and shall have white lettering on a blue background unless color otherwise regulated by safety codes. 5 Adhesive arrow bands shall have a background color that is coded in accordance with the following table. If the stated background is not commercially available, incorporate arrows into the label and provide color -coded bands without arrows. 6. Background Color (other than medical gas and vacuum) D Painting: 0 2007 Mahlum Architects I Service 1 Hot Water Heating Potable Cold Water Potable Hot Water Gas Air Fire Service Waste, Soil Vent, Rain Leader BASIC MATERIALS METHODS Background Color Tan Dark Blue Bright Yellow Green Black Red Brown 7 For liquid piping systems, indicate on the labels whether they are supply or return pipes. 8. Indicate pressures on labels on all gas lines (such as compressed air medical gases, etc.) over 30 psig. 9 Identify all medical gas and vacuum piping. Refer to Section 15210 for requirements. All piping be labeled to readily identify the gas content and shall bear the name of the gas contained and its operating pressure. Identification shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 99 C. Valve Tags and Lists. 1 General. Provide for all valves. Fixture stops shall not be tagged. 2. Valve Tags. Engraved black filled numbers and letters not less than ih high for number designation, and not less than Vs-inch for service designation on 19 gauge, 1 1/2 round brass disc, attached with brass 'S' hook or brass chain. 3 Valve Tag Lists: Typed or printed plastic coated cards, sized 8 -1/2' by 11 showing tag number valve function and area of control, for each service or system in Division 15 Section. Punch sheets for a 3 -ring notebook. 4 Provide detailed plan for each floor of the building indicating the location for each valve. 5 If directed by the Owner identify location of each valve with a color -coded thumbtack in the ceiling. 6. Manufacturer Seton Name Plate Corporation, Brady Corporation, Kolbi Pipe Marker Company or Brimar Industries. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 5 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI E. General. Anchors and attachments shall be provided under this Section except where specified (at seismic control devices) under Section 15070 F Mechanical Anchors. Anchors shall be provided under this Section except where anchors are specified (for seismic restraints) under Section 15070 1 Equipment and piping supports shall utilize wedge style expansion anchors in concrete, manufactured from carbon steel, plated in accordance with ASTM B633 SC1 Type III or Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Carbon steel stud anchors shall be threaded type, rod hanger type, tie wire type or rod coupling type. 3 The carbon steel expansion anchors shall have a one -piece anchor body with a length identification code. The anchors shall have an expansion mechanism, which consists of a pair of interlocking independent wedges. 4 Pull -out and shear values shall conform to the standard test methods as outlined in latest edition of ASTM E488 5 Approvals and Listings. a. ICBO ES Research Report. b. Factory Mutual J.I. OK4A9.AH, OH6A4.AH. c. Underwriters Laboratories File No. EX 1289(N). d. Federal Specification. Meets the descriptive requirements of FF- S -325C, Group II, Type 4 Class I. 6. Manufacturer Powers Fastening, Inc. 'Power -Stud Hilti 'Kwik Bolt II' ITW Ramset/Red Head 'Trubolt' or CS 'Wedge Anchors. G. Anchor Bolts. 1 Equipment anchor bolts in solid concrete shall be carbon steel machine bolt anchors. Anchors shall be plated in accordance with ASTM B633 -85 SC1 Type III. 2. Anchor bolts shall be self drilling type, internal thread anchor with a pre assembled integral expander plug. 3 Approvals and Listings: a. ICBO ES Research Report. b. Factory Mutual J.I. OK4A9.AH. c. Underwriters Laboratories File No. EX 1289(N) d. Federal Specification. Meets the descriptive requirements of FF -S -325C, Group VIII, Type 1 4 Pull -out and shear values shall conform to the standard test methods as outlined in latest edition of ASTM E488. 5 Manufacturer Powers Fasteners, Inc. `Steel Drop -In Hilti, Inc. `HDI' ITW Ramset/Red Head `Multi -Set II' or CS 'Drop -In Anchors. 2007 Mahlum Architects BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 1 The painting of Mechanical Work is specified in Section 09900 hangers, supports, and attachments MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 6 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI J Hanger Rods: 1 Continuous threaded rod. 2. Maximum Threaded Hanger Rod Loading: 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Rod Size Diameter in Inches 3/8 1/2 15/8 3/4 7/8 1 Maximum Load Pounds 610 1130 1810 2710 3770 4960 BASIC MATERIALS METHODS H. Expansion Shell Anchors. 1 Expansion shell anchors shall be used to anchor attachments to lightweight, low- density concrete or concrete block structure. Anchors shall be plated in accordance with ASTM B633 -85 SC2, Type III. 2. Approvals and Listings. a. ICBO ES Research Report. b Factory Mutual J.I. OJ8AI.AH. c. Underwriters Laboratories File No. EX 1289(N). d. Federal Specification. Meets the descriptive requirements of FF -S -325 Group II, Type 3 Class 3 3 Manufacturer Powers Fasteners, `Lok/Bolt' Inc. ITW Ramset/Red Head 'Dynabolt Sleeve, or Hilti `Sleeve Anchor I. Miscellaneous Attachments. 1 As required to suit the conditions, beam clamps, welded beam attachments, rod beam attachments, angle clips and angle brackets complying with MSS SP -69 or channels spanning between beam flanges may be used to support equipment, piping and ductwork. PART 1 Manufacturer Anvil, B -Line, Erico or PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 2. Structural steel beam clamps. brackets, channel clamps, and bar joist clips shall be selected to suit structural systems and meet loading recommendations of manufacturer All clamps shall be provided with retaining clips. PART 1 Manufacturer- Anvil, B -Line, Erico or PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 3 Very light loads may be suspended from metal clips screw fastened to metal decking or penetrating clips through the metal decking, but such attachments must not be loaded above the manufacturer's recommendations. K. Inserts: 1 Inserts for Rod Hangers. Malleable cast iron, modified for hot -dip galvanized steel. a. Manufacturer Unistrut Cat. No. M24 B -Line B2500, PHD 950 or approved Hilti. 2. Steel Deck Inserts. Galvanized steel a. Manufacturer- ITW Ramset/Red Head Series SDI or approved Hilti or PHD MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 7 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER BASIC MATERIALS METHODS TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI L. Trapeze Pipe Racks. 1 Fabricate from structural angles or hot dipped galvanized steel channels to suit weight of piping to be supported. Size for a minimum safety factor of 5 M. Hangers for Horizontal Piping• 1 Hangers shall be UL listed and FM approved for 3/4 through 8 pipe. Hangers shall comply with MSS SP -69 2. Steel Pipe and Cast Iron Soil Pipe Adjustable clevis. a. Manufacturer Anvil Fig. 260 PHD Fig. 450, B -Line No. B3100 or Erico Hanger No.400. 3 Copper Pipe 2 -inch and Smaller Adjustable ring. a. Manufacturer Anvil Fig. CT -69 PHD Fig. 152, B -Line No B3170 CT or Erico Hanger No. 101 4 Copper Pipe 2 1/2 -inch and Larger Adjustable ring. a. Manufacturer Anvil Fig. CT -65 Fig. 442, B -Line No B3104 CT or Erico Hanger No. 402. 5 Finish. Black steel for black steel pipe and cast iron pipe. Galvanized for galvanized steel pipe. Copper plated for copper pipe. 6. Application. Use only on piping systems where axial movement from thermal expansion is less than 1/2 -inch. N Pipe Rolls: 1 Suspended Pipe: Adjustable clevis pipe rolls. a. Manufacturer Anvil Fig. 181 PHD Fig. 470, B -Line No B3110 or Erico Hanger No 610. 2. Racked Pipe: Pipe roll stand. a. Manufacturer Anvil Fig. 271 PHD Fig. 486, B -Line No B3117 SL, or Erico Hanger No. 617 O Pipe Clamps: 1 General. Use only on piping systems without any thermal expansion. Provide minimum four layers of black Scotch -Wrap tape between pipe and clamp. 2. Vertical Piping: Shelf bracket or channel type. Provide copper plated clamps for copper pipe. a. Manufacturer Unistrut P 1332 or PHD 6101 -6122 or Unistrut P 1100 or PHD 7200 or approved Superstrut or OSTRUT 3 Horizontal Racked Piping: Provide for manufactured channel pipe racks. a. Manufacturer Unistrut P 1109 or P 2024C Series or PHD 2001 or PHD 2401 Series or approved Superstrut or OSTRUT P Pipe Anchors. 1 Structural steel with welded joints and connections, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. 2. Design anchor members and welds to constrain axial and rotational stresses in the piping, at the test temperatures and test pressures specified. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 8 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT LMPROVEMENT MRI 0 2007 Mahlum Architects BASIC MATERIALS METHODS Q Pipe Guides: 1 Select guides to accommodate insulation thickness specified, with a minimum of 1/8 -inch clearance between the outside of the insulation and the inside of the guiding cylinder 2. Pipe guides for steel pipe shall have 1 inch guide traverse, unless shown otherwise indicated. 3 Manufacturer- Anvil Fig. 255 B -Line No. B3281 through B3287 PHD 670 or 678 or Erico No 650. R. Vertical Pipe Supports. 1 Riser clamp shall be carbon steel complying with MSS SP -69 (Type 8) 2. Steel and Iron Pipe: Galvanized. 3 Manufacturer Anvil Fig. 261 B -Line No. B3373 or PHD 550 or Erico No. 510 S. Equipment Bases and Supports: 1 Provide supports, bases, and their attachments for mechanical work to be furnished or installed. Submit shop drawings for approval. 2. Provide structural steel frame supports for equipment where indicated on the drawings. Weld all joints. Bolt to structure. T Eyebolts: 1 Provide eyebolts embedded in concrete slabs over equipment for use in servicing equipment. Each eyebolt shall have 2500 pound capacity based on a safety factor of 2. 2. Eyebolts. Welded- eye -type forged steel rods, made of 3/4 steel round bar welded to 6 square 1/4 thick steel plates, cast into the concrete above the reinforcing steel. 3 Where Bolts Cannot be Extended Through Metal Deck Forms. Rods for eyebolts may be sectional, coupled at ceiiing with a threaded hexagonal steel nut at least 2 1/4 long, embedded in the concrete; lower section installed therein. If bolt can extend through pan, but not the eye, extend bolt 1 1/4 through pan. Provide weldless eye nut with locknut inside the eye. 4 Manufacturer Anvil Fig. 280 or equal PHD Size No. 2. U Piping Hanger Shields: 1 General. Pipe shall be protected at the point of support by a 360° insert of high density 100 psi, calcium silicate treated with water repellant, encased in a 360° galvanized steel metal jacket. Insert shall be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation. Shield length and minimum sheet metal gauges shall be as listed below Insulation insert shall extend one inch beyond sheet metal shield on all refrigerant. Provide shield with extra heavy bottom jacket where pipe hanger spacing exceeds ten feet and at all pipe rollers. Minimum Shield Pipe Size 1 Length 1 Gauge 1/2 to 1 1/2' 1 4 1 24 2' to 6' 1 6 1 20 2. Manufacturer Shaw Pipe Shields Inc. as specified, or approved equal Insulshield, Erico or UniGrip. a. For chilled water and refrigerant piping, Shaw Pipe Shields Inc. Model A2000. b For other insulated lines, Shaw Pipe Shields Model A1000. c. For chilled water cold water or hot water lines where pipe hanger spacing exceeds ten feet and at all pipe rollers, Shaw Pipe Shields Model A3000 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 9 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 3 Bolted Metal Framing: a. General The bolted metal framing system shall be made of channel, fittings, and hardware as defined in the Metal Framing Manufacturers Association Standard Publication MFMA 1 4 Material and Finishes. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects a. Aluminum. Aluminum channel and closure strips shall be extruded from Aluminum Association Alloy 5052 -H32. b Pre Galvanized Steel. Pre galvanized steel shall be made from steel in accordance with ASTM A446, Grade A and mill galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 Coating Designation G90 c Hot Dip Galvanized after Fabrication Steel. Channels hot -dip galvanized after fabrication shall be made from steel meeting the minimum requirements of ASTM A570, Grade 33 Eighteen gauge (1.2mm) and lighter channel shall be ASTM A611 Grade C steel. Channels shall be hot -dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al23 All 1/4 (6.3mm) fittings shall be formed from ASTM A635 steel and hot -dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al23 d. Stainless Steel. Stainless steel channel and accessories shall be of AISI Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. e. Epoxy Painted channel shall meet the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A570 Grade 33 steel and painted with electro- deposited, epoxy base dark green paint. All 1/4 (6.3mm) accessories shall be produced from ASTM A635 steel and painted with electro- deposited, epoxy -base dark green paint. f. Electro- Plated Zinc. Electro- plated zinc finish on fittings and hardware shall be plated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM B633 SC3 or SC1 respectively Dimensions: Metal framing channel shall be cold formed from steel with thickness as required for the load. All channels shall have a nominal overall width of 1 5/8 (41.3mm) and have a 7/8 (22.2mm) slot face opening. Standard lengths shall be 10 -foot (3 05m) and 20 -foot (6.09m). All testing and tolerancing shall be in accordance with the latest MFMA 1 Standard.Manufacturer Erico, Unistrut or B- Line. g. 2.2 HANGERS FOR DUCTS A. Hangers for ducts are specified in Section 15070 and Section 15800. 23 VIBRATION ISOLATION. AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. General. Vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall be provided for Division 15 work. Work shall comply with International Building Code of 2003 Mason Industries, Inc. 'Seismic Restraint Guidelines for Suspended Piping, Ductwork and Electrical Systems, Fourth Edition, 2003 and for Floor Mounted Equipment, Third Edition, 2002 and includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1 Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork, and equipment. 2. Equipment isolation bases. 3 Flexible piping connections. 4 Seismic restraints for isolated equipment. 5 Seismic restraints for non isolated equipment. 6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. 7 Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 10 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 8 All mechanical systems. Equipment buried underground is excluded, but entry of services through the foundation wall is included. 9 Vibration isolation and seismic restraints are specified in Section 15070 'Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control. 2.4 PIPE SLEEVES A. Material. 1 Steel Sheet Metal. 18 -gauge galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2. Steel Pipe. ASTM A 53 Schedule 40, galvanized plain ends. 3 Cast Iron. Cast or factory fabricated pipe equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe having plain ends and integral water stop, except where other features are specified. 4 Below -Grade Wall Penetration Assembly Wall opening shall be steel sleeve, thermoplastic HDPE sleeve, cored hole or formed hole with modular mechanical type, inter locking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and the wall opening. a. Manufacturer Thunderline/Link -Seal. b Furnish sufficient quantity and type of link required to effectively provide a hydrostatic and/or fire -rated seal. c. Each individual link shall be conspicuously and permanently identified with the name of the manufacturer and model number d. The elastomeric element shall be sized and selected per manufacturer's recommendations and have the following properties as designated by ASTM. 5 Watertight Sleeves in Concrete Floors. Sleeve shall have integral cast flashing clamp for use in floors with membrane. Corrosion resistant cast -iron construction. a. Manufacturer Jay R. Smith Fig. 1720. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL PIPE ISOLATION SLEEVES A. Provide acoustical sleeves where indicated on the drawings where piping penetrates walls, floors, or ceilings. Sleeves shall be factory- fabricated split -seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with 1 thickness 10 lb. density fiberglass or 3/4 or thicker neoprene sponge bonded to inner faces. Seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Seals shall project a minimum of 1 past either face of the wall. 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries Type SWS or approved. B Acoustical caulking compound shall be synthetic rubber composition. Consistency 290 -310 ASTM D -217 brass cone, 5 seconds, 150 grams to the moving bead. Caulking shall have excellent metal to concrete, metal to gypsum and metal to metal adhesion without oil migration. Solids content: approximately 90% m 2007 Mahlum Architects BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 1) For standard service applications -40 °F to 250 °F) EPDM to ASTM D2000 M3 BA510 2) For hydrocarbon service applications -40 °F to 210 °F) Nitrile to ASTM D200 M1 BF510. 3) For high temperature of fire seal applications -67 °F to 400 °F) Silicone to ASTM D2000 M1 GE505 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 11 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.6 GROUT BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 1 Manufacturer- Mason Industries, Inc. Type CC 75 or approved General Electric or Product Research. A. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: ASTM C1107 Grade B 1 Characteristics. Post hardening, volume adjusting, dry hydraulic- cement grout, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix. 5000 psi, 28 -day compressive strength. 3 Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. B Epoxy Adhesives. Use epoxy adhesives for grouted bolts. Bolts shall be ASTM A307 material or better Coordinate with Structural Engineer and notes on structural drawings. 2.7 FIRESTOPPING A. Refer to Section 07840 Coordinate with the firestopping installers and review with them all typical penetration conditions that will be encountered. Address issues such as insulated pipe, non insulated pipe, ducts and pipe subject to movement, etc. Obtain complete agreement that the firestopping can be properly installed prior to installing mechanical work. B Perform all work required, and furnish all materials necessary to complete proper installation of firestops in fire rated walls, floors and partitions, around penetrations of pipe, tubing, and ducts, as indicated by the Contract Documents and/or required by UBC Sections 710 and 714 1 Firestops shall conform to ASTM E -814 Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops; UL 1479 Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Firestops. 2. Firestop classification shall be listed in UL Fire Resistance Directory for the application, and shall be Factory Mutual approved. 3 Firestop material shall be a ready to use, permanently intumescent putty 4 Manufacturer- Specified Technologies, Inc. 'Spec Seal Series 100 Sealant, Johns Manville Super Fire Temp CI, FSP 'Flameseal as manufactured by Hevi- Duty/Nelson, a Unit of General Signal, 3M Fire Barrier 25WB Caulk or approved Hilti. 2.8 ACCESS PANELS A. General Provide access panels in ceilings and walls for purpose of access to items of mechanical equipment, valves, dampers, motors, etc. Location of access panels shall be approved by Architect prior to installation. B For Installation in Masonry Furniture steel, minimum 16gauge frame and minimum 14 -gauge door panel, welded flush construction, manufacturer's standard hinges and screwdriver operated cam -type flush locks, shop prime coat finish, 24 x 24 -inch size, unless otherwise noted, include all anchors required for installation. 1 Manufacturer Karp 'DSC214M, Milcor Style M, or approved Mifab C. For Installation in Wallboard. Furniture steel, minimum 16 -gauge frame and minimum 14- gauge door panel welded flush construction, manufacturer's standard hinges and screwdriver operated cam -type flush locks, shop prime coat finish, 24 x 24 -inch size, unless otherwise noted, include all fasteners required for installation. 1 Manufacturer Karp 'DSC214WB Milcor Style DW or approved Mifab. D For Installation in Plaster and Stucco Construction. Furniture steel, minimum 16 -gauge frames and minimum 18 -gauge door panel, galvanized finish, galvanized casing bead, metal lath wings at perimeter- manufacturer's standard hinges and screwdriver operated cam -type flush locks; m 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 12 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI shop prime coat finish 24 x 24 -inch size, unless otherwise noted, include all fasteners required for installation. 1 Manufacturer Karp 'DSC214PL, Milcor Style AP or approved Mifab E. For Fire -Rated Construction. UL labeled construction for required rating; sealing gaskets, flush construction, 24 x 24 -inch size, unless otherwise noted, shop prime coat finish, include all anchorages and/or fasteners required for installation. 2.9 ACCESS PANELS 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES FOR CONTROLS SYSTEM BASIC MATERIALS METHODS A. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall provide the General Contractor the exact locations of access panels for each concealed valve, control device, terminal unit, control damper fire /smoke damper or other device requiring service. Access panels will be provided and installed by the General Contractor and as specified in other Divisions of the Specifications. Submit locations of these panels in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work. A. General. See Section 15900 for requirements for coordination of work for installation of control systems and equipment. B Equipment: Provide all necessary thermowells or fittings to accommodate temperature sensors and control point adjustment connections. Piping installers shall fully coordinate with the controls subcontractor for the proper type and location of all thermowells. The controls subcontractor will furnish various pressure switches, flow switches, etc. for installation by the mechanical subcontractor The controls subcontractor shall assist in the proper location of all such devices in the various piping and air duct distribution systems. 2.11 ELECTRICAL FREEZE PROTECTION HEAT TRACING FOR PIPING A. General Furnish and install a complete UL listed system of heaters, components, and controls to prevent pipelines from freezing. B Electric Heat Tracing: 1 The self regulating heater shall consist of two (2) 16 AWG tinned copper bus wires embedded in parallel in a self regulating polymer core that varies its power output to respond to temperature all along its length, allowing the heater to be crossed over itself without overheating, to be used directly on metallic or plastic pipe, and to be cut to length in the field. 2. The heater shall be covered by a radiation cross linked modified polyolefin dielectric jacket. The heater shall have an outer braid of tinned copper and an outer jacket of modified polyolefin -CR). 3 System shall meet requirements of current National Electric Code (NEC), Section 427 C. In order to provided energy conservation and prevent overheating, the heater shall have a self regulating factor of at least 90 percent. The self regulation factor is defined as the percentage reduction, without thermostatic control, of the heater output going from 40 °F pipe temperature operation to 150 °F pipe temperature operation. D The heater shall operate with the voltage indicated on the drawings, or as directed by the A/E, without the use of transformers. Coordinate voltage requirements and points of connection for electrical service with Division 16 work. E. Provide sufficient heater cable, as sized in accordance with table below to keep the pipe surface at 40° F with 0° F outdoor ambient temperature. The required heater output rating is in watts per foot at 50° F (Heater selection shall be based on 1 fiberglass insulation on metal piping). 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 13 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI F Minimum Ambient Temperature: 1 Pipe Size 1 0 Deg. F 1 20 Deg. F 1 1 1/2 3 -inch 1 5 Watt 1 5 Watt 1 G. Manufacturer Raychem Corporation 'CR polyolefin jacketed XL Trace or approved Thermon, Indeeco, or Nelson. H. Power connection, end seal, splice and tee kit components shall be furnished by manufacturer and applied in the field. Wire at the ends of circuits shall not be tied together Controls: 1 The system shall be controlled by a bulb- sensing thermostat set at 40° F either directly or through an appropriate contactor Thermostat shall include a NEMA 4X enclosure, SP ST switch, and three -foot capillary bulb. 2. Manufacturer Raychem Model AMC F5 J Supply circuits will be as shown on electrical drawings, to disconnect switches at the locations shown. Provide all wiring from this point to thermostats, and to heating strip; 600 volt insulated wire, installed in conduit or EMT raceways, with short sections of flexible conduit adjacent to the thermostat. 2.12 MOTORS A. General. Requirements below apply to motors except as otherwise indicated. 1 Motors 1/2 HP and Larger Polyphase. 2. Motors Smaller Than 1/2 HP. Single phase. 3 Frequency Rating: 60 HZ. BASIC MATERIALS METHODS B Voltage Rating: Voltage rating shall be determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected for the following motor voltage ratings (utilization voltages) 1 120 V Circuit: 115 V motor rating. 2. 208 V Circuit: 200 V motor rating. 3 240 V Circuit: 230 V motor rating. 4 480 V Circuit: 460 V motor rating. C. Duty and Capacity• 1 Motor capacity shall be sufficient to start and operate connected loads at designated speeds in indicated environment, and with indicated operating sequence, without exceeding nameplate ratings. Provide motors rated for continuous duty at 100 percent of rated capacity 2. The temperature rise of the motor insulation shall not be exceeded under continuous operation of the motor at full horsepower output, within voltage variations permitted in latest NEMA Standard MG -1 nor shall it be exceeded under the conditions if motor is started up to 4 times per hour 3 Motors driven by variable frequency drives shall be provided with Class F insulation, based on a 40° C ambient temperature suitable for 105° C temperature rise by resistance. 4 Service factor for all motors fed by variable frequency drives shall be 1 15 minimum. Motors shall be inverter duty type. Motor manufacturer shall certify that motors to be provided have been satisfactorily driven continuously at full load by variable frequency drives. CO 2007 Mahlum Architects MAI-ILUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 14 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI m 2007 Mahlum Architects BASIC MATERIALS METHODS D Motor Enclosures. 1 NEMA Standard Open Drip- Proof, for general purpose indoor service. 2. Outdoor motors shall be catalogued and nameplated for weatherproof service with non hygroscopic insulation or epoxy encapsulated windings. 3 Motor housing shall be ferrous metal. Aluminum not acceptable for end bells or housing. E. Polyphase Motors. 1 Polyphase motors shall be squirrel -cage induction -type conforming to the following requirements except as otherwise indicated. 2. Motors shall be NEMA Design Letter Designation: 'B 3 The minimum nominal full -load efficiency for motors shall comply with Table 14 -4 of Washington State Energy Code. 4 Motor nominal efficiency shall be equal to or greater than that stated in latest NEMA MG 1 Table 12 -6C for that type and rating of motor 5 All motors over 3 /4 HP shall be premium efficiency rated. F Internal Thermal Overload Protection for Motors: For motors so indicated, protection automatically opens control circuit arranged for external connection. Protection operates when winding temperature exceeds safe value calibrated to the temperature rating of the motor insulation. G. Bearings: Bearings shall be ball type, selected for an ABMA Standard L 10 life rating of 100,000 hours. 1 Motor Bearing Protection: Motors connected to variable frequency drives (VFDs) shall have their bearing protected from the effects of metal removal caused by current flow Protection shall be by any of the following methods. a. Externally applied electrical shunt between motor frame and shaft. b. Electrically insulated bearings rated for the mechanical and electrical application. Electrical resistance shall be sufficient to prevent current flow including current flow from skin effect' induced by the VFD c Where the motor and VFD are provided by the same manufacturer any other method developed by the manufacturer to specifically prevent metal removal caused by current flow Such method must be demonstratively effective and must be readily maintainable (where maintenance is required) without dismantling the motor H. Motor Mounting: Generally foot mounted, face "C mounting. Motor slide rails shall be cast iron or steel and shall include twin take -up screws. I. Motor Speed. 1 Motors shall be single, constant speed, 1750 RPM, 1 15 minimum service factor except as otherwise indicated. 2. Insulation shall be inverter grade to meet NEMA MG1 Part 31 40.4.2. A Class `B' rise at a 1 15 service factor with a class F plus insulation system. Motors shall be multi dipped and baked in class `H' varnish. 3 3600 -rpm motors shall bre dynamically balanced to 0.12 in/sec maximum unfiltered vibration at bearing housings. 1800 rpm and slower motors are dynamically balanced to 0.10 in/sec maximum unfiltered vibration at the bearing housings. All vibration testing is per NEMA MG1 -Part 7 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 15 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.13 MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT 2.14 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 2.15 CURBS AND BASES 0 2007 Mahlum Architects BASIC MATERIALS METHODS J Single —Phase Motors. 1 Motors shall be energy efficient, one of the following types as selected to suit the starting torque and other requirements of the specific motor application. a. Permanent Split Capacitor b Split -Phase Start, Capacitor Run. c. Capacitor- Start, Capacitor Run. d. Shaded -Pole Motors. Use only for motors smaller than 1/20 HP 2. Internal Thermal Overload Protection for Motors: For motors so indicated, protection automatically opens the power supply circuit to the motor or a control circuit arranged for external connection. Protection operates when winding temperature exceeds safe value calibrated to the temperature rating of the motor insulation. Provide device that automatically resets when motor temperature returns to normal range except as otherwise indicated. 3 Bearings: Belt- connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft shall be ball bearing type same as specified for polyphase motors. Sealed, pre lubricated sleeve bearings may be used for other single -phase motors. K. Manufacturer ABB Automation 'Premium, Baldor 'Super E' Century 'E -plus III' General Electric 'Energy Saver' Reliance 'E 2000' Siemens 'PE.21 Toshiba 'EQP III' or U.S. Motors 'Premium Efficient' A. Single Speed Motor Starters. 1 Motor starters for all single -speed motors are specified to be provided in Division 16 section of work, except where the motor star:er is furnished by the equipment manufacturer as an integral part of the mechanical equipment. B Electric Wiring for Motors. Branch circuit wiring between motor control center and motors shall be furnished and installed under Division 16 work. Furnish the exact locations of all electrical connections and complete information on motor controls to the electrician immediately after submittal approval. A. Electrical Requirements: Electrical components of mechanical equipment and systems shall be provided under this division and shall be as specified herein and as necessary for complete and operable systems. Interconnecting wiring and conduit for components of packaged equipment shall be provided by the contractor furnishing the equipment unless otherwise required in Section 15900. B Control Wiring: 1 Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by equipment manufacturers, to serve specified control functions. 2. Raceways. All control wiring shall be installed in separate zinc coated steel conduit or raceways, with conduit fittings at all junction points, connections and outlets. A. Concrete Curbs and Bases. Provide appropriately sized concrete curbs and housekeeping bases for mechanical floor mounted. Concrete housekeeping bases, unless noted otherwise, shall be 4 thick, doweled to floor slab and trowel finished with 1 bevel edge all around. All equipment base plates shall be attached to concrete base. Anchor bolts shall be capable of resisting MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI horizontal and vertical earthquake forces, Building Code. B Concrete: 3000 psi concrete to ASTM C94 2.16 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING SUPPORTS A. Seismic Certification and Analysis. 1 Seismic restraint calculations must be provided by the manufacturer for all connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job location. 2. Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter embedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in the International Building Code acting through the equipment center of gravity 3 Seismic restraints for mechanical piping and equipment are specified in Section 15070 'Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not indicated. B Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, except where otherwise indicated. C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. D Install equipment so as to give the right -of way to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING SECTION 15050 PAGE 16 of 28 BASIC MATERIALS METHODS as required in Section 1621 of 2003 International A. Identification of Piping: All piping which is accessible for maintenance operations, including piping concealed above suspended ceilings, shall be identified with color coded identification bands. B Pipes: 1 Throughout the project, indicate direction of flow and service at least once in each space, at least once every 20 feet, and at all wall penetrations for all piping. 2. Anchor piping labels at each end with adhesive arrow bands around the full circumference of the pipe and overlapping at the ends. 3 Orient adhesive labels parallel to the pipe, and locate labels where they can be read from the floor or the most likely approach for access. 4 Where exposed pipes in occupied areas are to be painted, the color shall be specified by the A/E for aesthetic purposes. The term exposed in this context means unhidden by architectural elements, not uninsulated. 5 On all piping, apply labels stating asbestos free at least once in each space, at least once every 20 feet, and within 6 of each point of connection with the existing piping m 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 17 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI m 2007 Mahlum Architects BASIC MATERIALS METHODS insulation. Mark the circumference of the new insulation with a black marking pen at each point of connection with the existing insulation and draw an arrow from the nearest asbestos free to the black line. On the arrow write with the black marker 'terminates here. C. Identification of Medical Gas Piping: 1 All medical gas piping, including medical air shall be labeled to readily identify the gas content and shall bear the name of the gas contained and its operating pressure. Identification shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 99 Piping shall be identified by adhesive markers as follows. a. At intervals of not more than 20 feet. b At least once in or above every room. c. On both sides of partitions penetrated by the piping. d. At least once in every story height traversed by the risers. 2. Shut off valves shall be identified as to the following: a. The particular medical gas or vacuum system. b. A caution to not close or open the valve except in an emergency c. The rooms or areas served. D Equipment: 1 Provide an equipment label for each major piece of equipment. This category includes but is not limited to air handlers, chillers, cooling towers, variable frequency drives, pumps, unitary air conditioners, medical air plants, medical vacuum plants, medical gas manifolds, air terminal boxes, fan coil units, heat exchangers, and fans located outside ductwork. 2. Information provided on nameplates does not substitute for the equipment labeling requirements of this Section. 3 Prior to testing, adjusting and balancing, air terminal boxes shall be identified neatly either with equipment labels or a permanent black marking pen. Air terminal identification shall be readable from the floor 4 Install engraved plastic laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of equipment. 5 Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 2 feet, 1/2 high for distances up to 6 feet, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering 2/3 to 3/4 of size of principal lettering. 6. Location: An accessible and visible location. 7 Text of Signs. Manufacturer product name, model number serial number capacity operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Provide text to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to name of identified unit. E. Valves. 1 Tag each valve unless it is within 15 feet of the equipment served and in the same room. 2. Provide a valve chart and post it on the wall of the main mechanical room. On the chart, for each valve indicate the ID service, temperature, pressure and size. The ID on the chart shall match the ID on the valve tag. 3 Each valve tag with ID and applicable tag number shall be indicated on Contractor's as- built record drawings. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 18 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI I. Do not hang pipe from other pipe. BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 4 A complete typewritten list of the tag numbers, showing specific valve location and specific list of rooms affected by valve operation, shall be included in each operation and maintenance manual. 33 PAINTING A. Refer to Division 9 Section 09900 'Painting for field painting requirements. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ATTACHMENTS A. General. The following applies to all locations, however Section 15070 shall take precedence at locations where seismic bracing is required (should conflicts occur) B Provide bracings at pipe bends to prevent movement from inertia and water hammer C. Support Placement: Place supports as near as possible to concentrated loads, and when practicable, immediately adjacent to changes in direction. Support horizontal piping so as to maintain alignment, prevent grade reversals and prevent sagging in excess of 0.1 inch. D Provide piping supports and hangers with a means of adjustment for leveling, grading of piping and cold spring. movements. E. Support all piping where axial movement from thermal expansion is greater than 1/2 inch with adjustable steel yoke pipe roll. F Provide sufficient hanger rod lengths to limit rod displacement from thermal expansion to 4° from vertical. G. Size pipe rings and clamps to pass around outside of the piping insulation. Provide pipe hanger protection shields at pipe rings for pipe insulation with and without a vapor barrier Provide rigid inserts as required to prevent crushing of insulation. H. Vertical Piping Supports: 1 Install vertical piping supports to allow for pipe movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. 2. Support piping at each floor 3 Provide intermediate supports to prevent excessive pipe movement. Allow for expansion of pipe. 4 Support of Vertical Cast Iron Pipe and Steel Pipe Risers Not Subject to Thermal Expansion. Forged steel clamps, bolted to pipe just below the bell and rested on the floor One support for each two floors. In addition, support base of each soil stack on metal forged steel clamps. 5 Support of Steel Pipe Risers Subject to Thermal Expansion. Risers shall be suspended from or supported by spring isolation hangers and mountings, and the pipe anchored, as specified in Section 15070. Where not addressed in 15070, forged steel clamps anchored to building construction at midpoint with two spring hangers in horizontal runs at top and bottom of riser J Provide bored, drilled or reamed holes for all bolting to miscellaneous structural metals, frames, or for mounts or supports. Flame cut, punched, or hand -sawn holes will not be accepted. K. Attachments: Equipment support attachments to the structure shall include concrete inserts, concrete anchors, expansion shells, malleable iron beam clamps, structural steel angles or channels spanning between beam flanges or angle clip seats, as follows. 1 Steel Pipe, 4 Size: Concrete insert or concrete anchor or expansion shells. m 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 19 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI R. The Following Are Not Acceptable or Permitted. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 2. Cast Iron and Copper 6' Size: Concrete insert or concrete anchor or expansion shells. 3 Larger Pipe Than Above: Concrete insert with 5/8 x 36 long rod through insert slot and tied to slab reinforcing steel. 4 Equipment Loads Larger than 1500 Lbs. Same as for 'larger pipe above. 5 Steel Pipe, 21/2' and 3 4 Cast Iron, Copper and Plastic. Concrete inserts, concrete anchors, expansion shells, or 3/8 stub anchor with increaser and 1/2 hanger rod. 6. Steel Pipe, 2 and Smaller 3 and Smaller Cast Iron, Copper and Plastic. Concrete inserts, concrete anchors, expansion shells, or 3/8 stub anchor and hanger rod. 7 Powder driven studs not acceptable. 8 Where pre -set spot inserts cannot be in place before the concrete pour use expansion shells. No drilling of precast, pre- stressed concrete will be permitted. Special type of clamps which attach to the precast slab ribbing shall be provided as structural attachments. L. Steel Deck Inserts: Provide internally threaded type steel deck inserts through hole drilled in deck before concrete pour length suitable for slab thickness, with retainer clip on bottom sides of steel deck. M. Expansion Shells and Expansion Bolts. 1 Install anchor bolts for all mechanical equipment, piping, and ductwork as required. Tightly fit and clamp base supported equipment anchor bolts at all equipment support points. Provide locknuts where equipment is hung. 2. Provide expansion shells and expansion bolts where necessary to hang piping or equipment from existing concrete slabs or walls. 3 Expansion Shells for Hangers. Provide in holes drilled in structural concrete. Provide clips bolted to expansion shells for strap hanger• bolt strap hangers thereto. 4 Expansion Bolts for Equipment: Provide in holes drilled in concrete. N Attachments to Wood Joists: Provide angle clips secured to side of joist with threaded lag screws. O Vibration Supports. Certain hangers and supports supporting piping that is connected to rotating equipment are specified in this Section 15070. P Miscellaneous Metal Supports: Where supports are needed where adequate building structural members are not present, secondary support framing shall be provided under this Section to span loads to the nearest adequate building structural members. 1 Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. 2 Welding: Comply with AWS D1 1 Structural Welding Code -Steel This does not apply to attachments to building structural members. Q Attachments Made by Welding: 1 All welded type support components shall be in accordance with MSS -SP 58. All attachments welded to the pipe shall be in accordance with MSS -SP 58 and Pipe Fabrication Institute, Standard ES -26. Welded and bolted attachments to the building structural steel shall be in accordance with the requirements of AISC 'Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel Buildings. 2. Welding to building structural members must have prior approval from the A/E (structural engineer). MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 20 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 Wire hangers. 2. Perforated strap 3 Hanging from unreinforced metal roof deck. 4 Hanging from cellular roof deck. 5 Wood plugs. 6. Soft insulation at point of support on cold lines. S Manufactured Roof Mounted Pipe Supports. 1 Installation shall comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5 HANGER SPACING FOR PIPING A. Maximum Horizontal Pipe Hanger and Support Spacing: m 2007 Mahlum Architects Nominal Standard Pipe or Weight Tube Steel Pipe Diameter 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 3 -1/2 4 5 6 8' Water Service Ft. 7 7 7 7 7 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 19 Vapor Service Ft. 8 8 8 9 9 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 21 24 BASIC MATERIALS METHODS Copper Tube Water Service Ft. 5 5 5 5 6 7 8 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 Vapor Service Ft. 5 6 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 18 20 23 Note: The pipe spacing listed in table does not apply where span calculations are made or where there are concentrated loads between supports such as flanges, valves, specialties, etc. or changes in direction requiring additional supports. B Fire Protection Piping Support: Follow requirements of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Pamphlets 11 12, 13 14 15 16, 17 C. Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipe Support: 1 Cast Iron Pressure Pipe: a. 12 feet maximum spacing with a minimum of one (1) hanger per pipe section close to the joint on the barrel. Also at all changes of direction and branch connections. 2. Cast Iron Drainage Pipe: a. 10 feet maximum spacing with a minimum of one (1) hanger per pipe section close to the joint on the barrel. Also at all changes of direction and branch connections. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 21 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 3 No Hub Drainage Pipe: a. Horizontal piping shall be hung at every other joint except when the developed length between the hangers exceeds four (4) feet, the pipe shall be hung at each joint. Hangers shall be provided at each horizontal branch connection, on each water closet bend or elbow and at each trap Where piping and fittings are suspended on hangers more than 18 inches long and on each water closet bend or elbow rigid hangers or sway bracing shall be provided at every other hanger and hung piping and closet bends shall not have any horizontal movement in any direction. Hangers shall be placed within one inch of the coupling at each joint requiring a hanger Vertical piping shall be supported at each floor level including slabs on grade with riser clamps. D Non Metallic Pipe Support: 1 Plastic piping shall be supported at 4'0' centers maximum. 2. Glass pipe shall be supported at 8'0' maximum centers. Follow manufacturer s recommendations for material and service temperature. 3 Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe: Follow manufacturer's recommendations for spacing and service condition. E. Support of Concentrated Loads. 1 In general, a hanger shall be used within one foot of each change of direction and at each valve or equipment connection. F Piping penetrating walls shall have hanger on both sides of wall. G Trapeze -Type Hangers. Permitted only where multiple pipes run at the same elevation and grade, with same expansion characteristics. H. Special Situations: 1 Where soil conditions will not support underground piping installed under slabs on grade, use 5 -mil minimum thickness corrosion resistant polymer coated wrought steel clevis hangers with hot dipped galvanized hex nuts. All piping shall be supported as specified under maximum pipe hanger and support spacing. 2. In corrosive environments, use 5 -mil minimum thickness corrosion resistant polymer coated wrought steel clevis hangers with suitable protected rod and structural attachment. All piping shall be supported as specified under maximum pipe hanger and support spacing. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF PIPE SLEEVES A. General. All pipes passing through floors, walls or partitions, hung or furred ceilings shall be provided with sleeves of sufficient diameter to provide 1/2 annular clear space between the sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Sleeves for concrete floors, walls and other masonry work shall be so located and secured in place that space all around the pipe, after the pipes are installed in place, shall be about equal. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes. B Projecting Sleeves: Floor sleeves shall be caulked watertight and shall project approximately 1 inch above the finished floor so that the escutcheon plate will properly fit over same. Sleeves shall finish flush with the bottom of slab. C. Escutcheon Plates. Install pipe escutcheons at pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following: 1 Chrome- Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set -screw polished chrome plated finish. m 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 22 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons. Cast -brass or stamped steel, with set -screw 3 Insulated Piping: Cast -brass or stamped steel, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome plated finish. 4 Piping in Mechanical Rooms and Utility Areas: Cast -brass or stamped steel, with set- screw or spring clips. 5 Use split- casting escutcheons, where required, for existing piping. D Counterflashing: Piping that penetrates waterproof roof construction shall be provided with counterflashing. E. Sleeves Through Lead Wall Shield. Where piping penetrates a lead wall shield, maintain the integrity of the shield with a lead pipe sleeve fastened to the wall shield and extending 24 each side of the wall. The lead sleeve shall be the same weight as the wall shield. F Sealing of Sleeves. Where pipe sleeves are used, the annular space around pipes shall be 1/2 Pack the annular space with approved UL listed packing, leaving 1 1/2 depth for caulking compound. Apply sealing compound filling this remaining annular space out to a point flush to the wall line. G Sealant: Silicone acoustical sealant or non hardening butyl, suitable to withstand moderate joint movement. H. Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations. Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size the sleeve for 1 annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals. 1 Install Schedule 40 steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches. 2. Install cast iron wall pipes for sleeves 6 inches and larger 3 Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT MOUNTING SUPPORTS A. General. 1 Curbs shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and as detailed on the drawings. 2. Roof curbs shall be guaranteed to be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for a period of five years. B Coordination: 1 Size of curbs and supports and any required options shall be coordinated by curb manufacturer and general contractor and mechanical contractor prior to fabrication. 2. Shop drawings bearing A/E's approval shall be used for the fabrication. C. Equipment Supports: 1 Equipment supports shall span a minimum of two structural members. 2. No load shall be applied to a cantilever exceeding 1 -0' in length. D Setting Curbs and Supports: 1 Apply tape caulk to bottom of curb base plates. 2. Fasten curb to support steel or concrete through curb base plate and roof deck using suitable fasteners per side spaced on 6' centers or less as roof system permits. Fasteners shall withstand a minimum pullout force of 150 -lbs each. 3 Seal edge of roof curb base plate with silicone caulk to assure watertight seal. m 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 23 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 4 Apply a closed cell neoprene strip to top rail of roof curb before setting equipment. Equipment shall be fastened directly to curb wall using compatible fasteners. 3.8 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT A. At all times, take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect all material and equipment from damage. Failure to provide such protection will be sufficient cause for rejection of material or equipment. B Cap, plug, or otherwise protect all temporary openings in piping and ducts to prevent any dirt from entering. Take care to see that all pipe fittings are installed free from paint or grease. Deliver all finished work and equipment to Owner clean. C. Keep covered with plastic sheeting, arranged to provide adequate ventilation and prevent trapping of moisture. Piping, equipment, etc. which rusts or is damaged by elements may be rejected by Architect or Owner Replace rejected piping, equipment, etc. with new materials. 3.9 SEALING THROUGH AIR PLENUMS, SHAFTS AND FLOORS BASIC MATERIALS METHODS A. General. Provide all sealing around pipes, ducts, fire damper sleeves and frames, motorized damper frames, and other mechanical work penetrating walls and slabs which are boundaries for air plenums. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF FIRESTOPPING A. Examination. Verify that all penetrating elements and supporting devices have been installed and all temporary lines have been removed. B Preparation: 1 Provide drop cloths or other satisfactory covering for protection of adjacent areas in accordance with good work practices. 2. Surfaces that will be in contact with penetration seal materials shall be clean and free of dust, dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, rust or other substances. C. Installation: 1 Install penetration seal materials in accordance with design requirements, IBC and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Follow manufacturer's recommendations to obtain a smooth, professional finish. 3 If forms or damming materials are installed, they shall be removed after the designated cure time unless the support materials used are of a fire resistant or noncombustible nature. D Repairs and Modifications. 1 Identify damaged or re- entered seals requiring repair or modification. 2. Remove loose or damaged materials. 3 If pipes or other penetrating elements are to be added, remove enough material to insert new elements being careful not to cause damage to the balance of the seal. 4 Insure that surfaces to be sealed are clean and dry 5 Install materials in accordance with Paragraph C. above. Use only materials approved by manufacturer as suitable for repair or original seal. E. Field Quality Control. 1 Examine penetration seals for proper installation, adhesion and curing as may be appropriate for the respective seal materials. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 24 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2. Keep areas of work accessible and notify code authorities or designated inspectors of work released for inspection. 3 Document completion and inspection as required. F Clean-Up Remove equipment, materials, and debris, leaving area in a clean, undamaged condition. 3.11 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION BASIC MATERIALS METHODS A. General 1 Provide all demolition work in the existing building, as specified in Division 15 and as indicated, for the removal of existing mechanical equipment, ductwork, tubing, or piping and the installation of new equipment, ductwork, tubing, or piping. Demolition work means to disconnect, demolish, and remove 2. Relocate or modify the existing piping, tubing, and ductwork as required by any general construction alterations or by the installation of new ductwork, tubing, or piping in the existing building. 3 Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to demolition area(s) Conduct selective demolition so that Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provided not less than 72 hours notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 4 Perform the demolition work in a systematic manner Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on drawings in accordance with the Contractor's demolition schedule and governing regulations. 5 If unanticipated mechanical elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of conflict. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's Representative, rearrange demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay B Damaged or Disturbed Work: 1 Where pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality 2. Where existing insulation on piping and ducts is damaged due to cutting and abandonment or connection to new systems, replace damaged sections, as herein specified for new systems. C. Fixture removal 1 Where existing plumbing fixtures and radiators are removed, cut back to the stack or riser and cap the piping behind the wall or below the floor Remove all unused branch piping and piping in walls to be demolished and cap the remaining piping. D Utility Services: 1 Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect against damage during demolition operations. E. Abandoned Work: 1 Cut and remove buried pipe abandoned in place, 2 inches beyond the face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing. F Temporary Disconnections. 1 Remove, store, and clean equipment indicated for relocation. Reinstall and reconnect equipment and make operational. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 25 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI BASIC MATERIALS METHODS G Reuse of Existing Materials. 1 Existing materials removed such as pipe, valves and fittings, and insulation on pipes and ducts, shall not be reused. 2. Plumbing fixtures may be reused only as specified or indicated. Existing fixture trim, stops, supplies, hangers, and traps shall not be reused. H. Disposal of Demolished Materials. 1 Remove from building site equipment, materials, debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Transport and legally dispose off site. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. Burning of removed material is not permitted on project site. 2. Storage or sale of removed items on -site will not be permitted. Refrigerant Removal. Remove and provide containment of refrigerant from chillers and water to -water heat pumps scheduled for removal. Procedures for removal of refrigerant shall be executed according to manufacturer's decommissioning requirements. Conform to the provisions of Clean Air Act, Section 608. J Salvaged Materials. 1 Where specified or indicated on drawings as Salvage Deliver to Owner carefully remove, clean, store, and turn over to Owner and obtain receipt. 2. Materials to Owner shall include the following: a. Existing valves and traps which are not reused. b Motors and fan drives which are replaced. 3.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide all formed openings required in concrete construction for ducts, pipes, or equipment. Accurately locate all such openings and coordinate work with the general contractor in order to properly complete this work within the general contractor's time schedule. All additional openings required through new or existing slabs or walls shall be cut with a diamond saw or drilled with a diamond core drill, and in no case shall any structural member be cut without approval of structural engineer 1 Holes through non concrete walls shall be accomplished by use of a hole saw 2. Openings at sleeves through walls or partitions separating conditioned and unconditioned spaces shall be packed with watertight and airtight caulking. B Cutting And Patching- Existing Building: 1 Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. 2. All cutting in existing building required for installation of mechanical work shall be done by mechanical subcontractor 3 All round holes through concrete slabs or walls shall cut with a diamond saw or drilled with a diamond core drill. In no case shall structural members be cut. 4 Patching: All patching shall be by the General Contractor During the bidding period, notify the General Contractor the extent of patching required. C 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 26 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.13 PROVISIONS FOR LATER INSTALLATION 3.14 INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING A. General. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.15 EARTHWORK 2007 Mahlum Architects BASIC MATERIALS METHODS A. Where any mechanical work cannot be installed as structure is being erected, provide and arrange for building in of boxes, sleeves, insets, fixtures, or devices necessary to permit installation later Lay out any chases, holes, or other openings that must be provided in masonry concrete, or other work. B Verify nature and arrangement of materials and construction to which this work attaches or passes through. B Installation. Apply the strip only after the piping has been completely pressure tested. Clean surfaces of the pipe before applying; apply strip to conform closely to pipe and fittings. Heating stnp shall be applied to exterior of pipe hangers to prevent cutting the tape. Attach the heating strip to the pipe with cable ties or fiberglass tape supplied by the heating strip manufacturer at 24 intervals and at each change in direction of pipe. C. Application to Valves. Apply to surfaces to be insulated (exterior of water containing parts). 1.0' of tape per valve, in addition to tape on the pipe; concealed under the insulation. D Apply electric traced' signs to the outside of the thermal insulation at ten foot intervals along the pipe on alternating sides. E. Tests: 1 After installation, and before and after installing the thermal insulation, subject heater to testing using a 2500 VDC megger Minimum insulation resistance should be 20 to 1000 megaohms regardless of length. 2. The installer shall provide resistance test for both heating cable wires to verify the connection of any splices or tees. F Coordination. 1 It shall be the mechanical subcontractor's responsibility to coordinate installation of heat tracing with electrical subcontractor and insulation subcontractor 2. The mechanical subcontractor shall verify that circuit breakers supplying to the heat trace are equipped with 30 -mA ground -fault circuit protection. 5 -mA GFCI devices are not acceptable. 3 Coordinate power connection and wiring with electrical subcontractor It shall be the responsibility of electrical contractor to furnish and install wiring from the breaker panel to the freeze protection trace point of connection. Coordinate location of heat trace power connection J -boxes and point of connection with electrical contractor A. General. Provide all earthwork as necessary for the installation of all mechanical work. B Work in City Street Areas. Comply with city regulations pertaining to cutting and patching of paving, excavating and backfilling. C. Breaking of Existing Pavement Other than City Street Areas: Break paving on substantially straight lines, along the lines of the trench or tunnel entry D Temporary Facilities, Barricades, Protective Measures: See Division 1 of these specifications. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 27 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI BASIC MATERIALS METHODS E. Locating Existing Utilities: Prior to machine trenching, furnish and use an electronic pipeline finder instrument over the entire length of trench to locate existing pipe, conduit, etc. Before using machine excavation, locate by hand shovel digging all intersecting utilities and connections shown, and those located by the pipeline finder protect during trenching. F Repair of Damages to Underground Utilities The exact location of existing underground utilities is not definitely known. Should any underground utilities be damaged in excavations, Contractor shall restore any such utilities, both temporarily and permanently as required, without any additional cost to the Owner Correct any damage resulting thereof. G. Excavation method shall be open trench type. Width of trench for pipe shall be sufficient to permit the pipe to be laid and jointed properly with 6 minimum clear space each side of the pipe; bottom true to grade. Side walls of excavations shall be as nearly vertical as possible; 1 horizontal to 10' vertical, as a maximum wherever possible. H. Pipe Bedding: 1 Provide bedding for all storm, sanitary sewer and water system piping. 2. Bedding material shall be gravel backfill for pipe bedding. Gravel backfill for pipe bedding shall conform to Section 9 -03 12(3) of WSDOT Standard Specifications. 3 Bedding material shall be sand backfill for pipe bedding. Sand backfill shall conform to Section 9 -03 13 of WSDOT Standard Specifications. I. Select Backfill Materials. Use for filling of all backfilled areas, throughout all areas where work under this contract installed under paving at grade, extending to a distance outside such limits to a one -to -one slope away from such paving, and to a height which will serve as subgrade for the paving and for all backfill around manholes up to a point 8 below grade. Select backfill shall be purchased from a source approved by Architect. J Backfill Material Other Than Select Backfill. Backfill material may be the originally excavated material, from which all debris, broken concrete or other waste material has been removed, except where such material cannot be stockpiled as specified above, provide new select backfill material. K. Compacting: Compact each layer of backfill individually and place backfill at a moisture condition which will produce maximum density compact thoroughly and completely to not less than 95% maximum density using roller or tamping equipment. L. Surplus Earth. Clay materials and other excavated materials not suitable for backfill. Remove from site and dispose of as directed, new backfill materials shall be provided as specified in the foregoing. M. Bracing and Shoring: Where the depth of excavation or character of the ground require it for safety made of timber conform with local and state safety laws and regulations; remove before backfilling; where necessary to ensure against caving, withdrawn while backfilling is being done. N Temporary Pumping Equipment: Unless otherwise covered in Division 2, furnish and maintain, as required, to keep excavations free of water continuously until backfilling is complete. Disposal of water from excavations shall be to city sewer through temporary sumps. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15050 PAGE 28 of 28 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 0 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 15050 BASIC MATERIALS METHODS 3.16 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS OR BY OWNER A. Obtain all rough -in data from approved shop drawings on all equipment. B Unless otherwise specified, make all final piping connections to equipment and install fittings, strainers, pressure reducing valves, flow control valves, relief valves, and grease traps provided with or as an integral part of equipment. Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 1 of 16 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Sections 15010 and 15050 are directly related. Other sections are indirectly related and shall be reviewed. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this section includes all labor material, tools, equipment and special services necessary for the complete installation of the following for all Division 15 elements: 1 Seismic controls (bracing, anchors and restraints) for non isolated equipment, piping and ductwork. 2. Seismic controls (bracing, snubbers, anchors and restraints) for isolated equipment, piping and ductwork. 3 Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork, and equipment. 4 Equipment isolation bases. 5 Flexible piping connections. B Special services under this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 Engineering of seismic controls and vibration isolation. 2. Preparation of installation drawings, including plans and details. 3 Engineering supervision of installation. 4 Engineering certification of final installation. 1.3 EXTENT OF WORK. 1 New Construction: This work applies to all Division 15 equipment and distribution elements furnished and installed in new and existing structures as part of this project. 2. Seismic Controls. It is the intent of the seismic portion of this specification to keep all significant Division 15 building system components in place during a seismic event and to keep important Division 15 components operational after a seismic event. 3 Vibration Isolation: All mechanical equipment, piping, and ductwork as noted on the equipment schedule or in Part 3 of the specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections. 1.4 ENGINEERING AND SUPERVISION A. Manufacturer of seismic control products shall provide the services of registered professional engineer(s) licensed in the project state to select, engineer and design all necessary anchorages and seismic restraints. The registered professional engineer(s) shall have not less than five years experience in the design of seismic controls. Project- specific calculations and, if necessary drawings shall be prepared and shall bear the `wet stamp of the engineer in responsible charge. Engineering work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1 Select the locations for all seismic bracing, snubbers, anchors and restraints (seismic controls). The location of devices that provide both vibration isolation and seismic control shall be determined in cooperation with the vibration isolation manufacturer to result in proper seismic control' and isolation. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 2 of 16 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CONTROL 2. Calculate seismic forces and select appropriate pre engineered/approved seismic control assemblies to be utilized at each location. 3 Engineering of all custom seismic controls where appropriate pre engineered/approved assemblies are not available. Custom seismic controls for equipment shall be designed with input from the equipment manufacturers to result in suitable, full- strength attachment to the equipment. 4 Select all methods of attachment of seismic controls to the building structure. All attachment devices shall be approved. Typical location and types of attachment devices shall be submitted for review by the architect's structural engineer 5 Prepare installation guidelines for use by field installers. Guidelines shall show details for all pre engineered/approved and custom seismic controls needed. Guidelines shall identify for typical seismic control, the method of attachment to the building structure. Guidelines shall clearly explain where seismic controls shall be installed for each piece of equipment, piping system and ductwork system. 6. Provide training for the field installers. Training shall be adequate to result in proper installation of all controls and clear understanding of how and where the devices are to be installed. 7 Upon completion of the work, the engineer shall review the installation to verify that all seismic controls have been properly installed. The engineer shall then submit a stamped and signed letter to the architect indicating that all seismic controls have been properly installed. B Methods and materials specified in this section are minimum requirements and shall not excuse the Contractor from the responsibility of meeting the criteria specified. All necessary changes and additions required to meet the criteria shall be made without cost to the Owner 1.5 STANDARDS AND CODES A. Referenced Standards. Current publications of the standards referred to by basic designation in Part 2 and Part 3 shall form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by references thereto. B Mechanical system supports shall be designed and installed for the seismic forces in accordance with the 2003 International Building Code. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General Requirements. Refer to Section 01300 Submittals and Section 15010, 'Mechanical Work General for requirements pertaining to submittals, including preparation and transmittals. Provide submittals as follows: B Descriptive Data. 1 Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and pre- engineered seismic controls detailing compliance with the specification. 2. Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic controls by referencing numbered descriptive drawings. 3 Fabrication Drawings: Fabrication details for equipment bases and supports for floor supported and suspended equipment including dimensions, structural member sizes, and support point locations. C. Layout Plans: Plans shall utilize copies of the contractor's coordination plans and shall show all locations and types for the following. The registered professional engineer must stamp plans. 1 All seismic brace locations. 2. All anchorage connections to the structure. Quantity and Size 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 3 of 16 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CONTROL 3 Brace reactions at all connection points to the structure for Structural Engineer of Record use in checking suitability of the building structure. 4 Total vertical load at seismic brace locations when utilizing rigid bracing. 5 Type and size of brace member 6. Suspended utility max lbs per lineal foot or max pipe size at all seismic locations. 7 Minimum rod size at all seismic locations. 8. Vertical support anchors at non seismic and seismic locations. 9 Horizontal members of all trapeze assemblies. D Seismic Details. Provide details for all custom seismic controls needed. Identify at each seismic control location, the method of attachment to the building structure. The registered professional engineer must stamp details. E. Seismic Calculations, Analysis and Certification: Upon completion of the work, the engineer shall review the installation to verify that all seismic controls have been properly installed. The engineer shall then submit a stamped and signed letter to the architect indicating that all seismic controls have been properly installed. 1.7 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Construction criteria and standards of seismic control design shall comply with ICBO Report number PFC 5566. B Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads, and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter embedment, and/or welded length. All seismic controls shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in International Building Code acting through the equipment center of gravity Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level. C. The following formula shall be used to determine the design seismic force F prescribed in the 2003 International Building Code: 2007 Mahlum Architects F 04aPSDSWP 1 +2 P RP/ h, D Life Safety Systems: Seismic controls (bracing, snubbers, anchors and restraints) shall be provided for all life safety equipment: 1 All systems involved with fire protection, including, but not limited to, sprinkler piping, 2. All medical gas and vacuum equipment and manifolds. E. Large Equipment: Seismic controls (bracing, snubbers, anchors and restraints) shall be provided for all equipment and tanks that weigh over 400 pounds (lbs) when in normal operation (full) MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI F Small Equipment: Seismic controls shall be provided for small equipment that weighs less than 400 pounds as listed below G Piping and Ductwork: All mechanical piping, and ductwork as noted in Part 3 of the specification shall be provided with seismic controls. 1.8 DEFINITIONS A. Positive Attachment: 1 A positive attachment is defined as a cast -in anchor a drill -in wedge anchor a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided 'C' type beam clamps for attachments associated with seismic controls for overhead piping, ductwork, fire protection or equipment, are not acceptable on this project as anchor points. B Transverse Bracing: 1 Air Conditioning Units Terminal Units greater than 20 Ibs Air Handling Units Air Separators greater than 50 lbs Pumps greater than 50 Ibs Boiler Make Up Equipment Cabinet Heaters greater than 50 lbs Condensers SECTION 15070 PAGE 4 of 16 MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION CONTROL Terminal Heating and Cooling Units Unit Heaters greater than 50 lbs Vacuum Pumps Variable Frequency Drives Condensers Condensing Units Fans greater than 50 lbs Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit. C. Longitudinal Bracing: 1 Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe, duct, or conduit. 1.9 RELATED WORK A. Housekeeping Pads: 1 Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the structure details and design shall be provided as part of this work, if not already adequate as indicated in the documents of other Divisions. This requirement applies only to pads that receive seismic forces for equipment anchored under this Section. 2. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated by the seismic controls engineer to result in sizing such that a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters is provided all around the outermost anchor bolts to allow development of full drill -in wedge anchor ratings. If cast -in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment. B Attachments: 1 Provide restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer's calculations. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conflicts and Discrepancies. The Contractor shall bring to the A/E s attention prior to installation any conflicts with other trades that will result in unavoidable contact to the equipment, piping, etc. described herein, due to inadequate space, etc. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 5 of 16 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CONTROL B The Contractor shall bring to the A/E s attention any discrepancies between the Specifications and field conditions, changes required due to specific equipment selection, etc. prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the Contractor s expense. C. The Contractor shall obtain written and/or oral instructions from the vibration isolation manufacturer as to the proper installation and adjustment of vibration isolation devices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of design is Mason Industries. Other acceptable manufacturers include ISAT (International Seismic Application Technology) meeting all specified conditions. The Seismic Controls engineer shall be responsible for the determination of adequacy of seismic restraints that are furnished as an integral part of a vibration isolation assembly and the anchorage of that assembly to the building structure. If an integrated assembly or its anchorage is not adequate, separate seismic control shall be provided. B Vibration Isolation. Basis of design is Mason Industries. Other acceptable manufacturers include Kinetics Noise Control, Amber/Booth Co, and CalDyn (California Dynamics Corporation) meeting all specified conditions. C. Products offered by acceptable manufacturers shall, in the opinion of the A/E, meet or exceed the performance of the product identified as the basis of design. 2.2 SEISMIC CONTROLS A. Seismic Cable Restraints. Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage Preapproval 'R Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies shall be ceiling and at the clevis bolt type, installed between the hanger rod nut and clevis or if clamped to a beam. 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, Type SCBH' between the hanger rod nut and clevis, or SCBV' if clamped to a beam. B Seismic Solid Braces. Braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage preapproval 'R number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. Type SSB C. Steel angle rod clamp assembly sized to prevent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when required. Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have an Anchorage Preapproval 'R Number from OSHPD in the State of California. 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. Type SRC. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 6 of 16 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CONTROL D Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be special purpose preformed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have an Anchorage Preapproval 'R Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Clevis cross brace shall be Type CCB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. Type 'CCB E. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials compounded to bridge bearing specifications. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and a minimum 3/4 thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1,000 psi. Snubbers shall be manufactured with an air gap between hard and resilient material of not less than '/a nor more than 1 /4 Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances. The capacity of the seismic snubber at deflection shall be equal or greater than the load assigned to the mounting grouping controlled by the snubber multiplied by the applicable 'G force. Submittals shall include the load deflection curves up to V2 deflection in the x, y and z planes. Snubbers shall have an anchorage preapproval 'R number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. Type 7 1011 F Alternate all- directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members retrained by a one -piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene. Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1 /4 thick. Rated loadings shall exceed 100 psi. A minimum air gap of shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable to allow inspection of internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotted to ensure no short circuits exist before systems are activated. Snubbers shall have an Anchorage Preapproval 'R Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. Type 7 1225 G Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from undersized wire that is rolled up to create the thread. The drill -in stud wedge anchor shall also have a safety shoulder that fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. Type 'SAS. H. Drill -in female wedge anchors may be used in floor locations so isolators or equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. Type 'SAB Housekeeping pad anchors shall consist of a ductile iron casing that is tapered and hexagonal, smaller at the base that at the top. The upper portion shall have holes for rebar to pass through. The anchor shall be continuously threaded from top to bottom for the attachment of soleplates. Housekeeping pad anchors shall be attached to the structural slab using a stud wedge anchor 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. Type 'HPA housekeeping pad anchors and Type SAS' stud wedge anchors. 2.3 ISOLATORS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Isolator Identification: All vibration isolators shall be clearly marked to show undeflected heights so that after installation and adjustment, deflection under load can be verified, thus deter mining that the load is within the proper range of the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being attained. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 7 of 16 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CONTROL B Provide a balanced set of isolators for each piece of equipment. Select isolators in accordance with equipment weight distribution to allow for no less than static deflection specified. All isolators for a single piece of equipment shall have approximately equal spring deflection. A minimum of four isolators per unit is required unless otherwise indicated. C. Each isolator shall be numbered and color -coded to show location. Code number and color shall be marked on plans, on each equipment isolator and on each base to ensure proper placement. D Operating Limits. All isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Load versus deflection curves shall be furnished by the manufacturer and must be linear over a deflection range of not less than 50% above the design deflection. E. The spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. F The theoretical vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon the load per isolator and isolator stiffness, shall not differ from the design objectives for the equipment as a whole by more than ±10% G Neoprene Mountings. All neoprene mountings shall have a shore hardness of 40-65 after minimum aging of 20 days, or corresponding oven aging. H. Neoprene Isolator Formulation. Formulation of the neoprene shall conform to AASHTO specifications for neoprene or ASTM D4014 specification for elastomer I. All vibration isolation hardware shall be designed or treated for corrosion resistance. Isolators exposed to the weather shall have steel parts zinc electroplated, PVC coated, plus a coating of neoprene or bitumastic paint. Aluminum components for outdoor installation shall be etched and painted with industrial grade enamel. Nuts, bolts, and washers shall be zinc electroplated. 2.4 ISOLATOR TYPES A. Specification (1) Two layers of 3 /4 thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 -gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be used as required. 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. Type Super 'W B Specification (2)• Bridge- bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2 and all directional seismic capability The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge- bearing specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval 'R Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc', Type Super 'BR. C. Specification (5). Spring isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable without any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4 neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height, and solid spring height. 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. Type SLF 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 8 of 16 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CONTROL D Specification (6) Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in Specification (5) within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of t/2 shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since housings will be bolted or welded in position, there must be an internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Preapproval 'R Number from OSHPD in the State of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. 1 Manufacturer. Mason Industries, Inc. Type SLR. E. Specification (7) Spring mountings same as in Specification (5), built into a ductile iron or steel housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum of 1 /4 travel in all directions before contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval 'R number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. Type SSLFH. F Specification (10) Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 11/4 thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in Specification (5) seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers nor the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger drawing showing the 30° capability 1 Manufacturer. Mason Industries, Inc. Type '30N G. Specification (11) Hangers shall be as described in Specification (10), but they shall be pre compressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic up -stop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall include a drawing of the hanger showing the 30° capability 1 Manufacturer. Mason Industries, Inc. Type 'PC3ON H. Specification (22) Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on spring isolation curbs. The lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper frame must provide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber bushings shall be a minimum of 1/4 thick. Steel springs shall be laterally stable and rest on t/a thick neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and the springs provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs waterproofing and joined at the corners by EPDM bellows. All spring location shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers. Lower curbs shall be furnished with 2 thick rigid insulation. The roof curbs shall be built to seismically contain the rooftop unit. The unit must be solidly fastened to the top floating rail, and the lower Z section anchored to the roof structure. Curb shall have anchorage preapproval 'R Number from OSHPD in the State of California, attesting to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. 1 Manufacturer. Mason Industries, Inc. Type 'RSC. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 9 of 16 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CONTROL 2. The floating member of the roof curb shall have a perimeter angle and cross members to support two layers of waterproof sheetrock laid on in staggered joints. Sheetrock shall be provided to surround the ductwork to provide a continuous sound break. The acoustical barrier shall be attached at the highest practical elevation of the fixed curb with provision for a 1 thick closed sell neoprene caulked to minimize sound transmission. Where the mechanical arrangement makes attachment to the floating member unfeasible, the barrier shall be flexible seals around the ductwork. A 4 layer of 1.5 lb. per square foot density fiberglass shall cover the entire solid roof surface under the unit. Ductwork shall be lined with sound absorbent material. Complete instructions shall be provided by the spring isolation manufacturer a. Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. Type RSC -dB or approved. Specification (28). The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene molded cup as described in Specification (5) with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be designed so it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of Vs movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with one rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the ductwork or the equipment and the structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached to the centerline of thrust and symmetrical on either side of the unit. 1 Manufacturer Mason Industries, Inc. Type WBI/WBD 2.5 BASES A. Type B -1 Base: A rectangular structural steel base for increasing rigidity of equipment mounted thereon. The base shall be complete with welded height- saving brackets, for side mounting of vibration isolators and snubbers. The steel members shall be welded, wide flange or channel structural steel. Junior beams and junior channels shall not be used. Cross members shall be provided where necessary to support the equipment or to prevent twisting of the main members. The section depth of any frame member shall be not less than 1 /10th of the length of the longest frame member and not less than 1 /10th of the greatest span between support points. All frame members shall have the same depth. B Type B -3 Base: A concrete inertia base, consisting of a perimeter welded structural steel pouring form, 1/2 diameter reinforcing bars welded in place on 6 centers each way pre located equipment anchor bolts and pipe sleeves, and isolator brackets to reduce the mounting height of the equipment. The bottom edge of the steel reinforcing bars shall be 1 1/2 from bottom of the base. Drilled steel members shall have sleeves below the holes to receive anchor bolts. Thickness of the base shall be a minimum depth of 1 /12th of the longest span, but not less than 6 deep. The base shall be sized a minimum overlap of 4 around the base of the equipment, and in the case of belt- driven equipment, 4 beyond the end of the drive shaft. Clearance of 2 shall be maintained between the concrete base and the floor slab or housekeeping pad. C. Coil Supports: Floor- supported coil sections shall be mounted on three layers of ribbed neoprene pad, each separated by a 1/16 galvanized steel plate. Pads shall be loaded at 60 psi. D Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly cleaned of welding slag, primed with zinc chromate, and finished with two coats of industrial enamel. 2.6 RUST PROOFING A. All vibration isolation and seismic restraint hardware shall be designed or treated for corrosion resistance. B Items exposed to the weather shall have steel parts zinc electroplated, PVC coated, plus a coating of neoprene or bitumastic paint. Aluminum components for outdoor installation shall be etched and painted with industrial enamel. C. Nuts, bolts, and washers shall be zinc electroplated. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI D Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly cleaned finished with two coats of industrial enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. General. 1 All seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and all certified submittal data. 2. Installation of seismic restraints and vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment. 3 No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that degrades the noise and vibration control system specified in this Section. 4 The contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or conduit which makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. 'Building includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls. 5 Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. 6. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the A/E for approval. Generally bracing may occur from. a. b. c. 7 Cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short circuiting the isolated suspended equipment, piping or conduit. 8. Cable assemblies shall be installed taut on non isolated systems. Solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only 9 At locations where cable restraints or solid braces are used, the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with rod clamp assemblies. 10. At locations where cable restraints or solid braces are attached to pipe clevis, the clevis cross bolt must be reinforced with approved clevis cross braces. 11 Drill -in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall be stud wedge type anchors. Concrete anchors for floor mounted equipment shall be female type wedge anchors. Flanges of structural beams. Upper truss chords in bar joist construction. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill -in concrete anchors. SECTION 15070 PAGE 10 of 16 MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION CONTROL of welding slag, primed with zinc chromate and B Seismic Restraint of Piping: 1 Seismically restrain all piping listed below Use seismic cable restraints if isolated. For un- isolated piping, seismic cable restraints or seismic solid braces may be used. a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, medical air piping, and medical vacuum piping that is 1 I.D or larger b All piping located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment rooms, fan rooms, and refrigeration equipment rooms that is 1 1/4 and larger c. All other piping 2 1/2 diameter and larger 2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40-0' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 3 Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' -0' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 11 of 16 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CONTROL 4 Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or contraction. 5 For fuel oil and all gas piping, transverse restraints must be at 20' -0' maximum and longitudinal restraints at 40' -0' maximum spacing. 6. Transverse restraint for one pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed within 24 of the elbow or tee or combined stresses are within allowable limits at longer distances. 7 Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis supports. 8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines. 9 For cast iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipe joined with a banded shield and clamp assembly transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' -0' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' -0' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. C. Seismic Restraint of Ducts. 1 Seismically restrain all ductwork with seismic cable restraints or seismic solid braces as listed below a. Restrain rectangular ducts with cross sectional area of 6 sq ft. or larger b Restrain round ducts with diameters of 28 or larger c. Restrain flat oval ducts the same as rectangular ducts of the same nominal size. 2. Transverse restraints shall occur at 30' intervals or at both ends of the duct run if less than specified interval. Transverse restraints shall be installed at each duct change of direction and at each end of a duct run. 3 Longitudinal restraints shall occur at 60' intervals with at least one restraint per duct run. Transverse restraints for one duct section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a duct section connected perpendicular to it if the restraints are installed within 4 of the intersection of the ducts and if the restraints are sized for the larger duct. Duct joints shall conform to SMACNA duct construction standards. 4 The ductwork must be reinforced at restraint locations. Reinforcement shall consist of an additional angle on top of the ductwork that is attached to the support hanger rods. Ductwork shall be attached to both upper angle and lower trapeze. 5 A group of ducts may be combined in a larger frame so that the combined weights and dimensions of the ducts are less than or equal to the maximum weight and dimensions of the duct for which bracing details are selected. 6. Walls, including gypsum board non bearing partitions, which have ducts running through may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide channel framing around ducts and solid blocking between the duct and the frame. D Fire Protection: 1 Refer to Section 15300 for requirements associated with fire sprinkler piping. 2. Pipes, ducts, and conduit supported by a trapeze where none of those elements would individually require bracing shall still be braced if connections to any of the pipe/duct/conduit or directional changes restrict movement of the trapeze. If flexibility is not provided, bracing is required when the combined operating weight of all elements supported by the trapeze is 10 lbs/ft or greater 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 12 of 16 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CONTROL E. Mechanical Equipment: 1 All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically restrained as per the schedules listed below 3.2 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION A. The isolator manufacturer or its qualified representative shall be responsible for providing such supervision in the presence of the A/E as may be necessary to assure correct installation and adjustment of the isolators. B The installation or use of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment or piping which would result in stresses in piping connections or misalignment of shafts or bearings. In order to meet this objective, equipment and piping shall be maintained in a rigid position during installation. The load shall not be transferred to the isolator until the installation is complete and under full operational load. C. The Contractor shall correct, at no additional cost, all installations that are deemed defective in workmanship or materials by the A/E. D At the end of the job the vibration isolation manufacturer shall make the final inspection of its portion of the entire project and submit its report to the A/E. The report must certify that all isolators are installed as shown in the shop drawings, all isolators are free to work properly that the deflections are as specified, and that no excessive stresses or binding exist on isolated equipment piping and ducts. 3.3 EQUIPMENT ISOLATOR INSTALLATION A. All mechanical equipment over 1 hp and unless otherwise noted, shall be isolated from the structure by means of resilient vibration and noise isolators. All isolators shall be secured to building structure unless specified otherwise. Mounts and bases shall be as tabulated on the equipment schedule as shown on the drawings or as specified. B The equipment to be isolated shall be supported by a structural steel frame or by brackets attached directly to the machine where no frame is required. C. Brackets shall be provided to accommodate the isolator and provide a mechanical stop. The vertical position and size of the bracket shall be specified by the isolator manufacturer D The operating clearance between the bracket and the pad or floor shall be 3/8 ±1/16 The minimum operating clearance between the frame and the pad or floor shall be 2 E. The frame shall be placed in position and the brackets supported temporarily by 3/8 shims prior to the installation of the machine or isolators. F After the entire system installation is completed and under full operational load, the isolator shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred from the shims to the isolator When all isolators are properly adjusted, the shims will be barely free and shall be removed. Thereafter the shims shall be used as a gauge to check that the 3/8 clearance is maintained so that the system will remain free of stress. G. All equipment shall be mounted absolutely level. H. Isolators installed out of doors shall be capable of providing restraint due to wind loads of up to 301b. /sq.ft. applied to any surface of the equipment without failure. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 13 of 16 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CONTROL 3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION A. All piping carrying circulating fluids or pumped gases shall be isolated from the building structure with vibration isolators as specified in the vibration isolation schedule. Install isolators so that they can be easily removed for replacement. B Piping shall not penetrate floating floors or vibration isolated ceilings unless specifically called for in the drawings. C. Main risers shall be supported only at mid level, with riser guides at other levels, unless otherwise indicated. D A flexible neoprene elbow connector shall be provided at the inlet and discharge of all floor supported pumps 5 hp and over Flexible neoprene connections are also required at the connections to chillers and cooling towers. E. Horizontally suspended piping shall be suspended from massive structural beams rather than slab diaphragms wherever possible. F Do not support vibration isolated piping along with non isolated piping on a common trapeze. G Steel spring hanger boxes shall be rigidly mounted to the supporting structure —not located in the middle of the hanger rod. H. Hanger rods shall be aligned to clear the hanger box. I. Load transfer isolators, when utilized, shall temporarily maintain the piping in a rigid position until installation is complete and fully loaded. J Pipe anchors are not permitted in vibration isolated piping circuits. K. The first four pipe hangers shall be Type 6 with the same deflection as specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. L. Hangers supporting piping larger than 2' in all other locations shall be Type 6. Floor supported piping shall be isolated with Type 2 isolators. M. Hangers supporting piping 2 and smaller shall be Type 7 isolators. N All vertical risers shall be supported by spring isolators of Type 2. O Anchors shall be all- directional acoustical anchors, consisting of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum Y2 thickness of 60 durometer or softer neoprene. Anchors shall be equal to Mason ADA. P Resilient guides shall be spaced and sized properly depending on the pipe diameter Guides shall consist of a telescoping arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum ih thickness of 60 durometer or softer neoprene. The height of the guides shall be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. Pipe guides shall be equal to Mason type VSG. 3.5 DUCTWORK ISOLATION A. Isolate all ductwork within the first 50 feet of vibration isolated equipment or within the mechanical rooms, whichever is greater according to the following: 1 Isolate the ductwork using isolators Type 6 or Type 9 with a minimum static deflection of 1.0' 2. Isolate all ductwork outside the mechanical room using isolator Type 7 with a minimum static deflection of 0.35' 2007 Mahlum Architects MAI LUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 14 of 16 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CONTROL 3 Isolate all duct runs having air velocity of 1000 fpm or more using isolator Type H -5 with a minimum static deflection of 1.0' B Isolate all ductwork penetrations through mechanical room(s) walls, ceiling, or floor and all penetrations of ductwork scheduled to be isolated on isolators (spring or neoprene) as described below 1 Provide a sheet metal (18 gauge) sleeve to cover the entire perimeter of a 1 to 1 1/2 (1/2' to 3/4 on each side) oversized wall cut. 2. Plaster sleeve to the wall, or ceiling and floor to ensure an airtight seal. 3 Where ductwork penetrates double walls, use a separate sleeve at each side of the wall (allow no sleeve connection between walls) 4 Pack the gap between the penetrating duct and the sleeve with fiber insulation and seal airtight with an outer layer of resilient sealant. 5 Penetrations of GWB ceilings by ductwork require only sealing airtight with a resilient acoustical sealant. 6. Packing Fiber insulation to be equivalent to the following products: a. Non -Fire Rated Wall, Ceiling, and Floor Owens Corning fiberglass. b Fire Rated Wall, Ceiling, and Floor- USG Thermafiber Firestopping for penetrations through fire rated wall, ceiling, and floor is specified in Section Firestopping. 7 Resilient sealant to be equivalent to the following products. a. Non -Fire Rated Wall, Ceiling, and Floor USG Acoustical Sealant. b Fire Rated Wall, Ceiling, and Floor- 3M Vibrati0on Control systems 'RTV' silicone Type 2001 two component elastomeric foam. 8. Use the above penetration treatment regardless of the existence of external duct insulation. Size penetration large enough to pack additional USG Thermafiber and/or sealant between the duct external insulation and the sheet metal sleeve. C. All main branches of the ductwork running in fan rooms shall be suspended on isolators Type 6 with a minimum load deflection of 1.0' Support this ductwork from the structure using spring isolators Type 9 D Generator Exhaust: All generator exhaust and boiler flue ductwork shall be isolated using Type 6 hangers with a minimum load delection of 1 0' and shall be supported from the structure using spring isolators. E. Flexible connections shall be provided between all fans and connecting ductwork. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF BASES A. All bases shall be installed on housekeeping pads. All bases shall be sized to include equipment and motor without overhang. B Motor driven equipment shall be mounted with motors on a common base of sufficient rigidity to maintain permanent alignment. C. All bases shall have clearance of 1 1/2 between top of floor and underside of base. D Inertia bases shall have 1 1/2 clearance for first 50 sq.ft. of area. 3.7 EXTENT OF RESILIENT SUPPORTED PIPES AND DUCTS A. All piping and high pressure ductwork in mechanical rooms, and piping not less than 50' from connected rotating equipment, shall be supported from Type 5 isolators, providing a minimum 3/4 static deflection for 2 and larger 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 15 of 16 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CONTROL B The first three piping isolation hanger supports from rotating equipment shall be capable of supporting piping during piping installation at fixed elevations and shall be Type 6 isolators. Pipe hangers shall have a design static deflection equal to the equipment spring deflection. 3.8 SCHEDULE OF VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Ground Supported Slab or Basement: Equipment Type: 2007 Mahlum Architects Pumps (Base Mounted) Up to 60 hp 71 hp and Larger 275 rpm to 400 rpm Equipment Type Centrifugal blowers 300 rpm to 374 rpm 375 rpm to 499 rpm 500 rpm and Over Equipment Tv. Isolator Isolator Seismic Spec. Deflection in. Pumps (Close Coupled) Up to 5 hp (2) (21) (23) 0.35 (5)(16) 0 75 (21) (23) Fan Coil Units Floor Mounted Up to 5 hp (2) 0.35 (2) 0.35 B Above -Grade Installation -20' Floor Span Possible Floor Deflection 0.67 Isolator Isolator Seismic Spec. Deflection in. Utility sets 300 rpm to 374 rpm (5) (20) (16) 2.50 375 rpm to 499 rpm (7) 1.50 500 rpm and Over (7) 1 00 (5) (20) (16) (5) (20) (16) (5) (20) (16) 2.50 1.50 1.00 Curb Mounted (22) 1 0 Roof Top Units Condensing Units 300 rpm to 374 rpm (6) 2.50 375 rpm to 499 rpm (6) 1.50 500 rpm and Over (6) 1.00 C. Above -Grade Installation -30' Floor Span— Possible Floor Deflection 1.0' Isolator Isolator Seismic Spec. Deflection in. Utility sets 300 rpm to 374 rpm (5) (20) (16) 2.50 375 rpm to 499 rpm (7) 1.50 500 rpm and Over (7) 1.00 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15070 PAGE 16 of 16 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER MECHANICAL SEISMIC VIBRATION TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI CONTROL Centrifugal blowers 300 rpm to 374 rpm 375 rpm to 499 rpm 500 rpm and Over (5) (20) (16) (5) (20) (16) (5) (20) (16) 2.50 1.50 1.00 Curb Mounted (22) 1.5 Roof Top Units Condensing Units 300 rpm to 374 rpm (6) 2.50 375 rpm to 499 rpm (6) 1.50 500 rpm and Over (6) 1.00 3.9 COMMISSIONING A. Notify the Commissioning Agent one week prior to start up of equipment. B Submit to the Commissioning Agent a Verification of Completion form with the pre functional check off sheet for each component when it is ready for functional testing. C. Assist the Commissioning Agent as required to perform the functional testing on the system components and the system as a whole. END OF SECTION 15070 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Sections 15010 and 15050 are directly related to work included in this section. Other sections are indirectly related and shall be reviewed. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED 2.1 PIPE INSULATION SECTION 15080 PAGE 1 of 9 MECHANICAL INSULATION A. Description. Work under this section shall include furnishing all labor material, tools and equipment necessary for the complete installation of all mechanical insulation. B Existing Piping and Ducts. 1 Work shall include the insulation of all existing pipes and ducts that are revised. 2. Work shall include the insulation of all existing piping and ducts in the area of the remodel that require insulation and are presently not insulated. 3 The Contractor shall replace existing insulation on piping or ducts damaged by the new work. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Thermal Requirements for all Pipe Insulation. Insulation thickness and/or R value shall be as required by the local energy code or as indicated, whichever is greater B Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation: Glass fiber meeting ASTM C547 rigid molded. 'K value 0.23 at 75 °F Maximum service temperature shall not exceed 850 °F Jacket shall be high density white Kraft bonded to aluminum foil for vapor barrier reinforced with fiberglass yarn, permanently treated, secured with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or AP jacket with outward clinch expanding staples coated with vapor barrier mastic. 1 Manufacturer Johns Manville 'Micro -Lok AP T Plus, Owens Corning ASJ /SSLII, Knauf Fiber Glass `Pipe Insulation' or approved Manson Insulation Corporation. C. Flexible Elastomeric Closed -Cell Pipe Insulation: ASTM C534 flexible, molded or sheet. Materials shall have a minimum thermal conductivity of 0.27 Btu -in. per sq.ft. per °F per hour at a mean temperature of 75 °F when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, latest revisions. Maximum service temperature, 180 °F Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 latest revision. Materials shall have a minimum water vapor transmission of 0.08 per inches when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Procedure A, latest revision. Provide waterproof vapor retarder adhesive. Insulation exposed to outdoors shall be provided with UV protection. 1 Manufacturer Armacell AP Armaflex with Armacell No. 520 joint adhesive or approved. D Cellular Glass Pipe Insulation: Closed cell, all glass, non combustible with 0.2% (by volume) moisture absorption. Average density of 8 lb. /cu. ft. 100 psi compressive strength, 900 °F service temperature, 0.35 BTU /in./hr /sf °F conductivity 1 Manufacturer Pittsburgh Corning 'Foamglas. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15080 PAGE 2 of 9 MECHANICAL INSULATION E. Jacketing of Pipes Exposed to Weather All piping exposed to weather shall be finished with an aluminum jacket over the insulation. Aluminum jacket material shall be embossed or corrugated sheet, 0 016 nominal thickness, conforming to ASTM B209 temper H -14 Jacketing shall be applied with joints lapped not less than 2 and shall be secured with 3/8 x 0 020' thick aluminum bands located at each circumferential lap and at not more than 9' intervals throughout. Horizontal joints shall lap downward to shed water Vertical joints shall be sealed with weatherproof silicone sealant. a. Manufacturer Childers or Pabco manufacturer 2.2 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Flexible Fiberglass Blanket: Flexible glass fiber blanket insulation shall meet ASTM C553 and shall be factory- laminated to a reinforced foil/kraft vapor barrier retarder facing, secured with UL Listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed. 1 Insulation thickness and R value shall be as required by the local energy code or as indicated, whichever is greater 2. Where thermal resistance no more than R =3.3 is required. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.27 Btu -in. per sq ft. per °F per hour at a mean temperature of 75 °F Insulation thickness shall be 1 0 -inch, 0.75 ]b. /cu.ft. density 3 Where thermal resistance no more than R =5.6 is required. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.27 Btu -in. per sq.ft. per °F per hour at a mean temperature of 75 °F Insulation thickness shall be 2.0 -inch, 0.75 lb. /cu.ft. density 4 Where thermal resistance no more than R =8.3 is required: Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.27 Btu -in. per sq.ft. per °F per hour at a mean temperature of 75 °F Insulation thickness shall be 3.0 -inch, 0.75 lb. /cu.ft. density 5 Vapor barrier permeance rating shall be not greater than 0.02 perms based on ASTM E96 Procedure A for facing material prior to lamination. 6. Manufacturer Johns Manville 'Microlite Type 75 or Owens /Corning All- Service Duct Wrap, Knauf Fiber Glass 'Duct Wrap CertainTeed Standard Duct Wrap or approved Manson Insulation Corporation. B Rigid Fiber Glass Board. Rigid glass fiber board conforming to ASTM C612. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.23 Btuh -in. per sq ft. per °F per hour at a mean temperature of 75 °F Maximum service temperature, 450 °F 1 Vapor Retarder Jacket: Aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn mesh and laminated to chemically treated, fire resistant kraft, secured with UL Listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed. 2. Facing: 1 -inch galvanized hexagonal wire mesh stitched on one face of insulation. 3 Insulation thickness and R value shall be as required by the local energy code or as indicated, whichever is greater 4 Where thermal resistance no more than R =6.5 is required. Insulation thickness shall be 1.5 -inch, 3 0 lb. /cu.ft. density 5 Where thermal resistance no more than R =8.7 is required. Insulation thickness shall be 2.0 -inch, 3.0 lb. /cu.ft. density 6. Where thermal resistance no more than R =5.6 is required. Insulation thickness shall be 3.0 -inch, 3.0 lb. /cu.ft. density 7 Manufacturer Johns Manville 814 Series Spin -Glas, Owens/Corning 'Fiberglas 700 Series' or Knauf Fiber Glass `Insulation Board. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15080 PAGE 3 of 9 MECHANICAL INSULATION C. Canvas Jacket: UL Listed fabric, 6 -oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. D Duct Liner Duct liner is specified in Section 15800, Air Distribution. E. Ducts Exposed to Weather Round ducts shall be finished with an aluminum jacket over the insulation. Aluminum jacket material shall be embossed, ribbed or smooth sheet, 0.016 nominal thickness, conforming to ASTM B209 temper H -14 Childers D.E. or Pabco manufacturer PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSULATION WORK IN GENERAL A. General Except as specified, material shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer 1 Do not apply insulation until pipe and duct surfaces to be covered have been leak tested, have had rust and scale removed, and have been cleaned, dried and inspected. 2. Insulation shall be kept dry and clean at all times. 3 Continue insulation vapor barrier through penetrations except where prohibited by code. 4 All work shall be performed at ambient and equivalent temperatures as recommended by the manufacturers. 5 Joints shall be staggered on multi -layer insulation. 6. Do not apply insulation until heat tracing specified elsewhere in other sections of this Specification is completed and tested. 7 Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces. B Flexible Elastomeric Closed -Cell Insulation. Flexible elastomeric closed -cell insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 180 °F Insulation exposed to weather and not shown to have jacketing shall be protected with two coats of UV- resistant finish as recommended by the manufacturer after the adhesive is dry 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION, PIPING A. General. Pipe insulation shall be installed in strict conformance to the manufacturer's recommendations. Pipe insulation shall be continuous and installed on all fittings and appurtenances unless specified otherwise. Installation shall be with full- length units of insulation and using a single -cut piece to complete a run. Provide jackets for all pipe insulation. B Flexible Elastomeric Closed -Cell Insulation. Insulation shall be tubular form. Sweat fittings shall be insulated with miter -cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping. Screwed fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter -cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe insulation using Armstrong No. 520 adhesive. C. Unions, Flanges, Strainers, and Valves: 1 Screwed and Welding Fitting and Screwed Pattern Valves. On exposed work, insulate to a diameter equal to insulation of adjacent piping; on concealed work, same insulation thickness as on adjacent piping; in all cases, same material as specified for adjacent piping; fitting covers to be as specified hereinafter 2. Flanges and Flanged Valves: Insulate on all steam piping. Use lags of same material as pipe insulation, overlapping adjacent covering, filled up to uniform outer surface with insulating cement and fitting covers specified hereinafter 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15080 PAGE 4 of 9 MECHANICAL INSULATION D Thermometer and Test Wells. Insulate test thermometer industrial thermometer and other test wells over their exterior length. Insulate thermometer wells protruding above finish pipe or equipment insulation. Neatly taper insulation away from top of well. Insulation on thermometer wells shall be 1 1/2 minimum thickness. E. Insulation Support at Hangers. 1 Provide support shield and 360 degree insert between support shield and piping on piping 1 1/2 diameter and larger Fabricate hydrous calcium silicate or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the temperature. Shield shall be fabricated of 14 gauge galvanized sheet metal. Insulation shields and inserts shall be not less than the following lengths: 1/2 to 1 1/2 14 1 24 2 to6' 16 120 8 to10' I9 1 16 12to18 112 16 20' and up 1 18 1 16 2. Vapor barrier facing of the insert shall be of the same material as the facing on the adjacent insulation. Seal inserts into the insulation with lagging adhesive for vapor seal. Where anchors are secured to insulated chilled piping, insulate anchors same as piping for a distance not less than four times insulation thickness to prevent condensation. Vapor seal insulation. F Sleeves and Wall Chases: Insulation on pipes through walls and floors shall be full size and jacketed same as adjacent insulation. Provide a metal jacket over the insulation on pipe passing through sleeves in non -fire rated walls where caulking is required. 1 Where penetrating interior walls, extend the metal jacket 2 inches out on either side of the wall and secure on each end with a band. 2. Provide adequate support on vertical pipe to prevent slipping. G Allowances for Expansion. At points where pipe will move during expansion and contraction expansion joints, Z- bends, expansion loops, and ells clearances between the pipe and encased insulation shall be sized to permit full pipe movement without cracking or damaging insulation and casing or jacket. H. Insulation of Refrigerant Piping: 1 All refrigerant copper lines shall be free of extraneous chemicals such as corrosive cleaners or building materials dust prior to the installation of the insulation. 2. Refrigerant pipe shall be sealed while slipping on insulation to prevent foreign matter from entering tube. 3 Insulation shall be slid onto pipe, longitudinal slitting of the insulation is not allowed except on mitered sections. Insulation shall be pushed on pipe, not pulled. 4 Insulation shall be mitered, pre- adhered and longitudinally slit to fit over all P -traps, tees and elbows or bends over 90° 5 All butt joints and mitered seams shall be adhered with full coverage of adhesive on both surfaces. Insulation shall not be stretched while adhering. 6. At the beginning and ends of piping runs, the insulation shall be adhered directly to the copper pipe using a 2 -inch strip of adhesive. Insulation should not be adhered to the pipe at he extreme low points in any piping run. 7 Saddles or piping shields shall be installed under all insulated lines at clamps, clevis hangers, or locations where insulation may be compressed. Wood dowels or blocks, of a thickness equal to the insulation, shall be inserted and completely sealed into the insulation if the excessive compression of the insulation remains at the saddle locations. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.3 PIPING MINIMUM INSULATION SCHEDULE 0 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15080 PAGE 5 of 9 MECHANICAL INSULATION 8. Hangers clamped directly over the pipe shall be insulated over the hanger insulation shall be fully adhered to the hanger In addition, hangers with double rods shall be insulated between the rods. All seams of the insulation shall be sealed with adhesive. 9 All insulation exposed to sunlight or installed outdoors shall be protected with 2 coats of an approved UV- resistant finish after the adhesive is dry Insulation at Mechanical Pipe Couplings: PVC insulated fitting covers shall be applied after the installation is installed. Installation shall comply with the manufacturer s recommended procedures. Connection with the pipe insulation shall be done in a neat, finished appearance, and any required vapor barrier shall be maintained. J Insulation at Roof Drains and Overflow Drains. Cover body of roof drains with heavy coating of insulating mastic or plastic insulating cement. Finish with canvas or glass cloth covering. K. Rainwater Drainage Piping: Insulate all piping in the heated portions of the building. L. Rainwater Drainage Overflow Piping: Insulate all piping within 10 feet of the points this piping enters and leaves the heating portion of the building. M. Plumbing Vent Piping: Insulate all piping within 10 feet of the points this piping enters the heating portion of the building. N Cellular Glass Insulation. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. Seal all longitudinal and butt seams with manufacturer's recommended sealant or approved. Cover with all service jacket and tape. O Valves. Provide reusable insulation pads on the hot water valves. All surfaces shall be covered with bats of glass fiber within silicone- treated glass cloth jackets and with outer vapor barrier finish, made and shaped to fit irregular contour surfaces of the valves. Insulation pads shall be non oiled, fully enclosed all sides and edges, sewn with glass fiber and stainless steel sewing twine, and with rolled -in blind seams, with bats compressed to 1 1/2 thickness. Attach stainless steel Bergen hooks on 3 centers around all edges of bats, on top surface, laced with stainless steel wire. P Interior Insulated Piping and Fittings Within 10 Feet of Any Floor Surface shall be protected by smooth sheet aluminum jacket material, 0 016 nominal thickness, lapped, banded, and installed same as above. This does not apply to insulation concealed within wall construction. This does not apply to insulation in mechanical rooms except where indicated otherwise on the drawings. A. General. Pipe insulation shall be provided for all piping systems listed below The operating temperatures listed for the following piping systems shall be the basis upon which the insulation thickness requirements apply Interior domestic cold water Below 60 °F Interior soft cold water Below 60 °F Interior irrigation water Below 60 °F Domestic hot water and recirculating piping: 180 °F Heating system hot water 200 °F Chilled water 45 °F Cooling coil condensate drain. Below 60 °F Refrigerant suction. Below 40 °F Refrigerant hot gas or liquid (outdoors): Any Downspout or rainleader piping: Below 60 °F MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Thickness. Thickness of pipe insulation for each application shall be in accordance with the following table: System Heating water Chilled water 40-55 Chilled water 40-55 Domestic service Hot water 105 and greater Cold water 56-79 Refrigerant or below 40 Roof Drainage any MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR PIPE INSULATION Operating Temp. °F) 105 -200 and plumbing vents Condensate drains any Glass fiber Material Glass fiber Glass fiber Cellular glass Glass fiber Glass fiber Glass fiber Elastomeric closed -cell Glass fiber *Runouts to individual fan coil, radiation, or terminal units not exceeding 12' in length. *For piping exposed to ambient air increase thickness by 0.5 *For chilled water piping exposed to ambient air 3.4 SPECIAL PIPE INSULATION REQUIREMENTS. A. Sterilizers, Kitchen Piping: Provide aluminum jackets over insulation on piping that connects to kitchen equipment. Jackets may be applied with pop rivets. Provide aluminum angle ring excutcheons at wall, ceiling or floor penetrations. A 2 inch lap is required at longitudinal and circumferential joints. 3.5 INSTALLATION DUCT INSULATION A. General. Insulate the following ducts. 1 Exhaust ducts between exterior openings and backdraft damper 2. Supply air ducts not within conditioned space. R Value R 7 3 Return air ducts not within conditioned space. R Value R 7 4 Outside air intakes and ducts within conditioned space. R Value R 7 5 Supply air ducts with supply air temperature >55° F or <105° F within conditioned space. R Value R 3.3 6. Mechanically cooled ducts requiring insulation shall have a vapor retarder jacket. 7 Do not insulate ducts indicated to be internally lined. Internal lining is specified in Section 15800, Air Distribution. 8. Air duct coverings shall not extend through walls or floors that are required to be fire stopped or required to have a fire resistance rating. 9 Insulate the exterior of duct mounted sound soundtraps. 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15080 PAGE 6 of 9 MECHANICAL INSULATION Nominal Pipe Size Runouts* 1 and 1 1/4 21/2 Up to 2 less to 2 to 4 0.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 0.5 0.75 1 0 1.5 1.5 1 75 2.0 0.5 1.0 1 0 1.5 0.5 1.0 1 0 1.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1 0 1.5 1.5 10 10 0.5 0.5 0.5 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15080 PAGE 7 of 9 MECHANICAL INSULATION B Installation on Concealed Ducts. 1 For all rectangular and all round ducts, insulation shall be attached by applying adhesive around entire perimeter of the duct in 6 wide strips on 12 centers. 2. For rectangular ducts, 24 and larger insulation shall be additionally secured to bottom of ducts by use of mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 18 centers and not more than 18 from duct corners. 3 Mechanical fasteners shall be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners shall be spaced on 18 centers and not more than 18 from duct corners. 4 Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners where used and shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive 1 Care shall be taken to overlap vapor barrier joints 2 The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than that specified. Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and trapeze -type duct hangers. 5 Self locking washers shall be installed where mechanical fasteners are used. The pin shall be trimmed back to the washr 6. Jacket overlaps shall be secured under the overlap with adhesive and stapled on 4 centers. 7 Staples and seams shall be coated with vapor barrier coating. 8. Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of the same material as the vapor barrier The patches shall extend not less than 2 beyond the break or penetration in all directions and shall bel secured with adhesive and staples. Staples and joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor barrier coating. 9 At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper operating rods, voids in the insulation shall be filled with vapor barrier coating and the penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor barrier coating. 10. Where insulation standoff brackets occur insulation shall be extended under the bracket and the jacket terminated at the bracket. 11 Bands. Bands on 18 centers shall be provided on all insulation on concealed round duct. 12. Flexible Duct Insulation. Flexible ducts have been specified to have factory applied insulation. This Contractor shall seal all connections with tape. C. Installation on Exposed Ducts (In Mechanical Spaces) 1 For rectangular ducts, rigid insulation shall be secured to the duct by mechanical fasteners spaced not more than 12 apart and not more than 3 from the edges of the insulation joints. A minimum of two rows of fasteners shall be provided for each side of duct 12 and larger One row shall be provided for each side of duct less than 12' 2. Duct insulation shall be formed with minimum jacket seams, and in no case shall a jacket seam be allowed on or within 3 of the duct corner Insulation shall be brought up to standing seams, reinforcing, and other vertical projections and shall not be carried over Vapor barrier jacket shall be continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections. When height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket shall be carried over Vapor; barrier jacket shall be continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections. When height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket shall be arried over 3 Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners. Speed washers shall be installed and pin trimmed to washer 4 Joints in the insulation jacket! shall be sealed with a 3 wide strip of the same material as the vapor barrier jacket. The strip shall be secured with adhesive and stapled. 5 Staples and seams shall be coated with vapor bamer coating. 6. Breaks and ribs or standing seam penetrations in the jacket material shall be covered with a patch of the same material as the jacket. Patches shall extend not less than 2 beyond 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI the break or penetration and shall be secured with adhesive and staples. Staples and joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor barrier coating. 7 At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper operating rods, voids in the insulation shall be filled with vapor barrier coating and the penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor barrier coating. 8 Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed with a reinforced vapor barrier coating. Two coats of vapor barrier coating shall be applied with glass cloth embedded between coats. The coating shall have a dry film thickness of approximately 1/16' and shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un- insulated surface 2 D Exposed Ductwork Without a Factory Applied Insulation Jacket: Whenever a factory applied vapor barrier jacket is not furnished, a vapor barrier coating finish shall be applied to the entire surface by first applying corner angles to exposed corners and then applying two coats of vapor barrier coating with glass cloth and then applying two coats of vapor barrier coating with glass cloth embedded between coats. Coating thickness shall be approximately 1/16' E. Exposed Round Duct: Exposed round duct shall be insulated and finished as specified for concealed duct work; then a vapor barrier coating finish consisting of two coats of vapor barrier coating with glass cloth embedded between shall be applied. Total dry film thickness shall be 1/16 F Insulation at Access Doors. At all non insulated fire damper access doors and other duct access openings, cut opening in insulation and secure all edges with tape. Cut a separate pad, tape the edges and tape in place to cover the duct access door and to maintain the vapor barrier Letter 'Control Damper 'Fire Damper 'Fire /Smoke Damper or 'Duct Cleaning, etc. on the pad for proper identification of the duct opening. Install so that insulation can be removed and replaced without damage to allow panel accessibility 3.6 KITCHEN GREASE DUCT WRAP INSTALLATION A. The duct wrap and fire barrier systems shall be installed by a qualified contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and referenced standards. B Pinning: On ducts 24 and larger 12- gauge, 5 long copper coated steel insulation pins shall be welded to duct at 12 centers (6 from edge of duct) Pins shall be locked in place with 1 1/2 diameter round or square galvanized steel speed clips or cup head pins. Pins that extend beyond outer blanket wrap layer shall be turned down to eliminate sharp edges or the excess length cut off. C. Banding: Wrap shall be banded using 1/2 wide, 0 015 thick stainless steel straps, placed at 10 -1/2 centers and 1 1/2 from each blanket edge or collar edge when using the manufacturer's butt and collar method. D Grease Duct Access Doors: Four galvanized steel threaded rods, 1/4 diameter by 4 -1/3 to 5 long shall be welded to the duct at the corners of the door opening. 5 steel tubes shall fit over the threaded rods to protect the blanket material when the door is fastened. Four 5 long 12 gauge insulation pins shall be welded to the door panel for installation of the blanket. Three layers of duct wrap shall be impaled over the 12 -gauge insulation pins on the door panel. The first layer shall be cut and impaled on the door panel insulation pins with no less than 1 overlap. The second layer shall be cut to overlap the first layer by no less than 1 and the third layer shall be cut to overlap the second by no less than 1 It is essential that these layers fit tightly against the wrap surrounding the access door opening with no through openings. The three layers shall be impaled over the pins and locked in place with speed clips. Pins that extend beyond the outer layer of the duct wrap shall be turned down to avoid sharp points on the door m 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15080 PAGE 8 of 9 MECHANICAL INSULATION MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 The insulated door panel shall be placed over the threaded rods covered by the steel tubes and held in place with washers and wing nuts. E. Through- Penetration Firestop: Provide an approved firestop system when the duct penetrates a concrete or drywall fire rated wall, ceiling or floor 3.7 INSTALLATION OF SOUND MITIGATION MATERIAL Cut to length and wrap around the pipe or duct and fasten with mechanical fasteners or bands. A. 3.8 JOB CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions. Cover existing equipment and finished floors to protect such items from insulation fiber and dust. Leave all such existing areas in a 'broom clean condition at the end of each day Take precautions in these areas to prevent glass fiber and insulation dust from entering existing ventilating systems. 3.9 COMMISSIONING 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15080 PAGE 9 of 9 MECHANICAL INSULATION A. Notify the Commissioning Agent one week prior to start up of equipment. B Submit to the Commissioning Agent a Verification of Completion form with the pre functional check off sheet for each component when it is ready for functional testing. C. Assist the Commissioning Agent as required to perform the functional testing on the system components and the system as a whole. END OF SECTION 15080 Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. B Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Sections 15010 and 15050 are directly related to work included in this Section. Other sections are indirectly related and shall be reviewed. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this section shall include furnishing and installing domestic water piping and drainage piping systems, including piping, fittings, piping specialties, drains, valves, strainers, and other associated components, as specified or indicated. 1.3 STANDARDS SECTION 15100 PAGE 1 of 9 DOMESTIC WATER AND DRAINAGE PIPING A. Referenced Standards: Current publications of the Standards referred to by basic designation in Part 2 and Part 3 shall form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by references thereto. B Primary Standards. The following Standards, in their entirety shall form a part of the Contract Documents and shall be considered minimum requirements for materials and installation. The codes, drawings, and specifications be considered additional requirements and may require work that exceeds that required by the Standards. 1 PDI Standard PDI WH 2 `Water Hammer Arresters This Standard includes requirements for sizing and location of water hammer arrestors that are typically not addressed on the drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections and Section 15010, 'Mechanical Work General. B Submit product information for each item of equipment, component, or specialties required for the domestic water piping system and building drainage piping system. Include construction material description, pressure and temperature classification, pipe connection details, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section, 'Materials and Equipment' B Piping specialties, including valves, shall have the manufacturer's trademark, name and/or model number and pressure rating, where applicable, affixed to permanently identify the manufacturer of product. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe General. 1 Pipe Above Ground. Seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88, Type 'L, hard drawn. 2. Manufacturer Cerro Copper Tube Co. Mueller Industries, Inc or Cambridge Lee Industries, Inc. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. Insulating Fittings and Unions. 1 Piping 2 Size and Smaller Provide at each point of connection between copper and galvanized steel pipe, dielectric waterway design, threaded, lined with inert, non- corrosive thermoplastic. 2. Unions, Copper Piping: 125 -1b wrought copper or cast bronze, solder joint type; ANSI/ASME B16.22 or ANSI/ASME B16.18. 3 Flanges in Copper Piping: Bronze or wrought- copper companion flange with tubing shoulder 125 -Ib. wsp rating with 1/16 -inch thick red rubber gasket per ANSI/ASME B16.21 B Fittings for Copper Tubing: 1 Wrought copper or bronze solder joint pressure fittings conforming to ANSI/ASME B16.18 and ANSI/ASME B16.22. 2. Adapters may be used for connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment. 3 Solder Lead -free, silver bearing, NSF approved, for all joints in copper water tubing. Apply flux carefully and remove all excess. a. Manufacture: Englehard, J W Harris, J C. Whitlam or approved. 4 Brazing: Brazing alloy ANSI/AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP 4 Manufacturer Capitol, Clearflow Epco, Watts. SECTION 15100 PAGE.2 of 9 DOMESTIC WATER AND DRAINAGE PIPING D Through -Wall Supply Pipes. Through -wall supply pipes that connect to exposed stops at wall faucets shall be Type L copper hard drawn. Where exposed to view surfaces shall be polished chrome plated finish. 2.2 MECHANICALLY FORMED TEE CONNECTIONS FOR COPPER TUBING A. 'T Drill method, brazed joints in accordance with Copper Development Association 'Copper Tubing Handbook using BCuP Classification filler metal. 23 VALVES A. General. Provide valves on all water piping systems and pumped drainage piping systems, 125 psi system working pressure and below where shown or specified. Provide valve in water or drain connection to each removable or replaceable item of equipment. B Shut -Off Valves 2' and Smaller Ball type, bronze. Bronze shall be ASTM B584 Alloy C84400 2 -piece body style, threaded ends, full port, chrome plated solid brass ball, teflon seats, adjustable packing, lever handle, blowout proof stem, 150 wsp, 600 wog. 1 Manufacturer Apollo No. 77 NIBCO No. T 585 -70, Watts No B6080, Milwaukee No. BA 100 or Red -White No. 5044F C. Globe Valves 2 and Smaller Bronze body teflon disc, integral seat, union bonnet, malleable iron handwheel, 150 wsp, 300 wog. 1 Manufacturer Milwaukee No. 590T NIBCO No T 235 -Y Stockham No. B -22. D Swing Check Valves 2 and Smaller Bronze body swing check, teflon disc and seat, 125 wsp, 200 wog. 1 Manufacturer Milwaukee No. 509 -T NIBCO No. T -413 -Y Stockham No. B -320 -T E. Drain Valves 1/2' to 3/4 Sizes: Bronze ball valve, 2 -piece body standard port, chrome plated brass ball, RPTFE seats, lever handle, blow out proof stem, threaded or soldered with hose end, cap and chain, 150 psi wsp, 600 psi wog. 1 Manufacturer Milwaukee No. BA 100H or BA 150H. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.4 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Pressure Reducing Valves 2 1/2 and Smaller Bronze body 300 psi rated inlet high temperature rated diaphragm for hot or cold water renewable stainless steel seat, spring cage and orifice, threaded pattern, with Y- strainer and steel perforated strainer screen. 1 Manufacturer Watts Series 223S or 223BS or Wilkins 500YSBR Series. 2.5 COMBINATION BALANCING SHUTOFF VALVES A. Combination Balancing- Shutoff Valves 2 and Smaller 1 Valves shall have threaded or soldered pattern. All metal parts shall be nonferrous, pressure die -cast, nonporous copper alloy Valves shall be capable of installation in any direction without affecting flow measurement; shall provide four functions. a. Precise flow measurement, b. Precision flow balancing, c. Positive shut -off with no -drip seat and Teflon disc, and d. Drain connection with protective cap. 2. Valves shall have hand wheel adjustment for vernier -type setting and shall include memory setting for a tamperproof balancing setting. 3 Manufacturer Armstrong CBV Bell Gossett CB Nibco T1710L, or Tour Andersson Series 786 -STAS or 787 -STAD 2.6 STRAINERS A. Strainers 2 and Smaller (Threaded Pattern) 2001b. heavy -duty cast bronze body Y -type, 20- mesh stainless steel screen, threaded blowdown end. 1 Manufacturer Metraflex Style BSinM, Muessco No. 351 Sarco BT Watts Series S777 or approved Armstrong. B Strainers 2 and Smaller (Solder Pattern) 200 lb. heavy -duty cast bronze body Y -type, 20- mesh stainless steel screen, threaded blowdown end. 1 Manufacturer. Metraflex Style BSJC, Muessco No. 353 -1/2, Sarco TBT Watts Series S777S, or approved Armstrong. 2.7 WATER MAKE -UP ASSEMBLY A. Provide feed water make -up assembly for hydronic system make -up. The feed water assembly shall include feed water regulator 30 lb. diaphragm relief valve, and Y -type threaded bronze body strainer Relief valve shall be ASME Code constructed and labeled with manual test lever 1 Manufacturer Watts No. T145B, Taco 334T or approved Bell Gossett, Taco or Amtrol. 2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: Reduced pressure type, line pressure operated; state and local approved, low- pressure drop with accessories and fittings required for testing by water purveyor or authority having jurisdiction; gate valve on each side, supported on steel wall brackets. B Backflow preventers shall conform to the provisions of WAC 246 290 -490, 'Cross- Connection Control. m 2007 Mahlum Architects Ik SECTION 15100 PAGE 3 of 9 DOMESTIC WATER AND DRAINAGE PIPING 1 Manufacturer Danfoss Flomatic, Conbraco, Zurn/Wilkins, Watts, Cla -Val, Febco, or approved. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.9 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers. Industrial dial -type, separate brass thermowells, bimetal actuated, 3 -inch dial, variable angle stem. Thermometer shall have a hermetic seal and an external adjustment in the rear of the case. Provide thermometer wells with extension necks of suitable length for insulated piping. 1 Manufacturer Ashcroft Series EL, Weiss Model 5VBM 'Vari Angle, Weksler Type CF Adjust Angle, Winters 'Bi -Metal Marsh 'Master Therm Adjustable or approved H.O Trerice. B Thermometers shall conform generally to the following: 2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES SECTION 15100 PAGE 4 of 9 DOMESTIC WATER AND DRAINAGE PIPING Service I Range Degrees F I Deg. F/Div I Domestic hot water 1 0 -250 1 2 Domestic cold water 1 30 -130 1 1 A. Pressure Gauges: White or aluminum faceplate, with black letters inscribed with units of measurement, ANSI B40.1 Grade IA, 4 -1/2' dial, with shutoff cock. Gauge case polished stainless steel or chrome- plated brass with chrome plated bayonet ring, rear blowout disc, without flanges. Scale range shall be approximately twice the operating range. Shutoff cock shall be 1/2 with pipe extension to gauge. 1 Manufacturer Marsh 'Mastergauge, Crosby Series 10, Trerice Type 500X Series, Ametek USG Solfrunt' Series1900, Winters 300 Series or Ashcroft Type 1009 B All pressure gauges shall conform to the following scale ranges: Service I Psig Range 1 Domestic cold water 1 0 -150 Domestic cold water (regulated) 1 0 -100 Domestic hot water (regulated) 1 0 -100 C. Shutoff Cocks for Gauges. Provide for every gauge, 1/4 NPT lever handle ball valve with solid chrome- plated brass ball. 1 Manufacturer- Milwaukee Model BA 100 or Winters A500 D Pressure Snubbers. Provide for every gage immediately downstream of a pump, filter type snubbing element, brass housing. 1 Manufacturer. Ashcroft No. 1112B -E, Winters A516 or A512, or Weksler Type BW42. 2.11 TRAP PRIMERS A. Mechanical Trap Primers: Adjustable -type automatic trap seal primer valve, intermittent water flow type, cast bronze body 1/2 copper sweat connections or union connections. 1 Manufacturer Josam 88250, Wade Fig. W2400, Smith Fig. 2699 or Mifab MI TSP 2. 2.12 HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS A. Wall Hydrant —Box Type: 3/4 concealed hose connection, antisiphon non freeze type hydrant with integral vacuum breaker bronze casing, hose connection and working parts, loose -key operated, 'Water' cast on cover of box, locking cover 1 Finish. Nickel bronze box. 2. Manufacturer. Smith Fig. 5509QT W Josam 71000, Wade Fig. 860 -175 or Mifab Series MHY 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Wall Hydrant— Exposed Hose Type: 3/4 hose connection, antisiphon non freeze type wall hydrant with integral vacuum breaker bronze face plate, hose connection and working parts, loose -key operated, adjustable wall clamp. 1 Finish. Nickel bronze face. 2. Manufacturer. Smith Fig. 5609QT WC, Josam 71050 Wade Fig. 8600 or Mifab MHY 16. C. Interior Hose Bibb Inside sill fitting type with vacuum breaker 3/4 hose thread outlet with lockshield cap, 3/4 flanged female inlet, escutcheon, No. 293 -6 removable tee handle, polished chrome plated. 1 Manufacturer Chicago Faucet No. 952 -CP 2.13 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. General Provide water hammer arrester at all groups of two or more flush valves, at all quick opening or closing valves, and at all automatic equipment. B Pre Charged Bellows Type Arresters. Provide shock absorbing water hammer arresters in hot and cold water piping to plumbing fixtures, nitrogen pre- charged and permanently factory sealed, expansion bellows type shock arrester unit constructed entirely of stainless steel, threaded nipple connection, PDI tested and certified. 1 Manufacturer Smith Fig. 5005 'Hydrotrol Josam Absorbatron II' Series 75000, Wade Fig. 5 'Shokstop or approved Zurn. 2.14 SANITARY WASTE, STORM WATER DRAIN AND VENT PIPING A. Cast Iron Soil, Waste, Vent, and Roof Drainage Piping: Piping and fittings shall be ASTM A74 CISPI 301 Service Class cast iron soil pipe. 1 Manufacturer AB &I, Charlotte Pipe or Tyler Pipe. 2. Pipe and Fitting Joints. Hubless pipe and fitting joints shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C 564 and Factory Mutual Standard 1680 Class 1 and shall be Type 304 stainless steel full shielded couplings having 4 sealing clamps for pipe sizes 1 1/2' through 4 and 6 sealing clamps for pipe sizes 5 through 15 Two -band couplings are not acceptable. a. Manufacturer Clamp -All Corporation 'High Torque Anaco 'Husky Series 4000' or approved Mission. 3 Coupling gaskets shall be a one -piece molded sealing sleeve made of ANSI/AWWA C564 neoprene (R) and shall interlock with the housing assembly to make a slip -free joint. 4 Alternate Hub and Spigot Pipe Joints (Below Grade) Joints for hub and spigot pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C 564 or shall be installed with lead and oakum. a. Manufacturer AB &I, Charlotte or Tyler Pipe. B Alternate Copper DWV Waste and Vent Piping: C. Condensate Drain Piping: Condensate drain piping serving drain pans and cooling coil drain shall be ASTM B306 hard temper copper drainage tubing (DWV) with ANSI/ASME B16.23 cast bronze fittings. 2.15 CLEANOUTS A. General. Cleanouts shall be same size as the pipe, up to 4 not less than 4 for larger pipe. Cleanouts shall be easily accessible. Provide a minimum clearance of 24 inches for the rodding. Cleanouts shall be secured with vandal -proof screws. 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15100 PAGE 5 of 9 DOMESTIC WATER AND DRAINAGE PIPING MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Cleanouts in Floors: Floor cleanouts shall have cast iron body and frame with square adjustable scoriated secured nickel bronze top Unit shall be vertically adjustable for a minimum of 2 inches. When a waterproof membrane is used in the floor system, provide clamping collars on the cleanouts. Cleanouts shall consist of 'Y' fittings and 1/8 bends with brass or bronze screw plugs. Cleanouts in resilient tile floors, quarry tile and ceramic tile floors shall be provided with square top covers recessed for tile insertion. In carpeted areas, provide carpet cleanout markers. C. Cleanouts in Vertical Piping: Provide cleanouts at or near the base of the vertical stacks with the cleanout plug located approximately 24 inches above the floor If there are no fixtures installed on the lowest floor the cleanout shall be installed at the base of the stack. Extend the cleanouts to the wall access cover Cleanouts shall consist of sanitary tees. Provide nickel bronze square frame and stainless steel cover with minimum opening of 6 x 6 at each wall cleanout. D Cleanouts in Horizontal Piping: In horizontal runs above grade, cleanouts shall consist of cast brass tapered screw plug in fitting or caulked no -hub cast iron ferrule. Plain end (no -hub) piping in interstitial spaces or above ceiling may use plain end (no -hub) blind plug and clamp. E. Manufacturer Josam, Mifab, Smith, Wade or Zurn. 2.16 DRAINAGE SPECIALTIES: SECTION 15100 PAGE 6 of 9 DOMESTIC WATER AND DRAINAGE PIPING A. Air Gaps: Air gaps shall be cast bronze construction. Provide polished chrome plated finish where exposed to view 1 Manufacturer Zurn Z 1025 or Zurn Z 1025 -CP), Josam 88900 -CP Smith Fig. 3955 or 3955 -CP) Series or approved Wade. 2.17 FLOOR DRAINS A. General Requirements. 1 Unless otherwise specified, all drains shall have cast -iron bodies. Drain outlet size, as indicated on the drawings. 2. Drains shall generally consist of a body integral seepage pan and adjustable perforated or slotted strainer consisting of grate and threaded collar Drains shall be of double pattern suitable for embedding in the floor construction. The seepage pan shall have weep holes or channels to permit drainage from the pan to the drainpipe. 3 All drains shall be provided with trap primer connections, except shower drains. Each drain shall be provided with a P -trap and vent. 4 Drains with integral no -hub outlets are acceptable. 5 Drain Flanges and Clamps. All drains installed in slabs that are not slab -on -grade shall include drainage flanges. All drains in membraned floors shall include flange and membraned clamping ring. 6. Finishes. Strainers of drains shall be polished- nickel bronze. B Drains General Type: 1 Funnel Floor Drain— (l:r'D): Combination funnel floor -type drain, cast -iron body with 8 diameter adjustable strainer head with drainage flange, security screws, trap primer connection, bronze finish. 8 -1/4 x 3 -1/4 funnel. Funnel integral with strainer or attach funnel by bolting from underside, with grate bars cut out within funnel. a. Manufacturer Zurn Z- 415 -8B with Z 329 funnel, Josam 30000 -8A -F9 Smith Fig. 3510 F19 -U -P Wade No. 1340 -EG8 or approved Mifab. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15100 PAGE 7 of 9 DOMESTIC WATER AND DRAINAGE PIPING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Special Requirements for Hospital projects. 1 Deliver pipes and tubes with factory applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. 2. Plumbing in Walls Adjacent to Patient Treatment and Exam Rooms: Where pipes penetrate a partition, the diameter of the hole shall be at least 1/2 larger than the outside diameter of the pipe. The space between the pipe and the partition shall be filled with sponge neoprene to prevent contact and caulked at the wall with non hardening, gun grade caulking compound. B General Requirements. 1 Comply with all local code requirements for the installation of water drainage and vent piping unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor if stored inside. 3 Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. 4 Grading of Piping: Where possible, grade all water lines to facilitate drainage. All unnecessary traps in circulating lines shall be avoided. 5 Concealed Piping: Conceal all piping in finished areas of the building unless noted otherwise. Lateral and vertical piping runs inside walls shall be isolated from the wall board, wall stud and other piping with 1/4 thick felt or neoprene pads. 6. All piping shall be run parallel with building construction and 90° angles to same. 7 Provisions for Piping Covering: Allow sufficient space for the proper installation of the pipe covering. If piping is installed too close to other piping or equipment, the piping shall be moved to avoid such interferences. 8. Pipe in Shafts: Piping in vertical shafts which are accessible shall be arranged to prevent obstruction to the access openings. 9 Install no piping of any kind in electrical equipment rooms, telephone equipment rooms, or elevator machine rooms, stairs and exit enclosures. 10. Unions and Flanges. Install at connections to all equipment downstream of valves, at all equipment specialties, and wherever else required to permit easy connection and disconnection. Do not conceal in walls, partitions or inaccessible ceilings. a. Where grooved piping systems are utilized, flanges are not required. Couplings may serve as unions. 11 Dielectric Fittings: Provide dielectric type unions, fittings or flanges where pipe sections made of dissimilar metals are to be joined to prevent metal -to -metal contact. C. Cleanouts. 1 Comply with all local code requirements for the installation of cleanouts unless otherwise indicated. D Water Connections to Fixtures and Equipment: 1 General. Anchor supply connections at fixtures to wall framing. At flush valves provide fitting with cast -in lugs secured to framing. 2. Provide all necessary material and labor to connect to the plumbing system all fixtures and equipment having plumbing connections and which are furnished by the Owner or specified in other sections of these specifications. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3 Service Stops. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture (except faucets, flush valves or other control valves, which are supplied with an integral stop) shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to all fixtures shall be anchored to prevent movement. E. Water Hammer Arresters. Install on hot and cold water piping, located close to each faucet, automatic valve, flush valve, or any other type of quick closing valve. Sizing and placement shall conform to the requirements of PDI -WH2O1 Arresters shall be fully accessible. Provide in water lines to equipment with automatic closing valves, immediately upstream of connection. F Trap Primers. 1 Trap primers are required, however they may not be shown on the drawings. Provide primers for all floor drains, receptors and floor sinks unless plumbing code authority and A/E permit otherwise (for heavily -used drains) Install primers in a concealed, but accessible location and provide all associated piping. Indicate location of primers on the record drawings. Do not prime shower drain traps. 2. Install trap primers in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations where readily accessible behind access doors or above accessible ceilings. G. Backflow Preventers: 1 Provide on service piping and other locations shown. 2. Install according to applicable local requirements. 3 Backflow preventers shall be installed so as to be fully accessible for testing and maintenance by the water purveyor 4 Provide funnel below each backflow preventer discharge. Funnel shall include approved air gap and drain line to approved receptor Drain line shall be sized for maximum backflow preventer discharge. Provide steel wall brackets for support of backflow preventers. Paint brackets to match wall. H. Pressure Piping Regulations. All piping work, except drainage, shall conform to the ANSI/ASME Building Services Piping Code, B31.9 including latest amendments. 3.2 MECHANICALLY COUPLED PIPING JOINTS A. Rolled grooved pipe for mechanically coupled joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications contained in the latest published literature. 3.3 TESTING AND ADJUSTING 0 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15100 PAGE 8 of 9 DOMESTIC WATER AND DRAINAGE PIPING A. Water Piping: All domestic cold and hot water and non potable water piping inside building shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure at 100 psi, for a minimum of 24 hours without any leaks. Provide a pressure gauge with a shutoff and bleeder valve at the highest point of the piping being tested. Only potable water shall be used for testing. B Backflow Prevention: Backflow prevention shall be tested by a certified person for proper functioning under conditions normal to their application. Testing shall be performed in conformance with recognized standards or other standards acceptable to the Administrative Authority that are consistent with the intent of the plumbing code. C. Soil, Waste, Storm Water Drain, and Vent Piping: 1 General. Test system either in its entirety or in sections. 2. Conduct tests before trenches are backfilled or fixtures connected. 3 Soil, waste, storm water drain, and vent piping may be tested with water or air MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI D Storm Water Piping: Test same as for soil, waste, and vent piping. SECTION 15100 PAGE 9 of 9 DOMESTIC WATER AND DRAINAGE PIPING 4 Water Test: The water test shall be applied to the drainage and vent system either in its entirety or in sections. If applied to the entire system, all openings in the piping shall be tightly closed, except the highest opening, and the system filled with water to point of overflow If the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly plugged except the highest opening of the section under test, and each section shall be filled with water but no section shall be tested with less than a ten (10) foot head of water The water shall be kept in the system or the portion under test, for at least thirty (30) minutes before inspection starts. 5 Air Test: The air test shall be made by compressed air forced into the system after closing all inlets and outlets. Maintain a uniform gauge pressure of five (5) pounds per square inch or sufficient to balance a column of mercury ten (10) inches in height. The pressure shall be held without introduction of additional air for a period of at least thirty (30) minutes. 6. Final Tests. Either one of the following tests may be used. Smoke Test: After fixtures are permanently connected and traps are filled with water fill entire drainage and vent systems with smoke under pressure of one inch or water with a smoke machine. Chemical smoke is prohibited. b. Peppermint Test: Introduce two ounces of peppermint into each line or stack. E. Test of Drains: All drains (floor garage, roof, area drains, etc) shall be flow tested to demonstrate proper operation. All traps and sumps shall be cleaned out. F Each piece of plumbing equipment and the entire plumbing system shall be adjusted and readjusted as required to ensure proper functioning and shall be left in first -class operating condition. 3.4 STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Provide disinfection and flushing of all new and altered or repaired potable water systems in accordance with Section 609.9 'Disinfection of Potable Water System, Uniform Plumbing Code, 2000 Edition. B Sterilization and Flushing: All water piping, twenty four (24) hour sterilization contact time, 50 parts per million chlorine concentration. Open all valves several times, following by flushing with clean water until residual chlorine is the same as that of potable water C. Arrange for disposition of all flushing water 3.5 COMMISSIONING A. Notify the Commissioning Agent one week prior to start up of equipment. B Submit to the Commissioning Agent a Verification of Completion form with the pre functional check off sheet for each component when it is ready for functional testing. C. Assist the Commissioning Agent as required to perform the functional testing on the system components and the system as a whole. END OF SECTION 15100 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: October 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 15180 PAGE 1 of 10 HEATING PIPING B Sections 15010 and 15050 are directly related. Other sections are indirectly related and shall be reviewed. A. Work under this section shall include furnishing and installing heating and cooling piping systems, including piping, fittings, piping specialties, valves, strainers, pumps, and other associated components, as specified or indicated. PART 2 PRODUCT 2.1 PIPE AND TUBING A. Heating hot water and chilled water 1 Steel. ASTM A53 Grade B seamless or ERW Schedule 40 2. Copper Water Tube: ASTM B88, Type K or L, hard drawn. B Extension of Domestic Water Make -up: Piping, ASTM B88 Type K or L, hard drawn copper tubing. C. Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Piping: 1 From Air Handling Units. Copper water tube, ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 2.2 FITTINGS FOR STEEL PIPE A. 2 -inch and Smaller Screwed or welded (butt or socket). 1 Screwed. 1501b malleable iron, ASTM/ASME B16.3 2. Butt Welding ANSI/ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping. 3 Unions: ANSI/ASME B16.39 B 2 1/2 -inch and Larger Welded or flanged joints. 1 Butt Welding Fittings: ANSI Class 150, ANSI/ASME B 16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping. Elbows shall be long radius type, unless otherwise noted. 2. Welding Flanges and Bolting: a. ANSI Class 150, ANSI/ASME B 16.5 weld neck or slip -on, plain face. b Contractor's Option: Convoluted, cold formed 150 lb steel flanges, with Teflon gaskets. c. Flange Bolting: Carbon steel machine bolts or studs and nuts, ASTM A307 Grade 0 2007 Mahlum Architects B 3 Gaskets: Gaskets shall be nonasbestos compressed material in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.21 1/16 -inch thickness, full face or self- centering, flat ring type. The gaskets shall contain reinforced PTFE or aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) or Nitrile butadiene rubber (NBR). MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.5 MECHANICALLY COUPLED PIPING SYSTEMS SECTION 15180 PAGE 2 of 10 HEATING PIPING 2.3 SCREWED JOINTS A. Pipe Thread. ANSI B 1.20. B Lubricant or Sealant: Oil and graphite or other compounds approved for the intended service. 2.4 SWEAT JOINTS FOR COPPER TUBING A. Solder Joint Fittings: Wrought copper or bronze soldered, ANSI/ASME B16.22. Joints shall be made up in accordance with recommended practices of the materials applied. Apply 95/5 tin and antimony on all copper piping. B Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI/ASME B 16.24 A. Systems. Mechanically coupled piping products are approved for use on the following systems only. 1 Hot Water Heating up to 200 F (except that hot water supply piping from boiler to and including hot water supply header shall not be mechamcally coupled pipe). 2. Chilled water B Sizes. Mechanically coupled piping products are approved for use on 2 piping systems and larger C. Mechanically grooved pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved components may be used as an option to welding, threading or flanged methods. All grooved components shall be of one manufacturer and shall conform to local codes and ordinances and ANSI/ASME B -31.9 UL/FM and International Mechanical Code. The grooved end product manufacturer shall be ISO -9001 certified. 1 Manufacturer Victaulic Company of America or approved Anvil Gruvlok. D Standardization. All mechanically coupled piping products shall be of one manufacturer E. Quality All mechanically coupled piping products shall be equal to or superior than the otherwise specified product (i.e. if standard threaded or flanged items were used) Mechanically coupled piping products shall only be used where the operating conditions do not exceed the design parameters of the gasket and product, and where system operation/performance is not adversely affected. F Pipe Preparation. The pipe shall be roll grooved in accordance with the manufacturer's current recommendations. The pipe ends shall be free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. G Pipe and Fittings. 1 Steel pipe conforming to ASTM A795 A135 or A53 2. Copper tubing Type L, hard drawn, conforming to ASTM B88 3 Steel Piping Fittings. Fittings shall be constructed of ductile iron ASTM A395 and A536, or forged steel ASTM A234 Grade B and segmentally welded from pipe conforming to ASTM A53 4 Copper Piping Fittings. Fittings shall be constructed of copper per ASTM B75 alloy C 12200 or B152 alloy C11000 or bronze sand cast per ASTM B -584 copper alloy CDA 836, manufactured to copper tube dimension, (Flaring of tube and fitting ends to IPS dimensions is not allowed) 5 Fittings shall be grooved end fittings and mechanical tees as designed in the manufacturer's current catalog literature. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15180 PAGE 3 of 10 HEATING PIPING H. Coupling Components: 1 Coupling housings shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A395 and A536. 2. Bolts and nuts shall be carbon steel track type conforming to ASTM A183 minimum tensile 110,000 psi. Bolts and nuts shall be zinc electroplated where buried or exposed to weather 3 Gaskets in water piping system shall be Grade 'E EPDM, Standard style, with temperature range from 30 °F to +230 °F Gasket selection for each system shall be in accordance with manufacturer s current recommendations to suit system pressures /temperatures /chemicals. I. Steel Pipe Couplings. 1 Rigid Couplings: Rigid couplings with angular bolt pads shall be used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31 1 B31.9 and NFPA 13 for all joint connections where joint flexibility is not allowed. a. Manufacturer. Victaulic Style 07 'Zero Flex or approved Anvil Gruvlok. J Copper Tubing Couplings: 1 Couplings in copper tubing systems shall have angular bolt pads for a rigid joint connection. Couplings shall be manufactured for direct connection of copper tubing without flaring. a. Manufacturer Victaulic Style 606 or approved Anvil Gruvlok. 2. Adapters shall be used at flanged connections, engaging directly into roll grooved copper tube and fittings and bolting directly to ANSI/ASME Class 125 and Class 150 flanged components, complete with standard flange bolts. a. Manufacturer Victaulic 641 Vic Flange or approved Anvil Gruvlok. 3 Housings or all couplings in copper tubing systems shall have a copper alkyd enamel paint finish. K. Branch Outlets: Branch outlets for 1/2 and 3/4 outlets on piping 4 to 48 diameter shall be 300 psi wp. 1 Manufacturer Victaulic Style 923 Vic -Let or approved Anvil Gruvlok. L. Thermowell Outlets. Thermowell outlets for 1/2 and 3/4 outlets on piping 4 diameter and above shall be 300 psi wp. 1 Manufacturer- Victaulic Style 924 Vic -o -Well One Nut Thermometer Outlet or approved Anvil Gruvlok. M. Dielectric Fittings: Dielectric fittings shall be used at piping connections between dissimilar metals and equipment to protect from local cell corrosion. 1 Manufacturer. Victaulic Style 47 'Clearflow' Dielectric Waterway or Anvil 'Di -Lok' N Y -type Strainers: Strainers shall be shall be ductile iron body with grooved ends rated for 300 psi to 400 -psi service. Basket shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Provide 1/16' perforations for 3 size and less, 1/8 perforations for 4 and larger 1 Manufacturer Victaulic Style 732 or Anvil No. 768G. 2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Dielectric Fittings: Provide where copper tubing and ferrous metal pipe are joined. B Dielectric Fittings 2 -inch and Smaller Threaded dielectric union, ANSI/ASME B 16.39 C. Temperature Rating: 210 degrees F 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.7 VALVES SECTION 15180 PAGE 4 of 10 HEATING PIPING A. Construction of Valves. Rating shall be not less than 125 -psi wsp Valves larger than 2 shall be grooved end or flanged pattern. Discs for globe valves shall be composition type. B Shut -Off Valves 2 and Smaller Ball type, ASTM B -61 ASTM B -62, or ASTM B -584 C84400, bronze. Bronze shall be ASTM B584 Alloy C84400. 2 -piece body style, threaded ends, full port, chrome plated solid brass ball, teflon seats, adjustable packing, lever handle, blowout proof stem, 150 wsp, 600 wog. 1 Manufacturer Apollo No. 77 Milwaukee No. BA -400 NIBCO No. T 585 -70 Watts No. B6080, or Red -White No. 5044F C. Gate Valves 2 and Smaller Bronze body solid wedge disc, non rising stem, screw -in bonnet, malleable iron hand wheel, threaded ends, 125 wsp, 200 wog. 1 Manufacturer Milwaukee No. 105 NIBCO No. T 113, Stockham No. B -103 D Globe Valves 2 and Smaller Bronze body teflon disc, integral seat, union bonnet, malleable iron handwheel, 150 wsp, 300 wog. 1 Manufacturer Milwaukee No. 590T NIBCO No. T 235 -Y Stockham No. B -22. E. Swing Check Valves 2 and Smaller Bronze body swing check, teflon disc and seat, 125 wsp, 200 wog. 1 Manufacturer. Milwaukee No. 509 -T NIBCO No. T -413 -Y Stockham No. B -320 -T 2.8 VALVES MECHANICAL GROOVED JOINT PIPING SYSTEMS A. Butterfly Valves 4 and Smaller Ductile iron body EPDM synthetic rubber encapsulated ductile iron disc with integrally cast stem, lever operated with 10- position throttling plate, manufacturer recommended for bi- directional dead end service at full rated pressure without a downstream flange, 300 psi cwp. 1 Manufacturer Nibco No. GD- 4765 -3, Victaulic Vic® -300 or Anvil Gruvlok Series 7700. B Ball Valves 2 to 3 Sizes: Bronze, 3 -piece body threaded ends, full port through 2 1/2 size, 3 size with reduced port, chrome plated brass ball, TFE seats, lever handle, blow out proof stem, 150 psi wsp, 600 psi wog. Or ductile iron, 2 -piece body grooved ends, standard port, chrome plated carbon steel ball and stem, TFE seats, lever handle, blow out proof stem, 800 psi cwp 1 Manufacturer Nibco No. G- 595 -Y /G -590 -Y Victaulic Series 726 2.9 VALVES MISCELLANEOUS A. Combination Balancing/Shutoff Valves: 1 Screwed, grooved or flanged pattern to match fitting specification, all metal parts of nonferrous, pressure die -cast, nonporous copper alloy Valves shall be capable of installation in any direction without affecting flow measurement; shall provide four functions. (a) precise flow measurement, (b) precision flow balancing, (c) positive shut off with no -drip seat and Teflon disc, and (d) drain connection with protective cap. 2. Valves shall have four 360° adjustment turns of handwheel for maximum Vernier Type setting with 'Hidden Memory' feature to program the valve with precision tamperproof balancing setting. a. Manufacturer Armstrong 'CBV' Circuit Balancing Valves, Nibco 737 Victaulic/Tour Andersson Model STAD /STAS and STAF /STAG, Mepco MBVS or approved Taco. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3 Meter Valves shall We provided with one (1) computerized, rechargeable, handheld portable balancing meter as manufactured by valve manufacturer B Drain Valves 1/2 to 3/4 Sizes. Bronze ball valve, 2 -piece body standard port, chrome plated brass ball, RPTFE seats, lever handle, blow out proof stem, threaded or soldered with hose end, cap and chain, 150 psi wsp, 600 psi wog. 1 Manufacturer Milwaukee No. BA -100H or BA 150H. 2.10 STRAINERS 2.11 AIR VENTS SECTION 15180 PAGE 5 of 10 HEATING PIPING A. System Strainers. 1 2 and Smaller Threaded, 250 lb Y- pattern. Monel or stainless steel screen with 20 mesh perforations. a. Manufacturers: Armstrong No. CA ISC 250 Metraflex Style TS, Muessco No. 351 Sarco TI or Watts Series 77S 2. 1 and Smaller (allowed option in copper piping only) Soldered, 200 lb heavy -duty cast bronze body Y -type, 20 -mesh stainless steel screen, threaded blowdown end. a. Manufacturer Metraflex Style DSJC, Muessco No. 353 -1/2, Sarco TBT Watts Series S777S, or approved Armstrong. A. Manual Air Vents. Compression -type, screwdriver operated air cocks shall be furnished and installed where shown and where required for venting. Cocks shall be 1/4 in size and shall be all bronze construction. B Automatic Air Vents (High Pressure) Single lever float type, 250 psi cast iron body 1/2 or 3/4 pipe connection as indicated. Float and internal mechanisms shall be stainless steel. 1 Manufacturer Hoffman No 792, Armstrong No. 21 or approved Taco. C. Automatic Air Vents (Low Pressure) Built in serviceable check valve, all construction either brass or stainless steel. 1 Manufacturer Hoffman No. 79 approved Taco. 2.12 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST STATIONS A. Test Plugs: Provide 1/2 size, pressure and temperature type fitting constructed of solid brass with two valve cores of Nordel, suitable for 275 °F at 500 psi. Each fitting shall include cap with gasket. B Test Kit: Provide test kit consisting of 0 -100 psi, 0 -230 feet of water pressure gauge with gauge adapter attached, a 25 -125 °F pocket testing thermometer a 0 -220 °F pocket testing thermometer and gauge adapter C. Manufacturer Peterson Equipment Co. 'Pete s Plugs or approved Sisco. Test Plugs in Insulated Piping: Pete s Plug 'XL Series or approved Sisco. 2.13 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be industrial dial -type, with separate brass thermowells, bimetal actuated, having a 3 -inch dial and variable angle stem. Thermometer shall have a hermetic seal and an external adjustment in the rear of the case. Provide thermometer wells with extension necks of suitable length for insulated piping. 1 Manufacturer Ashcroft Series EL, Weiss Model 5VBM 'Vari Angle, Marsh 'Master Therm Adjustable Winters 'Bi -Metal or approved H.O Trerice. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Thermometers shall conform generally to the following: 2.14 PRESSURE GAUGES Service 1 Range Degrees F 1 Deg. F/Div 1 Hot water heating 1 0 -250 1 2 1 1 Chilled water 1 0 -100 1 2 1 A. Gauges. For general locations, white or aluminum faceplate, with black letters inscribed with units of measurement, ANSI B40 1 Grade 2A, 4 -1/2' dial, with shutoff cock. Gauge case shall be polished stainless steel or chrome plated brass with chrome plated bayonet ring, rear blowout disc, without flanges. Scale range shall be approximately twice the operating range. Shutoff valve shall be 1/2 NPT ball valve with pipe extension to gauge. 1 Manufacturer Marsh 'Mastergauge, Crosby Series 10, Trerice Type 500X Series, Moeller 'Vantage, Ametek USG Solfrunt' Series 1900, Ashcroft Type 1009 or approved Winters. B Gauges at Pumps. Provide at pumps, 5 horsepower and greater Glycerin or silicone oil filled. Gauges shall have white or aluminum faceplate, with black letters inscribed with units of measurement, ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A, 4 -1/2 size, with shutoff cock. Gauge case shall be polished steel or chrome plated brass with chrome- plated bayonet ring, rear blowout disc, without flanges. Scale range shall be approximately twice the operating range. Shutoff cock shall be 1/4 NPT ball valve with pipe extension to gauge. 1 All pump suction gauges shall be compound type and show at least 60 psig and 30 inches H g. 2. Manufacturer Ashcroft Type 1009 Marsh 'Liquid filled Mastergauge, Weiss Model LF4S -2, Weksler Type AY Winters LF Series or approved H.O Trerice. C. Pressure gauges shall conform to the following scale ranges. D Service Closed system SECTION 15180 PAGE 6 of 10 HEATING PIPING Range Interval Interval Psig Psig graduations Psig 0 -100 1 10 1 1 E. Shutoff valve for gauges. 1/2 NPT ball valve, brass body stainless steel ball, 200° F at 125 psi. 1 Manufacturer Milwaukee Model BA 100, Winters A500 or approved H.O Trerice. F Pressure. Snubbers: Filter type snubbing element, brass housing. 1 Manufacturer Ashcroft No. 1112B -E, Weksler Type BW42, Winters A515 or A 529 or approved H.O Trerice. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. The drawings show the general arrangement of pipe and equipment but do not show all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect pipes to equipment and to coordinate with other trades. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories to be connected. Pipe location on the drawings shall be altered by contractor where necessary to avoid interferences and clearance difficulties. B Store materials to avoid excessive exposure to weather or foreign materials. Keep inside of piping clean during installation and protect open ends when work is not in progress. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAI LUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15180 PAGE 7 of 10 HEATING PIPING C. Install piping generally parallel to walls and column center lines, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Space piping, including insulation, to provide one -inch minimum clearance between adjacent piping and other surfaces. Unless shown otherwise, slope drain piping down in the direction of flow not less than one -inch in 40 feet. Provide eccentric reducers to facility pipe draining. D Valves: Locate and orient valves to permit proper operation and access for maintenance. Generally locate valve stems in overhead piping in horizontal position. Provide a union adjacent to one end of all threaded end valves. Control valves usually require reducers to connect to pipe sizes shown on the drawing. Install butterfly valves with the valve open as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent binding of the disc in the seat. E. Offset equipment connections and carefully locate unions and flanges to allow for equipment removal and repair with minimal removal of piping. Provide flexibility in equipment connections and branch line take -offs with 3 -elbow swing joints or as noted on the drawings. F Tee water piping runouts or branches into the side of mains or other branches. Where possible, do not use bull -head tees, which are two lines flowing into opposite ends of a tee and exiting out the common side. G. Install components furnished under other sections, such as. 1 Control valve bodies, flow switches, pressure taps with valve, and wells for sensors. H. Thermometer Wells: In pipes 2 1/2 inch and smaller increase the pipe size to provide free area equal to the upstream pipe area. I. Test plugs in insulated piping shall have stem length as determined by insulation thickness. 3.2 AIR VENTS AND DRAIN VALVES A. Air Vents. Manual Vents: Manual air vents are generally not shown on the drawings. Provide manual air vents at all high points in the piping systems where air might accumulate. Air vent valves shall be located in an accessible location and shall be positioned with discharge down such that a container can be held under the valve to receive liquid discharge. Provide tubing (same size as vent valve) from the top of the pipe to be vented to the accessible vent valve. 2. Automatic Vents: Provide automatic air vents where indicated on the drawings. B Drain Valves. Drain valves are generally not shown on the drawings. Drain valves with threaded ends for garden hose connection shall be provided for all low points in the water and return piping. In high pressure piping, use 'Thread -o -let with ball valve. In lower pressure piping, use mechanical coupling tee with threaded branch and ball valve. Ball valves are specified elsewhere in this Section. 1 Where piping is located in heated space, provide drain valves at all low points where more than three gallons of water could be trapped. 2. Where piping is located in unheated space, including insulated piping with heat tracing, provide drain valves at all low points where any water could be trapped. In general, piping should be arranged to minimize the need for drain valves. 3 Where drain valves are indicated on the drawings, extend piping as noted. 33 PIPE JOINTS A. Welded. Beveling, spacing and other details shall conform to ANSI/ASME B31.9 and ANSUAWS B2.1 Welders shall be ASME certified. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15180 PAGE 8 of 10 HEATING PIPING B Screwed. Threads shall conform to ANSI/ASME B 1.20. Joint compound shall be applied to male threads only and joints made up so no more than three threads show Coat exposed threads on steel pipe with joint compound for corrosion protection. C. Mechanically Coupled Joints. Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with joint manufacturer's specifications. Lubricate gasket exterior including lips, pipe ends and housing interiors to prevent pinching the gasket during installation. Lubricant shall be as recommended by coupling manufacturer B Solvent Welded Joints: Solvent welded joints in CPVC piping shall comply with the manufacturer's recommendations. E. Dielectric fittings shall be used at piping connections between copper and dissimilar metals at equipment or piping to protect from galvanic corrosion. F Flanges: Tighten flange bolts in accordance with gasket manufacturer's recommendations. Use full face gaskets and flat face flanges when connecting to equipment or valves with cast iron flat face flanges. G. Seismic Bracing of Piping and Equipment: Specified in Section 15070. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLOW CONTROL AND BALANCING VALVES A. Install in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF STRAINERS A. Provide dirt blowout connection with ball valve for each strainer B Strainers installed upstream of control valves shall be installed line size, which shall mean the size of the inlet pipe shown on the drawings, not the reduced size serving the control valve. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF THERMOMETERS A. Provide thermometer wells with extension necks for thermometers installed in insulated lines. B Pack all sockets with thermally conductive putty 3.7 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES A. Properly calibrate and zero all gauges at job site for pressure head and temperature in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B Identify each gauge with a tag with letters 1/4 high. Run 1/4 hard drawn copper tubing from gauge with shutoff valve or cock to its respective pipe connection. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS A. Pipe- supported Pumps: Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and use pipe hangers or other supports at proper intervals to provide complete piping support near the pump. Both suction and discharge piping shall be independently supported and properly aligned so that no strain is transmitted to the pump when flange bolts are tightened. 3.9 TESTING A. Pressure Testing: Test at hydrostatic pressure at least 1 1/2 times the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 100 psi, duration not less than two hours. B Provisions for Testing: Provide temporary valving or cap piping at connections to existing systems as required to confine testing to the new piping systems. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.10 CHEMICAL TREATMENT SYSTEM INSTALLATION SECTION 15180 PAGE 9 of 10 HEATING PIPING A. Installation of Chemical Treatment System: 1 Furnish for installation all devices as specified in this section and indicated on the drawings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. All piping for chemical treatment shall be provided under this section unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. 3 All wiring for chemical treatment systems shall be provided under this section and shall comply with Division 16 specifications. 4 Systems shall be complete and shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's diagrams and recommendations, including all piping and electrical work. 5 The manufacturer s representative shall be responsible for assisting the contractor during construction. B Installation of Pot Feeders. 1 Install isolating and drain valves and necessary piping. Pipe bypass feeder drain valve to the nearest floor drain. The feeder shall be located no more than 48' above floor level. 2. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test. C. Preparation of Piping Systems. 1 System shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system. Record capacity and include in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 2. Make temporary piping connections; furnish temporary pumps, and temporary bypass filter as required to properly accomplish all cleaning operations. 3 Place all manual and control valves serving coil banks and terminal control units in open position during cleaning so that circulation through the mains and runouts is obtained during cleaning. D Piping System Cleaning Sequence: Initial Flush, All Systems: a. Completely fill the system with fresh water and circulate (1 filling). b. Initial flushing shall be sufficient to remove all contaminants such as cuttings, filings, loose rust scale, welding and soldering residue and debris. c. Drain the entire system and refill with fresh water (2 filling) 2. Closed Systems. a. Add the recommended dosage of cleaning solution to the system, circulate and bring up to the recommended temperature. b. Test solution for proper concentration and document results. c. Circulate the solution for the time recommended by the manufacturer (4 hours minimum and not to exceed the manufacturer's maximum limit). d. Partially close and reopen all manual valves several times. e. Operate all automatic valves through several cycles. f. Completely drain the entire system. g. Fresh Water Flush. Refill the system with fresh water (3' filling). Then, with circulation pump running: 1) Open one or more drains as far downstream from the fill point as is possible. Be sure the makeup is sufficient to keep up with the drain so as to maintain a full system. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.11 COMMISSIONING A. Notify the Commissioning Agent one week prior to start up of equipment. B Submit to the Commissioning Agent a Verification of Completion form with the pre- functional check off sheet for each component when it is ready for functional testing. C. Assist the Commissioning Agent as required to perform the functional testing on the system components and the system as a whole. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects 2) Partially close and reopen all manual valves several times. 3) Blowdown all strainer dead legs and low points in the system. 4) Operate all automatic valves through several cycles. 5) Continue to flush the system in this manner until the drain water is of the same clarity as the makeup water and testing reveals no further traces of cleaning solution (minimum 1 hour) Document the results. h. Following the fresh water flush, drain the entire system. 1) Clean all strainers. 2) Remove all startup strainers. Fill System (Non Glycol Systems) Immediately refill with fresh water and immediately start chemical treatment program. END OF SECTION 15180 SECTION 15180 PAGE 10 of 10 HEATING PIPING Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 15184 PAGE 1 of 5 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Sections 15010 and 15050 are directly related to work included in this section. Other sections are indirectly related and shall be reviewed. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this section shall include furnishing all labor materials, tools, and equipment necessary for the complete installation of the field refrigerant piping for direct expansion MRI Cooling Unit. B Products installed but not furnished under this Section include pre- charged tubing, refrigerant specialties, and refrigerant accessories furnished as an integral part of or separately with packaged air conditioning, cooler and freezer equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Refrigerant Piping: Copper refrigerant tube, ASTM B280 cleaned, dehydrated and sealed, marked ACR on hard temper straight lengths. Coils shall be tagged ASTM B280 by the manufacturer B Water and Drain Piping: Copper water tube, ASTM B88, Type L, or refrigerant tube ASTM B280. C. Fittings, Valves and Accessories. 1 Solder joints. Wrought copper fittings, ANSI B 16.22. a. Solder refrigerant tubing: Cadmium free, AWS A5.8, 45 percent silver brazing alloy Class BAg -5 b Solder water and drain: 95 -5 tin antimony ASTM B32 (95TA) 2. Flanges and flanged fittings: ANSI/ASME B 16.24 3 Refrigeration Valves: a. Stop Valves: Brass or bronze alloy packless, or packed type with gas tight cap, frost proof, backseating. b. Pressure Relief Valves: Forged brass with nonferrous, corrosion resistant internal working parts of high strength, cast iron bodies conforming to ASTM Al26, Grade B Set valves in accordance with ANSUASHRAE Standard 15 c. Solenoid Valves: ANSUARI 760, UL- listed, two position, direct acting or pilot operated, moisture and vapor -proof type of corrosion resisting materials, designed for intended service, and solder -end connections. Fitted with suitable NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location. Provide normally open or closed holding coil as required. d. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Brass body with stainless -steel or non corrosive non ferrous internal parts, diaphragm and spring loaded (direct- operated) type with sensing bulb and distributor having side connection for hot -gas bypass and external equalizer Size and operating characteristics as recommended by manufacturer of evaporator and factory set for superheat requirements. Solder -end connections. Testing and rating in accordance with ANSUASHRAE Standard 17 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.2 PRESSURE TEMPERATURE GAGES A. Fed. Spec. GG, Type III (freon), 2 -1/2 inch minimum diameter bottom connection, one percent accuracy graduated in gauge psig and corresponding refrigerant temperature, with pressure snubber B Provide board- mounted gages of the following ranges for each compressor Provide gauge shut- off valve. 1 Suction. 30 inches Hg vacuum to gauge 250 -psig. 2. Discharge: 0 to 500 -psig. 2.3 THERMOMETERS AND WELLS A. Refer to specification Section 15180, Heating and chilled water Piping. 2.4 PIPE SUPPORTS A. Refer to specification Section 15050, BASIC Materials and Methods. 2.5 REFRIGERANTS AND OIL A. Provide required refrigerant and oil for proper system operation. B Refrigerant R407c, in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 34 2.6 PIPE INSULATION FOR DX HVAC SYSTEMS A. Refer to specification Section 15080 Mechanical Insulation. 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15184 PAGE 2 of 5 REFRIGERANT PIPING e. Check Valves: Brass or bronze alloy with swing or lift type, with tight closing resilient seals for silent operation; designed for low pressure drop, and with solder end connections. Direction of flow shall be legibly and permanently indicated on the valve body f. Strainers: Designed to permit removing screen without removing strainer from piping system, and provided with screens 80 to 100 mesh in liquid lines up to 1 1/8 inch, 60 mesh in liquid lines over 1 1/8 inch, and 40 mesh in suction lines. Provide strainers in liquid line serving each thermostatic expansion valve, and in suction line serving each refrigerant compressor not equipped with integral strainer 4 Refrigerant Moisture/Liquid Indicators: Double -ported type having heavy sight glasses sealed into forged bronze body and incorporating means of indicating refrigerant charge and moisture indication. Provide screwed brass seal caps. 5 Refrigerant Filter Dryers: UL listed, angle or in -line type, as shown on drawings. Conform to ANSUASHRAE Standard 63 Heavy gage steel shell protected with corrosion- resistant paint; perforated baffle plates to prevent desiccant bypass. Size as recommended by manufacturer for service and capacity of system with connection not less than the line size in which installed. Filter driers with replaceable filters shall be furnished with one spare element of each type and size. 6. Flexible Metal Hose: Seamless bronze corrugated hose, covered with bronze wire braid, with standard copper tube ends. Provide in suction and discharge piping of each compressor 7 Water Piping Valves and Accessories. Refer to specification Section 15180, Heating Piping. 8. Steel construction: equipped with tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve and liquid level indicator MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION C. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15184 PAGE 3 of 5 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Install refrigerant piping and refrigerant containing parts in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15 and ANSI/ASME B31.5 Refrigerant piping shall be brazed with 15 percent silver solder in accordance with ANS1/AWS A5.8. 1 Install piping as short as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbow and fittings. 2. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers to allow for service and inspection. Space piping, including insulation, to provide one inch minimum clearance between adjacent piping or other surface. Use pipe sleeves through walls, floors, and ceilings, sized to permit installation of pipes with full thickness insulation. 3 Locate and orient valves to permit proper operation and access for maintenance of packing, seat and disc. Generally locate valve stems in overhead piping in horizontal position. Provide a union adjacent to one end of all threaded end valves. Control valves usually require reducers to connect to pipe sizes shown on the drawing. 4 Use copper tubing in protective conduit when installed below ground. 5 Swab fittings and valves with manufacturer's recommended cleaning fluid to remove oil and other compounds prior to installation. 6. Install hangers and supports per ANSI/ASME B31.5 and the refrigerant piping manufacturer's recommendations. B Protect refrigerant system during construction against entrance of foreign matter dirt and moisture; have open ends of piping and connections to compressors, condensers, evaporators and other equipment tightly capped until assembly Pass nitrogen gas through the pipe or tubing to prevent oxidation as each joint is brazed. Cap the system with a reusable plug after each brazing operation to retain the nitrogen and prevent entrance of air and moisture. D Pipe relief valve discharge to outdoors for systems containing more than 100 pounds of refrigerant. E. Firestopping: Fill openings around uninsulated piping penetrating floors or fire walls, with firestop material. For firestopping insulated piping refer to Section 15050, Basic Materials and Methods. F Seismic Bracing: Refer to specification Section 15050 BASIC Materials and Methods, for bracing of piping in seismic areas. 3.2 PIPE AND TUBING INSULATION A. Apply flexible cellular insulation and fabricate fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. B Use proper size material. Do not stretch or strain insulation. C. To avoid undue compression of insulation, provide cork stoppers or wood inserts at supports as recommended by the insulation manufacturer Insulation shields are specified under specification Section 15050, Basic Materials and Methods. D Where possible, slip insulation over the pipe or tubing prior to connection, and seal the butt joints with adhesive. Where the slip -on technique is not possible, slit the insulation and apply it to the pipe sealing the seam and joints with contact adhesive. Optional tape sealing, as recommended by the manufacturer may be employed. E. Apply two coats of weather resistant finish as recommended by the manufacturer to insulation exposed to outdoor weather MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.3 SIGNS AND IDENTIFICATION 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 15184 PAGE 4 of 5 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Each refrigerating system erected on the premises shall be provided with an easily legible permanent sign securely attached and easily accessible, indicating thereon the name and address of the installer the kind and total number of pounds of refrigerant required in the system for normal operations, and the field test pressure applied. B Systems containing more than 110 lb of refrigerant shall be provided with durable signs, in accordance with ANSI A13 1 and ANSI Z53 1 having letters not less than 0.5 inch in height designating: 1 Valves and switches for controlling refrigerant flow the ventilation and the refrigerant compressor(s). 2. Signs on all exposed high pressure and low pressure piping installed outside the machinery room, with name of the refrigerant and the letters 'HP' or 'LP A. Prior to initial operation examine and inspect piping system for conformance to plans and specifications and ANSI/ASME 31.5 Equipment, material, or work rejected because of defects or nonconformance with plans and specifications, and the Contractor shall correct ANSI codes for pressure piping. 3.5 FIELD TESTS A. After completion of piping installation and prior to initial operation, conduct test on piping system according to ANSI/ASME B31.5 Furnish materials and equipment required for tests. Perform tests in the presence of A/E. If the test fails, correct defects and perform the test again until it is satisfactorily done and all joints are proved tight. 1 Every refrigerant- containing parts of the system that is erected on the premises, except compressors, condensers, evaporators, safety devices, pressure gages, control mechanisms and systems that are factory tested, shall be tested and proved tight after complete installation, and before operation. 2. The high and low side of each system shall be tested and proved tight at not less than the lower of the design pressure or the setting of the pressure relief device protecting the high or low side of the system, respectively except systems erected on the premises using non- toxic and non flammable Group Al refrigerants with copper tubing not exceeding 0.62 in O.D This may be tested by means of the refrigerant charged into the system at the saturated vapor pressure of the refrigerant at 68 degrees F minimum. B Test Medium: A suitable dry gas such as nitrogen or shall be used for pressure testing. The means used to build up test pressure shall have either a pressure- limiting device or pressure reducing device with a pressure relief device and a gage on the outlet side. The pressure relief device shall be set above the test pressure but low enough to prevent permanent deformation of the system components. 3.6 SYSTEM TEST AND CHARGING A. System Test and Charging: As recommended by the equipment manufacturer or as follows: 1 Connect a drum of refrigerant to charging connection and introduce enough refrigerant into system to raise the pressure to 10 -psi gage. Close valves and disconnect refrigerant drum. Test system for leaks with halide test torch or other approved method suitable for the test gas used. Repair all leaking joints and retest. 2. Connect a drum of dry nitrogen to charging valve and bring test pressure to design pressure for low side and for high side. Refer to Part 1 Quality Assurance. Test entire system again for leaks. 3 Evacuate the entire refrigerant system by the triplicate evacuation method with a vacuum pump equipped with an electronic gage reading in microns. Pull the system down to 500 microns and hold for four hours then break the vacuum with dry nitrogen (or refrigerant). 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.7 OWNER TRAINING END OF SECTION 15184 SECTION 15184 PAGE 5 of 5 REFRIGERANT PIPING Repeat the evacuation two more times breaking the third vacuum with the refrigeration to be charged and charge with the proper volume of refrigerant. A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start -up and shut- down, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of refrigerant piping valves and refrigerant piping specialties. B Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Section 15010, 'Mechanical Work General and Division 1 Section 'Project Closeout C. Schedule training with Owner as specified in Section 15010, 'Mechanical Work General 3.8 COMMISSIONING A. Notify the Commissioning Agent one week prior to start up of equipment. B Submit to the Commissioning Agent a Verification of Completion form with the pre functional check off sheet for each component when it is ready for functional testing. C. Assist the Commissioning Agent as required to perform the functional testing on the system components and the system as a whole. 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 15210 PAGE 1 of 10 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Sections 15010and 15050 are directly related. Other sections are indirectly related and shall be reviewed. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this section shall include furnishing and installing medical air and gas equipment, piping, fittings, valves, and specialties as specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS A. General. Level 1 medical gas systems shall include oxygen. B Pipe and Fittings. 1 Pipe, Type 'K' seamless copper tubing, ASTM B819 hard -drawn seamless medical gas tubing. 2. Pipe shall bear one of the following markings. OXY in green (Type K) 3 Pipe shall be specially manufactured for oxygen. Each length of pipe shall be internally cleaned by the manufacturer permanently labeled and delivered to job site capped. 4 Fittings, wrought copper capillary fittings complying with ANSI/ASME B16.22 for brazed connection or brazing fittings complying with MSS SP 73 Cast copper alloy fittings or flared or compression type fittings shall not be used. 5 Fittings, valves, and other piping accessories shall be cleaned for oxygen service and bagged, capped or otherwise sealed to maintain this cleanliness until they are installed. C. Oxygen Source of Supply 1 The source of supply shall consist of a relocated bulk system provided by the oxygen supplier under a separate project. As part of that other project, a new main oxygen line will be run into the building and connected to the existing main in the building. 2. The scope of work for the current project consists of extending new piping from the existing main to the new outlets, as indicated on the drawings. No primary or reserve capacity is to be installed as part of this project. 2.2 MEDICAL VACUUM SYSTEM A. Pipe and Fittings. 1 Pipe, Type 'K' or 'L seamless copper tubing, hard drawn, copper water tube ASTM B88, or copper ACR tube to ASTM 8280 or copper medical gas tube to ASTM B819 2. Joints shall be brazed. Brazing shall be in accordance with NFPA 99 -2002, 5 1 10.5 3 Pipe shall be prominently labeled prior to installation. 4 Service valves, zone valves and boxes shall be in accordance with NFPA 99 -2002 5 1 4 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.3 VALVES FOR SHUTOFF AND ZONING SECTION 15210 PAGE 2 of 10 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS A. Shutoff Valves. 1 Valves shall be three -piece bolted pattern, swing -out ball type, full -port design, bronze/brass body chrome plated brass ball, Teflon ball seat and Teflon stem seals, blowout proof stem, 600 psig WOG 2. Seats, seals and lubricants and valve material shall be compatible with USP oxygen, nitrous oxide, medical air carbon dioxide, helium, nitrogen and mixtures thereof at continuous pressure up to 600 psig and up to 100 °F 3 Valves shall have lever type handle, vinyl coated, requiring one quarter turn to completely open or close valve. 4 The handle of each valve shall be labeled indicating the gas service. 5 Valves shall be provided with Type K copper extensions for making connections to the pipeline. 6. Valves shall be factory brazed, pressure tested, cleaned for oxygen service, and capped, and seal packaged. 7 Valves not in valve boxes shall be provided with locking handles, Beacon Medical Series 4255 Locks to be provided by Owner 8 Valves shall comply with NFPA 99 -2002 'Health Care Facilities, and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, 1989 Section IX. 9 Manufacturer Beacon Medaes, Allied Health Care or Amico. B Shutoff Zone Valves in Boxes. 1 Valve boxes shall be fully recessed and shall accommodate from one to six valves of various pipe sizes and gas services as indicated or required. 2. Valve box shall be constructed of extruded or formed aluminum with a 1/2 plaster flange on all four sides. The finished frame shall be constructed of extruded, etched, and anodized aluminum. Concealed mounting screws shall secure the finish frame to the valve box. Box shall be provided with a transparent window displaying caution, per NFPA 99 -2002 'CAUTION Medical Gas Shutoff Valves. Do Not Close Except in Emergency 3 Gauges. A gauge shall be furnished and installed in tube downstream of each valve to monitor medical gas distribution pressures and vacuum. Gauges shall be 1 1/2 with plastic protective dial faces. 4 Tubing Extensions: Tubing extensions shall be factory soldered to the valve flanges for connection to piping outside the box. Valves and tubing extensions shall be chrome plated, pre assembled, pressure- tested and rigidly mounted to the box for ease of installation. 5 Identification Labels. A color -coded gas label identifying the gas by name shall be affixed to each valve and tube extension. 6. Manufacturer Beacon Medaes, Allied Health Care or Amico. 2.4 MEDICAL GAS OUTLETS A. General 1 Outlets shall be furnished as a complete assembly for single or multiple services as indicated. 2. All medical gas outlets shall be gas specific and shall be UL Listed. 3 Outlets shall be quick- connect style as required by service and/or location. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15210 PAGE 3 of 10 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS 4 Each outlet shall consist of a rough -in assembly and a finish assembly The rough -in assembly shall consist of a zinc die -cast back -plate with mounting flanges on all four sides, a raised plaster strike, and a non removable, positive pin- keying arrangement for each specific gas service. Identification of each gas service shall be permanently cast into the back plate. 5 The rough -in assembly for all pressure gas services shall contain a fully assembled secondary check that is completely serviceable from the front. Vacuum services do not have a secondary check valve. The rough -in inlet shall be 7' long, 1/2 O.D type K copper inlet tube, with a label identifying the specific gas by name and color and a plastic dust cap The assembly is constructed to permit rotation of the inlet tube to allow alignment with system piping for connections. 6. Each vacuum outlet shall include a separate adjacent slide bracket for large vacuum bottles located as directed or incorporated with the common outlet cover plate. B Wall Outlets Quick- Connect Key Style: 1 The quick- connect style wall outlets shall be provided for the medical gas and vacuum services as indicated. 2. The finish assembly shall consist of a powder- coated light neutral, zinc, die -cast finish faceplate, a front -body keying disc assembly and a detachable barrel assembly The keying disc assembly shall include a gas specific, positive, pin- keying device that is color -coded and labeled with the name of the gas service. The detachable barrel assembly shall include a plastic piston and brass primary check valve that engages and seals when a hose adapter or patient treatment device is removed from the outlet. 3 Manufacturer Allied Healthcare 500 Series Chemtron Series. C. Wall Mounted Slide: The wall mounted slide shall consist of a powder- coated light neutral, zinc, die -cast faceplate with two anchor screws for attachment directly to a wall (without use of a rough -in). 1 Manufacturer Allied Healthcare 500 Series Chemtron Series. 2.5 MEDICAL GAS ALARM SYSTEM A. Area Alarm. 1 General. Each area alarm panel shall include a rough -in assembly area alarm module, and area alarm network communications board. 2. Rough -In Assembly. The rough -in assembly shall consist of a heavy gauge sheet metal box with knockouts for conduit and wiring, the system power supply with an ON /OFF switch, fuse holder with fuses, terminal block, ground terminal, transformer breakout P.C. board. Input power voltage shall be 120 VAC. The area alarm s power supply shall convert the voltage to 20 VAC for operating the alarm. Adjustable mounting brackets to facilitate installation in the wall shall be provided. 3 Area Alarm Module: Area alarm modules monitor signals from pressure and vacuum transducers in the piping zones that serve anesthetizing locations and other vital life support and critical care areas. The area alarm modules convert the signals and display the actual pressure or vacuum in English units. 4 The area alarm module shall reside in a front panel consisting of a finish trim plate and hinged door assembly that mounts to the area alarm rough -in assembly The face of the area alarm module shall include the following: a. Low pressure LED. Light red when the pressure or vacuum is below setpoint. b. Normal pressure LED. Lights green when the pressure is normal. c. High pressure LED Lights red when the pressure is above the high setpoint. d. Display Displays the pressure or vacuum reading and error codes. to 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI e. Label. Identifies which type of gas that the area alarm module is monitoring. f. Increment key- If the module is in monitoring mode, it displays the high setpoint when pressed. If the module is in configuration mode, it scrolls up the menu when pressed. g. Decrement key- If the module is in monitoring mode, it displays the low setpoint when pressed. If the module is in configuration mode, it scrolls down the menu when pressed. h. Silence key- It silences audible alarm when pressed. i. Test key- If the module is in monitoring mode, it starts the self diagnostic routine for the area alarm module when pressed. If the module is in configuration mode, it shows the current settings of each option when pressed. 5 The area alarm modules shall be configured at the factory for a specific type of gas or vacuum as indicated on the drawings. 6. The pressure and vacuum lines shall be remotely monitored by using gas specific transducers. B Input Devices: 1 Each area alarm module shall be supplied with an appropriate pressure sensor DISS demand .check valve kit for each gas. Master alarm modules shall monitor signals from source equipment through separately supplied;press'ure switches. 2. Pressure Sensor- The pressure sensor contains a transducer that converts the pressure/vacuum source into a digital signal that is displayed on the area display module. Each sensor shall be labeled and color -coded for the gas or vacuum being monitored. Each pressure sensor of a complete alarm system shall be provided with a quick- connect demand check valve kit to facilitate field maintenance. Each pressure sensor shall be factory calibrated for the specific gas shown on the sensor housing. If it is not connected to the appropriate gas specific display module, an error message (E02) will be displayed. 3 DISS Demand Check Valve Kit: The DISS demand valve kit shall be designed for use with the pressure sensors and switches, and shall permit maintenance and replacement of these devices without closing off the monitored pressure line. a. The DISS demand check valve kit shall be provided with pressure sensor of each area display module of a complete alarm system and with each pressure/vacuum switch. b Each DISS demand check valve kit shall include a pressure switch bushing, a DISS adapter that screws into the pressure sensor or switch bushing, and a demand check valve socket for attaching to a 114 NPT female connection in the pipeline. c. Check valve shall have gas specific threads to prevent cross connections. Each demand check valve shall consist of a valve and gas specific adapter d. Manufacturer Beacon Medaes, Allied Health Care or Alnico. 4 Pressure Switches. a. High and low pressure switches shall be installed on pressure lines. The switch shall contain two single -pole, double throw snap- action type switches that are actuated by copper diaphragm -type pressure capsule cleaned per NFPA 99 -2002. 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15210 PAGE 4 of 10 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS 7 A Network Communications Board shall be installed in the area alarm panel and connected to the Ethernet. This will enable the area alarms to send information to the master alarm. The Facility Engineering operator will be able to browse readings and statistics on the master alarms and area alarms from their personal computer when logged on to the Ethernet. 8. Provide Cat -5 Ethernet cable to each area alarm rough -in assembly if network communications option is not provided. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. Each pulse sensor pressure switch, and normally closed type input switch shall be appropriately labeled to identify service and set point by the contractor SECTION 15210 PAGE 5 of 10 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS High -Low line pressure switches shall be tested at 180 psi with an adjustable range of 3 8 to 100 psi. Two calibrated circular dials with a tamperproof cover shall allow ease of adjustment. 1) Manufacturer. Hill Rom High and Low Pressure Switch Model No. 208- 5139 -800 b Vacuum switches shall be installed on vacuum lines. The switch shall be a single pole, double throw snap- action type and shall be wired to signal on either increasing or decreasing vacuum levels. The switch shall be controlled by a copper bellows vacuum sensing system cleaned per NFPA 99 Switch shall have an adjustable range of 30 inches of mercury vacuum to 10 psi, with an adjustable differential of 0.6 to 6 inches of mercury for vacuum. Switch shall have internal dials for range and differential adjustment. 1) Manufacturer Allied Health Care. D Medical Gas Alarm Setpoints: Service Pressure Range PSI Pressure Range PSI Pressure Range PSI Normal High Low Oxygen 1 50 -55 1 60 1 40 Medical Vacuum 1 15 Hg min. 1 N/A 1 12 E. Wiring: Provide. all.low'voltage, conduit, between master alarms and remote switches at bulk storage tanks, gas manifolds, vacuum pumps and air compressors, as well as low voltage wiring in conduit between master alarms, area alarms and between pressure or vacuurn'switches and alarms. Wiring shall be according; to,:manufacturer's recommendations and shall comply with requirements of Divisionf 16. The 120 volt critical/emergency service to each alarm panel shall be provided by electrical subcontractor Only. plenum rated, high quality _shielded twisted pair cable. shall be used for low voltage wiring in. the; alarm systems. F Orifice Nipples. Provide with each pressure switch to allow repair or replacement of the switch without shutting down the pipeline system. 2.6 PIPING CROSSING BUILDING'S SEISMIC JOINT A. General. All medical gas and vacuum piping crossing the building s seismic joint shall be flexible expansion loops. B The flexible expansion loop shall impart no thrust loads on the anchors. The loop shall consist of two flexible sections of hose and braid, two 90- degree elbows, and a 180- degree return. Loops shall be install in a neutral, pre- compressed, or pre- extended condition as required for the application. C. The loops shall be constructed of same material as medical gas or medical vacuum piping. D The loops shall be cleaned, capped and bagged for oxygen service. E. Manufacturer. Metraflex MetraloopTM 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL 3.2 INSTALLATION MEDICAL VACUUM PLANT SECTION 15210 PAGE 6 of 10 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS A. All materials and equipment shall be installed by specialists in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. The installation of any materials and equipment not meeting those standards may be condemned by the A/E and shall be removed and reinstalled at no additional cost to the Owner Contractor is responsible for the safety and good condition of the materials and equipment installed until final acceptance by the Owner A. General Installation shall comply with NFPA 99 Uniform Plumbing Code and local codes and ordinances. B Mounting: The medical air plant frame shall be securely bolted to the floor using all mounting holes provided in the unit frame. C. Restraints. Provide approved seismic restraint for each medical air plant and medical vacuum plant. Restraint assembly shall be adjustable to permit removal of equipment. Restraints shall be bolted to building structure. Restraints are specified in Section 15070. D Clearances: Maintain a minimum clearance of 3 feet around the entire unit for maintenance and servicing. E. Pressure Settings. Control pressure switch settings are generally factory set for sea level. Adjust settings to compensate for altitude during compressor start -up F Start Up. 1 The medical air plant and medical vacuum plant manufacturer shall provide a factory trained technician or representative, employed by the manufacturer to perform the startup procedures as outlined in the startup, operation and maintenance manual provided by the manufacturer All labor and technical work will be performed by the Installing Contractor or his designated technician. 2. Start-up procedure will include a visual inspection as well as various technical, mechanical, chemical, and electrical tests as deemed necessary by the factory technician. The factory representative shall coordinate the start -up time with the General Contractor 3 The factory technician shall ascertain that all units are fully operational and arrange repairs if any start -up problems concerning the equipment are evident. G. Training: 1 Provide for the initial training of Owner's designated personnel. Classroom instruction shall be provided in the adjustment, operation and maintenance of the equipment specified, including pertinent safety requirements. Orient the training specifically to the systems installed rather than a general (canned) training course. Instructors shall be factory trained concerning all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. 2. Provide the training necessary to ensure competence in the operation of each system by the operating personnel. Provide instructors, literature, and necessary equipment to train the personnel for an instructional period of not less than four hours. 3 Manufacturer shall supply the following literature: a. Startup, Operation and Maintenance instructions. b Installation instructions. c. Field wiring diagrams. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2007 Mahlum Architects d. Troubleshooting guide. 33 CLEANING OF MEDICAL GAS PIPING 3.4 INSTALLATION MEDICAL GAS PIPING SECTION 15210 PAGE 7 of 10 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS A. Before Erection. All pipe, tubing, valves and fittings shall be thoroughly cleansed of all grease, oil or other combustible materials in strict accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 99 All piping, tubing, valves and fittings including those supplied especially prepared for oxygen service by the manufacturer and received sealed on the job, shall be examined internally just prior to assembly and if necessary recleaned. B Scrubbing and continuous agitation of the parts shall be employed where necessary to remove all deposits and ensure complete cleansing. After washing, all materials shall be rinsed thoroughly in clean, hot water C. After Cleansing: Great care shall be exercised in the storage and handling of all materials and in the condition of tools used in cutting and reaming to prevent oil or grease being introduced into the tubing. Where such contamination is known to have occurred, the materials affected must be rewashed and then rinsed. A. Joints. All joints in the pipe and tubing, except those at equipment requiring screwed connections, shall be made with brazed -type wrought fittings. Suitable adapters shall be employed for the installation of equipment provided with threaded connections. 1 Brazed Connections. All brazed connections shall be made with the type of brazing alloy specified in pipe and fittings. The joining processes shall be those recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe and the tubing and the fittings. The use of flux is prohibited in all instances. B Bends: All changes in direction requiring turns or offsets of radiuses less than five times the pipe or tubing outside diameter shall be made by Walseal or braze -type wrought fittings. All other pipe or tubing bends may be shaped by proper bending tools and shall be free of any appreciable flattening, buckling or thinning of the tube wall at any point. C. Erection: All pipe and tubing shall be cut accurately to measurements obtained at the site of the system and shall be installed without springing or forcing. All pipe and tubing shall be protected against mechanical injury D In -line shutoff valves intended for use to isolate existing systems being extended to new piping systems shall not be connected to the new system until all testing has been completed. E. Supports. 1 Comply with MSS Standard Practices SP -69 'Piping, Hangers and Supports Selection and Application and MSS Standard Practices SP 58, 'Piping, Hangers, and Supports Materials, Design, and Manufacture Work shall also be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 15060, 'Hanger and Supports. 2. Medical gas piping including medical air and vacuum shall comply with requirements of Section 15070, 'Mechanical Seismic and Vibration Control 3 Medical gas and all piping shall not be supported by other piping, but shall be supported with pipe hooks, metal pipe straps, bands on hangers suitable for the size of pipe and of proper strength and quality at proper intervals so that piping cannot be moved accidentally from the installed position. Portions of hangers in contact with copper tube shall have a copper finish or other protection against galvanic corrosion. Maximum hanger spacing shall be at the following intervals: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 Pipe Size- Inches 1 /4NPS(3 /80.D) 3 /8 NPS (1 /2O.D) 1/2 NPS (5/8 O.D 3/4 NPS (7/8 O.D 1 NPS (1 1/8 O.D 1 1/4 NPS (1 3/8 0.D 1 1/2 NPS (1 5/8 O.D) larger Vertical risers, all sizes. Every floor but not to exceed. SECTION 15210 PAGE 8 of 10 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS Hanger Spacing -Feet 5 6 6 7 8 9 10 15 4 Piping clamps shall be cushion type constructed of low carbon steel with galvanized finish. Cushion material shall be EPDM. a. Manufacturer PHD 2501 2514/2600 or approved. F Firestopping: Comply with requirements of Section 15050, 'Basic Materials and Methods G Painting and Protective Coverings. 1 All pipe and tubing shall be labeled and painted to indicate its gas content as required by NFPA 99 and as specified in Section 15050, 'Basic Materials and Methods 2. Pipe or tubing in corridors or other locations where exposed to damage from moving equipment shall be adequately protected. H. Labeling: 1 Shutoff valves shall be properly identified in compliance with NFPA 99 -2002, 5 1 11.2, 'Shutoff Valves. 2. Station outlets and inlets shall be properly identified in compliance with NFPA 99 -2002, 5 1 11.3 Station Outlets and Inlets. 3 Labeling of alarm panels shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 99 -20025 1.9 1(6) and (7). 3.5 INSTALLATION OF PIPING CROSSING BUILDING'S SEISMIC JOINT A. The flexible piping loops crossing the building s seismic joint shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations. B Loops shall not be installed with drain plugs. C. Loops installed in any position other than hanging down must have the 180 degree return supported. Install loop within four pipe diameters both upstream and downstream from a pipe guide or anchor D At each side of loop provide clevis type rod hanger with suitable liner compatible with copper pipe. Provide seismic restraints in compliance with Section 15070, Mechanical Seismic and Vibration Control. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF MANIFOLDS A. Install manifolds in accordance with NFPA 99 -2002. Manifolds and cylinders shall be located in a vented room dedicated to medical gas use with adequate access for servicing of the 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.7 INSTALLATION OF MEDICAL GAS ALARM PANELS 3.8 TESTING AND ADJUSTING 0 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15210 PAGE 9 of 10 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS cylinders. Mechanical venting shall be dedicated. Natural venting shall be to the outside of the building and not into corridors. B Temperature of manifold room shall be kept within 35 °F and 100 °F Electric heating shall not be allowed in manifold rooms. C. Provide chains or cables to restrain cylinders, including empty and reserve cylinders. D Install manifold in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Manifold shall be tested for leaks after complete installation by use of full cylinders of gas and approved oxygen compatible leak test solution. E. Relief valves shall be piped to the outside of the building. Relief vent pipe shall be turned down and screened, located at least 10 feet above final grade. A. Installation and start -up shall be performed according to established codes and standards and in accordance with the instructions furnished by the manufacturer B Install each panel adjacent to the existing panel and in a location approved by the Owner The mounting height shall allow the medical facility staff adequate physical, visual, and audible access. C. The rough -in box shall be installed so that it is level from side -to -side and from front to back. Do not cover or block access to any of the conduit knockouts on any side of the rough -in box. D Completely fill and finish the wall surface up to the rough -in box to prevent gaps when the Master Alarm Panel is installed. E. Tag and tie -off each cable as soon as it is pulled into the rough -in box. Tag shall identify service and area being monitored. F Install input devices in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Pipe medical gas line to 1/4 NPTF tee and test pipeline pressure per NFPA 99 -2002. Thread input device into tee. G Perform the following adjustments before start-up- 1 Test proper operation of all switch input devices. 2. Before placing into service, test each alarm panel in accordance with NFPA 99 -2002. to verify that all signals are operating as required. 3 Apply power to each alarm panel. A. Testing of Medical Gas and Medical Vacuum Systems. Contractor shall perform the testing of oxygen and medical vacuum piping, valves and fittings in strict accordance with the methods and procedure as stipulated in NFPA 99 -2002, 5 1 12 `Performance Criteria and Testing —Level 1 (Gases, Medical Surgical Vacuum, and WAGD) At the completion of all testing, the Contractor shall submit a log of all tests to the A/E. 1 Testing shall also comply with 2000 Edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code, Section 1329.0, 'Testing. Testing shall be conducted in the presence of a representative of the Administrative Authority MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15210 PAGE 10 of 10 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS B System Certification. 1 Prior to any medical gas system being placed in service, each and every system shall be certified as required by 2000 Edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code, Section 1331 0 System Certification. 2. Certification shall be accomplished by an independent third party certification agency that is approved by the Administrative Authority C. Special requirements: upon completion of any alteration, modification, or repair of medical gas piping systems in which any line in the existing system is disconnected or disrupted, qualified personnel shall conduct appropriate tests, to include oxygen analysis and to assure that medical gas outlets within the disconnected or disrupted system are delivering the proper gas as shown on the outlet label. Provide system certification in compliance with 2000 Edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code, Chapter 13 'Medical Gas Systems. D Alterations and Revisions to Existing Medical Gas Piping System. Provide tests and system certification in compliance with 2000 Edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code, Chapter 13, 'Medical Gas Systems. E. Gases for Testing: 1 The test gas shall be oil -free, dry Nitrogen NF 2. Contractor shall pay all costs of gases required for testing. 3.9 COMMISSIONING A. Notify the Commissioning Agent one week prior to start up of equipment. B Submit to the Commissioning Agent a Verification of Completion form with the pre- functional check off sheet for each component when it is ready for functional testing. C. Assist the Commissioning Agent as required to perform the functional testing on the system components and the system as a whole. 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 15210 Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 15300 PAGE 1 of 7 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Sections 15010 and 15050 are directly related. Other sections are indirectly related and shall be reviewed. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. General. Work includes complete engineering, design, and furnishing of all material, equipment, and labor for complete systems, and ready for standard operation. The mechanical drawings do not attempt to show design of the system. Location of piping mains where shown on the drawings are suggested locations only B Existing Systems: Work in the existing building includes complete design, furnishing of all material, equipment, and labor for alterations and additions to the existing wet -pipe automatic sprinkler system. Extend existing system as required to provide coverage of entire project. Size system by hydraulic calculation in accordance with NFPA 13 Verify exact location of existing piping, mains, branches, and heads. The mechanical drawings do not attempt to show design of the system. Location of piping mains where shown on the drawings are suggested locations only Contractor shall verify exact locations and sizes of all sprinkler mains. 1 To minimize conflict with new work, and new piping shall be installed after coordinating with other trades. 2. Provide new heads and escutcheons in all remodeled rooms. C. Miscellaneous Components: Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, components, appurtenances, switches and devices to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation in full compliance with all requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. D Prior to Submitting Bids. Any information described or shown which is not clear to the sprinkler subcontractor shall be referred to the A/E for clarification before bids are submitted. The sprinkler subcontractor will be obliged to install the work without additional cost as directed by the A/E if no question is raised in writing prior to the opening of bids. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as one package each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections and Section 15010, 'Mechanical Work General B Shop Drawings. 1 Submit seven sets of shop drawings, hydraulic calculations to show basis for the design by the sprinkler contractor and equipment. Partial submittals will not be acceptable. 2. Sprinlder design professional s Registration or Certification. 3 Detailed drawings shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 Drawings shall be prepared using CAD software (latest version), stamped by the sprinkler design professional and include all new and existing sprinklers and piping. Drawings are subject to change during bidding and construction periods. Any wall and ceiling changes occurring prior to the submittal of contractor's shop drawings shall be incorporated into the contractor's detailed design at no additional contract cost. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI E. Acceptable Materials and Equipment: Products with UL label or listing in the latest UL 'Fire Protection List' and supplement, current at the end of the bidding period, or products with FM lai or listing in the 'Factory Mutual Approved Guide are acceptable fire protection materials and equipment. E. Recommended preventive maintenance schedule 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise noted, this is substantially a performance specification. B Minimum qualifications of the Contractor /subcontractor shall include the following: 1 Specialist Firm: Company specializing in automatic fire protection/sprinkler systems, possessing a minimum of three years experience with systems similar in nature to the type specified herein. 2. Backflow Prevention: Installation and testing by a certified backflow assembly tester in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code. 3 Design Certification: Shop drawings shall be prepared by a person with a minimum certification of Level II Designer supervised by a Licensed Professional Engineer or a Level III or IV Fire Sprinkler Designer certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET), in Fire Protection Engineering Technology Automatic Fire Sprinkler System Layout. 4 Drawings shall be stamped by a Washington State Licensed Fire Sprinkler Contractor C. Sprinkler Head Location. The system shall be designed and installed so that no part thereof will interfere with ceiling heights, doors, windows, or mechanical or electrical installations. Exact location of heads shall be carefully coordinated with other ceiling elements for a symmetrical pattern. Contractor shall submit preliminary reflected ceiling plan layout of the building showing head locations in relation to lights, speakers, grilles, diffusers, etc. for review and the specific approval by the Architect. Additional heads which may be required by the A/E for a coordinated ceiling pattern shall be provided without added cost, even though the number of heads and related piping may exceed the maximum requirements of NFPA 13 Heads in all acoustical tiles shall be centered in the tile. 1 Sprinkler heads shall not be located closer than one foot from lighting fixtures, diffusers, speakers, or similar devices or obstructions. 2. Contractor shall coordinate his work with other trades so as to avoid any interference with the potential effectiveness of the automatic sprinkler system. D Shop Drawings. After approval of head locations by the Architect, prepare and submit construction drawings to Factory Mutual, Washington State DOH, the local fire marshal, and other local authorities having jurisdiction, for approval. Drawings bearing approval of the aforementioned code and/or review authorities shall then be submitted to the A/E for review and approval PRIOR to the start of any work. C. Submit hydraulic calculations for each sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 13 D Operation and Maintenance Data. 1 Indicating Valves 2. Water Flow and valve tamper switches 3 Alarm Valves 0 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15300 PAGE 2 of 7 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.5 SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 1.6 WARRANTY SECTION 15300 PAGE 3 of 7 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Piping and Sprinkler Criteria. 1 Sprinkler spacing shall comply with the protection area per sprinkler for the particular hazard as schedule in NFPA 13 Chapter 4 17/32 orifice sprinklers shall not be used. Minimum pipe diameter shall be 1 2. The second most remote sprinkler head shall discharge at a rate equal to the required density 3 The velocity in the overhead piping should not exceed 20' per second. Higher velocities will be permitted in riser nipples and starter pieces for throttling to achieve a balanced flow Maximum velocity in underground mains shall be 16' per second. 4 The minimum operating pressure for any sprinkler should be 7.5 psi, the maximum discharge pressure used at the starting point should be 60 psi. 5 All sprinklers shall be rated at 165 °F except in the area of heat producing equipment where NFPA 13 shall be used, unless otherwise specified. 6. Pipe friction losses shall be calculated in accordance with Hazen and Williams formula for a 'C' value of 120 for new steel wet -pipe systems and a 'C' value of 100 for new steel dry -pipe systems. 7 The maximum floor area to be protected by one sprinkler system shall not exceed 52,000 sq ft. 8. Provide a guard for each sprinkler in janitor closets and sprinklers within 7 feet of the floor and other areas as required by NFPA 13 9 Seismic Protection: Seismically brace all new and existing piping systems in accordance with Zone 4 of NFPA 13 A. All work performed and materials and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects for a period of one year from date of acceptance by Owner B All existing piping and equipment incorporated into the new system shall be hydrostatically tested and warranted as new PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Approvals: All devices and equipment shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed for their intended purpose. All sprinklers shall be Factory Mutual approved. 2.2 WATER SERVICE FOR SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. Service Work: Outside fire service main is not part of Division 15 mechanical work. Provide building fire service main to a point approximately 5' from building wall and make connection. B Pipe and Fittings: Pipe, 250 -psi wp ductile iron, cement lined, Class 52 to ANSI A11.51 (AWWA C 151) Fittings, 250 -psi wp for gray iron, 350 -psi wp for ductile iron, conforming to ANSI A21 10 or Federal Specification WW- P -421c, cement lined and seal coated same as piping. C. Joints: Mechanical joints, dimensions, metal thickness, and standard mechanical joint gaskets shall conform to ANSI A21 11 Type 316 stainless steel bolting. D Depth of Cover 3 unless otherwise indicated. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.3 PIPING AND FITTINGS SECTION 15300 PAGE 4 of 7 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Water Piping: Piping shall be Schedule 40 pipe. Thin -wall (Schedule 5 and Schedule 10) pipe will not be allowed. Piping shall comply with materials listed in NFPA 13 Pipe used in sprinkler systems shall be designed to withstand a working pressure of not less than 175 psi. 1 MRI Suite: Sprinkler piping shall be copper B Couplings All Sizes. Class 150 (300 psi WOG) malleable iron C. Unions 2 and Smaller Class 150 (300 psi WOG) female- screwed malleable iron with ground joint and brass -to -iron seat. D Fittings. 1 Threaded. Cast iron, 175 -psi minimum, ANSI/ASME B16.4 2. Flanged. Cast iron, 175 -psi minimum, ANSI/ASME B16.1 3 High Pressure Systems. Where pressures exceed 175 -psi, fittings and flanges shall be extra -heavy pattern. 4 Pipe Thread Compounds: Tetrafluoroethylene dispersions and other suitable compounds may be used upon approval, tetrafluoroethylene tape not acceptable. E. Grooved Couplings and Fittings All Sizes: 750 -psi WOG minimum, segmental bolted couplings, malleable iron, ASTM A47 1 Couplings on System Side of Pressure Reducing Valves: 500 -psi WOG minimum. F Escutcheons. Fastened securely to pipe, chromium- plated steel or chromium- plated brass, one piece or split pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew Provide at all exposed piping passing through walls, floors or ceilings. G Pipe Hangers. Hangers shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 and in accordance with requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in sprinkler systems. 2.4 VALVES A. Gate Valves. Cast iron body OS &Y type, 175 -1b. WOG, double -disc, resilient seat. 1 Manufacturer Nibco No. F- 607 -OTS or Kennedy No. 68. B Ball Valves. For inspectors test and drain only Cast red bronze body threaded, chrome plated ball, blowout -proof stem, reinforced 1'FE seats, 300 -1b WIMP lever handle. 1' Manufacturer Nibco No. KT 585 -70 -UL or KT 580- 70 -UL. 2. Ball and butterfly valves shall not be used on incoming water service, and on the suction side of either the fire pump or jockey pump. C. Check Valves: Swing type, rubber faced or wafer type spring loaded butterfly check valve, cast iron body 175 -lb WOG, bronze trim, flange mounted. 1 Manufacturer Nibco No. KW -900 -W Kennedy No. 706 or Mueller No. A2102. D Drain Valves. Threaded bronze angle, globe, ball or butterfly 1501b WOG equipped with reducer and hose connection with cap or connected to a drain line. E. Self contained Test and Drain Valve: 1 Ductile iron body with bronze `Drain' and "Test' bonnets. Acrylic sight glass for viewing test flow Various sized orifice inserts to simulate flow through 1/2-in. diameter sprinklers, 1 1/4 in. female threaded outlets or 1 1/4 in. one quarter turn locking lug outlets for plain end pipe (end preparation to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation) 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2. Bronze body with chrome plated bronze ball, brass stem, steel handle, teflon seat and sight glasses. Provide valve with three position indicator plate (off, test, and drain), '/a in. tapping for pressure gage and various other orifice inserts to simulate flow through 'h in. diameter sprinklers. F Relief Valve: Provide UL- listed, ASME- constructed relief valve in closed systems, pressure setting and location as required to eliminate excessive pressure build -up due to line surges. G Miscellaneous Connections and Fittings: As required by NFPA 13 drains, inspector's tests, discharge outlets, and flushing connections, sway bracing; flexible joints which shall consist of UL Listed mechanically coupled grooved -end pipe and fittings. 1 Manufacturer Victaulic. 2.5 SPRINKLERS A. Sprinklers. Quick response sprinklers shall be standard type except as noted below The maximum distance from the deflector to finished ceiling shall be 2 inches for pendent sprinklers. Pendent sprinklers in finished areas shall be provided with semi recessed adjustable screwed escutcheons and installed within the center one -third of their adjustment. The sprinkler shall be installed in the flush position with the element exposed below the ceiling line. At the specified locations below provided the following type of sprinklers. B LOCATION Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Electrical Electrical Switch Gear Rooms Elevator Shafts, Dumbwaiter Shafts, Elevator Machine Rooms, Elevator Pits Ceilings of Exterior Soffits and Canopies PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 15300 PAGE 5 of 7 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS TYPE Quick Response, Upright or Telephone Closets, Transformer Vaults Pendent Brass 200 °F Standard Upright or Sidewall Brass 200 °F Standard Recessed Chrome Plated Pendent, Dry Type 150 -165 °F All Areas Not Listed Above Quick Response, Recessed Pendent or Sidewall, Chrome Plated 150 -165 °F C. Do not use quick response sprinklers in the same sprinkler zone with other sprinklers types. D Spares. Spares for each temperature rating of sprinkler head, complete with appropriate storage cabinet and four wrenches, shall be provided. The total number of spare heads shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 13 E. Wire Guards: For all heads with clearance height less than 7' -6 factory- fabricated clamp -on guards. A. General. Installation of system materials and equipment shall conform to applicable requirements of 1 Section 15050, 'Basic Materials and Methods' 2. NFPA No. 13 'Installation of Sprinkler Systems 3 The provisions and recommendations of the NFPA constitute mandatory minimum requirements for work specified herein. Strict compliance therewith is required, except all more stringent requirements of the Contract Documents shall modify supplement, and supersede applicable provisions and recommendations of the NFPA. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Certification. Provide certificates covering installation and tests for signature by the Architect prior to acceptance of work. C. Experienced Workmen. Fire protection system work shall be supervised and performed by personnel regularly engaged in the installation of fire protection systems conforming to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and NFPA standards and closely similar to the work specified and indicated. Submit evidence of qualification of any proposed supervisor or installer The A/E may reject those who cannot show evidence of such qualifications. D Welding: Welding will not be permitted except upon specific approval by the State Fire Marshal. E. Piping Supports. Vertical piping supports shall be provided at each floor for risers. F Earthquake Bracing and Earthquake Joints. Comply with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. requirements and applicable requirements of NFPA 13 G. Piping Through Roof All pipes through roof shall be flashed with approved flashing. H. Firestopping: Comply with requirements of Section 15050, 'Basic Materials and Methods' Piping: All pipe, fittings, valves, equipment, and accessories shall be clean and free of all deleterious material before being installed in their respective systems. Pipe shall be cleaned by hammer shaking, swabbing, and flushing, or by a combination of methods. All lines shall be blown out with compressed air after erection, but blowing out shall not be relied upon for removing foreign matter During the progress of construction, open ends of pipe, fittings, and valves shall be properly protected at all times to prevent the admission of foreign matter Provide flushing connections at ends of sprinkler cross mains in accordance with requirements of NFPA 13 1 Drains: The sprinkler system shall be provided with complete drainage facilities as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 13 2. Protection Against Freezing: Supply pipes or risers that pass through unheated spaces in or under building areas exposed to freezing shall be protected from freezing in accordance with applicable methods in NFPA 13 3.2 CLEANING A. Cleaning operations during construction and upon completion of the work of this Contract shall be performed in accordance with the applicable requirements of the referenced NFPA standards and the Contract Documents. 33 HEAD PROTECTION A. Heads shall be protected during painting operations with paper or plastic bags secured over sprinkler head as part of the work under this Section. Protection shall be removed immediately upon the finishing of painting operations. 3.4 FIRE PROTECTION WATER SYSTEMS TESTING SECTION 15300 PAGE 6 of 7 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Piping: Test at hydrostatic pressure of 200 psi, duration not less than two hours, or at 50 psi in excess of the maximum pressure when the maximum pressure to be maintained in the system is in excess of 150 psi. B Dry Pipe Tests: Test with compressed air at 40 psi, duration not less than 24 hours. All leaks allowing a loss of pressure over 1.5 psi for the 24 -hour test period shall be repaired. C. Final Tests. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be hydrostatically tested and flushed as specified in NFPA Standard No. 13 When hydrostatic, pneumatic, trip and alarm test have been completed and all necessary corrections made, final inspection shall be made by the fire marshal or authority having jurisdiction, prior to acceptance. The installation foreman or 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAIH.UM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI D Backflow Provisions: Backflow prevention into connected potable water systems and all systems devices shall be tested for proper functioning under conditions normal to their application. 3.6 COMMISSIONING A. Notify the Commissioning Agent one week prior to start up of equipment. B Submit to the Commissioning Agent a Verification of Completion form with the pre functional check off sheet for each component when it is ready for functional testing. C. Assist the Commissioning Agent as required to perform the functional testing on the system components and the system as a whole. other competent representative of the Contractor shall be present during final inspection. The Contractor shall submit a signed and dated certificate, as stipulated in NFPA Standard No. 13, section on Acceptance Test. 3.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical components provided as part of the work under this Section shall be connected as part of the work under Division 16 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 15300 SECTION 15300 PAGE 7 of 7 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Sections 15010 and 15050 are directly related. Other sections are indirectly related and shall be reviewed. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this section shall include furnishing all materials and labor for installation of the packaged air conditioning unit, including specialties and associated components, as specified or indicated, all connected and ready for use. 13 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 15730 PAGE 1 of 5 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Sections 15010, 15050, and 15950 are directly related. Other sections are indirectly related and shall be reviewed. 1.4 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this section shall include furnishing all labor materials, and equipment necessary for the complete installation of the factory packaged rooftop air conditioning units complete with accessories, all connected, and ready for use. B Work shall also include furnishing all labor materials, and equipment necessary for the complete installation of the split system air conditioning unit to serve Elevator Machine Room. 1.5 STANDARDS A. Referenced Standards. Current publications of the standards referred to by basic designation in Part 2 and Part 3 shall form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by references thereto. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections and Section 15010, 'Mechanical Work in General B Provide summary of all auxiliary utility requirements such as. electricity water natural gas, condensate drains, etc. Summary shall indicate quantity of each required utility C. Acoustics: Manufacturer of equipment shall provide indoor and outdoor sound power level data across all major octave band center frequencies for cataloged operating range of unit at gross cooling capacity range. Data shall be obtained in conformance with ANSI S1.32 1980, American National Standard Methods for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of Discrete Frequency and Narrow Band Noise Sources in Reverberation Rooms and per AMCA Standard 300 -85 test code 'Sound Rating Air Moving Devices' B Shop Drawings. Shop drawings for each air conditioning unit shall include construction details necessary for installation, including unit dimensions, assembly weights, required clearances and field connection details. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 15730 PAGE 2 of 5 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT E. Submit installation, start -up and Operation and Maintenance Data. Include instructions for rigging, lifting, bearing lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and ladder type wiring diagram. F Include a recommended spare parts list customized to each unit complete with appropriate tag number and/or part numbers along with a description to clearly identify the items. G. Submittals shall include data on design, inspection and procedures related to preventative maintenance. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be submitted at the time of unit shipment. A. Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in the design and manufacture of commercial and or industrial packaged compressorized air conditioning equipment. Manufacturer shall have had a minimum of five years successful experience in the manufacture and service support of the rooftop packages units specified herein. Manufacturers with less than five years experience in the production of rooftop units of the sizes and types specified herein shall not be acceptable. B Single Source Responsibility. Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section, 'Materials and Equipment The manufacturer shall provided single source responsibility for all components for the unit whether specifically manufactured by the unit manufacturer or obtained outside and installed in the equipment with the exception of consumable items such as filters, fan belts, etc. or as specifically warranted by the product manufacturer such as motors, VFDs, etc. C. Air side and refrigeration sections shall be by the same manufacturer and produced at the same plant location. D Delivery Storage and Handling: 1 Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units. 2. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory shipping covers in place until installation. 3 Contractor shall store units in a clean dry area and protected from the weather and construction traffic. Carefully follow manufacturer's storage instructions if installation does not immediately follow arrival at the job site. E. Warranty. 1 Provide a full parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first. 2. Provide five year extended warranty for compressors including materials and labor F Maintenance Service: 1 Furnish complete service and maintenance of packaged rooftop units for one year from Date of Substantial Completion by manufacturer's authorized service agency 2. Provide maintenance service with a two month maximum time interval between calls. Provide 24 -hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions. 3 Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. 4 Submit copy of service call work order or report to the Owner and include description of work performed. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MRI AIR CONDITION EQUIPMENT A. System Description. 1 The air conditioning system shall be a DATA AIRE INC, DAAU -1034 floor mounted, up -flow 2- circuit, high efficiency split system. 2. The system shall consist of a Low Decibel (65dBA 5 DARC 2134 outdoor condensing unit. B Requirements. 1 The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. 2. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.). 3 The units shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210 and bear the ARI label. 4 A full charge of R -407c for 100 feet of refrigerant tubing shall be provided in the condensing unit. 5 A dry air holding charge shall be provided in the evaporator 6. System efficiency shall meet or exceed 11 4 EER. 7 The wired controller shall be shipped inside the carton with the indoor unit and able to withstand 105° F storage temperatures and 95% relative humidity C. Indoor Unit: 1 General. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, control circuit board and fan motor The unit shall have a self- diagnostic function, 3- minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dry air instead of R -407c before shipment from the factory 2. Unit Cabinet: The casing shall have a white finish. Multi directional drain and refrigerant piping offering four (4) directions for refrigerant piping and two (2) directions for draining shall be standard. There shall be a separate back plate which secures the unit firmly to the wall. 3 Fan: The evaporator fan shall be an assembly with a line flow fan direct driven by a single motor The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. A manual adjustable guide vane shall be provided with the ability to change the airflow from side to side (left or right) A motorized air sweep flow louver shall provide an automatic change in airflow by directing the air up and down to provide for uniform air distribution. The indoor fan shall consist of two (2) speeds, High and Low i 4 Filter Return air shall be 'filtered by means of a disposable type 25% efficient 2 -inch thick filter 5 Evaporator Coil. The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing.' The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. 6. Electrical. The unit electrical power shall be 115 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 103 volts to 127 volts. The indoor unit shall not have any supplemental electrical heat elements. D Controls: 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15730 PAGE 3 of 5 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 1 The unit shall have a wired; controller to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15730 PAGE 4 of 5 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 2. The controller shall consist of an On -Off switch, Cool/Dry -Fan selector Thermostat setting, Timer Mode, High -Low fan speed, Auto Vane selector Test Run switching and Check Mode switching. 3 3 Temperature changes shall be by 2 °F increments with a range of 65 -87 °F 4 The control system shall consist of two (2) microprocessors interconnected by a single non -polar two wire cable. 5 Wiring shall run direct from the indoor unit to the controller with no splices. 6. Manufacturer shall provide 2 conductors 18 Ga. stranded wire for connection to remote controller 7 The microprocessor located in the indoor unit shall have the capability of sensing return air temperature and indoor coil temperature, receiving and processing commands from the wired controller providing emergency operation and controlling the outdoor unit. 8. Normal operation of the remote controller provides individual system control in which one remote controller and one indoor unit are installed in the same room. 9 The controller shall have the capability of controlling up to a maximum of fifty (50) systems at a maximum developed control cable distance of 1,650 feet. 10. The control voltage from the controller to the indoor unit shall be 12 volts, DC. 11 The control voltage between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit shall be 12 volts, DC. 12. The system shall be capable of automatic restart when power is restored after power interruption. 13 The system shall include self diagnostics including total hours of compressor run time. 14 The microprocessor within the wall mounted remote controller shall provide automatic cooling, display set point and room temperature, 24 hour on/off timer so that automatic operation function display check mode for memory of most recent problem. 15 Control system shall control the continued operation of the air sweep louvers, as well as provide on/off and system/mode function switching. 16. The controller shall have the capability to provide sequential starting with up to fifty seconds delay E. Outdoor Unit: 1 General. The outdoor unit shall be designed specifically for use with indoor unit scheduled on the drawings. The unit shall be equipped with a circuit board that interfaces to the indoor unit and perform all functions necessary for operation. The unit shall have a powder coated finish. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory 2. Unit Cabinet: The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with a powder coated baked enamel. 3 Fan. The unit shall be furnished with either one or two direct drive propeller type fans. The motor shall have inherent protection, be permanently lubricated bearings. The fan motor shall be mounted for quiet operation. The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts. The outdoor unit shall have a horizontal discharge airflow 4 Coil. The condenser coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. Refrigerant flow from the condenser shall be controlled by means of a metering orifice. 5 Compressor. The compressor shall be a high performance rotary type. A crankcase heater shall be factory mounted on the outside of the compressor The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator The compressor shall be equipped with an internal thermal overload. The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch. The outdoor unit must have the ability to operate with a maximum height difference of 164 feet and have 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.2 START -UP OF AIR CONDITIONING UNITS END OF SECTION 15730 SECTION 15730 PAGE 5 of 5 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT refrigerant tubing length of X 164 feet between indoor and outdoor units without the need for line size changes, traps or additional oil. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at 0 °F ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls (Optional wind baffle may be required) F Electrical. 1 The unit electrical power shall be 460volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz. 2. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of xxx volts to xxx volts. 3 The outdoor unit shall be controlled by the microprocessor located in the indoor unit. 4 The control voltage between' indoor unit and the outdoor unit shall be 12 volts, DC. A. Installation of Split System Air Conditioning Unit: 1 Installation shall conform to equipment manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Equipment shall be installed with vibration isolators, leveled, firmly anchored, and located so that working clearance is available under overhead lines and so that working space is available for all necessary servicing such as shaft removal, replacing, or adjusting drives and motors, lubrication, and access to automatic controls. Electric isolation shall be provided between dissimilar metals for the purpose of minimizing galvanic corrosion. 2. Refrigerant Systems: Refrigerant piping materials and installation shall conform to the requirements of Section 15184 `Refrigerant Piping Length of refrigerant piping runs between split system equipment shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations. Charge system with proper refrigerant level. A. Factory Start Up Services: The manufacturer shall furnish a factory trained service engineer without additional charge, to start the unit(s). The start-up engineer shall conduct such operating tests as required to ensure that the unit is operating in accordance with design. Complete testing of all safety and emergency control devices shall be made. The start -up engineer shall submit a written report to the Owner through the contractor containing all test data recorded as required above and a letter certifying that the unit is operating properly 33 COMMISSIONING A. Notify the Commissioning Agent one week prior to start up of equipment. B Submit to the Commissioning Agent a Verification of Completion form with the pre functional check off sheet for each component when it is ready for functional testing. C. Assist the Commissioning Agent as required to perform the functional testing on the system components and the system as a whole. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 15800 PAGE 1 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Sections 15010, 15050, and 15950 are directly related. Other sections are indirectly related and shall be reviewed. A. Work under this section shall include furnishing all labor materials, and equipment necessary for the complete installation of the air distribution system, all connected and ready for use. 13 STANDARDS A. Referenced Standards: Current publications of the Standards referred to by basic designation in Part 2 and Part 3 shall form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by references thereto. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections and Section 15010, 'Mechanical Work General B Submit product information for each item of equipment, component, or specialties required for each item of the air distribution system. Include construction material description, pressure and temperature classification, acoustical data, connection details, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility. Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section, 'Materials and Equipment' 1.6 SUMMARY A. Asbestos -Free Materials: some materials identified in this section are considered to be `suspected asbestos containing materials. See Section 01307 for specific product, submittal and testing requirements for these materials. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DUCTWORK AND PLENUMS A. Construction. Primary air duct construction, fittings, reinforcements, pressure and seal classifications and metal gauges shall conform to SMACNA HVAC/DCS, 1995 Edition including Addendum No. 1 1997 SMACNA Duct Construction Standards and NFPA90A. B Ducts and accessories shall not pulsate or vibrate when in operation. C. Test Ports. Provide instrument test holes with screw cap and gasket. Instrument test holes shall be attached to ducts and plenums with bolts. Seal around bolt head with duct sealant. 1 Manufacturer Ventfabrics No. 699 or approved. D Stuffing Boxes. Provide airtight stuffing boxes at all penetrations, rubber grommets, Rubbercraft manufacturer or equal. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI E. At connections to building construction, use steel angles fastened to the sheet metal by sheet metal screws, attached using anchor bolts embedded in the wall or slab, with sealant under the angle, angles 2'x2 x3116' minimum. 2.2 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. General. General. All ductwork shall be of sheet metal construction. Low pressure ductwork shall be used for the following distribution systems. 1 Supply ductwork from terminal units to outlet terminals, and all return air and exhaust air ductwork. B Pressure and Seal Classification. 1 Supply duct from terminal units: 2' Pressure Class. Seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams per Seal Class B 2. Ductwork upstream of any fire, smoke or combination fire /smoke damper conveying more than half of the total terminal airflow 4 Pressure Class. Seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams per Seal Class A. 3 Return air and exhaust: Negative 2 Pressure Class, except ductwork from last volume damper to grille may be negative 1 Pressure Class. Seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams per Seal Class B 4 All exhaust air ductwork serving isolation rooms. Negative 2' Pressure Class. Seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations per Seal Class A. 5 Seal all duct wall penetrations to the class noted above. C. Material. Galvanized steel unless indicated otherwise. 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15800 PAGE 2 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION D Seams: Comply with SMACNA construction recommendations. Do not use standing seams for ducts other than plenums. E. Transverse Joints. Transverse joints may be made with SMACNA T24 factory fabricated formed flanged mechanical joint, caulked or gasketed, installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction and installation manuals. 1 Manufacturer- Ductmate Industries, Inc. or approved. F Diagonal Creasing: Provide on all panels wider than 18 At Contractor's option, in place of diagonal creasing required for panels wider than 18 all such panels may have machine formed transverse ribbed stiffening on 12 centers, provided such stiffening accomplishes stiffness and freedom from buckling or breathing, and does not lessen airtightness at seams and joints. G. Construction: Curved elbows shall have a centerline radius not less than the width of ducts. All ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets unless specified or indicated on the drawings. H. Joint Sealant: Fire retardant, high bonding type sealer UL723/E84 Class I flame spread rating. Adhesive backed cloth or metallic furnace tape will not be acceptable. 1 Manufacturer Foster Safetee Duct Sealant 32 17' Duct Mate Industries 'Pro -Seal or approved McGill Air Seal Corp. or Mon -Eco Industries. I. Turning Vanes. Provide 90- degree non adjustable, double wall galvanized steel, finned type air turning vanes at all square duct elbows. The double wall vanes shall conform to SMACNA 1995 HVAC/DCS Fig. 2 3 and 2 -4 or at contractor's option may be factory fabricated. 1 Manufacturer Tuttle Bailey 'Ducturns, or approved. J Turning Vanes. Provide non adjustable, double wall 26 -gauge hot dipped galvanized steel, true airfoil type air turning vanes at square duct elbows. The turning vane shall have smooth- MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI rounded entry nose with extended trailing edge. Generated sound power level shall not exceed 54 decibels in band 4 at 2,000 fpm, duct size '24 x 24 1 Manufacturer. Aero/Dyne Company Model HEP 2.3 SHEETMETAL MATERIALS SECTION 15800 PAGE 3 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION A. Galvanized Steel. Steel sheets, zinc- coated (galvanized) or zinc -iron alloy coated (galvannealed) by the hot dip process, conforming ASTM A653 B Aluminum. Type 3003 -114 Comply with requirements of ASTM B209 1 Rectangular Ductwork: Aluminum ductwork shall shall comply with the requirements of low pressure galvanized steel ductwork. Thickness adjustments of aluminum, including dimension adjustments and reinforcements needed to meet the construction requirement thickness of steel ducts, shall comply with SMACNA 1995 HVAC/DCS, Article 1 12.1 'Conversion of Steel Tables to Aluminum 2. Round Ductwork: Construction of aluminum duct and fittings shall otherwise correspond in the same relationship as for steel duct. Conform to SMACNA 1995 HVAC/DCS, Table 3 -3 Aluminum Round Duct Gage Schedule Aluminum fasteners shall be used. Structural members shall be alloy 6061 T6 or galvanized steel as related in SMACNA Table 1 16 for rectangular duct. Hangers in contact with the duct shall be galvanized steel or aluminum. C. Stainless Steel. Unless indicated otherwise, type 316L stainless steel, not to exceed 0 03% carbon, conforming to ASTM A240. 2.4 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTS A. Access doors shall be suitable for the duct pressure class used. Access doors in round ducts shall be one gauge heavier than gauge of downstream duct 1 Doors shall have closed cell neoprene sponge rubber gaskets. 2. Manufacturer. United McGill Corporation Model ARB, Ruskin SMACNA Standard' Ventfabrics 'Ventlok' Air Balance Series FSA, or approved Ductmate Industries, Inc. or Kees or Nailor B Openings shall be as large as feasible in small ducts, 12 inch by 12 inch minimum where possible. C. Access sections in insulated ducts shall be double wall, insulated. D Rectangular ducts. Per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Figure 2 12. E. Round and flat oval ducts. Per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Figure 2 11 2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. General. Provide fabric -type flexible connectors between fans and ducts or casings, fans and plenums, and where ducts are of dissimilar metals, as indicated and where required. Fabric shall comply with UL Standard 214 and shall be accepted by NFPA for vibration isolation connectors in duct systems per NFPA Standard 90 B Connectors at Indoor Installations. Connectors shall be made of heavy glass fabric double coated with neoprene, weighing approximately 30 oz. per square yard. Flexible connections shall be securely fastened by zinc- coated iron cinch -type draw bonds for round ducts. For rectangular ducts, the flexible connections locked to metal collars shall be installed using normal duct construction standards and according to SMACNA 1995 HVAC/DCS 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. Connectors at Outdoor Installations. Connectors shall be same as specified for indoor installations except fabric shall be made of heavy glass fabric double- coated with Hypalon, weighing approximately 26 oz. per square yard. 1 Manufacturer Indoor installations, Ventfabrics, Inc. 'Ventglas Outdoor installations, Ventfabrics, Inc. 'Ventlon 2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCT SECTION 15800 PAGE 4 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION A. General. Flexible duct, including connectors, shall comply with UL181 Class I, and NFPA 90A and shall have acoustical performance acceptable to the A/E. Duct shall not be more than 8' long, contain a minimum net 90- degree of bends for acoustical reasons, and without intermediate joints. Installed duct shall not erode, delaminate or impart loose fibers or odors into the air stream. Internal working pressure shall be 4 'w.g. negative. 1 Manufacturer. Flexmaster U.S.A. Inc. Type 6M or approved. B Materials: Flexible duct assembly shall consist of a strong and puncture resistant polymer inner liner and a high strength duct wall, mechanically locked together with a corrosive resistant galvanized helix to form a solid performing UL 181 Class 1 flexible duct, without the use of glue or adhesives. C. Insulation and Vapor Barrier The factory- fabricated flexible duct shall have blanket -type insulation, having a C Factor of not more than 0.23 The insulation shall be sheathed with a vapor barrier having a maximum permeability of 0.05 perm per ASTM E96, Procedure A. The vapor barrier jacket on the flexible duct shall be sealed to vapor barrier on the connecting sheet metal ducts. Joints shall be airtight slip joints sealed and secured with a clamp. D Clamps: 175 -1b test 6/6 nylon locking draw band at each end. 1 Manufacturer. Panduit SLT 10-LH-L, Ideal Snaplock' or Ventlock Suretite No. 670. E. Acoustical Performance: Test reports from an independent laboratory showing that flexible ducts meet the performance specifications stated below If manufacturer other than that specified is submitted, provide acoustical performance ratings for each size flexible duct. Acoustical performance testing shall be performed by an independent laboratory The specified insertion loss and radiated noise reduction of flexible duct should be met when tested with a 10 foot length of straight duct at 2,500 feet per minute velocity F G. n 2007 Mahlum Architects INSERTION LOSS (dB) Duct Dia. Air Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) In Velocity 1 125 1 250 1 500 1000 1 2000 1 4000 6 1 2500 fpm 1 7 1 31 1 40 38 1 40 1 27 8 1 2500 fpm 1 12 1 29 1 36 1 35 1 38 1 22 12 1 2500 fpm 1 21 1 28 1 29 1 33 1 26 1 12 RADIATED NOISE REDUCTION (dB) Duct Dia. Air Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) In Velocity 1 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 4000 6 1 2500 fpm 1 5 1 8 1 7 1 8 1 11 1 15 8 1 2500 fpm 1 10 1 7 1 7 1 8 1 10 1 13 12 1 2500 fpm 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 5 1 9 1 13 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.7 FIRE DAMPERS SECTION 15800 PAGE 5 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION A. Provide all fusible link fire dampers, each with frame and through -wall or through -floor sleeve, at locations shown on the drawings. 1 Dampers shall have not less than 90% free area for rectangular ducts and 100% for round and flat oval ducts. Manufacturer shall coordinate with Contractor as to whether the height and/or width will be increased beyond the duct size to meet this requirement. B Fire Dampers in Rectangular Ducts: Factory- fabricated dampers, in all cases, not Contractor fabricated, metal curtain folding -blade type. No horizontal damper mullions or head boxes allowed across ducts. Provide lifting accessories and attachments where curtain blades exceed 40 lbs. weight. All dampers shall be UL Classified, with UL label for 1 1/2 hr fire resistance rating in accordance with UL Standard 555 and California State Fire Marshal Listing A3225.206:014 1 Manufacturer- Air Balance, Inc. Model 119B or approved Airstream, Ruskin, American Warming and Ventilating, Cesco, Vent Products, or Greenheck. C. Fire Dampers in Round and Flat Oval Low Pressure (2' w g. maximum) Ducts. shall be factory fabricated, metal curtain folding -blade type. No horizontal damper mullions or head boxes allowed across ducts. Damper shall be provided with collar for connection to duct and breakaway connection at housing. All dampers shall be UL Classified, with UL label for 1 1/2 hr fire resistance rating in accordance with UL Standard 555 and California State Fire Marshal Listing A3225.206:014 1 Manufacturer Air Balance, Inc. Model 119B or approved Airstream, Ruskin, American Warming and Ventilating, Cesco, Vent Products, or Greenheck. D Construction. Comply with construction requirements in local building code and NFPA 90A. Made of steel with replaceable UL Listed 165 °F fusible link. Blades 22 -gauge steel with interlocking joints. E. Sleeves or casings shall extend through wall or slab- shall be made by Contractor if not integral with dampers as factory made; 10 -gauge minimum steel, with attachment lugs or straps; anchored to wall or slab independently of ductwork; slip fit to ducts, tightly fitted and sealed with mastic as specified for sealing of joints between filters and fan, riveted on 6 centers. 2.8 VOLUME DAMPERS AND QUADRANTS, LOW PRESSURE DUCTS A. General. Provide dampers and quadrants in ductwork as required to balance the systems to produce the air quantities shown. B Quantity and General Location: Dampers are not always shown. For pricing purposes, assume one damper for every grille, register and diffuser (GRD) that does not have an integral damper Additional dampers will be required at branch ducts serving multiple GRDs. Provide a damper in the duct to each supply and exhaust opening, also in each branch duct where the pressure loss is lower than other branch ducts leading from the same trunk duct; elsewhere as shown. C. Placement of Dampers. At a point where the duct is accessible, if possible; axis of the blade the long dimension, as far from the outlet as possible. D Acoustic Performance: Dampers shall be free from any sharp edges that would produce excessive turbulence, which would prevent obtaining the acoustic performance in the rooms served, as specified hereinbefore. E. Edges of Blades: Both leading and leaving edges hemmed, side edges flanged 1/2 placed so air strikes the smooth face. F Damper Blades: For ducts smaller than 10' maximum cross section, 24- gauge; 11 to 30' 22 gauge; larger than 30' 20- gauge; in ducts wider than 12 multiple blade, maximum blade 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15800 PAGE 6 of 20 AIR DISTREBUTION width 12 arranged so that adjacent blades rotate in alternate directions; where length exceeds 30' use a 3/8' square rod stem fitted in a crease in the blade. G Quadrants, in General. 1 Maximum Dimension of Blades 10' or Less. Quadrant with dial regulator and locking nuts, round end spring-in bearing, and square end damper bearing. a. Manufacturer Duro -Dyne Series KS or approved Ruskin, Nailor or Ventfabrics. 2. Maximum Dimension of Blades 11 to 20' Quadrant with dial regulator and locking nut, round end spring -in bearing, and square end bearing. a. Manufacturer- Duro -Dyne Series KSR or approved Ruskin, Nailor or Ventfabrics. 3 Maximum Dimension of Blades over 20' Locking quadrant and 1/2 square rod with damper bearings. a. Manufacturer- Duro -Dyne Series KS -12 Shaft -Loc or approved Ruskin, Ventfabrics or Nailor H. Quadrants for Dampers in Ducts Concealed Behind Walls and Above Non Removable Ceilings: 1 Direct Controlled Dampers. Where possible, use direct controlled dampers. Damper regulator shall be cast into a box for flush mounting in ceilings. Cover telescopes into base to allow for expansion. Cover shall be secured by two screws to facilitate removal for adjustment of the damper The regulator shall be made to accommodate 3/8 and 1/2 square rod. The cover shall be prime coated for field painting. a. Manufacturer. Ventfabrics No. 666, Young Regulator No. 301 or approved Ruskin or Nailor 2. Cable Controlled Dampers: Balancing dampers in ducts concealed behind walls and non removable ceilings shall be provided with cable controls if access to the regulator cannot be immediately adjacent to the damper Damper controller and cable shall be concealed above the ceiling. Cable shall consist of Bowden cable 0.054 stainless steel control wire encapsulated in 1/16 flexible galvanized spiral wire sheath. Control kit shall consist of 2 5/8 diameter die cast aluminum housing with 3 diameter cover prime coated for field painting, and 14 -gauge steel rack and pinion gear drive converting rotary motion to push pull motion. Control kit shall be imbedded in the ceiling flush with the finished surface. a. Manufacturer Control kit shall be manually operated using Young Regulator Model 030 -12 wrench. b Manufacturer Control kit shall be Young Regulator Model 270 -301 I. Damper Positions. Contractor shall set and lock all dampers in the 'Full Open position prior to balancing work. See additional requirements specified in Section 15950, 'Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 2.9 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS: A. Provide backdraft dampers at all fans exhausting to atmosphere that are not specified to have automatic dampers and elsewhere as shown. 1 Manufacturer Ruskin Model CBD6 or approved Tamco, American Warming Ventilating, Air Balance, Inc. Cesco, Greenheck, Pacific Air Products, or Vent Products, Inc. B Access panel shall be provided in ductwork as required to access and adjust counterbalances. C. Backdraft dampers shall be adjustable, counterbalanced low leakage type backdraft damper with extruded vinyl seals. D Frame shall be 0.125 thick extruded aluminum with 0.070' thick aluminum blades, molded synthetic bearings, 1/2 tie bar linkage, mill finish assembly 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI E. Counterbalances shall be on rear of blades for weather resistance. SECTION 15800 PAGE 7 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION F Damper shall withstand 3 water gauge pressure differential with 17.5 cfm/sf leakage measured on 24 wide damper 2.10 ACOUSTICAL LINING RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK NON FIBROUS A. General Provide acoustical lining in low- pressure ductwork at locations shown. 1 Manufacturer Armacell AP /Armaflex SA Duct Liner B Acoustical Lining: Provide the closed -cell elastomeric flexible duct liner 1 thickness unless otherwise shown. Liner shall cover all four interior surfaces of duct. C. Liner material shall meet the requirements as defined in ASTM C534 specification for preformed elastomeric cellular thermal insulation in sheet or tubular form. D Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 latest revision. E. Materials shall have a minimum thermal conductivity of 0.27 Btu- in. /h -ft °F at a 75 °F mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518, latest revision. F Materials shall have a minimum water vapor transmission of 0.08 perm- inches when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 Procedure A, latest revision. G. Acoustical Properties. The material shall be tested by an independent testing laboratory to determine the sound absorption coefficient in accordance with ASTM C 423 with ASTM E 795 Type A mounting. The sound absorption coefficients shall meet or exceed the following values: 2007 Mahlum Architects Octave Band Center Frequency Hz I Thickness I 125 I 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 4000 1 I 0 00 I 0.08 1 0.32 I 0.55 I 0.23 1 0.21 H. Submittals. Catalog cuts and data sheets shall be submitted in accordance with applicable requirements in Section 15010, 'Mechanical Work General Submittals shall include test reports from an acoustical laboratory or testing agency verifying that the material meets the acoustical specifications stated herein. I. Duct Sizes: Refer to clear dimensions inside lining. Oversize duct accordingly 2.11 AIR TERMINAL UNITS A. Terminal Unit Types: 1 Single Duct Terminal Units: Furnish and install the single duct variable -air volume and constant volume terminal units as scheduled or indicated on the drawings. Terminals shall be equipped with heating coils a. Manufacturer. Titus Model ESV Envirotech Model SDR, E.H. Price SPV Trane VCC, VCWE or VCEE, Nailor Series 3001 or Metalaire Series 400 TH. B General Requirements. 1 The entire terminal unit shall be designed and built as a single unit including motor and fan assembly (if applicable), primary air damper assembly, water heating coils, and accessories as shipped. 2. Unit shall be shipped as a complete assembly requiring no field assembly (including accessories) 3 All electrical components shall be UL listed and installed in accordance with the UL Standard 1995 Electrical connection shall be single point. All electrical components, MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15800 PAGE 8 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION including low voltage controls, shall be mounted in sheet metal control enclosures. The entire terminal shall be ETL listed as a complete assembly C. Terminal Casing: 1 The casing discharge shall be slip and drive for attachment to metal ductwork. Casing shall be provided with hanger brackets for rods or straps as directed by the Seismic Engineer refer to Section 15070 Unit casing shall have bottom access door that allows servicing of unit without disturbing duct connections. 3 Unit casing shall have round duct collar for the primary air connection and a rectangular discharge air connection suitable for flanged duct connection. 4 All control components shall be factory installed and mounted. D Terminal Lining: 1 Fiber -Free Liner The terminal casing shall be minimum 20 -gauge galvanized steel. Internal liner shall be 1 -inch minimum thickness, 1.5- lbs. /ft.3 density polymer foam insulation. Exposed fiberglass is not acceptable. Insulation shall comply with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. The insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the unit casing. The casing discharge shall be slip and drive for attachment to metal ductwork. The casing shall be designed for hanging by metal straps. a. Manufacturer Titus 'Fibre -Free or approved. E. Sound Performance: 1 Manufacturer shall submit sound power levels for each size terminal unit. Provide radiated and discharge NC level based on 1 -inch inlet static pressure. Sound performance shall be ARI certified. The radiated and discharge path attenuation function shall be based upon factors found in ARI Standard 885 -98. No additional attenuation factors shall be deducted from the sound power F Primary Air Damper Assembly The primary air damper assembly shall be heavy gauge steel with shaft rotating in Delrin self lubricating bearings. Nylon bearings are not acceptable. Shaft shall be clearly marked on the end to indicate damper position. Stickers or other removable markings are not acceptable. The damper shall incorporate a mechanical stop to prevent over stroking, and a synthetic seal to limit close -off leakage to the maximum values shown below- Inlet I Damper Leakage CFM Size 1 1.5' OPs 1 3.0' APs 1 6.0' OPs 1 I 4 5 1 7 8 4 5 1 7 10 4 5 1 7 1 12 4 5 1 7 14 4 6 1 8 16 5 7 1 9 G. Digital Controls. 1 The terminals shall be equipped with pressure independent direct digital controller furnished by the control contractor and mounted by the terminal unit manufacturer The control contractor shall provide data sheets on all components to be mounted, indicating component dimensions, mounting hardware, and methods, as well as wiring and piping diagrams for each application identified by unit tag per the schedule on the drawings, to the terminal manufacturer 2007 Mahlum Architects 2. The terminal manufacturer shall provide pneumatic velocity sensors. The sensor shall be multi -point center averaging type, with a minimum of four measuring ports parallel to the take -off point from the sensor Sensors with measuring ports in series are not acceptable. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15800 PAGE 9 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION The sensor must provide a minimum differential pressure signal of 0 03' w.g. at an inlet velocity of 500 fpm. H. Hot Water Heating Coils: Hot water heating coils shall be enclosed in a minimum 20 -gauge galvanized steel casing, with flanged construction for attachment to metal ductwork. Coils shall be factory installed on the terminal. Fins shall be rippled and corrugated heavy gauge aluminum, mechanically bonded to the tubes. Tubes shall be copper with minimum wall thickness of 0.016' with male solder header connections. Coils shall be leak- tested to 300 -psi, with minimum burst pressure of 2000 -psi at ambient temperature. Coils shall be provided with a minimum of two rows with circuits sized as required to provide heating capacity and performance as scheduled on the drawings. Coil performance data shall be based on tests run in accordance with ARI Standard 410. I. Attenuation. Where indicated, a separate sound attenuator (specified elsewhere in this section) shall be field- installed downstream of the terminal unit. Coordinate sizes and provide appropriate transitions from terminal outlet to attenuator inlet. 2.12 DIFFUSERS A. General. Diffusers shall be sizes and mounting types shown on drawings and as scheduled. B Diffusers shall be provided with earthquake tabs where required by code. Whether required by code or not, all diffusers shall be provided with earthquake tabs if the weight of the assembly (including all accessories and the plenum above) is more than fifteen (15) pounds unless the assembly is rigidly attached to, and can be fully supported from, a fully- supported sheet -metal duct or plenum. C. Square Face Modular Core Adjustable Diffusers. 1 1 2, 3 or 4 -way adjustable discharge pattern, steel construction, square or rectangular neck. 2. Back pan shall be one -piece stamped heavy gauge steel. Diffuser neck shall have 1 -inch minimum depth to facilitate duct connection. 3 Diffuser core shall consist of fixed louver directional modules, which can be easily repositioned without tools in the field for 1 2, 3 or 4 -way discharge. Each module shall be easily removable to adjust the dampers in neck of the diffuser a. Manufacturer Titus Model MCD Anemostat RMD Krueger 1240, Price MCD or approved Metalaire. Plenums for Linear Bar Grilles and Returns. 1 Plenums shall be same manufacturer as linear diffuser manufacturer designed specifically for field attachment of the specified diffusers. Plenums shall be galvanized steel construction and shall included a factory drawn (not welded) side inlet to fit bar grille of width as scheduled. Standard nominal length shall as scheduled. 2. Where specified, enhanced spread performance plenums shall be provided. Plenums shall have internal baffles to maximize air diffusion by shortening the throw and widening the spread of the discharge air 3 Plenums shall be internally insulated with 1 -inch thickness fiber free lining when required by schedule or as indicated. Refer to acoustical lining specified earlier in this section for acceptable liners. 4 Field mounted inlet dampers, provided by plenum/diffuser manufacturer shall be furnished when specified or scheduled. 5 Manufacturer. a. Insulated plenums. To the extent that insulation meets requirements specified for duct acoustic lining; Titus MPI, Anemostat SLAD -A, Carnes CXPA R, Krueger TBSI 1900, Price SDBI or approved Metalaire. E. Linear Bar Diffusers: 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15800 PAGE 10 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION 1 The diffuser core shall have extruded aluminum bars locked into a heavy extruded aluminum frame. The deflection bars shall be fixed and parallel to the long dimension. The core shall have support bars spaced at 9 inches maximum, parallel to the short dimension. 2. Diffusers shall be standard in lengths of 6 feet. Lengths greater than 6 feet shall be furnished in multiple sections and shall be joined together end -to -end with alignment strips or pins to form a continuous appearance. All alignment components shall be provided by the manufacturer 3 Heavy gauge extruded aluminum end borders and mitered corners shall be provided as required to close off the ends of the diffusers. 4 Dampers shall be opposed blade type constructed of heavy gauge steel aluminum. Damper shall be operable from the face of the diffuser 5 Blank -offs constructed of sheet metal, painted black, shall be provided where indicated. 6. Finish. Color anodized, anodic hard -coat, color shall match adjacent surfaces and shall be approved by the Architect 7 Linear bar diffusers shall have 1/2 Spacing, 1/4 Bars, 0° Deflection. a. Titus Model CT 540, Anemostat ALI Carnes C30, Krueger 1500, Price LBP25B or approved Metalaire. 2.13 SOUND ATTENUATORS (SILENCERS) A. General. Provide the factory assembled silencers of the size and type specified on the drawings. Install in the exact location as shown on the drawings. Manufacturer Industrial Acoustics Company Vibro- Acoustics, Ruskin Sound Control, or Dynasonics. B Construction. Construction of silencers shall be of incombustible materials. A minimum of 22 gauge sheet steel shell shall be used for rectangular silencers. Interior partitions shall be perforated steel of no less than 26- gauge. The silencer casings shall be a minimum of 22 -gauge solid galvanized. Inorganic fill material shall be vermin- and moisture proof, and of sufficient density to obtain the specified acoustical performance. C. Media Protection: The acoustic media shall be completely wrapped with Tedlar film to help prevent shedding, erosion and impregnation of the glass fiber The wrapped acoustic media shall be separated from the perforated metal by a factory installed V2 thick acoustically transparent spacer The spacer shall be flame retardant and erosion resistant. A mesh, screen or corrugated perforated liner will not be acceptable as a substitute for the specified spacer D Performance: Silencers shall be tested by an independent laboratory for dynamic insertion loss, self noise, and pressure drop in accordance with ASTM E477 99 Specifications for all three performance characteristics must be met before a given silencer may be installed on the job. 1 Dynamic Insertion Loss: The dynamic insertion loss of the silencers must meet or exceed the values shown in the sound trap schedule in each octave band when tested at the specified air face velocity 2. Self Noise: The self noise regenerated by the silencers due to air flow shall be less than or equal to the values shown in the sound trap schedule. The octave band sound power levels shall be based on a silencer face area of 4 square feet for rectangular silencers and 3 square feet for circular silencers. 3 Pressure Drop The loss in static pressure due to the presence of the sound trap shall not exceed the values shown in the silencer schedule for a 2000' /minute face velocity E. Submittals: The following information shall be submitted to the A/E at a time specified in the general specifications. 1 Catalog cuts and data sheets specifying the manufacturer and model number for each of the silencer types specified on the drawings and/or in the silencer schedule. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI F Silencer Schedule 1 Notes: 2.14 DIFFUSER ACCESSORIES A. Volume Dampers. 1 Opposed Blade Dampers for Round Necks: Gang operated opposed blades, for round necks, in multiple sets of blades, easily adjustable from face of diffuser a. Manufacturer- Titus Model AG -75 Krueger R10, Carnes KXRA, or Price VCR7 2. Butterfly Dampers for Round Necks. a. Manufacturer Titus Model AG -85 Krueger R12, or Price VCR8. 3 Opposed Blade Steel Dampers for Square or Rectangular Necks: a. Manufacturer- Titus Model AG -35 Krueger OBD Anemostat DOB Carnes RXEA, or Price VCS3 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15800 PAGE 11 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION 2. Test reports from an independent laboratory showing that all silencers meet the performance specifications stated herein. DYNAMIC INSERTION LOSS (dB) Silencer Air Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Type Velocity2 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 3S +1000fpm 7 12 16 28 35 35 28 17 3S 1000 fpm 7 13 17 30 36 33 26 13 5S +1000 fpm 8 18 24 40 45 46 41 26 5S 1000 fpm 11 21 25 43 47 44 39 22 12CS +2000 fpm 4 9 16 30 34 37 33 27 12CS 2000 fpm 7 10 19 31 34 35 32 26 24CS +2000 fpm 5 11 18 26 36 37 24 20 24CS 2000 fpm 8 11 18 34 40 35 22 13 36CS +2000 fpm 9 14 19 35 36 31 23 17 36CS 2000 fpm 10 15 20 35 37 29 21 12 SELF NOISE (dB re 10 -12 watt) Silencer Air Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Type Velocity2 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 3S 1000 fpm 54 51 50 51 54 56 52 40 3S +1000fpm 55 49 49 47 46 49 42 32 SS 1000 fpm 54 51 50 51 54 56 52 40 5S +1000fpm 55 49 49 47 46 49 42 32 CS 2000 fpm 50 49 51 49 46 47 45 39 CS +2000 fpm 56 54 50 50 50 50 41 31 PRESSURE DROP (inches w g.) Silencer Air Pressure Type 1 Velocity Drop 3S 1000 fpm 10 5S 1000 fpm 15 CS 2000 fpm 40 2. Silencer types 3S and 5S based on IAC rectangular trap, standard pressure drop design. CS type based on IAC tubular design silencer standard pressure drop. 3 Negative air velocity implies sound propagation in the direction opposite air flow MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15800 PAGE 12 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION B Equalizing Grids: Provide for each diffuser with individually adjustable blades, installed with top flush with bottom of supply duct, beaded edge facing air stream, blades at 90° angle to the air stream. 1 Manufacturer a. Grids for round neck: Titus Model EG, Krueger RSGI5 Anemostat ED Carnes KXYA, or Price EQ b Grids for square or rectangular necks: Titus Model EGS or EGL, Krueger SSG, Anemostat DED Carnes KXEA, or Price EGL. C. Volume Extractors: Volume extractors shall be gang operated parallel vanes, fully adjustable from open to closed. The vane shall be type that minimizes pressure and turbulence and shall provide uniform air distribution across the stub duct or diffuser neck. 1 Manufacturer a. Volume extractors with vanes at 1 spacing: Titus Model AG -45 Krueger EX8, Anemostat DT Carnes NA, or Price AEI b Volume extractors with vanes at 2 spacing: Titus Model AG -225 Krueger EX88, Anemostat DT2, Carnes KXGA, or Price AE2. D Blanked -Off Sections. Blank off quadrants of the diffuser neck where shown and wherever else required to prevent downdrafts from adjacent light fixtures, columns, walls, etc. Provide at locations as required by the air balancing technicians. Blank -off material shall be galvanized sheet metal, painted black. 2.15 GRILLES AND REGISTERS A. General. Grilles and registers shall be sizes and mounting types shown on drawings and as scheduled. B Steel Supply Grilles (airfoil blades) 1 Grilles shall be double deflection type unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Exposed deflection blades shall be horizontal when viewed from the room (typically the first dimension indicated is the horizontal dimension) 2. Grilles shall be steel construction with a 1 1/4 wide border on all sides, having a minimum thickness of 20- gauge. Screw holes shall be countersunk. Corners shall be welded with full penetration resistance welds with a reinforcing steel patch for extra strength. 3 Deflection blades shall be constructed of heavy -duty aluminum, contoured to an airfoil shape, spaced on 3/4 centers. Hollow blades are not acceptable; blades must be solid. Blades shall extend completely through the side frame on each side to provide stability throughout the complete CFM operating range of the grille. Blades shall be individually adjustable without loosening or rattling, and shall be held in place with tension wire. 4 Manufacturer a. Double deflection, blades parallel to short dimension. Titus Model 272RS or Model 272 RL as scheduled or approved Price 520L. C. Wall- mounted Steel Return and Exhaust Grilles (Airfoil Blades) 1 Grilles shall have fixed deflection blades which shall be horizontal when viewed from the room (typically the first dimension indicated is the horizontal dimension). 2. Grilles shall be steel construction with a 1 1/4 wide border on all sides, having a minimum thickness of 20- gauge. Screw holes shall be countersunk. Corners shall be welded with full penetration resistance welds with a reinforcing steel patch for extra strength. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15800 PAGE 13 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION 3 Blades shall have a formed curvature, laboratory tested and certified for performance. Blades shall be 20 -gauge minimum construction. Fixed deflection angle shall be 30° as indicated or specified. 4 Where indicated, integral opposed blade dampers shall be provided, constructed of heavy gauge steel. Damper shall be operable from the face of the grille. 5 Borders of grilles shall be suitable for installation surface and materials. Border type shall be surface mount or otherwise as indicated or required for the associated surface. Verify border requirements. 6. Manufacturer D Ceiling- mounted Steel Return and Exhaust Grilles (Airfoil) 1 Except as noted below grilles shall be the same as specified for wall mounted grilles. 2. Grilles in lay -in ceilings shall not have screw holes in the border 3 Grilles shall have fixed deflection blades, which shall be perpendicular to the line of sight when viewed from the center of the room. 4 Borders of grilles shall be suitable for installation surface and materials. Border type shall be surface mount, snap -in, lay -in, spline, or channel frame type as indicated or required for the associated surface. Verify border requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION a. 30° Deflection, 1/2 Spacing, Blades Parallel to Long Dimension. Titus Model 23RL, or approved Price. 3.1 INSTALLATION OF DUCTS A. Installation of ductwork shall comply with provisions of Section 15010 Mechanical Work General and Section 15050, Basic Materials and methods, particularly regarding coordination with other trades and work in existing buildings. B Fabricate and install ductwork and accessories in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. 1 Drawings show the general layout of ductwork and accessories but do not show all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect ducts to equipment, terminal units, diffusers, grilles, etc. and to coordinate with other trades. Fabricate ductwork based on field measurements. Provide necessary fittings and offsets at no additional cost to the owner Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories on ceiling grid. Duct sizes on the drawings are inside dimensions, which shall be altered by the contractor to other dimensions with the same air handling characteristics (not less than same free area and pressure drop) where necessary to avoid interferences and clearance difficulties. 2. Comply with the requirements of Section 15010, 'Transitions and Offsets Beyond the Scope of Work' 3 Provide Duct transitions, offsets and connections to dampers, coils, and other equipment in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. When an obstruction cannot be avoided and must be taken in by the duct, comply with SMACNA Fig, 2 -8, 'Obstructions Repair galvanized areas with galvanizing repair compound. 4 Provide bolted construction and tie -rod reinforcement in accordance with SMACNA Standards. 02007 Mahlum Architects 5 Construct casings, plenums, eliminators, and pipe penetrations in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Chapter 6. Install plenum access doors to swing against air pressure so that pressure helps to maintain a tight seal. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15800 PAGE 14 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION C. Access Doors. Access doors are required but not typically shown on the drawings. Provide access doors, sized and located for maintenance work, upstream, in the following locations. 1 Each duct mounted coil. 2. Each fire damper (for link service) combination fire /smoke damper backdraft damper and automatic control damper 3 Each duct mounted smoke detector 4 For cleaning operating room supply air duct and hood exhaust duct, locate access doors at 20 -foot intervals and at each change in duct direction. D Smoke and Fire Dampers. Install fire dampers, smoke dampers, and fire /smoke dampers in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to conform to the installation used for the rating test. E. Duct Penetrations: Openings around duct penetrations of floors and fire rated partitions shall be sealed with fire stop material. See Section 15050, 'Basic Materials and Methods F Flexible Duct Installation: Refer to SMACNA Standards, Chapter 3 Ducts shall be continuous, single piece not over 8 feet long, as straight and short as feasible, adequately supported. Centerline radius of bends shall be not less than two duct diameters. Clamp as specified, if not specified per SMACNA with one clamp on the core duct and one on the insulation jacket. Flexible ducts shall not penetrate floors, or any chase or partition designated as a fire or smoke barrier including corridor penetrations fire rated one hour or two hour Support ducts per SMACNA Standards. G. Where diffusers, registers and grilles cannot be installed to avoid seeing inside the duct, paint the inside of the duct or can with flat black paint to reduce visibility H. Air Flow Measuring Devices. Install units with minimum straight run distances, upstream and downstream as recommended by the manufacturer Protection and Cleaning: Adequately protect equipment and materials against physical damage. Place equipment in first class operating condition, or return to source of supply for repair or replacement, as determined by A/E. Protect equipment and ducts during construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside and clean both inside and outside before operation and painting. When new ducts are connected to existing ductwork, clean both new and existing ductwork by mopping and vacuum cleaning inside and outside before operation. 3.2 HANGERS FOR DUCTWORK' A. General. Provide hangers, supports and anchor bolts for all ducts and equipment. Comply with the requirements of the seismic controls engineer (see Section 15070), SMACNA and International Mechanical Code. Duct sizes referred to in following paragraphs refer to maximum external cross section dimension at location of hangers. B Seismic Bracing Forces: The hangers sizing and spacing listed below applies where seismic bracing is not placed. More substantial hangers will be needed at many locations (than listed in the following paragraphs) to accommodate seismic bracing. Again, comply with the requirements of the seismic controls engineer (see Section 15070) so that hangers at bracing locations will work effectively with additional seismic imposed loads. C. Horizontal Round Ducts: 1 Ducts 10' and Smaller 1 wide strap, same gage as duct, secured to duct and extended to slab. 2. Ducts 11 Through 20' 1 wide strap, same gage as duct, tied to 1 galvanized steel band around duct and extended to slab 02007 Mahlum Architects 3 Ducts over 20' Use trapeze -type supports. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 4 Spacing: 10' -0' center maximum, additional hangers at equipment. D Horizontal Rectangular Ducts. 1 Ducts 24 and Smaller 1 wide 18 -gauge strap secured to top side and bottom of duct and extended to slab 2. Ducts 25 Through 30' 1 wide by 1/8' strap, secured to top side and bottom of duct and extended to slab. 3 Ducts over 30' Use trapeze -type supports. 4 Spacing: 10' -0' center maximum, additional hangers at equipment. E. Trapeze Type Supports for Horizontal Ducts. 1 Ducts 30' and Smaller 1 1/2 x 1 1 /2 "x 1/8' horizontal support angles. Hangers to be 1/4 round rod or 1 x 1 x 1/8' angle. 2. Ducts 30' Through 42 2 x 2'x 1/8 horizontal support angles. Hangers to be 1/4 round rod or 1 x 1 x 1/8' angle. 3 Ducts 42 Through 54 2' x 2 "x 1/8' horizontal support angles. Hangers to be 5/16' round rod or 1 x 1 x 1/8' angle. 4 Ducts 55 Through 78 2' x 2 "x 1/8 horizontal support angles. Hangers to be 3/8 round rod or 1 x 1 x 1/8' angle. 5 Ducts over 78 Obtain A/E approval for duct supports. 6. Spacing: 8' -0' center maximum, additional hangers at equipment. F Vertical Ducts: 1 Ducts 30' and Smaller 1 xl x 1/8 angle. 2. Ducts 31 Through 42' 11/8' x 11/8 x 1/8' angle. 3 Ducts 43 Through 54 11/2 x 11/2 x 1/8' angle. 4 Ducts over 54 2' x 2 x 1/8 angle. 5 Spacing: 12' -0' center maximum, additional hangers at equipment. G Building Attachments: Refer to Sections 15050 and 15070. H. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all- thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc chromate primer after installation. I. Hangers Supporting Stainless Steel Ducts: Type 304 stainless steel, same gauge as for galvanized sheet metal ducts. J Duct Attachments Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self- tapping metal screws, compatible with duct materials. This does not apply to stainless steel ducts. K. Spring -Type Vibration Isolators: Refer to Section 15070 for requirements for vibration isolators at duct hangers. Install vibration isolators as directed. L. Non Metallic Flexible Ducts: 1 Provide 2' wide sheet metal or Saddle -Strap non metallic strap hangers maximum 4 feet on center 2. Maximum permissible sag is 1/2 per foot of spacing. 3 Hangers shall be adequately attached to the building structure. Do not attach hangers to piping, ducts or conduit. M. Support of Constant Volume and Variable Volume Units: Rod hangers to inserts in slab- minimum four per unit. 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15800 PAGE 15 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.3 SOUND ATTENUATORS 3.6 INSTALLATION OF AIR TERMINAL UNITS 0 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15800 PAGE 16 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION A. The sound attenuators shall, be installed by the contractor Where required, duct transitions shall be provided by the contractor B The sound attenuators shall be installed by the contractor downstream of the terminal units. Duct transitions, conforming to standards, shall be provided by the contractor C. Sound attenuators installed in a bank of modules shall be sealed together at each end to prevent leaks. Sealing shall be high- pressure duct sealant or method as recommended by the manufacturer D The exterior of sound attenuators and connecting duct transitions shall be insulated same as specified for ducts. Insulation is specified in Section 15080, 'Mechanical Insulation. 3.4 INSTALLATION —FIRE DAMPERS, SMOKE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Inspect areas to receive dampers. Notify A/E of conditions that would adversely affect the installation or subsequent utilization of the dampers. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B Dampers must be accessible to allow inspection, adjustment, and replacement of components. The installing contractor shall furnish access doors in ductwork or plenums to provide this access for inspection, repair and cleaning. C. The fire dampers combination fire /smoke dampers are specified to have not less than 90% free area. Provide suitable duct transitions to accommodate damper collar size. Duct transitions shall comply with SMACNA 1995 HVAC/DCS D Install bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly weight and to hold against system pressure. Install bracing as needed. E. Contractor shall locate dampers on as -built drawings. 3.5 INSTALLATION DEVICES FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Motorized Dampers. Install all motorized dampers furnished by control contractor Coordinate best location prior to ductwork fabrication and provide damper- manufacturer recommended straight duct upstream and downstream. Dampers in ductwork and in plenums shall be provided with sheet metal closures all around the dampers frame, including mullions. Seal perimeter of damper frame closures with fire- retardant mastic for airtight closure. Construction and airtightness must be suitable for duct pressure class used. Multiple damper sections shall be bolted together and reinforced at joints with steel angles or channel mullions. B Smoke Detectors. Install all smoke detectors furnished by the control contractor or by Division 16. Review smoke detector submittals and advise manufacturer of anticipated air velocity range. Coordinate best location prior to ductwork fabrication and provide detector manufacturer recommended straight duct upstream and downstream. Provide adequate clearance for service and removal. A. Installation of Air Terminal Units. Installation shall conform to equipment manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Equipment shall be installed, leveled, and located so that working clearance is available under overhead lines and so that working space is available for all necessary servicing. Maintain manufacturer's minimum clearances for servicing. Electric isolation shall be provided between dissimilar metals for the purpose of minimizing galvanic corrosion. For seismic restraint requirements, see Section 15070 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Identification: Each terminal unit shall be identified in accordance with the identification system indicated on the schedule or drawings. Identification on unit shall be readable from the floor through the primary service access opening. 3.7 INSTALLATION DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES A. Diffusers and Grilles. Install in accordance with the details and notes indicated and the recommendations and printed instructions of the manufacturer for each item. B Frames and Borders. 1 Diffusers and grilles shall have border or margins for tight fit to ceilings for optimum ceiling appearance, designed to cover ceiling openings and minimize dirt development on ceiling. All diffusers and grilles shall be provided with duct rings secured to diffuser or grille outer shell with concealed fasteners. 2. Square Diffusers and Grilles for Exposed 'Tee Grid Ceilings. Square diffusers and grilles that fit well within the framing grid shall be flanged. Where dimension corresponds to the grid dimension, diffuser or grille shall be the same pattern as specified above except margins shall be 5/8 wide with outside dimensions for 'lay -in installation in the standard tee spacing required by the architectural drawings. C. Location Coordination: Diffusers and grilles are shown in their approximate desired location, but exact location must be compatible with the ceiling system, lighting fixtures, speakers, etc. Coordinate the diffuser and grille locations with the other trades prior to the completion of the contractor s coordination plans. B Ceiling Grille Orientation. Return and exhaust grilles and registers shall be installed in ceilings such that the blade angle blocks line -of -sight into the duct from the center of the room. If the best orientation still allows the ductwork interior to be seen through the grille from any point in the room that is more than 3 feet from a wall, the visible portion of the interior shall be painted with flat -black paint. E. Structural Supports: When very large diffusers are installed, sufficient structural support shall be provided to prevent sagging or distortion of the unit. Provide seismic restraints to prevent diffuser from being dislodged from the ceiling. F Where diffuser and ceiling grille assemblies that weigh more than 15 pounds (and less when required by code), they shall be fully supported independent of a lay -in ceiling grid. G. Throw Direction: Set throw direction at all linear diffusers and modular core diffusers. In general, air shall be directed away from adjacent walls, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Request A/E direction if proper arrangement is not readily apparent. 3.8 INSTALLATION AIR FILTERS A. General. Air filters, including filter housing and frames, shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B Time of Media Installation. Utilize temporary high efficiency filters during testing, balancing and commissioning to keep all systems clean. Provide temporary obstructions as needed to simulate dirty filter conditions. A complete set of new filters shall be provided no more than 4 days prior to owner's occupancy of building. 3.9 TESTING A. Air Supply and Distribution Systems. The air supply and distribution system and its components shall be given an operational test, as directed in Section 15975 B Leakage Testing of Ductwork: Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA 'HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual and prepare test reports. 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15800 PAGE 17 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.10 DUCT CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS SECTION 15800 PAGE 18 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION 1 Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. 2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days advance notice for testing. 3 Maximum Allowable Leakage. Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round ducts. Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than and equal to 2 -inch w g. (500 Pa) (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for pressure classes from 2 inch to 10 -inch w g. (500 to 2500 Pa) 4 Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or Less than minimum allowable. C. Smoke Dampers and Combination Fire Smoke Damper Tests. After installation, all combination fire smoke dampers and all associated controls (Division 15 and 16) shall be tested to prove correct control, installation and that damper blades move freely within the confines of the damper frame and do not slip on their shafts. Contractor shall submit a signed statement certifying all dampers to be operational. A. General. Prior to air balancing, thoroughly clean all ductwork in all systems from exterior louvers to room outlets, including plenums, fans, coils, variable volume terminals, constant volume terminals, air handlers, etc. B Mark position of dampers and air directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform cleaning before balancing. C. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection. 1 Create other openings to comply with duct standards. 2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3 Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process. D Vent vacuuming systems to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. E. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1 Air outlets and inlets (diffusers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply return, and exhaust fans including fan housings plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3 Air handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section. Condensate drain pans, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4 Coils and related components. 5 Return -air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. F Mechanical Cleaning Methodology 1 Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2. Use vacuum collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3 Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts or duct accessories. 4 Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials, comb and straighten fins. G. Cleanliness Verification. 1 Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants. 2. Where contaminants are discovered, re -clean and re- inspect ducts. 3.11 DUCT CLEANING EXISTING SYSTEMS SECTION 15800 PAGE 19 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION A. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection. 1 Use existing service openings where possible. 2. Create other openings to comply with duct standards. 3 Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 4 Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process. B Mark position of dampers and air directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and restore to their marked position on completion. C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control. 1 When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.31 micron size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming systems to the outside, use filtration to contain debris removed from HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits. 1 Air outlets and inlets (diffusers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply return, and exhaust fans including fan housings plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology 1 Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects 3 Air handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, condensate drain pans, humidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4 Coils and related components. 5 Return -air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7 Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and make -up air systems. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 0 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 15800 SECTION 15800 PAGE 20 of 20 AIR DISTRIBUTION 3 Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts or duct accessories. 4 Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials, comb and straighten fins. 5 Provide operative drainage systems for washdown procedures. 6. Biocidal Agents and Coatings. Apply biocidal agents if fungus is present. Apply biocidal according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. F Cleanliness Verification. 1 Verify cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before application of treatment, including biocidal agents and protective coatings. 2. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants. 3 Where contaminants are discovered, re -clean and re- inspect ducts. G. Gravimetric Analysis. At discretion and expense of Owner sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner may be tested for cleanliness according to NADCA vacuum test gravimetric analysis. 1 If analysis determines that levels of debris are equal to or lower than suitable levels, system shall have passed cleanliness verification. 2. If analysis determines that levels of debris exceed suitable levels, system cleanliness will have failed and metal duct system shall be re- cleaned and re verified. H. Verification of Coil Cleaning: Cleaning must restore coil pressure drop to within 10 percent of pressure drop measured when coil was first installed. If original pressure drop is not known, coil will be considered clean only if it is free of foreign matter and chemical residue, based on thorough visual inspection. 3.12 COMMISSIONING A. Notify the Commissioning Agent one week prior to start up of equipment. B Submit to the Commissioning Agent a Verification of Completion form with the pre functional check off sheet for each component when it is ready for functional testing. C. Assist the Commissioning Agent as required to perform the functional testing on the system components and the system as a whole. Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15830 PAGE 1 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS HVAC FANS A. Product Data. For each type of product indicated. Submit product information on all air handling units, including fan curves, motor data, coil data, filter data, control damper data, pressure drops for individual components /sections, total static pressure drop, vibration transmission data, and sound power levels in all octave bands at midfrequencies. B Shop Drawings. For each fan, Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1 Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, methods of field assembly components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams. For power signal, and control wiring. 3 Operation and maintenance data. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility. Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 B Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application. 13 WARRANTY A. Warranty Period. One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Criteria. 1 Performance data for all fans shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of AMCA Standard 210. 2. Unit construction shall conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA Standard Handbook Publications and to requirements specified herein. B Safety 1 Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non ducted fan inlets and outlets shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ANSI/ASME B15 1 the recommendations of the National Safety Council and requirements specified herein. C. Nameplate: 1 Provide a metallic, corrosion- resistant, embossed or stamped nameplate for each fan. Nameplate data shall include selection point capacity conditions, rpm and bhp. Permanently affix in a conspicuous location. D Horsepower 1 Motor brake horsepower input to each proposed fan shall not exceed scheduled brake horsepower O 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM CHITECTS SECTION 15830 PAGE 2 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI HVAC FANS E. Alignment: 1 All fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be properly protected during shipment so that bearings are not damaged. F Rigging: 1 Field- rigging methods shall not negate balancing. Lifting eyes shall be used. Shafts shall not be bent. G. Bearings. 1 Bearings shall be heavy -duty self aligning foot mounted ball or roller pillow block type. Bearings shall have a certified ANSUAFBMA L10 minimum rated life of 80,000 hours unless otherwise specified. Bearings shall have dust -tight seals suitable for lubricant pressures encountered. Housings shall be cast iron, unless otherwise specified or approved. 2. Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall be such as to preclude overheating due to excess lubricant or seal blowout due to excess pressure. Grease supply fittings shall be surface ball check type. Provide manual or automatic grease pressure relief fittings as necessary to comply with specified requirements. Bearing and seal construction permitting, relief fittings shall be located on the side opposite to the supply fitting. Relief shall be visible from normal maintenance locations. 3 Permanently sealed pre lubricated antifriction bearings, which conform to above specified materials and ANSUAFBMA L10 life requirements, may be provided for air moving equipment with nameplate horsepower requirements less than 1/2 in lieu of relubricable bearings. 2.2 FAN DRIVES AND GUARDS A. Drives. Provide a V -belt drive, with guard, for each fan except direct driven type fans. B Replacement of Existing Drives. 1 Provide all fan drive changes at existing fans to accommodate the revisions to existing air quantities as required by the alteration work and as shown. Drive changes shall be closely coordinated with air balancing work specified in Section 2305 'Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing C. Horsepower Ratings of Drives: Select drives in accordance with the following except the minimum drive rating shall be 140% of the motor rating, unless specified otherwise. 1 Motors 5 HP and Smaller Adjustable motor sheave, drive 150% of fan brake horsepower at design. D Drive Sheaves. 1 Sheaves shall be cast iron, groove pattern suitable for belts selected. Sheaves for two -belt drives on motors 5 hp and smaller shall be adjustable pitch type. a. Manufacturer Fort Worth, T.B Woods Sons, Dodge, Browning, or Worthington. 2. Minimum Pitch of Motor Sheaves. 4 0' for Type A belts; 6.0' for Type B 10.0' for Type C, 4.5 for 3/8' width, 9.0' for 5/8' width. 3 Balancing: For supply fans, fan and motor sheaves shall be balanced both statically and dynamically at full speed at the factory 4 Drive ratio shall give the required CFM at the static pressure of the system. In case the static pressure in any system is found to differ from that shown, change the ratio as required. Actual drives shall be to the present capacities shown. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15830 PAGE 3 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI E. Guards. 1 Guards for each fan drive, except utility set type fans for which the guards are specified with the fan, shall be four -sided guards and shall also cover exposed parts of fan shafts. Size of guards shall also accommodate ultimate capacities shown. 2. Guards shall meet safety standards of AMCA 410, OSHA. Guards shall be provide with 1/2 mesh No. 14 -gauge screen in steel angle frame; removable by unbolting sections of the guard for ease of belt replacement; supported on upper isolated base, or from the fan, shall not transmit vibration from fan or motor to the building structure. 2.3 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section 'Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. 1 Motor Sizes. Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0 2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. 2.4 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF EXHAUSTER (EF 55) HVAC FANS A. General. Provide the centrifugal -type roof exhaust fans where shown on the drawings; size and capacity as indicated. Motor horsepower and outlet velocities shall not be exceeded. All fans shall be AMCA Certified for both Air and Sound Performance. Only AMCA Certified fans are acceptable. 1 Manufacturer Greenheck Model G or GB Cook Model ACE -D or ACE B B Construction. The top cap of the roof exhauster shall be made of heavy gauge spun aluminum. The top cap shall be designed for easy access for scheduled maintenance or repairs. The unit base shall be heavy gauge spun aluminum of one -piece construction to insure weathertight conditions. All exterior parts including wheel, wheel hub, supporting posts and all outside fasteners shall be of aluminum or non ferrous construction. C. Fan Wheel. Centrifugal blower type, precision balanced, aluminum construction, nonsparking, with nonoverloading backward- inclined blades. The roof exhauster shall have overlapped wheel and orifice combinations. D Motor and Drive Assembly Motors shall be heavy duty type with permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearings. Motors shall be open drip proof, TEFC, or explosion proof as indicated or scheduled. Bearings shall be permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, anti friction ball bearing type providing over 200,000 hours bearing life. Drives are cast iron construction with variable speed pulleys up to 5 HP Oil resistant, non sparking, non static belts shall be provided with over 24,000 hour's life expectancy Fan shaft shall be steel construction, turned, ground and polished to precise tolerances in relationship to wheel hub and bearings. The motor and drive assembly shall be supported by a fabricated steel weldment mounted on rubber isolators to reduce noise and vibration. The drive assembly shall be fastened to a heavy gauge motorplate providing support for the top cap and positive cooling access to the motor compartment. E. Direct drive units shall be of identical construction as belt drive units, except for drives, belts, and fan shaft bearings. F Accessories: Roof exhauster shall include factory furnished sound attenuated roof curb, curb gaskets, automatic backdraft dampers, disconnect switch and bird screen. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 15830 PAGE 4 of 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fans before installation. Reject fans that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 3.2 INSTALLATION FANS A. General. The installation of the fans shall conform to local codes and ordinances, NFPA 90A, and SMACNA. Mounting and supporting of all equipment including accessories and appurtenances shall be provided, including but not limited to structural supports, hangers, vibration isolators, stands, clamps, and brackets. B Installation of Equipment: Installation shall conform to equipment manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Equipment shall be installed, leveled and located so that working clearance is available under overhead lines and so that working space is available for all necessary servicing such as shaft removal, replacing or adjusting drives and motors, lubrication, and access to automatic controls. 33 ELECTRICAL WORK A. General. Electric motor driven equipment specified in this section shall be provided complete with motors and controls. Electric equipment and wiring shall comply with requirements of NFPA 70 and Division 26, 'Electrical Work' B Starters. Motor starters and disconnects, unless otherwise specified or indicated shall be furnished and installed by Division 26 Contractor 3.4 IDENTIFICATION HVAC FANS A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section 'Identification for Electrical Systems. 3.5 COMMISSIONING A. Notify the Commissioning Agent one week prior to start up of equipment. B Submit to the Commissioning Agent a Verification of Completion form with the pre functional check off sheet for each component when it is ready for functional testing. C. Assist the Commissioning Agent as required to perform the functional testing on the system components and the system as a whole. END OF SECTION 15830 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 WORK INCLUDED 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of submittals 0 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15900 PAGE 1 of 9 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Refer to Controls Input/Summary at end of this section. C. Sections 15010, 15050, and 15950 are directly related to work included in this section. Other sections are indirectly related and shall be reviewed. A. A complete Building Automation System (BAS) shall be provided to control and/or to monitor building systems as outlined in the sequences of operation, drawings and this specification. The BAS shall employ direct digital control (DDC) 1 Provide all software, hardware and cabling necessary for communication between operator stations, controllers, sensors, actuators and other devices. Provide all miscellaneous software, wiring, parts and labor required in establishing a complete and working system that is fully integrated with the existing Siemens control system. A. All materials and equipment used shall be new standard components, regularly manufactured and not custom designed or fabricated specifically for this project. B All components and software shall have been previously tested and proven in regular use. Minimum in -use requirements are 24 months for hardware and 12 months for major software (whole number revision) releases. C. Modularity The HVAC control system shall possess a modular architecture, permitting expansion through the addition of more distributed processing units, input/output units, sensors, actuators and operator stations. B Approval Vendor shall submit and receive approval for all submittals including materials, floor plan, schematics and programming prior to installation. A. Provide a HVAC control system with distributed processing units, input/output units, firmware and standard operating software provided by Siemens. 1 New equipment and software shall be selected for compatibility with systems presently installed at Olympic Medical Center 2. Vendor shall provide all upgrades to allow new controls to work with the existing control systems. B Design, component selection, installation, custom programming, documentation, testing, training and warranty service shall be the direct responsibility of the manufacturer or their local representative. B Provide sequences of operation detailing all control strategies, including initial setpoints and referencing all points by the point name used in the BAS programming. (These sequences of operation shall also be provided in the record drawings.) MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15900 PAGE 2 of 9 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS C. Provide a complete set of reproducible control drawings using computer aided design and drafting (CADD) technology Include the following information: 1 Show general physical arrangement of component devices installed in the panels. Indicate applicable detailed drawing reference. 2. Provide a typical schematic drawing of each control circuit. 3 Identify equipment and devices by the reference designations shown on the drawings and by unique point identification used in system software. Provide material list with or on each drawing. 4 Supply block diagrams and schematics showing riser diagrams, the layout of equipment, communication cabling, and wire type. 5 Provide system diagrams showing the general mechanical system layout with all sensors /devices of each mechanical system. 6. Supply floor plan drawings showing the location of all controlled equipment and devices used for sensing and control. 7 Provide a schematic drawing of each control circuit, complete with individual wire identifications. Typical drawings are acceptable. 8. Provide LAN truck riser diagram showing cable routing and location of all repeaters. D Provide a complete list of equipment to be furnished, which includes a manufacturer's catalog sheet for each item on the material list. 1 Catalog cut sheets shall be clear and legible and indicate item being submitted. 2. Supplement catalog sheets as necessary to fully describe the device being furnished. Include information to aid in judging the suitability of each device. 3 Provide a damper schedule with one line per damper Provide for each damper The project TAG, the size, the model of the damper the type and model of the actuator and whether the damper fails open, closed, or in place. 4 Provide a valve schedule with one line per valve. Provide lor each valve: The project TAG, the size, the model of the valve, the pressure rating, the model and type of the actuator the valve Cv and whether the valve fails open, closed, or in place. E. Provide a detailed test plan describing the specific procedures used to complete and document the `Owner witnessed Testing described in the Final Acceptance requirement. 1 Test plans shall include a complete schedule for tracking each phase of the testing, e.g. zone testing by floor fan testing by system, chiller interface testing, heating system testing, etc. 2. The vendor is required to supplement the planned work effort to meet the progress dates given in the schedule. 3 Provide printout of programming code. 4 Show initial setpoints. 5 Provide all documentation necessary to interpret programming related submittals. F As part of the submittal process, the vendors shall meet with representatives of the Owner's engineering and operations divisions, giving them a thorough briefing on the BAS programming design. This briefing shall describe in detail the methods the control programmer has used to meet the requirements of the sequence of operations. G. Submit the point -to -point (PTP) and sequence -of- operation verification test plans at least 30 days prior to the scheduled beginning of testing. PTP testing shall be part of the construction schedule. n 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.6 POST INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS SECTION 15900 PAGE 3 of 9 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS A. The manufacturer and control contractor shall instruct operating personnel (FOMs) in the operation of the system as follows. 1 Provide a minimum of 16 hours of classroom and on -site training in the operation and maintenance of the installed system. This training will be provided for a total of 4 people in duplicate sessions so as to allow attendance of all shift personnel. Hold part of this training prior to point -to -point testing. Provide each trainee with a copy of the sequence of operations and the graphics during each training session. Training shall address the following subjects. 2. Review of sequence of operations 3 System troubleshooting 4 Emergency service support 5 Fire alarm interface 6. System restart after power failure 7 Replacement procedures of each system component 8. Calibration and initialization procedures 9 Regeneration procedures on all installed programming at operator's control stations 10. Provide one reference materials (manuals), test instruments, and software manufactured or modified by the manufacturer for use in the installation, troubleshooting, and repairs of installed devices. Include portable test terminal, test boxes, circuit card extenders, calibration modules, etc. B Upon request, provide up to 8 hours of follow -on training sessions during the warranty period. 1.7 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING A. Provide assistance, staff and materials to support the commissioning activities. 1 This includes all testing apparatus in use by the BAS contractor to test and calibrate or verify calibration of the control system. 2. Assistance includes but is not limited to reviewing test procedures and providing software enhancements to accommodate testing methods. B Provide staff and materials to support the point -to -point testing, also referred to as Owner witnessed Testing and described under Final Acceptance Requirements. C. Operate the control system for any commissioning tests specified in other specification sections. 1.8 FINAL ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide corrected documentation to show changes made to correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning tests. Reassemble manuals and drawing packages to reflect corrected documentation records. B Drawings and software 1 Submit shop drawings reflecting final as- built' condition. a. Provide record drawings on AutoCAD 2000 or later version. Deliver two copies of data on two CDs without compression. b. Provide 3 copies of reproducible record drawings. 1) These record drawings shall accurately depict the final as -built conditions and shall be on Architectural/Mechanical backgrounds provided by the A/E. 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15900 PAGE 4 of 9 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 2) These drawings shall include accurate depiction of location of sensors and controlled equipment (motor starters, valves, dampers, AHUs, etc.) c. Insert one copy of applicable shop drawings, panel layout drawing, and points list at each enclosure s documentation holder d. Furnish one original set of application software on CDs. Disks shall bear the manufacturer s label. Field copies are not acceptable. Application software includes operating system, controls application generation, graphic support, maintenance support and all other utilities provided in support of the installed system. 2. Operation and Maintenance (O &M) Manuals: Provide two paper copies of material required and five copies on CDs in MS Word format. Describe operation, maintenance and servicing requirements of the HVAC control system and associated equipment. Provide the following information in separate sections, each with an index. a. Technical literature for all equipment, including catalog sheets, calibration, adjustments and operation instructions, and installation instructions b Hardware and software manuals, including information supplied by the original product developer on the application programs and on the computers and controllers provided by vendor c. System description and complete sequence of operation d. Reduced size (11 x 17 copies of record drawings e. Input/Output (I/O) summary forms for the system, listing all connected analog and binary input and output functions and the number and types of points. Indicate spare input/output capacity f Control programs specific to this system Completed point -to -point checkout plan used in Owner witnessed testing, and the completed data sheets showing the results of the point -to -point testing. 3 Owner witnessed testing: All parts of the testing described in this section are to be performed as point -to -point tests and control sequence verification. The Owner may choose to have this testing witnessed by a member of the Owner s staff, by a member of the A/E team, or other a. One copy of the preliminary as -built documents shall be provided to support this testing. b After receipt of all system documentation by the Owner notify Owner 10 working days before testing begins. c. Testing shall be performed by the manufacturer or its local representative. The procedure for the test must provide a format for documenting the results, comments, vendor repair activity vendor's initials, and retest witnessing. Provide data sheets with one line for each physical point on the system, and columns to record the results, dates, and initials of witnesses for both pretests and witness tests. g. d. The Contractor shall perform point -to -point pretests before the witnessed tests, and shall fill out data sheets during pretests to demonstrate successful performance prior to witnessed tests. 4 Installation verification tests a. Verify operation, location and identification of power sources, including circuit breakers and control power transformers. b Start/stop points. Issue start and stop commands from an operator station. Verify that controlled equipment responds appropriately and that the start/stop status is accurately reflected at the operator station. 02007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 0 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15900 PAGE 5 of 9 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS c. Analog points. Analog inputs and outputs shall be verified at both extremes of their ranges and at the midpoint. Verify tight shutoff and full opening of dampers and valves. d. Binary points. Verify that both commanded conditions (on/off, open/closed, etc.) are accurately reflected at the operator station. e. Test fan and pump failure alarms by turning off the motor at the HOA switch and observing the run -state indication at the operator station. f. Temperature points: Verify calibration of sensors by comparing displayed temperature values with the reading of an independent measuring device located in the same flow Test liquid temperature sensors as installed in piping thermowells to verify effectiveness of heat conducting compound. g. Pressure points. Verify calibration of sensors by comparing displayed pressure with the reading of an independent measuring device located in the same flow stream. Retain the services of the balancer as required to confirm readings. h. Control valves. Verify tight shutoff by comparing water or air temperatures entering and leaving the heat transfer device. i. Operator response and sequencing: Demonstrate that sequenced or modulated valves and dampers position accurately in response to posit multiple operators to provide simultaneous modulation of parallel dampers or valve assemblies. j Control signal stability general. Demonstrate that control loops are tuned so that the output does not change until the controlled system has had time to respond to the last output signal. k. Control signal stability response to step input: Demonstrate that control loops are tuned so that they are stable without excessive hunting following a step input of not less than 20% of the operating/reset range of the controlled variable. 1. Control signal stability floating point devices. Verify that minimum pulse output duration is no less than the value required to assure repositioning of the controlled device. m. Demonstrate the capability of the controls system to execute the complete sequence of operation as given in the mechanical design documents. n. Verify tight shut -off of all actuated control valves (for 3 -way valves, demonstrate capacity for 100% by -pass of coil). 1.9 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE A. The complete control system shall be warranted to be free of defects in manufacturing, workmanship and materials for one year Temperature sensor accuracy shall be warranted for 3 years. Software and documentation shall be revised to reflect system changes required to meet warranty obligations. B During the warranty period, provide a 24 -hour emergency service telephone number where a qualified service technician, familiar with the installed system, may be reached. 1 This technician shall have the capability of remote communication with the control system for troubleshooting and program alterations. 2. The vendor shall pay all costs to provide communications for remote access. 3 A fully equipped, qualified repair technician shall be at the job site within 4 hours of a request for emergency service. C. All replacement parts must be available on site within 48 hours during the term of the warranty D Provide free of charge during the warranty period 2 DDC software sequence modifications as instructed by the Owner Modification shall be in software only MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide as required for a complete and operating building automation system, all software, hardware, input/output devices, wiring and control power not shown in electrical bid documents, actuated dampers, actuated valves, actuators, operation and maintenance training, special maintenance tools and aids, supervision of labor and warranty B The system shall be built only of standard components kept in stock by the supplier 1 All replacement parts shall be available on site within 48 hours. 2. The components shall not require customizing other than setting jumpers and switches, or adding firmware or software modules, or on -site software programming to do required functions. C. System display should meet the following requirements. 1 The system is to be fully menu driven. 2. All system titles, prompts, and instructions are to be in the English language. 3 All entries to be in natural units, i.e. a setpoint value shall be entered in its actual control unit of value, such as 74° F 4 The primary means of information display and system management shall be by graphic display Use the same style of display as is currently used throughout the facility a. Each display will contain comment sections to indicate area served (if area specific) and also contain a graphical presentation for all other interlocked systems. 2.2 ALARM PROGRAM A. For each analog input point, assign operator high and low alarm limits according to design data or as Owner requests. B For each alarm input, provide the following assignable alarm responses. 1 Display English language point description in addition to system point identification. 2. Print out alarm description and operator- created alarm message. 3 Require acknowledgment by operator and print occurrence if directed by Owner PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL FUNCTIONAL REQUIRMENTS A. Sequences of operations are designed to illustrate basic control functions and intent only The following general requirements apply to all control sequences to the extent possible. B Control of equipment as described in the sequence of operations and shall include: 1 Time and holiday schedules 2. Alarm limits and histories 3 Summary of data for each zone 4 Trend logs and historical data 5 All setpoints 6. Master menu 7 Dynamic color graphic Interface 0 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15900 PAGE 6 of 9 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. The following Points Descriptions and Sequences of Operation shall be enhanced as necessary and included as part of the control drawings to expand and clarify information shown in the drawings. 1 Points information shall be displayed and organized by system in dynamic graphic form at the operator stations. 2. The energy reduction software and miscellaneous functions shall manage all points. 3 It shall be possible to `disconnect' any output or setpoint from the AUTOMATIC control logic and enter a MANUAL value or state from any Operator Station. 4 It shall be possible to replace any input with a MANUAL value from any Operator Station. D Air terminals 1 Current space temperature 2. Occupied heating/ventilating,setpoint 3 Unoccupied heating/ventilating setpoints 4 Current status (heating/ventilating) 5 Current mode (day /night) 6. Minimum and maximum airflow setting (CFM) 7 Current primary airflow reading (CFM) 8 Valve position (per cent of full open) (Water a calculated value not requiring feedback) 9 High/low temperature alarm 10 Input and software capacity to add local temperature adjustment and push button timed override from the space temperature sensor E. MRI Chiller 1 MRI Chiller status 2. MRI chilled water temperature. 3 MRI chiller alarm F MRI equipment room 1 MRI equipment room temperature. 2. MRI equipment room alarm G. Exhaust fan EF -55 status. 3.2 CONSTANT VOLUME AIR TERMINAL UNITS A. The constant volume air terminal unit with hot water reheat coil to satisfy zone occupied heating and cooling set points, initially set for 71 °F heating and 74 °F cooling (both set points shall be operator adjustable) B When zone temperature is less than or equal to the heating set point, hot water reheat coil control valve shall be modulated to satisfy zone occupied heating set point. C. When zone temperature is greater than or equal to cooling set point, the reheat coil control valve shall be closed. D Each zone shall have the (operator selectable) capability to have an `unoccupied' mode with a different minimum air volume setpoint and different temperature setpoints. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15900 PAGE 7 of 9 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 5 All control loop parameters for each loop shall be displayed on one display MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI E. The following points listed below shall be monitored for display and alarming through operator's station. All points shall be displayed at station, alarm functions shall be given. 1 Terminal unit zone temperature (low and high temperature alarm) 2. Terminal unit primary air flow (low and high flow alarm) 3 Terminal unit supply air temperature. 3.3 COMMUNICATION ROOM VENTILATION CONTROL A. Packaged, split- system air conditioner (AC- 6 /CU -6) with integral refrigeration and heating controls shall be provided to maintain machine room environmental requirements. A room sensor shall be provided to command units on/off through DDC system. 3.4 WORK BY OTHERS SECTION 15900 PAGE 8 of 9 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS A. The mechanical subcontractor shall install all wells, pressure tappings for flow sensors, etc. and shall set all control valves in place under the manufacturer's supervision. Pressure taps shall include service valves and calibration taps. B The sheet metal subcontractor shall approve or correct the submitted schedule of required control damper quantities and sizes before dampers are ordered from the factory Sheet metal Contractor shall receive dampers at the job site, set dampers in place under the manufacturer's supervision and provide an access door for each damper Dampers shall be mounted square within the duct without twisting or distortion to insure proper damper operation. The damper shaft shall be extended at a location that provides space for the actuator C. Patching and painting required for the control system installation will be accomplished by the General Contractor D All line voltage wiring required for unit heaters, duct heaters, wall or baseboard heaters, control panels, alternators, motor starters and lighting Contractors are to be furnished and installed by the electrical subcontractor E. Oil pressure sensors, refrigerant pressure sensors, vane control operators and motor speed control devices for the chillers shall be provided by the mechanical subcontractor Sensors shall have a 4 -20 ma output. F Electrical door strikes and magnetic door switches shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor Low voltage control wiring shall be installed by the controls subcontractor Access to run and terminate the wiring shall be provided by the General Contractor G. Contractors for lighting control will be furnished and installed by the electrical subcontractor The contactors shall be two position maintained requiring a single pole single throw relay for operation. Local manual switches if required will be provided by the electrical subcontractor H. Certain terminal units shall require the installation of control devices at the factory of the terminal unit manufacturer The controls manufacturer shall be responsible for the timely delivery of these controls to the unit manufacturer and for final proper calibration at the job site. In the case of control devices that are mounted inside the terminal boxes, proper adjustment of these controls shall be the responsibility of the terminal unit manufacturer 3.5 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. The system installation shall be complete in all respects and tested for proper operation prior to acceptance testing for the Owner's authorized representative. A letter shall be submitted to the Engineer requesting system acceptance. This letter shall certify all controls are installed and the software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. Acceptance testing will commence at a mutually agreeable time within 30 calendar days of the request. When the system has been deemed satisfactory in whole or in part by the Owner's representative, the system will be accepted for beneficial use which will start the warranty period for the commissioned portion. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.6 TRAINING SECTION 15900 PAGE 9 of 9 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS B The building controls system subcontractor shall submit a proposed Acceptance Test Agreement for testing the system's functionality and the accuracy of all sensors and actuators. A. The controls subcontractor shall provide the Owner's system operators complete instructions for proper control of the system under all modes of operation. These modes shall include but not be limited to summer /winter occupied/unoccupied, energy management and alarm event sequences. The instructions shall be conducted during normal working hours, Monday through Friday at the job site. These instructions shall consist of both classroom and hands -on training. B Training shall address the following operator functions: 1 Sensor /actuator operation. 2. System architecture and basic theory of operation. 3 Operator level (password level 1) interface to system for password access, alarm handling, point addressing, manual commands and statistical data acquisition. 4 Program level (password level 2) operation for command control and definition of energy management parameters. 5 Configuration level (password level 3) for all database entry and modification. END OF SECTION 15900 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 OMC Dietary Cardiac Additions Alterations MRI lescription 1 Digital 1 Digital I Analog I Analog '1 Alarms 1 1 Output 1 Input I Output 1 Input I (DDC) !Remarks Constant VolumeTerminals (See plans for Quantity) Inlet velocity sensor -cfm readout VAV damper 1 Hot water heating coil valve Supply air temperature sensor Room temperature sensor AC-6 Equipt Room AC -6 Common alarm Space temperature EF -55 Helium Evacuation EF -55 status CONTROLS INPUT /OUTPUT SUMMARY 1 1 1 MRI Chiller 1 1 I Chilled water discharge temperature 1 1 1 Chiller status 1 1 Chiller common alarm 1 1 1 1 illed water flow status 1 1 1 1 Page 1 1 1 0 1 0 (Floating point actuator 0 1 1 1 1 High-low temperature I 1 1 (Common alarm from pkg controls 1 1 1 1 1 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provisions of this section 15010 'General Mechanical Requirements apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Included in this section are air balancing, acoustical testing, (Air Quality Testing), equipment start- up, system commissioning, and duct leakage testing. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The publications of the organizations listed below form a part of this specification to extent referred. 1 Associated Air Balancing Council (AABC) 2. National Air Balancing Council (NEBB) 3 Sheet metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 AIR BALANCING SECTION 15950 PAGE 1 of 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING BALANCING A. General The air and water systems balancing will be performed by a firm designated by the Owner under a separate Contract. No cost for this work is to be included in the Base Bid except for the following related Contractor Services. B Work by Contractor• 1 Before balancing and testing can commence, check all fans, pumps, and other rotating equipment for proper rotation and lubricate per the manufacturer's recommendations and operate all fans, and auxiliary equipment for a minimum of one week. The Air Distribution System shall be checked out to ensure that each outlet is properly connected to the branch duct, a volume damper exists for each outlet (supply return and exhaust), and is in the wide open position, and that all other required volume dampers, at branch duct connections and elsewhere, are installed and are functional. 2. Notify the Owner fifteen (15) days prior to the time each phase of the air and water balancing can begin. 3 Test run all equipment and systems a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours prior to testing and balancing. 4 Install new air filters in all units and blow -down all water strainers after the test run and before the start of testing and balancing. 5 Operate heating, cooling, ventilating and control systems continuously during the testing and balancing. 6. Provide ladders, scaffolding and access to each system for proper testing and balancing. 7 Provide and install sheaves, belts and additional volume dampers as required by the testing and balancing agency 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 8. Confirm in writing that all wiring and controls for mechanical equipment have been installed and tested. Provide control system as- builts including program flow charts. Provide four (4) hours of training by control specialist to balancer C. Work by Balancing Firm. Balancing firm will provide labor and instruments for the actual adjustment and testing work at no cost to the Contractor and no allowance shall be included for this work. 3.2 AIR BALANCING (SMACNA) SECTION 15950 PAGE 2 of 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING BALANCING A. General. Test, adjust, and balance each system using a qualified testing organization to produce system performance and space condition specified. Work in accordance with the applicable and recommended procedures of the SMACNA Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems. All necessary apparatus and certified, calibrated instrumentation, including that to measure motor current and power factor shall be provided. A detailed agenda of the proposed work shall be submitted for approval prior to starting any work. B Systems volume acceptance criteria shall be as follows: 1 Air Handling/Moving Device Supply Plus 10 percent, minus zero percent of design cfm at design temperature. 2. Air Moving Device Exhaust Plus zero percent, minus 10 percent of design cfm at design temperature. 3 Terminal Device Delivery Plus or minus 10 percent of design cfm at design temperature. C. Work by Contractor 1 Operate heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems as directed. 2. Furnish ladders and such other equipment as necessary to enable readings to be taken at all outlets and facilitate damper setting. 3 Provide fan drive changes for fan systems for fan systems installed, as required to satisfactorily adjust the air handling systems, including fixed and variable pitch drives. 4 Provide access to dampers, controls, valves and other items as needed to complete the work including removal and replacement of access doors, access panels and ceilings where accessible. 33 AIR BALANCING (NEBB) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES A. General B Work Plan 0 2007 Mahlum Architects 1 The Balancing Contractor shall be a qualified testing agency Prior to commencing work under this section of the specifications, the testing agency shall have been approved by the engineer and shall be a certified member of the Associated Air Balance Council or shall have submitted adequate documentation to satisfy the engineer as to his competence. Minimum qualifications for acceptance shall be the General Membership standards of the Associated Air balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental Air Balancing Bureau (NEBB). 2. Procedures. Procedures, in general, will be in accordance with the AABC 'National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems. 3 Instruments. All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibration histories for each instrument will be available for examination. Method of application of instrumentation shall be in accordance with the AABC/NEBB Procedure. 1 Prior to beginning work, the contractor shall review the existing drawings and the actual equipment at the site. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 0 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15950 PAGE 3 of 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING BALANCING 2. A work plan shall be submitted for review which hsts all equipment, terminals and outlets to be balanced, and which lists the proposed procedures and instrumentation to perform the work. Work plans shall include blank copies of all forms to be used in the balancing report and a sample of the report format, binder and labeling. 3 The work plan shall be accepted by the engineer prior to beginning the balancing work. Allow adequate time for work plan review C. Air Balancing 1 System shall be balanced with clean filters. (Filter replacement will be done by the Contractor with coordination by the Balancing Contractor 2. System air volume adjustments shall be made by adjustment of fan speed to the greatest extent possible. Motor sheave changes and belt changes shall be included in the contract amount. Motor replacement shall not be included in the contract amount. If motor changes are required, motor changes will be done by the owner with coordination by the balancing Contractor 3 Air volume adjustments shall be made by adjustment of volume dampers or splitter dampers, with adjustments made in main ducts as much as possible. Provide and install new volume dampers, or repair existing volume dampers if necessary as required. 4 Air volume measurements shall be made with equipment suited for the velocity and pressure in the duct system, as approved as part of the work plan. 5 Pitot tube traverse of main ducts shall be used to verify measurements of the air quantities measured at the air terminals and air outlets. 6. Air volumes shall be balanced to within 10 percent of design volume. 7 Final position of balancing dampers shall be marked on the duct. 8 Instrument test holes shall be drilled in ducts where required for balancing. Test holes shall be plugged with removable plastic plugs. D Balancing Reports 1 Reports shall include small scale reproduction of floor plans which identify each equipment item and air device included in the Balancing Report. Equipment and air devices shall be numbered to match the numbers used in the Balancing Report. 2. List of instrumentation used, with manufacturer model number serial number and calibration records shall be included. 3 Report shall include the following information for each air balancing equipment item: a. Equipment identification b Manufacturer of each fan, with size, model number arrangement, discharge arrangement, fan class, and type of volume control device if any c. Fan motor manufacturer model, horsepower drive, voltage, phase, rpm, service factor and full load amperage. d. Design capacities: cfm, inlet static pressure, outlet pressure, fan rpm, and motor amperage. e. Measured capacities. cfm, inlet static pressure, outlet pressure, fan rpm and motor amperage. 4 Report shall include the following information, for each air terminal and air outlet: a. Terminal or outlet identification. b. Manufacture, type, size, configuration and balancing factors. c. Design cfm and velocity MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 15950 PAGE 4 of 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING BALANCING d. Measured cfm and velocity for each intermediate measurement and final measurement. Report shall include the following information, as appropriate, for each water balancing equipment item. a. Equipment identification. b. Manufacturer of equipment, with size, model number impeller size, etc. c. Motor manufacturer model, horsepower drive, voltage, phase, rpm, service factor and full load amperage. d. Design capacities: gpm, head, pressure losses, temperature differential. e. Measured capacities: gpm, head, pressure losses, temperature differential, motor amperage. 6. A preliminary copy of the balancing report shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval. After any required corrections have been completed, three copies of the final report shall be furnished. The final reports shall be in suitably sized, hard sided, three -ring binders with the date, project identification and contractor's identification suitably labeled. The final copies of the balancing report shall be certified by the Balancing Contractor 3.4 WATER BALANCING A. Water Balance and Equipment Test: Include chilled water and heating system. 1 Adjust flow rates for equipment and coils for instance, to values on equipment submittals if different from values on contract drawings. 2. Record final measurements for hydronic equipment performance data sheets. Include entering and leaving water temperatures for heating and coils and for heat exchangers, radiant heating piping system and convectors. Include entering and leaving air temperatures (DB/WB for cooling coils) for air handling units and terminal reheat coils. Make air and water temperature measurements at the same time. 3.5 EQUIPMENT START UP A. The Mechanical Contractor shall start -up all mechanical equipment. Factory trained and factory authorized service personnel shall supervise the equipment start -up as required. Provide all labor equipment and supplies. B Start -up procedure will consist of visual inspection and technical, mechanical, chemical, and electrical tests as deemed necessary by the factory service personnel, with concurrence of the A/E. Coordinate the start-up time with the factory trained personnel, the Owner's representative and the A/E representative in accordance with Section 15010, 'General Mechanical Provisions The factory technicians will verify that all equipment is fully operational or arrange repairs if any start- up problems are evident. Once start-up and corrections are complete, provide a letter in accordance with Section 15010, 'General Mechanical Provisions 3.6 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING A. Provide labor and materials as required to participate in the Building Commissioning process. 1 Provide skilled technicians to start-up, adjust and debug all systems. These same technicians shall be made available to the commissioning program as it relates to each system and their technical specialty The Contractor shall cooperate with the commissioning work and ensure that skilled technicians are present during testing until the required system performance is obtained. m 2007 Mahlum Architects MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI ID 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 15950 PAGE 5 of 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING BALANCING 2. The A/E reserves the right to reject any technician who is judged not qualified to perform the required work. Qualifications of technicians include expert knowledge relative to the specific equipment and adequate documentation and tools to service and operate the systems. END OF SECTION 15950 Issue Date: OCTOBER 8, 2007 SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16050 EXISTING SYSTEMS SECTION 16072 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 16115 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS CABLE SUPPORTS SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS CABLES SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES SECTION 16452 GROUNDING SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS SECTION 16475 FUSES SECTION 16476 DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 16500 LIGHTING SECTION 16501 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE SECTION 16685 MRI SYSTEMS SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SECTION 16724 SMOKE DAMPER CONTROL SECTION 16740 TELEPHONE, COMPUTER RACEWAY SYSTEM SECTION 16750 NURSE CALL SYSTEM SECTION 16999 PROJECT CLOSEOUT APPENDIX 1 PANEL SCHEDULES SPARLING Electrical Engineers MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 41902 O r C,s AVAL EXPIRES. f'�I15, old f 720 Olive Way Suite 1400 Seattle, Washington 98101 (206) 667 -0555 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SUMMARY SECTION 16010 PAGE 1 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This section includes general electrical requirements for all Division 16 work and is supplemental and in addition to the requirements of Division 1 B It is the intention of this Division of the Specifications and the contract drawings to describe and provide for the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory and fully operational condition all equipment, materials, devices and necessary appurtenances to provide a complete electrical system. Provide all materials, appliances and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or shown on the drawings, but which are necessary to make a complete, fully operational installation of all electrical systems shown on the contract drawings or described herein. Connect equipment and devices fuinished and installed under other Divisions of this specification (or the Owner) under this Division. C. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent and expenenced electricians shall be employed and shall be under the supervision of a competent and expenenced foreman. D The drawings and specifications are complimentary and what is called for (or shown) in either is required to be provided as if called for in both. E. See Division 1 for sequence of work. 1.3 WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS A. See all other specifications for other work which includes but is not limited to: Temporary Power Cutting and Patching Door Hardware Painting, Refinishing and Finishes Equipment Wiring Conveying Systems Mechanical Control Wiring Mechanical Equipment Fire Protection 1.4 CODES, PERMITS, INSPECTION FEES A. The following code and standards are referenced in the Division 16 specifications. Perform all work and provide materials and equipment in accordance with the latest referenced codes and standards of the following organizations: 1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 3 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4 Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) B Install the electrical systems based on the following: NFPA 70 National Electrical Code as adopted and amended by the Local Jurisdiction. IBC International Building Code as adopted and amended by the Local Jurisdiction. WAC Hospital Rules and Regulations (WA State) 246.320 SECTION 16010 PAGE 2 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS C. The referenced codes establish a mimmum level of requirements. Where provision of the vanous codes conflict with each other, the more stringent provision shall govem. If any conflict occurs between referenced codes and this specification, the codes are to govem. Compliance with code requirements shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with any requirements of the drawings or specifications which may be in excess of requirements of the governing codes and rules and not contrary to same. D Obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. Arrange for inspection of work by the inspectors and give the inspectors all necessary assistance m their work of inspection. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with that of the other Contractors and/or other trades doing work on the project. Examine all drawings and specifications of other trades for construction details and coordination. Make every reasonable effort to provide timely notice of work affecting other trades to prevent conflicts or interference as to space requirements, dimensions, openings, block outs, sleeving or other matters which will cause delays or necessitate work around methods. B. Obtain submittals and shop drawings of all equipment with electrical connections furnished under other divisions of the specification and by the Owner Provide all wiring in accordance with specific equipment requirements. Immediately advise the Architect of any changes which may affect the contract price. C. Special attention is called to the following items. Coordinate all conflicts prior to installation: 1 Door swings such that switches will be located on the 'strike side of the door 2. Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment so that all electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical outlets and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items. 3 Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items. 4 Recessing and concealing electrical materials in CMU walls, concrete construction and precast construction. 5 At each switchboard and panelboard location the Contractor shall monitor the work of all trades to assure that the space and clearance requirements of code are met. D Furnish, install and place in satisfactory condition all raceways, boxes, conductors and connections and all other materials required for the electrical systems shown or noted in the contract documents to be complete, fully operational and fully tested upon completion of the project. Raceways, boxes and ground connections are shown diagrammatically only and mdicate the general character and approximate location. The layout does not necessarily show MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16010 PAGE 3 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS the total number of raceways or boxes for the circuits required, nor are the locations of indicated runs intended to show the actual routmg of the raceways. E. The horsepower of motors and apparatus wattage's shown on the drawings are estimated requirements of equipment furnished under other Divisions of this contract. Provide overload elements to suit actual equipment nameplate current. Advise Architect of any equipment changes or substitutions affecting electrical systems. F Consult the architectural drawings for the exact height and location of all electrical equipment not specified herein or shown on the drawings. Make any minor changes (less than 6' -6' horizontal) in the location of the raceways, outlets, boxes, devices, wiring, etc. from those shown on the drawings without extra charge, where coordination requires or if so directed by the Architect before rough -in. G. Provide inserts or sleeves for outlet boxes, conductors, cables and/or raceways as required. Coordinate the installation thereof with other trades. H. The Contractor will not be paid for relocation of work, cuttings, patching and finishing required for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination prior to installation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract. 1 7 CORRECTION OF WORK A. Within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the work, the Contractor shall correct any work found to be not in conformance with the Contract Documents promptly after written notice from the owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This obligation shall survive acceptance of the work under this Contract and termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. 1.8 ITEMIZED SCHEDULE OF COSTS A. Complete the Schedule of Values included at the end of this section. This schedule shall be adhered to for the electrical contractor to facilitate analysis and approval of the monthly progress billings. Refer to the Supplementary Conditions of General Contract for details, and conform thereto Provide a copy directly to Sparlmg. 1.9 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submittals and Shop Drawings: Schedule so as not to delay construction schedule and no later than 60 days after award of contract, submit common brochure(s) with index and divider tabs by specification section, containing all required catalog cuts. Allow two weeks for review for each submittal and resubmittal. Incomplete submittals and shop drawings which do not comply with these requirements will be returned for correction, revision and resubmittal. See General Conditions for format, quantity etc. B Submit in a three ring binder with hardboard covers. Submittals shall show- Indicate listing by UL or other approved testing agency MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. Shop drawings shall show. SECTION 16010 PAGE 4 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 2. Highlight with yellow or blue marker adequate information to demonstrate materials being submitted fully comply with contract documents. 3 Review and check all material prior to submittal and stamp 'Reviewed and Approved' 1 Ratings of items and systems. 2. How the components of an item or system are assembled, interconnected, function together and how they will be installed on the project. 3 System layout floor plans with complete device layout, point -to -point wiring connection between all components of the system, wire sizes and color coding. 4 Coordinate with other division shop drawings and submittals. Identify interface points and indicate method of connection. D The Contractor agrees: 1 Submittals and shop drawings processed by the Architect are not change orders. 2. The purpose of submittals and shop drawings by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept. 3 Submittals demonstrate equipment and material Contractor intends to furnish and install and indicate detailing fabrication and installation methods Contractor intends to use. 4 To accept all responsibility for assuring that all materials furnished under this Division of the specifications meet, in full, all requirements of the contract documents. 5 To pay for Engineers review cost of submittal review beyond one resubmittal. E. The Engineer's review is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Corrections or comments made during this review do not relieve contractor from compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Contractor is responsible for Dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication process and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades; performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner F Submittals and shop drawings are required per the submittals schedule at the end of this Section. 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Provide O &M manuals required m Division 1 plus one manual for Sparling for all equipment furnished under Division 16 of the specifications. Submit a preliminary copy complete except for the bound cover, 60 days prior to completion of the project for checking and review Deliver final bound corrected copies as noted in Division 1 plus a copy to Sparling 20 days prior to scheduled instruction periods. Obtain a receipt for the manuals and forward a copy of the receipt to the Engineer with the Job Completion Form. B The information included must be the exact equipment installed. Where sheets show the equipment installed and other equipment, the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly identified on such sheets. C. These O &M manuals shall contain all the information needed to operate and maintain all systems and equipment provided in the project. Present and arrange information in a logical manner for efficient use by the Owner's operating personnel. The information provided shall mclude but not be limited to the following: 1 Equipment manufacturer, make, model number, size, nameplate data, etc. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 11 INSTRUCTION PERIODS SECTION 16010 PAGE 5 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 2. Description of system configuration and operation including component identification and interrelations. A master control schematic drawings(s) may be required for this purpose. 3 Dimensional and performance data for specific unit provided as appropriate. 4 Manufacturer's recommended operation instructions. 5 Manufacturer's recommended lubncation and servicing data including frequency 6. Complete parts list including reordenng information, recommended spares and anticipated useful life (if appropnate). Parts fists shall give full ordenng information assigned by the original parts manufacturer Relabeled and/or renumbered parts information as reassigned by equipment supplier not acceptable. 7 Shop drawings. 8. Wiring diagrams. 9 Signal equipment submittals shall contain step -by -step circuit descnption information designed to acquaint maintenance personnel with equipment operation m each mode of operation. 10 A complete list of local (nearest) manufacturer representative and distributor contacts for each type of equipment and manufacturer Include name, company address, phone, fax, e -mail address, and web site. D Furnish complete winng diagrams for each system for the specific system installed under the contract. 'Typical' lme diagrams will not be acceptable unless revised to indicate the exact field installation. E. Group the information contained in the manuals in an orderly arrangement by specification index. Provide a typewritten index and divider sheets between categories with identifying tabs. Bind the completed manuals with hard board covers not exceeding 5' thick. (Provide two or more volumes if required.) Signal and commumcation systems shall be in separate volumes. Imprint the covers with the name of the job, Owner, Architect, Electrical Engineer Contractor and year of completion. Imprint the back edge with the name of the job, Owner and year of completion. Hard board covers and literature contained may be held together with screw post binding. A. After substantial completion of the work and 20 days after the O &M manuals have been delivered to the owner and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the Authonty(s) Having Jurisdiction; demonstrate the electrical systems and instruct the Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the various electrical systems. The Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with the Owner The Contractor's representatives shall be superintendents or foremen knowledgeable in each system and suppliers representatives when so specified. When more than one training session is specified, the second session shall be 30 to 90 days after the first as agreed to by the Owner B Include in each instruction session an overview of the system, presentation of information in maintenance manuals with appropnate references to drawings. Conduct tours of the building areas with explanations of maintenance requirements, access methods, servicing and maintenance procedures, equipment cleaning procedures and adjustment locations. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. Include the following scheduled instruction periods. 1 Session 1 Fire Alarm System 1 hours 2. Public Address Systems 1 hours 3 Lighting Control 1 hours 4 Nurse Call System 2 hours SECTION 16010 PAGE 6 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS D Factory trained suppliers representatives shall provide instruction for lighting control, fire alarm, PA, and nurse call system. 1 12 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Continually record the actual electrical system(s) installation on a set of prints kept readily available at the project during construction. These prints shall be used for this purpose alone. 1 Mark record prints with red erasable pencil. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation vanes substantially from the work as originally shown. 2. Accurately locate with exact dimensions all underground and underslab raceways and stub -outs. 3 Note changes of directions and locations, by dimensions and elevations, as utilities are actually installed. 4 Include addenda items and revisions made during construction. 5 Erase conditions not constructed or 'X -out' and annotate 'not constructed' to clearly convey the actual "as constructed' condition. 6. Organize record drawings sheets in manageable sets, bind and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. B Transfer the changes marked up on the record prints into AutoCAD Release 2000 (or higher) at the completion of the work. Provide two (2) sets of prints, one set of fixed line reproducible drawings and one set of AutoCAD drawing files on 3 -1/2' floppy disks (or zip disk). Transmit drawings, CAD files and the record drawing mark -ups to the Architect. Final payment to the contractor will not be authorized until these document have been submitted to and accepted by the Architect. 1 13 FINAL ACCEPTANCE REQUEST A. Submit to the Architect, with a copy to the Sparking Engineer, a Sparling Job Completion Form form attached m this section) properly filled out prior to the time final acceptance of the electrical work is requested. 1 14 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS A. When the following abbreviations and definitions are used m relation to the work for Division 16 they shall have the following meanmgs: Item Meanine AHJ Authority Having Jurisdiction. Boxes Outlet, Junction or Pull Boxes. Code All applicable codes currently enforced at project location. Compression Compressed using a leverage powered (hydraulic or equivalent crimping tool. Connection All materials and labor required for equipment to be fully operational. Exterior Location Outside of or penetrating the outer surfaces of the building weather protective membrane. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Fully Operational Furnish Install Kcml Mfr NEC Noted Provide Required Shown Wiring GENERAL SECTION 16010 PAGE 7 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS Tested, approved, and operating to the satisfaction of the AHJ manufacturer and contract documents. Deliver to the jobsite To enter permanently into the project and make fully operational. Thousand circular mils (formerly MCM). Manufacturer National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association, Publication #70 Shown or specified in the contract documents. Furnish and install. As required by code, AHJ contract documents, or manufacturer for the particular installation to be fully operational. As indicated on the drawings or details. Raceway conductors and connections. A. All materials and equipment installed shall have been tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories or other approved testing organization and shall be so labeled unless otherwise permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (Inspector). B All matenals to be new free from defects and not less than quality herein specified. Materials shall be designated to insure satisfactory operation and operational life in the environmental conditions which will prevail where they are being installed. C Each type of matenals furnished shall be of the same make, be standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such materials and be the manufacturer's latest standard design. D All materials, equipment and systems furnished that include provisions for storing, displaying, reporting, interfacing, inputting, or functioning using date specific information shall perform properly in all respects regardless of the century Any interface to other new or existing materials, equipment or systems shall function properly and shall be century compliant, both in regards to information sent and received. 2.2 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. No Substitute: Where a specified product is indicated 'no substitute it is the intent of this specification to require new materials to be compatible with the existing installation. To this end certain materials and systems no substitution will be allowed. B Pnor to Bid Opening: Acceptance of products other than those specified will be issued by addendum to the bid documents only after the following requirements are met and the proposed listed material is determined to meet or exceed the requirements: 1 Requests for fisting to be onginal matenal, clearly indicating the product fully complies with contract documents and be neatly marked with yellow felt tip marker to clearly define and describe the product for which listing is requested. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16010 PAGE 8 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 2. Include certified laboratory test report for lighting fixtures. 3 Samples shall be submitted if requested. 4 Requests shall be received 10 days prior to bid opening. 5 Requests containing insufficient information to confirm compliance with contract documents will not be considered. C. After Award of Contract: Substitution of products will be considered after award of contract only under the following conditions: 1 The Contractor shall have placed orders for specified materials promptly after contract is awarded and the specified products can not be delivered to the project to meet the Owner's construction schedule. 2. The reason for the unavailability is beyond the Contractor's control, i.e. due to strikes, bankruptcy discontinuance of manufacturer acts of God. 3 The specified product is no longer manufactured. 4 There is compelling economic advantage to the Owner D In all cases, should a substituted material result in requiring electrical system or building modifications; the Contractor alone shall pay all costs to provide these modifications including all costs to the Engineer and Architect for redesign, and updating of record drawings required to accommodate the required modifications. 2.3 NAMEPLATES A. Provide laminated plastic nameplates which are riveted or screwed to the equipment for each switchboard, panelboard, motor control center, equipment enclosure motor starter and disconnect switch. Nameplate material 0 125 inch thick plastic, mimmum size of 1 X 2.5' with minimum lettering size of 0.25 Normal Power System white letters on black background. Emergency Power System white letters on red background. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products accordmg to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Handle all equipment carefully to prevent damage, breakage, denting, and scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged equipment. B Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, undercover in a weather tight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instruction. 3.2 CUTTING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. Obtain permission from the Architect and coordinate with other trades prior to cutting. Locate cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only the minimum amount necessary Cut concrete with diamond core drills or concrete saws except where space limitations prevent the use of such tools. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B. All construction matenals damaged or cut into during the installation of this work must be repaired or replaced with matenals of like kind and quality as onginal matenals by skilled labor experienced in that particular building trade 3.3 FIRESTOPPING SECTION 16010 PAGE 9 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS A. Apply firestoppmg to electrical penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies to maintain fire- resistance rating of the assembly Firestopping matenals and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 section 'Firestopping' 3.4 PAINTING A. Items furnished under this Division that are scratched or marred in shipment or installation shall be refinished with touchup paint selected to match installed equipment finish. 3.5 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Provide steel remforced concrete housekeeping pad under each floor mounted switchboard, transformer and/or other free standing electrical equipment. Size 4 greater (horizontal minimum) than base of equipment mounted thereon. Minimum height 3 -1/2 Use 3000 -psi (20 7 -Mpa), 28 day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete Chamfer edges and finish smooth with all blockouts square and plumb 3.6 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION A. For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the specifications, or by owner, provide complete all electrical connections necessary to serve such equipment and provide required control connections to all equipment so that the equipment is fully operational upon completion of the project. Provide disconnect switch as required by code whenever an equipment connection is shown on the drawings. B. Investigate existing equipment to be relocated and provide new connections as required. 3.7 CLEAN UP A. Contractor shall continually remove debris, cuttings, crates, cartons, etc. created by his work. Such clean up shall be done daily and at sufficient frequency to eliminate hazard to the public, other workmen, the building or the Owner's employees. Before acceptance of the installation, Contractor shall carefully clean cabinets, panels, lighting fixtures, wiring devices, cover plates, etc. to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster mortar, concrete, etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces of apparatus shall be removed and new finish equal to the original applied. 3.8 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate that all electrical equipment operates as specified and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Perform tests in the presence of the Architect, Owner or Engineer Provide all mstruments, manufacturer's operating instructions and personnel required to conduct MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16010 PAGE 10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS the tests. Repair or replace any electrical equipment that fails to operate as specified and or in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PROJECT NAME. PROJECT LOCATION DATE. SPARLING ELECTRICAL JOB COMPLETION FORM Tenant Improvement MRI A. Electrical Inspectors Final Acceptance (Copy of certificate attached.) Name Agency Date B Fire Marshal's Final Acceptance of Fire Alarm System (Copy of certificate attached.) C. Name Agency Date The following systems have been demonstrated to Owner's representative. 1 Power Systems 2. Lighting Control System 3 Fire Alarm System 4 Communication Systems D Record Drawings Attached Transmitted previously to E. O M Manuals Attached Transmitted previously to F Test Reports Attached Transmitted previously to Owner's Rep Owner's Rep Owner's Rep Owner's Rep SECTION 16010 PAGE 11 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS Date Date Date Date Date Date G The work is complete in accordance with contract documents and authorized changes except for and the architect/engineer's representative is requested to meet with at on Supervisor of Electrical Work Time Date Contractors Rep Signature Date MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI Sparling Schedule of Values for Tenant Improvement MRI Additions Alterations Description of Work Distribution Feeders Rough -in Labor Materials Distribution Feeders Conductors and Terminations Labor Materials Branch Circuit (lightmg, receptacles, misc.) Rough -in Material and Labor Branch Circuit Conductors and Terminations Material and Labor Switchboards, Panelboards Starters, Disconnects Material Switchboards, Panelboards, Starters, Disconnects Labor Lighting Material Lighting Interior (installation, tnmout) Labor Devices (switches, receptacles, equip connections) Labor Materials Mechanical Power Connections (starter disconnects) Labor Fire Alarm (devices, control panel, conductor, annunciator, etc) Materials Fire Alarm (rough -in, termination, checkout instruction) Labor Telecom (conductors) Labor Matenals Telecom (infrastructure) Labor Materials Nurse Call System Labor Materials Public Address Labor Matenals Secunty System, CCTV (conductors) Labor Matenals Testing, Demonstration (AHJ approvals) Trammg Close Out (Record Dwgs, O &M, etc.) Materials Labor TOTAL DIVISION 16 SECTION 16010 PAGE 12 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS Amount MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SPARLING SUBMITTAL LIST SECTION 16010 PAGE 13 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS SECTION DESCRIPTION SUBMIT STATUS RECEIVE DATE 16030 ELECTRICAL TESTING 16072 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16030 ELECTRICAL TESTING 16115 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS CABLE SUPPORTS 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16130 RACEWAY AND BOXES 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16452 GROUNDING 16470 PANELBOARDS 16475 FUSES 16476 DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16500 LIGHTING 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16724 SMOKE DAMPER CONTROL 16745 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM 16750 NURSE CALL SYSTEM 16999 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 16010 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PARTI GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Same as in Section 16010 1.3 EXISTING SYSTEMS MAINTAINED SECTION 16050 PAGE 1 EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Prior to bidding, existing systems and systems adjacent to the work shall be investigated thoroughly Any damage resulting from performance of work under this contract shall be repaired to assure continuing operation and integrity during and at completion of the project at no increase in contract cost. B Any existing wiring serving devices to remain in service and which is interrupted by work performed under this contract shall be rerouted to maintain circuit continuity Contractor shall assume the risk of maintaining existing systems except relocation of wiring of #2 AWG and above shall be considered an additional cost if not shown to be relocated. If such wiring is found the Contractor shall notify Architect of wiring location, reason it must be removed and cost of relocation and receive the Owner's approval before proceeding with the work. C. The building will continue operation during the work and it is essential that no systems operation be interrupted unless scheduled with the Architect. Contractor shall assume responsibility for unscheduled interruptions and expedient repair D Provide new raceway support system for all existing raceways above existing or new accessible ceilings in the project area in accordance with Section 16130. (Note: The original construction consists of raceways being supported by the ceiling suspension system which is unacceptable to the Electrical Inspector) Provide new earthquake support system for all existing fixtures in project area in accordance with Section 16500 1.4 EXISTING SYSTEMS CONCEALED A. The electrical drawings show portions of the existing electrical systems which are to remain, be removed or be modified as a part of the Contractor's work. Concealed features of the existing systems are derived from record drawings and the Engineer's best judgment of the configuration, but no guarantee is made as to their correctness. B. The Contractor shall inspect the existing installation pnor to bidding and shall make his own judgment as to the work required to provide a complete installation within the intent of the contract documents. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MR1 1.5 DEMOLITION WORK A. All demolition work required under this contract is not shown on the drawings. B. The demolition drawings show portions of the existing systems which are denved from record drawings. The contractor shall assume there is 20% more electrical systems than what is shown on the demolition drawings. C. The Contractor shall inspect the existing installation prior to bidding and shall make his own judgment as to the work required to provide complete demolition within the intent of the contract documents. 1.6 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SECTION 16050 PAGE 2 EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Removing, temporary hanging by chains and reinstalling in ceilings of light fixtures, speakers, detectors, exit signs and other electrical equipment is not shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall investigate the ceiling demolition work and include this work in the bid. The sequence of work shall be (1) Remove and store fixtures, detectors and speakers along with removal of ceiling, (2) Provide temporary support for wired fixtures and devices to be reinstalled in new ceiling at approximately the same location. Use chains for lighting fixture support, (3) Clean and reinstall in the new or replaced ceilings. Provide new lamps when so noted. Provide temporary relocation of exit signs to original location when exit is reactivated. 1 7 WORK OUTSIDE OF REMODEL AREAS A. Caution this work is not shown on the contract documents. Provide new wiring systems in concealed ceiling spaces to switchboards, panelboards, communication and signaling and system control panels. Remove and relocate electrical equipment m the way of other trades work installed under this contract. Spaces above existing ceilings are highly congested. Route wiring around obstructions and provide pull boxes per code. 1.8 PREMIUM TIME A. Premium time shall be included in the Base Bid for electrical system(s) outages and for other work as required by the schedule, as shown on the drawings and as noted in other Divisions of the Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EXISTING MATERIALS A. All materials which are a part of the building shall remain the property of the Owner 2.2 EXISTING MATERIALS TO BE REINSTALLED A. Existing matenals and equipment (except intenor, undamaged raceways) that are removed as a part of the work or stored in surplus shall not be reinstalled as a part of the new systems unless specifically noted or authorized in wnting by the Owner Forward a copy of the authorization to MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.3 EXISTING MATERIALS NOT TO BE REINSTALLED 3.2 DEMOLITION 3.3 POWER OUTAGES SECTION 16050 PAGE 3 EXISTING SYSTEMS the Engineer The requirements of the specifications (i.e. condition, installation, testing, etc.) shall apply as if the materials were new furnished by the Contractor A. In coordination with the Architect, these materials shall be made available for his inspection and decision as to whether the Owner will retain possession. Items selected for retention shall be turned over to the Owner These items shall be delivered to a location on the premises selected by the Owner Take reasonable care to avoid damage to this material. If the Contractor fails to conform to this requirement, he shall purchase and turn over to the Owner replacement material of like land and quantity B All material not selected for retention by the Owner and debris shall be legally disposed of by the Contractor PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Examine the structure, building, and conditions under which electrical work is to be installed for conditions detrimental• to proper and timely completion of electrical work. Do not proceed with work until deficiencies or detrimental conditions have been corrected. Report deficiencies or detrimental conditions of existing electrical work which might be unsuitable to connect with or receive other work. Failure to so report shall constitute acceptance of other work as being fit and proper for the reception of electncal work. A. Switchboards, panelboards, signaling and communication systems, other electrical equipment free standing or surface mounted, raceway (exposed) and conductors; which are no longer in service presently or as a result of this contract shall be removed. Unused flush mounted devices, outlet and other boxes in finished areas shall be removed from wall and the remaming hole patched to match adjacent wall surfaces. Unused raceways and sleeves shall be cut flush at ceiling, floor or wall and filled with grout. Unused raceways above accessible ceilings shall be removed. B Contractor shall remove all floor, wall or ceiling mounted electncal equipment in the 'Demolition Area indicated on the drawing even if the equipment/or device is not shown on the project drawings. If Contractor questions whether a particular device is to be removed notify the Architect noting type and location of device. If so directed the Contractor shall maintain the existing device in service without any change in contract price. A. The facility will continue its normal operation during the construction work; therefore it is required that the Contractor schedule electrical system(s) outages with the Owner Electrical systems(s) outages to Owner occupied areas may be required to occur during nights, evenings and week -ends. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16050 PAGE 4 EXISTING SYSTEMS B Submit a written request for a power outage at least one week in advance identifying the areas, and systems that will be affected, time and duration of the power outage. The Contractor shall receive written authorization to proceed with the outage and shall renotify the Owner verbally at least one hour prior to the outage and also notify the Owner when the outage is completed. C. Unscheduled Outages. In the event that the Contractor's work causes or contributes to an electrical system(s) outage (or other system fault), the Contractor is responsible for immediately correcting the problem. Included (as examples) shall be any premium time required to stay on the job site until problem is corrected and air freight for parts not locally available. If the Contractor fails to correct the problem, the Owner's cost of correcting the problem shall be deducted from the Contractor's contract amount. 3.4 EXISTING SYSTEMS MAINTAINED A. General Reroute existing circuits that are interrupted as a result of this contract that serve devices to remain in service. 1 Power Circuits (Including removal or relocation of existing panelboards). Prior to demolition work trace out and identify each branch circuit and feeder circuit that serves loads in occupied areas. Provide temporary wiring, schedule outage and reconnect loads to temporary winng. Provide new wiring in new location. Schedule outage, disconnect temporary wiring, and connect loads to new wiring. Remove temporary wiring. Outage for each circuit shall not be more than 20 minutes. 2. Signal and Communication Systems Prior to demolition trace out and identify device and systems being served. Provide temporary wiring to maintain operation of system throughout facility Schedule outage and connect to temporary wiring and test system. Provide new wiring on new location. Schedule outage, disconnect temporary wiring, and reconnect to new wiring. Remove temporary wiring. Outage for each system shall not be more than 20 minutes. 3.5 ACCESS TO PERFORM WORK A. Carefully remove, store or temporarily hang and re- install in undamaged condition all electrical equipment, lighting fixtures and ceiling tiles where access to perform work is required. Clean prior to re- installation. Provide new lamps when so noted. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.6 NEW DEVICES IN REMODEL AREAS SECTION 16050 PAGE 5 EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Provide flush mounting for devices in existing walls. Fish conduit in wall. Where existing boxes are indicated to be reused, extend box as necessary and provide new devices and plates. B Contractor is cautioned that the existing building contains concrete walls. New devices may require cutting and patching, and it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide all cutting and patching required for the installation of the Division 16 work. Contractor shall investigate existing areas prior to bid and shall include all costs of such work in the bid. C. This facility has winng embedded in raceways in concrete slabs. Provide new concealed wiring to last outlet or pull box before homerun to panel. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 16050 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 16072 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI RESTRAINTS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A325 American Society for Testing and Matenals Standard Specification for Structural Bolts. B ASTM A603 American Society for Testing and Materials Standard Specification for Zinc- Coated Steel Structural Wire Rope. C. MFMA 3 Metal Framing Manufacturers Association's Metal Framing Standards Publication. D MSS SP 58 Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials, Design, and Manufacture. E. NECA 1 National Electrical Contractors Association Standard Practices for Good Workmanship m Electrical Contracting. F UBC. Uniform Building Code. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. EMT Electrical metallic tubing. B IMC. Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC. Rigid metal conduit. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements. 13 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating routing of single raceways, trapeze systems and cable trays requiring bracing. Indicate on the shop drawing the type and location of bracing to be used. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, includmg attachment and anchorage devices, signed and sealed by a registered structural engineer in the state of Washington. Include the following: 1 Fabricated Supports: Representations of field- fabricated supports not detailed on Drawings. 2. Seismic Restraints. Detail anchorage and bracing not defined by details or charts on Drawings. Include the following: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 16072 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI RESTRAINTS a. Design Analysis. To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile, compressive, and shear loads. b Details: Detail fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Submit details and calculations for the following items. 1) Raceway Supports 2) Cable Trays 3) Pad Mounted Transformers 4) Automatic Transfer Switches 5) Switchboards 6) Dry Type Transformers C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity including other supports and seismic restraints. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. B Testing of Seismic Anchorage Devices: Comply with testing requirements in Part 3 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Class as Defined in the IBC. D B Ss, Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Response at Short Periods. 1 478 C. S1 Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Response at 1- Second Period: 1.031 D Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC. IV 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic- restraint requirements in the UBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or inir under this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of two times the applied force. B Stt -lotted Support Systems. Comply with MFMA 3 factory- fabricated components for field ass 1y 1 Manufacturers. a. Cooper B -Line; a division of Cooper Industries. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 16072 PAGE 3 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI RESTRAINTS b ERICO International Corporation. c. Allied Support Systems; Power -Strut Unit. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Michigan Hanger Co. Inc. O -Strut Div f. National Pipe Hanger Corp. g. Thomas Betts Corporation. h. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. i. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Finishes. a. Metallic Coatings. Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA 3 3 Channel Dimensions: Selected for structural loading. C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 D Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1 Powder Actuated Fasteners: As approved by the structural engineer threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: 1) Hilt, Inc. 2) ITW Construction Products. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong -Tie Co. Inc. 2. Mechanical Expansion Anchors: Insert- wedge -type, zinc coatedsteel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: 1) Cooper B -Line; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co. Inc 3) Hilt, Inc. 4) ITW Construction Products. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 6) Powers Fasteners. 3 Concrete Inserts. Steel or malleable -iron slotted- support- system units similar to MSS Type 18 complying with MFMA 3 or MSS SP 58. 4 Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements. MSS SP 58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5 Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325 6 Toggle Bolts: A11 -steel springhead type. 7 Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT COMPONENTS A. Angle and Channel -Type Brace Assemblies: Steel angles or steel slotted- support- system components, with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to buildmg structure at the other end. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 16072 PAGE 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI RESTRAINTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems, except if requirements in this Section are stricter B Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway Space supports for EMT IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1 where Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70 Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter C. Multiple Raceways or Cables. Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1 Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single -bolt conduit clamps. 2. Spring -steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1 inch (25 mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements, except as specified in this Article. B Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1 EMT IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted m NFPA 70 C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface- Mounted Equipment and Components. Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1 To Wood. Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts or use expansion anchor fasteners. 3 To Masonry- Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4 To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5 Where approved by the structural engineer, instead of expansion anchors, powder actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater Do not use for anchorage to lightweight aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 6. To Steel. Spring tension clamps. 7 To Light Steel. Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces. Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted channel racks attached to substrate. D Drill holes for expansion anchors m concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 16072 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 Engraved Plastic Laminate Nameplates 2. Wire and Cable Markers 3 Pnmary Cable Tags B Related Sections: 1 16470 Panelboards C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1 ANSI A13 1 Operational and Warning signs. B Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 29 CFR Labor Chapter XVII Part 1910 -145 'Occupational and Safety Health Standards' 1992. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions. B Submit a complete nameplate schedule to indicate nameplate size, lettering size and color PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ENGRAVED PLASTIC LAMINATE NAMEPLATES A. Matenals. Three -layer laminated plastic with nunimum nameplate dimensions of 1 3/4 high by 5 wide. Lettenng height for panel or equipment identifier 1/4 Remaining lines 1/8' high with 1/8 spacing between lines. 1 Normal System: White letters on black background. 2. Emergency System: White letters on red background. 3 Comply with ANSI 13 1 B Switchboard Nameplates: SECTION 16075 PAGE 1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI Provide engraved plastic nameplate for each new switchboard with the following information. Line 1 Switchboard Name Line 2. Source from which fed (i.e. 'Fed From: Line 3 Voltage, phase and wire Line 4 Branch from which served (Normal, Life Safety Critical, Essential Equipment). 2. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for each branch device in each switchboard with the following information. Line 1 Load Served (i.e. panel names, motor control center etc.) Line 2 Area of building served (i.e. penthouse, lab, etc.) Line 3 Type of load served (i.e. lighting, receptacles, equipment, etc.) C. Distribution Panelboard Nameplates: 1 Provide engraved plastic nameplate for each new switchboard with the following information: Line 1 Distribution Panelboard Name Line 2. Source from which fed (i.e. 'Fed From:') Line 3 Voltage, phase and wire Line 4 Branch from which served (Normal, Life Safety Critical, Essential Equipment). 2. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for each branch device in each switchboard with the following information: Line 1 Load Served (i.e. panel names, motor control center etc.) Line 2 Area of building served (i.e. penthouse, lab, etc.) Line 3 Type of load served (i.e. lighting, receptacles, equipment, etc.) SECTION 16075 PAGE 2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Panelboard Nameplates 3 Provide engraved plastic nameplate for each new panelboard with the following information: Line 1 Panelboard Name Line 2. Source from which panel is fed Line 3 Transfer switch from which panel is fed (if applicable) Line 4 Voltage, phase and wire D Motor Controller Nameplates 1 Provide phenolic nameplate for each motor controller with the following information: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI Line 1 Load served, motor size in Hp Line 2 Area that load serves Line 3 Starter size SECTION 16075 PAGE 3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION E. Transfer Switches 1 Provide phenolic nameplate for each new automatic and manual transfer switch with the following information. Linel Transfer switch name (i.e. ATS Line 2. Branch of emergency from which served (Life Safety Critical, Essential Equipment). Line 3 Normal source feed Line 4 Emergency source feed Line 5 Load served F Disconnects, Starters, Combination Starters and Other Devices 1 Provide phenolic nameplate for each device with the following information. Line 1 Load served Line 2 Panelboard and circuit number from which device is fed Line 3 Fuse size or breaker size as applicable G Main Service Project Nameplate 1 At Main Service Distribution Switchboard, provide engraved nameplate on switchgear front with the following information. Project Name: (3/8 lettering, all other 1/4') Architect Electrical Consultant (Sparling, Inc.) Electrical Contractor Year of Manufacturer 2. At Main Service Distribution Switchboard, provide engraved nameplate on switchgear front with the following information, per NEC 230 2(e) Identification. All other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying the building or structure and the area served by each." 3 Emergency System: White letters on red background. 4 Comply with ANSI Al3 1 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.2 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Comply with ANSI A13 1 Table 3 for minimum lettering size. SECTION 16075 PAGE 4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION B Adhesive Labels: Prepnnted, flexible, self adhesive vinyl with legend overlaminated with a clear, weather -and chemical-resistant coating. C Pretensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted, color- coded, acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pretensioned gripping action when placed in position. D Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl- cloth, self adhesive, wraparound type with prepnnted numbers and letters. E. Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands. Bands cut from 0 014 -inch- (0 4 -mm thick aluminum sheet, with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. F Plasticized Card -Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field- printed legends. Orange background, unless otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener G. Aluminum- Faced, Card -Stock Tags: Weather resistant, 18 -point minimum card stock faced on both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0 002 inch (0 05 mm) thick, laminated with moisture- resistant acrylic adhesive, punched for fasteners, and preprinted with legends to suit each application. 2.3 PRIMARY CABLE TAGS A. Provide embossed copper tag with dimensions of 1 1/2' wide x 5' long x 0 05 thick. Use 1/2 high embossed letters. Apply white paint into embossed characters. Include phase information into indentifier Permanently fasten to cable with plastic tie wraps. 2.4 POSTED DRAWINGS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Print electrical nser diagrams on 201b. bond paper (Blue print paper is not acceptable). Reduce drawings to approximately 1/2 size using Xerox reduction process. Contact engineer to obtain updated original plans for printing. B Mounting Frames: Extruded aluminum, 4 point screw mount with 1/8' clear plexiglass cover C. Operating Instructions. Printed in all capital letters of 12 pt. size minimum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ENGRAVED PLASTIC LAMINATE NAMEPLATES A. Provide nameplates for the following: 1 Equipment identification labels including, but not limited to: switchgear switchboards, panelboards, disconnect switches, motor starters, transformers, capacitors, fixed equipment, motor control centers, and transfer switches. 2. Special equipment outlet labels. (1/4 letters). MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. C. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. D Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws or rivets. Adhesive is unacceptable. E. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panel board that is recessed in finished locations. 3.2 WIRE AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers for control wiring as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams or equipment manufacturer's Shop Drawings for control wiring. B Provide identification labels with the following information in accordance with NEC 210 4(d). Conductors of power systems in this building are identified as follows. 280Y/120V 480Y/277V A Phase (left bus in panel) Black Brown B Phase (center bus in panel). Red Orange C Phase (nght bus in panel): Blue Yellow Neutral. White Gray Equipment Ground: Green Green Isolated Ground: Grn/Yel* Grn/Yel* *Green with yellow tracer 1 2.0 Mil, White Polyester Permanent Adhesive Material. Peel -off self sticking type. 2. Lettering: Black #10 font Arial on white opaque background. 3 In electrical rooms and closets, mechanical rooms, and other similar areas, post decal on front of panel, MCC, and /or switchboard. 4 In finished areas, where panel may be painted at a later time, post decal behind circuit breaker doors or behind dead front door where decal can be easily seen when circuits are being added. 3.3 PRIMARY CABLE TAGS 3.4 RACEWAY AND JUNCTION BOX COLOR CODING (IDENTIFICATION) SECTION 16075 PAGE 5 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Install primary cable tags at all pomts of accessibility such as manholes, padmounted switches and interior switchgear Firmly attach all tags to each cable phase using plastic tie wraps. Position tags so that they are clearly legible to the observer A. Identify accessible conduits routed vertically or through ceiling spaces containing medium voltage cable (voltages greater than 600V) by painting conduits with Orange Safety (FSC 1224) MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Conduit Identification: 1 In accessible ceiling spaces and exposed in unfinished areas, using an indelible marking pen, label all conduits 1 larger with panel and circuit numbers of conductors routed through the conduit. Label conduit at all wall penetrations and connections to all panels, junction boxes, and equipment served. 2. Identify floor /wall area directly above or adjacent to medium voltage conduits within 12 of the floor or wall. C. Junction box identification: 1 Label power system junction boxes located in accessible ceiling spaces with the respective circuit numbers of all power circuits and/or branch feeders contained. Hand written labels, written with indelible ink, shall be acceptable for this purpose. 3.5 POSTED DRAWINGS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Mount drawings and operating procedures on the wall immediately adjacent to the main piece of equipment for which the instructions apply If sufficient wall space is available, mount directly to one of the sheet metal panels of the equipment. O 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 16075 PAGE 6 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION paint. Stencil the legend 'DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" in Gloss Black (FSC 17038) paint minimum 2 high letters at intervals not exceeding 50 feet at visible locations. END OF SECTION 16075 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 16115 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS CABLE TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SUPPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes discrete J- Hooks, slings and related accessories for supporting low voltage cable bundles above accessible ceilings and below accessible raised floor systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Amencan National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) /Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) 1 ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 -B 1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard 2. ANSUTIA/EIA 569 -A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 3 ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code B Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1 UL 2043 Standard for Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessones Installed in Air Handling Spaces 2. UL 2239 Conduit, Tubing and Cable Support Hardware 1.4 DEFINITIONS UTP Unshielded twisted pair Pathway A senes of supports and accessories for placement of low voltage systems cables Main Pathway A low voltage systems pathway where the cable count exceeds 30 cables 1.5 SUMMARY A. Section includes J- hooks, slings and related accessories for supporting low voltage cable bundles above accessible ceilings and below accessible raised floor systems. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittal information in accordance with section 01300, additional requirements in Section 16010 and supplementary requirements described in this specification. B Product Data. Submit product data on all cable support devices and accessories. Indicate materials, finishes, load ratings, dimensions, listings, approvals and attachment methods. C Shop Drawings. For projects where the low voltage systems cable pathways are not shown on the drawings, they are to be contractor designed per Part 3 The contractor shall prepare and MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 16115 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS CABLE TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SUPPORTS submit proposed main pathway layout drawings for review and approval by the Owner's representative prior to installing supports. Shop drawings shall. 1 Indicate pathways on plan view 2. Include elevations and sections to indicate space allocations and coordination with work of other trades 3 Include details to describe the different support configurations, accessories, attaching means and cable groupings D Closeout Submittals 1 Provide complete copy of approved submittal documentation with the O &M Manuals. 2. As -built Drawings: Provide marked up as -built drawings of main pathways 1 7 QUALI TY ASSURANCE A. Low voltage system cable supports and accessones shall be listed to Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc Standard 2239 B Low voltage system cable supports and accessones shall have the manufacturers name and part number stamped on the part for identification. C. Pre Installation Meetings. Contractor shall set up a pre installation meeting to discuss low voltage cable support layout work and installation guidelines. Contractor shall organize meeting a minimum of 30 days prior to initiating cable support installation work. Attendees shall include contractor appropnate subcontractors, low voltage system vendors, architect and engineer Purpose of meeting shall be to coordinate work between the parties to have a consistent layout for all low voltage system cables, minimize interferences and to make cable system accessibility for future owner modifications and maintenance high pnonty issue for all installers. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of low voltage cable bundle supports with other construction elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance and access. Revise locations and elevations for those indicated as required to suit field conditions and as approved by Engineer B Examine drawings and existing conditions above ceilings and include additional supports in bid price to avoid ducts, pipes, conduits, etc. Installation in existing ceilings if very difficult. Include extra labor time involved in bid price. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WIDE BASE CABLE SUPPORTS A. J hooks complying with EIA /TIA 568 -B 1 and 569 -A structured cabling system requirements. Minimum size is 1 5/16 inch diameter loop for (50) 4 -pair UTP or 2 strand fiber optic cable or inner duct. Provide larger size or multiple hooks where required. Minimum 1 width and flared edges where cables enter and leave support. 2 inch diameter loop for (80) 4 -pair UTP or 2 strand fiber optic cable or inner duct. 4 inch diameter loop for (300) 4 -pair UTP or 2 strand fiber optic cable or tuner duct. B Accessories: Provide applicable accessones to independently support J' hooks from structure. This mcludes extender bracket for mounting multiple J hooks on a single support, fasteners and MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 16115 PAGE 3 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS CABLE TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SUPPORTS clamps for connecting to wall, beams, rods, dedicated support wires and C and Z Purlins as required for specific construction. C. Cable Retainers: Provide cable retainers at each J' hook D Finish 1 Dry Locations, Above Lay -in Ceiling, Below Raised Floor galvanized 2. Wet and Damp Locations: stainless steel E. Manufacturer 1 ERICO Caddy CableCat series 2. Chatsworth RapidTrak series 3 Or approved equivalent. 2.2 SOFT CABLE SLING SUPPORTS A. Adjustable sling cable supports suitable for plenums and complying with EIA /TIA 568 -B 1 and 569 -A structured cabling system requirements. 4 inch diameter loop for (220) 4 -pair UTP or 2 strand fiber optic cables or inner duct. 6 inch diameter loop for (425) 4 -pair UTP or 2- strand fiber optic cables or inner duct. B Accessories. Provide applicable accessories to independently support slings from structure. This includes fasteners and clamps for connecting to walls, beams, rods, ceiling tee bars, dedicated support wires and C and Z Purlins as required for specific construction C. Material 1 Construction: Polyethylene strands woven and laminated, reinforced seams, connected steel mountmg and fastemng hardware. 2. Suitable for plenum location installation D Manufacturer 1 ERICO Caddy CableCat 425 series 2. Or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All low voltage systems cables shall be supported. Provide supports along entire Pathway B Space supports a maximum of 48 inches apart and at each change of direction of the cables. C. Hang cable supports from 3/8" all thread rods, dedicated #8 galvanized ceiling drop wire or wall brackets connected directly to structure. Do not support from the ceiling grid or ceiling wire system. D Where specific main pathways are not indicated on the drawings, the cable pathways for all low voltage systems shall be designed by the contractor The contractor shall coordinate pathways with all other trades to achieve efficient utilization of available space, complete accessibility to allow maintenance of cable plant and economical future adds moves and changes. Contractor shall provide Main pathway shop drawings for review and approval by the Owner's representative MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 16115 PAGE 4 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS CABLE TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SUPPORTS E. Provide multiple hooks or slings at each hanger location as required by cable count and cable segregation requirements. F Fill supports with cabling to 50% or less of the manufacturer's recommended fill. Provide multiple supports where required cable count exceeds 50% fill. G Group cabling in separate supports by the following systems. Voice and Data Cabling TV Security and CCTV Fire Alarm When total cable count to a small group of work stations or offices is less than 24 the cables may be installed grouped in a single support of appropnate size. H. Interface with Other Work: Coordinate installation of supports with mechanical ductwork, piping and sprinkler system piping so that supports remain accessible after installation. I. Install low voltage cable support system above accessible ceilings and below accessible raised floor systems only J Elevation of Cable Supports. Contractor shall coordinate the allocation of ceiling space and the mounting elevations of various systems to allow maintenance and accessibility for future modifications. Low voltage system cable supports shall be as close to the ceiling as possible while allowing ceiling tiles to be removed. Supports shall be located to avoid interference with maintenance access to other equipment. K. Cable installation and supports shall comply with applicable provisions of EIA/TIA 569 -A and ANSI/NFPA 70 0 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 16115 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Building wire and cable Remote control and signal circuits Splices, connectors, and terminations B Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Amencan Society for Testing and Matenals (ASTM). B National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). C. Underwriter's Laboratones, Inc. (UL). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRE AND CABLE A. General SECTION 16120 PAGE 1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1 Copper conductor single insulated wire. 2. ASTM B1 solid conductors; ASTM B8 for stranded conductors 3 600 volt msulation class, 90 °C maximum operating temperature for dry and wet locations B Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables Type THHN/ THWN UL 83 listed, comply with NEMA WC5 C. Rubber Insulated Wires and Cables Type XHHW 2, UL 44 listed, comply with NEMA WC3 Type USE 2, UL 44 listed, comply with NEMA WC3 2.2 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CIRCUITS A. Class 1 1 Copper conductor single insulated wire MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2. Insulation type THHN/ THWN (90 °C), 600 volt insulation class 3 Tyre XHHW for ambient temperature less than 0 °C 4 UL 83 listed, ASTM B1 solid conductors, ASTM B8 for stranded conductors B Class 2 and 3 1 Copper conductor, multiple twisted conductors covered with an overall non metallic Jacket unless otherwise noted 2. 300 volt XLPE insulation rated 105 °C 3 UL listed for use in the space in which circuits will be mstalled 2.3 SPLICES, CONNECTORS TERMINALS A. Splices 1 Electrical Tape: 7 mil thick, PVC backing with flexibility and adhesion at 0 °F 2. Pre Stretched Tubmg: EPR pre stretched tubular rubber sleeve suitable for insulation of voltages up to 600 volts. 3M PST series or equivalent. 3 Heat Shrink Tubing: Thermally stabilized cross linked polyolefin with 3 to 1 expansion and internal adhesive sealant. Thomas Betts Shrink -Kon or equivalent. 4 Resin Filled Insulators: Plastic mold body with pourable insulating and sealing compound. 3M Scotchcast 82 or 90 series or equivalent. B Connectors 1 No 10 AWG and Smaller Pre insulated `twist -on type with mtegral spring and insulated housing per UL 486C. Manufacturers. Ideal, Thomas Betts, or 3M. 2. No 8 AWG and Larger Bolt or compression set type per UL 486C. Provide two hole compression set connectors for ground bus applications. Manufacturers: Thomas Betts, O.Z. Gedney C. Terminals 1 Stranded Conductors #10 and Smaller Comply with UL 486A 2. Heavy wall thickness copper, tin plated with nylon insulation 3 Thomas Betts Sta -Kon Terminals 4 Cable ties nylon locking type. Thomas Betts Ty -Rap 2.4 TERMINATIONS SECTION 16120 PAGE 2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Compression set, bolted, or screw type lug or direct to bolted or screw type terminal. 2.5 PLASTIC CABLE TIES A. Nylon or approved, locking type. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WIRE CABLE A. Sizing SECTION 16120 PAGE 3 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1 Use stranded conductors for #8 AWG and larger Conductors of #10 and #12 AWG may be solid or stranded at the contractor's option. 2. Minimum power and lighting branch circuit requirement of #12 AWG 3 Oversize neutral conductors for receptacle circuits using common neutrals, including those to power poles and powered furniture partitions for possible non linear loads. See drawings for sizing critena. B Color Coding 1 Color code wire in accordance with the coding shown below 208Y/120V 480Y/277V A Phase (Left bus in panel): Black Brown B Phase (Center bus in panel) Red Orange C Phase (Right bus in panel) Blue Yellow Neutral White Gray Equipment Ground Green Green Isolated Ground Gm/Yel* Grn/Yel* 2. If large conductors cannot be purchased with the correct insulation color, color code the conductors with wire and cable markers of the appropriate color Completely encircle the conductor with color coding tape for a minimum length of 6 inches at all accessible locations. 3 In the event that separate neutrals are specified with each phase conductor provide a white neutral conductor with a tracer of the same color as the corresponding phase conductor. C. Installation 1 Utilize type THHN /THWN wire for all power, lighting circuits except where the ambient temperature is below 0 °C, use Type XHHW installation. 2. Install all wiring in a raceway system unless otherwise specified. 3 Install wire only after building interior has been protected from the weather 4 Install wire only after mechanical work likely to damage wire has been completed. 5 Completely and thoroughly swab exterior raceways before installing wire. 6 Pull all conductors into a common raceway simultaneously 7 Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger 8. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. 9 Provide conductor vertical supporting device as required by NEC 300 -19 10 Conductors from one system shall not be intermixed in the same raceway as another system unless shown otherwise. Examples of circuits not be to be intermixed are 480Y/277 with 208Y/120 volt circuits, emergency power line voltage circuits with low voltage wiring, etc. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.2 REMOTE CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUITS A. Sizing #16 AWG minimum. B Installation. 1 Install cables in cable tray and cable rings. 2. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage. 3 Support cables above accessible ceilings; do not rest on ceiling tiles. 4 Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. 33 SPLICES, CONNECTORS TERMINALS A. Splices 1 Do not make splices without the approval of the engineer 2. Splice wires and cables only in accessible locations such as within junction boxes. 3 Make splices to carry full capacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. 4 Make below -grade splices m manholes and handholes watertight with pre stretched or heat shrinkable insulating tubing, or resin filled insulator B. Connectors 1 Except where equipment is furnished with bolted or screw type lug, use compression set pressure connectors with insulating covers. Use compression tools and die compatible with the connectors being installed. 2. Use bolt or compression -set type with application of insulating tape, pre stretched or heat shrinkable insulating tubing for splices and taps of #8 AWG copper conductors and larger 3 Torque conductor connections to manufacturer's recommended values. 4 Use pre insulated `twist -on' connectors with integral spring for splices and taps of #10 AWG copper conductors and smaller C. Terminals 0 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 16120 PAGE 4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1 Insulate ends of spare conductors with electrical tape and identify spare circuit number where appropriate. 2. Eye type crimped terminal for removable screw type terminal. Forked torque terminal when screw terminal cannot be removed. 3 Train wires to eliminate fanning of stands, crimp with proper tool and die. 4 Torque screw termination per manufacturer's recommended values. 5 Cable ties: neatly bundle conductors and cables together for support. Size cable ties sufficiently to accommodate the multiple cables being supported. END OF SECTION 16120 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Related Sections 16740 Telephone Computer Raceways and Boxes 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures and cabinets for electrical wiring. B. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 16010 General Provisions. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) D National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) SECTION 16130 PAGE 1 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010 Submit product data only for surface raceways and fittings, wireways, enclosures and cabinets. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80 1 UL 6. B Intermediate Metal Conduit: ANSI C80 6, UL 1242. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI E. Plastic Coated Rigid Steel Intermediate Metal Conduit: NEMA RNI 2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) 2.4 SURFACE RACEWAY 2.5 RIGID NON METALLIC CONDUIT (RNC) A. Schedule 40 and 80• UL 651 B Type EB and B UL 651 NEMA TC6. SECTION 16130 PAGE 2 RACEWAYS AND BOXES C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1 UL 514B galvamzed malleable iron or non corrosive alloy threaded fittings. Erickson and watertight split couplings are permitted. Set screw and running thread fittings are not permitted. D Conduit Bodies and Fittings Manufacturers. American Electric; Construction Materials Group, Crouse Hinds; Div of Cooper Industries, Emerson Electric Co. Appleton Electric Co. Hubbell, Inc. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co Lamson Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products, O- Z/Gedney Unit of General Signal, Scott Fetzer Co. Adalet -PLM, Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. Link Seal. 2.2 ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Hot dip galvanized, electrogalvanized or sherardized, steel tubing, ANSI C80.3 UL 797 B Fittings: NEMA FB 1 UL 514B, steel or malleable iron, compression or set screw Indentor drive -on, die cast or pressure cast fittings not permitted. C. Conduit Bodies and Fittings Manufacturers: American Electric; Bridgeport, Construction Materials Group, Crouse Hinds, Div of Cooper Industries, Emerson Electric Co. Appleton Electric Co. Hubbell, Inc. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co Lamson Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products, O -Z /Gedney Unit of General Signal, Scott Fetzer Co. Adalet -PLM, Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. Link Seal. A. UL 1 galvanized, or zinc coated flexible steel or aluminum for dry locations. Flexible metallic tubing not permitted. Fittings: malleable iron or steel. B Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit. UL 360, PVC weatherproof cover over flexible steel conduit. Fittings. galvanized or zinc coated. A. Surface Metal Raceway Galvanized steel with snap on covers. Manufacturer's standard ivory or buff painted finish. UL 5 B Types, sizes, and channels as indicated on drawings and required for each application with fittings that match and mate with raceways. C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include: Airey- Thompson Co. Inc. A T Power Systems, American Electric; Construction Materials Group, Butler Manufacturing Co. Walker Division, Wiremold Co. (The); Electrical Sales Division, Mono Systems. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. Fittings: NEMA TC3 2.6 EXPANSION FITTINGS 2.7 RACEWAY PENETRATION SEALS SECTION 16130 PAGE 3 RACEWAYS AND BOXES A. Malleable iron, hot dip galvanized allowing 4 '(100mm) 2' (50mm)) conduit movement. OZ/Gedney AX Senes or equivalent by manufacturer listed m 2.1.D A. Thruwall and Floor Seals. New construction OZ /Gedney FSK Series. Existing construction OZ /Gedney CSM Series or equivalent by manufacturer lists in 2.1.D 2.8 RACEWAY SEALING FITTINGS A. For one through four conductors. OZ /Gedney CSB Series. B For greater than four conductors: OZ/Gedney EYA Senes with sealing compound. C Low temperature or hazardous locations. OZ /Gedney EYA Series with sealing compound. 2.9 CABLE SUPPORTS A. OZ/Gedney Type S or equivalent by manufacturer listed in 2.1.D 2.10 METAL WIREWAYS A. Material. Sheet metal, size and shape as indicated. Manufacturer's standard finish. UL 870 B Fittings and Accessories. Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. C. Manufacturer Subject to compliance with the requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include: Hoffman Engineering Co. Keystone/Rees, Inc. Square D Co Circle AW D Wireway Covers: Screw -cover type. 2.11 ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS A. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. 1 Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. B Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal bamers to separate winng of different systems and voltage, and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI• 2.12 OUTLET JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Intenor Wiring: 1 Outlet and Pull Boxes. Pressed steel, zmc coated with plaster ring where applicable. NEMA OS1 UL 514A. 2. Large Junction and Pull Boxes. Fabncated sheet steel, zinc coated or baked enamel finish, with return flange and screw retained cover 3 Concrete and Masonry Specifically designed boxes for casting in concrete or mounting in masonry walls for that purpose. 4 Mounting. Provide boxes with fan side box support Caddy J1A series or Caddy quick mount H senes. B Extenor Wining: 1 Above Grade: a. Outlet and junction boxes. Cast or malleable iron or cast of corrosion resistant alloy complete with conduit hubs, compatible with raceway to which it is connected. NEMA FB1 b Pull boxes. Fabricated steel and hot dipped galvanized complete with malleable iron hubs. c. All boxes labeled for damp (NEMA 3R) or wet (NEMA 4) locations as applicable. 2. Below Grade: a. Where exposed to earth: Constructed of precast concrete with size, configuration, cover, grates and reinforcing as required by the particular installation. Manufacturer Utility Vault or Renton Concrete Products. b. 2.13 SOUND ISOLATION PADS 3.2 WIRING METHODS A. Interior• Use the following wiring methods: SECTION 16130 PAGE 4 RACEWAYS AND BOXES A. Polybutene putty sheet caulking with inert fillers. Lowry's outlet box pads (available from Harry A. Lowry Associates, 11176 Penrose St. Sun Valley CA 91352, phone (818) 768 4661). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1 Exposed. Electric Metallic Tubing. 2. Exposed Subject to Damage (i.e. from vehicles, carts and moving pallets including stubups in concrete): Rigid Steel or Intermediate Metal Conduit. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3 Concealed. Electric Metallic Tubing. 4 Connection to Vibrating Equipment (including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor Driven Equipment). Flexible Metal Conduit, (except in wet or damp locations, use Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit) with 90° loop, maximum 6 feet long. B Patient Care Areas: All branch circuiting to patient care areas shall be installed in metallic conduit. C. Exterior Use the following wiring methods. 1 Exposed. Rigid Steel Conduit or Intermediate Metal Conduit. 2. Concealed. Rigid Steel Conduit, Intermediate Metal Conduit. 3 Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor Driven Equipment) Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit. 4 Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250 NEMA type 3R or type 4 D Raceway Embedded in Slabs 1 Raceways are prohibited from being embedded in slabs except where conduits pass through floor and 90 degrees to floor slab 2. Stub -ups rigid steel conduit or IMC E. Raceways Underground 1 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit, schedule 40 2. See Section 16106 3 Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Transition from nonmetallic conduit to rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above floor Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab F Hazardous Locations: Use the following wiring methods. 1 Rigid Steel or Intermediate Metal Conduit. 2. Boxes and Enclosures: Cast Metal Boxes, NEMA FB 1 3.3 INSTALLATION SECTION 16130 PAGE 5 RACEWAYS AND BOXES A. Provide raceways concealed in construction unless noted otherwise or unless specifically authorized by the Architect. B Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide not less than 6-6' (200cm) headroom. Where raceways are installed in exit pathways provide not less than 7' -0' headroom. Do not block access to junction boxes, valves, mechanical equipment or prevent removal of ceiling panels, etc. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D Use raceway fittings compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. E. Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow the surface contours. I Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports where practical. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16130 PAGE 6 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 2. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel, otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. F Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight. G Terminations. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations are not secure with 1 locknut, use 2 locknuts. 1 inside and 1 outside the box. Provide bushings on all raceways 1 1/2 (40mm) and larger H. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so the coupling is square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed. I. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc coated steel or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 -1b (90 -kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of the pull wire. J Size raceways not sized on the drawings per manufacturers shop drawings, applicable standards or other section of this specification. K. Maintain 12' (300mm) mimmum clearance to high temperature (greater than 90 °c) surfaces. L. When construction involves masonry work, assemble and install raceways at the same time as the wall is erected. Avoid surface cut masonry units whenever such units are to remain unplastered or uncovered in completed construction. 3.4 RIGID METAL AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT A. All connections watertight. 3.5 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY A. Verify exact mounting and locations with Architect prior to rough -in. Install parallel to a building surface (i.e. wall, ceiling, floor) and fasten to surface as recommended by manufacturer Mount so raceway is in the least obvious location. Provide all required boxes, extensions, fittings, elbows and devices for a complete installation. Ream all cuts smooth and provide bushings in ends of V2" (15mm) and 3 /4 (20mm) runs at all boxes and devices. 3.6 RACEWAY PENETRATION SEALS A. Exterior wall surfaces above grade: Provide watertight seal around all raceways. For concrete construction above ground level, cast raceway m wall or core drill wall and hard pack with a nuxture of equal parts of sand and cement. For other types of construction use method acceptable to Architect. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B. Roofs: Provide flashed and hot mopped weatherproof seal, or a pitch pan filled and sealed to be weatherproof where raceway penetrates roof membrane. Provide a weatherhead on all raceway stubups penetrating roof. 3.7 RACEWAYS SEALING FITTINGS SECTION 16130 PAGE 7 RACEWAYS AND BOXES C. Fire rated construction. Seal penetrations to maintain fire rating of construction penetrated as specified in Division 7 Firestopping. A. Provide watertight seal in the interior of all raceways which pass through building roof, ground floor slab or through outside walls of the building above or below grade. Seal on the end inside the building, using raceway sealing fittings manufactured for the purpose. Locate fittings at suitable accessible locations. For concealed raceways install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank coverplate to match finish of adjacent plates or surfaces. Exception: Sealing fittings are not required on raceways through the floor slab when the raceway does not extend beyond the building footprint. B Provide sealing fittings or duct seal in j -box for all raceways entering freezers and refngeration units. 3.8 HANGERS FOR RACEWAYS A. Raceways 1 and larger. Provide lay -in pipe hangers on 1/4 (6mm) or larger all threaded rods attached to metal ceiling inserts or to structural members at not greater than 10' -0" (3m) on center and within 12 (300mm) of each change in direction. B When more than two raceways will use the same routing, group together on a channel trapeze support system supported by 3/8' (9.5mm) (minunum) threaded rods attached to metal ceiling inserts or structural members. Size supports for multiple raceways for 25% future capacity C. Suspended ceiling systems: Do not attach raceways to ceiling suspension system hangers. Raceways 3/4 (20mm) and smaller serving equipment located within ceiling cavity or mounted on or supported by the ceiling grid system may be supported by dedicated #12 ga. galvanized, soft annealed mild steel wire hangers. Two raceways maximum per hanger Attach raceways with clips manufactured for the purpose. 3.9 EXPANSION FITTINGS A. Provide expansion fittings for raceways crossing expansion joints, building separation walls, and seismic joints. Provide bonding jumper 3.10 CABLE SUPPORTS A. Provide cable support for vertical cable runs as required by NFPA 70 3.11 STUB UP CONNECTIONS A. Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with the finished floor Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16130 PAGE 8 RACEWAYS AND BOXES (150 mm) above the floor For future equipment connections install threaded plugs flush with floor 3.12 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Firmly anchor boxes directly or with concealed bracing to building studs or joists. Boxes must be so attached that they will not 'rock' or 'shift' when devices are operated. B Flush Mounting: Install front edge (box or plaster ring) even with the finished surface of the wall or ceiling, except for those mounted above accessible ceilings or where drawings indicate surface mounting is permitted. C. Do not mount flush boxes back -to -back. Provide 6" (150mm) minimum horizontal separation between closest edges of the boxes. Option. Use sound isolation pads or other sound proofing method acceptable to Architect. D When boxes are installed in fire resistive walls and partitions provide 24 (600mm) horizontal separation between boxes on opposite sides of a wall in accordance with IBC 712.3.2. In addition, limit penetrations to 16 square inches (103 square centimeters) per penetration and not to exceed a total of 100 square inches per 100 square feet (9.3 square meters) of wall area. Option: Apply fire stop putty pads acceptable to the fire marshal. E. Label: Provide labels per section 16075 3.13 ELECTRICAL OUTLETS A. General. Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other Sections and trades. Study all drawings that form a part of this contract and confer with the various trades involved to eliminate conflicts between the work of this Section and the work of other trades. Check and verify outlet locations indicated on Architectural drawings, door swings, installation details and layouts of suspended ceilings and locations of all plumbing, heating and ventilating equipment. B Centered on Built -In Work: In the case of doors, cabinets, recesses or similar features, or where outlets are centered between two such features, such as between a door jamb and a cabinet, make these outlet locations exact. Relocate any outlets which are located off center C Vertical and Horizontal Relationships: Align outlets exactly on center lines horizontally or vertically where more than one outlet is shown or specified to be at the same elevation or one above the other Relocate as directed all such outlets (including fighting, receptacle, power, signal and thermostat outlets) which are not so installed, at no additional cost to Owner. D Device Outlet Height: Measure from the finished floor to the center line, unless otherwise noted. Switches 4 feet, set vertically Receptacles 18 inches, set vertically or as indicated Telephone 18 inches, set vertically or as indicated Other As noted or as directed by Architect E. Ceiling Location: Locate outlet either at the comer joint or in the center of a panel for acoustical material, whichever is closer to the normal spacing. Locate all outlets in the same room in same panel position. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.14 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. In ceilings of Acoustical Material. Locate in accordance with approved ceiling layout plans and so that fixtures replace full size ceiling tiles wherever possible. 3.15 ELECTRICAL WORK IN COUNTERBACKS, MILLWORK AND CASEWORK A. Provide templates, where required, to other trades for drilling and cutting to insure accurate location of electrical fixtures (outlets and devices) as venfied with the Architect. B Provide all wiring, devices, plates and connections required by said fixtures. 3.16 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT A. Provide outlet boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve equipment furnished under this or other Divisions and provide final connections to all equipment. B Outlet box required if equipment has pigtail wires for external connection, does not have space to accommodate circuit wiring or requires a wire with insulation rating different from circuit wiring used. C. Study equipment details to assure proper coordination. 3.17 BLANK COVERS A. Provide blank covers or plates to match coverplates specified in section 16140 over all boxes that do not contain devices or are not covered by equipment. 3.18 DEVICE BOXES CONTAINING EMERGENCY AND NORMAL DEVICES A. Permitted only with steel barrier manufactured especially for the purpose of dividing the box into two completely separate compartments. 3.19 DEVICE BOXES CONTAINING MULTIPLE DEVICES AND WIRING RATED OVER 150 VOLTS TO GROUND AND OVER 300 VOLTS BETWEEN CONDUCTORS A. Permitted only with steel barrier manufactured especially for the purpose of dividing the box into separate compartments for each device having exposed live parts. 3.20 JUNCTION OR PULL BOXES B Permanently accessible. SECTION 16130 PAGE 9 RACEWAYS AND BOXES A. Pull and junction boxes: Install as shown, or as necessary to facilitate pulling of wire and to limit the number of bends within code requirements. C. Do not intermix conductors from one system in same junction box or pull box as another system unless shown or specifically authonzed otherwise. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16130 PAGE 10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES D In suspended ceiling spaces. Support from structure independently from ceiling suspension system. E. The drawings do not necessarily show every pull or junction box required. Add all required boxes. 3.21 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS A. Conceal the electrical outlet behind the unit housing when provided for by manufacturer 3.22 COLOR CODING A. Color Code all junction boxes installed m accessible ceiling spaces and exposed m unfinished areas using spray paint on the box and entire cover in the following manner 480 Power Brown Telephone Black 277V Lighting Yellow Nurse Call Lt. Blue 120/208V Unpainted Public Address Silver Emergency Power Orange Television Gold Fire Alarm Red B Use black felt tip marker following painting to indicate the circuit numbers in 1 (25mm) high letters contained within. O 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 16130 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PARTI GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 16140 PAGE 1 WIRING DEVICES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes switches, receptacles, dimmers, device plates and multi outlet assemblies. B Related sections include 16145 Lighting Control Devices. 1.3 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). B Underwriters Laboratones (UL). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010 Submit product data for each device utilized in the project. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Provide receptacles to match plug configurations for Owner furnished equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURE A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed in the following paragraphs. All devices utilized on the project shall be from the same manufacturer 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Hospital Grade (15 amp) Duplex NEMA 5 -15R configuration (15 amp, 120 volt), Pass Seymour PT8200 series. B. Hospital Grade (20 amp) Duplex NEMA 5 -20R configuration (20 amp, 120 volt), Pass Seymour PT8300 series. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16140 PAGE 2 WIRING DEVICES C. Heavy Duty Hospital Grade: Duplex NEMA 5 -20R configuration (20 amp 120 volt), Pass Seymour PT8300 senes. D Specification Grade: Duplex NEMA 5 -15R configuration (15 amp 120 volt), Pass Seymour PT5262A senes. E. Clock Receptacle- NEMA 5 -15R with hanger bracket. Flush Type: Hubbell 5235 Recessed Type: Leviton 5361 -CH, or equivalent by manufacturer listed in 2.2A. F Twist Lock: NEMA L5 -20R configuration (20 amp, 120 volt, locking type) Hubbell 2310A, or equivalent by manufacturer listed m 2.2A. G Isolated Ground. Hospital Grade, NEMA 5 -15R configuration, orange face, and isolated ground terminal. Hubbell IG 8200 or equivalent by manufacturer listed in 2.2A. H. Safety Receptacles: Safety type receptacles for designated areas shall be hospital grade, with safety shutters to make it necessary for both plug blades to be inserted to complete a circuit. NEMA 5 -15R configuration. Pass Seymour PTTR62H series. NEMA 5 -20R configuration Pass Seymour PTTR63H series; Safety receptacles are the same as tamperproof receptacles. I. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles (GFCI): Hospital grade, NEMA 5 -15R configuration, duplex receptacle with 4 6 milliamps leakage current trip level. Feed through type to protect downstream receptacles on the same circuit. Cooper HGF15V Hubbell HGF 8200I, Pass Seymour 1591 -SHG, Leviton 8598 -HGI. J Safety Type Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles: Hospital grade NEMA 5 -15R configuration, duplex receptacle with 4 -6 milliamps leakage current trip level. Feed through type to protect downstream receptacles on the same circuit. Pass Seymour 1594- HG -TR. Safety receptacles are the same as tamperproof receptacles K. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Modules: 4 6 milliamps leakage current trip level. Leviton 6490 L. 208 Volt Receptacles: NEMA 14 -20R configuration (20 amp, 208 volt), 3 wire grounding, unless otherwise indicated. Hubbell #5462 -I or equivalent by manufacturer listed in 2.2A. 2.3 SWITCHES A. 'Specification Grade' Federal Specification WS -896, back and side wired, rated 277 volt, 20 amp. Single pole, double pole, keyed, 3 -way pilot light, locking type as required or as noted. Bryant 4901 -I, Cooper 1221V Hubbell 1221 I, Leviton 1221 I, Pass Seymour 20AC1 -I. B Interchangeable type rated same as above. C. Momentary Contact Line Voltage Switches. Single pole, double throw 3 -wire, spring return to open. Rating same as above. D Pilot fight switches. Lighted handle when "ON' or with separate pilot light. 2.4 DIMMERS A. Incandescent Preset Dimmers. Incandescent wall box dimmers rated for incandescent, inductive or low voltage loads as required by the load served with RFI filter and preset off control. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.5 COLOR SECTION 16140 PAGE 3 WIRING DEVICES Dimmer shall be capable of being controlled by multiple remotes and automatically come back to the previously set light level after power outages. Dimmer shall fit in a standard rectangular wall plate and gang with other standard switches and receptacles utilizing standard faceplates. Provide dimmer rated for 125% of the maximum wattage that can be installed in the controlled fixtures (minimum). Cooper SM600W Leviton Mural MLI_ 1LW I Senes, Lightolier Sunrise Preset ZP600VA, ZP1000VA Series, Lutron Maestro Series. B. Fluorescent Preset Dimmers: Compatible with the fluorescent dimming ballasts installed in the fixtures to be controlled. Provide dimmers with a preset off control, capable of being controlled by multiple remotes, and gang with other standard switches and receptacles utilizing standard rectangular style faceplates. Leviton Mural Senes, Lightolier ZP600F or ZP 1000F Series, Lutron Maestro Series. A. Ivory for switch handles and receptacle faces except as follows, 1 Brown in areas selected by Architect (venfy). 2. Red for emergency circuits. 3 Orange for isolated ground circuits. 2.6 DEVICE PLATES A. Configuration: Single and combination type to match corresponding wiring devices. B. Attachment Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. C. Interior Recessed Boxes. Stainless steel type 302 with satin finish. D Interior Surface Boxes. Pressed raised steel to match size of outlet box. E. Exterior Weather resistant hinged cover, Hubbell Bell 5028-0, Leviton 4992 Cooper 996. For other receptacles provide cover to match receptacle. F Exterior Raintight while in use hinged cover, Hubbell Bell 5752 -0, Leviton 5977 -CL, Cooper 4966. For other receptacles provide cover to match receptacle. G Identification 1 Engrave emergency receptacle device plates with 'EMERGENCY' above the receptacle with the panelboard and circuit number supplying them engraved below the receptacle. Engraving shall be approximately 3/16' high, red filled characters. 2. Engrave normal receptacle coverplates with the circuit number supplying them below the receptacle with 3/16' high, black filled letters. 3 For all receptacles other than 15 and 20 amp, 120 volts, engrave coverplate or provide separate nameplate with ampere rating, voltage and phase. 4 The electrical contractor shall be responsible to have faceplates on all owner furnished equipment and equipment furnished under other divisions engraved with circuit number, and 'EMERGENCY' (where applies) as specified in this section. This mcludes but is not limited to: headwalls, gas columns and booms, patient consoles, medical rail systems, custom casework with electrical devices, etc. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING 3.2 RECEPTACLES B Heavy Duty Hospital Grade: Provide in the locations indicated on the drawings. C. Provide isolated ground receptacles m the locations shown on the drawings. 3.3 ORIENTATION 3.4 DEVICE PLATES C. Install device plates after painting is complete. 3.5 ENGRAVING SECTION 16140 PAGE 4 WIRING DEVICES A. Rigidly fasten (without play) outlet boxes and devices at proper position with wall to bring receptacle flush with plate or switch handle the proper distance through plate. Align devices and plates plumb. A. Hospital Grade: Provide hospital grade receptacles in all patient care areas, operating rooms, patient comdors, work rooms, equipment rooms, utility rooms, patient preparation rooms, exam rooms and nurses stations. Provide 15 amp receptacles in all locations except provide 20 amp receptacles on dedicated 20 amp circuits. D Provide exterior GFCI receptacle within 25' -0' of each roof mounted mechanical equipment, for all outdoor receptacles, and other locations shown on the drawings. E. Provide safety receptacles in pediatric care areas, alcoholism and substance abuse treatment areas, exam rooms, waiting areas and as shown on the electrical drawings. A. Set switches with handle operating vertically up position 'ON' Set receptacles vertically with ground pm up or when construction requires horizontal mounting with ground pin left. A. Provide for wiring devices, telephone and signal outlets. Plate to cover cutout for device outlet box. B For remodel projects or for additions to existing construction provide new plates on existing outlet boxes unless the existing plate matches new plates in construction and appearance. D Provide exterior rain tight while in use covers for extenor receptacles in wet locations. Otherwise provide weather resistant covers. A. Engrave coverplates on all owner furnished equipment and equipment furnished under other divisions with circuit number, panelboard and emergency' (where applies) as specified in this section. This includes but is not limited to. headwalls, gas columns and booms, patient consoles, medical rail systems, custom casework with electrical devices, etc. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.6 DIMMERS SECTION 16140 PAGE 5 WIRING DEVICES A. Install wall box dimmers to achieve circuit rating after derating for ganging as required by manufacturer B Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove excess plaster from interior of outlet boxes. B Clear devices and coverplates after painting is complete. Replace stained or improperly painted devices or coverplates. m 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 16140 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices. 1 Indoor occupancy sensors 2. Outdoor photocell switches 3 Time switches 4 Multipole contactors SECTION 16145 PAGE 1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES B Related Sections include the following: 1 Section 16120 Conductors and Cables 2. Section 16140 Wiring Devices for light switches and wall -box dimmers 3 Section 16500 Lighting and 16501 Light Fixture Schedule for light fixture ballasts. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. LED. Light Emitting Diode. B PIR. Passive Infrared. C. PDT Passive Dual Technology 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010 B Product Data. Provide clearly marked and legible data sheets for each item of equipment being installed on the project. This shall include each major replaceable component that is part of a larger assembly Data sheets should clearly indicate: 1 Equipment manufacturer make, model number, size, nameplate data, etc. 2. Dimensional and performance data for specific umt provided as appropriate 3 Required environmental operating parameters 4 UL, FM and ETL listing and category 5 Manufacturer contact information includmg address, telephone number, facsimile number email address, web site address and contact person or persons. 6. Local manufacturer's representative contact mformation including address, telephone number, facsimile number, email address, web site address and contact person or persons. C. Shop Drawings. Show installation details for occupancy and fight -level sensors. 1 Lighting plan showing location, orientation, and coverage area of each sensor 2. Interconnection diagrams showing field installed wiring. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16145 PAGE 2 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES D Label List: Submit list of proposed text for all labels prior to manufacturing for review and approval by Owner's representative. E. Warranty Submit a copy of product warranty that complies with contract document requirements. Where these requirements exceed manufacturer's standard warranty include cost of extended warranty in contract pnce. F Maintenance Requirements: Submit mamtenance requirements manual or guidelines. This document should detail the requirements necessary to comply with the warranty This is required for the submittal process and is in addition to the O &M requirements. G. Samples: Provide sample devices and finishes plus other samples when requested, as part of the submittal process 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling- mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1 Manufacturer shall have been in the business of manufacturing and providmg service for lighting control equipment for similar capabilities and size, under the same name and ownership, for a minimum of three years preceding bid date of the project 2. All components and assemblies shall be factory pre- tested prior to installation. 3 Factory trained technicians shall be on site for start-up, commissioning and training 4 Factory trained technicians shall be available for telephone support twenty four (24) hours a day seven (7) days a week B Regulatory Requirements 1 Underwnters Laboratones. Provide U.L. listed lighting control equipment. 2. Code of Federal Regulations. 47 CFR FCC All assemblies are to be in compliance with FCC emissions standards specified in Part 15 for Class A application. 17 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty The manufacturer shall provide a written warranty agreeing to provide parts to replace any portion of the lighting control system equipment that fails due to material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from warranty commencement. B Warranty Commencement: Warranty shall begin at the point of substantial completion of the system installation, which is defined as the date when commissioning and owner training has been completed and the owner obtains beneficial use of the system. C. Warranty Replacement Parts: The manufacturer shall be able to ship replacement parts within 24 hours for any component that that fails due to material or workmanship dunng the warranty period. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS SECTION 16145 PAGE 3 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES A. Subject to compliance with the contract documents, provide products from one of the following manufacturers. 1 Douglas 2. Horton 3 Hubble 4 ILC 5 Intermatic, Inc 6. Leviton/PCI 7 Lighting Control Design (LC &D) 8. Lithoma Lighting 9 Luton Microwatt 10 Microlite 11 NexLight 12. Novitas, Inc. 13 Paragon Electric Co. 14 Powerline Communication, Inc. (PCI) 15 SensorSwitch 16. Square D 17 TORK 18. TriaTek 19 Watt Stopper (The) 2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS 2.3 SWITCH -BOX OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. General Operation 1 The Occupancy Sensor system shall sense the presence of human activity within the desired space and fully control the on/off function of the loads automatically Sensors shall turn on the load within 2 feet of entrance and shall not initiate on' outside of entrance. 2. Sensing technologies shall be completely passive in nature, in that the occupancy sensor system shall not emit or interfere with any other electronic device, or human characteristic. Acceptable known technologies are Passive Infrared (PIR), or Micro phonic. 3 Upon detection of human activity by the detector, a Time Delay shall be initiated to maintain the light on for a field adjustable pre -set period. 4 Mounting a. Sensor Suitable for mounting m any position on a standard outlet box. b Relay. Externally mounted through a 1/2 inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments. Recessed and concealed behind hinged door 5 Automatic Photo Sensor Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc to turn lighting off when selected light level is present. A. General MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 Sensor Time Delay shall be factory set for typical applications, and field adjustable from 30 seconds to 20 minutes. Photo sensor override shall be factory set in the off mode, but be field adjustable. All adjustments shall be concealed once installed. 2. Sensor must be rated for 800 watts at 120 VAC, suitable for incandescent light fixtures, fluorescent light fixtures with magnetic or electronic ballasts, or 1/6 hp motors or rated for 1000 watts at 277 VAC, suitable for fluorescent light fixtures with magnetic or electronic ballasts, or 1/3 hp motors minimum. Sensor shall be capable of parallel wiring for 3 -way switching applications. 3 Sensor must not protrude out from the cover plate more than 0 37 inches, and recess into the switch box more than 1 inch. Sensor must provide a vertical sliding Off/Auto ovemde switch, and green LED motion indicator 2.4 LINE VOLTAGE CEILING SENSORS SECTION 16145 PAGE 4 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES B Passive Infrared (PIR) Technology 1 PIR sensing, incorporating a nominal one half inch focal length Fresnel lens, designed to view at least 9 inches above and 9 mches below the horizontal plane when measured 10 feet from the sensor The PIR beam pattern must be at least 170 degrees with 20 separate beams evenly spaced. A. Sensor shall be a self contained dual voltage ceiling mounted device capable of directly switching loads upon detection of human activity Sensor must be circular and mount to either a single gang enclosure, or surface mount to a round surface raceway pancake box. B Sensor must be rated for 120 through 277 VAC and be capable of switching zero to 600 Watts of Electronic Ballast loads. Sensors must be capable of parallel winng for multi- sensor applications. C. Sensor Time Delay shall be factory set for typical applications, and field adjustable from 30 seconds to 20 minutes. Sensor must provide a green LED motion indicator B Passive Dual Technology (PDT) sensing must incorporate PIR with Micro phonics, which utilizes a passive microphone with automatic gain control (AGC) to sense both occupants moving and sounds. The PIR must be used to imtiate an on condition, once on the PIR or Micro phonics shall keep the load on. After the time delay expires and the load goes off, the Micro phonics shall remain active up to 10 seconds as a back -up grace period. 2.5 CONTROL RELAYS A. Industrial Control Relays: Rated 600V 20A convertible contacts. Square D Class 8501 XMO senes. B General Purpose Relays: Rated 120/ 240 volt, 10A. Square D Class 8501 Type K plug in series with screw terminal socket. 2.6 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote Control Power Sources. Not smaller than No. 12 AWG, complying with Section 16120 Conductors and Cables. B Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Mulhconductor cable with stranded copper conductors not smaller than No. 22 AWG, complying with Section 16120 Conductors and Cables. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16145 PAGE 5 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES C. Class 1 Control Cable- Multiconductor cable with stranded copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG, complying with Section 16120 Conductors and Cables. D Install unshielded, twisted -pair cable for control and signal transmission conductors, complying with Section 16120 Voice and Data Communication Cabling. 2.7 OUTDOOR PHOTOCELL SWITCHES A. Solid state with DPDT dry contacts rated for 1800 VA tungsten or 1000 VA inductive, to operate connected relay contactor coils, microprocessor input, and complying with UL 773A. 1 Light -Level Monitonng Range: 1.5 to 20 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range. 2. Time Delay 15- second minimum, to prevent false operation. 3 Surge Protection. Metal -oxide varistor type, complying with IEEE C62.41 for Category Al locations. 4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEEC136 10, with base. Provide with stem mounting or stem and swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the North sky exposure. 2.8 TIME SWITCHES (TIME CLOCKS) A. Digital Time Switches. Electronic, solid -state programmable units with alphanumeric display complying with UL 917 1 Contact Configuration: DPDT 2. Contact rating: 20A ballast load, 120/ 240 VAC a. Program: Single channel, 2 on -off set points on a 24 -hour schedule, allowing different set points for each day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays. b Circuitry Allow connection of a photoelectric relay to substitute for on and off function of a program. c. Astronomical Time All channels. d. Battery Backup- For schedules and time clock. 3 Digital Wall Box Time Switches. Electronic, solid -state programmable unit with numeric display a. Contact Configuration: SPST b. Contact Rating: 0 -800W ballasted 120 -V ac, or 0 -1200W ballasted 277 V ac. c. Program: 8 on -off set points on a 24 -hour schedule. 2.9 MULTIPLE CONTACTORS A. Descnption: Electrically operated and mechanically held, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508 1 Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high- inrush ballasts (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). 2. Control -Coil Voltage: 120 V 3 Enclosure: Indoor NEMA 1 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.10 CONTROL RELAYS A. Industrial Control Relays. Rated 600V 20A convertible contacts. Square D Class 8501 XMO series. B General Purpose Relays. Rated 120/ 240 volt, 10A. Square D Class 8501 Type K plug in senes with screw terminal socket. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION A. Install and aim sensors m locations to achieve at least 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Winng Method. Comply with Section 16120 Conductors and Cables. B Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 16120 Electncal Identification. B Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.5 SYSTEM STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING SECTION 16145 PAGE 6 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1 After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. 2. Operational Test: Verify actuation of each sensor and adjust time delays. B Remove and replace lighting control devices where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. A. Commissioning shall take place pnor to demonstration of system to Owner After the system has been installed the Contractor shall provide manufacturer's recommended commissioning with factory trained and authonzed technicians on -site, to: 1 Verify that the contractor has properly installed and interconnected all necessary components. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16145 PAGE 7 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 2. Venfy correct operation of all system components. 3 Verify that all switch and contact inputs are m compliance with contract requirements. 4 Aim and adjust all occupancy sensors and photocell devices for proper operation. 3.6 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION A. System Demonstration 1 Schedule demonstration a minimum of two -weeks prior to system turn over and substantial completion. Schedule with owner's representative and electrical engmeer 2. Demonstrate complete system operation and contract compliance to designated owner's representative and engineer to prove system is functional and ready for comprehensive training. B System Instruction 1 The Contractor shall after one week (minimum) written notification to Architect conduct an instruction session during which all maintenance and operational aspects of the system will be described and demonstrated to personnel selected by the Owner The session shall be conducted by a Contractor's representative thoroughly familiar with the characteristics of the system. 0 M manual information regarding the system shall be turned over to the Architect pnor to scheduling the instruction session. 2. Trammg shall utilize the following draft documents. a. Draft O &M Manual b. Contractor's record drawings 3 The training effort shall validate the O &M Manual and record drawing documentation. 2007 Mahlurn Architects END OF SECTION 16145 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 16452 PAGE 1 GROUNDING A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, includmg General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Grounding systems shall be provided for equipment grounds and bondmg as required by code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS A. Copper only sized per code. Bare or green insulated in sizes #10 AWG or larger Green insulated for size #12 AWG. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GROUNDING, GENERAL A. Provide all grounding for electrical systems and equipment as required by codes and as specified herein. B Branch Circuit Grounding: All branch circuits in patient areas shall include an insulated green ground wire connected between the branch circuit panelboard ground bus and the wiring device (or equipment) ground terminal that the branch circuit serves. One ground wire m each branch circuit raceway looped between ground terminals, is required. For the purposes of this code requirement, the entire project area up to a height of eight feet above the floor shall be considered to be a patient occupied area. Green tape identification (in lieu of green insulation) on ground wires is not acceptable. 3.2 SIZE OF GROUND WIRE A. As required by National Electric Code. Where ground wire is exposed to physical damage protect with rigid non ferrous conduit as permitted by applicable code. 3.3 CONNECTION TO THE POWER GROUND BUS A. Furnish and install connections in accordance with the codes, including but not limited to 1 Raceway system 2. 'Separately derived system' (transformer or emergency power supply) 3 Electrically operated equipment and devices. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B No device or equipment shall be connected for electrical service which has a neutral conductor connected to a grounding conductor or to the frame within the device or equipment. 3.4 METHOD OF CONNECTIONS A. Make all ground connections and ground cable splices by thermal welding or copper compression set type connectors U.L. listed for grounding purposes. Grounding lugs, where provided as standard manufacturer's items on equipment furnished, may be used. 3.5 EXPANSION FITTINGS A. In conduit runs requiring an expansion fitting, a bondmg jumper shall be mstalled around the fitting to maintain continuous ground continuity 3.6 TESTING A. Conform to Section 16030 3.7 GROUND CABLE CROSSING EXPANSION JOINTS 3.8 GROUNDING FOR PANELBOARD FEEDERS A. Provide a grounding bushing with #10 ground conductor (or larger when required by code) to the grounding bus in the panelboard and switchboards. A. Ground cables crossing expansion joints or similar separations in structures or paved areas shall be protected from damage by means of suitable approved devices or methods of installation which will provide the necessary slack in the cable across the joint to permit movement. Stranded or other approved flexible copper run or jumper shall be used across such separations. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 16452 PAGE 2 GROUNDING END OF SECTION 16452 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 16470 PAGE 1 PANELBOARDS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Dead front type, conforming with U.L. 67 and NEMA PB 1 1 B Circuit breakers for new circuits extended from existing panelboards shall be of like make /manufacture. Field verify equipment requirements prior to purchasing new circuit breakers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. All panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer B Base Bid: Panelboards as manufactured by Square D 2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit for review prior to manufacture. Include complete descnption, front view dimensions, device sizes and layout, and ground bus(s). B. Dimensions. Not exceeding dimensions noted or shown. 2.3 PANELBOARD TYPE A. Rated at proper voltage and current, bus bars of copper or aluminum, 3 phase, 4 wire, 100 percent neutral, unless noted otherwise. Multiple lugs where conductors in parallel or 'feed through or double lugs are shown. B Bolted busbar to busbar connections. Conductor connectors to conform with 16120, bolted to busbars using Grade 5 bolts, belleville and flat washers. C. Separate ground bus bonded to panelboard cabinet. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND FUSED SWITCHES A. U.L. mterruptmg rating labeled. Ratings as noted. Minimum rating: 208Y/120V Panelboards 480Y/277V Panelboards Fusible Panelboards 2.5 CABINET AND FRONTS 10,000 AIC symmetrical 14 000 AIC symmetrical 100,000 AIC symmetrical SECTION 16470 PAGE 2 PANELBOARDS B Circuit breakers: Conform with UL 489 labeled for 75 °C conductors. Mount per panel schedules. Pre threaded, bolt on type. Common trip on multiple pole breakers. Labeled SWD' when utilized for switching loads. C. Spares and spaces. Complete for future circuits. Where 'Space' is indicated, provide space, bussing, device mounting hardware and steel knockouts in dead front. A. Flush or surface, as noted. Tight closing doors without play when latched. Where two cabinets are located adjacent to each other in finished areas, provide matching tnm, same height. Where remote controlled switch or contactor is mounted m panelboard, mount on same frame as panelboard interior, with dedicated access door and key lock B Fronts: Lifting rest. Door -in -door hinged at right side in addition to hinged door with flush key lock over dead front. Key identically Match existing key system where applicable. C. Finish. Factory prime coat for cabinets located in finished areas. When located in unfinished areas, factory standard lacquer or enamel finish, gray or blue -gray color, over prime coat. 2.6 NAMEPLATES A. Engraved nameplates per Section 16075 permanently attached to panelboard front. Include panel name with 1/4 letters, area served, voltage, phase and wire (e.g. 2N1 208Y/120, 3 phase, 4 wire, 480Y/277 3 phase, 4 wire) m 1/8 inch characters. When project has more than one switchboard include switchboard fed from (e.g. Fed from SWBD 4BP). B Nameplate color Normal system white letters on black. Emergency system white letters on red. 2.7 SYSTEM OF NUMBERING AND BUS ARRANGEMENT A. As noted on Panel Schedules. B. Panelboards rated for 400 or 600 amps shall accept 225 amp frame circuit breakers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING A. Firmly anchor cabinets directly or with.concealed bracing to building structure, level, 6' -6" above finished floor unless otherwise required. When not located directly on wall, provide MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.2 WIRING support frame of formed steel channel anchored to floor and ceiling structure. Install intenors after structure is enclosed. A. Conform to applicable sections of these specifications and NEMA PB 1 1 Conductors and terminations per 16120 Coverplates in open knockouts. 3.3 CIRCUIT INDEX AND LABELS A. Typed circuit index with odd circuits on left, even circuits on nght, listing each circuit by number with complete load designation, (i.e. Receptacle room lights room etc.). Room names /numbers per actual room identification assigned by owner at project completion (assigned room numbers may differ from drawings). Mount inside door with transparent protective cover Provide number labels on circuit breakers to match index. 3.4 WORK CLEARANCE A. Verify space available with equipment sizes and code required working clearances prior to submitting shop drawings. 3.5 GROUNDING A. Provide per 16452. 3.6 CABINET PAINTING 3.7 FEED THROUGH AND DOUBLE LUGS SECTION 16470 PAGE 3 PANELBOARDS A. Cabinets furnished prime painted: Field pamt to match wall color (See Division 9 Painting). A. Provide feeder with amperage equal to incoming feeder to panels and sections fed via feed through or double lugs. 3.8 DEDICATED SPACE A. Locate in dedicated spaces. Coordmate project construction so piping, ducts, etc. are routed around dedicated spaces above and in front of panelboards per code. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 16470 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 16475 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER FUSES TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the specifications for fuses (600V and below). 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010 Submit product data for each fuse type and size. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses from one source and by a single manufacturer 1.6 SPARE FUSES A. At completion of project, furnish to the owner a quantity of spare fuses equal to 10% of the total quantity of each size and type of fuse used on the project, with a minimum of three (3) fuses of any one size and type. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fuses by one of the following: 1 Bussmann 2. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co 3 Edison 4 General Electric 5 Gould Shawmut MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 16475 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER FUSES TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 6 Littelfuse 2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1 nonrenewable cartridge fuse• class as specified or indicated; current rating as indicated, voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage. B Current limiting, 200,000 AIC minimum interrupting capacity unless noted otherwise. C. Circuits 601 -6000 amps: Class L time delay D Circuits 600 amps and less: Class RK1 or Class J E. Motor Circuits. Class RK5 dual element time delay or Class L (601- 6000A) F Transformer Pnmary Circuits: Class RK5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions to verify proper fuse locations, sizes, and characteristics. B Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible devices at job site just prior to energization. Do not accept equipment with fuses installed at factory B Arrange fuses so fuse ratings are readable without removing fuse. 3.3 CLEANING AND INSPECTION A. Clean fuses, tighten connections and inspect fuse holders pnor to energization of the equipment. 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 16475 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PARTI GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 16476 PAGE 1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes separately mounted switches and circuit breakers. B Provide all disconnects required by code for equipment furnished under this and other Divisions of these specifications unless disconnects are integral with equipment and acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 1.3 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) B Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010 Submit product data for disconnect switches, fused disconnect switches, enclosed circuit breakers and accessories specified in this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. All circuit breakers and disconnects shall be of the same manufacturer B Circuit breakers and disconnects as manufactured by Square D unless alternate is approved by the owner 2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. NON-FUSED. Heavy duty quick make, quick break, single throw horsepower rated with poles to open all ungrounded conductors. AIC rating same as upstream protective device with 10,000 AIC minimum. NEMA KS1 Toggle switches with padlocking provisions acceptable for circuits rated 20 amps or less. B FUSED As specified above with addition of fuse clips to accept only Class R fuses. Service entrance labeled for service disconnect switches. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16476 PAGE 2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS C. OPERATING HANDLE. Lockable in off position. Interlocked with cover to prevent opening when switch is closed. (Interlock to include defeating mechanism). 2.3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Enclosed, Molded -Case Circuit Breaker NEMA AB 1 with lockable handle. B Charactenstics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated and interrupting rating to meet available fault current. C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application, including switching fluorescent lighting loads or heating, air conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. D Manufacture same as Panelboards Section 16470 E. Circuit Breakers, 200 A and Larger Trip units interchangeable within frame size. F Circuit Breakers, 400A and Larger Field adjustable, short time and continuous- current settings. G. Current Limiting Trips: Where indicated, let- through ratings less than NEMA FU 1 Class RK 5 H. Molded Case Switch. Where indicated, molded case circuit breaker without trip units. I. Accessones. Provide shunt trip, under voltage and other accessories where indicated. 2.4 ENCLOSURE A. NEMA AB 1 Type 1 unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions of installed location. B Outdoor Locations. Type 3R. 2.5 NAMEPLATES A. Provide nameplates per Section 16075 Identification. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches and enclosed circuit breakers level and plumb according to manufacturer's written instructions. B Securely mount adjacent to equipment on wall or acceptable mounting frame. Disconnect switches shall be mounted independent from the equipment they serve. Disconnects supported only by raceway are not acceptable. C. Wiring space within Disconnects, Fused Switches or Enclosed Circuit Breakers shall not be used for splices. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16476 PAGE 3 DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS D Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B 3.2 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debns and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, and abrasions. 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 16476 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 16500 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER LIGHTING TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide fighting system complete and fully operational. B Substitutions: 1 Bidders requesting approval to provide products other than those specifically listed in the Light Fixture Schedule shall submit requests in wnting to the Architect and Lighting Designer ten days pnor to the close of the bid period. Approval will be in the form of an addendum to the specifications issued to all registered plan holders. No requests for substitution will be considered after this date. 2. Substitution request shall include all information required under paragraph 1 4 SUBMITTALS. Requests for approval shall be accompamed by a working fixture sample (including lamps and a cord and plug). Provide the name of at least one mstallation where each proposed substitute has been installed for at least six months along with the name and phone number of the Architect, Owners representative and the Lighting Designer of Record. If required by the Architect, the proposed substitutes must be installed at the bidders expense in a location selected by the Architect. 1.3 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) LE5 -1993 1 Procedure for determining Luminaire efficiency ratings. B Underwriters UL 496• UL 542. UL 676 UL 924 UL 935 UL 1029• UL 1570• UL 1571 UL 1572. UL 1574 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Edison Base Lampholders Lampholders, Starter Holders for Fluorescent Lamps Underwater Lighting Fixtures Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts HID Lamp Ballasts Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures Incandescent Lighting Fixtures High Intensity Discharge Lightmg Fixtures Track Lighting Systems A. Light fixture schedule series numbers are a design series reference and do not necessarily represent the exact catalog number size, voltage, wattage, type of lamp, ballast, finish trim, ceiling type, mounting hardware, ceiling trim or special requirements as specified hereinafter or MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. Light fixture voltage shall match voltage of circuit serving the fight fixture. 1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.6 PROTOTYPES 1 7 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.8 WARRANTY 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS SECTION 16500 PAGE 2 LIGHTING as required by the particular installations. Provide complete fixtures to correspond with the number of lamps, wattage and/or size specified. B If there are discrepancies between fixture illustrations and the written descnption in the fixture schedule, the wntten description in the fixture schedule shall take precedence. A. For standard catalog items, provide original product sheets, neatly and clearly marked- to indicate that fight fixture, ballasts and lamps fully comply with contract documents. Include photometric report by an independent certified testing laboratory when required in fixture schedule. Manufacturer's test report is not acceptable. B Submittals shall have fixture types and project name clearly indicated and shall be prepared by the authorized manufacturer's representative serving the project area. A list of manufacturer's representatives (including address, telephone and fax numbers) identifying which light fixture types they represent shall be included with submittals. Submittals or requests for substitutions not meeting these requirements will be rejected. A. All custom fixtures require a prototype to be submitted pnor to commencement of fabncation. The purpose of the prototype will be to review finishes, lamp placement within the fixture, lamp type and reflector shape or size. Modifications may be required as a result of the prototype review These modifications and others that do not matenally affect the cost of the fixture shall be incorporated at no additional cost to the owner A. Fixtures and components shall be new and listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other testing lab acceptable to local jurisdiction. A. Ballasts. Provide manufacturer's warranty for a penod of not less than five years. Warranty shall include parts and labor to replace defective ballasts. B. Exit Signs Utilizing LED Lamp Technology Provide manufacturer's warranty for a period of not less than five years including parts and labor for full replacement of defective product. A. Ballasts. Provide one case or 10% (whichever is less) of each type used on the project. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. B Lamps: Provide one case or 10% (whichever is less) of each type used on the project. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16500 PAGE 3 LIGHTING C. Fuses: Provide one case or 10% (whichever is less) of each type used on the project. Turn over to Owner and obtam signed receipt. D Adjustable Accent Lights (track, recessed or surface mounted). Provide additional lenses, color filters and other accessones to be used during final focusing, as follows. 1 20% or one case (whichever is less) of each lamp type (type, beam spreads, and wattages to be determined by the lighting designer). A spot and a flood lamp of the same wattage are considered to be two different lamp types. 2. 10% or one dozen each, (whichever is less) lenses, color filters and louvers (to be determined by the lighting designer). PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Interior Light Fixtures: Finish ferrous mounting hardware and accessories to prevent corrosion and discoloration to adjacent materials. B For weatherproof or vapor tight installations, painted finishes of fixtures and accessories shall be weather resistant enamel using proper primers or galvanized and bonderized epoxy so that the entire assembly is completely corrosion resistant for the service intended. Where aluminum parts come into contact with bronze or steel parts, apply a coating matenal to both surfaces to prevent corrosion. C. Fixtures shall be free of light leaks and designed to provide sufficient ventilation of lamps to provide the photometric performance required. Ballasts and transformers shall be adequately vented. D All sheet metal work shall be free from tool marks and dents and shall have accurate angles bent as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required metal. Intersections and joints shall be formed true and of adequate strength and structural rigidity to prevent any distortion after assembly Finish exposed edges so no sharp or ragged edges are exposed. All miters shall be in accurate alignment with abutting intersecting members. E. Lampholders shall hold lamps securely against normal vibrations and maintenance handling. F Reflector Cones: 1 Provide minimum 45° lamp and lamp image cut -off for all vertically mounted lamps. For horizontal lamps provide mimmum 33° cut -off. There shall be no visible lamp flashing in the cone. 2. Plastic materials shall not be used for reflector cones, unless noted otherwise in the Light Fixture Schedule. 3 Reflector cones shall not be riveted or welded to housing and shall be removable without tools. Retention devices shall not deform the cone in any manner Trim shall be flush with finished ceiling without gaps or light leaks. Where the flange trim is separate from the cone, it shall have the same finish as the cone. 4 Reflector cones shall be of umform gauge, not less than 0 032 -inch thick, high purity aluminum Alcoa 3002 alloy free of spin marks or other defects. 5 Manufacture reflector under the Alzak process. Refer to fixture schedule for cone color and specular or diffuse finish requirements. For fixtures using compact fluorescent MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI L. Exterior Fixtures. B Light Shields: SECTION 16500 PAGE 4 LIGHTING lamps, provide additional fimsh equivalent to Color -Chek that eliminates iridescence. Submit one sample of each cone type for review when required m the fixture schedule. G. Fresnel Lens and Door Assembly. 1 Lens shall have uniform brightness throughout the entire visible area at angles from 45° to 90° from vertical, without bright spots or striations. 2. Lens shall have opaque risers painted neutral gray unless otherwise specified in the Light Fixture Schedule. 3 Finish of regress door shall be matte baked enamel paint m color as selected by the Architect. H. Light fixtures containing lamps which require protective shielding shall have tempered glass lenses. I. For adjustable fixtures, provide positive locking devices to fix aiming angle. Fixture shall be cap! of being relamped without adjusting aiming angle. J Fixtu: ecessed in suspended ceilings where the space above the ceiling is either an air supply or return plenum shall conform with NEC Article 300 -22. K. Safety. Provide safety devices for removable fixture elements (cones, reflectors, lenses, etc.) to support removable elements when not in normal operating position. Safety devices shall be detachable if necessary and shall not interfere with fixture performance, maintenance or the seating of any fixture element, and not be visible during normal fixture operation. 1 Painted surfaces shall have an outdoor life expectancy of not less than 20 years without any visible rust or corrosion. 2 Diffusing matenals shall be UV stabilized. 3 Finish colors shall be as specified. 2.2 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. Housing: Minimum code gauge steel or ngid aluminum construction painted after fabrication with high reflectance white paint (min. 89 1 Eggcrate Louvers: Aluminum (unless noted otherwise) continuously bound in a perimeter channel frame Frame, louver and support shall be painted color as selected by Architect. 2. Parawedge Louvers: Injection molded plastic with specular silver finish 1/2' x 1/2" x 1/2 cell, unless otherwise specified anti static finish. 3 Parabolic Louvers: Provide Alzak aluminum, specular or semi specular as specified, with a low- iridescent finish. 4 Flat Translucent Diffusers: Shall be 100% virgin acrylic and have matte fimsh on extenor side (facing away from lamps). Diffuser shall be of thickness specified and shall be of sufficient density to completely obscure lamp image. 5 Flat Clear Lenses: Injection molded 100% virgin acrylic or clear tempered glass, thickness as specified. 6. Clear Patterned Lenses: Injection molded 100% virgin acrylic. For lenses with a male pattern of prisms or cones, specified minimum thickness refers to distance from flat MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. Frames: SECTION 16500 PAGE 5 LIGHTING surface to base of pyramids or cones, or to thickness of undisturbed material. For lenses with female pattern, specified minimum thickness refers to overall thickness of material. Lenses shall fully eliminate lamp image when viewed from all directions between 45 -90° from vertical. From 0 -45° the ratio of maximum brightness (under a lamp) to minimum brightness (mid -point between lamps) shall not exceed 3 1 Minimum thickness shall not be less than 0 125' with a minimum weight of 8 ounces per square foot. 1 Supply with concealed hinges and latching. Provide mitered corners with no gaps or light leaks. D Lamp Mounting: 1 Mount lamps used in rapid start circuits 430 ma and below within 1/2 of grounded metal as long as the lamp. For 800 ma and 1500 ma lamps, mount within 1 of grounded metal as long as the lamp. 2. For rapid start circuits using single lamp ballasts, provide one grounding lamp holder per lamp 2.3 INCANDESCENT /TUNGSTEN HALOGEN FIXTURES A. Tungsten halogen is a type of incandescent light source and will herein be mcluded under the heading of incandescent. 1 Finish. Concealed parts (lamp holders, yokes, brackets, etc.) matte black. 2 Tungsten Halogen Lamp Seal Temperature: Shall not exceed 350 °C at ambient of 25 °C when tested per UL Bulletm 57 Paragraph 328 -334 Submit certified heat test by independent testing laboratory when required in Light Fixture Schedule. 2.4 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) FIXTURES. A. Housing: Minimum code gauge steel, bonderized or equal rust protected or rigid aluminum construction. B Finish: Visible surfaces. Powder coated paint unless otherwise specified. Color and finish as selected by architect. Concealed parts, (lamp holders, yokes, brackets, etc.) matte black. C. Lamp Holder Housing: Cast aluminum with integral heat radiating fins to assure cool lamp base operation. 2.5 WIRING A. Wiring shall be as required by code for fixture winng. B. Flexible cord wiring between fixture components or to electrical receptacle and not in wireways shall have a minimum temperature rating of 105 °C. C. Cords shall be fitted with proper strain reliefs and watertight entries where required by application. D No internal winng shall be visible at normal viewing angles, i.e. above 45° from vertical. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI E. Master Slave Fixtures. Supplyballasts in adjacent fixtures to operate one or more lamps in the adjacent fixture where required in Drawings or Light Fixture Schedule. For single lamp fixtures, provide a two -lamp ballast for two adjacent fixtures. For three -lamp fixtures, provide one two lamp ballast for the outboard lamps in each fixture and an additional two -lamp ballast for the center lamp in each of two adjacent fixtures. F Tandem Wired Fixtures: For fixtures in continuous rows and where required in Drawings or Light Fixture Schedule, supply ballasts and wiring to control all top or inboard lamps together and control all bottom or outboard lamps together G. Provide #18 AWG, 3 -wire flexible conduit connections (whips) for dual level switclung as shown on Drawings for light fixtures recessed in accessible suspended ceilings. Provide 3 -wire whips for all dual level switching. Wire count on wire whips is not shown on Drawings and shall h the responsibility of the Contractor to provide proper wire count for the lighting control as shc m Drawings. 2.6 BALLASTS. A. Fluorescent General Requirements. a. A sound rating for 430 ma and 265 ma b. 'B' sound rating for 800 ma c. 'C' sound rating for 1500 ma SECTION 16500 PAGE 6 LIGHTING 1 Lamps shall be operated on the type of circuit the lamp was designed for (preheat, rapid start, instant start. programmed start, etc.). T8 lamps shall be operated on rapid start ballasts only Ballasts shall provide normal rated lamp life as stated by lamp manufacturers. 2. Ballasts shall be HPF (greater than 90 UL listed, and ETL certified. Magnetic ballasts shall be CBM certified. For projects applying for utility funding, ballasts shall meet utility requirements. Provide ballasts with thermal protection unless otherwise specified. Ballasts shall be Class P 3 Confirm voltage requirements with Electrical Drawings. Ballasts shall operate lamps correctly within 10% voltage variation without damaging ballasts. 4 Ratings: 5 Low temperature and/or outdoor application: Provide ballasts suitable for low starting temperature where fight fixture is located outdoors, in freezer or refrigerator or other location where ambient air temperature will be below 50 degrees F 6. Dimming Ballasts. Type required by dimmer manufacturer for proper operation and to maintain UL listing of dimming system components utilized. Total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 20% at any point within the dimming range. B Magnetic Fluorescent Ballasts: In addition to the general requirements, provide magnetic ballasts where required in the Light Fixture Schedule as follows. 1 Energy saving type with a ballast factor not less than 95 2. Each ballast individually protected by an in -line GMF fuse in a Bussman type HLR fuseholder 3 Manufacturers: Advance, GE /Magnatek, or Robertson or as specifically noted in the Light Fixture Schedule. C. Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts: In addition to the general requirements, provide electronic ballasts where required in the Light Fixture Schedule as follows: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 Ballasts in conformance with the following regulatory requirements: D High Intensity Discharge: 2.7 LAMPS A. Each lamp type in the Project shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer B Fluorescent: C. Incandescent (Including Tungsten Halogen): SECTION 16500 PAGE 7 LIGHTING a. EMI and RFI limits set by the FCC (CFR47 Part 18 and FCC Part 18,15j), IEEE Publication 587 Category A (transients). b Minimum efficiency standards of Public Law 100 -357 c. Starting sequence consistent with ANSI Standard C82.1 1993 2. Reduced fight output ballasts (ballast factors below 87 are not acceptable except as noted otherwise in the Light Fixture Schedule. 3 Total harmonic distortion shall be less than' 15% of the input current. Current crest factor shall be less than 1 7 Operating frequency shall be between 25 and 60 kHz with no visible flicker 4 Ballasts shall operate m ambient temperatures up to 105 °F (40 °C). 5 Rapid start ballasts shall be wired in series (or in parallel if manufactured accordingly) 6. Ballasts for single ended lamps shall be program start, with end of life protection. 7 Manufacturers. Advance, GE /Magnatek, ESI, Osram/Sylvania. 1 HPF type (minimum power factor 90 2. Sound Rating: "low noise or extra quiet" 3 Each ballast shall be individually protected by an in -line fuse in a Bussman fuseholder type HLR for 120 and 277 volt, type HEX for 208, 240 and 480 volt. 4 Metal Halide: Constant Wattage Autotransformer (CWA) except for lamps below 175 watts without ignitors where high resistance auto transformer type will be acceptable. Use Advance Transformer 'Smart Cap ballast where required by lamp selection. 5 High Pressure Sodium: Magnetic regulator or constant wattage ballast. Electronic ballasts where required by lamp selection. 6 Manufacturers Magnetic Ballasts. Sylvania, Holophane, Jefferson, Advance, Universal. 7 Where ceramic metal halide lamps (Philips Master Color) are specified, use electronic ballasts. 8 Manufactures Electronic Ballasts: Aromat (for 39 70, 100 and 150 watt; Advance (for 39 50, 70 and 100 watts); Altman (150 watts), Innova 150 watt S/E T -6) and Reliable (50 and 100 watts). 1 Medium Bi -pin, T5 program start, T8 rapid start, T12, compact TT DTT and TRT 4100K color temperature and 80+ Color Rendering Index (CRI) unless otherwise noted. Use TLCP compliant lamps unless they are unavailable for type of lamp specified (brand names are GE Ecolux, Osram Sylvania Ecologic and Phillips ALTO) 2. Manufacturers: General Electric, Philips, Osram Sylvania or as noted in the Light Fixture Schedule. 1 General Service Lamps Inside frosted, 120V filament lamps with a minimum 1000 hours rated life. 2. Lamps with diodes are not acceptable. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3 At time of installation, provide HIR technology lamps (by General Electric) for standard voltage PAR lamps and double ended tungsten halogen lamps, unless HIR technology is not available for specified lamps. 4 For low voltage lamps with dichroic reflectors, use Constant Color type (by General Electric) or aluminum back finishes. Coating on back of lamp shall be sufficiently dense and even to prevent light and heat from escaping out the back side of the reflector 5 Manufacturers. General Electric, Philips, Osram Sylvania or as noted in the Light Fixture Schedule. D High Intensity Discharge Type: 1 For indoor applications provide color corrected HPS (minimum 65 CRI) or color corrected metal halide (minimum CRI 65). For exterior applications provide clear metal halide or high pressure sodium unless specified otherwise. 2. Refer to fixture schedule for specific metal halide and high pressure sodium lamps required. Mercury Vapor shall not be used. 3 Acceptable manufacturers: General Electric, Osram Sylvania, Philips, Venture or as noted in the Light Fixture Schedule. 2.8 OUTDOOR LIGHTING STANDARDS A. Pole /Luminaire Assemblies and Bollards: Supply lununares, davit arms, brackets, poles, handhole covers, base components and all other accessones for a complete assembly Manufacturer shall be responsible for proper fitting of all elements and the structural integrity of the umt. Provide assembly to withstand 100 mph steady wind rated poles with 1.3 gust factor B Provide watertight msulating fuse and holder m the base of each lighting standard to individually protect each fighting fixture. Fuse holder similar to Buss style 'HEX' (HEB permitted for 120V or 277V), with Buss fuse of appropriate ampacity and voltage. Provide fuse for each hot circuit wire; do not fuse neutral. 2.9 SOCKETS B Fluorescent: Suitable for lamp and ballast type employed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES, GENERAL SECTION 16500 PAGE 8 LIGHTING A. Incandescent: Porcelain for medium or mogul screw base. For other lamp types, as required by base type. C. H.I.D Porcelam for mogul or medium base lamps, pulse rated as required. Keyed for all position onented lamps. For other lamp types, as required by base type. A. Provide mounting accessones and tams as required for wall and ceiling construction types shown in Finish Schedule and on Drawings. B Verify weight and mounting method of fixtures and provide suitable supports. Fixture mounting assemblies shall comply with local seismic codes and regulations. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16500 PAGE 9 LIGHTING C. Refer to arclutectural reflected ceiling plans for coordination of lighting fixture locations with mechanical and fire safety equipment. Where conflicts occur, coordinate with Architect prior to installing any of the systems. D Install fixtures with vent holes free of air blocking obstacles. E. Lighting fixtures located in recessed ceilings with a fire resistive rating of 1 -hour or more shall be enclosed in an approved fire resistive rated box equal to that of the ceiling. F Adjust aperture rings on all recessed fixtures to be flush with the finished ceiling. G For fluorescent lamps operated on dimming ballasts, operate lamps at full output for 100 hours (continuous burn) before dimming. H. Adjust variable position lampholders for proper lamp position pnor to fixture installation. I. Blemished, damaged or unsatisfactory fixtures or accessones shall be replaced. J For pendant mounted fixtures, mounting height is from finished ceilmg to top of pendant light fixture. For wall mounted fixtures, center on outlet box unless otherwise noted. Verify mounting provisions and other requirements pnor to order of light fixtures and provide as required. K. In accessible suspended ceilings, provide 72' flexible conduit wiring connection (flexible tubing not permitted) from a rigidly supported junction box. L. All finishes shall be unmarred upon project completion. Repair or replace damaged finishes. M. Replace all burned out or inoperative lamps at the end of the construction prior to Owner occupancy 3.2 DIFFUSERS AND ENCLOSURES A. Remove protective plastic covers from fighting fixture diffusers only after construction work, painting and clean -up are completed. Remove all dirty lamps, reflectors and diffusers, clean and reinstall. When cleaning Alzak' reflectors, use a manufacturer recommended cleaning solution. Reflectors damaged or impregnated with fingerprints shall be replaced at no cost to Owner 3.3 ADJUSTMENT OF LIGHT FIXTURES A. Focus all adjustable light fixtures under the direction of the Lightmg Designer during a scheduled period of time prior to the completion of the project, after normal business hours if required. Include all equipment and personnel expenses (including overtime) required for adjustment. 3.4 SUPPORT OF INCANDESCENT AND COMPACT FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES A. Surface or Pendant Type: Attach heavy formed steel straps to the outlet box by means of threaded stems with locknuts, or directly to the outlet box where the light fixture is specifically so designed. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.5 SUPPORT OF FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES A. See Section 16012 for seismic support requirements. C. Surface Mounted Type SECTION 16500 PAGE 10 LIGHTING B Recessed Type: Mount in frames suitable for the ceiling, with recessed portion of the fixture securely supported from the ceiling framing. Bottom of light fixture to be flush with adjacent ceiling. Fixture trim shall totally conceal ceiling opening. Provide two #14 earthquake chains or #12 wires when fixture is supported by ceiling suspension system. B Recessed type: For light fixtures supported by the ceiling suspension system, provide four Caddy #515 support clips (one each corner) which lock light fixture to ceiling tees after light fixture is installed. In addition, provide for each light fixture two #14 earthquake chains or #12 wires secured at diagonally opposite fixture corners (for fixtures weighing less than 56 pounds) to structural members above suspended ceiling. For plaster or gypsum board ceilings provide plaster frame compatible with light fixture. Contractor shall coordinate fixture trim with ceiling type. 1 Where mounted on accessible ceilmgs, support from structural members above ceiling by means of hanger rods through ceiling or as approved. 2. Continuous Runs of Fixtures: Laser sight to assure fixtures are straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where light fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections. D Pendant Mounted Type: 1 For fixtures with rigid pendants, supply swivel ball aligners at canopy to comply with local seismic requirements. 2. Where suspended from accessible ceiling, support fixture from structural members above ceiling by means of hanger rods through ceiling or as accepted. 3 Continuous Runs of Light Fixtures: Laser sight to assure fixtures are straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where light fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections. 3.6 CEILING LIGHT FIXTURE SUPPORT A. Where ceiling is of insufficient strength to support weight of fighting fixtures installed, provide additional framing to support as required. 3.7 OUTDOOR LIGHTING BOLLARDS A. Provide galvanized anchor bolts and nuts, and plumb to true vertical using a nut above and below the base plate on the anchor bolts. Provide steel reinforced concrete footing with grout between base plate and concrete. footings. Bollard footing shall be flush with grade when located in paved surface. Ground all components. 3.8 OUTDOOR LIGHTING STANDARDS A. Provide rebar reinforced concrete base. For bolted poles, provide galvanized anchor bolts and nuts and plumb to true vertical using a nut above and below the base plate on the anchor bolts. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 16500 PAGE 11 LIGHTING Pack grout between base plate and concrete base and provide drain hole below base plate to prevent accumulation of moisture inside pole base. Provide two piece or individual covers for nuts exposed above the baseplate of the same color as the pole. Ground pole and light fixture. END OF SECTION 16500 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI LAMP WATTS Box Housing Trap Safety Chain One CF 26W twin tube 29 S?ARING Junction Vented Lamp Lamp- Vented Ballast Rail holder Top Support(2) Specular Venting Lamp Cone Retaining Vertical Alzak Cone Slot (By Others) Spring Adjustment 16501 1 SECTION 16501 PAGE 1 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE r. 1 Fixture Type CF3D DESCRIPTION Recessed compact fluorescent downhght with vertical lamp, nominal 6' aperture. Clear semi specular Alzak parabolic cone, self flanged overlap trim, low iridescent finish. Electronic ballast. Ballast shall operate all manufacturer's 26 or 32 watt lamps. Minimum recess depth 8 1/4 Maximum recess depth 10' MANUFACTURERS Portfolio C6032 Series; Lithonia Gotham AFV 26TRT6AR Series; Kurt Versen P926 Series COMMENTS Provide with electronic dimming ballast dimmable to 1% Fixture drawing is an illustration of one acceptable manufacturer 720 OLIVE WAY SUITE 1400 SEATTLE, WA 98101 PHONE. 206 667 -0555 FAX. 206 667 -0554 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURERS LAMP Three F32T8 WATTS 93 S7AFUING 16501 2 SECTION 16501 PAGE 2 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE Fixture Type F5A Recessed lensed troffer nominal 24 x 48' x 5' flush steel door with mitered comers, enclosed positive cam action latches and 125' virgin acrylic prismatic lens. Electronic ballast. Columbia 4PS Senes, Lithonia 2SP8 Senes; Metalux 2GC Series, Daybrite 2TG Senes, Lightolier SPS2 Senes; H.E. Williams 50 -S Series COMMENTS Provide dual ballasts where dual switching is indicated on the drawings Fixture drawing is an illustration of one acceptable manufacturer 720 OLIVE WAY SUITE 1400 SEATTLE, WA 98101 PHONE. 206 667 -0555 FAX. 206 667 -0554 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURERS Alkco SF332 Series; Litecontrol Taska, Failsafe MTS Senes Lithonia N2S Senes, H.E. Williams 2SF -KSH25 Series LAMP One F32T8 WATTS 32 COMMENTS Fixture Type UC Undercabmet taskhght nominal 48' with solid front, not to exceed 1 9/16' high, shall have a 45 degree batwing acrylic prismatic lens. Steel housing with baked white enamel finish. Hardwired and supply with rocker switch. Electronic ballast. Provide lifetime warranty on ballast and lens. Fixture drawing is an illustration of one acceptable manufacturer SARING 16501 3 SECTION 16501 PAGE 3 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE 720 OLIVE WAY SUITE 1400 SEATTLE, WA 98101 PHONE. 206 667 -0555 FAX: 206 667 -0554 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURERS LAMP WATTS COMMENTS SAR SECTION 16501 PAGE 4 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE Fixture Type X1 Single face green LED exit sign. Diecast aluminum housing, universal arrows and universal mount. Cast aluminum faceplate with stencil face, manufacturer's standard fimsh as selected by architect. Assembly shall be held in place within the diecast fixture frame using reinforced plastic or metallic clips. Rated lamp life shall be 20 years minimum. Shall meet UL Standard 924 SureLites CX Series, Lithonia Signature Series, Hubbell C Series; Emergi -lite Prestige Senes, Prescolite Compass Senes; Chloride CXL Senes, McPhilben 55 Line series, Exitronix 400U series, Chloride CX L -G series LED Green Supplied with fixture 3 maximum Fixture drawing is an illustration of one acceptable manufacturer 16501 -4 720 OLIVE WAY SUITE 1400 SEATTLE, WA 98101 PHONE. 206 667 -0555 FAX: 206 667 -0554 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 16501 PAGE 5 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER i LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI DESCRIPTION LAMP One 75A21W WATTS 75 COMMENTS Provide clear acrylic lens S?ARIING Recessed lensed incandescent A lamp downlight, nominal 6' aperture. Clear semi specular Alzak parabolic cone, self flanged overlap trim. All fixture components constructed of aluminum and suitable for MRI environments. Minimum recess depth 9' Maximum recess depth 12 3/8 MANUFACTURERS Kirlin Lighting RR00626 Senes; Holcor MRI -R75 Senes, Kurt Versen C7323 non ferrous, Omega 0M6 -MRI Senes Fixture drawing is an illustration of one acceptable manufacturer 16501 5 Fixture Type A3 720 OLIVE WAY SUITE 1400 SEATTLE, WA 98101 PHONE. 206 667 -0555 FAX. 206 667 -0554 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURERS Elliptipar T101 -051 Series, Winona Windirect P1 Senes, Pumacle Peak Wall Mount Senes LAMP- One Q100DC WATTS 100 COMMENTS Fixture shall be suitable for use within an MRI environment. 5/8" (16mm) 6-1/8" (130mm) 2-1/2"i (64mm) Surface wall mounted incandescent uplight nominal 6 -3/8' high x 12 wide x 10 -3/8' projection from wall. Extruded specular anodized aluminum reflector with solid aluminum endcaps and stainless steel hardware. Impact resistant clear glass lens. Finish as selected by Architect. Provide glare shield visor 6-1/2' (165mm) SAAR- VG 16501 -6 10 -3/8" (264mm) SECTION 16501 PAGE 6 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE Fixture Type A4 Fixture drawing is an illustration of one acceptable manufacturer 720 OLIVE WAY SUITE 1400 SEATTLE, W A 98101 PHONE. 206 667 -0555 FAX: 206 667 -0554 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 DESCRIPTION PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.2 WIRE 16685 MRI SYSTEM SECTION 16685 PAGE 1 MRI SYSTEMS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Provide power circuits to main disconnects for the MRI equipment installation, as shown on drawings. Provide raceways and conductors for interconnection of the components of each system as indicated on plans. Not included in scope is the furnishing or emplacement of equipment nor the termination of interconnecting wiring. 1.3 SYSTEM MANUFACTURER'S DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The systems installation drawings by GE are not a part of the contract documents but will be available dunng construction. These drawings and the manufacturer's verbal instructions shall be adhered to as directed by the Architect (notify the architect prior to doing any work) if the manufacturer's instructions require a change in the contract price. A. Matenals to conform to other sections of the specification, except as revised by this section or as shown on plans. A. Wire which is used for interconnecting MRI shall be stranded copper type THHN insulation. 2.3 Chase Nipples, flexible conduits, fittings and bushings shall be furnished and turned over to the installer unless indicated to be installed as denoted by "provide" in the junction box and wiring terminals point descriptions. 2.4 BOXES AND RACEWAYS IN THE MRI EXAM ROOM A. Ferrous metal boxes and raceways are acceptable. B. All Ferrous metal parts must be firmly attached and secured to structural elements or wall frames. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. Metal to metal connections must be made firm and sold within the MRI room to eliminate any possibility that parts will move or shift or rub against one another when exposed to a magnetic field. 1 Firmly connect all parts. 2. Provide a rubber gasket between metal parts where metal to metal contact occurs where rigid attachment is not possible or where ever metal parts that are in direct contact and may rub against one another 2.5 Attachment screws in the MRI exam room shall be stainless steel or other non ferrous construction. 2.6 All covers plates or parts that may be removed to provide routine access for service shall be made of non ferrous material. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 ROUGHIN A. Install complete rough -m for MRI equipment as shown on the drawings except that all dimensions for locations of boxes, gutters and equipment shall be verified with the manufacturer prior to installation. The manufacturer's detailed installation drawings shall take precedence over the electrical drawings and rrunor relocations which do not substantially increase labor and materials shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner All raceway bends shall be long radius. No condulets or 90 degree short ells permitted. Wire ways shall be 45 degree bends, 90 degree corners not permitted. 3.2 WIRES AND CABLES 3.3 RACEWAY ONLY End of Section 16695 SECTION 16685 PAGE 2 MRI SYSTEMS A. Interconnecting wires and cables shall be continuous between each wiring termination pomt. Length of wire runs shall include the distance the wires will run in the wireway and interconnecting raceway plus the vertical distance from the wireway to the wiring termination point. In addition, provide 8 feet of slack wire at each box, conduit stub up and wiring termination point. B Color code power, neutral and ground wires in accordance with NEC Article 310 C. Ring out and identify all wire runs at both ends and leave ready for termination by system manufacturer's installation crew Identification shall utilize Brady "Perma Code wire markers. Information shall include originating box number (see drawings) and a separate letter for each wire which is a part of the run. A. When raceways only are shown on the drawings provide a measuring pull tape in each raceway showing the total raceway length. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 16721 PAGE 1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide extension of the existing fire detection, and alarm system. The fire alarm system shall fully comply with the local fire code currently enforced at the project location. If any conflict occurs between government adopted code rules and these contract documents, the codes are to govern. 1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Provide the system in compliance with the following: 1 NFPA Codes, Standards and Manuals (latest issue enforced) 72 National Fire Alarm Code 90A Air Conditioning Ventilating Systems (specifically Chapter 4 'Controls') B Other Codes and Standards ADA (Americans with Disability Act) Local fire code, building code, mechanical code, electrical code rules and interpretations required by the Authority having jurisdiction. 1.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Alarm System Supplier and/or Subcontractor Requirements. 1 The fire alarm system subcontractor shall coordinate the installation of the fire alarm system including the preparation of shop drawings and submittals to the Authority Having Jurisdiction' 2. The fire alarm subcontractor shall prepare shop drawings in conformance with 16721 1.9 3 Furnish and load all software required to implement a complete monitoring and control system. 4 Update all room numbering referenced in the FACP programming to correspond to the final room numbering established by the Owner not the room numbering used on the construction documents. B Contractor Requirements. 1 Submit shop drawings to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) as defined in NFPA 72. The AHJ for this project is the local Fire Marshal and the Washington State Fire Marshal. One copy of the above shop drawings with this approval evidenced shall be included with the submittal required by Section 16010 2. Provide raceway back boxes, wiring, and power circuits for the fire alarm system, and install the devices ready for final termination at the transponders and Fire Alarm Panel by the Fire Alarm System Subcontractor Contact the fire alarm system subcontractor pnor to bidding to determine exact requirements and include all costs in the bid pnce. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16721 PAGE 2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 3 In addition, the contractor shall schedule periodic inspections by the AHJ during the course of the installation and shall make any minor corrections, deletions, relocations or additions to the system as required for acceptance of the completed system by the AHJ Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required permits. 4 Coordinate the interface requirements between mechanical control systems and the fire alarm system. 5 Performance Test: Final approval of the fire alarm system is contingent upon a successful performance test, accomplished by the installer and witnessed by the Fire Marshal. 1.5 INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS The contractor is responsible for coordinating the system with owner furnished and other contractor furnished systems and equipment. The work consists of but is not linuted to the following: A. Duct Smoke Detectors. Duct smoke detectors and associated sampling tubes installed by Division 15 contractor Provide final connections and testing of duct smoke detectors. B Elevators. 1 Fire Emergency Control module dry contact with wiring to the elevator controllers to signal a fire emergency mode for automatic elevator recall. 2. Elevator Lobby Smoke Detectors. To signal smoke in an elevator lobby to the FACP 3 Elevator power shut down control circuit shall be monitored for presence of operating voltage. Loss of voltage shall cause a supervisory signal at the control panel and remote annunciators 4 Fire Signal Speakers. Provide speakers for all elevators. Coordinate installation with Division 14 1.6 GENERAL OPERATION A. The system shall be solid state, microprocessor based, using a true digital format between the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) and each addressable device Systems which do not transmit digital data between FACP and devices over a one (1) pair cable are not acceptable. System shall be able to communicate with a minimum of 100 addressable devices per pair of wires with any combination of smoke detectors, heat detectors, interface modules or manual pull stations. B Adding points within the system, up to its maximum point capacity shall not require memory additions. C. The system transmission scheme shall provide for priorities of different types of alarms such that fire alarm points shall have the highest priority with security and other designated types of alarms having a second level of priority and the third level of pnority shall be assigned to those monitoring points which do not require operator involvement. D The FACP shall provide for a minimum of 1000 monitor points and control points. System shall be able to have programmed Event Initiated Programs (EIPs). EIPs shall be initiated by any of the following user defined parameters. day time, alarm, return to normal, change of status, hardware failure, operator command. It shall also be possible to initiate EIPs manually from the operator's terminal. Any EIP shall be able to be initiated by any or all monitor points, and shall be able to operate any or all control points in the system. The system shall provide for multiple levels of command priority to assure that high -level commands are not overridden by lower level commands. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 7 OPERATION OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. The fire alarm system shall be analog addressable, electrically supervised system. SECTION 16721 PAGE 3 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM B Operation of any initiation device shall immediately cause all of the following: 1 All fire alarm speakers to sound a continuous march time chime tone throughout the facility until silenced by a switch at the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) or until the system is reset. Visual alarm lights throughout shall flash repetitively until the system is reset. 2. Auxiliary controlled devices shall operate until the alarm condition is corrected and the system reset. 3 Full English language annunciation of the alarm condition, type and location at the FACP display CRT and printer An audible signal shall sound and the alarm condition shall flash on the FACP display and CRT until acknowledged. Emergency instructions shall be displayed in English for the operator 4 Printout in full English language of the alarm condition, type and location plus time and date. All fire alarm initiated event commands shall be recorded automatically 5 Automatically transmit a general alarm and common trouble alarm to the local Fire Department via the Owner's monitoring company 6. Send a signal to the mechanical control system to identify when areas are in alarm: Upon receipt of the signal the Mechanical Control System will automatically initiate fan system transfer to 100% outside air and Initiate the starting of the Elevator Shaft and Stairwell Pressurization Fans. C Air handling equipment to be automatically shutdown only when activated by the smoke detector located in the supply air duct downstream of the filters. Both the supply fan and its related exhaust fan shall be shut down by the same sensor D History Logging: The system shall log and store 300 events in an alarm log and 300 events in a trouble log. These events shall be stored in random access memory with battery protection. Each event shall include the time and date of the events occurrence. E. A drill switch is to be provided at the Fire Alarm Control Panel to sound an evacuation alarm signal but not send an alarm to the Fire Department. F The system, including annunciation, and remote annunciation shall be completely supervised to sound an audible and visual trouble signal upon the occurrence of any open or grounded circuits except that auxiliary control circuits (door holders, and fan shutdown) and smoke detector remote indicator lights need not be supervised. An open or grounded zone circuit or annunciator circuit shall illuminate the trouble lamp and sound the trouble alarm at the control panel. G Sprinter System Monitoring 1 Coordinate the Fire Alarm System with the Sprinkler System to provide circuits for detection and annunciation as required by the AHJ to supervise PIV OSY and gate valve positions. Provide circuits for detection and annunciation of water flow Each water flow device and its associated valve position switch shall have their own address. 2 Activation of any tamper switch shall activate the system supervisory trouble light. Differentiation between valve tamper switch and open/or grounds in the initiation circuit wiring shall be provided. H. Elevator Capture. Provide control circuit from the fire alarm system to each Elevator Controller to recall all elevators to the Main Lobby floor upon initiation to any fire alarm zone m the Building. Provide circuitry to the elevator controller to indicate when an alarm has been initiated by the main elevator lobby smoke detector to prevent elevator from being recalled to that floor Coordinate exact circuitry required with elevator subcontractor MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI I. Electric Locks. Provide control circuit from fire alarm system to electric locks so they are automatically released when an initiation device in the same geographic zone is activated or upon loss of electrical power to the smoke detection system. 1.8 ANALOG ADJUSTABLE DETECTORS SECTION 16721 PAGE 4 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Smoke Detectors 1 Shall communicate actual smoke chamber values to the FACP Adjustable sensitivity of the detector from the control panel shall be possible through software control with a sensitivity range from .5% to 3 7% in .5% increments. 2. A dirty trouble condition shall be reported any time the average value of a detector reaches a preset value. Any time the sensor can no longer compensate for the environmental conditions to maintain its set sensitivity an excessive dirty trouble condition shall be reported. B Heat Detectors 1 Shall sense within a temperature range of 30 °F to 150 °F The control panel shall be capable of sensing either a set point of 135 °F or a rate of rise of either 15 °F or 20 °F per minute for fire sensing. 2. A set point shall be able to be chosen within the stated temperature range and the control panel programmed to use this information to determine a specific response such as a warning of the failure of the local temperature controls. C Sensitivity adjustments shall be capable via seven day time controlled day /night operating mode. D Provide automatic daily sensor alarm simulation test meeting requirements of NFPA 72 and JCAH testing requirements for sensitivity levels. 1.9 FIRE ALARM ZONES A. Provide individual addresses and annunciation for each device. B Provide circuitry for smoke door magnetic door holders and combination door holders /closers specified under division 8 Provide "single' zone circuitry so that all door release mechanisms in building release upon any alarm. 1.10 DESIGN, SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS A. Contractor Design 1 Raceways, routing and system wiring are not shown on the plans and shall be the responsibility of the fire alarm system supplier to design conduit routing and wiring and to show the same on the shop drawings. Existing fire alarm raceway and wiring is derived from record drawings and no guarantee is made as to their correctness. The contractor shall investigate the existing conduit routing and determine what is required to tie the existing fire alarm raceway system into the new fire alarm system. B Evacuation Alarm Sound Level 1 The number of fire alarm speakers shall be increased if required by the AHJ to meet the following: 2. 'The decibel level reading in the most remote area shall not be less than 70 and at least 10 above the normal ambient noise level. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. Submittals 1 Submit product data per Section 16010 Include the following information: a. Transponders b Transmission Cable c Equipment Documentation d. Terminal Cabinets e. Battery Systems and Battery Capacity Calculations f. Conductors g. Initiating Devices h. Alarm Devices (Audible and Visual) 1. Remote LEDs E. Operations and Maintenance Manual Per Section 16010 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURE 2.2 WIRING 2.3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. Existing panel by EST B Modify as required. SECTION 16721 PAGE 5 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM D Shop Drawings 1 Riser Diagrams. Fire alarm supplier and/or subcontractor shall develop CAD based original fire alarm riser diagram to show transponder locations, main geographical, fire alarm zones and point to point wiring requirements. 2. Floor Plans. CAD based floor plans shall be drafted to show conduit routing, device locations, end of line resistors, wire count and color coded wiring between device locations on each plan. Show room names and numbers for each room where a fire alarm device is located. At the supplier's option an AutoCad release 12 or 14 drawing file can be furnished for the suppliers use in preparing shop drawings. 3 Ownership. All original shop drawings shall become the property of the owner at the completion of the project. A. All equipment shall be the product of a single manufacturer except that certain individual components which are regularly used as part of the system may be the product of a separate manufacturer System shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed under Standard 864 UOJZ Proprietary Fire Management System. B Existing manufacturer Edwards System Technology EST3 as installed by Federal Firesafety Inc. (360) 457 3308 A. UL listed conductors which conform to AHJ requirements. Subject to AHJ approval use No. 16 AWG (seven strand) for initiating circuits and No 14 AWG (nineteen strand) for control and alarm circuits. Transmission cable shall be #18 AWG multiple twisted pair with overall shield. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.4 ADDRESSABLE INITIATING DEVICES A. All initiating devices shall have all electronic components and address setting devices located in the base assembly or in the device Removal of the device shall cause a trouble signal to be transmitted to the FACP indicating the address of the device in trouble. All devices shall be field programmable. If DIP switch switches are not utihzed for programming addresses then the supplier shall provide a programmer as part of their bid. 2.5 TRANSPONDERS SECTION 16721 PAGE 6 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Provide transponders with intelligent/analog device I/O cards to interface between the FACP and the addressable devices. B Each I/O card shall contain its own dedicated resident CPU and shall provide power process, store, control, and communicate with sensors and I/O modules via a minimum 18 -gauge twisted shielded pair C. The I/O cards shall provide for sensitivity adjustment and alarm verification by point, process the analog values from all intelligent devices in its loop and determine normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. D Each addressable device on the loop must be uniquely identified by an address code entered on each device at time of installation. The use of jumpers to set addresses will not be acceptable. E. In the event of communications loss with the FACP the I/O card must be capable of reacting to all its connected input devices and applying its own stand -alone local mode programming instruction to determine the status of all its connected outputs. F Each transponder shall be provided with a maintenance free battery backup system sized for the hours required by the AHJ or two hours, whichever is longer 2.6 AMPLIFIERS A. Amplifiers and signaling circuitry shall provide amplification power of a minimum of one watt per speaker or more where required to maintain code required volume. Provide one backup amplifier The amplifier system shall provide full supervision of speaker, distribution and amplifier circuits. The frequency response shall be within 3 db from 100 to 4000 Hz with less than 5% total harmonic distortion at rated output. Amplifiers shall be sized for speakers (at 1 watt tap) that they serve. B An open circuit in any speaker coil shall not prevent the balance of the signals connected to that circuit from operating. Periodically during operation of a speaker circuit, the control equipment shall supervise the speaker circuit to detect wiring faults. If a short circuit is detected, the faulted circuit shall be automatically disconnected from the power amplifier to allow the balance of the connected circuits to operate, and trouble indicated. If the short circuit disappears, such a circuit shall be automatically reconnected for signaling purposes. 2.7 SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY A. General. Components include gel cell sealed battenes, charger and an automatic transfer switch. 1 Battery Nominal Life Expectancy 2 years, minimum. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B Battery Capacity. Comply with NFPA 72. C Battery Charger Solid- state, fully automatic, variable- charging -rate type. Provide capacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining batteries at full charge. If batteries are fully discharged, the charger shall recharge them completely within four hours. Supervise charger output as part of system power supply supervision. D Integral Automatic Transfer Switch. Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals or status indications when normal power fails. 2.8 FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINETS A. NEMA Type 1 enclosure, hinged door front with flush hinge, latch and lock. Provide ternunal blocks in all cabinets with 25% spare capacity Box and front shall be steel, painted red with label 'Fire Alarm Flush mounted. 2.9 MANUAL STATIONS 2.10 SMOKE DETECTORS SECTION 16721 PAGE 7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Manual stations shall be addressable, single action, mechanically latching non -coded type with tumbler type key operated test -reset lock. Mounting shall be semi -flush in all finished areas and may be surface mounted in unfinished areas. The station housing shall be fire red factory finish. Provide ten (10) keys which will initiate alarm at any station. A. Shall be addressable with adjustable sensitivity of the detector from the control panel through software, photoelectric type or as required by AHJ Provide detection sensitivity from .5% to 3 7% in .5% increments. Visual indication of normal and alarm/trouble shall be incorporated into the exposed surface of the device. Detector head shall be removable from the base and base shall accept photo electric, ionization or heat detector head. 13 All smoke detectors located where they are not visible when standing in the room shall be provided with a remote indicating light in the nearest corridor Device shall be flush or semi flush mounted with identifying engraved nameplate per 16010 indicating detector address and name i.e. AHU -5 smoke detector zone 12 C. All patient room smoke detectors shall be provided with auxiliary contacts for connection to the nurse call dome light. 2.11 HEAT DETECTORS A. The addressable heat detectors shall have a sensing range of 32 °F to 158 °F The FACP shall initiate an alarm at a set point of 135 °F or a rate of rise of either 15 °F or 20 °F per minute. The detector shall be an off white color with a low profile (less than 1 1/2 silhouette to blend into ceiling decor Detector head shall be removable from base 2.12 DUCT DETECTORS A. Heat Detectors. Shall contain two sets of contacts rated 10 amps resistive and shall have 50 -650 degrees F adjustment range. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.13 FIRE ALARM SPEAKERS 2.14 VISUAL ALARM LIGHTS 2.15 ANNUNCIATORS 2.16 SMOKE DOOR RELEASE MECHANISMS SECTION 16721 PAGE 8 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM B Smoke Detectors. Shall be sampling type for sensing of products of combustion within the air stream of ducted fan systems. The devices shall include necessary sampling tube extensions and sensitivity adjustments for detection of products of combustion across the width of the duct. The device shall function uniformly m air velocities of 500 feet per minute through 3000 fpm. Visual indication of normal and alarm/trouble shall be incorporated into the exposed surface of the device Provide a remote indicator light as required in Part 3 of this Section. Provide auxiliary contacts for fan shutdown. C. Nameplates. Adjacent to each duct detector provide a nameplate per Section 16010 with 3/8 inch letters indicating load served and area served. Example. 'EF 1A Main Building Exhaust Fan' A. Finished Areas. 4 diameter fire retardant, treated cone type, with line matching transformer for 1/4 1/2, 1 and 2 watt output on a 25 or 70 7 volt line. Frequency range 400 -4000 Hz producing 87 db at 10 feet with 1 watt input. Speakers shall be UL listed for emergency alarm systems. Speaker grill shall be round steel or plastic, screw retained with matte white painted fimsh. B Unfinished Areas. 4 treated paper cone type with power tap points at 1/4 1/2, 1 and 2 watts on a 25 watt on a 25 volt or 70 volt line. Surface mounted. Rated 87 db at 10 feet at 1 watt. A. Xenon strobe, wall mounted with white housing and clear lens with 'FIRE' printed vertically on the lens. Light intensity not less than 15 candela (75 candela on axis), with flash rate of 1 to 2 flashes per second meeting NFPA requirements. Provide 110 candela visual alarm lights in sleeping rooms, U.L. listed under Standard 1971 A. Fire Alarm Remote Annunciators: shall annunciate each smoke detector manual pull station, and door alarm switch within its zone, and shall be serial LED type annunciators. The remote annunciators shall have a beige enamel or brushed aluminum finish and shall provide one alarm lamp per initiation device type The annunciator shall communicate to the control panel over one twisted shielded pair of wire and operating power shall be 24VDC and be fused at the control panel. Should a serial annunciator fail to communicate to the control panel for any reason the system annunciator trouble indicator (LED) shall pulse a specific number of times at the control panel to indicate which annunciator(s) has failed to communicate. Provide one annunciator at each nurse's station desk as shown on drawings. Provide space on annunciator for two (2) future zones. A. Wall Mounted Magnetic Holder 120 volts, AC, release upon de- energization furnished under Division 8 B Combination Door Closer/Holder Furnished under Division 8, 120 volts AC, release upon de energization. Electrical characteristics of door holder mechanisms shall be coordinated for proper operation of magnetic release from fire alarm system. Manual override release shall be possible at any time. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.17 REMOTE INDICATING LIGHT SECTION 16721 PAGE 9 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Ceiling or wall mounted, single gang device with red LED light to flash whenever the associated smoke detector is in alarm. 2.18 CONTROL POINT A. Description. Microelectronic, addressable control module listed for use in controlling smoke /fire dampers, door release service and other control functions. PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.1 APPROVED EQUIPMENT AND PERMIT A. No equipment shall be delivered to the jobsite until shop drawings have been reviewed and AHJ approved. A reviewed and AHJ approved shop drawing set shall be continuously available at the jobsite during construction. B Obtain a permit from the local AHJ prior to installation of equipment as required. 3.2 CIRCUITRY A. All wiring shall be contained in steel raceways and red color junction boxes. Seal raceways to prevent air passage at each smoke detector Wiring insulation shall be one of the types required by NEC 725 -16 and shall be consistently color coded throughout the system. Permanent wire markers shall be affixed to all conductors at terminations and splices. Numbering system shall be consistent with shop drawings. (Color schedule shall be shown on shop drawings and reviewed by the Engineer pnor to delivery of wire to the project.) All terminations shall be T &B 'Sta -Kon (or equivalent) self insulated, flanged or forked tongue lugs where connected at screw type terminals. Wiring in main control cabinet shall be neatly arranged and bundled with Tyraps (or equivalent). 3.3 AUXILIARY CONTROLS A. Conductors and power supplies of sufficient size shall be installed to minimize voltage drop consistent with the proper operation of all devices. Destructible link smoke dampers shall not be connected to the fire alarm system. Fan Shutdown Control Circuits and Smoke Removal Circuits need not be electrically supervised (subject to NFPA 72 and 72E requirements) and may be incorporated into the fire alarm raceway system, except that limited energy circuits shall be routed separately from line voltage circuits as required by Code (NEC Article 725). 3.4 AIR DUCT HEAT AND SMOKE DETECTORS A. Conform with NFPA 90A Chapter 4 'Controls Provide as in the supply and return air streams in each system 2000 CFM or larger Coordinate installation with Divisions 15 and sheetmetal installer Provide remote indicator lights (for duct smoke detectors) where the detector is located above a suspended ceiling or in an area which is not readily accessible. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.5 DEVICE LOCATIONS A. Device locations may be changed within 15 feet without extra charge, if so directed by the Engineer before installation. 1 Automatic Detectors. Locate not less than 3 feet from a supply or exhaust ventilation grill and not less than 18 from dead air spaces. 2. Visual Alarm Lights. Locate at 84 on center with bottom not less than 80' above the finished floor Space visual alarm lights in corridors no more than 15 feet from the end of the corridor with a separation no greater than 100 feet between devices. Locate in public areas and in each public bathroom. 3 Manual Stations. Locate at 48 AFF maximum if only front reachable, 54 AFF maximum if side reachable. 3.6 FAN CONTROLS A. Provide all relays and wiring of fan motor starter control circuits. Coordinate with Specification Section 16481 3.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide per Section 16010 3.8 RECORD DRAWINGS 3.9 EXISTING SYSTEMS 3.10 TESTING SECTION 16721 PAGE 10 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Provide per Section 16010 As -built drawings shall clearly indicate• 1 Actual routing of all raceways. 2 Actual cable type, numbers and routing. 3 Actual system wiring diagrams, connection diagrams and interface of all components in the system. A. The Hospital shall be continuously provided with an operational fire alarm system at least equivalent to the existing system (unless otherwise permitted by the Authority having jurisdiction) throughout the construction period. Any shutdowns shall be scheduled two days in advance with Hospital Engineer B All existing panels, and devices no longer in service as a result of this contract shall be removed. Unused flush mounted devices, outlet and other boxes in finished areas shall be provided with blank coverplates. A. Each wing of the new Fire Alarm System shall be tested using the following procedure. Special equipment required for testing ionization detectors and/or heat detectors where installed shall be provided by Contractor at time of test. B. Device Tests. Within each wing of the building the Contractor shall connect all signal and initiating devices in the zone to the fire alarm control panel. All smoke detectors, and all other devices shall each be tested for proper operation. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C Operation of all features of the systems under normal operation. D Operation of all supervisory features of the systems. E. Operation of all features of the systems on battery power with primary power off. F Operation of each alarm and command function. G AHJ Inspection. After zone testing has been satisfactorily performed, the complete system shall be operated on -line for one week (minimum). The complete system shall then be demonstrated to operate satisfactorily in the presence of the Engineer and the Authority having Jurisdiction. Approval of the Authority having jurisdiction shall be evidenced in venting. The Contractor shall include in his bid one day with two men available for each wing's AHJ inspection. 3.11 FINAL OPERATIONAL ACCEPTANCE TEST A. A final operational test of not less than thirty (30) consecutive days, twenty-four (24) hours per day shall be conducted on the complete and totally installed and operational Fire Alarm System to demonstrate that it is functioning properly in accordance with all requirements of this specification. The correct operation of all monitored and controlled points shall be demonstrated as well as the operation and capabilities of all sequences, reports, diagnostics and all other software. If the equipment operates at an average effectiveness level (AEL) of at least (95 during the performance test period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days, it will be deemed to have met this Standard of Performance, and fmal acceptance of the system shall be made, provided the contractor has satisfied all other requirements of this specification. In the event the required AEL is not reached during the initial thirty (30) consecutive calendar day period, the final operational acceptance test period shall be extended on a day -to -day basis until the required AEL is reach for thirty (30) consecutive calendar days. The average effectiveness level (AEL) is defined as the ratio between the total thirty-day test period less any system downtime accumulated within that penod, and the thirty-day period. Downtime shall result whenever the fire alarm system is unable to fulfill all required functions detailed within this specification due to any malfunction of either hardware or software. Any defect of hardware or software shall be corrected when it occurs before the test may be resumed. System downtime for each incident shall be measured by those intervals during the performance period between the time the system is returned to proper operating condition. Downtime of the system resulting from the causes as follows will not be considered as system failures. 1 Downtime resulting from an outage of the main power supply in excess of the capability of any backup power source(s), provided that the automatic initiation of all backup sources was accomplished and provided that the automatic shutdown and restart of components fulfills the requirements of this specification. 2. A functional failure resulting from an individual sensor or Transponder provided that the system recorded the fault and the AEL of the total of sensors and Transponders is at least (95 during the thirty -day test period. 3.12 INSTRUCTION A. The Contractor shall (after one week (minimum) written notification to Architect) conduct an instruction session during which all maintenance and operational aspects of the system will be described and demonstrated to personnel selected by the Owner The session shall be conducted by a Fire Alarm Supplier's representative thoroughly familiar with the charactenstics of the system. 0 M manual information regarding the system shall be turned over to the Architect prior to scheduling the instruction session. 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 16721 PAGE 11 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM END OF SECTION 16721 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 16724 PAGE 1 SMOKE DAMPER CONTROL A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. General. Provide 120 volt power, fire alarm control connections, control point wiring and relays to control smoke /fire dampers specified under Division 15 B Contractor Design: Raceways, routing, and wiring are not shown on the drawings. Contractor shall be responsible for design of conduit routing and winng and to show the same on shop drawings. System shall be m steel raceways. 1.3 OPERATION A. Provide control point for each smoke damper Derive 20 amp, 120 volt power from the nearest panel serving the floor on which dampers are located. Provide emergency circuit if fan serving the area is on emergency power Derive control circuits from fire alarm transponder(s). Program the control modules to close when smoke is detected by the associated duct smoke damper or comdor ceiling smoke detector 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Assemble product data in submittal brochure as specified in Section 16010 B Shop Drawings: 1 Floor Plans. Submit CAD based shop drawings to show device locations, raceway routing, and color coded wiring between devices. Show panelboard and circuit numbers serving each damper Show room names and numbers for each room where a fire /smoke damper is located. 2. Detail Plans. Prepare original Auto CAD based drawings showing termination and connechon diagrams at control modules and relays. 3 Release of CAD Files: Contractor may request to utilize Sparling CAD files for assistance in producing shop drawings. Request shall be made by signing Sparling's Agreement for Release of CAD Files' letter PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Electrically operated, single phase, 120 volt, two position. Dampers close upon de- energization. Damper and electric activator are specified under Division 15 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2.2 CONTROL RELAYS SECTION 16724 PAGE 2 SMOKE DAMPER CONTROL A. Heavy duty plug in relay 10 amp rated contacts. IDEC RHIB U AC 120 with SHIB 05 socket. 2.3 NAMEPLATES A. Provide nameplate per Section 16010 with 1/8' lettering on each relay to identify which fan it is associated with. (i.e. 'Supply Fan SF -1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONTROL SEQUENCE A. Signal from fire alarm system is sent to control point to close smoke /fire dampers. Smoke dampers to open immediately when control point is reset. 3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Provide per 16010 Record drawings shall clearly indicate. 1 Actual routing of all raceways, and location of all junction boxes. 2. Actual cable type, numbers and routing. 3 Actual system wiring diagrams, connection diagrams and interface of all components in the system. 3.3 TESTING A. With the fan stopped, visually inspect each smoke damper to insure that it is closed. With the fan running, visually inspect each smoke damper to insure that it has opened. Submit test report to engineer 0 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 16724 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 16740 PAGE 1 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TELEPHONE, COMPUTER RACEWAY TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Related Sections 16130 Raceways and Boxes 16745 Telecommunications Cabling System. C. Other References EIA/TIA 569A PART 2 PRODUCTS TIA/EIA/ANSI STD 607 A 1.2 DESCRIPTION Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 2.1 WALL OUTLETS Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications A. Provide raceway systems for the installation of the telephone cables and computer wiring. Installation shall include raceways, outlet boxes, plaster rings, outlet box cover plates and terminal back boards. A. Shall consist of a 4- 11/16' square, 2 1/8' deep (minimum) box, with knockouts for 1 raceways, as manufactured by Steel City OZ/Gedney or equal. 2.2 OUTLET DEVICE RING A. Coordinate device ring requirements with cable /outlet installer 2.3 DEVICE PLATES A. Provide device cover plates for all unwired or 'future outlets. Plates shall match device plates specified m Section 16140 except with no device openings. 2.4 PULL WIRE A. Shall be plastic having not less than 200 -pound tensile strength. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS SECTION 16740 PAGE 2 OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TELEPHONE, COMPUTER RACEWAY TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SYSTEM PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WALL OUTLETS IN UNINSULATED INTERIOR WALLS WITH ACCESSABLE CEILINGS A. Provide an individual 1" raceway from each outlet location to an accessible ceiling space. 3.2 WALL OUTLETS IN UNINSULATED INTERIOR WALLS WITH NON ACCESIBLE CEILINGS, EXTERIOR WALLS OR INSULATED INTERIOR WALLS A. Provide a 1 conduit from each outlet location to an accessible ceiling space. 3.3 RACEWAYS A. Shall conform to specification Section 16130 Raceways and Boxes with the additional requirement that no length of run shall exceed 100 feet and shall not contain more than two 90- degree bends or the equivalent without a code size pull box. Provide pull boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. Locate pull boxes in straight runs only not as a replacement for an elbow B Raceways with an internal diameter of two inches or less shall have a bend radius at least 6 times the internal raceway diameter Raceways greater than two inches shall have a bend radius at least 10 times the internal raceway diameter C. Provide an insulated bushing on all raceways terminated in a cabinet and/ or pullboxes. D Terminate raceways stubbed out above accessible ceiling space so that the raceway is parallel with the ceiling and provide an insulating bushing. 3.4 PULL CORDS A. Nylon type, shall be included in all raceways over 10 feet long. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. 3.5 REMODEL SPACES A. Remove in active and abandoned telephone and computer conductors that serve spaces remodeled, only after receiving approval from the owner B Notify owner in writing when active telephone and computer conductors serving occupied spaces and must be relocated due to the remodel. 2007 Mahlum Architects END OF SECTION 16740 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 16750 PAGE 1 NURSE CALL SYSTEM A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Extend existing nurse call system. Furnish all equipment, accessones, and matenal required for the installation of a Nurse/Patient Communication System in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Any material and/or equipment necessary for the proper operation of the system not specified or described herein shall be deemed part of this specification. 1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Refer to Section 16010, General Electrical Provisions, for applicable codes. All components and the system as a whole shall be listed under U.L. 1069 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Supplier and/or subcontractor shall. 1 Have been in the business of installing and maintaining the specific type of system equipment under the present firm name for at least five years. 2. Have been distributing and/or installing the specific brand and model line of system equipment for at least three years prior to the date on the contract documents. 3 Have the capability of dispatching a maintenance or repair truck with a qualified repair personnel to the job site within four (4) hours of a request for service on the equipment. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. B Shop Drawings. Assemble Product Data in submittal biochure as specified in Section 16010 1 Floor Plans: Prepare CAD based shop drawings to show device locations, raceway routing and sizes, and color coded wiring between devices. 2. Detail Plans. Prepare onginalidrawmgs showing termination and connection diagrams including wire numbers. 3 Release of CAD Files: Contr ictor may request to utilize Sparling CAD files for assistance in producing shop irawmgs. Request shall be made by signing Sparling's Agreement for Release of C..D Files" letter C. Operations and Maintenance Manua. Per Section 16010 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1.6 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. The contract drawings indicate the general nature of the system layout, but do not show all components required. Raceways, routing and wiring are not shown on the drawings. Contractor shall provide per system requirements and shop drawings. B Contractor shall coordinate outlet box requirements with system supplier Notify Architect prior to installation if conflicts occur between required box depth and wall thickness. 1 7 SYSTEM OPERATION AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS A. General: Each audio /visual nurse call system shall consist of microcomputer controlled equipment utilizing stored program software providing maximum flexibility for station number assignments, call priority levels and future expansion. Each system shall provide audible signalling, visual annunciation, patient to staff communication, staff to staff communication and mtercommumcatron between Master Station Annunciators. B Call Priority Seven distinct call prionty levels shall be provided as follows: SECTION 16750 PAGE 2 NURSE CALL SYSTEM Call Tvge Pnontv Level Dome Licht Indication Annunciation Rate Code Blue 1 Flashmg Green 120 PPM Nurse Assist 2 Flashing Red 60 PPM Toilet Emergency 3 Flashing White 60 PPM Patient Normal Call 4 Steady White 6 PPM Staff Call 5 6 PPM Tone rate (pulses per minute) annunciated at the Master Station Annunciator and all Duty Stations associated with the System. C. PATIENT BED STATION A patient shall originate a call on the system by depressing a button on the Pillow Speaker or Call Button. 1 Normal Call. a. Illuminate the white call indicator lamp on the Patient Station. b. Continuously illuminate the white section of the Corridor Dome Light and white section of any associated Zone Dome Lights. c. Illuminate the patient call light and sound a tone (6 ppm) at all Duty Stations. d. Identify the patient's room number, bed number, call priority status (6) and sound a tone (6 ppm) at the Master Station Annunciator 2. Voice communication shall be established upon answer of the call at the Master Station. When the call is answered, all previously illuminated lights are extinguished and the red privacy light on the Patient Station is illuminated. If a call cord is removed for whatever reason from a Patient Station, a Priority Patient call shall automatically be initiated. This call cannot be canceled at the Master Station or by depressmg the red cancel button on the Patient Station until the call cord is reinserted into the receptacle of the Patient Station. 3 A combination call cancel /privacy button shall be provided. When this button is depressed while the station is idle the red indicator light shall flash and conversation MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16750 PAGE 3 NURSE CALL SYSTEM within the room cannot be monitored. When the privacy switch is activated the Master Station shall be able to speak to the bed station and the switch shall not interfere with the placement of a call to the Master Station. D TOILET EMERGENCY STATION A patient shall originate an emergency call on the system by pulling a cord or pushing a button in the Psych Rooms. The call shall hold until answered at the originating station by depressing the reset switch/call assurance light. Originating a call from these stations shall: 1 Flash the call assurance lamp in the Toilet Station at 60 ppm. 2. Flash the white section of the Corridor Dome Light and white section of any associated Zone Dome Lights at 60 ppm. 3 Flash the patient call light and sound a tone (60 ppm) at all Duty Stations. 4 Flash the patient's room number, call priority status (3) and sound a tone (60 ppm) at the Master Station Annunciator No voice communication to the nurses station will be possible. E. NURSE ASSIST BUTTON A staff member can initiate a nurse assist call from a Nurse Assist station by depressing a large red button. The call shall hold until answered at the originating station by depressmg the reset switch/call assurance light. Origmatmg a call from these stations shall. 1 Flash the call assurance lamp in the Nurse Assist Station at 60 ppm. 2. Flash the red section of the Corridor Dome Light and red section of any associated Zone Dome Lights at 60 ppm. 3 Flash the patient call light and sound a tone (60 ppm) at all Duty Stations. 4 Flash the patient's room number, bed number call prionty status (2) and sound a tone (60 ppm) at the Master Station Annunciator F CODE BLUE BUTTON A staff member can initiate a Code Blue call from a Code Blue Station by depressing a large blue button. The call shall hold until answered at the ongmatmg station by depressing the reset switch/call assurance light. Originating a call from these stations shall. 1 Flash the call assurance lamp in the Code Blue Station at 120 ppm. 2. Flash the green section of the Corridor Dome Light and green section of any associated Zone Dome Lights at 120 ppm. 3 Flash the patient call light and sound a tone (120 ppm) at all Duty Stations. 4 Flash the patient's room number, bed number, call priority status (1) and sound a tone (120 ppm) at the Master Station Annunciator 5 Flash the corresponding station annunciator lamp and sound a tone (120 ppm) on the Code Blue Annunciator located at the telephone switchboard PBX. Two way voice communication will not be possible between the Code Blue Station and the annunciator at the telephone switchboard. G. STAFF STATION Calling facilities and two way voice communication between the nurses station can be accomplished from the Staff Station. A staff member can originate a call on the system by momentarily pressing the call button. Originating a call shall. 1 Illuminate the white call indicator lamp on the Staff Station. 2. Flash the call light and sound a tone (6 ppm) at all Duty Stations. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 16750 PAGE 4 NURSE CALL SYSTEM 3 Flash the room number, call pnority status (7) and sound a tone (6 ppm) at the Master Station Annunciator Upon answer of the call from the Master Station a red privacy light shall be illuminated on the Staff Station and the staff member may carry on a two way conversation. H. DUTY STATION Calls from a Duty Station shall be annunciated in the same manner as calls from Staff Stations. In addition the Duty Station shall provide audible and visual annunciation of calls placed from any other station in the system. Normal, Emergency and Code Blue calls are distinguished by a distinct difference in signal rate. MASTER STATION ANNUNCIATOR The Master Station Annunciator can be used to call or receive calls from Patient Stations, Staff Stations, Duty Stations, or other Master Stations. Code Blue, Nurse Assist and Toilet Emergency Station calls are also annunciated at the Master Station. When a call is placed on the system the room number, bed number and priority status is displayed in one of five numeric displays in order of it's priority status. (If all of the numeric displays are occupied, the Calls Waiting lamp on the Master Station shall illuminate.) Answenng a call is accomplished by depressing the direct selection button adjacent to the numenc display Two way voice communication can then take place via the speaker microphone utilizing the talk listen bar or via a handset. If calls are not answered immediately the tone signal shall be repeated unless the nurse is in the process of answering other calls. Code Blue calls shall always be announced by a tone signal even if the Master Station is busy In addition to the communication and annunciation capabilities described above the following controls and options shall be provided. 1 Patient Priority and Personal Attention Status programming. 2 Scanning of patient bed stations for Patient Priority and Personal Attention Status. 3 Zone Monitoring and Paging of up to 20 stations simultaneously 4 Nurse Service. This feature shall permit the nurse at the Master Station to place a service reminder call on the system. Depressing the Nurse Service button shall. a. Flash the amber section of the Corridor Dome Light at 60 ppm. b. Flash the amber section of any associated Zone Dome Lights at 60 ppm. c. Flash the white call indicator on the Patient Station. d. Activate the overtime reminder circuitry in the Master Station. 5 Overtime Reminder The nurse at the Master Station shall automatically be alerted after an adjustable time period (3 to 10 minutes) if a Nurse Service call has gone unanswered. 6. Master Station Intertie: Master Stations on the same floor shall be capable of intercommunication. 7 Capture/Recapture: Each Master Station shall be able to capture calls from swing rooms in the other unit, display captured rooms and release these rooms. J PILLOW SPEAKER The Pillow Speaker shall allow the patient to place a call to the Master Station. Two -way voice communication is carried on over the speaker m the Patient Station. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURE A. Extend existing Rauland Responder system 2.2 FINISHES A. All exposed faceplates shall be high impact molded plastic and shall be capable of withstanding normal hospital cleaning solutions. 2.3 COMPONENTS AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM A. Patient Bed Station: NCBSS1 SECTION 16750 PAGE 5 NURSE CALL SYSTEM B. Toilet Emergency Station: NCPCS1 with 6 foot long cord. NCPBS1 with pushbutton for use in Psych Rooms. C. Nurse Assist Button. NCPBS1 with red pushbutton and 'STAFF USE ONLY' label. D Code Blue Button: NCNCSB with blue pushbutton and 'STAFF USE ONLY' label. E. Staff Station: NCSTAFF F Duty Station: NCDUTY G Master Station Annunciator. NCTSM H. Dome Lights: NCLED6 with white, amber red and green lenses. I. Nurse Assist Annunciator NCTSM J Code Blue Annunciator NCTSM K. Pillow Speakers, NCDS Series. Furnish one for each audio /visual patient station and two (2) spares. L. Call Button and Cordset: CC200 M. Geriatric Call Button: GS7388. N Power Supply NCPWR. O Central Equipment: NCGCM. P Equipment Cabinet: NC2828 surface mounted. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM SUPPLIER AND /OR SUBCONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Provide and/or supervise all wiring, wire terminations and connections. B Provide and/or supervise all equipment installation. C. Perform and/or supervise all testing during and after installation. SECTION 16750 PAGE 6 NURSE CALL SYSTEM D Certify in writing to the Architect (copy to Engineer) at completion stating that system has been inspected, tested and is complete and fully operational in accordance with contract documents. 3.2 OUTLET BOXES A. Provide an outlet box as required for each device. Refer to architectural interior elevations for exact location. See Section 16130 for mounting requirements. 3.3 RACEWAYS A. Refer to Section 16130 for installation requirements and to drawings for proper raceway size. Coordmate with system supplier for exact raceway requirements. Raceways indicated on the drawings are 3/4 unless noted otherwise. 3.4 WIRE A. Provide all wirmg per system requirements. Install all conductors in raceway unless noted otherwise. Provide numbered wire markers on each terminal end of all wires, in accordance with shop drawings using permanent pressure sensitive or sleeve type markers. 3.5 STAFF STATIONS AND DUTY STATIONS A. When more than one Staff Station or Duty Station is located m a room, engrave each coverplate with the Department Name that it is connected to. 3.6 STATION GROUPING A. Refer to Electrical Details in the Electncal Appendix for station grouping requirements. 3.7 TESTING A. The completed system shall be tested and, after one subsequent week (minimum) on- line" operation, demonstrated to operate satisfactorily in the presence of the Architect, Electrical Engineer and an Owner's representative. Correct any problems that surface during the test and redemonstrate to the satisfaction of an Owner's Representative MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.8 INSTRUCTION A. The Contractor /Supplier shall (after one week notification to the Architect) conduct a 4 hour instruction session during which all maintenance and operational aspects of the system will be described and demonstrated to personnel selected by the Owner The session shall be conducted by a Contractor's representative thoroughly familiar with the characteristics of the system. 0 M manual information regarding the system shall be turned over to the Architect prior to scheduling the instruction session. 3.9 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Provide per 16010 Record drawings shall clearly indicate: 1 Actual routing of all raceways, and locations of all junction boxes. 2. Actual cable type, numbers and routmg. 3 Actual system wiring diagrams, connection diagrams and interface of all components in the system. 3.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide per Section 16010. Include record drawings, certification and test results. 0 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 16750 PAGE 7 NURSE CALL SYSTEM END OF SECTION 16750 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PARTI GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 16999 PAGE 1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Summary of procedures and requirements for project closeout of electrical portions of work. Conform also with other portions of the Contract Documents. Final payment to Contractor is subject to full completion of this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Reproducible, Xerox drawings. See 16010 2.2 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (0 M) MANUALS A. Hardboard, screw post, impnnted covers. Tabbed dividers between categories. See 16010 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 REQUEST FOR FINAL PUNCH LIST A. To request a final electrical punch List, forward a letter to Sparlmg, Inc. stating; 'The electrical work on this project is complete, all punch list items to date are complete, items 1 14 in Section 16999 are complete and the project is ready for final punch list observation' 3.2 JOB CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE A. Perform the following procedures for project closeout of electrical portions of work: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 2007 Mahlum Architects SECTION 16999 PAGE 2 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1 Perform testing, tests and documentation per 16030 2. Provide engraved nameplates on electrical equipment. 3 Refinish electrical equipment finishes which are damaged. 4 Clean light fixtures per 16010 5 Color code junction boxes per 16130 6 Provide spare fuses and cabmet per 16452. 7 Type panel schedules with actual 'as- built' circuit descriptions. 8 Number all circuit breakers. 9 Obtain final electrical inspection. Include copies in 0 M manual. 10. Give written one year warranty m 0 M per 16010 11 Furnish Record Drawings per 16010 Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. 12. Furnish 0 M Manuals per 16010 Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. 13 Give instruction periods to owner's personnel per 16010 Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. 14 Obtain letter of certification from fire alarm system supplier and forward to Sparlmg per 16721 15 Obtain letter of certification from communications system supplier(s) and forward to Sparling. 16. To request final acceptance of project, fill out Job Completion Form m 16010 and forward to Sparlmg. Note: If inspectors have not signed form, a copy of signed -off permits will suffice. 17 Include with Job Completion Form, a copy of the fmal punch list with the word 'DONE' and the date and Contractor's initials after each item on the list. END OF SECTION 16999 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI APPENDIX 1 PANEL SCHEDULES APPENDIX 1 1 Sparlin Name: 1N1 Location: Electrical Closet 104A Serves: Various receptacles 1st floor Description 1 Recept Dinning /TVs 3 Recept Dining, house keeping 5 Recept Private dinning, education 7 <Multi> Private dinning, education 9 Recept Private dinning, education 11 Recept Private dinning, education 13 Recept Strecher, toilet, wait, elec rm 15 Recept Gym work station 17$ Equip Mag run -down unit. 19 Recept gym (bike) 21 Recept gym (bike) 23 Recept gym (bike) 25 Recept gym (bike) 27 Recept Treadmill 29 Treadmill 31 Recept Gym 33 Recept Gym 35 Recept Gym 37 Recept Gym 39 Recept Gym 41 Spare Rev. Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked t Project File: L. \ornh \pnl sch \OMH.PNL Notes: MRI TI project Load Type Lighting Recept Equip Mech ShPnl3ph.rpt MRI TI Porject Conn KVA 29.01 81 Amps 120/208V NEC Demand Factor 1.00 x 100% 21.12 10 KVA 100 rest 50% 2.18 x 100% 4.71 x 100% Load CB 0.54 20/1 0.90 20/1 0.72 20/1 0.86 20/1 0.72 20/1 0.72 20/1 0.90 20/1 0.36 20/1 0.50 20/1 1 0.36 20/1 0.36 20/1 0.36 20/1 0.36 20/1 0.90 20/2 0.90 0.36 20/1 0.36 20/1 0.36 20/1 0.36 20/1 0.36 20/1 0.00 20/1 30 4W 200A Main lugs only Surface Mounted Feed Thru Lugs A B C Demand KVA 1.00 15.56 2.18 4.71 23.45 CB 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 30/2 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/2 20/2 1 0A 1 0B 1 0C Connected KVA I 11.17 1 10.49 1 7.35 CB CB 1 1 1 1 CB Demand Amps 3 43 6 13 65 Load 0.54 0.54 0.54 1.08 0.36 0.36 1.08 0.54 0.36 2.29 2.29 0.13 0.36 1.00 0.60 1.18 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 Description Recept Consult Recept Consult Recept PFT Recept waiting Recept recption /greeting Recept recption /greeting Recept corridor Recept Roof Recept existing rcpts G GFCI S Shunt Trip D= Switching Duty A AFCI west end Mech CU -5 (compressor unit) CU -5 (compressor unit) Mech AC 5 (AC uint in comm room) Recept MRI Control Room Lighting MRI Room Recept MRI Room Equip MRI Fan Recept MRI Control Room Recept Treadmill Treadmill Recept Treadmill Treadmill NEC Feeder Factors x 125% x 100% x 100% 125% of Largest Circuit Breaker Code H= HID Rated C HACR Rated see note Panel Type: Panelboard 10,000 AIC Deep 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26$ 28$ 30$ 32$ 34$ 36 38 40 42 NEC Feed Amps 3 43 6 16 69 APPENDIX 1 Sparling Name: 1Y7 Location: Electrical Closet 104A Serves: 1st floor cardiac /MRI area 1 3 5 7$ 9$ 11$ 13$ 15 17 19 21 23 Rev Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked t Project File: L. \omh \pnl sch \OMH.PNL Notes: Load Type Lighting Recept Equip ShPnl3ph.rpt MRI TI Porject Description Recept Gym Recept PFT Recept Recept MRI Equipment Room Recept MRI Room Lighting DC Ltg system MRI room Recept MRI Control Room Space Space Space Space Space 11) MRI TI Project Conn KVA 1.03 5.36 0.50 6.89 19 Amps 120/208V NEC Demand Factor x 100% 10 KVA @100% rest@50% x 100% Load CB 0.18 20/1 0.18 20/1 0.18 20/1 0.54 20/1 1 0.18 20/1 1 1.03 20/1 1 0.54 20/1 1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 1 0/1 Connected KVA 30 4W 100A Main 03 Surface Mounted Feed Thru Lugs 1 OA 1 1 1.51 ABC CB 20/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 OB 1 OC 0.36 1 1.21 1 Demand KVA 1.03 5.36 0.50 6.89 Demand Amps 3 15 1 19 Load 0.25 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Description Equip Fire Alarm Panel Space Space Space Space Space Span Space Space Space Space Space G GFCI S Shunt Trip D= Switching Duty A AFCI NEC Feeder Factors x 125% x 100% x 100% Circuit Breaker Code H= HID Rated C HACR Rated see note Panel Type: Panelboard 10,000 AIC Deep 1 NEC Feed Amps 4 15 1 20 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 APPENDIX 1 Sparling Name: 4BN1 Location: Electrical Room B008 Serves: Lighting Sr mech. Basement Description 1 Lighting Basement 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 Rev Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked t Project File: L. \omh \pnl sch \OMH.PNL Notes: {1) MRI TI Project Load Type Conn KVA Lighting 6.20 Mech 18.00 24.20 29 Amps ShPnl3ph.rpt MRI TI Porject Lighting Corridor Spare Spare Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space 277/480V NEC Demand Factor x 100% x 100% Load 3.10 3.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 30 4W CB 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Connected KVA OA 910 125A Main lugs only Surface Mounted Single Lugs ABC CB I Load 20/3 24.20 29 1 40/3 11 20/3 1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 OB 1 OC 910 1 6.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Description Mech UH -1 UH -1 UH -1 Mech Chiller Mech Condenser Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Circuit Breaker Code G GFCI H= HID Rated S Shunt Trip C HACR Rated D= Switching Duty see note A AFCI Panel Type: Panelboard 25,000 AIC Deep Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 6.20 7 x 125% 9 18.00 22 125% of Largest 24 34 2 4 6 8f 10$ 12$ 14$ 16$ 18$ 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 APPENDIX 1 Sparlint, Name: 41N1 Location: Serves: 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 Elec. Rm 138 Lighting mechancial Description Equip Entry espresso, corr, lobby Lighting Waiting, Hall, corridore Lighting Gym, dining, edu, shell, Lighting Hall, dining Mech Exhaust Fan (existing) Exhaust Fan (existing) Exhaust Fan (existing) Spare Spare Spare Spare Space Space Space Space Rev Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked j' Project File: L. \omh \pnl sch \OMH.PNL Notes: Load Type Lighting Equip Kitchen Mech ShPnl3ph.rpt MRI TI Porject 277/480V 'Load Y I No work required. Schedule included for reference only Conn KVA 7.33 3.77 4.02 4.88 20.00 24 Amps NEC Demand Factor x 100% x 100% Up to 65% per 220 -56 x 100% 30 CB 3.77 20/1 2.04 20/1 2.70 20/1 2.09 20/1 1.33 20/3 1.33 1.33 0.00 20/1 0.00 20/1 0.00 20/1 0.00 20/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 1 0A Connected KVA f 9.33 4W 125A Main lugs only Surface Mounted Single Lugs A B C Demand KVA 7.33 3.77 4.02 4.88 20.00 CB 20/1 20/3 20/3 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 OB 1 0C 5.01 1 5.67 Demand Amps 9 5 5 6 24 Load 0.50 0.30 0.30 0.30 1.34 1.34 1.34 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 0.00' 0.00' 0.00 Description Lighting Exterior Mech FCU -1 FCU -1 FCU -1 Kitchen Scrap Master -Scrap Master Scrap Master Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space G GFCI S Shunt Trip D= Switching Duty A AFCI NEC Feeder Factors x 125% x 100% x 100% 125% of Largest Circuit Breaker Code H= HID Rated C HACR Rated see note Panel Type: Panelboard 22,000 AIC Deep 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 NEC Feed Amps 11 5 5 7 27 APPENDIX 1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 Sparling Name: 4BY1 Location: Serves: Electrical Rm B0008 Lighting medical systems Description Panel 41Y2 --41Y2 11Y2 Mech Medical Vacuum Pump Medical Vacuum Pump Medical Vacuum Pump Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Rev Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked t Project File: L. \omh \pnl sch \OMH.PNL Notes: No work required. Schedule included for reference only 277/480V 30 4W Load CB 2.59 100/3 2.24 0.00 1.66 15/3 1.66 1.66 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 0.00 0/1 Connected KVA Panel 200A Main Lugs only Type: Panelboard Surface Mounted 25,000 AIC Feed Thru Lugs Deep A B C CB Load Description 40/3 3.27 Panel 1Y7 2 1.69 1Y7 4 1.93 1Y7 6 0/1 0.00 Space 8 0/1 0.00 Space 10 0/1 0.00 Space 12 0/1 0.00 Space 14 0 1 0.00 Space 16 0/1 0.00 Space 18 0/1 0.00 Space 20 0/1 0.00 Space 22 0/1 0.00 Space 24 0/1 0.00 Space 26 0/1 0.00 Space 28 0 1 0.00 Space 30 0/1 0.00 Space 32 0/1 0.00 Space 34 0/1 0.00 Space 36 0/1 0.00 Space 38 0/1 0.00 Space 40 0/1 0.00 Space 42 0A 1 0B 1 0C Circuit Breaker Code G GFCI H= HID Rated 7.52 1 5.59 1 3.59 S Shunt Trip C HACR Rated D= Switching Duty see note A AFCI Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps Lighting 5.85 x 100% 5.85 7 x 125% 9 Recept 5.36 10 KVA 100% rest 50% 5.36 6 x 100% 6 Equip 0.50 x 100% 0.50 1 x 100% 1 Mech 4.99 x 100% 4.99 6 125% of Largest 8 16.70 20 Amps 16.70 20 23 ShPnl3ph.rpt MRI TI Porject APPENDIX 1 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI Date: November 8, 2007 NOTICE TO ALL CONTRACTORS. SUBCONTRACTORS. AND SUPPLIERS This addendum is considered a part of the Bid Package for Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI, dated October 8, 2007 NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS. CHANGE ALL REFERENCE TO THE BID OPENING DATE TO NOVEMBER 13, 2007 ALL REFERENCES TO THE TIME AND PLACE FOR THE RECEIPT OF BIDS REMAINS UNCHANGED. VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL Section Description 09510 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT ATTACHMENTS From the Office of: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS 71 Columbia Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98104 Add Section 09510 Acoustical Treatment in its entirety Section 09510 Acoustical Treatment' (4 pages) SECTION 00903 PAGE 1 OF 1 ADDENDUM 3 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 USE OF DOCUMENTS 1.2 REFERENCES A. A list of standards is located in Section 01091 Reference Standards. 1.3 DESCRIPTION SECTION 09510 PAGE 1 of 4 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT ADDENDUM 3 0 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Divisions 0 and 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. A. Provide materials, labor equipment, inspection, coordination, and supervision necessary for the best and most complete installation per industry standards of acoustical ceilings as indicated in this specification and on the project drawings. B. Section includes acoustical ceiling panels C. Suspension systems for work in this Section are specified in Section 09120 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Shop Drawmgs 1 Submit complete shop drawings showing reflected ceiling plans designating tile patterns, suspension systems and details, and electrical and mechanical items. 2. Subcontractor for the acoustical systems shall coordinate with electrical and mechanical subcontractors for proper and approved location of lighting fixtures, air grilles, sprn lders, and other ceiling items installed in these systems and with other subcontractors for work installed in or on ceilings. Include all above work on shop drawings. C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of acoustic material specified as directed. Obtain Architect's approval before proceeding. D Materials for Maintenance: Furnish additional 4 percent of total amount of each type of panel and tile, packaged and marked for identification. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General. Comply with Section 01400 Quality Control. B. Regulations: Conform to requirements for fmishes, Washington State Health Department. C. Single Responsibility. Subcontract Section 09120, Ceiling Suspension Systems, to the installer of acoustical treatment specified in this section to achieve undivided responsibility for specified performance of all components. D Acceptable Acoustical Subcontractor Approved by manufacturer of the acoustic materials. E. Standard Specifications: 1 Conform to requirements for finishes, Washington State Health Department. 2. Refer to Bulletin, "Performance Data, Architectural Acoustical Materials," Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association (AIMA), 205 West Touhy Avenue, Park Ridge, Illinois 60068, current edition, for a. Tables indicating types of acoustic materials MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI b Types of mounting c. Noise reduction coefficient (NRC) ASTM C423 of specified thickness of materials on types of mountmg shown on drawings d. Flame resistance, flamespread, and fire endurance time ratings, ASTM E84 e. Sound attenuation factors and ceiling sound transmission class (STC) for Mounting No. 7 f. Methods of installation g. Seismic bracing F Light Reflectance: Not less than 0 75 (AIMA value "a per ASTM C523 approved tests. G Size, Thickness, NRC Sizes of tiles or panels are manufacturer's standard, unless noted otherwise. Specified thickness or noise reduction coefficient is minimum. Provide acoustic panels to suit suspension systems indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01610, Delivery Storage, and Handling. B Deliver acoustical panels and tiles in manufacturer's original unopened packages, fully identified with type, finish, performance data, and compliance labels. Handle and store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify conditions at site affecting work to ensure the best and most complete installation per industry standards. B Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until work in the space has been completed and until work above ceilings has been completed and until ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for fmal occupancy 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Comply with Section 01310, Progress Schedule. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Comply with Section 01745 Warranty Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (AP) 1, 2, 3, 4 AND 6 A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1 Armstrong Corp. 2. Celotex Corp 3 U.S Gypsum 4 Gage Ceilings 5 Johns- Manville 6 Others as approved by Addenda only SECTION 09510 PAGE 2 of 4 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT ADDENDUM 3 B Quality Standard Product: The products are herein, unless indicated otherwise, to establish quality standard. Product and manufacturer must be acceptable to Owner MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI C. Acoustical Panels 1 AP 1 2 x 2 Lay -In Panel. Armstrong Cortega, 15/16 angled tegular item #704 2. AP 2. 2 x 2 Moisture Resistant Lay -In Panel. Clean Room Mylar 15/16 item #1715 D Miscellaneous Materials. Fixture Trim. Where recessed fixtures exposed edges of acoustic treatment, provide plastic fixture trim. PART 3 EXECUJTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Determine that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer Starting of the work will be construed as acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION SECTION 09510 PAGE 3 of 4 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT ADDENDUM 3 A. Prepare substrates and connecting work to enable the best and most complete installation per industry standards of the work of this section. 33 INSTALLATION A. General 1 Standards: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and other recommendations applicable to the work. 2. Layout a. Balance border areas to avoid units of less than 1/2 unit width wherever possible. Whenever ceiling area is a multiple of full- size acoustic units used in the work, balance alignment to be square and true and install only full size units for entire ceiling including borders. b. Run directionally textured or patterned units in direction shown or as directed. c. Run joints between adjacent units parallel to room axis in both directions, unless otherwise shown. B. Suspended Acoustic Panels, Exposed Grid System 1 Install square edge panels to rest on flanges of grid tees with border units supported by moldings. 2. Install rabbet edge panels to rest on flanges of grid tees with panel edges forming reveal of uniform width and depth at grid members. Field cut edges of border units square and support on moldings. C. Custom installation. 1 Field trim ceiling panels with recessed edge matching factory edge, using manufacturer's tool for the purpose. 2. Coordinate location of grid member centered on face of casework closure panels that extend to underside of ceiling. Install this additional T square to grid. Install square -edge panel at concealed ceiling behind casework panel. Coordmate with Section 06402. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 01400 Quality Control. B Provide experienced supervision of all elements of the work of this Section. MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION SECTION 09510 PAGE 4 of 4 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT ADDENDUM 3 A. Comply with Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and Section 01710, Final Cleaning. B Clean exposed surfaces of acoustic units and any exposed systems, complying with manufacturer's instructions. Remove and replace units and members which are damaged or cannot be cleaned. C The installer shall advise the Contractor of minimum temperature and maximum humidity limitations and other procedures required for protection of acoustic ceilings from damage or deterioration until acceptance of the work. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. General: Provide acoustical treatment as indicated on project drawings Room Finish Schedule and this section. B. Acoustic Panels: Replace existing tiles damaged as a result of the work. Replacement tiles to match existing. Where existing tiles are replaced due to damage as a result of the work, Contractor shall relocate existing and install new tiles as required to maintain color and appearance through definable areas of the work as approved by the Architect. END OF SECTION 09510 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: NOVEMBER 8, 2007 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI Date: November 6, 2007 NOTICE TO ALL CONTRACTORS. SUBCONTRACTORS. AND SUPPLIERS This addendum is considered a part of the Bid Package for Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI, dated October 8, 2007 NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS: CHANGE ALL REFERENCE TO THE BID OPENING DATE TO NOVEMBER 13, 2007 ALL REFERENCES TO THE TIME AND PLACE FOR THE RECEIPT OF BIDS REMAINS UNCHANGED. NOTE TO ALL BIDDERS: THE FOLLOWING IS A RESPONSE TO DISCUSSION ITEM A.1 OF THE PRE BID SITE MEETING MINUTES OF OCTOBER 25, 2007 WITH REGARD TO THE LANDSCAPE AREAS OUTSIDE THE MRI ROOM AND THE CHILLER CONDENSER UNIT PAD. PORTIONS OF THE SAID LANDSCAPED AREAS WILL REMOVE BY OTHERS. OUTSIDE THE MRI ROOM AND EXTERIOR WINDOW THE CONTRACTOR WILL HAVE A 16' X 12 AREA DEDICATED FOR CONTRACTORS ACCESS TO THE MRI ROOM AND STAGING AREA FOR THE MRI EQUIPMENT UPON DELIVERY TO THE SITE. THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROTECTING ALL EXISTING LANDSCAPING OUTSIDE THE IMPACTED CONSTRUCTION AREAS UNTIL ALL WORK IS COMPLETED SEE ATTACHMENT VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL Section Description 00301 -II BID FORM PART II VOLUME 2 PROJECT DRAWINGS Sheet Description A2.2.1 BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN From the Office of: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS 71 Columbia Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98104 Paragraph 3, page 4 of 5. Chaim construction cost value from $2,500,000 to $1,000,000.00 Re -issue 00301 -II, Bid Form Part II in its entirety 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Paragraph 2.6A.1., Plastic Vapor Retarders Add to list of acceptable products: e. Viper VaporCheck 10 and/or 16. SECTION 00902 PAGE 1 OF 1 ADDENDUM 2 Drawing #1, Basement Floor Plan Revise Change the location of the chiller and condenser equipment pad to the west. Delete all references to 02821 6' high chain -link fence with locking 6' -0' gate. Add Note: 09900 Paint existing exposed concrete and exposed waterproofing to match the MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI ATTACHMENTS SECTION 00902 PAGE 2 OF 1 ADDENDUM 2 existing building color The new painted area is to be horizontally level and straight rather than following the slope of the waterproofing per the slope of the grade. Detail #2, Concrete Equipment Pad Detail at Curb Delete and replace entire detail with revised Detail #2, 6' Retaining Wall at Equipment Pad. See attachment. Detail #3, Concrete Equipment Pad Detail at Curb Delete and replace detail with revised Detail #3 Concrete Equipment Pad Edge Detail. See attachment. Section 00301 -II, `Bid Form Part II' (5 pages) ASK- A2.2.1 -01 Basement Floor Plan `Revised Location of Chiller Condenser Unit' ASK A2.2.1 -02, Basement Floor Plan `6' Retaining Wall at Equipment Pad' ASK A2.2.1 -03 Basement Floor Plan `Concrete Equipment Pad Edge Detail' ASK -04 Partial Existing Landscape Plan `Contractors Access to MRI Room Staging area' Mechanical Addendum 2 prepared by Coffman Engineers (2 page) Electrical Addendum 2 prepared by Sparling (5 pages) MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI SECTION 00301-11 PAGE 1 of 5 BID FORM PART II ADDENDUM 2 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 INCORPORATION A. The Bidder's Qualification Form, four (4) pages, is incorporated hereafter as part of the contract documents and shall be included as Bid Form Part II. Initials of Bidder's Representative MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI Date: BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM The following information must be submitted within one hour of the submittal of Bid Form Part I, naming intended mechanical and electrical subcontractor and other subcontractors indicated, including qualifications of the general contractor mechanical, electrical, and other subcontractors listed. (Attach continuation sheets if required.) Name of General Contractor from Bid Form Part I. Address: Phone and Fax Numbers: Sienatures (must be the same as those of Bid Form Part I) (Date) (Signature) (Title) SECTION 00301 -II PAGE 2 of 5 BID FORM PART II ADDENDUM 2 (Legal name of person, corporation, or firm submitting bid) (State Contractor' s License Number) (Seal. If bid is by a corporation, signature must be as required in section 00100 Instructions to Bidders.) 1 General Contractor A. Type of organization. Individual Partnership Corporation Name owners of 5% or greater Ownership interest: B Years in business under present firm name: Names and years in business of predecessor firms: C Firm s Bonding Company Period of time the bonding company has bonded for the Firm (or predecessor firms), the name of any preceding bonding company and the years such bonding was provided, and the name, address and telephone number for the principal contact for each bonding company for the Firm for the ten years preceding the date of the Form. (Attach continuation sheet if required.) Initials of Bidder's Representative MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI D Firm s Principal Bank: Branch: Years: E. Has your firm ever failed to complete any work awarded? If yes attach a brief description and explanation. SECTION 00301 -II PAGE 3 of 5 BID FORM PART II ADDENDUM 2 F Has any officer or partner or owner of your firm ever failed to complete a contract handled in his/her own name? If so, state name of individual, contract not completed, and description of the circumstances: (Attach continuation sheet if required.) G. List projects your organization has completed in the five years preceding the date of the documents: Contract Date Name and Address of Amount Class of Work Completed Owner or Contracting Agent (Attach continuation sheet if required) H. List all medical, hospital, or similar work completed in the five years preceding the date of the form: Contract Date Name and Address of Amount Class of Work Completed Owner or Contracting Agent (Attach continuation sheet if required) I. List any projects in the last five years your organization has not completed within the time specified in the contract, and an explanation of why the projects were not completed within the time specified in the contract: (Attach continuation sheet if required) J List any projects the Finn has committed to construct as of the date of the form: Contract Name and Address of Amount Class of Work Completed Owner or Contracting Agent (Attach continuation sheet if required) Initials of Bidder's Representative MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI K. List any projects which resulted in substantial and/or a mediation, arbitration, or litigation subcontractors: Contract Date Amount Class of Work Completed (Attach continuation sheet if required) L. Identify your full -time superintendent scheduled for this project: (provide resume) SECTION 00301 -II PAGE 4 of 5 BID FORM PART II ADDENDUM 2 dispute with the Owner or contracting agent; with the Owner contracting agent or any Name and Address of Owner or Contracting Anent 2. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning, Plumbing, and Electrical Subcontractors: A. List here the names of the subcontractors with whom the Bidder if awarded the contract, intends to subcontract for performance of the work of heating, ventilation and air conditioning, plumbing (as described in chapter 18.106 RCW) and electrical (as described in chapter 19.28 RCW), or to name itself for the work. Work to be Performed Subcontractors Name Electrical Plumbing HVAC 3 In order for this bid to be considered responsive, the general contractor electrical, and mechanical contractors, must have successfully completed at least one (1) healthcare contract in the last five (5) years which involved new construction, interior demolition and construction alterations while the facility remained in operation, and had a construction cost of at least $1,000,000.00. A. GENERAL CONTRACTOR Contract Name and Address of Amount Tyne of Work Owner or Contracting Anent Initials of Bidder's Representative MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI B ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR C. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR END OF SECTION 00301 II SECTION 00301 -II PAGE 5 of 5 BID FORM PART II ADDENDUM 2 Contract Name and Address of Amount Tyne of Work Owner and Contracting Agent Contract Name and Address of Amount Tvoe of Work Owner and Contracting Agent 2007 Mahlum Architects Issue Date: NOVEMBER 6, 2007 Initials of Bidder's Representative SAW CUT REM6VE EXISTING CURB FLW WITH EXISTING GRAVEL ;TRICAL :XIST fl— 9 ItJE N TRANSFORM feL F,JTURE CHILLER 7 MI 0 COOLED t it 11 /l `3h r i 09900 PAINT POSED CC NC EXPOSED WATERPROOFING TO MATCH EXISTING BUILING COLOR L EA OF ILK BOILER ROM B012 I RELOCATED EXISTING CHILLER CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD LOPED Y4" PER FT TO GRAVELOREN END 81) OPEN OFFICEI I B010 I 4H 4 10 ea�b h L i i AIR C CON DENSING UNIi REF SHEET M3.0 81 I FE MRI ABO (SLAB ON PRADE) 4k, IV L 1 -6 18 TO 3" CL1, IYP u o 73 1 1- m 1 1 1 1 Z p I 11 1 W I�� I j J-I I� z 0 0 r r 0 I l M to C o v O X Z rn rn m M --I III I I H m 0) v 5 1 /2" m i v 0 M A H L U M OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PORT ANGELES, WASHINGTON DETUSHT 02/A2.2.1 REF ADDENDUM #2 PROJECT NO 2007517.00 DATE: 1110612007 ASK-A2.2 1-02 2' -6" #4 X 10" AT 12" 0 C W W M 6X6-W1 4XW1 4, BEND DOWN 6" AT EDGE 4 1 1/2' 1 -0' II I II I I II I II III NOTE. REFERENCE DWG SHEET S6 1 NEW REINFORCED CONC SLAB SLOPE TO DRAIN 1/4" PER FT TO EXISTING GRAVEL op 4. LiP f PLANTER WALL EXISITING GRAVEL #4 DOWLS, 4" MIN EMBED EXISITING CONCRETE CONCRETE EQU PMENT PAD EDGE DETAIL M A li L U M OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI PORT ANGELES WASHINGTON DETLISHT 04 REF ADDENDUM #2 PROJECT NO 2007517.00 DATE. 11/0.6/2007 ASK -04 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI Date: November 6, 2007 From the Office of: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS 71 Columbia Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98104 NOTICE TO ALL CONTRACTORS. SUBCONTRACTORS. AND SUPPLIERS This addendum is considered a part of the Bid Package for Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI, dated October 8, 2007 NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS. CHANGE ALL REFERENCE TO THE BID OPENING DATE TO NOVEMBER 13, 2007 ALL REFERENCES TO THE TIME AND PLACE FOR THE RECEIPT OF BIDS REMAINS UNCHANGED. VOLUME 1 Section 15900 VOLUME 2 Sheet M3.0 ATTACHMENTS PROJECT MANUAL Description INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS SECTION 00902 PAGE 1 OF 1 ADDENDUM 2 Paragraph 1.4, Approved Manufacturers, page 1 of 9 Add the following Siemens contact information to the end of the paragraph. George Pheiffer (425) 507 -4303 or Dave Simpson; (253) 381 1527 PROJECT DRAWINGS Description BASEMENT PLUMBING/PIPING PLAN Revise Change the location of the chiller and condenser equipment pad to the west. Reroute Plumbing and Pining into the corridor and then exit the building and route along outside face of building to the relocated chiller and condenser Modify Kev Note 1 to reflect piping change along the face of building wall. Mechanical Sketch MSK -01 Revision 1 Basement Plumbing/Piping Plan CY rION 1 -1 /4 "CHWS CHWR VALVE CAPPED FOR FUTURE CHILLER AT THIS LOCATION 1 /2 "CW FILL 1 BIBB W/ VAC AND DRAIN V CORNER OF B �J AST HEAT TRACE INSULATE ALL CW AND i do CHWR PIPING AN VALVE; INSIDE OUTSID BUILDING. 2 "W UP 3 "W UP 7 4'W UP N O ROUTE PI AGAINST 1 20' -0" x 12' -0" �T.u, n�.ull.t i CTRETE EQUIPMENT AD BY G.C. SLOP PAD AWAY FROM -SUI NG !k NE HOSE UM BREAKER VEAT ING TIGHT ALL RELOCATEC EXISTING CHILLER FUTU CHILLERr 158 SF ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT ROOM 1 13013 I 99 SF 4'RD Li CURB L .7 1 TX Str 'R H- -r ONG HALL BE WS. CORE DRILL (TYPICAL) SEAL WEATHER TIGHT HIM OPEN OFFICE 1 8010 1 4T9 SF (2) 5/8" UQUID REFRIGERANT UNES f� 1 LP 41 TRANSFORMER SWITCHBOARD v 1 8008 I r .-1 /'7 'IA/ AIR COOLED CONDENSING AIR COOLED CONDENSIN I 1 "W UP I I 'V UP ��2 "W UP —1 "CHWS dt CHWR UP 497 S —1 "CW UP 1 /2 "CW UP 1 -1/4" CHWS "I .wn I in AREA OF WORK KEYED NOTES 0 CONCRETE SLAB SHALL BE MINIMUM 6" THICK. REINFORCEMENT OF SLAB SHALL CONSIST OF #4 REBAR 0 14. O.C. EACH WAY AT MID DEPTH OF SLAB. REFER TO STRUCTURAL SECTION 2/S1 1 FOR TYPICAL SLAB —ON —GRADE CONSTRUCTION DETAILS. 02 MODIFY /REROUTE EXISTING UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION PIPING AND SPRINKLERS AS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW EQUIPMENT PAD. O PIPING SHOWN IS DIAGRAMMATIC. ROUTE AND INSTALL PIPING IN A NEAT AND ORDERLY STACKED FASHION AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE ALONG THE FACE OF THE BUILDING STRUCTURE TYPICAL O4 CHILLER TO BE RELOCATED IS LOCATED OFF CAMPUS 18 MILES EAST AT EDICAL PLAZA 7 t. AVE. 1 E; OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE FOR EXACT LOCATION AND TE REMOVAL AND TRANSPORTATION ACCORDINGLY Al 8 8 8 A COFFMAN N G I N E E R S 1601 Fifth Avenue Suite 900 Seattle, Washington 98101 -1625 Phone 206.623.0717 Fax 206.624.3775 ADDENDUM 2 RHL Date: 11/06/07 Project No: 07322 Reference Sheet: M3.0 Drawing No: MSK -01 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI Date: November 6, 2007 NOTICE TO ALL CONTRACTORS. SUBCONTRACTORS. AND SUPPLIERS This addendum is considered a part of the Bid Package for Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI, dated October 8, 2007 NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS. CHANGE ALL REFERENCE TO THE BID OPENING DATE TO NOVEMBER 13, 2007 ALL REFERENCES TO THE TIME AND PLACE FOR THE RECEIPT OF BIDS REMAINS UNCHANGED. VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL Section Description REVISED PANEL SCHEDULE PANEL BN2 VOLUME 2 PROJECT DRAWINGS From the Office of: SPARLING 710 Olive Way Suite 1400 Seattle, WA 98101 Sheet Description ESK 1 MODIFICATION FOR E0.1 BASEMENT PLAN ESK 2 MODIFICATION FOR E0.2 FIRST FLOOR PLAN ESK 3 MODIFICATION FOR E2.0 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULE ATTACHMENTS END OF SECTION 00902 SECTION 00901 PAGE 1 OF 1 ADDENDUM 2 0 SPARLING Issue Date: NOVEMBER 06, 2007 Sparling Name: BN2 Location: Serves: 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 Description Recept Offices <Multi> Offices Recept Offices Equip Office furniture Equip Office furniture Recept transcript Recept transcript /records Recept transcript /records, printer Recept records copier Recept cooridor, boiler rm, elev swbd rm Recept swbd, toilet, corridor Recept basement Recept basement Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Space Rev Addendum 2 11/5/2007 Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked f Project File: L. \omh \pnl sch \OMH.PNL Notes: {1} ASI -007 12} Provide new 20A /1P Circuit Breaker Load Type Corot KV A em Factor Recept Equip Mech ShPnl3ph.rpt MRI TI Porject 9.24 10 KVA 100% rest Q 50% 12.00 x 100% 3.70 x 100% 24.94 69 Amps 120/208V 30 4W 100A Main lugs only Surface Mounted Single Lugs ABC ICB 1 20/1 1 20/2 I Load 0.72 1.22 0.72 1.00 10.00 0.72 0.72 1.20 1.20 0.90 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 CB 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Connected KVA 0/1 0.00T pace 0/1 0.00 Space 0/1 0.00 Space 0/1 0.00 Space 0/1 0.00 Space 0/1 0.00 Space 0/1 0.00 Space 0/1 0.00 Space 0/1 0.00 Space 0/1 0.00 Space 0/1 0.00 Space 0/1 0.00 Space 0/1 0.00 Space 0/1 0.00 Space 0/1 0.00 Space 0/1 0.00 Space 0B 10C 5 46 1 14.72 1 4.76 0A 1 Demand KVA 9.24 12.00 3.70 I _120/1 �G J 20 /t Zi Demand Amps 26 33 10 24.94 69 Panel Type: Panelboard 10,000 AIC Deep Load I Description 0.90 I Mech AC 1 1.40 I Mech CU -1 1.40 1 CU -1 0.50 E ur Ieat 0.18 1 Recept Chiller Room {2} r G GFCI S Shunt Trip D= Switching Duty A AFCI NEC Feeder Factors x 100% x100% 125% of Largest Circuit Breaker Code H= HID Rated C HACR Rated see note 71 2 4 6 8$ 10$ 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 NEC Feed Amps 26 33 12 APPENDIX 1 0 4 Drawing Title Project I I EXIST I 1 TRANSFORM T4 AND T5 8 16 EXIST I (E) BOILER 1 2 DISCONNECT SWITCH Sparling Project No. 814458 T -2Z (BELOW PANELS) BASEMENT KEY PLAN SCALE. AS INDICATED tiI 32 feet J x�S PAPL:N G ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING 1 TECHNOLOGY CONSULTING BASEMENT KEY PLAN OMC TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 1 720 Olive Way Suite 1400 Seattle, Washington 98101 -1853 206 667 -0555 800 667 -0610 Fax. 206- 667 -0554 www.sparling.com —N1 T1 Y7 AND T —ELX MOUNTED ABOVE 1000/3 DISC SW. I .I Reference Dwg No EO.1 Scale AS INDICATED Drawn By JSM Checked By LS Date 11/05/07 Sketch No ESK -1 Page 1 of 1 R Drawing Title Project 7 FIRST FLOOR KEY PLAN SCALE. AS INDICATED 0 4 8 16 24 1.1'1.1•1 1 as indicated feet G ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING 1 TECHNOLOGY CONSULTING Sparling Project No. 814458 BASEMENT KEY PLAN OMC TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI 720 Olive Way Suite 1400 Seattle, Washington 98101 -1853 206 667 -0555 800 667 -0610 Fax. 206 667 -0554 www.sparling.com Reference Dwg No E Scale AS INDICATED Drawn By JSM Checked By LS Date 11 /05/07 Sketch No. ESK -2 Page 1 of 1 ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY DC LIGHTING RF EXHAUST FAN SWITCH RF EXHAUST FAN SWITCH EMERGENCY OFF BOTTON EMERGENCY OFF BOTTON MAIN DISCONNECT BLOWER BOX MAGNET MONITOR RFS CABINET HFD /PDU CABINET BOX RF PENETRATION PANEL ELECTRICAL LEGEND HARDWARE (BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR) 1 DC LIGHTING CONTROLLER TO BE FURNISHED BY LINDGREN AND INSTALLED BY DIV 16. n A A d■ n N StrittnePte N ete RF DOOR SWITCH RATED FOR 24 VOLTS AND 750 MILLIAMPERES, NORMALLY OPEN (OFF) WHEN DOOR IS OPEN 1 COVERPLATE 1 SINGLE GANG BOX 1 SINGLE POLE SWITCH 1 COVERPLATE 1 SINGLE GANG BOX 1 SINGLE POLE SWITCH 1 SINGLE GANG BOX 1 SINGLE GANG BOX 1 100" OF GROMMET MATERIAL FOR (2) 18" x 6" OPENING IN ACCESS FLOOR MAGNET ROOM LIGHTS 1 LOCKNUT 1 BOX AS REQUIRED InlrAMnccrcnrr I Ir_ur rIVT IP REMARKS e ELEC -55 ELEC -55 ELEC -16 ELEC -16 1 28" OF GROMMET MATERIAL FOR ON 10" x 4 OPENING IN ACCESS FLOOR ELEC -10 MAGNET RUNDOWN UNIT 1 COVERPLATE ELEC -8 1 4 x 4 x 4 BOX 1 1 0 CHASE NIPPLE SHIELD COOLER CABINET 1 32" OF GROMMET MATERIAL FOR AN 8" x 8" OPENING IN ACCESS FLOOR ELEC -10 OPERATOR WORKSPACE 1 SPLIT COVERPLATE ELEC -7 1 3 1/2 "0 CHASE NIPPLE 1 12 "x8 "x6 "BOX PATIENT ALERT CONTROL 1 SAME ROUTING AS OW A 1 3 -POLE 480V DEVICE IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE. GEMS CAT #E4503SP TWO ELEC -10, 57 AND 140 PUSHBUTTONS AND COVER INCLUDED. 1 12" GROMMET MATERIAL FOR OPENING IN DUCT OR ACCESS FLOOR 1 40" OF GROMMET MATERIAL FOR A 12" x 8" OPENING IN ACCESS FLOOR ELEC -10 1 FITTINGS AS REQUIRED ELEC -78 1 SPLIT COVERPLATE ELEC -10 AND 139 1 2 1/2 "0 CHASE NIPPLE 1 12" x 12" x 6" BOX 1 52" OF GROMMET MATERIAL FOR A 16" x 10" OPENING IN ACCESS FLOOR MAGNET 1 66" OF GROMMET MATERIAL FOR A 24" x 9" OPENING IN ACCESS FLOOR ELEC -10 ELEC -10 AND 52 O D (n 1*•■ M W J Y O W 0 T CO m v o c w 4 CP 0 0 0 v Y (L Z J T w EE 0 0 (1 (n MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL Section Description 00001 INTRODUCTION ATTACHMENTS From the Office of: MAHLUM ARCHITECTS 71 Columbia Suite 400 Seattle, WA 98104 SECTION 00901 PAGE 1 OF 1 ADDENDUM 1 Date: October 26, 2007 NOTICE TO ALL CONTRACTORS. SUBCONTRACTORS. AND SUPPLIERS This addendum is considered a part of the Bid Package for Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI, dated October 8, 2007 NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS: CHANGE ALL REFERENCE TO THE BID OPENING DATE TO NOVEMBER 13, 2007 ALL REFERENCES TO THE TIME AND PLACE FOR THE RECEIPT OF BIDS REMAINS UNCHANGED. V" Paragraph 3 4A, Structural Engineer ,Correction change address to 1200 6th Avenue, Suite 1620, Seattle, WA 98101 00100 INVITATION FOR BID Change all reference to the Bid Opening Date of 6 day of November 2007 as follows: Part I Price Proposals will be received on or before 13 day of November, 2007 at V I 2:00 p.m. Part II Subcontractors listing must be received on or before 3:00 p.m. on the 13 day of November, 2007 Last paragraph of page 1 of 3 Change reference to Bid Opening date of November 6, O 2007 to November 13, 2007 L� 09250 GYPSUM BOARD Paragraph 2.1A.1 Steel Framing and Furring: 3 Add the following item to the list of acceptable Manufacturers: Item h. SCAFFCO Steel Stud Manufacturing Co. 7 Addendum 1 From the Office of: Spading, dated October 26, 2007 (1 page) S Pre -Bid Meeting and Project Walk -Thru Minutes, dated October 25 2007 (2 pages) Pre -Bid Meeting and Project Walk Thru Attendees List, Tuesday October 23, 2007 (1 page) C l 3 MAHLUM ARCHITECTS OLYMPIC MEDICAL CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT MRI VOLUME 1 PROJECT MANUAL Section Description 16501 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE Approved substitutions: From the Office of: SPARLING 720 Olive Way Suite 1400 Seattle, WA 98101 Pacific Lighting Fixture tvoe Manufacture Series A4 Ametrix C -Scroll Lighting Group North West Fixture tune Manufacture Series UC Vista MGT X1 Hubbell Sempra A3 Vantage A7INCAL SECTION 00901 PAGE 1 OF 1 ADDENDUM 1 Date: October 26, 2007 NOTICE TO ALL CONTRACTORS. SUBCONTRACTORS. AND SUPPLIERS This addendum is considered a part of the Bid Package for Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI, dated October 8, 2007 NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS. CHANGE ALL REFERENCE TO THE BID OPENING DATE TO NOVEMBER 13, 2007 ALL REFERENCES TO THE TIME AND PLACE FOR THE RECEIPT OF BIDS REMAINS UNCHANGED. PROJECT Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI DISCUSSION ITEMS: MEETING MINUTES PROJECT NO 2007517.00 DATE. October 25, 2007 SUBJECT Pre -Bid Site Meeting Walk Through FILE NO /BY MEETING DATE. October 23, 2007 TIME 10:00 AM PLACE. Olympic Medical Center, Main Lobby Area ATTENDEES See Pre -Bid Walk Through Meeting Sign -Up Sheet, Attached COPIES Distributed Via Addendum No. 1 The following represents the architect's understanding of discussions held and decisions reached in the meeting Anyone with amendments to these minutes should notify the author within five (5) days of the minutes date in order to amend as appropriate. A. The attendees met in the main hospital lobby for a brief introductory meeting before proceeding to the proposed MRI project area. The Architect summarized the project and the following is a list of questions that were addressed during the meeting: 1. Scott Bower of OMC. What are the plans for the planting within the landscaped areas outside the MRI and where the proposed mechanical chiller and condensing unit concrete pad? How much of the planting area outside the MRI will be used as the construction access and what is the scope of work for the planting (removal and temporary storage) since the landscaping is still under warranty? Response: To be addressed in a later Addendum. 2. Scott Bower of OMC. What is the elevation of the concrete pad for the mechanical chiller and condensing unit? This will determine the amount of excavation and the amount of retaining wall required. Response: To be addressed in a later Addendum. 3 Scott Bower of OMC. The existing irrigation control box is mounted on the west side of the concrete stairs and'nnay need to be relocated depending on the elevation of the concrete pad for the chiller /condensing unit. Response: To be addressed in a later Addendum. 5 Scott Bower of OMC. The specifications indicate the allowed hours of noisy work to be between 10:00 a.m. -2:00 p.m. This should be confirmed and may need to be changed to anytime after 6:00 p.m. Response: To be addressed in a later Addendum. 6. Scott Bower of OMC. Basement work need to address allowed hours of work in the Health Information Management Office. The office is open from 7:00 a.m. to 11.30 p.m. Response: To be addressed in a later Addendum. 7 Questions addressed by Contractors: Where is the contractor s Lay -down area, construction office trailer and contractor s access? Response: Contractor's construction trailer and lay -down area is located outside the northeast corner of OMC's parking lot that is currently occupied by previous contractor's containers. Contractor's access to the MRI will be from the existing window that will have to be removed for construction and reinstalled after the MRI equipment is delivered to the space. Scott Bower indicated that a house that is owned by OMC may be available to contractor for rent in lieu of a construction trailer 8. Questions addressed by Contractors: Allowable parking? Response by Scott Bower of OMC. Parking is a premium and Contractor parking is not allowed in the OMC's parking areas. Contractors will have to park on the street. 9 Questions addressed by Contractors: Roof warranty? Response by Scott Bower of OMC. The roof is still under warranty by Snyder Roofing, Contact: Dave Meyer (206) 730 -0264. 10. Estimated construction value: Response: Approximately $500,000.00 11. Pre -Bid Meeting and Project Walk -Thru Attendees List of Tuesday October 23, 2007 at 10:00 a.m. See attachment. Minutes by Stephen Matsudaira, Mahlum Architect, (206) 441 -4151. Attachment: Pre -Bid Meeting and Project Walk -Thru Attendees List of Tuesday October 23, 2007 a r c h i t e c t s PROJECT MEETING DATE. TIME LOCATION SUBJECT REPRESENTATIVE NAME Mahlum Architects 2007 A T T E N D E E L I S T Olympic Medical Center Tenant Improvement MRI Tuesday October 23, 2007 10:00 a.m., Olympic Medical Center, Room TBD Pre -Bid Meeting Project Site Walk -Thru 13 0,4 asp /9/04e 9a, 4, 360 '/37 .7616 NS6)) G �,-SG Orefitiemjth4ifd FIRM NAME PHONE /FAX M PROJECT NO• 2007517.00 917 71 7 0 )/40 wta 64,(, EP- Cr I.�,o b ?1L2.�G c� 1 eilliaSCP(cP9go 1 call /-ft1 lia z &5 3 LPJ4 L El rive r? eNce- LT) Li L/- th V g tf_!7crr -r FOB( .6..4 G r„. 76: 4 lI, oe/e, WA 98104 C O f Z' 1(' 671tr A 5 9/5 Krc)Ate,A7tAigg.--JA 71 L Le7-igk,eJ c r iot f,!'. `�ZS- 5 4, old �1�Je1 -Zf y,C ��/.Qh >LJ� �•i, Z r L L Ethit4 Columbi jr C 7 aa& 9 /U"T SUITE 400 "s7Y r -G T 1 ��lb� ��+t 1 Vv�4r Q•'J�,�+I�. �il�200 G01L1. r'� ti 441 0478 Ch,/,E 6, k i,- fl 7S4 y s7 ;3-11:11$ a lyM.te-c 1a Atr —(6G (i5t. E MAIL ADDRESS IsNc,...4 0 01. cy, vaam Form 102010/07 1231 NW Hoyt SUITE 102 Portland, OR 97209 503 224 4032 503 224.0918